Author: Webmaster

  • Jagannath’s Saligram: On Bruno Latour and Literary Critique After Postcoloniality

    Amit Ray
    Department of English, Rochester Institute of Technology
    axrgsl@rit.edu

    Evan Selinger
    Department of Philosophy, Rochester Institute of Technology
    emsgsh@rit.edu

    Abstract
     
    Bruno Latour has turned to Indian vernacular fiction to illustrate the limits of ideology critique. In examining the method of literary analysis that underlies his appropriation of postcolonial history and culture, we appeal to Edward Said’s notion of “traveling theory” in order to discuss critically the aesthetic as well as political stakes of using the technology of the modern novel for the allegorical purposes that Latour has in mind. We argue that Latourian analysis fails to uphold its own rigorous aspirations when it reduces complex literary and cultural representation to universal allegory.
     

    Introduction

     
    Even though Bruno Latour is renowned for appropriating anthropological resources to study Western technoscientific norms and practices, he has been criticized for ignoring colonial and postcolonial history.1 In light of such assessments, it appears significant that Latour has come to depict the failed actions of a fictional Westernized Brahmin named Jagannath as an allegory about the limits of ideology critique.2 We believe that a useful way to analyze Latour’s invocation of Jagannath is to contrast his approach to literature with the style of postcolonial criticism favored by such figures as Edward Said (and others).3 This juxtaposition can establish a framework for attending to topics whose import extends beyond Latour scholarship, notably: (1) assessing the epistemic implications of using literature to intervene into meta-philosophical debates about the limits of ideology critique and its underlying logic concerning fetishized objects and primitive beliefs, (2) discussing the political and aesthetic effects that can arise from using the technology of the modern novel for the allegorical purposes that Latour has in mind, and (3) suggesting better ways for Science and Technology Studies (henceforth, STS)4 to collaborate with Postcolonial Studies.5 Latour develops the concept of the “factish” in order to distinguish the limits of ideology critique.6 In his deployment of this term, he misses the opportunity to engage work in postcolonial studies that has questioned ideology critique by considering alternative and multiple modernities rather than a single monolithic regime.7 By examining how Latour’s interest in ideology critique brings him to Jagannath’s tale, we can argue for the relevance in his work of occluded literary and cultural detail. By doing so, we comment on Latourian analysis from a vantage point that resonates with the fuller implications of Said’s work, thereby positing a critical space for a dialogue between STS and postcolonial studies.
     

    Ideology Critique, Literature, and the Juggernaut of Reason

     
    Latour does not discuss ideology critique in order to enlarge its available definitions.8 Rather, he aims to uncover a discursive formation to which all modern critics have allegedly adhered, regardless of how they define ideology and its associated concepts. According to Latour, the “very precise mechanism” of this formation circumscribes uniformly the manner by which the varieties of modern criticism have tried to debunk their respective objects of religious and secular mystification. What Latour tries to establish, therefore, is nothing less than the “modernist’s psycho-social profile” (Pandora’s 276, 277).9
     
    As depicted within this framework, the primary goal of modern criticism has been to liberate the public from false beliefs. In the period traditionally referred to as “early modernity,” critics appealed to “transcendent” scientific facts in order to demystify religious convictions. Their goal was to demonstrate that religious experience untainted by politics does not exist; intuitions concerning “God” were asserted to be the result of social discipline that is imposed by groups that benefit from its deployment. In “late modernity,” however, critics shifted their focus. By appealing to the causal relations emanating from “society, discourse, knowledge-slash-power, fields of forces, empires, capitalism,” critics attempted to demystify the transcendent basis of scientific authority (Latour, “Why Has Critique” 229). In this transition between periods of modernity, scientists have gone from being the agents to the objects of critique,10 but their underlying discourse remains the same: normative guidance is legitimated by the critics’ appeal to “false consciousness” and to “hidden reality.”11
     
    In order to explain why the modern approach to criticism is problematic, Latour pursues a literary trajectory and analyzes Jagannath’s tale.12 Jagannath’s story appeared in the seventies, a time in which “Marxism was posing a real threat to democratic socialism because of a profound change in people’s attitudes to certain Gandhian notions about the self, society, and history” (Nagaraj vii). At the end of Pandora’s Hope, Latour appropriates Jagannathanth’s failure to liberate his village’s untouchables from the oppression of the caste system for didactic purposes. He claims that it illustrates the way ideology critique fails to accurately capture how, why, and when power is abused: ideology critique distorts how authority comes to be overly esteemed; ideology critique imputes “extravagant beliefs” to whatever group is taken to be oppressed; ideology critique leaves the group that it perceived to be oppressed without adequate grounds for liberation; ideology critique distorts the relation between critic and the object of criticism; and ideology critique accusatively “destroys a way of arguing.” Latour thus treats Jagannath as the personification of the modern critic’s deleterious influence on modern intellectual and political history. Jagannath’s activities are supposed to demonstrate that the modern critic fails to appreciate that an artifact only becomes a powerful idol after an iconoclast attempts to demystify it:
     

    Actually, as Jagannath’s move beautifully illustrates, it is the critical thinker who invents the notion of belief and manipulation and projects this notion upon a situation in which the fetish plays an entirely different role. Neither the aunt nor the priest ever considered the saligram as anything but a mere stone. Never. By making it into the powerful object that must be touched by the pariahs, Jagannath transubstantiates the stone into a monstrous thing–and transmutes himself into a cruel god . . . while the pariahs are transmogrified into “crawling beasts” and mere “things.” Contrary to what the critics always imagine, what horrifies the “natives” in the iconoclastic move is not the threatening gesture that would break their idols but the extravagant belief that the iconoclast imputes to them.
     

     

    The central point Latour conveys in this passage is that the modern iconoclast illegitimately dismisses diverse forms of social belief and practice by inventing a misleading concept, the “fetish.” The modernist’s conception of the fetish does not register relevant underlying social and political practices that exist apart from the condition of belief imputed to the native by the critic.13

     

    Placing Jagannath in Context

     
    Although we have thus far been discussing Latour’s invocation of Jagannath’s tale as an analysis of literary fiction, Latour never makes this identification explicitly.14 The bibliography at the end of Pandora’s Hope does not inform us of crucial features; its title, language, and author go unlisted. Furthermore, Latour introduces the reader to Jagannath as if he were familiarizing us with the actions of a real person:
     

    His name is Jagannath, and he has decided to break the spell of castes and untouchability by revealing to the pariahs that the sacred saligram, the powerful stone that protects his high-caste family, is nothing to be afraid of.
     

     

    As it turns out, Jaganath’s tale is extracted from the novel Bharathipura.15 Written in Kannada–one of the Dravidian South Asian vernaculars–in 1974, its author, U.R. Anantha Murthy, remains a prominent figure in the literary world of Kannadan and Indian vernacular letters. What Latour interprets is but a fragment of the novel that first appears in English in Another India, a collection of translated vernacular Indian literature.16

     
    The translations of prose and poetry that appear in Another India were originally composed in one of the dozens of vernaculars used in the subcontinent. The editors, Nissim Ezekiel and Meenakshi Mukherjee, primarily attempted to showcase the complexity and richness of Indian vernacular letters and to counter the disproportionate emphasis placed on Anglophonic “Indian” writing in Europe and North America. Such an ambition was prescient with respect to future debates. In 1997, on the occasion of the fiftieth anniversary of India’s independence, Salman Rushdie would contend that the only writing of substance in South Asia was composed in English:
     

    The prose writing–both fiction and nonfiction–created in this period [the fifty years of independence] by Indian writers working in English is proving to be a stronger and more important body of work than most of what has been produced in the eighteen “recognized” languages of India, the so-called “vernacular languages,” during the same time. . . . The True Indian literature of the first postcolonial half century has been made in the language the British left behind.
     

    (50)

     

    Latour’s readers, however, are never apprised of this significant tension in South Asian literature (and in much writing characterized as “postcolonial”).17 Consequently, the significance of translation and the problem of incommensurability in Jagannath’s tale are never addressed. For example, there is no mention of the parallels between Jagannath’s inability to comprehend the Dalit and the postcolonial Indian writer’s dilemma of choosing from amongst the various possibilities for political identification and representation that different languages–notably local vernacular and the colonial tongue–afford.

     
    Latour begins by informing the reader that “His name is Jagannath,” but his analysis of Jagannath’s story does not focus on its linguistic, historical, and etymological contexts. That the protagonist has this particular name is significant; it is replete with powerful associations in South Asian religious experience. The Temple of Jagannath in Puri, Orissa, celebrates a popular and mischievous avatar of Vishnu/Krishna and is a major pilgrimage site for many of South Asia’s Hindus.18 The reference to Jagannath (Sanskrit for “ruler of all the world” or “ruler of the universe”) draws associations to a figure revered by millions of South Asians. Significantly, this avatar of Vishnu is celebrated for his transgressive qualities; he is a cunning and lusty trickster. There is also an important etymological relation between a juggernaut and Jagannath. Although the name Jagannath is drawn from the temple in Puri, its European usage refers to religious spectacle. According to European travelers’ tales, during the Rathayatra Festival zealots would throw themselves underneath the giant wheels of a chariot towed by pilgrims to the temple gates.19 The “juggernaut” has long harbored characteristic features of Orientalist exoticism: its European legacy conjures irrationality and religious fanaticism in order to mark the Indian as “other”–a function that India has served in various European imaginaries, dating from at least Europe’s early modern period onward. As the English-educated, Kannada-speaking Brahmin, Jagannath thus carries in his name associations that reverberate in these contexts of South Asian religio-cultural consciousness and Anglophonic etymology.20 Similarly, linguistic resonances relating to debates over Indian modernity can be found in Bharathipura, the novel’s title. The subject of caste has for many become synonymous with the “Indian condition,” and tales of uplifting the downtrodden from caste entrenchment have come to be seen as paradigmatic of the possibility of modernizing India. These issues have been rendered into numerous aesthetic forms–the subject of novels, films, and philosophical tracts–both inside India and abroad.21 It is not surprising, therefore, that the title of Murthy’s novel, Bharathipura, establishes a metaphorical relationship between a specific geographical site, Bharathipura, and the Indian nation as a whole. Bharat is the ancient Sanskrit name for “India,” and pura means village. Roughly translated, Bharathipura designates the “Village of India.” Thus, an element of general social critique via the microcosm of the village is prominently featured for the reader even before any of the novel’s plot is revealed.22
     
    Finally, as a work written for a Kannadan audience and only recently translated in its entirety, Bharathipura addresses several key issues raised within Anglophone postcolonial studies. The question of the significance of composing in the so-called colonizer’s language is a vibrant and contentious feature of postcolonial societies that concerns the manner in which categories such as “literature” and the “literary” are negotiated. Untranslated vernacular literary “traditions” consciously experiment with the problem of how to accommodate the enormous cultures of book and print that arose in connection with the late-eighteenth and early-nineteenth century introduction of European print technologies. The language communities served by these vernaculars together constitute a diverse, national entity: a heterogeneous India where Gujarati, Bengali, Tamil, and fifteen other vernaculars are recognized as languages appropriate for literary expression. Thus, if the umbrella term “nation” can be used to refer to postcolonial India, it is only in the context of a sovereign nation that is learning to accommodate substantial regional and linguistic differences.23 In this context, Murthy’s decision to write in Kannada is deliberate. Like many Indian literati, he works in more than one language. In fact, Murthy’s 1966 doctoral degree in comparative literary studies is from the University of Birmingham: three years earlier, the renowned Center for Cultural Studies was established at Birmingham by noted Marxist scholars Richard Hoggart and Stuart Hall. The complex treatment of varied Marxist/Socialist positions over the course of Bharathipura speaks to Murthy’s familiarity with contemporary “Western” scholarship, as well as to the prominent place of Marx amongst India’s own intellectuals and politicians. The English language translation of the entire novel was not available until 1996, more than two decades after Bharathipura’s first appearance in print.
     
    What the excerpt of Bharathipura Latour reads occludes, and what the novel’s cultural texture helps focus, is Murthy’s critique of liberal ideas of cultural authenticity. At the beginning of Bharathipura, Jagannath recalls going to the University of London to study. Once there he uses his charisma and intelligence to seduce women with “revolutionary” zeal:
     

    What had he done for five years in England? . . . He had become a magnetic existentialist . . . . His black eyes, olive complexion, his tone of voice . . . all of these he had used with superb sleight-of-hand. He turned liberal, a reader of The Guardian. Reason–simple. Liberal rhetoric helped him justify his aimless drifting ways. He favoured free love because he wanted several women without commitment. . . . He wanted to be free, and so dubbed life itself absurd. He assumed a variety of personalities so as to conceal his innermost appetites. Bluntly speaking, his life was one continuous debauchery. A masquerade.
     

    (28-29)

     

    But as his failing relationship with Margaret, a half-English/half-Indian woman, falls apart, Jagannath becomes motivated to abandon his charlatan ways and aspires to transform himself into someone who is “creative” and “authentic.” He returns to Bharathipura, believing that if he can liberate the village pariahs he will acquire the allure of a political revolutionary and thereby win back Margaret’s love: “He would write to her after he became more substantial. And for him to become that, the untouchables, who lived like birds or animals, should muster enough courage to take that first step into the Manjunatha temple. Their rebellion would bring him authenticity” (38).24

     
    Jagannath’s intervention is a failed act: his exercise in liberal largesse is grotesque, perverse, and utterly narcissistic. Back in India, Jagannath’s efforts to lead the pariahs out of their “ignorance” is hotly debated in the town and beyond. Undeterred by the skeptics, Jagannath eventually forces the issue upon the untouchables and the local community. At the end of the novel, he leads several drunken pariahs into a temple on a festival day only to find that their entrance is not considered blasphemous because the temple’s sacred lingam is missing.25 In a plot twist, the reader is apprised that the priest’s physically and mentally abused son had exacted revenge on his cruel father the night before by digging up the lingam and casting it into the river–an act that resonates in Lingyat belief. When the thousands of faithful, who have come for the festival, hear what has happened, they conclude that although removing the lingam defiles the temple, it is a justified action; it occurred in order to stop the greater defilement that would have been caused by the pariahs. Although readers are privy to the psychological motivations of the priest’s son (much as they are to Jagannath’s), the worshippers are not duly informed; as a result, they appeal to indigenous beliefs to explain Jagannath’s failed actions, a move that allows their belief-system to remain intact. By contrast, the reader is aware of what motivates the novel’s protagonist and has the opportunity to consider the relation between personal psychology and social revolution. Murthy’s construction of this scenario allows for the modernist critic’s intervention to be absorbed by indigenous belief, a facet of Jagannath’s move that Latour’s analysis does not encounter and therefore address.
     

    Representing the Unrepresented?

     
    Latour, reading an excerpt of the novel, misses these dimensions of its plot and so its critique of liberal ideology. The broader implications of the novel’s politics of inclusion and marginality are also conveyed by its style. Narrative voice is so important to Murthy’s project that any analysis of Bharathipura that fails to engage with the ways it articulates multiple and competing points of view remains incomplete. While a range of characterization extends to a variety of different social groups–a feature reinforced by their access to narrative voice and point of view–this privilege is not extended to the untouchables. Many social and ideological positions are represented in the novel (the Brahmin ascetic, the Marxist politico, the corrupt Monk), but the untouchables, whose contested position within Indian society is the central plot device, are not represented as speaking for themselves. As indicated in the excerpt, and established more fully in the novel, Jagannath’s tale of failed cultural translation is exemplified by the very absence of Dalit narrative consciousness. But, unlike Marx’s formulation concerning Europe’s peasants, this lack of representation does not arise solely from the Dalit‘s lack the agency to represent themselves.26 Rather, this particular Kannadan novel achieves its literary coherence by addressing the issue of untouchability through the objectification of the Dalit. Whereas some critics contend that this act of reification subjugates the untouchables further, we can perhaps better view Murthy’s literary strategy as one that highlights how dominant groups, even ones with emancipatory liberal intentions, find it difficult to view the “other” apart from their own projections and include the “other” on terms that do not exceed self-interest.27
     
    In this respect, Murthy’s literary and political aims are perhaps best understood in the context of the modern novel as a literary technology. Since the nineteenth-century, historical realist fiction has been used as an instrument that enables competing vantage points to negotiate their partial and situated perspectives against the reader’s God’s-eye view–a disembodied perspective through which all of the personal and institutional machinations that are central to the plot of the novel are perceived as transparent.28 In the tradition of Marxist historical realist fiction, it is expected that the reader be left with a new view of social reality, one that is less ideologically distorted and that presents avenues for political action. In this context, the possibility of revolutionary activism links literary representation with political praxis: the reader is given the impression that as a result of understanding the novel, he or she is better placed to engage with injustice and ideological mystification. Indeed, the reader can feel transformed: he or she is no longer an ordinary social agent, but instead has become enlightened about matters of personal complicity vis-à-vis class complicity.
     
    Although Bharathipura belongs to the genre of social realism, it is not Marxist; self-consciously Kannadan, Bharathipura relies upon the heteroglossic potential of the novel to suggest that caste politics at the local level cannot be altered when action is justified by non-local norms. Specifically, the reader is made to observe how modern critique and traditional beliefs confront one another: at novel’s end, traditional beliefs appropriate and circumvent critical intervention. While the Marxist realist tradition of the novel is invoked, Bharathipura defies the expectations of a genre that revolves around issues of domination and injustice. Because an untouchable consciousness is absent in it, the novel–as a genre and a form–seems to be rendered ineffective for adequately addressing the exclusion of minoritarian voices. In this reading, such an impasse offers an ironic, high-modernist perspective on the tropes of caste and untouchability in postcolonial India. Far from inciting the reader to revolution, Bharathipura seems to suggest that while the literary imagination has the potential to deflate overly zealous critical ambition, it cannot establish a direct course of action for citizens to pursue. If any of the diverse South Asian readers are implicated by the untouchables’ plight, the novel remains silent on why this is the case and what should be done to redress it. By not giving the Dalit representation, what the novel suggests ultimately is that until the Dalit represent themselves, “we” cannot represent them either. Their naming, as in the case of Dalit in modern Indian history, must occur through acts of self-naming. The impetus for Dalit representation must come from within communities of the excluded and enter into the larger body of civil society–a society that must be able to refashion itself in order to accept, and adapt to, Dalit inclusion in the postcolonial Indian nation-state.29
     

    Latour and Postcolonial Theory

     
    It is tempting to compare Latour’s discussion of Jagannath to Said’s intervention into V.S. Naipaul’s politics of demystification in “Among the Believers.”30 There Said takes issue with Naipaul’s portrayal, regarding his visit to Iran, Pakistan, Malaysia, and Indonesia, of the West as “the world of knowledge, criticism, technical know-how, and functioning institutions” and of Islamic culture as “fearfully enraged and retarded dependent [sic]” (114). Said’s position is that so long as Naipaul is, through his “acquired British identity,” prejudiced to see the world in this way, it is impossible for him to perceive or learn anything new: “What he sees he sees because it happens before him and, more important, because it already confirms what, except for an eye-catching detail, he already knows. He does not learn: they prove” (116, 113). The crucial point, one that is central to both Latour’s and Said’s respective analyses, is that neither an empathetic nor an epistemic connection to “otherness” is possible if the observer mistakes projected for genuine native beliefs. Recall Latour’s contention that “it is the critical thinker who invents the notion of belief and manipulation and projects this notion upon a situation in which the fetish plays an entirely different role” (Pandora’s 270). Said reminds us that so long as Naipaul remains within the space of “carefully chosen” and “absolutely safe” places to visit, so long as he fails to “live among them” and “risk their direct retaliation,” so long as he fails to be like Socrates and “live through the consequences of his criticism,” he can only present characters that “barely come alive” in landscapes that are “half-hearted at best” (116).
     
    Despite these parallels between Latour and Said, important differences mark their approaches to literary analysis. By the time Latour publishes Iconoclash, it becomes clear that he is not familiar with the complete Bharathipura. The one-page discussion of Jagannath in Iconclash includes a reference to Murthy and his novel, but nothing to explain why Pandora’s Hope presents an incomplete citation. Although Latour goes so far as to claim that Jagannath’s tale is “at the origin” of the Iconoclash exhibition-discussing the inspirational value of Jagannath at the level of personal origin–he does not discuss the issue of cultural origins: he does not say why Kannadan writers were grappling with the limits of ideology critique in the 1970s. This occlusion allows us to distinguish between Said’s intervention into Naipaul and Latour’s intervention into Murthy. Although Latour connects his use of Jagannath’s tale to his project of “letting beliefs regain their ontological weight,” the fact remains that for Latour, India is imaginary at best–a phantasm connected solely with a literary fragment that, when taken out of context, bears unexamined but significant ethnographic traces.
     
    We contend that the type of scholarship Latour exhibits in the context of his appropriation of Jagannath is problematic and relates to the questionable strategies he uses to solidify the disciplinary identity of STS by attempting to prematurely settle the question: what kind of expertise entitles one to speak authoritatively about science and technology, and in which contexts and for what purposes? As our discussion of Murthy demonstrates, the limits of ideology critique are already being established in South Asia during the early 1970s. By contextualizing that which is left out of Latour’s reading, we can register an “East” that is not essentialized and objectified. In recognizing the specific conditions that have contributed to the text’s production and circulation–its literary and “translated” status, its original production and consumption as a vernacular as opposed to “national” language, and its deliberate positioning with regard to contemporary intellectual and political life both in South Asia and in Europe–we can register more than an East that serves to put on display the hubris of the modernist critic. Indeed, in light of our contextualization, Latour’s deployment of Jagannath would be even more persuasive in that the use and abuse of ideology critique in South India highlights the heterogeneity and complexity of resistance to the supposed universalism of modernist reason. Once again, postcolonial instantiations of modernities, as opposed to the Eurocentric uniformity of a singular modernity, reveal the negotiations taking place in situ.31 As in the laboratory, decoding the practices of particular villages highlights the degree to which they cannot be abstracted out of their historical time and place.
     
    When considering these factors, it becomes important to take into account the status of works of literature within Latour’s project of analyzing the limits of ideology critique. Literary investigations have been demarcated historically from more “proper” theoretical investigations based on considerations of the kinds of claims formal and conceptual arguments can yield and the kinds of claims narrative can provide. However well a story may allow readers to come to a new understanding of the world, however much it enables readers to imagine that things could be other than they currently are, some contend that the readers’ ability to articulate what is compelling depends upon their going beyond literary possibility by making philosophical arguments concerning what justifies (or fails to justify) the beliefs, intentions, and actions of the literary characters. When Latour reduces Jagannath’s tale to an allegory of the modernist iconoclast, he engages in conceptual reductionism. It is as if he is suggesting that whatever insights can be found in Kannadan literature, they remain insufficiently epistemic because they have yet to be conceptualized properly. This strategy of attribution belongs to a long history in which: (1) non-Western inventions are marginalized; (2) the West is given credit for inventing things that were already fabricated; and (3) complex postcolonial situations that have given rise to numerous responses to, critiques of, and alternate configurations for, so-called “modernity” are elided.32 In short, Latour proceeds as if textual violence were not an essential component of analyzing Jagannath’s tale as a model–as a minimal representation of the fundamental features that account for the failure of ideology critique. Although models can be valuable for a number of ends–particularly in the sciences, when they can strip away inessential details in order to clarify the forces of a situation–using Bharathipura in this way undermines Murthy’s literary intervention: exposing the limits of critique in a specific context through a heavily psychologized and historicized agent.
     
    Latour’s reduction of Murthy occurs as if he were unaware of the value of Said’s distinction between “theory” and “critical consciousness”:
     

    Theory, in short, can never be complete, just as one’s interest in everyday life is never exhausted by simulacra, models, or theoretical abstracts of it. Of course one derives pleasure from actually making evidence fit or work in a theoretical scheme, and of course it is ridiculously foolish to argue that “the facts” or “the great texts” do not require any theoretical framework or methodology to be appreciated or read properly. No reading is neutral or innocent, and by the same token every text and every reader is to some extent the product of a theoretical standpoint, however implicit or unconscious such a standpoint may be. I am arguing, however, that we distinguish theory from critical consciousness by saying that the latter is a sort of spatial sense, a sort of measuring faculty for locating or situating theory, and this means that theory has to be grasped in the place and time out of which it emerges as part of that time, working in and for it, responding to it; then, consequently, that first place can be measured against subsequent places where the theory turns up for use. The critical consciousness is awareness of the differences between situations, awareness too of the fact that no system or theory exhausts the situation out of which it emerges or to which it is transported.
     

     

    Whether Latour has read Said or should be expected to be well-versed in Said’s terminology is irrelevant here. The fact remains that when it comes to analyzing Western technoscientific practice, Latour has long advocated that STS practitioners should conduct empirical case studies that trace carefully how provisional identities and disseminated knowledge claims are stabilized temporarily through networks of heterogeneous actors and “actants” who engage in complex acts of translation and negotiation in real time. Indeed, when he discusses Western scientific achievements and failures in his books and articles, Latour depicts networks as strong and weak connections between people, objects, concepts, and events that cannot be specified independently of the activity of those particular people, objects, concepts, and events. In other words, when presenting the reader with an account of how Western knowledge is fabricated, Latour always displays great sensitivity towards to the spatial orientation and the “traveling” of theory that Said associates with “critical consciousness.” By contrast, his reduction of Jagannath’s tale to an abstract model transforms the story into a saligram: it appears magically, as an ahistorical object waiting to be de-fetishized by the postcolonial studies scholar’s contextualizing insight into historical networks of translation. What Latour’s objectification of literature impedes, therefore, is the appearance of Bharathipura as a “thing” of concern for those in STS.

     

    Matters of Fact, Matters of Concern, Matters of Context

     
    The exclusion of postcolonial historical context in Latour’s argument suggests that greater scrutiny should be given to his use of examples that resonate with a variety of global scenarios, be they postcolonial, multi-cultural, or otherwise involving the many local, regional, and national cultural situations systemically interlinked through geographically widespread economic, political, and social “development.” Our aim here is to highlight the effects of Latour’s analysis when it does not meet its own expectations for contextual specificity and situatedness.
     
    For example, in his recent Critical Inquiry article, “Why Has Critique Run out of Steam,” Latour recounts flipping between C-SPAN 1 and 2 in February of 2003, during the prelude to the Iraq War. On one station, ongoing coverage could be found of the recent Space Shuttle Columbia disaster. Latour contends that this event was best understood as a “metamorphosis of an object into a thing” (234). A technology that had long been taken for granted as an “object”–another instrument in America’s technological arsenal–was becoming imbued with rich connections that could be characterized “in the respectful idiom of art, craftsmanship and poetry . . . . Here, suddenly, in a stroke, an object had become a thing, a matter of fact was considered a matter of great concern” (233-35). At that moment on another station, Latour finds a different process on display in which a “matter of concern” was being transformed into an “object”: a myriad of contradictory responses that had been proffered in relation to the Bush administration’s case for war were now being consolidated into a unified, monolithic narrative that justified preemptive military action. At the UN, “we had an investigation that tried to coalesce, in one unifying, unanimous, solid, mastered object, masses of people, opinions and might” (235).
     
    But while Latour considers how these parallel events–broadcast over cable, satellite, and the Internet–can provide insight into the distinction between “things” and “objects,” he fails to address the issue of audience and, therefore, context. Consider that in those televised images of searchers combing the North Texas countryside, most of the footage was concentrated around a small town. As the United States ramped up its war efforts in the Middle East, millions of Muslims around the globe also watched and also registered the shuttle as a thing: an auratic entity–carrying six Americans and an Israeli-whose fall from grace, not far from the U.S. President’s ranch, had come to lie in Palestine, Texas. In light of such lack of contextualization, Latour’s claim rings hollow: “Frightening omen, to launch such a complicated war, just when such a beautifully mastered object as the shuttle disintegrated into thousands of pieces of debris raining down from the sky–but the omen was not heeded; gods nowadays are invoked for convenience only” (236). Perhaps Latour and Jagannath alike view the invocation of the gods as convenient cover for political actions. But for those believers, not only Dalit, but fundamentalists and religious literalists in Judaism, Christianity, and Islam, these gods do indeed come to life, justifying belief and action.
     
    Glib dismissal of current events that resonate in messianic and eschatological theology might allow Latour to present justified criticism of President Bush’s rhetoric, but only by stripping away the significance of C-SPAN as a global, multi-media network, parochializing U.N. actions, and evading the import of his response to these programs as incommensurate with the responses of many believers. Any analysis of President Bush’s rhetoric must account for the religious coding meant for a largely domestic Christian audience. It is conventional wisdom that Bush needs to keep the bloc of the so-called Christian Right happy. However, Latour does not address the tendency towards complex and diverse responses around the globe to the explosion–even though they are relevant to the sorts of issues that Latour seeks to clarify in the Critical Inquiry article: that Critique seems to have given way to conspiracy theory, with the former lending the latter its methodological tools; that Critique has become disabled by its own modernist tendencies, imposing a tautological form of critical reasoning that occludes that which it seeks to critique; and that the work for critical STS is to understand how that historicized and contextualized fact–the “factish” in Pandora’s Hope–actually strengthens rather than weakens the ontology of the fact. Yet the very example of C-SPAN leads us to understand how Latour’s network fails not only to interact with the historical and cultural dimensions of transnational media and communications systems, but also with the significant beliefs that render the media’s “facts” over-determined. It also prompts us to revisit the theme addressed at the beginning of this essay, namely the relation between philosophy and STS. If STS has differentiated itself from philosophy by taking itself to be a mostly descriptive enterprise, then how does Latour justify his implicitly normative use of the factish? While Latour appeals to the factish to show why Dalit beliefs should be respected, he fails to explain why the factish does not likewise support the judgments of those who saw the Shuttle disaster as a divine omen and sign of Judgment, and for those who cultivate such beliefs for political gain.

     

     

    Notes

     
    1. A representative critic is Mark Elam, who contends
     

     

    although there is no reference to the fact in Latour’s account of our non-modernity, hybrids have been a perennial concern of imperialists and colonialists. Like Donna Haraway’s alternative cyborg figure, the hybrid can be said to have a bad history. While Haraway makes clear her reasons for adopting the “offspring of militarism and patriarchal capitalism,” Latour never attempts to account for his attraction to a concept closely connected with colonial science projects. In relation to this silence, Latour fails to adequately address the way in which hybridity encourages us to essentialize difference and thereby cancel out the new symmetries he introduces in favour of new asymmetries.

    (13)

     

    2. In light of the potential disciplinary implications of his work, it is worth noting that Latour is currently the President of the Society for the Social Studies of Science.

     
    3. Our appreciation of this form of literary analysis was strengthened by conversations with a number of friends and colleagues, especially: Casper Bruun Jensen, Babak Elahi, Timothy Engstrom, Lisa Hermsen, Christine Kray, Srikanth Mallavarapu, Richard Newman, Cyril Reade, Linda Reinfeld, Richard Santana, and Sandra Saari.

     

     
    4. As an institutional designation, STS remains a porous category; citational practices, for example, suggest that scholars who are not identified as STS researchers manage to draw from STS literature fruitfully. But as Harry Collins’s recent work on the “third wave” of STS suggests, meta-theoretical claims about its development can be useful, particularly if one is interested in improving future inquiry. See H.M. Collins and Robert Evans, “The Third Wave of Science Studies: Studies of Expertise and Experience,” Social Studies of Science 32.2 (2002): 235-96.

     

     
    5. Postcolonial studies, like STS, refers to a large and heterogeneous body of scholarly and intellectual activity. While we address theorists and practitioners whose thought has been labeled–by themselves and/or others–as “postcolonial,” we restrict the term to describe the condition of sovereign national states that have emerged following World War II.

     

     
    6. The development of the factish (a conjoining of ‘fact’ with ‘fetish’) extends from Latour’s previous work on the complex interactions between the material and the semiotic. In Laboratory Life, Latour and Steve Woolgar offer detailed ethnographic analysis of how human and nonhuman coalesce, allowing for the processes through which scientific and technological activity take place. In attempting to break down the binarism between subject and object, human and thing, Latour contributes to the body of work known as Actor-Network theory–a methodological approach that notes the co-constitutive relationship between actors and actants in a network of practice. See Latour and Steve Woolgar, Laboratory Life: The Construction of Scientific Facts (Princeton: U of Princeton P, 1979). Like this earlier work, the concept of the factish takes aim at the logical and scientific iconoclasm that attempts to demolish the “irrational” fetish/object through an appeal to reason, logic and science invested in the fact. Latour notes that fact and fetish share not only an etymological root but are both fabricated (Pandora’s 272). The iconoclast denies the fabrication of the fact, which is used to demolish the fetish. The factish, according to Latour, re-establishes the conditions for human agency to appear “in both cases,” allowing for “a world where arguments and actions are everywhere facilitated, permitted and afforded by factishes” (Pandora’s 274).

     

     
    7. While not all Subaltern Historians subscribe to the terminology of plural modernities, they have taken issue with the monolithic developmental models of modernity favored by nationalists and neo-liberals alike. For more on the Subalterns and Modernity see Chapter One of Dipesh Chakrabarty’s Habitations of Modernity: Essays in the Wake of Subaltern Studies (Chicago: U of Chicago P, 2002), 3-19. For more on Alternative Modernities see Arjun Appadurai, Modernity at Large: Cultural Dimensions of Globalization (Minneapolis: U of Minnesota P, 1996) and Dilip Parameshwar Gaonkar, “On Alternative Modernities,” Public Culture 11.1 (1999): 1-18. Notes 30 and 32 also address this issue.

     

     
    8. Ideology critique as a subject fits the profile of what Raymond Williams calls “key words,” over-determined terms whose definitions are “inextricably bound up with the problems [they are] being used to discuss” (13). The meanings associated with “critique” and “ideology” are tied to the intelligibility of concepts that are fundamental to modern epistemology and modern ontology: the inadequacy of false beliefs is discernable by comparison with standards appropriate to true beliefs; the inadequacy of opinions is discernable by comparison with standards appropriate to facts; the illegitimacy of co-opted interests is discernable by comparison with standards appropriate to real interests; the nature and scope of social kinds is discernable by comparison with standards appropriate to natural kinds; and irrational historical progress is discernable by comparison with standards appropriate to rational historical progress.

     

     
    9. Latour’s attempt to circumscribe ideology critique within a Foucaultian episteme is curious. In other contexts–such as when arguing against the value of classifying a period of history as modernity–he favors heterogeneous accounts of history that are punctuated by diverse associations between actors and actants.

     

     
    10. Latour also notes that whereas earlier modernist criticism was proffered by the “intelligentsia,” today it can be found in the “instant revisionism” of conspiracy theories and anti-ecological right-wing political zealots. For a scholarly treatment of this topic, see “Why Has Critique Run out of Steam?” For the popular press version of this argument, see Latour, “Readings–the Last Critique,” Harper’s Apr. 2004: 15.

     

     
    11. Latour’s genealogy of critique reveals how much has changed in academia since the 1960s and 1970s. During that time, Paul Feyerabend lamented that while ideology critique had been applied to religious beliefs with great success, it had yet to be applied to the ideals of Western science. Certain epistemic problems attend to Feyerabend’s solution to the problem of the ideology of expertise. See Evan Selinger, “Feyerabend’s Democratic Argument against Experts,” Critical Review 15.3-4 (2003): 359-73.

     

     
    12. See David Couzens Hoy (229) for a discussion of the textual traditions associated with Marx and Marxism. To understand the legacy of critique after Karl Marx, Hoy examines “poststructuralism’s abstention from critical theory’s use of both the method of Ideologiekritik and the idea of ideology as false consciousness” (16). He begins with Marx, Friederich Engels, and Georg Lukacs and then proceeds to read work by Foucault, Jacques Derrida, Pierre Bourdieu, Jürgen Habermas, Steven Lukes, Ernesto Laclau, Chantal Mouffe, and Slavoj Zizek. By proceeding in this way, Hoy contends that we can come to understand arguments and theories that have provoked “major changes in the way that one thinks not only about ideology, but also about subjectivity and social reality” (223).
     
    Although Latour’s initial reflections on Jagannath appear at the end of Pandora’s Hope, they end up playing so dominant a role in his later thinking that he contextualizes the tale as being “at the origin” of his Iconoclash show (Iconoclash 474).
     

    13. In order to address the violence done to native forms of belief, Latour invents the concept of the “factish.” For more on the factish, see Srinivas Aravamudan, Tropicopolitans: Colonialism and Agency, 1688-1804, Post-Contemporary Interventions (Durham: Duke UP, 1999).

     
    14. While this lack of attribution may be deliberate, a playful conjoining of binaristic opposition between fact and fiction, it risks mimicking long-standing Orientalist approaches that elevated literary texts over practices “on the ground.” This disparity becomes the basis for the reification of a philosophical Hinduism that bears little resemblance to those many forms in practice throughout India today. See Ray 36-50.

     

     
    15. Jagannath’s name is transliterated in the 1996 translation as Jagannatha. This renaming reflects contemporary efforts by linguists to more accurately render Indian spoken vernaculars into English. For example, the city of Calcutta has recently been renamed Kolkata. This also holds for saligram and shaligrama.

     

     
    16. See Ezekiel and Mukherjee. The collection is composed of English translations that appeared in the magazine Vagartha, published out of Delhi between 1973 and 1979. The editors note that the magazine’s purpose was to “search for whatever seemed worth reading and talking about in contemporary Indian literature” (14).

     

     
    17. Perhaps the most celebrated literary figure who has chosen to forsake literary expression in the colonizer’s language is Ngugi wa Thiong’o. Ngugi’s English-language novels on colonialism in Kenya, such as A Grain of Wheat (1967), made him well known throughout Africa and the World. He renounced the colonizer’s language after being imprisoned by Daniel Arap Moi’s authoritarian government in the early 1980s. Since that time he has produced extensive critical work in English, but has chosen to compose literary and aesthetic pieces in Gikuyu. Ngugi has advocated a return to indigenous language in order to produce African literature, as opposed to “Afro-European” literature. See Ngugi wa Thiong’o, Decolonising the Mind: The Politics of Language in African Literature (Portsmouth: Heinemann, 1986).

     

     
    18. Recent scholarship has questioned the cohesiveness of “Hinduism” as a religious body, suggesting that the categorization occurs as a result of European ideas and expectations as to what “religion” is supposed to be. Richard King offers a fine overview of these recent debates; see his Orientalism and Religion: Postcolonial Theory, India and “the Mystic East” (London: New York: Routledge, 1999), Chapter Five, “The Myth of Modern Hinduism.”

     

     
    19. The earliest description of the temple and its festival by a European appears in the 1321 travelogue of the Italian Franciscan Friar, Odoric of Pordenone. See Odorico and Henry Yule, The Travels of Friar Odoric, Italian Texts and Studies on Religion and Society (Grand Rapids, MI: Eerdmans, 2002).

     

     
    20. It should be added that the Rathayatra festival has become an important facet of Swami A.C. Bhaktivedanta Prabhupada’s International Society for Krishna Consciousness (ISKCON) movement, popularly known as the Hare Krishnas. The aim of this organization, since its founding in 1966, has been to extend Krishna-worship outside of South Asia. The Rathayatra festival is now held in cities around the globe, including New York, London, and Sydney.

     

     
    21. The fate of India’s untouchables has been a topic of literary exploration since the nineteenth century. Mulk Raj Anand’s 1935 English-language novel, Untouchable, remains the most widely known work on this theme. More recently, Arundhati Roy’s Booker Prize winning novel, The God of Small Things, prominently features a Dalit character.

     

     
    22. The village is an overdetermined category in colonial and postcolonial South Asia. Since the nineteenth century, both foreign and indigenous interlocutors have produced a veritable mythology of the village in India. According to this line of thought, the idealized India of antiquity is Hindu and Aryan and the village is the still-living social unit rooted in that past, the “Living Essence of the Ancient.” For a through overview of this idealized notion of the village in South Asia–by scholars and bureaucrats, European and Asian alike–see Chapter Four of Ronald B. Inden, Imagining India (Oxford: Basil Blackwell, 1990).

     

     
    23. It makes sense that the Bengali vernacular and Bengali-speaking cultural elites would have such success and exposure in colonial British circles. Their access to print technology began early–in the 1790s–and catalyzed the translational move to the English language and, simultaneously, to the Bengali print-vernacular. British East India Company officials closely regulated all such exchanges. Early entry into print discourse by South Asians was “smuggled” into Bengal via the Euro-missionary enclaves allowed by the Company. See Mrinal Kanti Chanda, History of the English Press in Bengal, 1780-1857 (Calcutta: Bagchi, 1987). It is important to note that in South Asia the postcolonial politics of language are particularly complex and have been, at times, violently conflicted.

     

     
    24. Jagannath speaks of the untouchables as animals. The novel, in this early moment, suggests that Jagannath must recognize the untouchables as human in order for his social intervention to succeed. It is also worth noting that though Jagannath acts in order to secure Margaret’s love, the novel does not take up the issue of gender as it relates to ideology critique.

     

     
    25. Lingyat believers worship Shiva, represented by the phallic lingam. They are largely congregated in the south of India.

     

     
    26. Marx, referring to the French peasant proprietor in The Eighteenth Brumaire of Louis Bonaparte, writes that they “cannot represent themselves, they must be represented.” This quote has been the subject of wide debate. Both Edward Said in Orientalism and Gayatri Chakravorty Spivak in “Can the Subaltern Speak?” use this phrase to discuss western representations of the colonial “other.” Referring to an exchange between Foucault and Deleuze, Spivak writes: “It is impossible for contemporary French intellectuals to imagine the kind of Power and Desire that would inhabit the unnamed subject of the Other of Europe” (279-80).

     

     
    27. Spearheaded by Gandhi, the struggle to overcome caste discrimination has been addressed by every major political and intellectual figure in India. If the inclusion of pariahs into the village is the condition for an equitable and just India, the absence of Dalit consciousness emphasizes the flaws of bourgeois modernity in India.

     

     
    28. The universalist aspirations of realist narrative in the eighteenth and nineteenth centuries were instrumental in the development of the novel. See Ian Watt’s classic The Rise of the Novel: Studies in Defoe, Richardson and Fielding (Berkeley: U of California P, 2001). See also Elizabeth Ermarth, Realism and Consensus in the English Novel (New York: Columbia UP, 1998). For the connection between modern nationalism and realist modes of narrative in the novel, see Anderson 23-34.

     

     
    29. The political theorist and Subaltern historian Partha Chatterjee presents a similar line of thought. He shows how “normative” categories of the liberal nation-state have been recast in light of postcolonial exigencies. His 1995 article, “Religious Minorities and the Secular State: Reflections on an Indian Impasse,” argues that minority discourse, in certain instances, might need to refuse entry into “reasonable” discourse. In such instances, he advises a disciplined politics of toleration. An extensive body of Dalit scholarship has emerged in the last generation, spurred no doubt by the troubling experiences of minority cultures in South Asia, as well as by the rise of postcolonial studies. In Castes of Mind, Nicholas Dirks offers a comprehensive account of the categorization of caste during the colonial era, explaining particularly how it was integrated into the development of bourgeois Indian modernity. See Castes of Mind: Colonialism and the Making of Modern India (Princeton: Princeton UP, 2001). Debjani Ganguly’s ethnography of the ex-untouchable Mahars in western India forms the basis for an argument that deconstructs the totality of caste structure, insisting upon caste as heterogenous and variegated categories that cannot be encompassed by totalizing narratives of modernity. See Caste, Colonialism and Counter-Modernity (New York: Routledge, 2005).

     

     
    30. See Edward W. Said, Reflections on Exile and Other Essays (Cambridge: Harvard UP, 2000).

     

     
    31. Tejaswini Naranjana provides an excellent analysis of alternative modernities in her reading of gender and nationalism among Trinidadian Indians. See “‘Left to the Imagination’: Indian Nationalisms and Female Sexuality in Trinidad,” Alternative Modernities, Ed. Dilip Parameshwar Gaonkar (Durham: Duke UP): 248-71.

     

     
    32. Of course, the terrain outlined in points I and II is the subject of Edward Said’s classic study, Orientalism. While that work provides a broad analysis of how an Orient comes to be represented through the imperialist imaginations of European scholars, it is in later works that Said offers systematic approaches to remedying the problem of Eurocentrism in contemporary scholarship.

     

     

     

    Works Cited

     

    • Anderson, Benedict. Imagined Communities. New York: Verso, 1991.
    • Chatterjee, Partha. “Caste and Subaltern Consciousness.” Subaltern Studies 6. Ed. Ranajit Guha. Delhi: Oxford UP, 1989: 169-209.
    • ———. “Religious Minorities and the Secular State: Reflections on an Indian Impasse.” Public Culture 8.1 (1995): 11-39. [CrossRef]
    • Elam, Mark. “Living Dangerously with Bruno Latour in a Hybrid World.” Theory, Culture and Society 16.4 (1999): 1-24. [CrossRef]
    • Ezekiel, Nissim, and Meenakshi Mukherjee. Another India: An Anthology of Contemporary Indian Fiction and Poetry. New York: Penguin, 1990.
    • Hoy, David Couzens. Critical Resistance: From Poststructuralism to Post-Critique. Cambridge: MIT P, 2004.
    • Latour, Bruno. Pandora’s Hope: Essays on the Reality of Science Studies. Cambridge: Harvard UP, 1999.
    • ———. “Why Has Critique Run out of Steam? From Matters of Fact to Matters of Concern.” Critical Inquiry 30.2 (2004): 225-48. [CrossRef]
    • Latour, Bruno, Peter Weibel, and Zentrum für Kunst und Medientechnologie Karlsruhe. Iconoclash. Cambridge: MIT P, 2002.
    • Murthy, U.R. Anantha, and P. Sreenivasa Rao. Bharathipura: Modern Indian Novels in Translation. Madras: Macmillan India, 1996.
    • Nagaraj, D.R. “Introduction.” Bharathipura. Ed. U.R. Anantha Murthy. Madras: Macmillan India, 1996: vii-xvi.
    • Ray, Amit. Negotiating the Modern: Orientalism and Indianness in the Anglophone World. New York: Routledge, 2007.
    • Rushdie, Salman. “Life and Letters: Damme, This Is the Oriental Scene for You! An Introduction to Indian Fiction.” The New Yorker 23-30 Jun 1997: 50-57.
    • Said, Edward W. Reflections on Exile and Other Essays. Cambridge: Harvard UP, 2000.
    • ———. The World, the Text, and the Critic. Cambridge: Harvard UP, 1983.
    • Spivak, Gayatri Chakravorty. “Can the Subaltern Speak?” Marxism and the Interpretation of Culture. Eds. Cary Nelson and Lawrence Grossberg. Urbana: U of Illinois P, 1988. 271-316.
    • Williams, Raymond. Keywords: A Vocabulary of Culture and Society. Rev. ed. New York: Oxford UP, 1985.

     

     
  • Technics of the Subject: The Avatar-Drive

    Emily Apter (bio)
    Department of French, New York University
    emily.apter@nyu.edu

    Abstract
     
    This essay considers the digital avatar not simply as a name for a virtual double of the player of videogames, but as bound to or manifesting psychological drive, a kind of homunculus of the drive. Drawing on a wide range of theories that have informed technical constructions of the subject, it applies in particular an important moment in Lacan’s description of the drive to the concept of the gaming “avatar.” It argues that the avatar is a variant of precursor representations of the drive specific to the technical imaginary of videogames.
     

    The avatar haunts media and cyperspace in multiple guises. Nested in online chat rooms and seminars, internet commodity arcades, art installations, game worlds, architectural models, data-shadows, and program algorithms, the avatar has become the face of it-ness, who-ness, and what-ness mediating community and unseating the subject’s Eigentlichkeit (self-possession, the “having” of what is my own).1 As the visible interface of the psychic drive, the avatar is not so much the double of the subject in the digital field as a kind of “puppet-homunculus” or totem that “drives” the drives. Freud’s notion of psychic drive as “constant force” (konstante kraft), instrumentalized in its goal-directed motricity, becomes newly relevant to the object-oriented worlds of games and internet markets in their subsumption and transformation of subjective properties.2 Like the Aristotelian hyle (the causative and self-circular property of a form), avatarity, as I develop the concept here, bears on post-poststructuralist accounts of the destinations of agency in a technical milieu.
     

    Parade of the Subjects

     
    No theory of the avatar can be divorced from theories of the subject. Subject theory––buoyed in successive waves by the time-lag of French and German translations––predominated in the human sciences from the postwar period through the mid-1990s. Though some argue that it lost traction in the “post-critical” contemporary moment, I contest this idea. Subject theory endures as a “technics of the subject” situated at the juncture of philosophy, psychoanalysis, and media theory, and nourished by subfields as far-flung as systems theory, pragmatism, cybernetics, chaos theory, Heideggerian and Benjaminian notions of techne, Deleuzian vitalism and projections of the virtual, symbolic logic, artificial intelligence, computer programming, prosthetics, genomics, posthumanism, and game theory. The time-line of these disciplinary interactions is uneven, but not so uneven as to obscure the subtle yet generic shift from poststructuralist accounts of subjective impersonalism––from the mid-1990s on––to medial theories of the subject imbued with what French sociologist Georges Friedmann dubs “the technical milieu.”3 A specialist of factory life and subjective submission to the technical environment, Friedmann stands alongside Raymond Ruyer and Gilbert Simondon (especially important in conceptualizing a hylomorphic understanding of the human as ontologically utensil, as well as a somato-psychic theory of the existence-mode of objects) among the precursors of Deleuze and Guattari who together most significantly articulated philosophies of machinic expressionism and virtual ontology.4 As a set of thinkers, they join Freud and Lacan––the founders of analytic technique, and Heidegger, the premier theorist of technè and Bestand (“standing-reserve,” by which he refers to nature’s latent capacity to be technologically entrained by man), in setting the terms of subject technics. The work of Bernard Stiegler is also especially germane; his La Technique et le temps 1, La faute d’Epiméthée [Technics and Time: The Fault of Epimetheus] examines the sophistic devaluation of technè in the history of philosophy, tracing its retrieval and gradual fusion with epistemè in Enlightenment modernity. Aristotelian distinctions between nature and technology thus give way to the “technicized life,” engendered through biopower, genetic and social engineering (education, marketing), “psychotechnics” (cognitive technologies), “phenomenotechnics” (technologies of memory, consciousness, individuation), and the noosphere of “psychopower” (the program of a new human under conditions of evolutionary complexity, cyberspatial orders of cognition) (276).5
     
    Technics is of course a neologism in English and is adapted here from Samuel Weber’s translation of Heidegger’s Technik. “Technology” and “Technique,” according to Weber, are inadequate English equivalents because they fail to convey the range of associations subsumed in Heidegger’s usage, which include knowledge, craft, skill, the placing of orders (stock and trade orders, military commands), poeisis, and art (51-72). Arguably, Heidegger’s “Questions Concerning Technology” [alternately translated as “Questing After Technics”] sits at the fulcrum of a burgeoning “technics theory” bibliography comprising Gilbert Simondon’s Du Mode d’existence des objets techniques, Bernard Stiegler’s Time and Technics, Derrida and Stiegler’s Echograhies, Friedrich Kittler’s Network Systems and essays in Literature, Media, Information Systems, Samuel Weber’s Mass Mediaurus and Targets of Opportunity, Brian Massumi’s Parables of the Virtual: Movement, Affect, Sensation, Avital Ronell’s The Test Drive, Alexander Galloway’s Gaming: Essays on Algorithmic Culture, McKenzie Wark’s Gamer Theory and Eugene Thacker’s Biomedia. What distinguishes these works from a host of other titles at the juncture of philosophy and media theory is their default to techne as conceptually constitutive of thought, being, and agency.
     
    Subject technics also redounds to an earlier history of systems theory and cybernetics that flourished across disciplines during the Cold War. The short list of references includes Talcott Parsons (whose The Social System, a foundational work in social theory, appeared in 1951), Ludwig von Bertalanffy, Warren McCulloch (celebrated for mathematical modeling of neural networks), Claude Shannon, Norbert Wiener, and John von Neumann (the legendary inventors of information theory, cybernetics, game theory, quantum mechanics). It is also important to mention the engineer Jay Forrester, who introduced core memory and random access magnetic storage in computing and extended systems theory to “world dynamics” using biofeedback models to examine the organization of industries, cities, and environmental situations. The idea of the “open system” emphasizes ways in which systems, interacting with the environment, evolve into new hierarchical structures of organization, and was applied in the fifties and sixties to organismic exchanges between matter and environment, or to instances of negative entropy. Cybernetics led to a further “opening” of the open system onto vistas of genetics and language. Swarms, adaptive and random response models, input/output, complexity, cost/benefit/risk calculations, information spread, allometry, entropy, morphogenesis, pattern recognition, space-to-surface algorithms, autocatalytic networks, world dynamics ––each yielded formal systems governed by structural logics and topologies. Starting in the early 1970s, and following in the steps of Chilean cognitive scientists Humberto Maturana and Francisco Varela, the German sociologist Niklas Luhmann linked autopoiesis to social systems (The Autopoiesis of Social Systems appeared in 1986). Modeled on the life cell, on the construct of a “self”-region patrolled by an autonomous boundary (filtering environmental stimuli to enable a distinct identity to self-create), autopoiesis in its very name heralded a migration of systems theory into the “softer” human sciences, where it was developed by Gregory Bateson, Ilya Prigogine, Friedrich Kittler, Manuel Castells, and Luhmann.
     
    For Luhmann, the “systems” subject is self-selecting and impersonal, even in intimacy:
     

    today the ego’s Self is no longer called the transcendental Self, but rather identity. The concept does not have a logical, but rather a symbolic relevancy, in that it proves that in a society characterized by predominately impersonal relationships it has proved difficult to find the point at which one can experience oneself as a unity and function as a unity. The ego’s Self is not the objectivity of subjectivity in the transcendental-theoretical sense. The ego’s Self is the result of self-selective processes; and this is precisely why it is also dependent upon others for its being selected by others. The problem now is not enhancement, but selection from among one’s own adaptive capacities.
     

    (164-65)

     

    I am prepared to argue, in accord with Peter Sloterdijk (in his short book Derrida, An Egyptian), that subject technics is that unlikely place where Luhmann and Derrida meet.6 If Derridean deconstruction may be said to have pushed the history of language philosophy past the known limits of grammatized thought and into the arena of genetic, metabolic and ontological process, Luhmann, it could be argued, re-modeled post-ontological, metabiological logics of system and environment. Derrida converges with Luhmann insofar as deconstruction is the code of late modernity’s unraveling self-description. This means that the “me” versus “not-me” conditions of self-ownership and self-property no longer hold. “Me,” “Mind,” “Interface” and “Face,” “Self” and “Own” – all these self-denominators melt into transmissive circuits.

     
    Transmissive circuits, topologies of agency (as in Jean-Luc Nancy and Philippe Lacoue-Labarthe’s diagram of Lacan’s “Agency of the Letter”), Moebius strips, Klein bottles, Gordian knots, continuous folds, bodies without organs, “allegorithms” (the modal shift from systems of sign to sign reference, to systems of sign and number, adduced by Alex Galloway and McKenzie Wark), each of these represents the “subjectless subjectivities” of technics.7 “Hypostacizing process into a super-subject is the error of idealism,” Brian Massumi cautions, but he makes an exception when he invokes “subjectless subjectivity,” as defined by Guattari. “By ‘production of subjectivity,’ [Massumi argues] Guattari does not only mean the actual subjects that emerge in the ontogenetic net articulating context and expression, determining their potential. He also means that the movement of expression is itself subjective, in the sense that it is self-moving and has determinate effects. It is an agency, only without an agent: a subjectless subjectivity” (xxiv). The Lacanian counterpart would be “subjectivization without a subject,” identified with that moment in a patient’s analysis in which he “experiences the fantasy of becoming the drive” (95).
     

    Avatarity

     
    Who is the “character” of this system-subject? Not to be confused with the protagonist of cyberfiction (epitomized by William Gibson’s “Case” in Neuromancer, who acts like a traditional character despite being “jacked into” a network), the subject of technics, as I am defining it, is really a way of construing the ontology of “what-ness” and “who-ness,” or the “‘It in the I’” of agency, once the subject is framed as cognitive and affective algorithm, or a systemic configuration of the drives.
     
    The character could, in this respect, be identified with the avatar. The avatar has emerged in the last ten years as a familiar character-player, custom-built from a commodified menu of enhanced body parts and facial features, and assigned a starring role in game spaces, MMORGs (the acronym for Massive Multi-player Online Role Play Game), and online communities like The Sims, Second Life, Eve Online, EverQuest, Proxy and World of Warcraft. The avatar might also be identifiable as a totem; less a second self or alter-ego than an animal companion or emblem.8 Avatar identity, in other words, is no fixed entity; it can be an anthropological proxy, but it might equally well take an indistinct form that is pure materiality, what Alex Galloway describes, in relation to the hive or swarm, as an “autochtonous material phenomenon unrestrained by the projection of a human spirit within” (“StarCraft” 93). In Galloway’s framework, the avatar is possessed of agential characteristics operating within a projected technical imaginary (something like cyberspace) that is held apart from an actual body. Here the avatar stands in marked contrast to Jean-Luc Nancy’s concept of l’intrus (the “intruder” hosted by the human). After receiving a heart transplant, Nancy wrote: “If my own heart has deserted me, up to what point was it ‘mine,’ my proper organ? Was it even an organ? . . . . There is an intruder in me and I become a stranger to myself” (13-15).9 Where the implant represents the alienability of self-property it falls short of dispensing entirely with the fiction of a “human spirit within.” By comparison, the avatar takes shape as the prosthetic extension of desubjectivated agency, as in a joystick or mouse.
     
    Philologically speaking, the word avatar derives from avatara, a Sanskrit term that breaks down into ava––”down”––and tarati––”he goes, passes beyond.” The word is traced by Gregory Little’s 1999 A Manifesto for Avatars to the Fourth Teaching in the Bhagavad gita, specifically to Krishna’s phrase, “when goodness grows weak, when evil increases, I make myself a body.” “Originally referring to the incarnation of Hindu deities,” according to Little, “avatars in the computing realms have come to mean any of the various ‘strap-on’ visual agents that represent the user in increasing numbers of 2 and 3D world” (2). As distinct from the cyborg, avatars are more fully fused with the human user. Little claims that the cyborg (christened in 1960 by Manfred E. Clynes and Nathan S. Kline’s article on “Cyborgs in Space”), “incorporates body and prostheses in the forms of mechanical, optical, coded, pharmacological, electronic, telematic, genetic, and biological agents, hosted by an original human consciousness to form a unified but hybrid lived body” (Little 2). By contrast the avatar “is a mythic figure with its origin in one world and projected or passing through a form of representation appropriate to a parallel world. The avatar is a delegate, a tool or instrument allowing an agency to transmit signification to a parallel world” (3).
     
    The nature of this parallel world was famously characterized some fifteen years ago by Neal Stephenson in the novel Snow Crash. As he describes Hiro’s avatar:
     

    By drawing the moving three-dimensional image as a resolution of 2K pixels on a side, it can be as sharp as the eye can perceive, and by pumping stereo digital sound through the little earphones, the moving 3-D pictures can have a perfectly realistic soundtrack.
     
    So Hiro’s not actually here at all. He’s in a computer-generated universe that his computer is drawing onto his goggles and pumping into his earphones. In the lingo this universe is known as the Metaverse.
     

    (24)

     

    Hiro has, of course, created “a piece of software called an avatar,” one that is joined by a multitude of others on the “Street,” avatars that communicate with each other in the Metaverse that date, join crowds of groupies around clubs, and act out any of innumerable fantasies:

     

    Stunningly beautiful women, computer-airbrushed and retouched at seventy-two frames a second, like Playboy pinups turned three-dimensional––these are would-be actresses hoping to be discovered. Wild-looking abstracts, tornadoes of gyrating light––hackers who are hoping that Da5id will notice their talent, invite them inside, give them a job. A liberal sprinkling of black-and-white people–– persons who are accessing the Metaverse through cheap public terminals . . . . A lot of these are run-of-the-mill psycho fans devoted to the fantasy of stabbing some particular actress to death.
     

    (41)

     

    The avatars of Snow Crash have spawned endless contemporary offspring at the nexus of film, literature, game culture, and biomedia. The last is exemplified by Eugene Thacker’s experiments with digital anatomy and virtual surgery in which animations seem to fly through the body or produce morphs that exceed anatomical classification.

     
    The ludic dimension of self-transformation in avatar culture puts us in mind of the Freudian sense of “play drive”––the drive unfixed and allowing for infinite possibilities for the driver without consequences in the real world. In Instincts and Their Vicissitudes, retranslated in the recent Penguin edition as Drives and their Fates, Freud wrote of the capacity of drives “to stand in vicariously for one another and to change their objects with ease,” thereby achieving “feats far removed from their original functions” (20). The allusion here to the changeability of objects, to living vicariously, and to the performance of uncommon feats, like flying and passing through material barriers, establishes kinship ties between the avatar and the “driver” or drive-transformer of Freudian Trieb. At issue here is the possible connection between the psychic avatar of the Freudian-Lacanian drive and the gamer avatar who, as a kind of holograph of drive, personifies the impersonalism of the id.
     
    The name of Snow Crash character Da5id reinforces this interpretive drift. At first glance, it registers as a misprint of “David.” On second reading, it homonymically sounds out “Da Id,” the Id, or the It. Recall here that Freud’s” Es, Ich, Uber-Ich was Latinized in the James Strachey Standard Edition by the triad “id,” “ego,” “superego,” and that ever since Bruno Bettleheim scathingly criticized the Strachey translation (in his Freud and Man’s Soul) there has been heated interpretive controversy centered on these particular terms. Taking off from Adam Phillips’s thought-provoking observation that “psychoanalysis is about what two people can say to each other if they agree not to have sex” (xx), Leo Bersani distills a theory of impersonal intimacy from das Es, going back to the book that inspired Freud’s theory of the Id, Georg Groddeck’s 1923 The Book of the It [Das Buch vom Es].10 Groddeck had famously affirmed that
     

    man is animated by the Unknown, there is in him an “Es,” an “It”, some wondrous force which directs both what he himself does, and what happens to him. The affirmation “I live” is only conditionally correct, it expresses only a small and superficial part of the fundamental principle: “Man is lived by the ‘It.’”
     

    (11)

     

    Groddeck’s concept of “das Es” was itself borrowed from Nietzsche, who used it for “whatever in our nature is impersonal and subject to natural law” (23). In Beyond Good and Evil Nietzsche curbed the hubristic “I” by making it subject to the “itness” of thought:

     

    a thought comes when “it” wants to and not when “I” want it, so that it’s a falsification of the fact to say that the subject “I” is the condition of the predicate “think.” It thinks: but that this “it” is precisely that old, celebrated “I” is, to put it mildly, only an assumption, an assertion, in no way an “immediate certainty.” After all, we’ve already done too much with this “it thinks”: this “it” already contains an interpretation of the event and is not part of the process itself.
     

    (17)

     

    The “itness” of “I” underscores the element of foreignness within the subject, a force-field of blind energy that serves as thought’s predicate. Thinking as “itness,” other to or outside of self-consciousness becomes key to any theory of subject technics.

     
    Something of this “itness” informs Lacan’s revisionist account of the Freudian drive. In “Démontage de la pulsion” (“The Deconstruction of the Drive”), a chapter of The Four Fundamental Concepts of Psycho-analysis, Lacan reinstated the distinction between psychical drive (Trieb) and biological instinct often blurred in the English translation of Freud. Lacan maintained that
     

    Drive (pulsion) is not thrust (poussée). Trieb is not Drang, if only for the following reason. In an article written in 1915––that is, a year after the Einfûrung zum Narzissmus, you will see the importance of this reminder soon––entitled Trieb und Triebschicksale––one should avoid translating it by avatar, Triebwandlungen would be avatar, Schicksal is adventure, vicissitude––in this article, then, Freud says that it is important to distinguish four terms in the drive: Drang, thrust; Quelle, the source; Objekt, the object; Ziel, the aim.
     

     

    Interestingly for my purposes, in trying to avoid confusing drive with the thrust or vicissitudes of destiny Lacan clears a conceptual space for translating Triebwandlungen as avatar. Cautioning against the avatar, he nonetheless enters it on the oblique into the discussion of the semantics of the drive. It is important to note that he italicizes the English word avatar in the original French text while discussing the connotations of Freud’s term Triebschicksale: “il faut éviter de traduire [Triebschicksale] par avatar, si c’était Triebwandlungen, ce serait avatar, Schicksal c’est aventure, vicissitude.” In Freud’s German, die Triebverwandlung and der Triebumwandlung (used interchangeably as references to transformation) are invoked to emphasize the reversibility of select pairs of drives: sadism-masochism, voyeurism-exhibitionism, love-hate.

     

    Für beide hier betrachteten Triebbeispiele gilt die Bemerkung, dass die Triebverwandlung durch Verkehrung der Aktivität in Passivität und Wendung gegen die Triebregung gegen die eigene Person eigentllich niemals am ganzen Betrag der Triebregung vorgenommen wird. Die ältere active Triebrichtung bleibt in gewissem Ausmasse neben der jüngeren passiven bestehen, auch wenn der Prozess der Triebumwandlung sehr ausgiebig ausgefalen ist.
     

    (223, emphasis added)

     

    [Translation: It is true of both kinds of drive under consideration here that transformations by reversal of activity into passivity and turning back on the self never actually involve the whole amount of the drive impulse. To some extent, the older, active tendency continues to exist alongside the later, passive one, even when the transformation has been very extensive.]

     

    For Freud, the intellectual stakes of drive conversion include emotional ambivalence, a higher power of egoic defense, and the inhibition of destructive or self-destructive impulses, whereas for Lacan, psychic drive is principally of interest because it interferes with aim (Ziel), thereby restructuring the process of sublimation. Lacan’s arguments, however rich in potential applications, beg the central, interrelated questions: Why select the anomalous word “avatar” (supported by no standard German dictionary) as the appropriate translation for Triebwandlung? Why was it imperative to replace “vicissitudes” with the surrogate term “transformation,” variants of which are found elsewhere in Freud’s essay?

     
    One explanation is that the anomalous term “avatar” was in fact just what Lacan was looking for despite professing the contrary. The notion of avatarity arguably performs theoretical heavy lifting for him, enabling him to align Zeil with the physics of destination rather than the metaphysics of destiny. Lacan, one could say, functions the avatar, in the manner of a gamer theorist. Tuned to the nuances of Freud’s references to verwandeln and umwandeln in Drives and Their Fates, Lacan projects the avatar as something on the order of a drive-transformer capable of reprogramming the Freudian elements invested as drive (triebbesetzt) (150). As avatarity, the drive is inserted into a new sequence of terms that involve play. Starting from the loaded expression “la pulsion en fait le tour,” Lacan spins out le tour as driving around something, as escape, evasion or fraud [le tour d’escamotage] and as le trick (in the sense of to play a trick, to be tricked, to turn a trick) (152-53). The effect of this gaming, of this play on the terms of transformation, directional change, and reverse targeting, is to unseal the fate of the drives, relaunching the intellectual adventure of the avatar as proxy or object-cause of desire.11
     
    For Lacan, the butterfly inspires phobic terror in the Wolfman because the Wolfman recognizes that “the beating of little wings is not so very far from the beating of causation, of the primal stripe marking his being for the first time with the grid of desire” (76). Here the wings act like a kind of faire causatif, a proxy or avatar that sets subject-formation in motion and resets the path of the drives. In both Freud and Lacan the avatar comes off as distinctly threatening and persecutory, not in the same way as the Other of the interiorized social gaze, but as a causative force––inchoate and pressuring––beyond intelligible grasp. Operating like an adaptor, transformer, or refreshed game-start, the Lacanian Triebwandlungen gives us avatar agency as the unsettling yet exciting specter of subject “cause” temporarily unhitched from aim.
     
    Contemporary gamer theorists have emphasized the “driven” gamer whose “move acts” translate the player character’s position in the game world. Move acts give concrete expression to the abstract idea of Triebwandlungen; they swivel, reverse, and orient the flows of agency. They target an object that can easily shift course and aim. Alex Galloway writes that move acts “are commonly effected by using a joystick or analog stick, or any type of movement controller . . . in games like Tetris where the player does not have a strict player character avatar, move acts still come in the form of spatial translation, rotation, stacking, and interfacing of game tokens” (Gaming 22). Following Galloway’s argument, move acts can stand in for avatars, but this does not prevent them from giving full suasion to avatarity in its multiple meanings as targeted pulsion, power tool, or proxy of multiple personality.
     

    Subject-Avatar: A User’s Manual

     
    To equate the avatar with drive reinforces the purely abstract character of the subject of technics at the expense of the popular image. But this is to ignore potentially interesting theoretical connections between libidinal and cultural economy. It is surely no trivial symptom that avatars are occasionally referred to as “toons” (see Figure 1).
     

     
    Djnaughtyjay Valentine Eva and Franco Mattes aka 0100101110101101.ORG 2006 Digital print on canvas 87 x 114 cm Image used courtesy of Postmasters Gallery, New York.

     

    Click for larger view

    Figure 1.

    Djnaughtyjay Valentine Eva and Franco Mattes aka 0100101110101101.ORG 2006 Digital print on canvas 87 x 114 cm Image used courtesy of Postmasters Gallery, New York.

     

     
    They have a recognizable cartoonish look, part special effects, part mutant creature, that has given rise to imaginative work by artists like JODI, Toni Dove, Keith Cottingham (Fictitious Portraits 1996), Masaki Fujihata (Nuzzle Afar), Eddo Stern, John Klima, and the Italian duo Eva and Franco Mattes (a.k.a. 010010110101101.ORG), whose recent exhibition, 13 Most Beautiful Avatars, plucks its “subjects” from Second Life. The artists are clearly wise to the way in which Second Life changes out the tradition of character Bildung in favor of building your character in a capitalist economy. Building equals buying (in Linden dollars, the currency of Second Life). The players of Second Life opt for a kind of “digital Darwinism” (Wark) as they adapt the principles and procedures of cosmetic surgery––augmentation, enhancement, nose jobs, liposuction, botox––to virtual body-construction. Generating a portrait gallery that warrants comparison with Facebook Andy Warhol’s silkscreens of celebrities, or Diane Arbus-inspired “family albums” of marginals, freaks and superheros, 13 Most Beautiful Avatars tests the limits of communitarian “life-sharing” against the online conventions of a post-human meat market. As Jenny Diski notes,
     

    eventually your avatar becomes a caricature of what you have always wanted to be, few can resist producing the tinseltown dream version. Second Life is almost entirely inhabited by impossibly long-legged, big-breasted, muscle-rippling blondes with lips so plumped full of what would be collagen in the real world that they make Ivana Trump’s mouth look mean. The males are much the same only taller.

     

    Despite this conformism, avatars move beyond the commercialized beauty ideal towards an aesthetics of virtual surface and augmented bodies: skin, jewels, and tattoos, extreme morphology, intersectional race and gender, cross-speciation. Avatars in this way reinforce the utopian conviction that, in the words of the Mattes partners, “the most radical action you can do is to subvert yourself.”

     
    Avatars tender the hope of a surrogate self capable of unseating the lexicon of “self” and “own” underwriting possessive individualism. Though with avatars, as one critic puts it, “the cloud of raw data has finally solidified into a body and a face,” they can also be regarded as screen-savers of the ego; as decoys masking the thingness of data and the autonomy of the drive. As Laetitia Wilson notes with respect to the game Proxy, “your agent suddenly really does have a ‘life of its own.’” Wilson complicates the notion of avatar agency with the notion of proxy, defined within the confines of the online game of the same name as an “interpassive object” that mediates program and cybernetic dopplegänger:12
     

    Proxy is an art: software and game fusion that playfully stretches the parameters of each of these spheres while addressing notions of subjectivity, community and surveillance and juggling issues of agency and interpassivity. As a “player” one can adopt an “agent” or series of “agents.” These agents function as avatars, as information watchdogs, seekers and battlers in a variety of information spaces (textual and graphical). A given agent is personalised with your chosen psychological profile and the aim is to maintain stability in your agent’s psychological state. This interpassive object––as a mediator between oneself and the game-space––is thus a surrogate self that demands appropriate action or dialogue to avoid psychological problems; one’s game score decreases when the program “detects” feelings of anxiety or alienation in one’s agent. Individual agency is extended into the game-space as one is required to act appropriately, according to the “rules” of the “game” and in response to dialogue with other agents (other players).

     

    The critical issue at stake here, clearly, is that “control over your symbolic stand-in is denied.” What we have is not just feedback, but blow-back; a pressure exerted by the proxy drive. Galloway’s correlative to the proxy is the informatic avatar. “Any informatic instance of a ‘role,’ [he writes] is thus always subtended by the necessary and continuous input of ‘rolls’ in the form of random-number generation and other nonrandom informatic inputs. Identity becomes mathematics, and mathematics becomes identity” (StarCraft” 92). Galloway enables a subject of technics characterized by a constantly self-updating set of algorithms that mold bodily form, choreograph gestural affect, and redirect the drives.

     
    How is pure drive made domus or environmental form? What would avatar architecture be? One is easily led to assume that it would simply replicate the period styles and signature designs of the “real world.” In Snow Crash, this hypothesis is borne out. Metaverse architecture is divided between garish, Las Vegas-style structures, “freed from the constraints of physics and finance,” and better neighborhoods of the programmer elite. Here “you can see ‘Frank Lloyd Wright reproductions and some fancy Victoriana’” (26). Simulation is the rule in MORGS like the Sims or Second Life: prime estates reproduce icons and blue-chip buildings, from Harvard University to a high tech Swedish Embassy. But there are clearly other models of avatar environments, identifiable perhaps as “The algorithm made me do it” architecture. Here the program is allowed to run, self-evolving according to principles of autopoeisis, producing architecture that is dynamically responsive and stochastic. Such experimentalism has of course been realized for several decades now, influencing blob architecture and preoccupying research teams at places like MIT’s Media Lab, and stimulating projects like Façade Ecology (2003-06), a recent collaboration between Small Design Firm and EAR Studio that transformed a building skin into a responsive membrane coated with informational organisms. Many recent projects have contrived a subject of technics in architectural form. “Body Temperature Scan” by the Italian design studio laN+ experiments not just with body-reading surfaces, but also with avatar morphologies that re-scale human size and proportion. In “Sangre,” a project by Hernan Diaz Alonso, a vitalist, corpuscular architectural avatar is built out of the formal properties of blood. In “Hypnocenter” (see Figure 2), by the French firm R and Sie, a man lives in a cage of giant vertebra-algorithms made solid––encircled by screen monitors, or perhaps it is architecture as brain or coextensive cognitive milieu.
     

     
    Paris Hypnochamber By R&Sie (François Roche and Stéphanie Lavaux)

     

    Click for larger view

    Figure 2.

    Paris Hypnochamber By R&Sie (François Roche and Stéphanie Lavaux)

     

     
    Arguably, “the man” is not so much imprisoned by technics as ingrown to its environmental and neuronal structure. Subject technics in this instance merges with a techtonics that is invasive of the urban surround. The program runs rampant, submerging facades, encircling a lamp-post, and charging ahead full-throttle to infinity.
     
    Avatarity, identified with a construct of the techno-subject as “driver” of the drive or “the algorithm made me do it” form, is adduced here to be continuous with theories of technical milieus, subjective impersonalism and psychoanalytic neutrality. In this sense, “theory” is given a “second life” as media or subject technics. The question remains, however, why one might want to hold on to a de-ontologized subject of technics. What accounts for the enduring investment in an impersonal subject? One explanation is that subjective impersonalism keeps the cloying individualism of mainstream humanism at bay and prepares the conditions for a new universal subject, a generic subject as Alain Badiou would have it, modeled through set theory and mathematical ontology.13 Subject technics also endures because it is congenial to capitalism. Avatars, as we have seen, commoditize the component “features”‘ of top brand bodies and buildings, promote “safe” communitas through online zones of sociality, re-sell already sold properties (land, houses, institutions), and inflate the value of trademark and signature by effectively marketing identities, ideas and products. But they also, countervailingly, contour a parallel universe characterized by a de-privatized commons. Avatarity in this instance might well refer to an equalized playing field of egoic drives and aims that undercuts fantasies of omnipotence and possessive individualism. If, as Brian Massumi suggests, one takes the theological element out of gaming (removing the trigger for targeting goals and the reward system for scoring), what remains is play or the topology of a ludic circus in which multiperspectival common angles, gestural syncopations, and convergent affects produce a fluctuating, gradient field of individuation and de-individuation. For Massumi, ever the Deleuzian, avatars can become agents of a technological utopia. With their high-performing motion sensors, gravity-defying power to jump worlds, and capacity for becoming subject and other at the same time, avatars have the potential of making the virtual feel.14 For Stiegler, something like this avatarity is identified with process-thinking, programmed into future robotics (which will emphasize the reproducibility of psychomotor as well as motor skills). Stiegler glimpses an evolutionary model based on (Simondonian) transindividuation that gives new life to experimental phenomenology (Prendre 184). I have emphasized that the avatar embodies the structural condition of the drive’s expression, its performative vicissitudes or Triebwandlungen that substitutes for a Freudian metaphysics of destiny (Schicksale). In this sense, the avatar is a partly-subjectified, partly impersonalized vicissitude of the drive. As a subject of technics, the avatar is not the idealized double of the player-subject (which is the naive concept of avatar), but a transformer of fates, at once independent and mimetic of some modicum of subjective agency.
     

    Emily Apter is Professor of French, English, and Comparative Literature at New York University. Books include: The Translation Zone: A New Comparative Literature (2006), Continental Drift: From National Characters to Virtual Subjects (1999), Fetishism as Cultural Discourse (co-edited with William Pietz in 1993), Feminizing the Fetish: Psychoanalysis and Narrative Obsession in Turn-of-the-Century France (1991), and André Gide and the Codes of Homotextuality (1987). Her articles have appeared in Critical Inquiry, PMLA, Comparative Literary Studies, Grey Room, The Boston Review, American Literary History, Sites, Parallax, Modern Language Notes, Esprit Créateur, Critique, October, and Public Culture. She edits the book series Translation/Transnation for Princeton University Press. Projects underway include editorial work on the English edition of the Vocabulaire Européen des philosophies: Dictionnaire des Intraduisibles and two books: What is Yours, Ours and Mine: Essays on Property and the Creative Commons and The Politics of Periodization.

     

     

    Footnotes

     
    1. See Stiegler, Epithemeus, Chapter 3, Part 1 (“Who? What? The Invention of the Human”) and Chapter 3, Part 2 (“The Disengagement of the What”), especially 267-76.

     

     
    2. The term avatar emerged in the mid-eighties as the name for an ideal, victorious player (as in the game Ultima IV of 1985) or to designate the virtual double of the agent-player (as in the George Lucas game Habitat of 1987). See Morningstar and Farmer (http://www.fudco.com/chip/lessons.html). The essay was first given as a lecture in 1990, but much of what the authors have to say about the object-driven parameters of Habitat’s world is relevant to a theory of the avatar as “driver.” One can chart the gradual abandonment of the theological position of drive-programmers in favor of a libertarian approach in which programmers cast themselves as choreographers or “facilitators.”

     

     
    3. Friedmann sets off his theory of the technical milieu, with its emphasis on the subject’s environmental entrainment, over and against André Leroi-Gourhan’s anthropological use of the term, which emphasizes how the tool (and the know-how of utensility more broadly) “invents” the human. Both Friedmann and Leroi-Gourhan were working with the concept in the 1940s. By the 1950s, cybernetics, information theory, and debates over human engineering would expand the parameters of technical milieu theory in relation to consciousness, subjectivity, and immersive ambience. Raymond Ruyer’s La cybernétique et l’origine de l’information (Paris: Flammarion, 1954) and Gilbert Simondon’s Du Mode d’existence des objets techniques (1958) are key representative works for these theoretical and disciplinary extensions.

     

     
    4. See also Gilbert Simondon, L’individuation psychique et collective (Paris: Aubier, 1989 and 2007). The 2007 edition contains a preface by Bernard Stiegler.

     

     
    5. See also Bernard Stiegler, Prendre soin de la jeunesse et des générations (Paris: Flammarion, 2008). In this last work, we see the influence of the Foucault lectures from 1977-79 in which the notion of “discipline” is extended to disciplinary techniques and new modes of governmentality that grow out of and are newly applied to genetics, the politics of security, social and urban planning, and new forms of biopolitics. See Michel Foucault, Sécurité, Territoire, Population. Cours au Collège de France. 1977-1978, ed. François Ewald et. al. (Paris: Gallimard/Seuil, 2004) and Foucault, Naissance de la biopolitique. Cours au Collège de France 1978-1979, ed. François Ewald et al. (Paris: Gallimard/Seuil, 2004).

     

     
    6. See Sloterdijk, Derrida, un Egyptien (Paris: Maren Sell Editeurs, 2006), esp. 19-21.

     

     
    7. I borrow this expression from Paul Baines; see his “Subjectless Subjectivities” in A Shock to Thought: Expression After Deleuze and Guattari, ed. Brian Massumi (London: Routledge, 2002), 101-16. Baines draws heavily on the work of Raymond Ruyer, whose Paradoxes de la conscience et limites de l’automatisme (Paris: Albin Michel, 1966) is especially relevant to a theory of the avatar as transformer of drive.

     

     
    8. Alexander Galloway, in an email of June 10, 2007. In his essay “StarCraft, or, Balance” Galloway writes of the avatar: “the homonymic pun is crucial here insofar as it shows the extent to which the very definition of the avatar is impossible to separate from the uncanny effects of linguistic techne” (92).

     

     
    9. Translation my own.

     

     
    10. See Leo Bersani, “The It in the I: Patrice Leconte, Henry James, and Analytic Love,” in The Henry James Review 27.3 (Fall 2006): 202-14.

     

     
    11. Samuel Weber, “Medium, Reflexivity and the Economy of the Self.” Writing about Walter Benjamin’s dissertation, “The Concept of Criticism in German Romanticism” [Der Begriff der Kunstkritik in der deutschen Romantik], Weber glosses Benjamin’s insistence on the transformative (alterity-producing) potential of thinking qua medium or pure mediacy:
     

     

    In contrast to Fichte, the Romantics do not shy away from affirming the “absolute” dimension of “reflection” and Benjamin explains this precisely through the notion of medium. But his use of the term here, far from resolving the ambiguities of the Romantic tendency to regard reflection as Absolute, actually brings them to the fore. They can be described in the following way. On the one hand, “medium ” designates a process that is not simply instrumental or teleological but that seems to have a certain autonomy: it functions immediately, as indicated, and leaves nothing outside of itself. This in turn tends to construe the medium of reflection as ultimately a movement of the “self,” a Selbstbewegung. On the other hand, however, this “movement” is precisely never simply circular or self-contained: it may be “continual” or “constant”––stetig is the German word Benjamin uses––and it may also entail a kind of unfolding or development––Entfaltung––but it is also and above all, a transformation. In the first pages of his dissertation, Benjamin emphasizes this point: “Under the term ‘reflection’ is understood the transformative (umformende)––and nothing but the transformative––reflecting on a form” (20/XX). Form is already a reflective category that in reflecting itself further, alters and transforms itself. A certain alterity is thus essentially at work at the heart of the reflective movement. The ambiguity or tension thus results between such alterity, on the one hand, associated with a dynamics of transformation and alteration, and on the other the notion of a movement of the self returning to itself also associated with the notion of reflection. The nature of the movement itself “reflects” this constitutive ambiguity: on the one hand it is “stetig,” continual, on the other it moves by leaps and bounds.

     
    12. Interpassivity is a term used by Slavoj Zizek to “denote those abundant mechanisms we employ to avoid actually doing something. Hence, the hidden function of canned laughter––namely, that it laughs for us, so we don’t have to feel obliged to respond to the program in an active mode, expending unnecessary energy laughing for ourselves. For Zizek, interpassivity is keyed to a conception of the body as a “desubjectivized multitude of partial objects” (180).

     

     
    13. Badiou, much like Zizek, articulates the desire for empty and/or mechanical structures of subjectivity with quasi-religious discourses or credos of fidelity to the event are invoked to shore up the desire.

     

     
    14. My summary of remarks made by Brian Massumi in discussion following a presentation by Brian Massumi and Erin Manning titled “Arts of Relation,” given at the conference “Architecture in the Space of Flows” held at Newcastle University on 24 June 2007. Massumi and Manning both work with notions of process, flow, and concrescence indebted to the work of Alfred North Whitehead; see Whitehead, Process and Reality (Gifford Lectures Delivered in the University of Edinburgh During the Session 1927-28) (New York: Free Press, 1978).
     

    Works Cited

     

    • Diski, Jenny. “Jowls Are Available.” London Review of Books 8 Feb. 2007: <www.lrb.co.uk/v29/n03/disk01_.html>.
    • Freud, Sigmund. “Drives and Their Fate.” 1915. The Unconscious. Trans. Graham Frankland. Ed. Adam Phillips. London: Penguin Books, 2005.
    • –––. “The Ego and the Id.” 1927. Trans. Joan Riviere. The Standard Edition of the Complete Psychological Works of Sigmund Freud. Vol. 19. Ed. James Strachey. London: Hogarth, 1995.
    • –––. “Triebe und Triebschicksale.” Gesammelte Werke. Vol. 10. Frankfurt am Main: Fischer Taschenbuch Verlag, 1999.
    • Friedmann, Georges. Machine et humanisme: Problèmes humains du machinisme industriel. Paris: Gallimard, 1946.
    • Galloway, Alexander R. Gaming: Essays on Algorithmic Culture. London: U of Minnesota P, 2006.
    • –––. “StarCraft, or Balance.” Grey Room 28 (Summer 2007): 86-107.
    • [CrossRef]
    • Groddeck, Georg. The Book of the It [Das Buch vom Es]. Trans. V.M.E. Collins. New York: Knopf, 1949.
    • Lacan, Jacques. “The Deconstruction of the Drive.” The Four Fundamental
      Concepts of Psycho-Analysis
      . Trans. Alan Sheridan. New York: Norton,
    • 1978.
    • Leroi-Gournhan, André. Milieu et techniques. Paris: Albin Michel, 1945.
    • Little, Gregory. “A Manifesto for Avatars.” Intertexts 3.2 (Fall 1999). http://www.gregorylittle.org/avatars/text.html.
    • Luhmann, Niklas. Love as Passion: The Codification of Intimacy [Liebe Als Passion]. Trans. Jeremy Gaines and Doris L. Jones. Stanford: Stanford UP, 1998.
    • Massumi, Brian. “Introduction: Like a Thought.” A Shock to Thought: Expression After Deleuze and Guattari. Ed. Brian Massumi. New York: Routledge, 2002.
    • Morningstar, Chip, and F. Randall Farmer. “The Lessons of Lucasfilm’s Habitat.” Cyberspace: First Steps. Ed. Michael Benedikt. Cambridge: MIT P, 1991. 273-301.
    • Nancy, Jean-Luc. L’Intrus. Paris: Galilée, 2000.
    • Nietszche, Friedrich. Beyond Good and Evil. Trans. Walter Kaufmann. New York: Vintage, 1989.
    • Phillips, Adam. “Introduction.” Freud, Sigmund. Wild Analysis. Trans. Alan Bance. London: Penguin, 2002. vii-xxvi.
    • Simondon, Gilbert. Du Mode d’existence des objets techniques. 1958. Paris: Aubier, 1989.
    • Stephenson, Neal. Snow Crash. New York: Bantam, 1992.
    • Stiegler, Bernard. Prendre soin: Tome 1, De la jeunesse et des générations. Paris: Flammarion, 2008.
    • –––. Technics and Time, 1: The Fault of Epimetheus. Trans. Richard Beardsworth and George Collins. Stanford: Stanford UP, 1998.
    • Wark, McKenzie. Gamer Theory. Cambridge: Harvard UP, 2007.
    • Weber, Samuel. Mass Mediauras: Essays on Form, Technics, and Media. Stanford: Stanford UP, 1996.
    • –––. “Medium, Reflexivity, and the Economy of the Self.” Unpublished paper. 20 Dec.2007. University of Poitiers.
    • Wilson, Laetitia. “Interactivity or Interpassivity: a Question of Agency in Digital Play.” Fine Art Forum 17.8 (August 2003).
    • Zizek, Slavoj. The Plague of Fantasies. London: Verso, 1997.

     

     
  • Spins

    John Mowitt (bio)
    Department of Cultural Studies and Comparative Literature, University of Minnesota
    mowit001@umn.edu

    Abstract
     
    This essay explores some of the points of contact between philosophical reflection and dance. Paying close attention to way the figure of dance is put to work in texts by Norbert Elias, Karl Marx, Søren Kierkegaard, Friedrich Nietzsche, Paul de Man, Plato, and Jacques Derrida, the essay teases out a connection between the philosophical gesture of exemplification, the non sequitur whereby the abstract is propped up by or otherwise made to lean upon the concrete, and the move to an “outside” of the text understood either simply as reference, or more ambitiously as revolution. When, as is the case with the texts attended to here, dance is the example exemplified, a swirling field of reflexive associations arise around it, associations that invite us to recognize in dance a stance to be taken, perhaps even a set of steps to be followed, as activists and scholars alike contemplate what will be required to get from one world to another.
     

    “Books that teach how to dance–– There are writers, who, by presenting the impossible as possible and speaking of morality and genius as if both were merely a mood, a caprice, produce a feeling of high-spirited freedom, as if one were to get up on tip-toe and simply had to dance for joy.”
     

    –––Nietzsche, “From the Souls of Artists and Writers” (139)

     

    Testing

     
    Leaping right in I offer the following as a way to find one’s footing in what follows. Despite the epigraph from Human all too Human, this is not a study of Nietzsche. Nietzsche comes up, but the text is not about him. For that matter Elias, Marx, Kierkegaard, de Man, Plato, and Derrida all come up, but the text is not about them. It is about dance and philosophical reflection as they are taken up by these figures. What recommends these figures is that they thematize different but related aspects of the matter at hand, and they do so with different degrees of intensity. In Marx dancing appears, as it were, in passing. In Nietzsche it returns eternally. Both, however, are concerned with the limits and force of philosophical reflection, a concern that achieves a distinctly reflexive urgency in the fashionable latecomers, Derrida and de Man. This said, what follows has no ambition to be either a philosophy of dance or a history of the relation between philosophers and dancers. Instead, this is a text that seeks primarily to raise questions about dance by detailing how dance is staged within philosophical reflection. In effect, it pushes off from the hardly controversial hunch that there is more to dance than we might otherwise think, and that this “more” becomes accessible when tracing, however erratically, the way philosophical reflection (of the sort embodied in Nietzsche’s remarks above) puts dance to work.
     
    Specifically, I am proposing to speculate on the way dance figures in the work of philosophical exemplification. That is, the procedure, altogether routine, whereby the labor of abstraction is interrupted in order, through recourse to an example, to concretize a particular thought. This interruption need not be announced––”for example”––indeed, as in the case of Nietzsche’s remarks, it may in effect engulf the labor of abstraction, providing it with an animating figure. But an interruption it remains. Doubtless, one of the reasons Nietzsche is something of a philosophical renegade derives from the way his entire corpus is something of a philosophical interruption––as de Man, following Schlegel, will say, a permanent parabasis. Be that as it may, a striking thing about one of his favorite interruptive devices, dance, is the way it (or its avatars, leaping, jumping, pirouetting, etc.) races back and forth over its semantic status as a figure, an exemplary point of reference (when Kierkegaard appeals to the ballet), and as a designation of the very gesture of exemplification itself. Indeed, in attempting to engage this racing I have turned to my titular motif, “spins”––a term now capable of signifying interpretation, move, and turn.
     
    This text then unfurls as a series of passes, spins, over its animating hunch regarding dance. What repeats in each spin is a stratified reflection on how, in effect, dance puts philosophy on edge. That is, first, a reflection on how the gesture of philosophical exemplification is exemplified, even codified, in the example of dance, and second, a reflection on how philosophical discourse appeals to the example of dance to articulate both its relation to its own limits (the problem of reference), and its relation to the (an)other world conjured through its critique of the world to which it refers (the problem of revolution). What emerges is an admittedly eccentric genealogy of the philosophical maneuvering that, if we are to believe Perry Anderson, came to a head in the postmodern, a condition whose emergence was prompted by the belated and thus decisive encounter of Charles Olson (or Black Mountain College) and Jean-François Lyotard. Important here is not the postmodern as such, but the way the concept has come to serve as a way to think the socio-historical break I invoked under the heading of “revolution.” That dance, precisely in the way it is deployed to figure, to refer to the social link and the question of leading––or, stated etymologically, of hegemony–– insistently comes up here is part of what suggests, perhaps even hypnotically, that there is, as I said, more to be said both about and with it.
     

    One

     
    When in 1968 Norbert Elias republished the dissertation he had written with Karl Mannheim, The Civilizing Process, he added a substantial new introduction to volume one, The History of Manners. As its opening paragraphs clarify, Elias is keen to establish the relevance of a study originally conceived and written in the wake of World War II to a present marked by imperial wars, anti-colonial struggle, and the insurgency of groups later referred to as “the new social movements,” just to pick out some of the more well-recognized challenges to the increasingly problematical relation between capital and civilization. Never shy about appealing to the power of theory, Elias establishes the relevance of his study by teasing out some of its important theoretical innovations. His introduction situates the project at the point at which figural language gestures toward what it would otherwise have trouble getting at:
     

    The concept of figuration has been introduced precisely because it expresses what we call “society” more clearly and unambiguously than the existing conceptual tools of sociology, as neither an abstraction of attributes of individuals existing without a society, nor a “system” or “totality” beyond individuals, but the network of interdependencies formed by individuals . . . . What is meant by the concept of the figuration can be conveniently explained by reference to social dances. They are, in fact, the simplest example that could be chosen. One should think of a mazurka, a minuet, a polonaise, a tango, or rock ‘n’ roll. The image of the mobile figurations of interdependent people on a dance floor perhaps makes it easier to imagine states, cities, families, and also capitalist, communist and feudal systems as figurations. By using this concept we can eliminate the antithesis, resting finally on different values and ideals, immanent today in the use of the words “individual” and “society.”
     

    (261-62)

     

    Elias goes on to rephrase Yeats’s point in “Among School Children”––that one cannot know the dancer from the dance––and stresses that while dance is nevertheless relatively independent of specific dancers, it cannot be treated as a separable “mental construction.” Imagine something like the eidos of the tango. Indeed, for Elias figuration names both the differently scaled and paced systems of Durkheimean interdependencies that interest him, and the properly social fact that their explanations and the “tools” that enable them belong to these very systems. In effect, sociology has partnered, or paired up, with society.

     
    So what is Elias telling us about dance? Insofar as dance exemplifies figuration it is through figuration that one is obliged to sidle up to dance. As the cited passage makes clear, Elias appeals to figuration in order to transgress, that is disclose, a certain disciplinary limit. Specifically, figuration helps one get at an enabling insight of what for several decades has gone by the name of social constructivism, that is, the proposition that the presumed agents or bearers of social relations are themselves the products of those very relations. They are not simply products in the sense that they see themselves this way, but they are––down to the very matter of their being––social constructs. Now, truth be told, Elias does not explicitly advance this sort of vigorous constructivism, but his entire effort to demonstrate how affective thresholds of disgust, shame, and civility are rendered historical through the means by which specific societies identify and regulate such thresholds assumes, if followed to the end of the line, precisely such a view. In this he is clearly a “fellow traveler” of the Frankfurt School, although his relation to Marxism was always more ambivalent than theirs, which was ambivalent enough.
     
    Figuration then falls into step with concepts like mediation and articulation. Like them it expressly designates the Moebian interface between the inside and the outside of the agent, and the inside and outside of the structure, or as Elias puts it, the individual and society. The individual is not in society like an animal in a cage (whether iron or not). Instead, the individual is in society the way speaking, at least for Saussure, is in language. Sensing that sociology (at least in the western European tradition) cannot think outside the box, that is, cannot understand the preposition “in” without converting it into a designation of containment and therefore distributing it across the divide between container and contained, Elias feels compelled to introduce figuration. As if to concede but also thereby accentuate the concept’s strangeness, he immediately seeks to exemplify it. Hence the appeal to dance.
     
    But before elaborating further what this tells us about dance, consider the gesture of exemplification itself. On the one hand, although figuration might be opaque to sociologists, it is perhaps a little too self-evident (meaningfully opaque?) to students of literature, especially those aware of the traditions and practices traced by Auerbach in his probing meditation, “Figura,” or, to invoke a post-de Manian rhetoric, to those familiar with the concept of figural language. Might this not suggest that the gesture of exemplification is an apotropaic one? Is Elias gesturing toward exemplification not in order to render the strange familiar but to fend off a certain reading, specifically a reading in which the figural would install itself at precisely the point where agency and structure can no longer be either differentiated or confused? To invoke the intellectual high point of the Clinton administration, perhaps the decisive matter is not what “is” means, but what “in” means. On the other hand, setting aside without discarding the apotropaic possibility, the gesture nevertheless assumes the profile of what Austin in How to do Things with Words calls a performative, that is, in reaching across from the theoretical to the quotidian, in referring to a world of readers not already prepared to follow his theoretical lead, Elias makes exemplification act out something like the Moebian interface of figuration, where the meaning of a text is in its readers the way speaking, to invoke an earlier example, is in language. On the one hand and on the other, together they join the figural and the performative, reminding us not only that the apotropaic is trope-like, but that the act of exemplification is also a feint, a dip where the quotidian has already slipped into or out of the philosophical, the text into or out of the reader whose lack of familiarity with figuration is then disclosed as a mirage. As Nietzsche said about those books that make us get up on tip-toe and dance, presenting the impossible as possible, genius becomes capricious, morality a mere tone.
     
    This implies, does it not, that Elias’s turn to dance is already part of what he wants us to import into figuration from dance. And vice versa. Dance, insofar as it both exemplifies figuration and exemplification itself, does so because dance taps out the fleeting but impassable frontier between an inside and an outside that in arising everywhere belongs to the endless, though hardly seamless, referential encounter between theory and society, or, if one prefers (although the differences matter), between thought and world. Important here is not the leap from dance as stylized movements to dance as example, for the example, however theoretically rich, is nothing more than steps and movements, but the spin out on the other side of the frontier negotiated by the concept of figuration from among the concepts Deleuze and Guattari, as if in commemoration of their own relation, call friends. “Dancin’ with myself,” indeed.
     
    This said, historians of popular dance would certainly not miss the trajectories–– popular/elite, collective/singular––sketched in Elias’s list of examples. But precisely because this list is an example within an example, it points beyond its contents. It thus invites consideration of what Elias actually knows of the dances listed. The following excerpt from “Biographical Interview with Norbert Elias” is suggestive. In discussing Elias’s Nazi-provoked exile in Paris, the interviewer asks:
     

    In which quarter of Paris did you live? Probably Montparnasse; I lived in a hotel. It was very nice to go dancing at the Apache, near the Bastille, and to sit at the cafés in Montparnasse. You could eat very well at cheap restaurants, and meet everybody––except French people. But at the same time it was a very difficult time, the only time I ever went hungry because my money had run out.
     

     

    This exchange refers to a context marked by frustration, specifically Elias’s frustration with being excluded from Paris and the French despite his command of the language and his appreciation for French intellectual traditions. It is intriguing that the experience of dance figures here. Intriguing as well that Elias liked to dance at a place called the Apache. The term “apache” actually entered the French language through the exertions of Emile Darsy at Le Figaro when, in the early years of the twentieth century, he introduced “apache” (modeled, it turns out, on a eighteenth-century British appropriation of “Mohawk”) to designate Parisian gangs given to various forms of urban violence and crime. With an ethnographic ignorance to rival that of people rabid about the right to name athletic teams “redskins,” “chiefs,” and the like, the French adopted this instance of rebarbative “primitivism,” and happily used it to name clubs and bars that may or may not have catered to such gangs, but which obviously promised patrons a rowdy, even wild (Darsy picked the term up from American stories of the “wild west” being translated at the time) atmosphere in which so called apache dancing (an especially aggressive, even misogynistic form of gymnastic gyrating) almost certainly took place.

     
    In the absence of reliable witnesses it is impossible to know whether Elias was, as we say, dancing on the tables at the Apache. In the end, this is probably only interesting, but not important. What is important is that this example dips the concept of “figuration” into an interesting genealogy, one that becomes clear when in addition to all the other edges evoked and finessed by Elias––foreigner, Jew, intellectual (just to name a few)––one recognizes here Marx’s engagement with Hegel and the secret of fetishism. It is significant that in Capital Volume I Marx has occasion to deploy his famous figure of corporal inversion both in the postface to the second edition (where he is acknowledging and settling the debt with Hegel) and in his analysis of the commodity. In the first, he proposes husking the dialectic from its mystical shell by recognizing that with Hegel “it is standing on its head” (103). In the second, he describes the commodity:
     

    but as soon as it [his example is that of a table] emerges as a commodity, it changes into a thing which transcends sensuousness. It not only stands with its feet on the ground, but, in relation to all other commodities, it stands on its head, and evolves out of its wooden brain grotesque ideas, far more wonderful than if it were to begin dancing of its own free will.
     

    (163-64)

     

    The implication is clear, namely that transcendental idealism is the commodity in philosophical form, or spun in the opposite direction, that the commodity’s grotesque ideas are Hegelian. Equally clear is the assertion––rendered stenographic in the 11th thesis on Feuerbach––that in order to cross from an interpretation to a transformation of the world, a revolution, Marxism must break, and break decisively, with the commodified forms of philosophical discourse. Marxism, however faithful it must be to objects, cannot, in the end, allow itself to be thought by them, a risk actually entertained by Marx when slightly later in Capital I he presents Marxism as the content of what commodities might say about their value if provided an interpreter. He calls this sustained instance of prosopopoeia an example (ein Beispiel).

     
    So, to put the matter concisely, is figuration––precisely to the extent that it rediscovers society in the individual and the individual in society––an expression of this vamp toward the philosophical repudiation of the world of the commodity? Or, what is the difference between dancing tables (note Marx’s dependency on the figure of catachresis here) and dancing that might take place on tables? Reading these as two versions of the same question, we are confronted with the truly wild, perhaps on the way to the postmodern, articulation of the co-implication of philosophy and dance. Both Elias and Marx write as though dance figures and figures essentially on the path from reference to revolution. Surely this is not the dance, the writing of the chorus, we thought we knew.
     

    Two

     
    Those who have wrestled with the angelic corpus of Kierkegaard (including, of course, those texts authored by him as well as those authored by his pseudonymic masks) know that it is a body of material sprawled across the discursive practices of philosophy, theology and poetry, to mention only the most obvious landmarks. Indeed, many of his texts worry precisely over the matter of which law of genre they may be in violation of, a worry, in fact an anxiety, that he passed along to Heidegger when, in 1955, the latter sought to separate thinking out from philosophy in a way pre-dicted by Kierkegaard’s struggle to separate faith from theology. At issue here is an edgy reflection on the question of “what is philosophy?” that finds trenchant expression in, among other places, that most autobiographical of texts, Fear and Trembling. If, as has been argued, the example of dance is likely to haunt any such gesture of delimitation––especially when executed with passion––then one is not surprised to find the figure of the ballet dancer leaping and spinning around in de Silentio’s text.1 Its most sustained appearance takes place in that section of the text designated, “Preliminary Expectoration”:
     

    It is supposed to be the most difficult feat for a ballet dancer to leap into a specific posture in such a way that he never once strains for the posture but in the very leap assumes the posture. Perhaps there is no ballet dancer who can do it––but this knight [the knight of faith] does it. Most people live completely absorbed in worldly joys and sorrows; they are benchwarmers who do not take part in the dance. The knights of infinity are ballet dancers and have elevation. They make the upward movement and come down again, and this, too, is not an unhappy diversion and is not unlovely to see. But every time they come down, they are unable to assume the posture immediately, they waver for a moment, and this wavering shows that they are aliens in the world. It is more or less conspicuous according to their skill, but even the most skillful of these knights cannot hide this wavering. One does not need to see them in the air; one needs only to see them the instant they touch and have touched the earth––and then one recognizes them. But to be able to come down in such a way that instantaneously one seems to stand and to walk, to change the leap into life into walking, absolutely to express the sublime in the pedestrian––only that knight [the knight of faith] can do it, and this is the one and only marvel.
     

    (41)

     

    This passage follows an extended stalker’s monologue in which de Silentio describes his pilgrimage to the abode of the knight of faith and his effort once there to discern in the knight evidence of what in the passage is referred to as his sublimity. Restating in narrative form the relation between public and private reasoning as formulated by Kant in “What is Enlightenment?” (in private we can give no sign of our critical and if so desired public repudiation of our professional obligations), de Silentio draws attention to the paradoxical and ultimately absurd character of the knight of faith’s singular relation to the absolute. As he puts it in the very steep climb, “Problema II,”

     

    the paradox of faith, then, is this: that the single individual is higher than the universal, that the single individual––to recall a distinction in dogmatics rather rare these days––determines his relation to the universal [the ethical] by his relation to the absolute [god], not his relation to the absolute by his relation to the universal.
     

    (70)

     

    As if channeling Spinoza’s misnamed pantheism, de Silentio insists that under such circumstances one loves god not by dutifully loving one’s neighbor, but simply by truly loving (although presumably not coveting––even in one’s heart) one’s neighbor. Seeking outward signs of this paradox, of the “optical telegraphy” signaling its movements, de Silentio stalks the knight of faith, not leaving him “for a second,” watching him walk about town, go to work, go to church and so on. Enter the ballet dancer.

     
    In the passage cited de Silentio, like Elias, uses the dancer in order to exemplify a crucial distinction, that between the knights (NB: plural) of the infinite and the knight of faith. However, instead of resorting to exemplification in order to leap from the theoretical to the ordinary, de Silentio assumes the reader’s familiarity with, on the one hand, classical ballet, and on the other, with standards of aesthetic execution that only a trained eye would pick up. What the trained eye will pick up is precisely what the stalker does not pick up in the knight of faith who could otherwise pass for a tax collector, namely, the barely perceptible “waver” that separates his ordinary acts from the movement of infinity that, in not yet being doubled, syncopates his being. By contrast, the singular knight of faith is capable of leaping directly and imperceptibly into his positions––first, second, third and so on. Something like a pas de chat, but done in reverse. So let us pose the decisive question again: what must dance, here ballet, be such that it can exemplify, can instantiate this edge between faith and philosophy? Or, as is becoming more obvious, what must philosophical exemplification be if dance must carry it out?
     
    A response, if not an answer, can begin by observing that dancing makes two other entrances in Fear and Trembling. The first occurs earlier in “Preliminary Expectorations” where, among other things, de Silentio gets the concept of “the leap” off his chest:
     

    It is commonly supposed that what faith produces is no work of art, that it is a coarse and boorish piece of work, only for the more uncouth natures, but it is far from being that. The dialectic of faith is the finest and most extraordinary of all; it has an elevation of which I can certainly form a conception, but no more than that. I can make the mighty trampoline leap whereby I cross over into infinity; my back is like a tightrope dancer’s, twisted in my childhood, and therefore it is easy for me.
     

    (36)

     

    As the Hongs note, this is an early invocation of the one thing “everybody” knows about Kierkegaard: the leap. Thus, it is likely significant that here the leap is paired with dance, indeed types of dance, a pairing that carries out the confirmation of the claim that faith is indeed a work of art. Awkward though it sounds, this is the proper way to make this point because if the leap is precisely the way to supplement what is otherwise strictly conceptual (the non-aesthetic), then the leap is the trace of the work of art in de Silentio’s text. It is also an example. As such, its pairing with dance is an adumbration of the later encounter with the knight of faith who can leap into position without wavering. In designating the cross over into infinity, the tightrope dancer also prepares us for the passage, the referential back and forth between thought and world that the knight of faith imperceptibly embodies. But the shadows cast here reach much further ahead than that. In fact, they would appear to reach all the way into the first part of Thus Spoke Zarathustra where, in section three, we witness, along with Zarathustra, another tightrope performance (the German here, Seiltänzer, makes the link to dancing obvious), indeed one in which a high wire leap (this time by a demonic partner) allegorizes the overcoming of “the last man” by the “over-man,” in effect, the revolution. Although Nietzsche’s awareness of Kierkegaard’s corpus comes, as it were, too late (Walter Kaufmann says 1888), it is clear that both writers find something compelling in figuring fundamental concerns of their thought in this particular way. Indeed it is this figuring of figuring that is so striking, and it is crucial that Nietzsche’s philosophy of the future had to generate a non-Kierkegaardian repudiation of Hegel to get off the ground.

     
    The third and final appearance of the dancer takes place in “Problema II” now in verbal form:
     

    Anyone who does not perceive this [Abraham’s absolute inability to explain the necessity of sacrificing the long awaited son] can always be sure that he is no knight of faith, but the one who perceives it will not deny that even the most tired of tragic heroes dances along in comparison with the knight of faith, who only creeps along slowly.
     

    (77)

     

    Here, a new negation-fraught contrast is introduced between the knight of faith and the tragic hero, a contrast designed to clarify the importance of Abraham’s speed, or lack thereof (one thinks here of Kafka’s waiter). Perhaps because there is no symmetry other than structural between the tragic hero and the knight of the infinite, dancing is apparently set opposite the knight of faith who, faithful to the topical motif of procrastination, creeps along. As if to undercut any balletic association with gracefulness, the knight becomes a figure of subreption, and dancing, insofar as it survives this apparently contradictory trans-valuation, realigns with implacability. Thus the imperceptible waver is rendered not as the instantaneity of the leap between philosophy and the world, but as the glacial, perhaps even tediously minimalist advance of the Abraham-machine. Both intense acceleration and intense retardation cause motion to disappear, the point, I take it, of the evocation of the Eleatics with which Fear and Trembling concludes and, subsequently, the frequent editorial pairing of it with Repetition. At the risk of reducing the dancer to the creep, the passage remains true to the earlier evocation of ballet in highlighting the problem of the appearance of transcendence in immanence, or what I have rephrased as the encounter between the world and its philosophical interpretation. Like Elias and Marx, Kierkegaard sustains recourse to dance as the way to point to the revolution that lies out ahead of referring, even if that revolution is all about a love for god that establishes its worldly and thus secular dominion here and now.

     
    Pivoting back then to the example of the example, one turns perhaps inevitably to de Man. In “Aesthetic Formalization: Kleist’s ‘Über das Marionettentheater,’” de Man broaches the matter of the example in the context of a general consideration of the inscription of the aesthetic in literature and education. Arguing that Kleist’s account of the aesthetic is more rigorously faithful to Kant than Schiller’s deployment of the concept in On the Aesthetic Education of Man, de Man locates this “account” in the formal mechanism, literally the form-machine, that manifests itself in the titularly evoked marionettes suspended between the ephebe and the bear of the text. The dancing executed by these puppets solicits the allusion to the correspondence between Körner and Schiller with which the essay opens, correspondence in which dance is held forth as the very image of a society committed to aesthetic education. Elias, in effect, but in reverse. Although passing reference is made to Kierkegaard in the essay, de Man’s own rhetoric suggests a more complicated relation, one that nuances and intensifies how dance and exemplification affect each other.
     
    De Man stresses the impossibility the logic of exemplification puts in play by drawing out the paradox of the example. “Is not its [the example’s] particularity, to which it owes the illusion of its intelligibility, necessarily a betrayal of the general truth it is supposed to support and convey?” (Rhetoric 276). Adding that properly literary texts convert this dilemma into their mainsprings, de Man resumes his reading of Kleist by observing that the three narratives that comprise “Über das Marrionettentheater” (those of the ephebe, the puppets, and the bear) are allegories of the “wavering status” (276) of narrative as regards the epistemology of proof. The appeal here to wavering is notable, in fact so notable it suggests that the distinction between proof and narrative is virtually a re-articulation of the distinction between the tragic hero and the knight of faith, with narrative in the position of the tragic hero, that is, of a dancer incapable of imperceptibly striking a pose. As if plowing de Silentio’s entire discussion back under, de Man finds the work of art (whether or not in faith) not in the exemplary grace of the ballet dancer, but in the conspicuous wavering of a text that, though driven by a grammatical machinery, spins relentlessly toward even the most illogical and unpersuasive conclusions. Thus, it is this relentlessness that puts the paradox of exemplification on display, but in the form of the permanently interrupted, almost therefore filmic performance of the text allegorized in the dance moves of the gravity defying puppets.
     
    A further twist occurs in “Excuses (Promises),” the essay on Rousseau that closes de Man’s Allegories of Reading. Written almost a decade before his sustained reading of Kleist, this discussion of Über das Marionettentheater comes up in a reading of Rousseau’s excuses. Specifically, de Man appeals to Kleist in order to exemplify what it might mean to talk about an automatic excuse, that is, an excuse that one is driven to offer virtually without reference to the specific circumstances of its solicitation. Anticipating the later reading of Kleist, de Man underscores the “anti-gravity” or dance-like dimension of Rousseau’s text, proposing that the Marion episode of The Confessions is perhaps most fundamentally about the compulsion to confess otherwise known as writing (Allegories 294). His discussion is set within the context of both a general meditation on the rhetorical effect of anacoluthon (the abrupt intrusion of, in de Man’s case, the performative code within a text otherwise dominated by the cognitive [constative] code) and a reading of particular textual passages. As a consequence, anacoluthon––to the extent that it is automatically implied in the breaking off of narrative -appears to designate precisely the sort of interruption represented by a citation or an example. As if to mark and instantly re-mark this, de Man interrupts the presentation of Rousseau’s excuses with the example from Kleist, or to put the matter as succinctly as possible the discussion of Rousseau’s Marion is interrupted, that is, exemplified in the discussion of die Marionette. As this point is not made by the very reader least inclined to miss it, de Man himself, one is invited to assume that the machine-text, the grammar without which no text can exist, is here exemplifying itself in much the same way as it is shown to be at work in Rousseau and later in Kleist. In appealing to Kleist’s meditation on the link between dancing puppets and the automatism of the aesthetic at the very point where the constantive, in fact referential movement of his own text is interrupted by the performative protocols of academic citation (a discursive feature “excused” in the volume’s fitful “Preface” (ix-xi)), de Man deftly pulls at his own, now plainly visible, strings. His text, qua text, starts to dance. It does not, unlike Pinocchio, become a “real boy,” it becomes “de Man.”
     
    What urges the association of de Man’s discussion of Kleist with de Silentio is not just the opening gambit regarding autobiography and the traffic between its perfomative and constative dimensions, but the almost immediate appeal de Man makes, once the text-machine is introduced, to the problem of maintaining balance. In commenting on Kleist’s text––after forging the link between commentary and graceful dancing––de Man exposes the pairing therein of mechanism and art, making balance and grace belong more properly to dancing puppets, not to people. Does this not invite us to consider that de Silentio’s Knight is a Kleistian puppet and that the work of art may be more pronounced in faith than he knows? That, in effect, de Silentio has taken de Man’s Kleist in hand.2 Perhaps the centrality of dramatic representation (contrasted sharply by de Man from dancing) in both texts is the fraught opening through which an even more perverse, that is, relentless mechanism gains access to the critical operations of de Man’s text. The paradoxical affirmation of both wavering and balance is thus a symptom that would then suggest, would it not, that conditioning the enunciation of de Man’s reading is the very object and condition of faith, but now formulated in accord with Nietzsche’s twilit maxim: “I am afraid we are not rid of God because we still have faith in grammar” (Twilight 483).
     
    If such a reading makes sense then it rebounds upon Fear and Trembling in ways that cast an even colder eye on dancing and leaping. God and grammar are conflicting, thus competing incarnations of the transcendental. They thereby invite us to pluralize the transcendental, indeed they invite us to pluralize the structure of transcendence and immanence, suggesting that dance, if it exemplifies exemplification, that is, if dance is the very paradox of a relation within and between transcendence and immanence, then it is perhaps the figure of the “negative capability” (to invoke Keats) required as one thinks and acts in between two worlds, or, to put it less melodramatically, between one hegemonic order and another. Dance is thus not just a way to embody the imperceptible difference between the Knight of Faith and others, or between faith and belief, but it is a way to imagine, perhaps even practice, the steps to be taken in the space between the world referred to by philosophy and the world called for through philosophical critique. The dancer, as a student of what Elias calls figuration, exemplifies a different way of approaching the experience and execution of the slow and difficult work of social transformation.
     

    Three

     
    Interest in the example goes back a ways. Aristotle takes it up in Book Two, chapter twenty of The Rhetoric, where he worries over its two chief varieties (133-42). More interesting is Plato’s earlier discussion of the example in The Statesman, where it surfaces in a spectacular meditation on revolution.
     
    Recall that wonderful moment in the dialogue where, after recognizing the false start of their reflection on the essence of the statesman, “The Stranger” proposes to “Young Socrates” that they consider the wisdom embedded in a story, in fact, the story that explains the quarrel between, of all people, Atreus and Thyestes (of Poe and later Lacan/Derrida fame). Without elaborating the details, The Stranger moves to situate this story among all those stories that derive from what he calls the “great event” (269b), an event that would appear to link all stories (Lévi-Strauss later called them “myths”) to the shift between autochthony and sexual reproduction, in effect, to the advent of the human. At the heart of this story––and let us not forget that it is recounted in a dialogue on the statesman––stands the concept and the figure of revolution and counter-revolution.
     

    There is an era in which God himself assists the universe on its way and guides it by imparting its rotation to it. There is also an era in which he releases his control. He does this when its circuits under his guidance have completed the due limit of the time thereto appointed. Thereafter it begins to revolve in the contrary sense under its own impulse––for it is a living creature and has been endowed with reason by him who framed it in the beginning. . . . Hence it is impossible that it should abide forever free from change, and yet, as far as may be, its movement is uniform, invariable and in one place. Thus it is that it has received from God a rotation in reverse––the least possible variation of its proper motion. To revolve ever in the same sense belongs to none but the lord and the leader of all things that move, and even he cannot move the universe now in the one sense and now in the other––for this would flout eternal decrees.
     

    (269d)

     

    Recapitulating our theme of movement that is uniform and invariable, The Stranger concludes by explaining that the universe can execute thousands of revolutions because “its balance [is] so perfect” (270b).

     
    This account of spinning and counterspinning is rich indeed. Aside from finally getting the discussion of the statesman off on the right foot, it links this not so subtle discussion of regime change to the vexed theological problem of God’s agency, “his” physical relation to what the French would call the sens of the universe. As if pairing the interventionist God with autochthony and the “human universe” with sexual reproduction, Plato appears to set up de Silentio by drawing close and immediate attention to the perceptibility of the change between this world and the other. Clearly anticipating many of the central themes of Genesis (the description of Eden, the Flood, the autochthonous creation of humans, etc.) Plato, despite the rhetoric of uniformity, balance etc., stresses a “cosmic crisis” that reduces humanity to “a remnant” (270d), one that does not perceive the revolution because its coming into being is the revolution. It is as though when the ballet dancer leaps into her pose, she effects the passage from the world in which belief is hegemonic to one in which faith is. Or, in Plato’s vocabulary, she effects the passage from the world in which the statesman as leader (c. 275) is to be modeled on the shepherd, to the world in which the statesman is to be modeled on the weaver (c. 281).
     
    The matter of examplification arises as Young Socrates and The Stranger segue from the story to the model of the weaver. Specifically, the example comes up as a way to clarify precisely in what way a fissure opens between the cosmology referred to in the story and the dialogue itself. Linking the strategy of his presentation to its referent, The Stranger points out that it is difficult to explain important things (like the essence of the statesman, or the emergence of sexual reproduction) without using examples. However, the problem with examples is that in their very accessibility they routinely point back to the wrong world. Here the issue is not the paradoxical particularity of the example stressed by de Man, but rather the move the example effects between the familiar and the strange, a move that always threatens to subject the latter to the former, thereby losing it altogether. What bothers The Stranger about his necessary recourse to the story––and surely it important that he is given these lines––is that its insight is blinding; that is, to the precise degree to which the story frames consideration of the statesman in an illuminating way, it obscures the nature of the difference between the familiar account of this figure and the new philosophically strange one. Both he and Young Socrates are thus faced with the daunting prospect of leaping from one world to the next without knowing whether they will make it. Apparently when dance is the example of the example, it puts this dilemma on display, implicitly thematizing not simply the epistemological problem of the referential relation between philosophical interpretation and the changing world, but the ontological problem of the relation among possible worlds, say the Copernican versus the Ptolemaic, or, closer to home, the capitalist versus the communist. Spinning backwards, it is as if Kleist’s text were saying: recognizing art in the machine is one thing, but acting as if you inhabit the world in which that insight becomes hegemonic is quite another.
     
    Enter Nietzsche who, like Kleist, is a sworn enemy of the spirit of gravity and devotee of the dance, and who, like Kierkegaard, is worried about the destiny of philosophy. Although passages like the one that serves as my epigram abound in Nietzsche’s corpus, it is a mistake to confuse them with all that he has to say about dance. In fact, the more satisfying challenge presented by Nietzsche is to think the relation between such passages and those found in the testimony of those who witnessed his infamous demise. In a letter written after his first urgent encounter with his fast faltering friend and former colleague, Franz Overbeck describes Nietzsche’s state thus:
     

    That is, growing inordinately excited at the piano, singing loudly and raving, he would utter bits and pieces from the world of ideas in which he has been living, and also in short sentences, in an indescribably muffled tone, sublime, wonderfully clairvoyant and unspeakably horrible things would be audible, about himself as the successor of the dead God, the whole thing punctuated, as it were, on the piano, whereupon more convulsions and outbursts would follow, but as I said, this happened only at few fleeting moments while I was with him; mainly it was utterances about the profession which he had allotted to himself, to be the clown (Hanswurst) of the new eternities, and he the master of expression, was himself quite incapable of rendering the ecstasies of his gaiety except in the most trivial expressions or by frenzied dancing and capering.
     

     

    This account is essentially repeated and thus confirmed by the housekeeper at 6 via Carlo Alberto who testified that she, when drawn more than once to an inexplicable commotion in Nietzsche’s room, peered through his keyhole to see him perching on furniture and dancing naked in the center of his quarters. Liliana Cavani, in Beyond Good and Evil, frames Nietzsche’s dancing differently, but she grasps dexterously its function as passage.

     
    Easily set aside as the choreography of his imminent decline, this material calls out to be read in relation to what dancing is doing in and to Nietzsche’s critique of the western world. As if partnered with that notorious Russian émigré Emma Goldman, Nietzsche may well be linking dance and revolution, not by setting up the former as the so-called litmus test of the latter, but as the very way to think about how to, as it were, get from here to there. The frenzied dancing witnessed by Overbeck all too readily indulges our inclination to be somewhat stupefied wallflowers unless we consider that such action may well be an attempt to find one’s footing, as Derrida was later to suggest, the mochlos, in the madly impossible/impassable shift between the world of the last men and the revolutionary world without precedent, as Benjamin was to call it. Instead of a sign of madness, dance becomes the means by which to float an example of how to withstand the becoming real of the critique of philosophy when philosophy itself is spinning out of control, losing its footing in the practice of interpretation. We know, of course, that Nietzsche’s timing was way off, but that does not trip up the project, an insight that can be maintained even as we acknowledge that the man was troubled, indeed deeply troubled in 1890. He may have been a Hanswurst, but he was no fool. Or he was a fool in precisely that non-foolish way that in The History of Madness Foucault sought to ventriloquize. In this regard, one might do well to think carefully about what Nietzsche is saying about madness in the fourteenth aphorism of Daybreak, Part One.
     
    Some examples, then, of what dance is doing in Nietzsche’s text. The epigraph has already drawn attention to dance instruction and the writer who can finesse the gulf between the possible and the impossible. Dating from 1878, it establishes that Nietzsche’s interest arises early. The Birth of Tragedy, from 1872, contains several passing references to dance (perhaps most powerfully in Section One’s linkage of dance, Dionysus, and Bakhtinian carnival, the Sacaea), but what most emphatically recommends it to our attention is that in its “director’s cut” (from 1886), Birth of Tragedy includes an “Attempt at Self Criticism,” an addition that strings together the early work and the late work, while throwing leaping, dancing, and laughing into the mix.
     
    Toward the end of the “Attempt,” Nietzsche indulges in the practice of self-citation, leading us back to the middle of Part Four in Zarathustra, specifically to the section entitled, “On the Higher Man.” Two things seem to be at work here. One is the recognition that dance has become an important conceptual friend, one that helps Nietzsche think and write. The other is more performative: if Nietzsche senses that “The Attempt” and Part Four of Zarathustra have something to do with each other, this is because both give form to irony or, as it is called in Birth of Tragedy, self-criticism. In effect, what is to be found in Part Four and certainly in “On the Higher Man” is a version of the sentiment uttered by Captain America (Peter Fonda) at the end of Easy Rider: “we blew it, man.” Specifically, in attempting to distinguish between Zarathustra and the last or higher men, Nietzsche draws attention to the politically disabling contradiction of leadership, that the revolution cannot, and will not, be taught, while deriving what authority this insight has from something like revolutionary pedagogy. In a nutshell, Part Four is a meditation on the position of the ironic (pointedly neither traditional or organic, nor universal or specific) intellectual. If he recognizes that such material fits with his backward glance at his own formation, this is because the position of the ironic intellectual structures his relation to everything and everyone with whom he was once confused. Like the seductive power of Socratic ignorance, the distinctly ironic character of Nietzsche’s criticism casts him as a “man interrupted” (as suggested earlier, the subject of permanent parabasis) not, as is often concluded, as Mad Max. In being about leadership this is also about politics. Perhaps surprisingly it is also about dance.
     
    “On the Higher Man” returns us immediately to the figure of the tightrope walker (more literally the rope dancer) who appears now epigrammatically suspended between the “all” (alle) and the “none” (keinem). Along the line we are confronted with, among other things, the death of God, the pollution of gestation, and the absolute limits of both scholars and the mob. In section 17 one reads the following:
     

    A man’s stride always betrays whether he has found his own way: behold me walking! But whoever approaches his goal dances. And verily, I have not become a statue: I do not yet stand there, stiff, stupid, stony, a column; I love to run swiftly. And though there are swamps and thick melancholy on earth, whoever has light feet runs even over mud and dances as on swept ice.
     
    Lift up your hearts, my brothers, high, higher! And do not forget your legs either. Lift up your legs too, you good dancers; and better yet, stand on your heads!
     

     

    In Section 20 this reeling call falls back on itself. Gesturing ironically Nietzsche writes, “You higher men, the worst about you is that all of you have not learned to dance as one must dance––dancing away over yourselves!” (407), a formulation that, in context, compares those––somewhere, one would think, between the all and the none––with ears calibrated to hear Zarathustra to the ponderous circus elephants of Section 19, elephants who, if we recall Marx’s discussion of the dancing table, appear to be anti-Hegelian, creatures who, in Nietzsche’s mind, can only stand on their feet. The undecidable punning that operates in Vom höheren Menschen (the higher/hearing men) would appear to restate the irony in advance.

     
    In the preceding citation it is impossible to ignore “Kierkegaardian” resonances. Specifically, like de Silentio, Nietzsche directs our attention to the man on the street, indeed to the stroller. He invites us to search there for evidence of the proximity between the pedestrian and his goal. The opposition between the dancer and the statue would appear to re-channel de Silentio’s attentive preoccupation with the leap that immediately and imperceptibly reveals the pose of the Knight of Faith: the one who has reached his/her goal.3 The leap of the dancer, higher and higher, while certainly Kierkegaardian, is also complicated by the emergent inadequacy of the “higher men.” In the course of this section, as I have proposed, certainly one goal appears undermined, namely that of reaching the higher men. Indeed, the very concept of leadership is set aside, but as part of the articulation of this insight dance (and later laughter) works to fuse goal and failure, making this very confusion into what dance achieves or, in another sense, sustains.
     
    It seems crucial to stress here that Nietzsche is not exactly using dance as an example. But nor is it simply a figure. When he characterizes Zarathustra as a dancer, dancing only gets less familiar, less particular, and not simply because we have trouble getting any kind of fix on who or what Zarathustra is. Given that exemplification, as I have proposed, seems to have assumed the responsibility within philosophy of articulating its limit, that is, the zone of indistinction between world interpretation and transformation, Nietzsche’s strategy––for lack of a better word––seems to address itself to this very responsibility, a responsibility one might also link to the delicate matter, at once political and choreographic, of leading. At least this is one way to make sense of Nietzsche’s tendency to dance when it comes to the end of the world and, for the sake of parallelism, the end of the book. This last receives provocative treatment in The Gay Science, a text whose two editions (1882 and 1887) actually bookend Zarathustra.
     
    Dance appears in aphorism 381 of Part Five as part of a meditation on the hermeneutics of difficulty. Influenced, no doubt, by the attacks on scholars of the sort we have already noted in Zarathustra, Nietzsche’s discussion of difficulty sets in motion an opposition between scholars and dancers. Rehearsing the reception problem flagged in the epigraph from Zarathustra––Ein Buch für Alle und Keinen––Nietzsche opens by insisting that books may just as readily be filled with intentions to communicate as with intentions to confuse and challenge. Not content to thereby permanently interrupt the hermeneutical value of intention, he moves quickly to sing the praises, indeed the philosophical praises, of brevity. Thereon follow the terms of suppleness, lightness, etc. Aware that he writes as a scholar, one whose quickness is slowed by anxiety about ignorance, Nietzsche then counsels philosophical scholars in particular to aspire to the conditions of dance, writing: “I do not know what the spirit of a philosopher might wish more to be than a good dancer” (Gay 346). The pose of the ironic intellectual is again at issue. Specifically, Nietzsche troubles here the very logic of exemplification, that is, the expository concessions necessary to bring philosophy within reach of those seeking to bring either clarity or change (or both) to their lives. The “friends” he targets, ironically understood to lack understanding, are told to train. Train to dance. It is as if dance is the means envisioned for finding one’s footing in the hermeneutically and politically impossible space of being in two places––understanding and misunderstanding, this world and the next––at once.
     
    Consistency dictates that Nietzsche’s repudiation of the logic of exemplification not be overstated. It is not that dance doesn’t exemplify, but that it assumes exemplary status in figuring, at the limit of book and world, the very limits of exemplification. With Nietzsche we come to someone who seems to have recognized one of the enabling philosophemes of the West, one that in splitting apart captures deictically the means by which philosophical discourse tries to refer to its own limit from the inside. It is not altogether surprising that the outer edge, the end of Gay Science (and remember this is an end added to an earlier end in strict conformity with the logic of the supplement) culminates in an invocation of the “kingdom of the dance,” followed by song. Although there are several other references to dance in the pages of The Gay Science, they all trace and retrace the edges, the ends of the book and the world. As such they urge that the dancing that consumed Nietzsche’s final days not simply be understood either as the unambiguous sign of the impending disaster, or as the metaphor for the faltering steps of a life exhausted in a collection of books with which it has since become confused. Instead, in the spirit of his own evocation of the link between dreaming and dancing (indeed “ghost dancing,” cf. aphorism 54), the frenzied dancing of the end might provocatively be read as a warding off of the revolutionary awakening for which neither the dreamer nor the philosopher is quite prepared. The point may well be to change the world, but if “change” is not simply a new version of the already anticipated, that is, the same, then the leader rushes in at his or her peril. Nietzsche invites us to consider that dance is the way not to think, but to do leading differently. In this he may have indeed broached the question of politics within and in the wake of the postmodern. After all, Rudolf Pannwitz, one of his early German “followers,” was the first (1912) to use the term Postmodernismus as the means by which to designate the crisis breaking out in and against modern European culture.
     

    Four

     
    Nietzsche’s apocalyptic tone gives the relation between one world and the next a verticality that Jacques Derrida helps us see through and resist. Wittingly or unwittingly (now, alas, a permanent undecidable) he does so by making dance matter to his own deconstructive embrace of philosophy. This is abundantly clear in the discussion of “sexual difference” with Christie McDonald in their interview titled, “Choreographies.” Perhaps even more pertinent is the set of formulations that take place in Derrida’s lecture, “Mochlos; or, the Conflict of the Faculties,” from 1980. To be sure, dance is not the explicit topic of his address, but leaping and securing one’s footing assuredly are, and by now I hope we recognize that a certain philosophically inflected, if not executed, dance is thus very much at stake.
     
    The occasion of Derrida’s remarks is the centenary celebration of the founding of the graduate school at Columbia University. As such, he is concerned to think aloud and at length about the extent to which Kant’s 1798 essay, “The Conflict of the Faculties,” limits and/or enables the thinking of Columbia’s present. If it makes sense to say that this discussion inaugurates the line of inquiry now concluded in “The University without Conditions,” this is because in both texts Derrida is calling us to consider what is at risk in finding new footing for an institution like the university. Aware that a certain steroidal, even disastrous capitalism is itself embarked on the task of reorienting the university, Derrida insists that strategic options remain open for those committed to calling for another change and a different future. The drama of the address derives largely from the delicacy with which Derrida sketches the nature of the abyss on which we are poised. The footwork of the piece is far too fancy to summarize, nor is that the purpose of this last spin. Instead, I plant and turn quickly to the concluding passes of the piece to delineate how they engage what above I have called the verticality of Nietzsche’s tone.
     
    The issue that concerns me is the one Derrida introduces under the heading of “orientation.” He asks: “How do we orient ourselves toward the foundation of a new law” (30)? The question is spurred by Derrida’s proposition that our moment is one in which we both have to take a new kind of responsibility for the footing of the university, and acknowledge, even accept, that such a footing is already, as it were, under foot. In other words, the problem of orientation, of our bearings, arises because our moment is a span, it is a zone of indistinction between one footing and another, between one rationale for the founding of the university and another. It is not a question of this world and the next in the sense that Augustine summons under the heading of the City of God. That is verticality plain and simple. Rather, it is a question of, let’s say, the horizontal displacement of absolutely immanent worlds. It is a question of thinking and enduring what political scientists call “transition” as an event, as a rupture characterized not by an absolute break, but by an absolute indistinction brought about by the co-presence of worlds whose political, economic and cultural structures are radically incommensurable. Invoking his titular term, Derrida writes:
     

    Traditional law should therefore provide, on its own foundational soil, a support for leaping to another place for founding, or, if you prefer another metaphor to that of the jumper planting a foot before leaping––of “taking the call on one foot” (prenant appel sur un pied) as is said in French––then we might say that the difficulty will consist, as always, in determining the best lever, what the Greeks would call the best mochlos.
     

    (30-31)

     

    As though having thereby secured his own footing, Derrida proceeds to perform a “brutal leap” (31) back into the disputed shoes of his quarrel with Meyer Schapiro, a distinguished professor of Art History at Columbia, the point of which is to link the question of orientation to the problem of distinguishing between the left and the right (whether in the realm of shoes or in the realm of politics––for Rancière, of course, they may well be the same thing). That Kant’s engagement with the matter of orientation toggles between sleeping and fighting––with the issue of whether to lead with the left or the right moving in tandem––implicates Schapiro’s insistence upon the orientation of the shoes in a certain martial and therefore rightist art.

     
    There is, obviously, a great deal to say about all of this––about academic disputes, about the orientation of the neo-liberal university, about political affiliation and leadership in the wake of the postmodern––but my dance card is now empty. Nonetheless, it is worth observing that Derrida’s discussion, precisely when read in the context of Nietzsche’s dancing, leaping, and leading––and perhaps the sin for which he can never be forgiven (remember here his own account of forgiveness) is that he has spun out the webwork in which the dismissive consensus that has authorized the left to stop reading Nietzsche is hopelessly self-entangled––it is worth observing that this discussion immediately encounters in the problem of changing the world, or stepping from one hegemonic foundation to another, the problem of choreography, of knowing, as it were, with which foot to lead. Nietzsche and before him Kierkegaard certainly have led us to expect this without thereby leading us to the radically horizontal, even aphoristic (taken etymologically) perspective found in Derrida, where faculties/disciplines, texts, and worlds collide. What confronts us here is a still urgent question about the very means by which to figure the activity, both psychical and physical, of stepping beyond the headlong emergence of neo-liberal hegemony. Not to withdraw from it (where to, exactly?), but to lead it elsewhere and survive the passage.
     
    My purpose here has been to propose that there is a symptom, a sign, to be read in the recourse taken by philosophy to the example of dance when attempting to coordinate metacriticism of its own referential capacities with revolutionary calls for the transition from, to use Marx’s formulation, interpreting to changing the world. If, as Jacques Lacan writes, the symptom is “a symbol written in the sand of the flesh” (232), what is one to make of the scrawl left by philosophy’s recourse to dance? As with all symptoms, this one too operates on more than one level. The erratic genealogy traced here suggests that as philosophy poses with increasing directness the question of its self-overcoming, the manifest practice of exemplification (of appealing to the local and concrete) increasingly aligns with a practical sublation of philosophy thought to be embodied, even realized, in dance. What enables dance to serve this function is the latent way that the spinning it entails can be shown (the latent is never patent) to have shadowed philosophical reflection in the west for quite some time. Not for nothing does Paul Valéry’s “Dance and the Soul” (from 1921) stage its meditation on philosophy after the war (should it not be more sensuous, less abstract?) in the form of a Socratic dialogue. Between the latent and the manifest is the absent, that is, the structural dislocation that in preventing the latent and the manifest from becoming one and the same provides the symptom with both its structure and its force. Dance figures here as something of an index where all of it that has nothing to do with philosophical reflection points to, indexes, what is missing in philosophy. Nietzsche evokes this by counterposing the book that is studied, read, re-read, underlined, memorized, etc. with the book that simply makes us get up and move. While this overstates the physicality of dance (it is both more and less than that), it does draw pertinent attention to the movement that escapes philosophy, or to the movement that in escaping philosophy figures, as absent, the change interpreting the world is being pressured to give way to. In one sense, this invites us to recognize in dance the symptom of philosophy’s strained relation both to theology and to politics. In another sense, this discloses the philosophical force of dance, a force that in pushing philosophy to its limit, in putting it on edge, points to something more in dance. Paradoxically, this more may precisely be the place from which the vital political energies of the future are approaching us. Indeed, they are closer than we can think.
     

    John Mowitt is Professor in the Department of Cultural Studies and Comparative Literature at the University of Minnesota. He is the author of texts on culture, theory, and politics, most recently his book, Re-Takes: Postcoloniality and Foreign Film Languages (2005) and the co-edited volume, The Dreams of Interpretation: A Century Down the Royal Road (2007), both from the University of Minnesota Press. This past year he collaborated with the composer Jarrod Fowler to transpose his book, Percussion: Drumming, Beating, Striking (Duke UP, 2002), from a printed to a sonic text. His current project, Radio: Essays in Bad Reception will be forthcoming from the University of California Press. He is a co-editor of the journal Cultural Critique.

     

     

    Acknowledgement

     
    In lieu of formal acknowledgements I want nevertheless to thank a few folks for their contributions to this piece. Heartfelt gratitude to Lynn Turner for recognizing the movement behind my wallflower complexion; to Victoria Pitts-Taylor for convincing me to stick by the title; to Michelle Koerner for listening to me stumble; to Julietta Singh, Joan Scott, and Lisa Disch for tracking the Apache, to Jeanine Ferguson for surviving and showing me (to) the pas de chat; and to Thomas Pepper, to whom a “floating debt” is due for the example set by his own work on things Kierkegaardian and de Manian, not to mention, our several conversations regarding them. Eyal Amiran and his passel of readers had more than a hand in this, and I am grateful for their pressure.
     

    Footnotes

     
    1. The Hongs, Kierkegaard’s intrepid and devoted translators and editors, have argued that given the importance attached to the themes of imagination and experimentation in Kierkegaard’s corpus, it is important to respect the distinctions drawn between the author and his pseudonymic masks. Such masks belong directly to the enunciative thematics of the texts. In Fear and Trembling this assumes enormous importance in that, as Problema III winds down, de Silentio worries at length over the ethics and aesthetics of silence, in effect, a blank or neutral enunciation. As if anticipating Gayatri Spivak’s probing meditation on the subaltern’s speech, de Silentio writes, “Abraham remains silent––but he cannot speak. Therein lies the distress and anxiety. Even though I go on talking night and day without interruption, if I cannot make myself understood when I speak, then I am not speaking” (113). The matter of whether such an insight qualifies de Silentio for knighthood (of faith) is not as important as the recognition that the neutered character of the I, a prince who has abandoned the only princess he would ever love, must sign its name “Johannes de Silentio.” Understanding this gives us our only shot at “reading” this text at all.

     

     
    2. The “leap to aesthetic play” that Schiller calls for in the 27th Letter of The Aesthetic Education suggests strongly that he is the “dissecting table” upon which meet, fortuitously to be sure, Kierkegaard and de Man. This implies, does it not, that there is more to de Man’s critique of Schiller than meets either the ear or the eye.

     

     
    3. One can recognize in this opposition between the dancer and the statue a prototype of Lacan’s conception of the agalma, the figure he pilfers from The Symposium and puts to work perhaps most famously in the theory of analytic interpretation that concludes Seminar Eleven. Not insignificantly, Lacan is also concerned here with the problem of leadership, although reframed as the question of the transferential relation between the analysand the “subject supposed to know.” A similar point is advanced in the earlier “Subversion of the Subject and the Dialectic of Desire in the Freudian Unconscious” in the Écrits.

     

     

     

    Works Cited

     

    • Aristotle. Rhetoric and Poetics. Trans. W.R. Roberts and I. Bywater. New York: Modern Library, 1954.
    • Austin, John. How to Do Things with Words. Eds. J.O. Urmson and Marina Sbisà. Cambridge: Harvard UP, 1978.
    • Beyond Good and Evil (Al di là del bene e del male.) Screenplay by Liliana Cavani. Dir. L. Cavani. Perf. Dominique Sanda, Erland Josephson, Robert Powell. Clesi Cinematografica, 1977.
    • De Man, Paul. Allegories of Reading: Figural Language in Rousseau, Nietzsche, Rilke, and Proust. New Haven: Yale UP, 1979.
    • –––. The Rhetoric of Romanticism. New York: Columbia UP, 1984.
    • Derrida, Jacques. “Mochlos; or, the Conflict of the Faculties.” Logomachia: The Conflict of the Faculties. Ed. Richard Rand. Lincoln: U of Nebraska P, 1992. 1-34.
    • Derrida, Jacques, and Christie V. McDonald. “Interview: Choreographies.” Diacritics 12.2 (Summer 1982): 66-76.
    • Easy Rider. Screenplay by Peter Fonda, Dennis Hopper, Terry Southern. Dir. Dennis Hopper. Perf. Dennis Hopper, Peter Fonda. Columbia Pictures, 1969.
    • Elias, Norbert. The Civilizing Process. Trans. Edmund Jephcott. New York: Urizen, 1978.
    • –––. Reflections on a Life. Trans. Edmund Jephcott. Cambridge, MA: Polity, 1994.
    • Kierkegaard, Søren. Fear and Trembling; Repetition. Eds. and trans. Howard V. and Edna H. Hong. Princeton: Princeton UP, 1983.
    • Lacan, Jacques. “The Function and Field of Speech and Language in Psychoanalysis.” Écrits: a Selection. Trans. Bruce Fink. New York: Norton, 2006. 31-106.
    • Marx, Karl. Capital. Vol. 1. Trans. Ben Fowkes. New York: Vintage, 1977.
    • Middleton, Christopher, ed. Selected Letters of Friedrich Nietzsche. Trans. Christopher Middleton. Chicago: U Chicago P, 1969.
    • Nietzsche, Friedrich. The Birth of Tragedy and The Case of Wagner. Trans. Walter Kaufmann. New York: Vintage, 1967.
    • –––. Daybreak: Thoughts on the Prejudices of Morality. Trans. R.J. Hollingdale. New York: Cambridge UP, 1997.
    • –––. “From the Souls of Artists and Writers.” Human, All Too Human I. Trans. Gary Handwerk. Stanford: Stanford UP 1995.
    • –––. The Gay Science. Trans. Walter Kaufmann. New York: Vintage, 1974.
    • –––. Thus Spoke Zarathustra. The Portable Nietzsche. Ed. and trans. Walter Kaufmann. New York: Viking, 1954. 103-439.
    • –––. Twilight of the Idols: Or How One Philosophizes with a Hammer. The Portable Nietzsche. Ed. and trans. Walter Kaufmann. New York: Viking, 1954. 463-563.
    • Plato. “The Statesman.” The Collected Dialogues of Plato. Eds. Edith Hamilton and Huntington Cairns. Princeton: Pantheon, 1961. 1019-85.
    • Schiller, Friedrich. On the Aesthetic Education of Man in a Series of Letters. Trans. E. M. Wilkinson and L.A. Willoughby. London: Oxford UP, 1967.
    • Valéry, Paul. Dance and the Soul. Dialogues. Trans. William McCausland Stewart. Princeton: Princeton UP, 1956.

     

  • “fuga”

    Keith Feldman (bio)
    Department of English, University of Washington
    feldmank@u.washington.edu

    Review of: Edward W. Said, On Late Style: Music and Literature Against the Grain. New York: Pantheon, 2006.

     

    How should we think the analytical purchase of the family of English terms derived from the Latin root fuga? How might we productively pose the anachronistic musical form of contrapuntal theme and variation—the fugue—alongside Hannah Arendt’s figure for “those whom the twentieth century has driven outside the pale of the law” (175)—the refugee—and what Fred Moten has called “a desire for and a spirit of escape and transgression of the proper and the proposed” (“Uplift” 336)—fugitivity? Edward W. Said’s posthumous On Late Style: Music and Literature Against the Grain might seem an odd entry-point for such questions. While Said offers definitive theorizations of contrapuntalism as method, of exile as both an intellectual and deeply historical position—and On Late Style returns to these notions—one would imagine him to be wary of the ahistorical and smoothly totalizing ways in which Arendt’s notion of the refugee have been taken up in certain strains of recent political theory. Even as On Late Style dwells on the issue of aesthetics and form, the work in the black radical tradition to locate and theorize the aesthetic forms of what Moten calls an “appositional enlightenment” (“Freedom” 274) seems beyond the purview of Said’s periodic treatment of black radicals like C.L.R. James, Aimé Césaire, and Frantz Fanon.
     
    Nevertheless, Said’s brief and fragmentary book, culled from a series of lectures, essays, and seminar notes begun in the early 1990s, offers a surprisingly generative terrain from which the question of “fuga” emerges in all its contemporary gravity. He had meditated on the problematic of late style for some time; the concept appears in several of his late works, most notably in his December 2001 lecture on Freud and the Non-European. Here Said analyzes Freud’s Moses and Monotheism as a “late” text that refuses claims to “pure” identity categories even as it confronts the horror of Nazi genocide and the erasure of the “non-European” from the history of Palestine. But using “lateness” only as a means of analysis engenders different effects than to make it the object of analysis, as it is in On Late Style. How we should read this late work, and to what end, is far less clear, but this very question potentially makes reading On Late Style more useful. Scholars interested in the articulation of the aesthetic, the political, and the discrepant trajectories of modernity should read this work with ears wide open.
     
    “Fuga” helps us approach On Late Style in precisely the way Said might want: as a counterpoint both to his other late works and to the broader landscape of contemporary imperial culture in which it appears. In the book’s foreword, Mariam Said recalls her husband’s simultaneous attempts at the end of his life to complete three quite discrete projects. “Today I will write the acknowledgements and preface to Humanism and Democratic Criticism,” Said informed her with renowned will one Friday morning several weeks before his death, referencing his argument for the ethical importance of secular humanist practice in a post-9/11 United States; “The introduction to [a collection of journalistic essays entitled] From Oslo to Iraq and the Road Map I’ll finish by Sunday. And next week I’ll concentrate on completing Late Style, which will be finished in December” (vii). Given the contours of Said’s immense critical output, we should not be surprised when, in his battle with debilitating leukemia, this final burst of contrapuntal productivity takes the form of a vigorously political counterpoint: to escalating U.S. military designs in the Arab World, to the Bush Administration’s not-so-tacit support of intensified apartheid policies in Israel/Palestine, to the popularized racist figure of the dehumanized Arab, and to the full frontal attack on the intellectual class meant to silence the critique of such dire conditions.
     
    Reading On Late Style contrapuntally also suggests a longer, if more obscured, genealogy of Said’s engagement with the specific problematic of lateness. As he routinely described his own intellectual trajectory, the U.S. response to the June 1967 War compelled Said to begin “to think and write contrapuntally,” triggering an intellectual practice traversing the linkages between his work as a literary scholar and as a representative of and for Palestine (“Between Worlds” 562). Said’s commitment to reconsider, revise, and even depart from his own interventions laudably refuses smooth simplifications. On Late Style’s own fugal dynamic lingers at mezzopiano, staying quietly close to what he would call in another context a “kind of exfoliating structure of variation” drawn from the musical performances of classical pianist Glenn Gould (“Interview” 3). What might it sound like if we turned up the volume on Said’s engagement with Gould and other “classics”? What hisses, pops, and buzzes might we hear, and how might they direct our thinking aesthetically, methodologically, and politically?
     
    “I come finally to the last great problematic,” Said intones at the book’s outset, “which for obvious personal reasons is my subject here—the last or late period of life, the decay of the body, the onset of ill health or other factors that even in a younger person bring on the possibility of an untimely end” (6). Said’s pathos on facing death is augmented by his readings of a cluster of aesthetic works he found most energizing. The self-described cultural conservative, who routinely defends a worldly reading of a pre-constituted Western canon, turns to a much-enjoyed set of high modern literary and musical texts that he “personally” relates to, conjuring up memories of his own trips to the opera, the symphony, the cinema. On Late Style treats Beethoven’s last works, Mozart’s late opera Cosi Fan Tutti, Richard Strauss’s representation of the eighteenth century, Giuseppe Tomasi di Lampedusa’s novel The Leopard and Luchino Visconti’s subsequent film of the same name, Benjamin Britten’s operatic staging of Thomas Mann’s Death in Venice, and various productions of Euripedes’s tragic plays. Jean Genet’s Les paravents and Un captif amoureux offer Said an opportunity to recall his face-to-face encounters with Genet himself in New York and Beirut. Readings of these works are rarely pursued in a consistently contrapuntal fashion, at least in the way Said theorizes it in Culture and Imperialism, with a worldly and politicized focus on “interdependent histories” and “overlapping characters” (“Interview” 3). The material on Genet is a welcome exception, helping Said navigate the distance between Genet’s views of the Black Panthers, his interest in Palestine, and the posthumous staging of Genet’s own late works in the wake of the first Palestinian intifada. Said’s close reading of the work of Greek Alexandrine poet Constantine Cavafy has a similarly familiar contrapuntal logic. More often, though, Said operates at the close formal, technical, and textual levels found in much of his other writings on music, from Musical Elaborations to Parallels and Paradoxes, as his analysis attends to patterns of allusion, cooptation, and revision, giving scant attention to the social worlds in which such patterns emerge.
     
    Each of these works registers “late style” in often incommensurable ways, recapitulating Said’s earlier concerns in a new more strictly formalist guise. If exile, worldliness, oppositional intellectual practice, and the like are recurrent themes in Said’s corpus, late style becomes a way to describe their formal variations. Just as the intellectual is, at his or her most ethical, a figure for oppositional critical practice, late style “involves a nonharmonious, nonserene tension, and above all, a sort of deliberately unproductive productiveness going against” (7). In Said’s commitment to imagining the dialectical framework of exile, for instance, lateness emerges as “a platform for alternative and unregimented modes of subjectivity, at the same time that [the artist-intellectual] . . . has a lifetime of technical effort and preparation” (114).
     
    The staging of late style by one exemplary figure, the “virtuoso intellectual” Gould, marks the “full realization of a protracted and sustained contrapuntal invention, disclosed, argued, and elaborated rather than simply presented, through performance” (130). The placement of the final comma in this sentence is crucial: Said’s own commentary on Gould and his necessarily public performance provides an evocative—if momentary—heuristic condensing the impulses of many of Said’s other works. The journalistic essays that nearly every week documented the perilous position of Palestine under the schema of an ostensibly permanent “war on terror,” the lectures reclaiming humanistic critique as the imperative terrain of democracy: these and so many of Said’s other interventions unfold oppositional arguments, enacted, fleeting, both passing and facing the impasse of the current conjuncture. Gould’s recorded performances of Bach’s Goldberg Variations—one produced at the outset of Gould’s career and one at its end—“[elaborate] an alternative argument to the prevailing conventions that so deaden and dehumanize and rerationalize the human spirit” (133). Indeed, on Gould’s intellectual engagement with Bach’s untimely contrapuntal works—in the face of the commoditizing impulses of a post-war classical music industry—Said captures some of the most fertile, dramatic, and condensed prose in On Late Style. The buzz we hear when we turn up the silence of that comma, a sound that in a moment will rub against another genealogy of music and performative methodology, makes us realize just how influential Gould was on Said’s thinking.
     
    While the material on Genet, Cavafy, and Gould in particular provides some useful departures for listening again to Said’s contrapuntalism, more than anything this book stages his prolonged engagement with Theodor Adorno’s writings on music, the culture industry, and the modern condition. The first chapter, “Timeliness and Lateness,” draws on essays about Adorno published in the London Review of Books and Adorno: A Critical Reader, helping Said conceive of late style in Adorno’s various writings on “Spätstil Beethovens.” The late works of Adorno’s Beethoven, Said recalls, amount to “a moment when the artist who is fully in command of his medium nevertheless abandons communication with the established social order of which he is a part and achieves a contradictory, alienated relationship with it” (8). These works, Said continues in an oblique reference to his own early theorization, “served as a sort of beginning point for all [Adorno’s] analyses of subsequent music” (8). For Adorno and for Said, what is so generative in Beethoven’s late style is the way its “remorselessly alienated and obscure” aesthetics “[become] the prototypical modern aesthetic form” (14). This is late style’s fugitivity: that as a form it maintains its own elusiveness, that as an intellectual position it is marked by its own fleeting trajectory of escape from the social order. It emerges when Said considers Adorno’s critical engagement as a “self-imposed exile from what is generally acceptable, coming after it, and surviving beyond it” (16). A consistent, willed oppositional stance that long animated Said’s own intellectual practice, exile “work[s] through the silences and fissures” that reveal modernity’s deadening conditions of nationalism, domestication, corporatization, and privatization (15). The exilic intellectual’s attitude enables her or him “to avoid packaging and administration and is in fact to accept and perform the lateness of his position” (15), and recapitulates Said’s own commitment to anti-dynastic thinking, to proceeding continually and constructively through an unsystemized method marked by what he describes elsewhere as “restlessness, movement, constantly being unsettled, and unsettling others” (Representations 53). For all its centrifugal movement outward, weaving variations on a theme, On Late Style nevertheless tends to collapse specific artistic works with the performance of criticism and the critics themselves. An Adornian reading of late style, for instance, metonymically stands in for Adorno himself:
     

    the concept of lateness . . . comes for Adorno to seem the fundamental aspect of aesthetics and of his own work as critical theorist and philosopher . . . being at the end, fully conscious, full of memory, and also very (even preternaturally) aware of the present.
     

    (14)

     

    Just as Adorno blends with his work, so too does Said, so much so that at the close of the book Adorno offers the enigmatic last word: “in the history of art late works are the catastrophes” (160).

     
    This cryptic collapse into catastrophe signals the denouement, the post-climactic turn before the close, but also the catastrophe of what Said calls the “new and monstrous modern forms” of politics that Adorno’s exile both bore witness to and militated against: “fascism, anti-Semitism, totalitarianism, and bureaucracy” (23). These are precisely the twentieth-century formations that reveal for Hannah Arendt the terrible problem entwining the refugee, the law, and human rights. The preternatural present acutely diagnosed in Said’s other late works hisses for a moment, louder here than anywhere else in the book. We might hear in this hiss the residue of Walter Benjamin’s oft-quoted eighth thesis on the philosophy of history that, following Foucault and especially Giorgio Agamben, has received much recent critical attention. “The tradition of the oppressed,” Benjamin writes in flight from Nazi Germany, “teaches us that the ‘state of exception’ in which we live is the rule. We must attain to a concept of history that accords with this fact. Then we will clearly see that it is our task to bring about the real state of exception, and this will improve our position in the struggle against fascism” (392).
     
    Taken on Said’s terms, we might see late style as an aesthetic that registers the “interdependent histories” and “overlapping characters” (“Interview” 3) of modern catastrophe by effectively sounding the linkages between Nazi genocide; the dispossession and displacement of Palestinians in 1948 (routinely called in Arabic Al-Nakhba, “the catastrophe”); and the continuing conditions of occupation and incarceration that maintain the West Bank and Gaza in a perpetual “state of exception.” Contemporary readings of Foucault and Agamben reveal precisely such linkages, yet for Said they would likely come up short as accounts of universal human agency and will. Rigorous oppositional intellectual practice in counterpoint to its specific historical juncture, late style as modeled by Adorno and mirrored by Said, enables something more than simply a schematic reinscription of systemic dominance; it offers instead a fleeting attempt to “improve our position,” knowing full well that capture might be lurking right around the corner. Criticism of Said’s reliance on the figure of the heroic individual artist-intellectual, which in On Late Style seems to include himself, would surely be well-founded. There is something notably out of joint, narrow in a way that harmonizes with Said’s high modern archive, where intellectual practice operates at a level of remove liable to abstract late style from the forms of dense and textured sociality Said has long recognized, and that indeed he interrogates in various ways in so many of his late analytical and journalistic writings. Further, for all its focus on the single concept of “late style,” the collection comes across at times as rambling, unfinished, unpolished—as we should probably expect from a text assembled posthumously. The title of the last chapter, “Glimpses of Late Style,” might in this way stand for the necessary limitation, if also the speculative quality, of Said’s own late style.
     
    This stylistic roughness points the afterlife of Said’s work quite beyond its intention and towards a different yet deeply related articulation of “fuga,” one with a critical and critically important interdependent history that Said always keeps in view, even if he never substantively engages with it. This meaning emerges specifically out of a reading of the black radical tradition offered by Fred Moten, Brent Hayes Edwards, and other scholars working in the field of new jazz studies. It considers the aesthetics produced within the black radical tradition in ways that echo that fleeting moment in History of Sexuality, Vol. 1, where Foucault asserts not only that “genocide is indeed the dream of modern states” (137)—what Said might see as Foucault’s deadly totalizing vision of biopower—but also the much more nuanced and speculative statement: “it is not that life has been totally integrated into techniques that govern and administer it; it constantly escapes them” (143). This emergent engagement with black radical aesthetics shares with Said a commitment to thinking very carefully about the formal logics of the musical, of the nonrepresentational, of the performative—the buzz we hear in the silence of that comma. But this engagement builds on the likes of Amiri Baraka and Nathaniel Mackey to consider specifically jazz music, jazz poetics, jazz practice as points of departure carefully attuned to the political imperative not merely to re-assert humanism’s democratizing impulses (as Said does), or even to reveal humanism’s catastrophic contradictions (as Said also does). Rather, this work begins to ask: what political as much as formal and methodological trajectories are revealed in the performative practices of freedom elaborated by the black radical tradition of Parker, Mingus, Miles, and Monk, for instance, in counterpoint to Gould, Beethoven, Bach, and Mozart? What would it sound like to take as an analytical framework not simply the hiss of emergency in the wake of Nazi genocide or the 1967 war, but more broadly the aesthetics of escape that continually confront Euro-American paradigms of sovereignty, that circumscribe and circumvent modernity’s logic of white supremacy, that are, as Moten calls them, appositional to enlightenment—“remixed, expanded, distilled, and radically faithful to the forces its encounters carry, break, and constitute” (“Knowledge” 274)?
     
    The deeply formal, literary, and political questions emerging from Said’s late scholarly practice, it seems to me, might channel our future intellectual energies, even if such criticism rings of a certain belatedness as it buzzes in the comma describing Gould’s politics of performance and hisses in the Benjaminian struggle against fascism. When we read On Late Style in the way I suggest, such questions push us to hear Said’s contrapuntalism contrapuntally, through a frame that reveals its historical, its theoretical, its aesthetic analogues and antecedents in ways that might inform and transform it as they grapple with the persistent perils of modernity. When sounding On Late Style through its relation to “fuga,” it is through and yet despite its anachronism that the text offers us a preternaturally fugitive glimpse at willful beginning in the face of continued catastrophe.
     

    Keith P. Feldman received his Ph.D. in English from the University of Washington in 2008. His current research project, “Racing the Question: Israel/Palestine and U.S. Imperial Culture,” traces a post-World War II shift in U.S. imperial formation charted and contested by culture work that links struggles about race and rights in the United States with the question of Palestine. His articles have appeared in MELUS and CR: New Centennial Review, as well as in book collections.
     

    Works Cited

     

    • Arendt, Hannah. Imperialism: Part Two of The Origins of Totalitarianism. San Diego: Harcourt Brace & Co, 1968.
    • Benjamin, Walter. Selected Writings, Volume 4, 1938–1940. Eds. Howard Eiland and Michael W. Jennings. Cambridge: Harvard UP, 2003.
    • Foucault, Michel. The History of Sexuality, Volume 1: An Introduction. Trans. Robert Hurley. New York: Vintage, 1978.
    • Moten, Fred. “Knowledge of Freedom.” CR: The New Centennial Review 4.2 (2004): 269–310. [Project MUSE]
    • ———. “Uplift and Criminality.” Next to the Color Line: Gender, Sexuality, and W.E.B. Du Bois. Eds. Susan Gillman and Alys Eve Weinbaum. Minneapolis: U of Minnesota P, 2007. 317–349.
    • Said, Edward W. Beginnings: Intention and Method. New York: Columbia UP, 1985.
    • ———. “Between Worlds.” London Review of Books 20.9 (1998).
    • ———. Freud and the Non-European. New York: Verso, 2003.
    • ———. “An Interview with Edward W. Said.” boundary 2 20.1 (1993): 1–25. [CrossRef]
    • ———. On Late Style: Music and Literature Against the Grain. New York: Pantheon, 2006.
    • ———. Representations of the Intellectual: The 1993 Reith Lectures. New York: Vintage, 1996.

     

  • The Color of Shame: Reading Kathryn Bond Stockton’s Beautiful Bottom, Beautiful Shame

    Amy Abugo Ongiri (bio)
    Department of English, University of Florida
    aongiri@english.ufl.edu

    Review of: Kathryn Bond Stockton, Beautiful Bottom, Beautiful Shame: Where “Black” Meets “Queer.” Durham, NC: Duke UP, 2006.

     

    Kathryn Bond Stockton’s Beautiful Bottom, Beautiful Shame: Where “Black” Meets “Queer” takes shame as a productive site of inquiry about identities that are produced by repeated public debasement, even though, as Stockton says, “debasement should not be seen as a theme in this book” (8). Not wanting to view Blackness and queerness as simple or fixed notions (as indicated by the quotation marks in Stockton’s title), Beautiful Bottom, Beautiful Shame seeks rather to explore “switchpoints between black and queer, queer and black” (5) in order to discover the value of shame for critical cultural analysis. Stockton writes:
     

    Debasement is a fully indispensable informant. It is a key to understanding the ties, bold and subtle, between two signs that would seem linguistically, historically separate. The strangeness of queerness would not seem particularly destined to meet the darkness of blackness, except in the bodies of dark queer folk. We will see this is not so. Shame is an equal-opportunity meeting place for these signs. In fact, I believe we cannot grasp certain complicated cultural, historical entanglements between “black” and “queer” without, at the same time, interrogating shame—its beautiful, generative, sorrowful debasements that make bottom pleasures so dark and so strange.
     

    (8)

     

    Exploring “black” and “queer” in connection with the unlikely category of shame allows Stockton to bring together terms and texts that are not frequently in dialogue with each other. She considers the “dark camp” of Toni Morrison’s Beloved in the context of “cloth wounds and skin wounds” in David Fincher’s 1999 film Fight Club (206, 216). She finds concern with Blackness in the unlikely interstitial spaces of canonical queer texts that do not feature characters of African descent, such as Jean Genet’s 1953 Querelle, Radclyffe Hall’s 1928 The Well of Loneliness, and Leslie Feinberg’s 1993 Stone Butch Blues. In these texts, Stockton argues innovatively that clothing becomes the vector for negotiating the shame and debasement of non-normative genders and sexualities much as black skin has become both a marker and vector for racial debasement. She claims:

     

    Cloth and skin touch on each other’s meanings since each is a surface—with intense, complex, and variable codings attached to it—that may be the object of prejudice, violence, attraction, and invective. Each may be physically marked with a wound (torn cloth, torn skin) and each can elicit psychic wounds (self-loathing, for example) because of the shame it seems to carry. Each can also, in certain contexts, elicit pride—or sexual attraction and aesthetic delight. That is, there is beauty.
     

    (40)

     

    Drawing a correlation between skin and cloth allows Stockton to explore the ways in which wounding is enacted upon and then reappropriated by those subjected to it in relationship to the categories of shame and debasement. Stockton explores the characters in these novels as “martyrs to their clothes” to reveal how “shame can adhere to forms of beauty” (41). Those whose only “sin is their skin” might bristle at the idea that clothing could be made equivalent to the complex social codings of race. Nonetheless, Kathryn Bond Stockton’s book suggests the possibilities and pitfalls for theorizing beyond conventional understandings of race and gender. On the one hand, Stockton’s desire “to probe the value of debasement as a central social action” allows a necessary inquiry into the ways in which “‘black’ and ‘gay’ at the level of signs” are locked into what she terms “a bottom” enactment of the complicated politics of shame (2). This allows her a provocative and original engagement with texts by Toni Morrison, Jean Genet, Norman Mailer, Radclyffe Hall, James Baldwin, and Roland Barthes. On the other hand, by accepting “debasement” as the predominant category through which to view “the crossing of signs” between Black and gay, Stockton locks her inquiry into widely accepted concepts of “black” and “queer” (as evidenced by her reliance on the New York Times Magazine in her opening discussion of “the Down Low”). This has the unfortunate effect of severely limiting Beautiful Bottom, Beautiful Shame’s potential level of engagement with the actual texts, histories, and contexts where “black” and queer” have met socially, historically and culturally.

     
    The book’s most valuable contribution is its challenge to conventional understandings of terms such as “value,” “shame,” “abjection,” “wounding,” and “contamination,” which it puts in relation to wider critical discussions. For example, Stockton relates Roland Barthes’s notion of the punctum from Camera Lucida to the notion of “aesthetic wounding” found in Quentin Tarantino’s 1994 film Pulp Fiction and in images from Robert Mapplethorpe’s 1988 collection Black Book, and so contests the parameters that Barthes’s vision of the image allows. Stockton can thus explore the “rhetoric of violence that is inherent in the act of looking yet is often overlooked in critical discussions of visual culture that do not consider race as a necessary category of inquiry (123). Stockton makes another unlikely connection between what she labels the “bottom” politics and “anal economics in the history of Black neighborhoods,” citing the way in which she claims Toni Morrison “dares to value debasement” in her 1973 novel Sula. In doing so, Stockton argues that Morrison’s work not only celebrates the “bottom values” of debasement but also “debases Freud” (67, 72). Consequently, Stockton is able to read the “value” in the “bottom” politics of Freud’s multiple investments in anality at the same time that she can read the critique of Freud inherent in Morrison’s nuanced account of life on “the bottom” of the social, economic, and cultural scale for African American residents in Sula, who live in a segregated section of town known as “the Bottom.” Stockton writes: “To debase Freud, in relation to the Bottom, as we will see, is to credit his accounts of feces as coins but to make more sorrowful what he clearly felt some necessity to celebrate: namely, how the bottom is lost, left behind, as one becomes more ‘civilized’” (73). In another particularly provocative pairing, Stockton deploys cultural categories from Eldridge Cleaver’s controversial 1968 racial polemic Soul on Ice to declare that Todd Haynes’s 2002 film Far From Heaven “succeeds in suggesting something already implicit and hiding in Cleaver’s sexual semiotics” (215). Exploring Far From Heaven in relationship to the categories that Cleaver defines for sexual subjectivity in Soul on Ice, Stockton concludes: “The film makes its highly intentional bridge between blacks and queers by having the woman who personifies clothes (artifice, surface) be the one to notice—finally, dramatically—the wound of black skin” (214). Stockton thus highlights Far From Heaven’s challenged to a deracialized notion of “camp” and explores what is potentially useful as well as problematic in a largely forgotten text that approaches the same material as the film from a closer historical vantage point.
     
    Beautiful Bottom, Beautiful Shame: Where “Black” Meets “Queer” raises the obvious question about the positioning of “shame” and “debasement” at the center of a study that also invokes, however deeply qualified, terms like “black” and “queer,” terms that have also existed historically as markers of liberation and emancipatory possibility. Stockton herself asks the question: “Is the conception of valuable shame something only a queer would consider (a white queer at that?)” (9). What role do cultural politics and an intellectual culture that continue to marginalize people of African descent play in the choice to highlight the question of shame and debasement in relation to these categories? Indeed, the question is even present in the jacket art of the book, which prominently positions the J.B. Higgins photograph “Andre”—a nude, aesthetically well proportioned young Black man with his head bowed—as a visual tease on the front cover and the Eurocentric intellectual tease on the back cover, that the book reads its texts “with and against major theorists, including Georges Bataille, Sigmund Freud, Eve Kosofsky Sedgwick, Jacques Lacan, Roland Barthes, and Leo Bersani.” Is it possible for such a study to explore the symbolic economy of shame in relation to the “switchpoints of ‘black’ and ‘queer’” without simply replicating the historical and cultural politics that created these switchpoints in the first place?
     
    This question is further highlighted by the very brief but significant inclusion of the work of two writers who self-identify as “Black queers,” Robert Reid-Pharr and Gary Fisher (whose posthumously collected writings Gary in Your Pocket were also published by Series Q at Duke University Press). Fisher’s observation that “I haven’t read Hegel yet…I’m afraid to know” stands beside his declaration, “I want to be a slave, a sex slave and a slave beneath another man’s (a white man or a big man, preferably a big white man) power” (140). This statement posits the “switchpoints between black and queer, queer and black” at the critical intersection of knowledge and power, the full force of which Stockton’s study tantalizingly suggests but fails to fully engage. What would it mean to read Fisher’s desire to “be a slave, a sex slave” in relation to a liberatory politics of social transformation? In Conjuring Black Funk: Notes on Culture, Sexuality, and Spirituality, his defense of “freaks” and “sexual courage,” Herukhuti insists that fundamental to his own practice of SM is a recognition of “the way race and gender intertwine to make Black men both slaves and slavemasters, givers of pain and receivers of pain in this society” (166). Stockton excerpts Reid-Pharr’s exploration of his desire for “an ugly, poor, white trash southerner,” published in the marvelously complicated 2001 essay collection Black Gay Male, in relationship to his declaration that “I still have to resist the impulse to flinch when someone refers to me as a queer and to positively run for cover when someone refers to me as a black queer.” Stockton cites Reid-Pharr in order to read these claims in the context of the debased categories of identity (21). Reid-Pharr and Fisher’s invocation of power, dominance, and knowledge in connection with shame raises the question of the role dominance and power play in Stockton’s valuing of shame as an analytic category. Stockton’s study turns on the term “switchpoints” as a critical conduit of symbolic exchange between the terms “black” and “queer,” an imaginary moment of “social communion—through acts of debasement and the crossing of signs” (2). “Switchpoints” serve as vectors of intersectionality for the symbolic “baggage” of “queer,” “black,” and “shame,” but the term enacts a balance of exchange that both Fisher and Reid-Pharr suggest rarely exists either in moments of literal social communion or in the social imaginary of the textual.
     
    Beautiful Bottom, Beautiful Shame: Where “Black” Meets “Queer” begins its discussion of “switchpoints” with a minor but narratively significant African American character in John Cameron Mitchell’s 2001 film Hedwig and the Angry Inch. This focus on a minor character in a “major” independent film again raises the question of what it means to examine the “switchpoints” between “black” and “queer” texts where Black queer aesthetics and Black sexual subjectivities are not the major focus. In examining “the black man’s momentary passage through the text” of Hedwig and the Angry Inch, Stockton offers a definition of “switchpoints”:
     

    By switchpoint here, I mean the point at which one sign’s rich accumulations—those surrounding “American black”—lend themselves to another—“East German queer” . . . . That is . . . numerous meanings attached to “black” switch onto new tracks and signify in the field of “queerness”. . . . I think of a switchpoint, at least in part, in railroad terms, according to which a “switch” is “a movable section of railroad track” that is “used in transferring a train from one set of tracks to another”; or, in electrical terms: “a device used to open, close or divert an electric current”; or, in a general sense of a switch as “a shift or transference, especially if sudden or unexpected” . . . . Largely, I will use the term to refer to a point of connection between two signs (or two rather separate connotative fields) where something from one flows toward (is diverted in the direction of) the other, lending its connotative spread and signifying force to the other, illuminating it and intensifying it, but also sometimes shifting it or adulterating it.
     

    (4–5)

     
    To find the switchpoint between the terms “black” and “queer” within the conceptual space of “debasement,” Stockton moves towards theoretical texts whose interests lie primarily outside of African American studies or critical race theory and also decidedly away from texts that explore racial subjectivity in moments where shame or debasement have a liberatory or emancipatory potential. Stockton locates her “critical genealogy of influential thinkers thinking through shame . . . Bataille, Kristeva, Taussig, Bersani, and Sedgwick—the latter most centrally—along with Edelman, Litvak, Kennedy, Muñoz, Holland, and also Reid-Pharr” (6). Though Stockton hopes to challenge at various moments the hierarchal divide between the creative and critical enterprises by, for example, a strategy “to emphasize Morrison’s parity with Freud as a theorist,” the fact that most scholars in her critical genealogy have given little attention to fields such as African American studies or critical race studies creates a pattern in which African Americans such as Morrison and Baldwin provide the occasional creative material for the study but little of the critical content. Thus Stockton can make innovative connections to texts that have not been thought about in African American studies or in critical race theory, as in her discussion of fabric in Querelle where, she claims, clothing becomes “an elegant, self-embracing shame—one that will dramatically show up as blackened skin” (58). It also allows her to make such connections between texts and fields, as when she invokes Barthes to discuss the moment of visuality surrounding the rape of an African American character in Pulp Fiction as a “pulp punctum” (141). However, her choice to engage with these texts in this way also create significant limitations on the scope of her conceptual framework and tends, unfortunately, to replicate the historical erasure of those who have existed precisely at the juncture of the signs “black” and “queer.”
     
    One wonders about the ways in which Kathryn Bond Stockton’s notion of the “switchpoints between black and queer, queer and black” could be brought to bear on the histories of African diasporic sexualities that lie beyond the critical theory that fails to acknowledge them and studies like Stockton’s that seem only capable of acknowledging the shadow of their reflection in representation by people who are, by and large, neither Black nor queer. Do notions such as “switchpoints” or a practice of reading white critical theorists against the grain move us beyond the politics of refusal and erasure that have effectively kept these histories from our critical scrutiny? For instance, though Afro-British soccer star Justin Fashanu was the first Black soccer player in Britain to be paid in excess of one million dollars to play professional soccer and remains to this day the only European soccer player to come out as gay while still playing professionally (“Why”), he has largely been forgotten in both European history and sports history as well as within queer history and the history of the African diaspora. This is due to the complicated intersections of racial memory, shame, accusation, and erasure connected with Fashanu’s 1998 suicide by hanging following sensationalized accusations of sexual assault against a seventeen year old boy. John Fashanu, Justin Fashanu’s only brother, who was also a professional soccer player, was typical in his stance towards his brother’s coming out and his premature death in its characteristic enactment of a politics of refusal and erasure. Claiming that he hadn’t spoken to his brother in over seven years, John Fashanu insisted: “It doesn’t interest me one iota what he does” (“Fashanu May Have Fled”). John Fashanu, who indicated that Justin’s behavior had put him beyond the pale of not only family loyalty but also public representation, had publicly disowned his brother when he initially came out, labeling him “a complete outcast” (“John Fashanu”). While Justin Fashanu’s life and creative output were defined by shame, his death was marked by erasure. Stockton opens Beautiful Bottom, Beautiful Shame: Where “Black” Meets “Queer” with the “real world” controversy surrounding Black men on the so-called “Down Low” (1). Stockton argues that the controversy highlighted the “the strained relations between ‘black’ and ‘gay’ at the level of signs, even as ongoing struggles for rights and a health epidemic of epic proportions continued to connect black and gay people” (2). Her invocation of the AIDS crisis and the ongoing struggle for human rights that connects “‘black’ and ‘gay’ at the level of signs” highlights the potential deadly consequences of shame for those who live under those signs, but can Stockton’s “switchpoint” methodology offer something that can make sense of the refusal and erasure that continues to construct the lives of “dark queer folk”?
     
    Besides considering the ways in which James Baldwin’s Giovanni’s Room reworks white characters into a racialized economy to explore decomposition as a site of attraction, Beautiful Bottom, Beautiful Shame: Where “Black” Meets “Queer” pays little attention to the cultural production of artists or critics who literally and historically locate themselves and their work at the nexus of “Black” and “queer.” There are only too brief discussions of the works of Black queer artists and theorists Robert Reid-Pharr, Gary Fisher, Sharon Patricia Holland, Isaac Julien, Kobena Mercer, and Rotimi Fani-Kayode. The book suffers from this exclusion and ultimately seems more concerned with the category of shame in the “switchpoints between black and queer, queer and black” for what it tells about whiteness and normativity, as evidenced by the book’s concluding line: “Apparently, even straight white folks need beautiful bottoms” (221). People of African descent have long been made to be aware of their use-value for the symbolic economy of Western culture, as Hortense Spillers famously writes in “Mama’s Baby, Papa’s Maybe: An American Grammar Book”: “My country needs me, and if I was not here, I would have to be invented” (257). But what is the use-value and what are the consequences of the categories of shame and debasement for African people? How have they used these conditions to construct a culture of consequence for themselves? Stockton chooses to focus on debasement because of “its relation…to the concept of value” (7). She also “asks the reader to keep close at hand” the terms “abjection” and “humiliation,” and she interestingly defines abjection as having the sense of being cast or thrown away, while she wants humiliation to be understood in relation to “religious mortification” (7,8). Both of these terms as she defines them suggest a productive quality that lies outside of traditional modes of valuation that may have more significance to cultures that have been denied access to “value” as such. Recent studies have considered the ways in which abjection has historically been constitutive for African Americans’ aesthetic, cultural, and identity production. Elizabeth Alexander’s incisive essay, “‘Can You Be BLACK and Look at This?’: Reading the Rodney King Video(s),” and Saidiya V. Hartman’s definitional study of slavery, Scenes of Subjection: Terror, Slavery, and Self-Making in Nineteenth-Century America, consider the ways African American cultural production remakes what Alexander labels “the ‘fact’ of abject blackness” into “a cultural memory [carried] on the flesh” (110, 91). Hartman argues in Scenes of Subjection that “the performance of blackness is inseparable from the brute force that brands, rapes, and tears open the flesh in the racial inscription of the body. In other words, the seeming obstinacy or the ‘givenness’ of ‘blackness’ registers the ‘fixing’ of the body by terror and dominance and in the way in which that fixing has been constitutive” (58). Studies like these can potentially deepen the understanding of abjection as a base material of culture-making beyond the ways in which it is invoked in the works examined in Beautiful Bottom, Beautiful Shame: Where “Black” Meets “Queer.”
     
    Ultimately, the value of Stockton’s work lies in the seemingly unlikely connections it is able to make. Stockton’s chapter “Prophylactics and Brains: Slavery in the Cybernetic Age of AIDS” explores Toni Morrison’s 1988 novel Beloved in relation to cultural discourse around AIDS. It focuses on obvious cultural artifacts, such as Robert Mapplethorpe’s 1986 photograph collection Black Book and Morrison’s play about the murder of Emmett Till, as well as on the discourse of viral contamination in cyber culture that propagates at the birth of the AIDS crisis and the birth of Morrison’s novel. Stockton writes:
     

    I want to read Beloved as it is never read—as a novel born in 1987, in the cybernetic age of AIDS. Its melancholy pairing of untimely deaths with dangerous transmissions (between the living and the living dead) is the major issue I wish to consider. This is not to read Beloved as an AIDS book—not exactly so—but to claim kinship to 1987 in its conception of a viral gothic. That is, Beloved, perhaps not accidentally, forges a model of viral memory.
     

    (180)

     

    Stockton’s ability to bring Morrison’s work in conversation with cyber culture and the language of viral contamination adds much to our critical understanding of cultural transmission and the ways in which death and the dead become sites for negotiating “dangerous transmissions” and of the interpenetration between memory and the brain, the body and its surface, while negotiating the question of reproduction in ways that answer to the cybernetic age as well as the historical past. For me, this chapter, with its concepts of the “viral gothic” and “threatening reproduction,” was haunted by the spectre of Julius Eastman, the African American classical composer who scandalized the world of avant-garde music in the seventies and eighties with his unconventional performances and compositions such as “Gay Guerilla,” “Evil Nigger,” and “Crazy Nigger,” only to die in 1990 in anonymous poverty and complete obscurity in an upstate New York hospital. Rarely recorded, and only incompletely archived, the vast majority of Eastman’s compositions were lost in the 1980s when he was evicted from his New York City apartment and became homeless, his possessions first seized and then disposed of by the Sheriff’s Department. Despite Eastman’s previous notoriety, Kyle Gann notes that Eastman was dead six months before anyone bothered to write an obituary for him. Eastman’s composition “Evil Nigger” is written to be performed by multiple pianos and its enigmatic, building repetition is haunted thematically as well as sonically by its reiteration of the sense of “dangerous transmissions” and “threatening reproduction” of which Stockton speaks.

     
    Once when Nina Simone introduced her controversial 1963 protest song against racial segregation and racist violence, “Mississippi Goddam,” she pronounced it a “show tune whose show has not been written yet.” Simone’s ability to pronounce the unpronounceable contributed to the sublime nature of her performance and this sublimity, moreover, lies at the critical nexus of “black” and “queer” along with what Kathryn Bond Stockton marks as “shame.” When called upon in 1980 to justify his controversial naming of his “Nigger Series,” Julius Eastman similarly responded with the typically enigmatic statement: “There are 99 names for Allah and there are 52 niggers.” Eastman thus maintained a sense of the “holy” in what Stockton explores as “nigger jokes” in the work of Morrison, Quentin Tarantino, and others (73). What is missing from Beautiful Bottom, Beautiful Shame: Where “Black” Meets “Queer” is precisely this sense that is most present in the work of Black queers who exist at “switchpoints between black and queer, queer and black”–not the celebration of debasement, but the counterpoint of the holy.
     

    Amy Abugo Ongiri is an assistant professor in the English Department and Film and Media Studies Program at the University of Florida. Her research interests include African American Literature and Culture, Film Studies, Cultural Studies, and Gender and Sexuality Studies. Her work has been published in College Literature, Camera Obscura, Black Filmmaker, Nka: The Journal of Contemporary African Art, the Journal of Asian American Studies, and the Journal of African American History. Her book Spectacular Blackness: The Cultural Politics of the Black Power Movement and the Search for a Black Aesthetic explores the cultural politics of the Black Power movement, particularly the Black Arts movement’s search to define a “Black Aesthetic.” It is forthcoming from the University of Virginia Press in Fall 2009.
     

    Works Cited

     

    • Alexander, Elizabeth. “‘Can You Be BLACK and Look at This?’: Reading the Rodney King Video(s).” Black Male: Representations of Masculinity in Contemporary American Art. Ed. Thelma Golden. New York: Harry N. Abrams, 1994.
    • Eastman, Julius. Unjust Malaise. New World Records, 2005.
    • “Fashanu May Have Fled US.” BBC World News. 2 May 1998. 26 Feb. 2009 <http://212.58.226.17:8080/1/hi/world/americas/86840.stm>.
    • Gann, Kyle. “Damned Outrageous: The Music of Julius Eastman.” Liner notes. Unjust Malaise. New World Records, 2005.
    • Hartman, Saidiya V. Scenes of Subjection: Terror, Slavery, and Self-Making in Nineteenth-Century America. New York: Oxford University Press, 1997.
    • Herukhuti. Conjuring Black Funk: Notes on Culture, Sexuality, and Spirituality. New York: Vintage Entity Press, 2007.
    • “John Fashanu: My Gay Brother is an Outcast.” Voice. October 30, 1990.
    • Simone, Nina. The Best of Nina Simone. Verve Records, 1986.
    • Spillers, Hortense J. “Mama’s Baby, Papa’s Maybe: An American Grammar Book.” African American Literary Theory: A Reader. Ed. Winston Napier. New York: New York University Press, 2000.
    • “Why are there no openly gay footballers?” BBC Magazine. 11 Nov. 2005. BBC News. 26 Feb. 2009<http://news.bbc.co.uk/1/hi/magazine/4427718.stm>.

     

  • The Double Helix and Other Social Structures

    Elizabeth Freudenthal (bio)
    School of Literature, Communication, and Culture, Georgia Institute of Technology
    elizabeth.freudenthal@lcc.gatech.edu

    Review of: Judith Roof, The Poetics of DNA. Minneapolis, MN: U Minnesota P, 2007.

     

    In 2000 the Human Genome Project, a consortium of privately and publicly funded researchers, drafted the first full sequence of the DNA in the human genome. Since that event, genes and DNA have exploded in public consciousness. Genes and DNA are not the same, and both determine plant and animal nature more than heredity and far less than total biological causality. Still, both are now understood as the overlapping, nearly-unitary source of biological as well as social and cultural determinism. Though this conception of DNA is not factual, it predominates in discourse about science and society. These popular misconceptions provide simplistic answers to complex social questions about the nature of gender, sexuality, and race, and the role of scientific knowledge in human life. To counter these misconceptions, we need scholars such as Judith Roof, who has channeled her formidable knowledge of gender theory and media studies into The Poetics of DNA, a pioneering cultural studies analysis—alongside cultural studies work on genetics by scholars like Dorothy Nelkin and Donna Haraway—on the narratives of DNA. Roof argues that the language about DNA circulating in the public has adverse effects on our ideas about identity, in particular about gender. However, this language persists because it is rooted in some of our most deeply held ideas about knowledge and about human life. Roof’s book outlines how this circular relation has worked in the history of genetics, and demonstrates that the way we talk about DNA reveals more about society than it does about the biological functions of deoxyribonucleic acid.
     
    Roof’s central and most powerful argument is historical: DNA was discovered at an eerily perfect moment of scientific and philosophical change, just before structuralism gave way to post-structuralism. Roof describes how early geneticists incorporated structuralist language and concepts into their work on DNA and heredity, though more scientifically accurate models, such as systems and complexity theories, were newly available to them. The physical form of DNA fuels this curious fidelity to structuralism: DNA is a twinned chain of nucleotides that reproduces itself by splitting down the middle and duplicating its matching other half, reproducing biological information in the process of self-replication. DNA is a self-contained knowledge system whose structure equals its function: a perfect example of structuralism. Roof explains, “self-contained and self-identical, DNA does what it is by making more of itself. . . . It links agents of heredity directly to the life processes of living organisms. Structure melds with function in a self-reproducing strand of nucleic acids” (30). However, this structuralist paradigm is misleading; because DNA’s “self-identical functional structure [was] regarded as almost infinitely meaningful, it masks a shift to the contemporaneous emergence of less structuralist, less dialectical (or more poststructuralist) ways of thinking about phenomena” (32). Roof argues that scientists and philosophers fixated on a conception of DNA as structuralist and dialectical at the expense of scarier but more compelling notions of unpredictability, complexity, and indeterminacy that were emerging in the mid-twentieth century. In the sciences, theories of complexity, systems theory, and relativity were emerging at the time; complex systems theory in particular better describes DNA’s role within reproduction and heredity processes. In literary philosophy, post-structuralist models better suit the ways identity is formed by a still-unknowable interplay of culture and biology. However, Roof argues, the discovery of DNA helped preserve the more comforting and long-standing, if inaccurate and misleading, modes of knowledge crystallized in structuralism. Roof’s shorthand for the structuralist conception of DNA as a simplistic agent of heredity and biological determinism is “the DNA gene,” a phrase that describes the way popular discourse erases the difference between DNA and the gene and, by extension, other complicated biological processes associated with DNA and genes. Roof argues that “if there hadn’t been such a thing as a DNA gene, we would have contrived it anyway” —because “the DNA gene is the point at which many long-lived ideas about the order of the universe converge,” because we are already conditioned to conceive of DNA structurally, and because structuralist systems of thought are more exploitable than those that followed them historically (28). The profound power of “the DNA gene” to obfuscate these more accurate but threatening models grounds the rest of Roof’s book, which theorizes the ability of our metaphors about “the DNA gene” to preserve patriarchal, binary hierarchies, to privilege reductive narrative over other, more generative models of communication, and to appropriate biological minutiae for capitalist gain:
     

    While biologically DNA is the means for reproducing and preserving genetic information, culturally it is the mechanism for reproducing and preserving the familiar world of meaningful structure, the linear cause and effect of (narrative) relations, the organizational sense of mechanical hierarchical function, and a belief in the generative power of the word that has typified Western thought from the Greeks to Albert Einstein.
     

    (31)

     

    From this perspective, our cultural and scientific narratives describing DNA and genetics are reductive at best, incorrect at worst. Roof argues that because our use of language and narrative remains rooted in structuralist conceptions of binarism, oppositionality, linearity, and logocentrism, the myriad and omnipresent linguistic metaphors for DNA are deeply integrated with the structuralist conception of “the DNA gene.” Both linguistic and structural conceptions of what she calls “the epic acid” have destructive social effects. Linguistic metaphors such as “the book of life,” “blueprint,” and “code” imply reductive and misleading ideas about DNA: that it functions like language, that genes can substitute for each other without negative side effects, that the arrangement of DNA sequences creates their meaning, that a segment of a DNA sequence has a one-to-one relationship with a particular life process, and that DNA is akin to an authored product available for copyright protection. Roof’s book outlines and speculates about the social and scientific effects of these dangerous misconceptions.

     
    Most of the book applies narrative and gender theories to language about DNA; her primary texts come mostly from popular science writing, but she also discusses corporate public relations material, DNA and genetics scholarship and, all too briefly, screwball comedy films about DNA-based transformation. Though her central argument closely follows the basic premises of gender theories about narrative and about science, it is no less powerful. Roof uses the premise of science studies, that scientists base their research questions on pre-existing cultural norms and then use their experimental results to naturalize those norms. In the case of DNA, its binary, self-replicating structure reinforces the idea that reproduction depends on the complementary binaries inherent in heterosexuality. Scientific knowledge about DNA is then used to reinforce the heterosexual norm, which is in fact not genetically determined. Further, linguistic narratives about DNA perpetuate the patriarchal aspects of language itself as binary, hierarchical, and linear, and these characteristics in turn create the conceptual frames of scientific research and of popular discussions of that research. “With DNA genes, already endowed with reproductive missions, the seemingly inherent and inevitable heteroreproductive pattern saturates the world of imaginary operations” (116), including both the fictional and non-fictional representations of DNA that circulate in culture. For these reasons, Roof argues, gender and sexuality are becoming increasingly associated with genetic determinism while race is disconnected from it; that is, “at the same time that we start imagining genetic cotillions, race as a genetically based category is declared to be genetically nonexistent” (140).
     
    On this point, Roof is off the mark. In an odd reversal of her book’s main thesis, she outlines ways in which structuralist taxonomies of human physiological types are out of intellectual fashion, even as genetics has enabled the persistence of structuralist approaches to biologically determined sex and gender (140–3). Her explanation for this, without much evidence, is that the contemporary global economy now privileges a “one- world” model of humanity in which race is no longer an economically or culturally necessary category (144–7). In general, Roof relies on speculation over deep analysis of evidence; on this topic her omission threatens to turn her book into a simplistic restatement of second wave feminism. In fact, she omits a large body of work that addresses the very phenomenon she claims is finished: what Duana Fullwiley calls the “molecularization of race” (1). Fullwiley and others, most notably sociologist Troy Duster, have shown that the ties between genetics and race are even stronger with the mapping of the genome. Even while race is conventionally understood to be a combination of cultural practices, historical forces, and evolutionary traits, technologies such as ancestry testing, DNA-based forensics, genetic screenings for “target” populations, and pre-implantation genetic screening of in-vitro embryos threaten to bring what Duster describes as eugenics in through the back door.
     
    Despite this omission, and despite her claims that sex and gender are more associated with genetic determinism than is race, Roof’s arguments about narrative, metaphor, sex and gender are still compelling. For example, she uses feminist narratology to show that linguistic metaphors about DNA technologies reshape our notions of paternity while reinforcing paternity as crucial to identity. She begins with metaphor and metonymy, poetic devices that Freud and Jakobson argued provided two basic “poles” of language and representation. Roof notes that sexual politics have functioned according to these poles as well: paternity has been established using metaphor, the father’s name substituting for biological paternity. Metonymy, however, a mother and child’s proximity during labor, defines maternity. Similarly, linguistic representations of DNA encourage a misleading understanding of it as metaphor, according to an assumption that substitutions and replacements of DNA sequences result in stable meanings. Systems or complexity theories, biological representations modeling more accurately the way DNA works, characterize DNA as metonym, operating by contiguity and embedded in complex biological systems of which a double-helixed protein sequence is one part. Describing DNA as operating metaphorically perpetuates outmoded patriarchal narratives of reproduction. According to Roof, “the logic of substitution (symbolization, paternity, soul, magic) eclipses the contiguity that underwrites it, even—or especially—in relation to DNA, whose operation is purely metonymic. In this sense, DNA, genes, and metonymy are a figurative mother whose regime is thwarted and constantly reshaped by the representational machinations of an increasingly obsolete paternal law” (89). To avoid losing the meaning of paternity and, more generally, of law, “DNA is rewrapped in metaphor—and not just any metaphor, but the analogy of the Word, the code, the same figure applied to originary paternity and law (which, at least biblically, came together)” (91). This feminist reading of linguistic metaphors of DNA helps explain how new biotechnologies affect social structures such as gender and sexuality. Similarly, Roof argues that linguistic, metaphoric conceptions of DNA preserve human agency: if genes are like language, we can manipulate them easily. We can replace one gene sequence with another the way we use synonyms, or arrange sequences as if they were dependent clauses in a sentence. This illusion of genetic agency consoles those who may be disturbed by the homogeneity that genetic knowledge enforces—all humans share the same genes with each other and most genes with other primates—as well as by the idea that our genes are more in control of us than we are. According to the patriarchal, hierarchical logic of the DNA gene, Roof argues, linguistic metaphors of DNA and genetics facilitate ownership; DNA sequences are like strings of words “written,” and thus copyrightable, by the scientists who discover them. Further, these metaphors encourage the magical thinking of pseudoscience, misguided notions of linear cause and effect that characterize genetic science as a simple manipulation of protein sequences with predictable, stable therapeutic effects. Roof’s discussion of these various ways that structuralist, linguistic conceptions of “the DNA gene” enable illusions of mastery over our genes is essential reading for any student of biotechnology and culture.
     
    This book’s primary weakness, exemplified by Roof’s omission of much work on race and genetics, is its lack of disciplinary substance on either the “science” or the “cultural studies” side. There are no extended close readings of texts, no extended analyses of laboratory practices, and no original historical reviews of genetics. This emphasis on theory and speculation rather than on intensive analyses of primary texts points to this book’s position as an early union of literary studies and genetic science. To establish the contours of an emerging field—what Lennard Davis and David Morris have called “biocultures,” the multidisciplinary approach to the intersections of biology and culture (411)—Roof establishes transdisciplinary understanding. She solves this problem by writing what amount to short introductions to literary theory, gender studies, and genetic biology, and by developing her arguments directly from the premises of those fields, such as the premise of literary studies that language structures understanding. As her background is in literary and cultural studies, her use of those fields’ premises overshadow her introductory use of genetics, and her argument is similarly weighted toward the literary. Her discussions of these disciplinary premises are extremely clear and straightforward, written in lively, enjoyable prose, and they make a compelling case for transdisciplinary scholarship. The downside of her choice is that she substitutes basic narrative and gender theories, as well as rudimentary biology, for intensive analysis on either disciplinary side. In general, science studies books such as those by Sandra Harding, Donna Haraway, and Anne Fausto-Sterling argue for the cultural studies of science by analyzing ways that culture affects scientific practice, challenging the positivist premise that scientific research is fueled exclusively by a quest for empirical truth. Roof’s point, that linguistic practices and their cultural associations affect scientific progress, remains more speculative here. Her best example of the way language shapes science is the etymology of “gene”: geneticist William Bateson, a translator and proponent of Mendel, proposed the term “genetics” in a 1906 letter. He felt that this term would represent adequately the field of science devoted to discovering the agents of heredity and of generational variation. Another scientist, Wilhelm Johannsen, then coined smaller etymological units from “genetics” — “gene,” “genotype,” and “phenotype” —in 1909, establishing a field-wide move toward the reduction of biological processes to ever-smaller agenic objects. The two concepts inherent in this etymology—the root “gen” associated with both birth and race or species, and the increasingly small agents of biological processes—established a subsequent destiny for genetics research to fulfill. Roof argues that “the analogies and figurations of DNA as the genetic agent that prefigure and anticipate the working out of its structure already determine (or overdetermine) the directions research takes as well as predefine the analogies and coincident conceptual baggage that accompanies DNA as the mode of its public transmission” (77). This description of the way language structures scientific understanding is compelling, but it is Roof’s only example of language determining science. Her larger argument that structuralist theories determine scientific goals is convincing, as are her analyses of the dangerous consequences of contemporary corporate press releases purveying what she shows are reductively structuralist characterizations of DNA as a language. But Roof’s arguments rest on a more humanist assumption, that by creating our perceptions of science, cultural norms affect the social status of scientific research but don’t necessarily substantively change the research itself. A stronger science studies position or argument is difficult to find in The Poetics of DNA. The book seems to be written for humanists interested in science culture, rather than for scientists interested in a literary and cultural studies perspective, and so its introductory explanations of literary, narrative, and gender theory seem misplaced. Still, this is a rhetorical problem of audience and not an overriding weakness of argument. As the broader intersection of literature and science and the more specific cultural studies of genetics develop, and as an audience for such work grows and stabilizes, Roof’s book will be seen as an important initial investigation of the dynamic and potentially damaging relationship between cultural norms and genetic research.
     

    Elizabeth Freudenthal is a postdoctoral fellow in Literature, Communication and Culture at the Georgia Institute of Technology. She is working on two projects: a book about the ways that biomedicine defines and shapes human experience in contemporary American literature and culture, and an article about contemporary debt culture and temporality. Her article about obsessive-compulsive disorder and objectification in David Foster Wallace’s Infinite Jest is forthcoming in New Literary History.
     

    Works Cited

     

    • Davis, Lennard and David Morris. “Biocultures Manifesto.” New Literary History 38.3 (2007): 411–418. [Project MUSE]
    • Duster, Troy. Backdoor to Eugenics. 2nd Ed. New York: Routledge, 2003. [CrossRef]
    • Fullwiley, Duana. “The Molecularization of Race: Institutionalizing Human Difference in Pharmacogenetics Practice.” Science as Culture 16.1 (2007): 1–30. [CrossRef]

     

  • Bionanomedia Expression

    Chris Funkhouser (bio)
    Department of Humanities, New Jersey Institute of Technology
    christopher.t.funkhouser@njit.edu

    Review of: Media Poetry: An International Anthology, ed. Eduardo Kac. Chicago: Intellect Books, 2007, and Kac, Hodibis Potax. Ivry-sur-Seine (France): Édition Action Poétique, 2007.
     

     

    Poetry liberates language from ordinary constraints. Media Poetry is a paramount agent in pushing language into a new and exciting domain of human experience.
     

    Eduardo Kac, Media Poetry

     

    Introducing Eduardo Kac’s collection Hodibis Potax, the fictional author “Philip Sidney” (identified as “Director of Thermal Ion Verbodynamics Division” in a “Department of Literary Timeshift Experiments” at an “Eternaut Training Center” in Shanghai, who refers to the artifact in hand as a “qbook”) recalls Kac wanting to send holopoems (holographically displayed poetry) towards Andromeda in 1986. Set in the future, the introduction describes the collection—a short and beautifully rendered bilingual edition of Kac’s work over the past twenty-five years—and situates his artistic output as a whole as being ahead of its time. Poetry, writes Sidney, “makes things either better than nature brings forth, or quite anew, forms such as never were in nature” (7). For him, this trait is literally apparent in the work in Hodibis Potax (a curious title for a printed retrospective, since it is devoid of overt meaning). These playful gestures, and the lofty statements offered by Sidney with regard to Kac, are an interesting reflection—as match and counterpoint—to works presented both in this monograph and in Media Poetry: An International Anthology, an anthology Kac recently edited. Whereas Kac’s own inventions are futuristic and fanciful explorations of non-literary territory, relying on good-natured cleverness to deliver a message or concept, the poetry and poetics illuminated in Media Poetry are absolutely contemporary (often reporting on completed works), and are for the most part serious discussions of process and product.
     
    In 1996, Kac edited a special issue of the journal Visible Language devoted to “New Media Poetry: Poetic Innovation and New Technologies.” The first anthology of its kind, it was one of the few authoritative texts about diverse global practices in digital poetry, containing many useful references to historic artworks, artists, and theories. The value of the writing and images Kac initially collected is signaled in his introduction: “The revolutionary change in writing and reading strategies new media poetry promotes,” he writes, “are likely to have a long lasting presence” (100). A decade later, Kac—now more widely known as a biological artist than a pioneering author, theorist, and curator of digital poetry—has revisited his influential (yet somewhat obscure) anthology and has published a revised edition titled Media Poetry: An International Anthology. He has also issued a partial catalog of his own artworks via Hodibis Potax. Together the two volumes intimately chronicle a trajectory of digital poetry through the lenses of major critics and practitioners, and offer an in-depth catalog of a single artist, Kac himself. Extensively updated, Media Poetry combines original content (with amendments) alongside new essays important to the study and practice of electronic literature, and proves Kac’s initial observation correct. Poetry created with computers and by other scientific means is no brief trend; this volume provides expert viewpoints on emerging media poetry practiced since before the emergence of the World Wide Web. Scholars will almost certainly use these writings to fortify discussions about the subject for years to come. Hodibis Potax complimentarily spotlights one artist’s range of elegant output in fields the anthology historicizes but can only partly divulge (e.g., Holopoetry, Digital Poetry, Biopoetry, Space Poetry).
     
    Media Poetry is valuable both as an historical record and, as it is intended, as “a contemporary tool meant to be instrumental in the wider dissemination of the poets’ achievements—the poems” (9). The book is organized into three sections—Digital Poetry, Multimedia Poetics, Historical and Critical Perspectives—although these distinctions rather fluidly demarcate the artistic practices under investigation. A set of appendices include an up-to-date “Media Poetry Chronology,” a “Selected Webliography,” sources, and biographies. Covering past and present areas of inquiry, essays in “Digital Poetry” and “Multimedia Poetics” share practically identical approaches: the author uses her/his own artworks to explain a particular perspective on computer-based poetics. This characteristic diminishes in the “Historical and Critical Perspectives” section, in which the essays (with the exception of Jean-Pierre Balpe’s “Reflections on the Perception of Generative and Interactive Hypermedia Works”) have broader objectives; here the authors present an overview of works done by others. Each section of the book contains one more “new” essay than old, tipping the balance of the collection’s focus in favor of the contemporary, an editorial decision that promotes new thinking on the subject while establishing its lineage. Ideas that come from pioneers of media poetry are entwined with the latest thinking on the subject, covering the gamut of experimentation within the discipline. A reader who is not already familiar with any of the essays might not be able to distinguish the writing of one era from another, a testimony both to the vitality of works presented and to the sophistication of the field in general.
     
    Kac’s curatorial approach shows that many forms of digital expression are no longer new to artists and writers, and that “what is at stake in media poetry is not a retake of the modern ideal of the ‘new’ as a value in itself” (8). Addressing the subject as media poetry (instead of “new media”), Kac widens the scope of investigation to introduce “photonic and biological creative tools as well as non-digital technology” (such as works on videotape). Compared to other fine anthologies on the subject, such as New Media Poetics (Morris & Swiss, eds., 2006), Media Poetry is overtly more expansive in scope, significantly veering away from literary (or even artistic) foundations much of the time. While the focus of investigation in both volumes is digitally processed material prepared for computer screens, Kac includes essays on a wider range of topics than are usually covered in the field and covers unexpected disciplines that inform the work. By doing so, Media Poetry provides a greater sense of expansion of diversified forms in poetry as redefined by media poets than other anthologies on the subject.
     
    Essays from the original volume by Philippe Bootz, John Cayley, Ernesto M. de Melo e Castro, Ladislao Pablo Györi, Kac, Jim Rosenberg, André Vallias, and Eric Vos—now landmark writings representing fundamental aspects of mediated poetry such as automatically generated text, visual poetry, hypertext, holography, and use of unconventional syntax—are interwoven with new essays in each section. While the more recent essays unquestionably reveal new areas of exploration, the familiar material here is still vibrant and seemingly contemporary because media poetry, if no longer new, is still at an early stage of development. But media poetry is always finding new realms in which to operate, which Media Poetry clearly attends to. Kac selects eleven new pieces for the book; each discusses possibilities that have emerged since the mid-1990s. Kac wisely includes essays by authors who focus on the implications of the influence of machinery on poetry, paying particular regard to increased portability, media convergence, broadband networks, and gaming. In addition to technological and artistic considerations brought forth in the volume, the growing influence of scientific thought emerges as a substantial theme in several essays.
     
    Strickland’s essay, “Quantum Poetics: Six Thoughts,” for example, one of the longest and most sophisticated pieces in Media Poetry, begins by discussing “Time Dimensions” in new media poems. The fact that “Quantum Poetics” is the focus, emphasizing temporal and biological aspects of (or made possible by) works, indicates a move away from a technical, or even an aesthetic, orientation in analysis. Strickland’s discussion establishes time as an important component in the narrative of digital poems. Strickland also considers the anti-spatial orientation of some works, the meaning of acts of multitasking, media resonance, translation, and the implications of the layering of information on our minds, bodies, and texts. “There is no seamless information environment,” she writes, “only increasingly extended forms of attention and inter-attention, cross-modes of attention, muscular, neural, endocrinologic, visual, acoustic, kinesthetic, and proprioceptive” (37). Strickland’s non-technical musings on the possibilities for digital poetry represent a trend in digital poetry to merge the arts and sciences and reflect the wider critical outlook found elsewhere in Media Poetry. While most of the essays are—understandably, unproblematically—rooted in the technological aspects of the work, Strickland’s and those of a few others (e.g., André Vallias, Kac, Brian Lennon) include philosophical and scientific perspectives. Her discussion of the particulars of True North, The Ballad of Sand and Harry Soot, V, and other works is not overshadowed by theoretical considerations. Kac’s essay, “Biopoetry” (which appears in Media Poetry and Hodibis Potax), also acknowledges digital poetry’s affinity with science. Since poetry has been migrating away from the printed page since the 1980s, he writes, “in a world of clones, chimeras, and transgenic creatures, it is time to consider new directions for poetry in vivo,” and proposes the “use of biotechnology and living organisms in poetry as a new realm of verbal, paraverbal, and non-verbal creation” (191). Offering a twenty point outline, accompanied by illustrations of six biopoems he has created or envisioned (2002–2006), Kac playfully outlines various directions human expression can take through biotechnology and the use of living organisms. His “microbot performance” involves writing and performing with a contrived mechanical bee, “in the language of the bees, for a bee audience, in a semi-functional, semi-fictional dance.” Other ideas presented are equally unique, but the fact that some, like “Nanopoetry,” “Transgenic poetry,” “Luciferase signaling,” and “Haptic listening” are far-fetched and involve technologies inaccessible to most people raises questions about the practicality and public utility of microbot performance. In general, the essays in Media Poetry demonstrate that media poetry is a sophisticated expressive force that cannot be dismissed as a superficial folly. These essays contribute to legitimizing the practice, and give readers plenty of reasons to consider the work. The importance of a concept like “Biopoetry” is thus its originality. Media poets, especially those who are steadily producing new works at present, can afford to look towards the future in such a way. Years hence, perhaps we will see some of these ideas brought to fruition. Even if only aesthetic (and not practical) results could be achieved, the displays envisioned by Kac would still represent a profound artistic achievement and an expansion in the sphere of the arts. Who knows? Maybe seeing a spectacle such as “Luciferase signaling” (creating “bard fireflies by manipulating the genes that code for bioluminescence” [192]) could have a positive, transformative effect on society.
     
    Kac’s more down-to-earth essay in the volume, like most of the others, discusses work already accomplished by the artist. He traces the metamorphosis of his digital poems “from ASCII to cyberspace,” culminating in a brief discussion of an “avatar” poem he has created (“Perhaps,” 1998/99). In “Perhaps,” a “world” with 24 avatars (each a different word), the reader establishes her/his “own presence in this textworld through a verbal avatar” (63), recalling practices often used in gaming. The names of the avatars Kac has chosen resonate with digital poetry’s burgeoning engagement with scientific principles (e.g., ion, lumen, nebula, quanta, titanium, and xeric). Otherwise, the essay is much like others in the collection that illuminate the various qualities (kinetic, interactive, visual, hypertextual) that make digital poetry what it is—not a rival to, but an activated relative of, written and artistic forms.
     
    Several of the newfound spaces for poetry, including cell phones, Personal Digital Assistants (PDA) with Internet capabilities, and other portable devices, are introduced in Giselle Beiguelman’s essay in Media Poetry, “Nomadic Poems.” Beiguelman discusses three of her projects, each of which indicates shifts in the modalities of poetic presentation invented after Y2K, that employ mobile devices such as electronic billboards to generate spontaneous works. Using a combination of wireless and other technologies to prepare interactive verbal and visual artwork, Beiguelman investigates “the possible realm of a post-phonetic, hybrid culture, crossed by printed and digital layers, where the informational and esthetic codes are entangled through programming and produce a new semantics involving a rearrangement of signs and signification processes” (97). Following indirectly in the lineage of Concrete poetry, she intends to put unconventional, often symbolic poems that are written in ways poems are not normally written in places they are not normally seen. Making historical connections here is not as important, however, as noting that Beiguelman’s applications of common technology for creative purposes are historical acts. Many artists have used L.E.D. displays, but few—if any—have enabled interactive content in such a way. This effort to reach out to mass culture by using the tools of mass culture expands the physical terrain and the visibility of the poem. Using the latest digital gadgets outside their original contexts, Beiguelman’s works seek to project text into the reader’s “non-place, space-time of antiphenomenology and visibility,” where “within the intersections of words and symbols, the boundaries of communication and of art are being redefined” (97–98). She addresses the foundations for, and conditions of, her work, showing how poetic works can be made (and consumed) by someone walking down the street typing SMS messages (or the like). In her examples the emphasis is graphical; in Poétrica (2003–04), non-alphabetic fonts construct visual patterns in order to “undo verbal and visual ties through the combination of fonts and numbers, languages and codes” (102). Not only is Beiguelman exploring new technological ground, she convincingly redefines the boundaries of what can be considered a poem. Such mobilized, transient conceptions of poetry give rise to yet another connotation for the (now clichéd) phrase, “poetry in motion.” While acknowledging that all the efforts involved with the projects may be in vain because such projects can (and do) vanish, Beiguelman does not offer critical perspective on her work. One of the “starting points” for these projects is the claim that “nothing imprisons the text” (97). Knowing the unreliability of network technology and hardware, however, and given the limitations of handheld interfaces, it is difficult to believe that anyone participating in the project would not encounter various sorts of limitations. By concluding the piece with the statement that “the interface is the message” (103), Beiguelman implies that these works produce a change in presentation, but obviously that is not all there is. With these new interfaces, new types of poems are made.
     
    Two promising areas of growth, namely gaming and hardware modification, are revealed in Orit Kruglanski’s contribution to Media Poetry, “Interactive Poems.” Kruglanski tells a casually written story about her writing digital poetry using alternative methods, media (including PDA), and adapted hardware. Her first project was a poem-as-game, titled “InnerSpace Invaders” (1998), based on the type of interaction found in the videogame Space Invaders (a user shoots words descending on the screen); her second involved modifying the voice and content of a child’s speaking doll. A modified Palm Pilot (tilt sensor added) served as the platform for another project (“Please,” 2000), and Kruglanski built a “force feedback mouse” for another (“As Much as you Love Me”). In this work, a mouse to which two electromagnets are added sits atop a metal mousepad; a microcontroller in the computer modulates magnetic friction, making the mouse harder to move. In addition to ruminating on her enthusiasm and concerns regarding interactive poetry, Kruglanski’s essay documents (without extensive detail) some of the first efforts to present poetry as an interactive, digital game—a practice seriously pursued subsequently by Jim Andrews, Marko Niemi, and others. Since artists such as Aya Karpinska have subsequently made poems using gaming consoles, cellular phones, and magnetic card readers, and Daniel Howe—in order to realize his outstanding work “Text Curtain”—has built a computer and an operating system that permits simultaneous use of two computer mouses, Kruglanski’s essay seems almost prophetic. As does each of the essays added to Kac’s collection, Kruglanski’s provides an insider’s view of the innovative media poets are working on at present, suggesting areas of application readers may expect to see develop further. Because the works are often very complex (yet sometimes subtly so), having such authorial accounts is invaluable. In addition to giving context to future endeavors, these essays offer useful instructions on how to read the poems. Processes used by the poets are demystified, showing clearly what is going on inside the participatory mechanisms they have constructed.
     
    Bill Seaman’s “Recombinant Poetics” discusses interactivity within mutable fields, and the dynamic construction of meaning, through his computer-based application “The World Generator / The Engine of Desire.” Bootz’s “Unique-reading Poems,” Balpe’s “Reflections on the Perception of Generative and Interactive Hypermedia Works,” and Kostelanetz’s “Language-based Videotapes & Audio Videotapes” are equally strong, and build functional models and frameworks of communication for multimedia poetry by using their own works as a point of departure. Each, in its own way, creates a framework for understanding the shared responsibility of the reader and writer who interact with, to use Seaman’s phrase, “mutable dynamic media” (159). The consequences and significance of layering texts and meaning using complex, interactive methods are discussed throughout the collection. In sum, the essays in Media Poetry provide a broad-based view of the practices they cover, exposing multiplicities (histories, contexts) inherent in the work. They explain expertly what is at stake and what is entailed in reading and participating in such texts. Two essays in the “Historical and Critical Perspectives” section of Media Poetry, Friedrich Block’s “Digital Poetics or on the Evolution of Experimental Media Poetry” and Lennon’s “Screening a Digital Visual Poetics,” provide a practice-based history alongside theoretical observations to portray a viable scenario that places digital media poetry in the lineage of experimental twentieth century arts. As have others, Block connects contemporary critical discourse in digital poetry to the intellectual climate of Europe in the 1960s (e.g., deconstruction, cybernetics). Artistic analysis of digital poetry, for Block, involves considering the material and digital media, the animation and information process, and the audience’s activity and interactivity. These are the points of consideration in an “art-specific” reading of texts that sees texts as being made in the spaces in between literary and technological context and action. Lennon traces the evolution of digital text, and explores the results of the “putative demise of textuality” on the Web. He offers yet another perspective for media poetry by addressing hybrid theoretical models, hybrid bodies, and, finally, the type of hybrid practices with which we are now becoming familiar. Through a study of Kac’s 3D/virtual poem “Secret” (1993), Lennon speculates on the role media plays in future traditions of poetics. “Secret” is amongst Kac’s many works illuminated in Hodibis Potax; as we see in this particular piece, a simple “ideogrammatic word constellation” (Lennon’s phrase) appears as the viewer interacts with the virtual object. As in many of Kac’s poems, a combination of single words or short phrases is used to convey a larger concept, coordinated by the media employed. On the surface, Kac’s work tends to use clever poetic juxtapositions of language, especially as textual layering is minimal. In effect, however, Kac relies as much on myth, the unknown, novelty, and fancifulness.
     
    The first section of Hodibis Potax contains more than twenty illustrations of Kac’s holopoetry (adding more than two dozen representations to what appears on his website, http://ekac.org). The terse poems expand as a result of their highly technologized treatment. Morphing, dissolving, and juxtaposed words appear as the viewer moves in space. Another section of Hodibis Potax, “Numeric Poetry,” documents Kac’s electronic experiments circa 1982–1999, some of which are available via the Web. These works display fundamental attributes of digital poetry: permutation, and kinetic graphical rendering (sometimes distortion) of visually-based expression. Since the analog/print form does not represent the “live” work faithfully, one value of these pages, beyond their vibrant documentation of the work, is that they may lead the reader to authentic versions of the poems, as does (ideally) the “Webliography” in Media Poetry. In addition to the essay on “Biopoetry,” Hodibis Potax also includes another essay that appears on the Web, “Spatial Poetry,” which speculates on possibilities for “poetry conceived for, realized with, and experienced in conditions of micro or zero gravity.” Of course, such work is only imagined at this point, but if we are to believe the author of the book’s introduction, it will eventually be produced.
     
    While wordplay is an unquestionable characteristic of works produced by media poets (e.g., Melo e Castro’s distortions of language and Kostelanetz’s morphing words), a serious tone pervades Media Poetry. In Kac’s own work, by contrast, we do see humor. In “Biopoetry,” for example, he envisions “Atomic writing,” in which atoms are precisely positioned to create molecules and spell words. “Give these molecular words expression in plants,” he writes, “and let them grow new words through mutation. Observe and smell the molecular grammatology of the resulting flowers” (191). Can such ideas be completely dismissed, seen as ludicrous? Given the accomplishments of DNA and genomic engineering, who’s to say that “Atomic writing” or “Luciferase signaling” will remain impractical and without value? Kac’s levity, while it does not exceed the boundaries of possibility, is a welcome diversion from the staid articulations offered elsewhere in Media Poetry. The new “space” of digital writing, as evoked in Media Poetry, has evolved so as to include the overt influence of physical sciences, the important role time plays in media poetry, and authorial interests in gaming. Now the field is becoming even more aesthetically diversified, and its demographic expands (e.g., powerful essays by women are featured, whereas the original volume had none).
     
    Media Poetry is a news-broadcast from an international gathering of digital poets; Hodibis Potax provides a vivid record of the techniques used by a pioneer in form(s) not commonly practiced, such as holopoetry. The absence of an accompanying CD-ROM or DVD featuring examples of the work discussed in these volumes would be notable, were it not for the generous “Webliography” included in Media Poetry and at ekac.org; Kac’s website has for many years featured examples of most of his oeuvre. Logistical, technological, economic, and other factors that prevent media files from being appended to books about electronic literature are becoming less a misfortune thanks to the World Wide Web. As new forms and approaches to composition emerge, our authoritative documents need revision (as we have seen for example in Jay David Bolter’s Writing Space and George Landow’s Hypertext). We can hope that Kac will, in decades hence, continue to use his experience and expertise as an artist and researcher to issue additional volumes.
     

    Chris Funkhouser is Associate Professor in the Humanities Department at New Jersey Institute of Technology. Working in the developing field of digital poetry, he was a Visiting Fulbright Scholar at Multimedia University in Cyberjaya, Malaysia, in 2006; in 2007 he was on the faculty of the summer writing program at Naropa University. The Associated Press commissioned him to prepare digital poems for the occasion of Barack Obama’s inauguration. He is author of a documentary study, Prehistoric Digital Poetry: An Archaeology of Forms, 1959–1995, published in the Modern and Contemporary Poetics Series of the University of Alabama Press (2007). An eBook (CD-ROM), Selections 2.0, was issued by the Faculty of Creative Multimedia at Multimedia University (2006). He is a member of the scientific review committee of the digital literature journal regards croisés, based at Université Paris 8, and has produced and edited publications online and in-print, including an early Internet-based poetry magazine (We 17, 1993), and a literary journal on CD-ROM (The Little Magazine, Vol. 21, 1995). Since 1986 he has been an editor at We Press, with whom he has produced poetry in a variety of media.
     

    Works Cited

     

     

    • Kac, Eduardo, ed. “New Media Poetry: Poetic Innovation and New Technologies.” Visible Language 30.2 (1996).

     

  • Tracking the Field

    Susanne E. Hall (bio)
    Thompson Writing Program, Duke University
    Susanne.Hall@duke.edu

    Review of: Joe Amato, Industrial Poetics: Demo Tracks for a Mobile Culture. Iowa UP, 2006.

     

    Joe Amato’s Industrial Poetics: Demo Tracks for a Mobile Culture is a book about a great many things, but it is most successfully a book about the slings and arrows of outrageous academe. In this book Amato charts his trajectory through a blue-collar upbringing, a career as an engineer in large corporations, and, finally, through work as a poet and tenure-track English professor who accidentally jumps the track. He does this using all the tools in the shed—including poetry, aphorism, narrative, theory, and textual manipulation.
     
    Amato’s book is composed of three “demo tracks”—long, multifarious chapters—that are punctuated by short, aphoristic lists called “Grant Proposals” that meditate on the place of art in late capitalist culture. The term “demo track,” which refers to the sample songs musicians use to gain fans, get booked at clubs and, they hope, signed to labels, at once communicates two very important aspects of this project: the energetic provisionality (carefully cultivated, of course) that is its style, and its constant self-awareness of its essential status as a professional gambit. Many other connotations of the term also resonate: Amato’s is anything but a one-track mind.
     
    The first and most cacophonous track of the three, “Industrial Poetics: A Chautauqua Multiplex in Fits and Starts,” adopts the formal metaphor of the Chautauqua —a turn-of-the-century educational form that amounted to a kind of pedagogic traveling circus where the lions were supplanted by educational lectures and populist politics. As Amato stages his show, his most persuasive organizing principle is his interest in the plight of the poet-scholar (and his or her creative output) in the academic-industrial complex. The book is not a thorough survey of this complex problem, but is rather at its core a theoretically robust Künstlerroman, an erratic narrative of Amato’s own progress toward an elusive self-realization as a poet and scholar.
     
    In Track 1 Amato charts a direction for the project: “My polemic is geared, admittedly, toward the more positive aspects of a poetic industrial—an industrial poetics. To see where this takes us” (37). Amato’s attempts to develop a theoretical or practical understanding of what an “industrial poetics” might be or do are continually thwarted, however, as the text swerves into discussions of the means of production of scholarly work. This is not, however, to suggest that the book fails—imagine our loss if Tristram Shandy had just gotten to his point. With Amato, we are along for a ride in which the whole point is how difficult it can be to get to the point, particularly within the working conditions of academe.
     
    For example, the section that follows the above declaration of intention consists, without transition, of a pasted-in email message, rendered in a new computer-styled font. The email informs “Joe” that his manuscript has been rejected, and forwards along a reader’s report about a text that sounds not unlike Industrial Poetics itself. The reader’s report begins, hilariously: “I really think you should NOT publish this.” Any writer—poet, scholar, or otherwise—will wince at the adamancy of the capitalized NOT, as it calls all of the ghosts out of one’s own closet of horrifying rejection letters. Shortly thereafter Amato takes a new turn as he introduces an argument in which he equates academic scholarly practices to corporate bureaucratic supervision: “the refereed journal is thus a simple feedback mechanism designed to regulate ‘quality,’ yes, but ‘quality’ of the game itself” (41). Amato then proceeds to describe the parameters of this feedback mechanism in a barbed technocratic language that must really be read in total for its effect, but here is a taste:
     

    Each thermo-regulating subcommittee accepts and rejects submitted knowledge-bodies to maintain professional, sangfroid environs, setpoint 68 deg. F., with ± 2 deg F. permissible variation.
     

    (42)

     

    What makes this joke work is not only that it is a part of a larger argument that successfully skewers the flaws of the peer-review system, but also that Amato is fluent in such highly “engineered” language. Track 1 has already revealed Amato’s former life as a design engineer, a life in which this was his primary professional language, but it is in Track 2 that this story, which is the reactor-core of the book, fully explodes.

     
    This second track, “Technical Ex-Communication: How a Former Professional Engineer Becomes a Former English Professor” (a version of which was published as an essay in PMC 10.1), presents a lively and relatively linear narrative of Amato’s professional career—first as an engineer and then as a poet-teacher-scholar—so that he might make some key connections between those realms. For some of us, the transition from doing design engineering for a pharmaceutical company to teaching English and producing ambitious scholarship will seem so mysterious as to be nearly alchemical. And yet, Amato’s primary argument in this section seems to be that the yawning gulf between the culture and practices of one job and those of the other is much smaller than we, even on our most cynical days, might imagine. Amato focuses on his work as a design engineer for Miller Brewing Company and then at Bristol-Myers Co., and details the tenacity of his desire to have a job in which he is left alone to do his own work (designing temperature regulating systems and the like), rather than being constantly encouraged and recruited into the management of his fellow laborers, a prospect whose endless meetings and corporate sloganeering never appeals to Amato. And so he leaves it all behind for the unmolested life of a poet in academe (cue laugh track).
     
    In Track 2 Amato tells the tragicomic tale of his time as a tenure-track professor at the Illinois Institute of Technology (IIT). The heart of this section is a close reading of a book probably few of us have read, The Idea of Ideas. Amato describes the book: it “appear[ed] in all faculty mailboxes [at IIT]. It’s called The Idea of Ideas, by one Robert W. Galvin, ‘Special Limited Edition’ published in April 1991 by Motorola University Press” (85). Amato explains that Galvin, the former CEO of Motorola, sits on IIT’s Board of Trustees, and along with fellow corporate billionaire Bob Prizker, has essentially kept IIT in business by donating many millions to the university. The Idea of Ideas, as Amato parses it, is a master-class in the fantastically empty language of Corporate America. Amato’s skillful reading of the book performatively suggests why such a realm would have precious little space for the nasty critical reading habits of an Amato. While calling into question the practices of corporate-academic integration somewhat distinctive to IIT, this close reading also calls into question the work that the hallmarks of scholarly integrity—the paper quality, the scholarly apparatus, the university press—can perform for a writer, regardless of the quality of her or his work.
     
    The Bobs managed, according to Amato, to forge a marriage at IIT between corporate industry and education that far surpasses the student-as-consumer model with which we are increasingly familiar—thus, corporate manuals in the faculty mailbox, and much worse. A liquidation of the Humanities at IIT predictably follows, and Amato finds himself a casualty, denied tenure for reasons that finally remain locked behind closed doors. He is told only that the deans had concerns about his being fully “aligned with the new vision of IIT” (93).
     
    Track 3, “Labor, Manufacturing, Workplace, Community: Four Conclusions in Search of an Ending,” contains the most traditional critical work in the book. It develops some new concerns and deepens others. While “Conclusion the 1st: Labor” goes on to thoughtfully deepen Amato’s interest in imagining “a poetry that is not subsidized at some level by Fortune 500 attenuations” (111), “Conclusion the 3rd: Workplace” offers a fresh inquiry into the notoriously slippery issue of “craft,” a discussion that is one of the critical highlights of the book. Of course, the problematics of the industry of poetics continue to seep in everywhere. “Conclusion the 4th: Community” theorizes the “poetic community,” but the concern for the industry around that community necessarily permeates the discussion. Here, within an argument focusing on the poetic reading as a scene of community, Amato makes clear that the “regulating machinery” of scholarly publishing is always influencing his writing, and thus that his poetic performances are irrevocably inscribed within that feedback system, even as they work to circumvent it. He writes:
     

    I type

     
    The magic of poetry

     
    and my readers (provided I have any), from outside reader to editor to copy editor to blurb-er to John Q (in print and, if I’m lucky, during public reading), are forced to negotiate what I mean by these words. Like magic! —though we should bear in mind that all manner of material transaction has taken place in order to get these words “across.” The magic of poetry, then, enables productive, unproductive, and non productive energy transfers associated with cultural, spiritual, and emotional work. Poetry works its magic despite the many trade-offs . . . that accompany the I-give-I-give of publishing, of going public.
     

    (156)

     

    “Conclusion 2: Manufacturing” consists of a long poem that I can’t help but feel would fare better in the sphere of performance which Amato discusses in Conclusion 4.

     
    So we are given four conclusions and no ending, and I think Amato might be pleased that his book be deemed “suggestive”—not in the way that word is often used, which can be to damn with faint praise, but authentically, as a word that denotes a text original enough to jar your thinking out of the tracks in which it normally runs. As should be clear by now, Industrial Poetics works in two recognizable genres—critiques of the profession and genre-bending critical-autobiographical works by poets. This splice is productive, although the book is most successfully a critique of the profession that draws on the formal innovations of critical-poetic work like Susan Howe’s. This works in part because one continually senses that Amato would prefer to be writing books like Howe’s, if only the industry in which he toils would allow it, and this anxiety is itself an important part of Amato’s project. In this way, his book differs profitably from other books in the state-of-the-profession field. One of last year’s best examples of that genre, Marc Bousquet’s How the University Works, is an incisive, formally traditional scholarly analysis and rethinking of trends in academic labor. Bousquet, an activist on academic labor throughout his academic career, writes from the safety of a tenured position, however, and thus is free to complete a book like How the University Works without having to live through the contingencies that plague Amato and others like him (which is not to imply that Bousquet is eating bon-bons all day, but rather to point out a fact to which Bousquet himself calls attention in his work). Amato’s book thus produces a sense of urgency through an authentic anxiety that is qualitatively different from what a book like Bousquet’s can (or should) achieve.
     
    But Amato’s book does more than illustrate Bousquet’s ideas about the problematics of the academic division of labor from a perspective closer to the front lines. Indeed, Amato’s uneasy relationship to academe comes not only from not having/ making tenure, it comes from his working class background, from his experiences in white-collar jobs in manufacturing and, importantly, from his position as a poet. The innovation in language and form in Amato’s book proves valuable as a way of disrupting our scholarly reading habits, which are conditioned by the very disciplinary forces Amato seeks to question. Think of the sections of Susan Howe’s The Midnight in which she collages together scholarly research, the reporting of the process of that research, autobiography, images. Howe’s book is like a Louise Bourgeois work in which rags from various places are sutured together and stuffed to make a human-shaped sculpture whose uncanny vital force is more than the sum of its parts. In Amato’s book similar formal innovations succeed even (and perhaps especially) as they fray at the seams and fail to achieve the symbiosis of disparate elements that makes the work of Susan Howe so pleasurable.
     
    As I finished Amato’s book, the question left hanging was how it appeared in my hands in the first place, given the realities of the academic marketplace it probes. The sardonic honesty that characterizes Amato’s voice in much of the book is, strikingly, a tone that one increasingly identifies with the genre of the blog. Academic blogs routinely take up issues related to academic production and destruction; one thinks of blogs like historian Claire B. Potter’s witty Tenured Radical (http://tenured-radical.blogspot.com/), which (among many other things) offers practical career advice for untenured radicals as well as a space for commiseration. It seems important to note that despite tonal and some formal similarities, what Amato does in his book exceeds what can be done in a blog. Or, if it is imaginable that Amato might produce a similar text in weekly chunks on his blog, it is unlikely that they would ever be read holistically, in the way that we, at least for the time being, continue to read books. What would be lost in dismembering the book thus is the reader’s very awareness of the disjointed, interrupted nature of academic production, a fact that is obscured in a blog because such discontinuity is the default character of blogs—it is the message of their medium and as such is usually invisible to their readers.
     
    Interestingly, as self-consciously self-conscious as the book is both about its status as a non-traditional critical work and about the scant places for such work at the banquet table of academe, there is minimal discussion, even in the acknowledgements, of how the book got picked up and published in the company of a number of more traditional (though likewise strong and provocative) books of literary criticism in the Iowa Contemporary North American Poetry series. We are told by Amato to blame Charles Bernstein for the book, and Bernstein is nearly a palpable muse for this text. Naturally, the absence of the story of the book’s coming-to-life makes sense, in that telling the story of the publication of a book within the pages of the book is the archetypal dilemma of autobiography, but it is precisely the kind of impossible task that a book like this leads the reader to expect to see attempted. No doubt Amato’s book was selected for publication much the same way many books are—a combination of hard work, good luck, and generous friends (Bernstein among them) bending the right ears. I’m sure it was more complex than that, and ultimately that story remains to be told elsewhere. Regardless, the final paradox of a book that is propelled by them is the physical fact of the book itself—its very publication offers an optimistic rejoinder to the kind of dire questions it poses about the Poetic Industry.
     

    Susanne E. Hall is a Lecturing Fellow in the Thompson Writing Program at Duke University. Her research and teaching interests include U.S. poetry, the New Left, and the rhetorics of revolution within mass-mediated culture. Her current book project, News That Stays News, demonstrates the ways in which U.S. poetry became an important form of political organization, both materially and psychologically, for the New Left. She has written recently on the cultural and political legacy of Allen Ginsberg in the Minnesota Review.
     

  • Subjunctivity

    Michael D. Snediker (bio)
    Department of English, Queen’s University
    snediker@queensu.ca

    Review of: Leo Bersani and Adam Phillips, intimacies. U of Chicago Press, 2008.

     

    If these past decades of ruminating on J.L. Austin have rendered I do a paradigm of performative utterance, one of the actions with which this performative arguably coincides—beyond conjugal contract, beyond ostensible entrapment in a certain symbolic narrative—is the no less paradigmatic act of all acts, the sexual encounter. The more familiar opposite of this performative informs the no less powerful pseudo-tautology No means No. Against the rhetorical and non-rhetorical certainties of I do and No, Eve Kosofsky Sedgwick has more recently posited the periperformative—I want to have said it—whose frisson depends on a formulation’s propinquity to some more conventionally understood locutionary scenario (e.g. having actually said it). The auxiliary of “wanting…” implies that the periperformative describes a lexical correlative to desire, as the performative describes a lexical correlative to a fantasy of the instantaneousness between desire and that desire’s objects.
     
    Bersani and Phillips’s recent book offers an important contribution (one might say non-contribution) to such performative scholarship, in its displacement of “that act” as we know it; in its trenchant argument that one of the most important things to do with words is not the instantiation of or flirtation with action, but rather the potentially indefinite deferral and reconceptualization of action, for the sake of holding a bit longer onto the uncertainties of words, the uncertainties of what is recognizable as action (in metonymic rather than metaphorical relation to language). intimacies presents theorizations of intimacy unhinged from desire as we know it, intimacies whose most (if not only) reliable component is a spatial closeness neither definitively predicated on nor leading to sexual inevitability.
     
    This sexual moratorium is all the more remarkable given intimacies’s insistence on a psychoanalysis held apart from the erotic energies on which that discipline is usually imagined to rest (and act). Psychoanalysis constitutes both subject and object of these delicately transitive meditations. That is further surprising in that much of Bersani’s career has so vigorously pursued the question of how to do things with sex. Or rather (in the spirit of the aforementioned sense of non-contributiveness), how not to do things with sex. The violence of sex, as Bersani has announced, is peculiarly valuable in its capacity to disable the aggressions of egotism. (I shall return to the aporetic-seeming mobius of disabling capacity.) intimacies, on the other hand, articulates modes of interrelation that might (ethically, epistemologically, psychoanalytically) be possible only in the temporary disabling of the sex machine’s disabling—clearing a salubriously under-explored space between the stringencies of either having or not having an ego. This book, then, besides its more manifest contributions to queer-theoretical and psychoanalytic thinking, as importantly contributes to the more nascent field of disability theory. Or to be less hypostasizing, suggestively redescribes a psychoanalysis of disability. Or to return to the grammatical vocabulary of Austin, a psychoanalysis of subjunctivity. Subjunctivity, here, is grammatically equivalent to disability (that of which psychoanalysis might be constituted and that which it regards), but also (beyond auditory affinity) meant as evolving proxy for what otherwise, following Lacan or Foucault, has been taken as subjectivity, as subject.
     
    Powerfully contrapuntal to Bersani’s earlier articulations of the knack for psychoanalytic subjects to administer and incur damage, intimacies considers the possibility of a no less psychoanalytically grounded vocabulary of safety. The terms on one level are not unfamiliar; if in works such as “Is the Rectum a Grave” or Homos aggression arises as the ineluctable raison d’être of personhood, the exploration in this work of impersonality necessarily illuminates in its veer from persons less the evacuation of impulse so much as an impulse differently attuned to innocuity. Impersonality (or in its adjectival form, the impersonal) does not oppose personality so much as rewrite personality, as though we might hold onto the former as temporary misnomer until either personality itself were more capaciously accessible or some term more precise than impersonality were available. Innocuousness (my term, not Bersani’s or Phillips’s) itself serves as temporary misnomer for what more exactingly might be understood as the subjunctive.
     
    That grammatical terminology could so importantly figure in the new forms of psychoanalytic engagement imagined by Bersani and Phillips attests to the extent to which intimacies extends the Lacanian aphorism of unconscious-structured-like-a-language to a differently fructive aphorism of writing-structured-like-psychoanalysis. To parse grammar is to parse persons—not because persons or subjects are textual (we’ve thought this for some time), but because the architectures of grammar invariably harbor and effect the pulsions of persons. Especially interesting for me is the way in which a grammatical lexicon could defer the further adventures of metaphoricity for the sake of the no less bracing lexicon of the non-transformative. The subjunctive, indeed, seems less a rhetorical shibboleth than a grammatical residuum, although with not too much imagination, the temporal openness of subjunctivity (as opposed to subjectivity) recalls the peculiar diachronics of de Manian allegory. I note the affinity between allegory and subjunctivity to reiterate the extent to which impersonality speaks only tangentially to the concerns at hand, the extent to which the subjunctive, in its gravitation toward mutability, is less a diminished mode of personality than a terrifically refractive and therefore richly complicated site of possible personality. The realm of the possible, in Bersani’s readings, does not hover as ideation so much as assume the body of an actuality. What would it mean to imagine an equivalence between a person and the personification of that person’s subjunctive possibilities? What would it mean to treat personification as an empirical (rather than a figurative) phenomenon?
     
    Psychoanalysis, in this light, less parses the vicissitudes of being a person than opens the possibility of imagining persons as personifications, thereby entitled to the same scrutinies solicited by the least over-embedded hermeneutic modes of recovery. intimacies responds generously to such queries to the extent that its archive consists of persons and characters whose lives (textual and otherwise) are indistinguishable from their own rhetorical resonance. The book’s first chapter, for instance, cites Patrice Leconte’s film, Intimate Strangers, in which a psychoanalytic relation blooms from the putative analysand’s erroneously entering the office of a tax lawyer, instead of that of an analyst. What ensues feels removed from verity to the extent that the former is catalyzed and then knowingly sustained by misrecognition. In its acceptance of fiction as the grounds for therapy (if not a life), the film’s explicit allusion to Henry James’s novella, The Beast in the Jungle (literary product placement if ever there was one) confusingly registers as non-gratuitous, in further complicating the film’s own examination of fiction’s inseparability from non-fiction. One can say that the film’s theory of fiction transforms the characters of James’s novella from literary precedent to filmic presence in their own right, separated by a temporal rather than an ontological distinction. To ground a film predicated on What if on a novella predicated on What if subtends both works’ fascination with subjectivity—the extent to which one could understand oneself, let alone another person—on the particulars of subjunctivity: a predilection for the capriciousness of knowledge, over and against any hostility harbored against psychical caprice.
     
    The heroine of James’s story is aptly named May, as in it may happen, it may not, I may or may not prefer this decision. A heroine who denominates an allegory of the pure subjunctive, May also occupies the position of analyst to the story’s hero, John Marcher. Marcher doesn’t march so much as shuffle, and while the latter under the direction of different authorship might rule out the status of hero, the shuffle is exemplary of Jamesian heroism, which is as much to say that it serves as exemplum of a particularly psychoanalytic heroism (to be distinguished from Bersani’s earlier implicitly heroic accounts of the gay bottom, etc.). Marcher, weekending at an English summerhome, is told by May that at some point many years back he had told her something that she had never forgotten. Already, here, we are in a realm beyond that of a conventional unconscious, to the extent that May—as both analyst and proxy psyche—catalyzes the story (such as it is) as instantiation of memory, rather than of forgetfulness. More precisely, May instantiates the form of memory without any necessarily substantive mnemonic content (a point left unremarked in Bersani’s analysis): she tells Marcher that their first and only other meeting was in Naples, and in Marcher’s desire to enact his not having forgotten, he accedes to the memory-form that May offers. At this point, however, it’s not quite so simple as May’s remembering versus Marcher’s not: rather, May Bartram either offers up a shared experience or fabricates one. Crucially, the difference is nugatory.
     
    Marcher’s desire to seem as though he has remembered what she offers trumps the inevitably dubious provision on Bartram’s part of producing what might or might not count as valid memory. If the unconscious, proverbially speaking, is the shore of all-forgotten, this shore, in James’s novella, non-antagonistically stands as shore of possibility. Do you believe me, or not? Did we or did we not meet in Naples? To say yes, on the basis of memory, is barely distinguishable from assenting in the name of art. Which is to say, beyond James’s frame, that psychoanalysis might analogously found itself on an eloquent fiction (a fabulism at which Bersani already hints in his earlier reading of James’s Maggie Verver, in A Future for Astyanax). Less that truth is out the window than that truth shares a bed with fabulisms approximate or intelligent enough to prolong the germinal conversation, Bartram and Marcher agree to live on (or off of) this shared possibility of having previously met, met previously in Naples, site of putative offering of their secret. The secret may or may not be real, more or less contingent on the reliability of the locus of sharing. Unconfirmable. We are finding, here, the sort of adventurous and aspiring psychoanalytic configuration that for many years has languished, adumbrated by the strictures and indices of a psychoanalysis that less for better than for worse has gone restrictively predictable. Bersani’s freefall into James enacts a psychoanalytic freefall into ambiguity whose irretrievable bounds anticipate a new vocabulary, a new set of relations. And to the extent that being interpersonal (or in Bersani’s vocabulary, impersonal) maps onto a cliff, we have no choice, in the midst of the previous landscape’s aridity, to take the jump, even as the jump requires revisiting what may from other vantages have seemed conventional. Falling through the conventional differs, apparently, from tourism of the conventional. And fall we do.
     
    At the chapter’s end, Bersani wonders whether the “impersonal intimacy” cultivated by Leconte’s “analyst” and “analysand” (scare quotes rendering both categories less dubious than interchangeable) “might emerge from larger relational fields” (39), against the film’s suggestion that this intimacy can survive only in being “sequestered” from the world as such. While there are several salient expressions within LeConte’s film of the world excluded from the psychoanalytically modelled relation, the analysand’s husband seems both especially to fit the bill and to complicate exclusivity’s perceived bearing on the “relational field” from which it is barred. If we follow Adam Phillips’s aphorism with which Bersani’s chapter begins, that “psychoanalysis is about what two people can say to each other if they agree not to have sex” (1), the sex life of the analysand and her husband ought in its (implicitly contractual or consensual) relation to sex seem least like a psychoanalytic encounter, least welcome within the psychoanalytic field even as its translation into the narrative of a sex life constitutes one of the archives on which the psychoanalytic encounter depends.
     
    Marc, the analysand’s husband, would seem at first blush to consolidate—precisely in his normative capacity as husband—some conjugal intimacy at odds with Bersani’s interest in impersonality. Nonetheless, Leconte’s film demonstratively positions Marc’s marriage as unusual, precisely on the order of the sexual which would otherwise foreclose its psychoanalytic purchase. As Bersani distills their marital predicament, “Anna’s husband, Marc, has been impotent since a car accident six months earlier when Anna (at least according to her account), having gone into reverse rather than drive, backed their car into him and crushed one of his legs against the garage wall. Watching another man have sex with Anna will, he feels, reawaken his own crippled desires” (7). In an essay expressly interested in modes of contractual abstinence, Bersani’s gloss of Marc’s “crippled desires” feels undertheorized: all the more so transposed with James’s John Marcher, whose failure and fate, by many accounts, seem as much an instance “crippled desire” as anything else. What is James’s subject if not the erotic cripple, and what is James’s genius if not (at least partly) the vivescent and inextricable energies of erotic and epistemological disability?1
     
    While “erotically crippled,” as a category, skips across the surface of Bersani’s essay like a stone, it likewise more resonantly sinks into the medium of the essay’s meticulous exploration of impersonal intimacy. On the level of the vernacular with which the terms initially register, “erotically crippled” and “impersonally intimate” might well seem if not synonyms then kindred spirits (or disspirits). In the context of Bersani’s particular project, “erotically crippled” maps (if over-broadly) the space between impersonal intimacy and the aesthetic subjectivity that is the subject of one of Bersani’s coterminous essays. Erotic crippledness and aesthetic subjectivity already imply a relation based precisely on the limitations (intrinsic or extrinsic) on the radius of personal action. In both, perceived proscription of normative action precipitates, in the loss of action, a florid repertoire of displacement begotten by the contingencies of ocularity. Neither the world nor the self becomes under either optic a work of art; rather, world and self lose their customary borders under the influence of a perspicacity unable to distinguish between the perceived and the experienced. In the implosive propinquity of perception and experience, the world of a sudden seems unreliably and (as in James’s An American Scene) garrulously non-objective, and the self seems unreliably and garrulously inseparable from the world which from other discursive vantages would seem less miscegenate. Along the lines of correspondence between self and world, aesthetic subjectivity, as Bersani writes, “eschews psychologically motivated communication and replaces such communication with families of form” (168). How better to describe the Jamesian displacement of psychological motivation? How better to articulate the aesthetic compensations of an erotic crippledness whose removal from the realm of the actual initiates a new realm of contemplation. Erotic crippledness, that is, occasions an epistemology rather than a phenomenology, whose erotic component depends not on the execution of erotic acts but on the pleasures gleaned from ruminating on the aestheticization of the erotic act.
     
    John Marcher, by his own account, is—until his “reunion” with May Bartram—a man of crippled desire. The “secret” he shares with May (again, a secret whose utility extends beyond necessary veracity) retroactively justifies his detachment from a life denominated as a series of inhabited forms—his modest patrimony, his library, his garden, his London acquaintances. Inhabited forms, uninhabited life: the possibility of a secret occupies the negative space of a life itself otherwise characterizable as negative space. Marcher doesn’t want anything, has never, ostensibly, wanted anything, since his desiring energies have been preoccupied with a fate of which before his encounter with May he was unaware. Marcher’s entreaty for May to wait with him and watch for this fate to materialize further justifies his detachment from the world, and renders fate itself an imminent picture at an exhibition. The overdetermined passivity that subsequently organizes their shared vigil (to be sure, no more overdetermined than any Jamesian passivity) is essentially aesthetic. This particular aesthetic, again, is an effect of the dubious fate that simultaneously adumbrates both future and past:
     

    What it had come to was that he wore a mask painted with the social simper, out of the eye-holes of which there looked eyes of an expression not in the least matching the other features. This the stupid world, even after years, had never more than half discovered. It was only May Bartram who had, and she achieved, by an art indescribable, the feat of at once—or perhaps it was only alternately—meeting the eyes from in front and mingling her own vision, as from over his shoulder, with their peep through the apertures.
     

     

    Such an indescribable art—and the narrativized aesthetic which that art engenders—surely isn’t equivalent to Bersani’s understanding of aesthetic subjectivity, even as its intersection with the latter seems non-coincidentally persuasive. Again, as Bersani writes in the earlier essay, “aesthetic subjectivity . . . eschews psychologically motivated communication and replaces such communication with families of form” (168).

     
    And what of Marc’s crippled desires? What is the relation between impotence and desire? To say that impotence physiologically hampers desire’s expression too quickly, I think, reduces erotic expression to the vicissitudes of erection and ejaculation. Something similar can be gleaned from James’s earlier The Princess Casamassima, whose bedridden (and eventually, suggestively, couch-ridden) Rose Muniment extends nothing if not a series of erotic queries and requests. The novel’s internal repugnance of Rose’s character subsequently confirms the extent to which impotence’s own vim instigates far more discomfiture than vim or impotence. The confluence of disability and imagination monkeywrenches the novel’s disposition to redescribe Rose’s iconoclastic surveillance as otiose, if not pathetic—even as Rose’s particular constellation of disability cannot be disentangled from her particular capacities as reader (if not author).
     
    The second chapter of intimacies presents an argument structurally analogous to that of the first—the laying out of a system of relationality to be assessed less as exemplum than as template—which corrects the reductions of ejaculation by subjunctively estranging ejaculator from ejaculation from ejaculate. What if there were models of intimacy akin to psychoanalytic conversation is followed by what if there were models of intimacy akin to barebacking. We have moved from a contractually non-sexual set of narrative transactions and confidences to a contractually non-narrative set of sexual transactions and confidences. By “contractually non-narrative” I mean an agreement between the members of a given barebacking community against normative modes of erotic and sexual plot development, characterology, telos. We have, furthermore, finagled a theoretical ornamentation that might reconfigure Rose Muniment’s bedriddenness into its own heroic and less (or at least differently) repellant vantage of both erotic reward and information. Rose both is and curates the jetsam of erotic (which is to say psychical) residue. Disability is her attraction, her impediment, and her tease. Structurally speaking, Rose’s position in Casamassima is of a supine psychoanalyst. Regardless of one’s estimation of her interlocutionary facility, she can be said furthermore to occupy positions of analyst and analysand simultaneously—recalling the fluidity of analytic hydraulics in Bersani’s reading of Intimate Strangers. Or rather, the boring familiarity of her position on the couch transforms the status and availings of the couch. Countertransference here is a place-holder for a volubility both stained and availed by a psychic estrangement severely distinct from physical unreliability.
     
    Even as Bersani’s account of barebacking relies on a reading of Guillaume Dustan’s novel, Dans ma chambre (or, as Bersani notes, less Dustan’s novel than what Dustan himself denominates “an auto-fiction”), the novel at hand—all the more so following Bersani’s reading of James’s differently radical Beast in the Jungle—itself recapitulates the particular rhythms of a sexual repetitiveness that consolidates non-distinguishability over and against the distinctions that otherwise characterize if not constitute the terms of novelistic phenomenology. This is to say that one does not lose oneself in the time of Dustan’s novel so much as, potentially, lose oneself in its anti-time, whether the detemporalized inventory of sex toys or the temporally amnesiac disorientiation of ejaculation. Beyond Bersani’s own methodology (what if there were models of intimacy akin to but not equivalent to ____), the valuation of ejaculation, in its overfamiliarly double valence, sutures this second chapter to the first. The foreclosure of one form of ejaculation for the sake of absolute immersion in the form of another seems all the more interesting in a book such as intimacies, imagined from its first introductory pages as conversation.
     
    To momentarily pull out (forgive the pun): subjunctivity aims to redescribe Bersani’s interest in subjective dilation/diffusion in grammatical/temporal/epistemological terms. To the extent that gravitation to the figure (or negative space) of impersonality risks too quickly presuming that we eschew our adequate enough understanding of personality, subjunctivity seeks to rescript the vicissitudes of personality and impersonality along an axis sufficiently unfamiliar to either one (at least within the kingdoms of either psychoanalysis or queer theory), such that, should we decide ultimately to return to (im)personality, it will be on the basis of neither analogy (a model such as this ____) nor tautology (____ is what we desire, which is _____). Subjunctivity likewise seeks to reconcile recent misformulations of the Drive with coterminous misformulations of psychoanalytic futurity; after all, if (as Tim Dean has persuasively argued) the Drive is characterized less by its stringent commitment to corrosion than by its capricious uncommitability, how better to describe the latter capriciousness than in terms of the subjunctive mode. If this could happen, or would happen, that might or might not follow:
     

    after the tops’ departure, another man uses a blue plastic funnel in which he has collected the semen of other men to inseminate young Jonas with the ejaculate of men he has never met. (Several bottoms in these videos, like Jonas, maintain a smile that struck me as at once idiotic, saintly, and heavily drugged.) Dean calls the funneling scene a “ritual summoning of ghosts” that engenders “a kind of impersonal identification with strangers past and present that does not depend on knowing, liking, or being like them.”
     

    (48)

     

    Such a sex scene ratchets sexual personality to its most rigidly minimalist components. First the departure of the top, and then the departure of any penis (or penis-shaped object) whatsoever. Sex at its most austerely utilitarian, which is to say gay sex as a correlative to the impugned severity of heterosexual utilitarianism (down to the denomination, as Bersani and Dean note, of the ejaculate as the bottom’s “baby”). The blue plastic funnel strikes me as phallic less in homology than in function, as though a man’s gravitation to another man’s penis were itself purely functional. That one possible function of the funnel—ghostly conduit—is the transmission of HIV on one level, suggests that the thrill of this particular sex practice (insofar as “sex” with a funnel forecloses sundry other more conventional thrills) is the possibility of possibility. It is one thing to be the consensual bottom for a serio-converted top: another thing to be the consensual bottom for a funnel bearing what may or may not be infectious semen.

     
    The difference instructively juxtaposes vernacular and more canonical accounts of the death drive. In the former case (willingly risking one’s own serio-conversion from being barebacked by an HIV+ top), death drive seems a given, if we understand the death drive to be akin to a deathwish. The latter case, however, more astutely demonstrates the capriciousness of death-drivenness. It’s less that one might be infected than that one might or might not. We have moved from “might” as noun (the might of an ego requiring being taken down a peg, the might of the death drive itself, impelling one toward the latter, the might of the top, or bottom, within the fine print of the sexual contract) to “might” as qualifying auxiliary (which might well be another way of describing the funnel).
     
    It’s less that the psychical askesis described by Bersani in “Is the Rectum a Grave” might find in eventual infection a medico-physical correlative; rather, that psychical askesis (if one can reach such a thing with a funnel in one’s rectum) might or might not find correlation in the sex act. One’s relation to another set of bodies already having been rendered equivocal (as one is being gangbanged, how to discriminate between one set of thrusts and another), one’s relation to one’s own body is rendered equivocal. Equivocality, again, is not equivalent to self-abstraction, nor is equivocality equivalent to impersonality. The melodrama of Jonas is or is not decisive or somatically transformative. As with a placebo, we might or might not respond to something that is or is not eventually present in our blood stream.
     
    The thrill of the death drive, thus instantiated, is less in knowing one’s relation to a funnel of semen than in not knowing. The death drive, for all its externally imposed Tarantino-esque luridness, depends on the contingencies of knowing, themselves dependent on a horizon in which contingencies might themselves come to fruition (or to recall Edelman’s reading of The Birds, come to roost). The death drive, then, doesn’t oppose futurity so much as depend on the deferral of futurity so as to extend as long as possible the Jamesian project of waiting. The death drive, even in its cathexis to deferring, is futurally organized. The death drive may be impulsive (the manner of drives), but maximization of its concomitant pleasures requires patience, in requiring and being ravished by the tick of minutes, hours, days, in between the fever-dream of possibility and its coming or not coming (as it were) to pass.
     
    I have in the past responded to Bersani’s multitudinous accounts of self-shattering with the frustration of not understanding self-shattering’s remainder, if there is one. If in fact we were to call “ego” both the source and engine of aggressivity, and if the ego were in fact self-shattering’s target, then it would seem reasonable to pursue this psychoanalytically inflected regimen of self-askesis; but to what end? With what is one left, in the loss of self? More generically: in the wake of obliteration, could one still speak of oneself as a “one” at all? Would the pronomially disingenuous neutrality of the “one” likewise count less as an impersonal selfhood (one invariably speaks, on some register, on behalf of some more particular one) than the reconstitution of ego under another name? What could count if not as compensation, then as consolation? In its perhaps most luminously emphatic articulation, “Is the Rectum a Grave?,” askesis feels all the more definitively teleological in the essay’s actual staging (if not outright theorizing) of it, not only as crescendo of the essay’s final paragraph, but as that final paragraph’s final word. Where to go from askesis? How to think beyond it without finding one’s self rebounded by the ego’s vicious lure?
     
    The remainder, intimacies suggests, is kinder and gentler, though kindness and gentleness of different orders, insofar as they are unmoored from fictions of interrelationality on which they are ordinarily (ideologically, sentimentally) predicated. By what name can we call a self so sedulously at odds with the myriad ways its intelligibility is said to exist in the first place? If not self, if not person, if not subject, if not human, then what? Bersani’s recent meditations on these very questions makes possible the conceiving of a post-asketic self as an interlineation of subjunctivities (perhaps imaginable as the radicalization of Whitmanian adhesiveness). Bersani notes that in the Foucauldian analysis of power, “intentionality is not eliminated . . . it is displaced” (64). Intentionality, that is, does not accrue to a given subject, to a locatable nexus, but goes diffuse. In the context of psychoanalysis, the displacement of intentionality occurs in the recalibration of temporality from the ego’s declarative to the id’s subjunctive. Subjunctivity’s imposition of contingency between grammatical subject and grammatical object in fact renders diaphanous the veracity of ontological subject (and ontological object); no less so, it renders diaphanous the distinction between subject and object, to the extent that the possible fruition of one inevitably will depend on that of the other.
     
    The non-destructive, non-sexual slippage of one person into another—one subjunctivity into another, or more precisely, their one shared subjunctivity—returns us to Henry James. John Marcher, of The Beast in the Jungle, counts among literature’s great presumptive narcissists. Most accounts of the novella position May Bartram as ever watchful, ever patient, for John Marcher’s eventual discovery that the secret—shared but undisclosed—haunting his life is the possibility of his truly loving May for herself, rather than for her maieutically hermeneutic relation to his cultivation of self-interest. She dies before such a discovery is made. His infatuation with what she might know about him putatively forecloses the depths by which he might know her. intimacies, however, supports a different account of James’s text—not by replacing the failure of amorous narrative with some non-amorous narrative, but by making explicit a vantage from which James’s love story is, in fact, successful.
     
    If Marcher is a narcissist, it is Bartram who has made him so. It is Bartram who has suggested to Marcher that something, crucially, is missing from his life, and Bartram who spurs, if not Marcher’s recovery of this missing thing, then his new career of rotating, ruminating, reassessing the syntactical complications of what is missing. What is missing, by conventional accounts, is Marcher’s desire for Bartram (which in earlier instantiations of queer theory, would indicate Marcher’s desires elsewhere). In fact, the story seems less about desiring what is lacking than about cultivating interest in what is lacking. And if what is lacking is not Marcher’s desire, we may take the absence toward which Marcher and Bartram both gravitate to be the missingness of Marcher’s ego. The plausibility of waiting for something to come, for Marcher, redescribes Bersani’s clarification of the id as virtuality, and resituates the ego as that which might call from a horizon never entirely reached. The Beast in the Jungle, then, describes neither the desireless selfishness of Marcher’s ego, nor the put-upon selflessness of Bartram’s, but rather Bartram’s catechism of Marcher into his own immersion in impersonality, in the stringent and irreducibly amorous (if not erotic) manner in which Bartram less partakes in or is excluded from Marcher’s ego than shares with Marcher the experience of not having an ego. This is self-shattering without sex. This is askesis without self-shattering. This is gentle, patient conversation in which Bartram and Marcher evince each other’s own gracefully and ethically depleted narcissicism. Such a reading of James’s text might or might not have been anticipated by Bersani, in his own interlineating of Beast in the Jungle and Intimate Strangers. The “might or might not,” borne out across the time and space of my own writing (it may well have been anyone else’s), enacts another version of the fructive and constitutionally stalled amorousness of intimacies, a dilation that doesn’t jeopardize closeness so much as consolidate it, or at least carefully and collectively watch it, for signs of waking.
     

    Michael D. Snediker is the author of Queer Optimism: Lyric Personhood and Other Felicitous Persuasions (U Minnesota Press, 2008). He is currently at work on a new book, “The Aesthetics of Disability: American Literature and Figurative Contingency.” He is Assistant Professor of American Literature at Queen’s University, in Kingston, Ontario.
     

    Footnote

     
    1.
    That some persons collectively choose not to have sex differs from persons who simply (or at least nonexplicitly, noncontractually) don’t have sex, which differs from persons who don’t have sex because one of the relation’s participants (but not both) is unable to have sex, which in turn differs from persons who don’t have sex because one of the relation’s participants is perhaps able, but for all sorts of reasons, does not want to have sex. Succinctly, there are as many ways to not have sex as there are to have it.

     

     

     

    Works Cited

     

     

    • James, Henry. “The Beast in the Jungle.” Complete Stories, 1898–1910. New York: The Library of America, 1996. 496–541.

     

  • AncesTree

    George Kuchar (bio)
    San Francisco Art Institute
    g.kuchar@worldnet.att.net

     

    The very early days of television, when puppets on strings ruled the airwaves, were quite essential to my stature as a fallen angel (a filmmaker who fell into hell via a CIRCUIT CITY basket). I don’t always shop there, as sometimes I like the BEST BUY stores best as the ceilings are usually higher than their prices. This makes them cooler too. Anyway, television in the old days had lots of puppet shows instead of the kind of wooden entities you see on TV today, plus you could see that the balsa wood beings were being manipulated by strings (something not visible with today’s modern mannequins). The current dummies are wired more discreetly for maximum cleavage potential with the crotch area fully latexed to prevent unwarranted voltage from browning pink panties. The male mannequin requires less grounding for his antenna as the filaments of a hairy buttock make excellent circuitry for discharging ionized effusions.
     
    Puppets were not the only denizens of early TV as you had lots of space operas with canned music but no canned laughter. That was organically generated by the viewing public in the comfort of their own homes since the shows were “live” with gaffs galore! Scenic backdrops would crash and makeshift props backfire or flaccidly flop on camera while the adrenaline pumped performers huffed and puffed their way through putrid plots, all inadequately funded. I loved it so much and that love hurled me into the realization that I too was destined for videographic Valhalla where the proud and the beautiful were shrunken down to fit into an electronic gizmo. That boxed gizmo itself was filled with other cubist containers all labeled with a Cocoa-Puff cosmology of cerealized serializations dramatizing pre-Sputnik space junk. The results to me, the viewer, were as sweet and flaky as the sponsor’s products and I drank it all in with an Ovaltine cocktail designed to rocket me into being a consumerized cosmonaut befitting the Eisenhower/Einstein, space-time continuum which continued to grind out these programs weekly on a boob tube devoid of boobs (except for maybe Xaviar Cugat’s new wife on one of the many variety shows that endangered the universe with gyrating ASS-teroids).
     
    But unfortunately all was not sordid, as Loretta Young never had a costume malfunction while whirling through a door to introduce tepid teleplays. Nor did Howdy Doody make tangible his last name in the creases of his jeans, despite the fact that Clarabelle the clown squeezed incessantly at the rubber appendage of a horny hole near his mid section to excite the peanut gallery with a flatulating fracas.
     
    I’m of course discoursing on early American, 1950s TV. Therefore this essay may mean absolutely nothing to those of European descent. My stimulating brush with continental TV was mainly in viewing Benny Hill programs. He was the shadow shape that followed such giants as Allister Cook who basked in the blazing brilliance of Masterpiece Theater thereby casting a darker doppelganger on the British telly (if there still be such a slang). I enjoyed his full figured shenanigans greatly even though the full figures of his stable of bevies weren’t exactly my cup of 4 o’clock tea. British mixed grills were always a bit skimpy on beefcake in that prime (rib) time.
     
    For beefcake I had to settle for Joshua Logan musicals like South Pacific or the fan magazines that featured Tab Hunter shaving in the privacy of his privies (if, once again there be such a slang). Now-a-days there’s such a vacuum of words since so many have been considered off limits…banished except for the first letter. These will certainly make future dictionaries shockingly skimpy plus the human mouth will undoubtedly lose some of its provocative elasticity since it has already been hideously mutated with cosmetic injections. No muscular activation, because of vowel disembowelment, will be able to keep the lips operative during theatrical readings, causing the great classical orators of stage and screen to mimic the sound of farts from of a fist fucker’s familiar (pardon my olde English).
     
    Speaking of the stage, only lately have I been attending live theater, as in the past the classic repertoire of Shubert Alley remained unexplored being that the “great white way” was too bright for the kind of activities I preferred in alleys. But age, and an increase in wallet girth, has changed all that. Before, the general trend was to purchase plays in soft cover editions and read them in the privacy of my own bedroom. Since most of the hot action occurred within the pages of those texts rather than under the sheets, I led a chaste life filled with lurid and hopefully libido-building aspirations where four letter words and deeds had been supplanted with the seeds of literary foliation. Filthy episodes in any medium should be rendered with delicate strokes of aspirational cravings for the hungry souls that desire its protein. Protein is bodybuilding but the energy to acquire that nutrient comes from the carbohydrates of carnality. It’s this transference of yin and yang that produces the poon tang powerhouse that we call great art.
     
    For behind every man there stands a woman and behind both there looms a beast that demands the juices of both in order to ovulate the eternal. Whether that juice trickles into word or image, possibly both in my particular case, depends upon the squeezing this beast exerts in the ritual of triad termination. As the doomed die hot in the heat of crushing desires, the fat of their loins ignite, fueling future hell fires: conflagrations destined to singe our senses. Fire storms which burn eternal in the buns of Beelzebub, creating demon winds of inspiration that blast free from his constricting hell hole to fumigate our consciousness with a whiff of Shangri-La. Oh, sweet mysteries of light and shadow, how thy flickering upon the silver screen brings such gold into the teeth of our torment! And if it’s not the silver screen, but the cool glow of a plasmatic putrescence, then let the pixels dance with ruby slippers of scarlet, for black and white rubber is reserved for Hare Krishna footwear: insulated grounding to accompany chanting pin heads. And how many angels are on the head of a pinhead? That can only be guessed at from the droppings such cherubs leave behind. So be pure of intake yet potent in digestion for the remains of this nourishment will someday fertilize the unspeakable; and who cares (as you’ve probably surmised after reading this essay): a picture is worth a thousand words anyway.
     

     
    Pizza.

     

    Click for larger view

     

    Pizza.

     
     

     

    George Kuchar was born with a twin brother, Mike, in 1942 on the Isle of Manhattan, we mainly grew up in the Bronx and were schooled in the world of commercial art. I supported myself, and my hobby of making 8mm movies, with paychecks from that Midtown Manhattan world of angst and ulcers. Earning enough money to switch to 16mm in the 1960s (1965), both of us started splicing together bigger strips of film and lugging around heavier projectors. The burgeoning underground film movement, which at that time was in full swing, gave us an outlet for our work and we continued grinding out our separate visions on celluloid. In the very early 1970s I was invited to teach filmmaking at the San Francisco Art Institute and have been there ever since. I came over with my dog but now use my cats as screen stars (sometimes) as he passed away. I became a traitor to the film department when 8mm video camcorders came on the market and jumped ship to start up in that dinghy medium. I enjoyed it and then sailed on to Hi-8, mini-DV and Digital 8. I don’t regret it one bit. I’m still in the film department because I still make pictures that move even though there’s a lot of “stills” in this sentence. I started making moving pictures in the 1950s so there’s a whole pile of them in my closets (over 200). Some of the titles, in film, include: HOLD ME WHILE I’M NAKED, CORRUPTION OF THE DAMNED, COLOR ME SHAMELESS, and LUST FOR ECSTASY. The many video titles, which are diaries, dramas done with my film students and portraits of places with living things, include: VILE CARGO, FILL THY CRACK WITH WHITENESS, KISS OF THE VEGGIE VIXON, THE MIGRATION OF THE BLUBBEROIDS, and DINGLE BERRY JINGLES. I also occasionally act in films and videos of various formats and wrote the screenplay for the porn-horror flick, THUNDERCRACK, which was directed by Curt McDowell. I also authored a book of memoirs and filmmaking tips called: REFLECTIONS FROM A CINEMATIC CESSPOOL. My brother, Mike, also rants and gives helpful tips in that publication too.
     

  • Embracing Aporia?: The Lessons of Popular Knowledge

    Suzanne Diamond (bio)
    Youngstown State University
    sdiamond@ysu.edu

    Review of: Clare Birchall, Knowledge Goes Pop: From Conspiracy Theory to Gossip. Oxford: Berg, 2006.

     

    Gossip and conspiracy discourse have long been epistemologically suspect, and recent critical treatments tend either to celebrate or to excoriate these social phenomena. Knowledge Goes Pop: From Conspiracy Theory to Gossip heralds a new perspective, proposing that gossiping and speculating are not only defensible but also fundamental-indeed inescapable-ways of knowing. Offering a theoretical analysis that simultaneously abjures a traditional thesis, claims wide-ranging associative liberties, and insists on the groundlessness of all truth-making, Birchall engages in a tricky balancing act; the book aims to level the relationship between academic studies and popular knowledge-production and yet, almost paradoxically, to define a more radical role for cultural studies.
     
    Repeatedly the book underscores that aporia haunts all knowledge-building and that the procedures of conspiracy theory and gossip-often critiqued for their sketchy grasp on confirmed truths-resemble the methods employed even by more legitimized forms of speculation, such as traditional scholarship. Early on, Birchall acknowledges fundamental debts to Michel Foucault-particularly to Foucault’s notions about the commingling of power and knowledge within discursive formations-and to Jacques Derrida, whose ideas on aporia, trace, absence, and responsibility inform the book’s deconstruction of knowledge hierarchies. Yet the text also builds on the revaluation of gossip initiated by Patricia Meyer Spacks’s 1985 Gossip, and it echoes the impulse to link conspiracy theorizing to postmodern experience that readers will recall from both Mark Fenster’s Conspiracy Theories (1999) and Patrick O’Donnell’s Latent Destinies (2000).
     
    Birchall argues that cultural studies-often assailed within the university in precisely the terms used to castigate popular knowledge-has a more radical response available to it than the ultimately conservative struggle for “legitimacy” as traditional academic scholarship. Insofar as “true justified” knowledge and the social authority it enjoys are not objective facts but, rather, culturally conferred categories of convenience, to emphasize-rather than deny or displace-aporia presents a more productive cultural studies project than keeping the secret. Accordingly, traditional analyses of phenomena such as conspiracy or gossip are insufficient if they leave intact an assumed hierarchy dividing the putative experts from those whose practices are studied. On this count, implicitly, Birchall takes issue with Spacks, whose revaluation of gossip is couched within a traditional literary analysis requiring and showcasing specialized expertise. Challenging such hierarchies between the knowers and the known, this book argues that by relinquishing expert authority, by “thinking about the status of cultural studies . . . as a form of knowledge . . . we will have learned something from popular knowledges rather than just about popular knowledges” (31, emphases in original). Accordingly, gossip and conspiracy theory model the epistemological instruction popular culture can offer.
     
    Birchall disclaims early on that no “Big Theory” structures this analysis; instead, she proposes an “athetic” line of investigation, operationally defined as “a kind of speculation that doesn’t involve positing a firm thesis or which operates under a stable principle” (118). This stance, she suggests, amounts to a deconstructive move toward knowledge-building, an approach Birchall defends against assaults-from both outside and within cultural studies-by commentators who propose to be anti- or post-theoretical or who reproach cultural studies for not being more “politically responsible.” Answering those who assail the “celebratory readings,” the “optimism,” the uncritical “populism,” or otherwise “speculative” approaches in cultural studies, Birchall reminds us that deconstruction has destabilized metaphysical certainties about the “political.” Sanctioning critical play instead, the book charges that scolding colleagues for their putative political irresponsibility betokens an unwittingly reactionary and destructive moralism that amounts to discursive border-patrolling. “If cultural studies is to be up to the job of understanding popular knowledges,” the author argues, it needs to avoid such prescriptions; “it has to consider the consequences of moralism displacing theory. . . . Moralism is nostalgia: it performs a politics appropriate to a different age” (26). Birchall’s response to reproaches couched in terms of an a priori “politics”-somewhat like that of the conspiracy theorist toward “official” culture-is to eschew debate with such assailants and to instead invoke an alternative discursive community. This strategy to emulate conspiracy is anything but accidental, for-true to what it advocates-the book does not simply study conspiracy theory and gossip; it also deliberately takes instruction from them.
     
    The author acknowledges up front the inevitably speculative nature of the book’s contentions, but-for better and for worse-speculation, like “athesis,” means never having to argue for underlying assumptions and what some might deem arbitrary associations.1 To mute the charge that her argument is hypothetical, for instance, Birchall asks how we can sort between causal and arbitrary connections. Capitalizing on this empirical liberty, she asserts a parallel among conspiracy theory-building, gossip, deconstruction, and cultural studies. All of these, Birchall argues, are “avatars for the undecidability . . . [and] the instability of knowledge, for the alterity that resides ‘within’ knowledge” (32). Here instability is not something to bemoan, but rather a condition to make peace with-or even make the most of-like the suspension of the gold standard or the dynamic of unfettered exchange. Not surprisingly, then, another connection that the text proposes among gossip, conspiracy theory, and cultural studies is their shared amenability to commodification. Knowledge and its marketability underpin academic anxiety about legitimacy, for
     

    In order to sell knowledge, in order for it to have value, the knowledge economy has to disguise the aporetic tension between the impossibility and possibility of legitimate knowledge at the foundation of all knowledge: service providers and retailers have to convince consumers and shareholders to invest in knowledge by presenting it as useful, authoritative, unique, legitimate, and as theirs to sell in the first place. What is in fact risky speculation (investing in a knowledge that holds the trace of its own illegitimacy within it) with no appeal to a final authority, no guarantee of a profit, is presented as a safe investment.
     

    (125)

     

    Paradoxically, blowing the whistle on this pyramid scam promises to make cultural studies not less but more productive-hence more valuable-and this process entails learning from the market-friendliness of conspiracy and gossip. For Birchall, such cultural artifacts as The X-Files represent instances of distinct new markets for alternative explanations, exchange-sites wherein something as quaint as credence is not even required. Whereas once alternative voices had been marginalized, technological advances such as the Internet have witnessed conspiracy theory’s “emergence [as] a distinct but disparate commercial industry” (35), one whose entertainment value obviates qualms about plausibility. By now, conspiracy has metamorphosed into a generalized willingness to sell and be sold alternative stories. Like Samuel Coleridge’s ideal fiction readers, conspiracy’s “audience, in fact, is being asked to suspend its disbelief, rather than to believe” (40). In Birchall’s reformulation, conspiracy, like tabloid gossip, accrues legitimacy not as a narcissistic and presumably paranoid, “truth” system, as O’Donnell infers, and not as an impulse to make mainstream discourse more inclusive, as Fenster proposes, but simply as a diversion for proliferating separatist audiences.

     
    Birchall shares with Fenster and O’Donnell the premise that conspiracy narratives trade in a refusal of contingency and randomness, preferring instead the premise that hidden but identifiable causes and effects structure what appear as discrete phenomena. These narratives authorize what some might deem wildly associative connections wherein “[r]andom events . . . are translated into components of far-reaching schemes.” These schemes are salient, not because they are persuasive, but because they fill critical coverage gaps analogous to market sectors (Birchall 45-6). For instance, Knowledge Goes Pop singles out the death of Princess Diana and the 9/11 attacks on the World Trade Center as events in which the demand for information outstripped the supply by mainstream reportage and created the type of vacuum a market abhors, a space enthusiastically filled by alternative hawkers of the “real” story. Uniquely, Birchall speculates that legitimated mainstream discourse-be it journalistic, political, or academic-indulges similar narrative strategies. That is, the hot scoop and the groundbreaking research project attract us because they assemble a new story based on available but previously un(der)interpreted evidence. The purity of the presumably legitimate press, moreover, proves questionable once alternative reportage on Diana or 9/11 gets co-opted by “official” news producers-ostensibly for scoffing purposes-and, in effect, later retailed at a reduced risk by the mainstream media.
     
    Gossip, which “trade[s] in a tension between the public and the private,” functions in much the same manner as conspiracy theories do (92): out of concealed or otherwise unconnected events it assembles and sells a new story. The market here is equally vigorous, deconstructive even, because “[g]ossips are never sated. The revelation of secrets (true or untrue) does not satisfy-the desire to reveal or receive simply gets deferred elsewhere, searching for new material in an endless exchange of signifiers parading as signifieds” (24). As with conspiracy theory, gossip privileges discussion over conclusion and prolongs iteration over closure; thus, it mobilizes deconstructive principles. The meaning of particular items of gossip is beside the point, for instance, since “even when gossip passes information on, iterability ensures that it is haunted by the trace of the possible ‘death’ of the source of the gossip, making it always ‘other’ from the ‘original’ in that repetition” (136). Like Spacks, Birchall aims to rescue gossip from the pejorative connotations historically attached to it. In an independent move, however, this book underscores the fundamentality of the gossip market. Far more than an object of scholarly analysis, “gossip is a constitutive necessity: which is . . . very different from saying that it plays an important role in society” (108). Gossip “is at the heart of cognition, conditioning any history of knowledge or claim to knowledge put forward within the socio-cultural sphere” (108). To hold forth-even about gossip-is to gossip, in other words; gossiping and professing are synonymous in that both propose to make new sense continuously out of available circumstances. Ultimately, Birchall challenges Spacks’s project, and others like it, which leave intact the expert/object of study divide.
     
    Repeatedly, Birchall draws telling parallels in the stances assumed by commentators on gossip, conspiracy theory, and deconstruction; here, it might be argued, the speculative stance and canny “conspiracy” strategy come in handy, for employing these two liberates Birchall to claim premises and connections which themselves need not be exhaustively supported. Accordingly, the book posits but does not overtly argue for the idea that the very effort to maintain the purity of the separate practices of journalism, critical theory, and cultural studies implies corresponding parallels across these fields. Many descriptions of alternative discourses actually function like fences around an in-group. Memorably, in Literary Theory, Terry Eagleton paved the way for this insight by pointing out how some signifiers that pretend to name signifieds actually function to designate belonging or exclusion; “weed,” he observed, does not identify any particular plant, per se, but instead designates any number of nameless plants whose shared characteristic is mainly their unwelcomeness in one’s garden. Implicitly, Birchall mobilizes this insight, suggesting that terms such as “paranoid” or “hysteric” identify only that some forms of utterance will not count as legitimate discourse. In journalism, for instance, the book interrogates what Mark Lawson had identified as a “collapse in editorial authority” in the mainstream journalistic incorporation of popular hypotheses about Diana’s death; Birchall locates a similar conservatism in Elaine Showalter’s book, Hystories: Hysterical Epidemics and Modern Media (1998). Birchall finds that these approaches-like those of people who critique cultural studies-ultimately function to narrow what can be uttered by denying legitimacy from discursive “outliers.” Showalter’s diagnosis of conspiracy theories as a form of collective hysteria itself represents, Birchall suggests, a paranoid response to paranoia. Moreover, aporia-an inescapable doubt or undecidability-underlies the psychoanalytic system upon which Showalter’s dismissal of hysteria rests since Freud himself acknowledged the speculative dimensions of psychoanalytic “science.”
     
    Birchall identifies a similar discursive border-policing in Umberto Eco’s responses to deconstruction, specifically within Eco’s complaint against the “Hermetic drift” presumably implied by deconstructive approaches to truth. Taking issue with Eco’s designation of the interpretive limits of deconstruction, Birchall’s book connects these complaints to Showalter’s diagnosis of conspiracy theorists. In a critical maneuver that literary theorists might find suspect, Birchall locates Eco’s take on deconstruction partly within ideas expressed by one of Eco’s fictional characters, the suggestively named “Casaubon,” in Foucault’s Pendulum.2 For Birchall, Casaubon embodies Eco’s critique of “forms of overinterpretation,” which is to say interpretations guided by an uncorroborated, everything-is-connected approach that echoes the worldview of the conspiracy theorist (77). Fictional characters are problematic sources of authorial view and propensities, however. In Eco’s work, a monolith known as social consensus enables an equally monolithic “us” to adjudicate which readings do not qualify as legitimate, to sideline, in effect, persuasive flowers from overinterpretive weeds. Eco’s overinterpreters, then-deconstructionists, that is-share the fate of Showalter’s hysterics; both get excluded from the metaphysical community of “rational” interpreters. But the exclusion in either case, Birchall maintains, is arbitrary and the community is fictional.
     
    And what if “the community” were not one? Birchall questions Eco’s notion of “consensus” by recalling François Lyotard’s critique of that same category in Jürgen Habermas’s work. Lyotard’s insight had been to establish that Habermas links “consensus” to a progress narrative that we might fruitfully question-“a concept tied to a narrative of emancipation,” in Birchall’s phrase-one that Lyotard finds (in his own words) “insufficient.” Following Lyotard, Birchall proposes value-neutral terms that help detach consensus from its role in this ideological narrative; here consensus is redefined simply as “a politico-economic instrument” (80). Thus, discredited narratives and their promulgators are not silenced by an official community any more than they struggle to widen that community. Instead, they turn for their sustenance to alternative audiences. Showalter and Eco fail in related ways to conceive of the possibility that those whose interpretations are excluded-the gossip and the paranoid along with the deconstructive cultural theorist-might seek and find sympathetic communities outside the rational paradigm or interpretive community. Discourse, in this reinterpretation, involves “dissensus” at least as often as consensus. To be sure, these connections among popular knowledge, deconstructive theories, and the cultural studies enterprise involve the same kind of wildly associative leap indulged by conspiracy theorists and gossips; about this Birchall is clearly conscious and for it the author is plainly unapologetic. The implied stance is that you don’t have to buy it unless you find it productive; conversely, if you find it productive that is legitimacy enough. In short, this book is a fully conscious illustration of reality-production, not simply a “study” of it; it is an audacious and energizing implementation some of deconstruction’s most provocative implications.
     
    To invoke Birchall’s economic metaphors by way of summary, the book invites cultural studies to capitalize on a situation in which speculation is all there is. Since gossip and conspiracy-along with knowledge itself-ultimately correspond only to the forces of supply and demand, the upshot is: why not sell something new and generative? Knowledge Goes Pop insists that it isn’t marketing out-and-out relativism, and it faintly acknowledges that the desire to assign or to withhold credit for individual interpretations is not wrong or unusual. Indeed, “cultural theorists have to measure the soundness of an interpretation every time they look for information on the Internet, every time . . . they review the research of peers or examine student work” (82). But the tools with which soundness might be weighed are less in evidence than the myriad prospects for operating without apprehension of such tools. Almost as an afterthought, Birchall claims that what rescues this radical freedom to posit absolutely anything from solipsism or “irresponsibility” is a deconstructive redefinition of what “responsibility” entails. Calling on Derrida, Birchall likens “responsibility” to a heightened attentiveness to that which is radically singular, a responsiveness to particularity, and rests finally in a familiar kind of paradox, the deconstructive refusal to systematically define “responsibility.”
     
    Of course, generalized rules for responsible behavior can both limit and safeguard us, and the particularization of responsibility can imply either liberation or constriction. Liberating as the book’s speculations are, they also generate some reservations. In Chapter Five, “Sexed Up: Gossip by Stealth,” for instance, Birchall offers an extended application of gossip-configured both as object of study and as analytical approach-in order to assess the role played by unsubstantiated speculation in the British and American justification for the 2003 Iraq war. This chapter is intriguing and, whether wittingly or not, the particular application it offers serves to dramatize tensions otherwise masked by the book’s celebration of aporia. The book quotes N. Fairclough’s observation that ideology governs our decision whether to prioritize content or context in weighing the soundness of reportage. When a newspaper shares the ideological concerns of its sources, Fairclough posits,
     

    the reported discourse is not generally demarcated from the report itself . . . there is generally a focus upon the ideational meaning (the “content“) of the reported discourse and a neglect of its interpersonal meanings and its context.
     

    (48, emphases mine)

     

    This observation seems persuasive; journalistic reports on official statements-press releases by political figures, say-usually do tend to focus on content and downplay context. Reports on popular and “unofficial” knowledge, on the other hand, generally do seem to focus inordinately on context. As I read through this extended chapter ostensibly showing how gossip functioned in the lead-up to the Iraq war, however, I kept returning to this tension between content and context. Following Fairclough’s logic, I reasoned that readers whose worldview coincides with Birchall’s “gossip” might be inclined to prioritize the chapter’s content; on the other hand, readers whose interpretation of events contrast with Birchall’s might be inclined to seek contextual explanations for positions expressed in this chapter (which seem to exceed their stipulated purpose) and even for the chapter’s role in Birchall’s book, in the first place. Unequivocally, I would position myself within the former collectivity-a choir member if this report on gossip’s role in a gratuitous war could be called preaching-and yet the chapter came to feel strangely out of place in the context of this book. It runs the risk of sacrificing point to case, and in doing so it recalls Birchall’s memorable insight that, in gossip, one finds “signifiers parading as signifieds.” Upon finishing the book, I ruminated again on this unusual chapter and-perhaps cynically-I find myself speculating that perhaps the reverse could be equally plausible: that signifieds can masquerade as signifiers and, in this instance, that the case might actually be the point, that the book provides a pretext for this critique even if the reverse were also true. “Gossip by stealth,” indeed.

     
    Consonant with this unsettlement about gossip as a knowledge-making procedure, the jubilation over aporia which the book stirred in general is dissipated when I weigh particular instances of radical speculation. Now, the utility-nay, the sheer mischief-of outfoxing scolds of any stripe presents a bandwagon onto which many a freedom-loving soul might hop, and I’m no exception. Likewise, the idea that those with alternative perspectives may prefer to address like-minded fellow exiles before abjectly appealing to imperious insiders has a revolutionary appeal to it-all the more so, perhaps, when posed in the name of deconstructive cultural study. But the vulnerability to incaution haunts this euphoria, too; there is something vaguely sobering, for instance, about shrugging off as “dissension” the bids for narrative legitimacy posed by, say, Holocaust- or evolution-deniers, given the political ambitions sometimes associated with such alternative explanations. In his review of Spacks’s Gossip, in fact, Steven G. Kellman frames a similar reservation with respect to the politics surrounding gossip in literature. Acknowledging the breadth of the author’s celebratory references to gossip in British and American texts, Kellman underscores, just the same, the slant imposed by any highly selective application of a generalized theory. Pointedly the reviewer observes that “there is far less gossip within Nineteen Eight-Four than within Barchester Towers, Vanity Fair, or any of Spacks’ other exemplary fictions” (153). Kellman’s point is that Spacks is reading literature quite selectively, isolating only texts where freedom of speculation is a given. In the same way, one can say, Birchall’s dismissal of those who worry about the “politics” of deconstruction takes for granted the climate of discursive liberty that “politically” oriented critics assume must be guarded. Gossip and speculation flourish, in other words, in contexts where civil liberty can be taken for granted, and the scolding of politically-minded worry warts conveys useful cautions. Repeatedly, Birchall urges that we “take on board” the idea that aporia underlies all knowledge-making, that we, too-deconstructionists, postmodernists, students of culture-go ahead and capitalize on aporia. After a while, my inner copy editor wishes to see that verb varied, and yet-rightly or not-I intuit an authorial reluctance to substitute one sensible alternative: “embrace.” Like sea water or pirates-perhaps like global and theoretical currents now so pervasive as to have de-legitimized resistance more than anything else-aporia is urged on us, each paddling our disparate canoes, each presumably learning to stop worrying and love the marketplace of ideas. That the invitation is attractive is a fact simultaneously invigorating and dispiriting. I am not at all sure that this is the brand of aporia that Birchall’s book consciously endorses, but it lurks here nevertheless.
     

    Suzanne Diamond is Associate Professor of English at Youngstown State University, where she teaches courses in literature, film, and writing; her research investigates intersections of theories of memory, identity, and narration, and she also writes fiction. Her work has appeared in Women’s Studies: An Interdisciplinary Journal, Biography: An Interdisciplinary Journal, Literature / Film Quarterly, and Short Story. Most recently, she has edited a collection titled Compelling Confessions: The Politics of Personal Disclosure, forthcoming from Fairleigh Dickinson University Press, and has contributed an essay titled “Whose Life Is It, Anyway? Adaptation, Collective Memory, and (Auto)Biographical Processes” to the collection Teaching Adaptation Studies, which will be published by Scarecrow Press.

     

     

    Footnotes

     
    1. “Athesis” is the noun form of the adjective “athetic,” defined above (in my third paragraph).

     

     
    2. Edward Casaubon, readers will recall, is a character in George Eliot’s Middlemarch whose grand scholarly ambition is to assemble a key to all mythology.

     

     

     

    Works Cited

     

     

    • Kellman, Steven G. “Talking of Talk.” Rev. of Gossip, by Patricia Meyer Spacks. Virginia Quarterly Review LXII.1 (1986): 150-55.

     

     
  • Space and Vision in Language

    Christopher C. Robinson (bio)
    Clarkson University
    robinscc@clarkson.edu

    Review of: Nana Last, Wittgenstein’s House: Language, Space, & Architecture. New York: Fordham UP, 2008.

     

    Ludwig Wittgenstein wrote two of the core texts of philosophy’s linguistic turn in the twentieth century: Tractatus Logico-Philosophicus and Philosophical Investigations. The Tractatus, revered as the Bible of Logical Positivism, was written by a young Wittgenstein between his studies at Cambridge and his time in the trenches of the Italian front in World War I; the posthumously published Investigations engendered the heterogeneous school of ordinary language philosophy and served as an important influence on practitioners of postmodern philosophy. That the later work was written in part as a corrective for the narrow conception of language and the metaphysical excesses of the earlier work raises the question of what led to the older Wittgenstein’s philosophical transformation. In Wittgenstein’s House: Language, Space, & Architecture, Nana Last has produced an important study of this turn in Wittgenstein’s view of language. Last sheds light on the architectural experiences that led Wittgenstein from an account of language emanating from a putatively panoramic perspective based on knowledge of logical form to an interior view of language, where the spaces that compose what Wittgenstein called “the city of language” unfold before the philosopher as he walks its streets. That is, the experience of planning and building his sister’s house led Wittgenstein to a new way of seeing and describing lexical reality. As Last shows, this way of seeing is consonant with the spatial imagination of the architect.

     
    The opening chapters focus on the complex relationship and transformations that occur between the Tractatus and the Investigations. As Last observes, Wittgenstein was interested in far more than simply repudiating his early work. The break from the Tractatus entails a significant and therapeutic alteration of the philosopher’s relation to language-from outside to inside. This transformation is carried out through an array of new spatial metaphors for describing the internal dynamics that constitute linguistic practices as well as the perceptual vantages that permit access to those dynamics. The new spatiality advanced in the Investigations leads ineluctably to more expansive views of language by challenging and ultimately supplanting “the attenuated and restrictive spatiality definitive of the Tractatus” (10). Last’s argument vividly engages the discipline of architecture to stage this critical encounter between the rigid sense of space in the early work and the fluidity of space and perception in the later work. The Investigations could spring from the early work thanks to the liberating spatial analogies provided by architecture. As Last shows in this rich comparative study, this immanent critique of the Tractatus can be appreciated only if we move about the overlapping boundaries between architecture and philosophy in Wittgenstein’s work.

     
    Last’s approach, however, raises the question of where interdisciplinarity takes place. How is successful communication across disciplines possible? Last uses Wittgenstein’s house to offer an evocative account not only of the way the spatiality of architecture transformed his early attenuated vision of philosophy by shattering the insularity of the enterprise, but also of the way it alters Wittgenstein’s philosophizing. The work of the philosopher was no longer conceived as the product of a fixed perceptual vantage above language and all other forms of knowledge; rather, for the later Wittgenstein, philosophical seeing becomes a dynamic effect of playful, meandering travel through linguistic spaces called language-games. Ordinary language, conceived now by Wittgenstein the architect as the fluid medium of practices, invites interdisciplinarity. The resulting common ground for a philosophical architecture or an architectural philosophy is replete with conceptual tension; such friction ignites creativity while militating against transcendent and fixed claims to knowledge and authority.

     
    Last begins with the vertical spatiality that informs the logical analysis of the Tractatus. This putative view from above allows the philosopher to see the logical distinction in language between the sensical realm of sayable and showable propositions and the nonsensical realm of religious and ethical utterances, which may resemble logical propositions in form but are actually meaningless. With this circumscribed view of what counts as philosophical language, the Tractatus is best understood as a work in the tradition of the Vienna Circle that sought to reform philosophy by eliminating metaphysics and speculative epistemology in service of a logical and empirical science. This line between sense and non-sense is described profitably as distinguishing science from non-science. Paradoxically, the limit of language is discernible only from above, the Tractatus contends, and therefore transgresses its own strict adherence to the immanence of logical form by climbing the ladder to this transcendent perspective. Last analyzes the “mystical,” transgressive viewer of the Tractatus in spatial and perceptual (as opposed to logical) terms, and thereby illuminates a philosophical concern with perception that unifies Wittgenstein’s early and late work. Her emphasis on seeing underscores the importance of the break from the view from above language celebrated in the Tractatus and toward the horizontal and spatial orientation of vision of the architect that is fleshed out in the Philosophical Investigations.
     
    The spatiality of Wittgenstein’s Philosophical Investigations involves less a repudiation of the vertical space posited by the Tractatus than an incorporation of the early work’s vision of language into a more variegated, contingent, and context-sensitive description of how we use language. This transformation of Wittgenstein’s perspective is tied intimately to Wittgenstein’s experience as an architect. Last substantiates this relation by paying close attention to allusions to and metaphors of building, construction, and designing space-builders, materials, engines, sites, digging to bedrock, the incomplete and expanding city of language, and so on-in the Philosophical Investigations.
     
    Last takes up the often repeated contention articulated by Wittgenstein’s student G.H. von Wright, that Wittgenstein’s house is “of the same simple and static kind that belongs to a sentence of the Tractatus,” and, moreover, that its static and stark elegance is in “striking contrast” to “the continual searching and changing in Wittgenstein’s life and personality” (78). That is to say, in von Wright’s view, the house is the aesthetic fulfillment of the logical form of the Tractatus; it cannot be seen as producing or contributing to the dynamic and complex descriptions of language-games in the Investigations. Last argues, to the contrary, three main points: One, that the two years Wittgenstein spent on his sister’s house were part of a decade-long search for peace and purpose outside of philosophy; two, that the spatiality of Wittgenstein’s architectural practices led to and nurtured the philosophical breakthroughs marked by the Philosophical Investigations; and three, that the Investigations themselves created a “philosophical frame” that permits comparison between philosophy and architecture generally. When the house is viewed through the philosophical lenses of the Philosophical Investigations, Last contends, both the philosophical and architectural enterprises are envisioned along dynamic lines. This entails a break from “the line of thinking” encouraged by “the Tractatus-Stonborough-Wittgenstein House association . . . that demands architecture be understood as structured, concrete, and absolute,” an opinion bolstered by the apparent numeric precision of the Tractatus that leads readers to regard the work as architectural in character (81). More significantly, conceiving the house as an innovative and intermediary architectural experience between the Tractatus and the Investigations creates new perceptual ground for comparing the works and seeing them in complementary terms that can erase any conceptual and biographical break between the young and old Wittgenstein. As Last shows, Wittgenstein’s life-long technical, aesthetic, and philosophical interests were striking and substantial, and challenge the accuracy of bifurcated depictions of his life and work.
     
    The story of the design and construction of the house is intricate. Last tells how Wittgenstein appropriated responsibility for the plans from his friend Paul Engelmann. In distinguishing Engelmann’s vision of the house from Wittgenstein’s, Last makes it clear that the former’s role was at best minimal. Indeed, Engelmann himself came to regard the house as Wittgenstein’s and saw his own plan as plainly inferior to the one Wittgenstein realized. Last goes beyond Engelmann’s and others’ assessments of the quality and originality of the house’s design to consider Wittgenstein’s contributions to the practice of architecture itself, but with limited success. If Wittgenstein’s architectural work had an innovative effect on the practice of architecture, such an historical and empirical study has yet to be written. It would entail detailed descriptions of the way Wittgenstein’s house altered architectural practices from Engelmann to the present. What Last seeks to show is that in entering into the practice of architecture, Wittgenstein learned how “to overcome the idealized solipsism of the Tractatus and to reintegrate both the subject and the practice of philosophy with the wider culture” (93). Contemporary readers of Wittgenstein will recognize the porosity of the boundaries of language-games, the fluidity of grammar, and his thoughts on the end of philosophy (as a subject rather than as a practice) in this architecturally inspired act of overcoming the closed and unlivable image of philosophy behind the Tractatus.
     
    Although the clean austerity of the house’s exterior seems to substantiate von Wright’s claim, Last takes us through the interior to show Wittgenstein’s use of entries and light, as well as the repeated and varied patterns in metal and clear and opaque glass that mark off public and private rooms. These features call to mind the indeterminacy of rules and boundaries, the remarks on continuous seeing and changing aspects, and the calls to the philosopher to “slow down” and return to the “rough ground” of language so central to what Wittgenstein thought of as the “involved journeyings” that compose the Philosophical Investigations. But the tour also includes an assembly of reminders of concerns associated with the Tractatus. Last’s reading of these works and her architect’s eye make her a learned, critical, and informative tour guide through the home’s interiors, as well as a dependable commentator on how aspects of the translation of a two dimensional design into a three-dimensional house illuminate spatial features uniting the entirety of Wittgenstein’s philosophical oeuvre. Consider, for example, her reflection on the spatial relation of the house’s central hall to the dining room: “Wittgenstein’s decision to place translucent glass on the dining room side and clear glass on the hall side,” writes Last, “distinguishes the two spaces even as it connects them.” She continues:
     

    This decision highlights the complex nature of the boundary as connector, divider, and sign by emphasizing its materiality and location in space and allowing it to present disparate faces as it is approached from opposite sides. This last aspect literally constructs Wittgenstein’s fundamental understanding of language in the Investigations as presenting distinct images when viewed from divergent points: “Language is a labyrinth of paths. You approach from one side and know your way about; you approach the same place from another side and no longer know your way about.”
     

    (99)

     
    The transcendence posed in the Tractatus expresses desire for an unencumbered view of language, and that freedom remains desirable even as the Philosophical Investigations operates on the assumption of transcendence’s impossibility. To create unencumbered views, open spaces, and easy access are all interior architectural problems tackled on the horizontal plane of a floor plan. For Wittgenstein, applying this horizontal perspective to philosophizing involves resisting the seductions of transcendence and icy perfection, eschewing claims to privileged knowledge and perception, and devising a provisional and expandable set of therapies to help the philosopher through the various entanglements encountered when moving from architectural plan to actual construction. For Last, the effect of these therapies can be seen also in Wittgenstein’s turn away from a picture of language to a series of studies on how language actually works. Where the fluidity of architectural vision leads to visual and traversable passages between spaces, in Wittgenstein’s philosophy of language this fluidity in seeing leads to “family resemblances,” an informal network of similarities that enrich concepts and connect philosophy as one space in language to the other spaces-music, art, mathematics, etc.-we associate with wider culture. Last’s study leads to an appreciation of the fragile, provisional, and dynamic character of spatiality in both the practice of architecture and in the dynamic relations between and within language-games, as described by Wittgenstein.
     
    Language is not an enclosure, for the later Wittgenstein; it is not the “house of Being,” as Heidegger posited. Rather, language is a landscape, a labyrinth, which cannot be seen as a whole: There is no Archimedean perspective available and it is in a constant process of growing and dying. No vantage within language permits a sense that the whole coheres and no boundary is solid enough to be impermeable. This melding of actual and possible in Wittgenstein’s later philosophical vision is the lasting effect of experimenting with architectural design. For any reader of the Investigations, Wittgenstein tells us, there is no single path through the landscape of language. The acts of walking and seeing are primarily creative enterprises impeded by a range of entanglements produced in the complexity of language and by the desire to rise above the uncertainty, mess, fatigue, and friction of travel by foot. For Wittgenstein, the path from architecture back into philosophy is not a linear matter of leaving one for the other. As Last argues convincingly, the path reveals heretofore unseen and unsuspected edifying relations between architecture and philosophy and their distinctive ways of seeing and thinking.
     

    Christopher C. Robinson is Assistant Professor of Political Science at Clarkson University. He has published widely on contemporary political theory. His book, Wittgenstein and Political Theory: The View From Somewhere, will be published in October 2009 by Edinburgh University Press. He is completing a book on the political implications of ecological economics.
     

  • Stupid Pleasures

    Graham Hammill (bio)
    SUNY at Buffalo
    ghammill@buffalo.edu

    Review of: Michael D. Snediker, Queer Optimism: Lyric Personhood and Other Felicitous Persuasions. Minneapolis and London: U of Minnesota P, 2008.

     

    We all know that happiness is a form of stupidity. Once The Declaration of Independence promises the pursuit of happiness as an inalienable right, it’s difficult not to think of happiness as a form of indoctrination. Shiny happy people are, first and foremost, unthinking rubes who watch reality TV, shop at outlets, vacation at Disneyworld (or, worse, Las Vegas), and generally enjoy vapid forms of cultural entertainment. Happily engaging in these activities simply proves the lack of capacity for critical reflection. Perhaps this is why academics who have dedicated their lives to criticism have such a difficult time presenting themselves as generally optimistic. Consider how often academics in the humanities convey genuinely good news as a complaint. News about receiving tenure (which rewards scholarly accomplishment with a job for life) is followed by something like, “Now I’m stuck here forever.” News about receiving a major fellowship (finally the time to do the work one really wants to do) is followed by, “Now I’m obliged to finish this book.” It’s as if we have to cast good news within a broader, pessimistic view of the world lest we appear to be happy and, therefore, stupid. Once optimism is unmasked as naïveté, it seems to produce a backlash in which, among the smart set at least, in order to prove oneself as sophisticated and subversive, one has to be generally unhappy and perhaps a little depressed.
     
    It’s this dynamic that Michael Snediker seeks to displace for queer studies. How, Snediker asks, can queer theory conceive of optimism as a useful and interesting site for critical investigation? How can one develop a queer understanding of optimism that doesn’t simply reinforce its opposite, pessimism? One way into these questions might be to explore the centrality of camp in queer culture, but Snediker doesn’t go that route. More ambitiously, his study uses optimism as a conceptual wedge to overturn queer theory as we currently know it. Snediker begins Queer Optimism with the astute observation that optimism is a centrally unthought term among the writing of the most well-known queer theorists of the past twenty or so years. Since its invention in the late 1980s and early 1990s, queer theory (and here, Snediker means theoretical work by Judith Butler, Leo Bersani, Eve Sedgwick, and Lee Edelman) has inadvertently produced a situation in which queer sexuality is equated with melancholia, self-shattering, shame, or the death drive-all negative, destructive, and, for Snediker, essential pessimistic concepts that foreclose analytic engagement with positive affect. Engaging with optimism reverses that situation by putting the question of queer identity back on the table. The generative movement in early queer studies was the critique of identity as the site of psychological and political normalization. Important as that critique was in the early 1990s for reimagining political agency, it also tended to idealize the destabilization of identity and the affirmation of incoherency in oneself. As Snediker puts it,
     

    Dissatisfaction with a given regime of coherence [e.g. heteronormativity] might sponsor a critical commitment to dismantling coherence tout court. Such a dissatisfaction, however, might likewise productively sponsor a reconfiguration of coherence-the cultivation of a vocabulary of coherence that more precisely does justice to the ways in which coherence isn’t expansively, unilaterally destructive, reductive, or ideological.
     

    (25-6)

     

    Snediker uses queer optimism in order to mobilize the second possibility against the first. At his most ambitious, Snediker asks how a critical investigation of optimism might lead to a new understanding of some fundamental categories: queer desire, queer ontology, and queer representation.

     
    So what exactly is queer optimism? This isn’t an easy question to answer, and not just because queering concepts tends to make them difficult to pin down. In his discussions of what queer optimism might be, Snediker is much clearer about what it’s not rather than about what it is. Snediker is very careful not to equate queer optimism with the kind of hopefulness that Lee Edelman aggressively dismantles in No Future: Queer Theory and the Death Drive. Edelman argues that a liberal politics based on hope for the future carries with it an investment in the fantasy of the innocent child. Because of this, liberalism sets in motion an ideological circuit that idealizes reproductive heterosexuality while excluding non-reproductive, queer subjectivities. In response, Edelman argues quite forcefully that queer politics must embrace a kind of negativity that refuses this investment in the future and, in so doing, breaks with this ideological circuit. For Snediker, queer optimism isn’t hopeful because it’s not futural. It’s not at all attached to the kind of heteronormative temporality that Edelman describes. (And, I should add in passing, Snediker gives an excellent critical account of the aggressive edge of Edelman’s argument, which he reads as symptomatic of a demand issuing from the super-ego.)
     
    To explain what a non-hopeful optimism looks like, Snediker initially turns to Leibniz-or, better, to Deleuze’s reading of Leibniz’s claim that we live in the best of all possible worlds. It’s hard to get more optimistic than that. But, as Deleuze explains it, Leibniz’s claim needs to be understood against the backdrop of the Thirty Years’ War and the effect of war on political philosophy. The baroque world is a world in crisis, a world that has to be rebuilt “amidst the ruins of the Platonic Good.” For Deleuze, and for Snediker following him, Leibniz offers a model of optimism that suspends hope for a better world because it affirms the current world as it is. “If this world exists, it is not because it is the best, but because it is rather the inverse; it is the best because it is, because it is the one that is” (Fold 68). Optimism is something like the optimal affirmation of the goodness of the world in its present state, even if that present state doesn’t actually look all that great.
     
    Leibniz’s version of optimism hinges on faith, belief in the goodness of God. Understandably uncomfortable with reproducing a theological version of optimism, Snediker queers it by recasting Leibniz’s version of optimism through object-relations psychoanalysis. Snediker turns to Winnicott’s essay, “The Use of an Object and Relating Through Identifications.” Reworking Freud’s discussion of identity-formation and the death drive, Winnicott acknowledges that once the subject uses an object for purposes of mastery, the subject destroys the integrity of that object. At the same time, Winnicott argues, this destruction is not usually total. In practice the object most often survives its own destruction, not only demonstrating the limitations of omnipotency assumed by the masterful subject but also suggesting a capacity for endurance in the object itself-in spite of the ways in which the subject may have used, harmed, or damaged it. In this way, the object can become a model for optimism. The point is not that the subject affirms the object, that the subject is optimistic about the object’s survival. Rather, it’s the reverse. The endurance of the object affirms a capacity for endurance about the subject that the subject may not see or be able to anticipate. It’s this external aspect of optimism that most interests Snediker. That is, for Snediker, optimism is much less about a subjective state in which one feels happy or hopeful and more about a sense of affirmation that comes from the outside and exists alongside a sense of pain, damage, or loneliness. For Leibniz, optimism is a form of subjective affirmation based on faith. Winnicott allows Snediker to develop a de-subjectivized version of queer optimism that doesn’t idealize or glorify a process of de-subjectification but suggests instead that optimism comes from the shards of the world in crisis, shards that must be affirmed and, in the process, transformed.
     
    This provocative combination of Winnicott with Deleuze is at the heart of what I think is most interesting about Snediker’s project, which I would describe as an attempt to rethink optimism and love through two central operations: the isolation of singularity against attempts to generalize it in models of exemplarity, and the serialization of that singularity in lyric poetry. Snediker develops his claims most powerfully through literary analysis of four poets: Hart Crane, Emily Dickinson, Jack Spicer, and Elizabeth Bishop. Although Queer Optimism begins with an opening chapter that critiques Butler, Bersani, Edelman, and Sedgwick for assuming pessimistic views of queer sexuality that effectively foreclose the positive and affirmative nature of affect, the book’s most compelling claims get developed through analysis of poetry. Each of the chapters in Queer Optimism is organized around a theoretical model from queer theory that Snediker displaces through sophisticated and focused close readings. This mode of argumentation might be a turn-off to some readers who, like myself, are deeply interested in queer theory but are neither Americanists nor modernists. But Snediker handles it quite masterfully. His readings are sharp, and rarely does he lose focus on the central theoretical problems that his chapters announce. Throughout, he develops a new set of terms for thinking about queer sexuality in its intersections with poetics and literary form.
     
    One of Snediker’s most salient points (a point that deserves more attention than he gives it) is that queer isn’t best understood as deviation from social norms but rather as a kind of singularity that emerges within the Winnicottian space of object relations. In this account, queer is no longer opposed to norms but becomes a moment of optimistic affirmation through which new sets of norms can be created. Snediker develops his claims for singularity through chapters on Crane and Dickinson. Chapter One of Queer Optimism focuses on the network of smiles in Crane’s poetry, reading the figure of the smile not as a sign of ironic suffering but as a singular affirmation of joy produced through its repetition. Snediker develops this thesis against the backdrop of Bersani’s writings on self-shattering, showing how the smile survives as a poetic artifact that endures beyond Crane’s suicide. Like the object in object relations that survives beyond the subject’s attempt to destroy it, Crane’s smiles are involved in a poetics that sustains “relationality” beyond all forms of anti-relational thinking (77). Chapter Two reads the figure of the smile in Dickinson in order to show how her repeated emphasis on pain highlights the surprising singularity of joy-surprising for Dickinson and, perhaps, for her readers as well. Instead of reading Dickinson’s emphasis on pain as a queer performance of masochism, Snediker reads the repetition of pain as Dickinson’s attempt to isolate and understand the feeling of joy as a positive affect that is, for Dickinson herself, only minimally understandable.
     
    The other salient point that Snediker insists on is that this understanding of queer is best thought through a poetic-and not a theatrical-notion of the person. In some ways, this is Queer Optimism‘s most powerful insight, one that should stand as a serious challenge to queer studies. While a theatrical notion of the person has allowed critics to show the constructedness and naturalization of norms, it also tends to assume a vision of politics and culture that is fundamentally anti-aesthetic. The revelation that norms are artificial is revelatory only to the extent that one assumes a worldview in which art and nature are firmly separated. But, as Snediker argues, a poetic notion of the person assumes that the person is first and foremost a literary artifact (a point that could be significantly elaborated through a reading of Barbara Johnson’s account in Persons and Things of personification in lyric and law). In Chapters Three and Four, Snediker focuses on Jack Spicer and Elizabeth Bishop, respectively. Especially for modern poets working against T.S. Eliot’s poetics of impersonality, the literary nature of the person becomes the basis for exploring the persistent singularity at the heart of the person through the serial nature of lyric poetry. Although Spicer explicitly espouses Eliot’s poetics of impersonality, Snediker shows that his serial poem Billy the Kid attaches singularity and repetition to the problem of the poetic person. For Bishop, this repetition is related to love. Snediker reads submerged reference to Crane in her poetry as an attempt to develop a logic of love based on “a particular form of incomplete or imperfect repetition” (191). In a sense, both Spicer and Bishop explore the inner workings of the Winnicottian space of object relations and its implications for queer identity and love through a Deleuzian sense of repetition and seriality.
     
    Queer Optimism is a book that rewards careful reading. It will no doubt be of interest to specialists in modern American poetry. But its redefinition of queer and its insistence that we rethink identity through a poetic understanding of the person make the book a major contribution to queer studies as well.
     

    Graham Hammill is Associate Professor of English at SUNY-Buffalo. He is the author of Sexuality and Form: Caravaggio, Marlowe, and Bacon (Chicago, 2000) and is completing a manuscript on sixteenth- and seventeenth-century political theology tentatively entitled Emergent Liberalism: Political Theology and the Mosaic Constitution, 1590-1674.

     

     

    Works Cited

     

    • Deleuze, Gilles. The Fold: Leibniz and the Baroque. Foreword and trans. Tom Conley. Minneapolis: U of Minnesota P, 1993.

     

  • The Special Case of Four Auschwitz Photographs

    Susan A. Crane (bio)
    University of Arizona
    scrane@email.arizona.edu

    Review of: Georges Didi-Huberman, Images in Spite of All: Four Photographs from Auschwitz. Translated by Shane B. Lillis. Chicago: U of Chicago P, 2008.

     

    Paris, 2001: an exhibition that commemorates the Nazi concentration and extermination camps of the Holocaust stirs up a vehement public debate. Georges Didi-Huberman, a critic and unconventional art historian of Jewish descent who has written on European painting and the depiction of hysteria in photography, contributes an essay to the exhibition catalog highlighting four particular photographs from the exhibit, which prompts further outrage.1 More outrage, one might wearily note, than information about the camps had caused at the time the photographs were made; but less, perhaps, than was caused when the first atrocity images of the liberated concentration camps appeared in Western newspapers and news reels in 1945. What is it about these photographs, after all these years of exposure and all our familiar outrage regarding their subject, that still prompts intense polemics?
     
    Didi-Huberman’s contributions to this debate have now been translated into English. The translation includes the original exhibition catalog essay (Part 1: “Images in Spite of All”) and Didi-Huberman’s response to critics (Part 2: “In Spite of the All Image”; originally Images malgré tout, 2003). The oddly old-fashioned, elaborately detailed table of contents will make no sense to anyone who hasn’t already read the book; this questionable editorial choice appears to indulge the author, as does the decision not to present the other side of the debate, which appeared in the pages of Les temps moderns (March-May 2001), in columns by Gérard Wajcman and Elisabeth Pagnoux. The book would have benefitted from a translation of these articles, since Didi-Huberman engages in frequent exegesis with them. Clearly, without these provocations, the second half of this volume would not exist. But the choice to translate Didi-Huberman is timely. While the debate has distinctively French concerns, the larger problematic of the (limits of) representation of the Holocaust remains a fraught subject for Western scholars, and Didi-Huberman’s polemic takes the discussion in a new and productive direction.
     
    The controversy over the Parisian exhibition focused on four famous photographs from Auschwitz, taken at the height of the Final Solution in 1944. The photographs were taken by members of the so-called “Sonderkommandos,” Jewish victims who were forced to participate in the genocide of their own people by removing the Nazis’ victims from the gas chambers and destroying the corpses through fire or mass burial (sometimes, in response to wartime stringencies, both). The identity of the photographer/s is uncertain; surviving records left by members of the Sonderkommandos indicate the names of those involved in making the images. These records also show that they were able to smuggle the camera into the camp and the film out again, in a toothpaste tube, with the assistance of the Polish Underground (10-11). These are the only surviving images that show any aspect of the gas chamber operations, and because they represent an act of resistance by victims of genocide, they have retained an exceptional status among Holocaust sources. However, their exhibition in Paris was considered by some to be a provocation-either to Holocaust deniers, who would challenge the veracity of these admittedly poor images, or to more sophisticated viewers who expressed affinities with Claude Lanzmann, the filmmaker, whose remarkable documentary “Shoah” (1985) proscribed the use of archival images in favor of eyewitness testimony and film shot at the scenes of the crimes in the 1970s-80s. Holocaust deniers, of course, have never depended on actual evidence to promulgate their delusions. On ethical and aesthetic grounds, the second set of criticisms is more substantial and reflects a peculiarly French concern with a kind of Bilderverbot (prohibition of religious images). Wajcman accused Didi-Huberman of fetishizing these images in a perversely Christian fashion (“the passion of the image” 52). The exceptional status of the Sonderkommando photographs thus opens up debate about the memory and visual representation of the Holocaust in a nation which has not yet come to terms with its “Vichy syndrome,” to apply Henry Rousso’s term.2
     
    Exceptional, unique, special: these are the English equivalents of the German prefix sonder. In the Nazis’ perversion of the German language, Sonder-nouns became hallmark euphemisms: Sonderbehandlung (special treatment) meant murder; Sonderkommandos (special operatives or units) meant surviving victims who had to perform inhumanly gruesome tasks, or die. Didi-Huberman refers to them as “living beings in spite of all, very provisional survivors,” whose extinction was always intended (106). The Sonderkommandos were regularly purged; the Nazis did not intend them to survive to offer their testimony. Victims such as Zalmen Gradowski, who could barely recognize themselves as human beings alive in the camps, existed as if perpetually “on the threshold of the tomb”-their own, their families’, their people’s (163). These uniquely suffering individuals were uniquely placed to witness genocide; they were, to coin a term, Sonderzeugen (special witnesses, all male). Given their continued presence at their intended extermination, their witnessing “in spite of all” renders their verbal and visual testimony invaluable. Didi-Huberman argues in favor of the exhibition of precisely these photographs because they depict the perspective of victims who were deliberately deprived of everything fundamental to human existence and yet, “in spite of all,” managed to resist deliberately, in the face of almost insurmountable obstacles, in order to provide testimony to the crimes against them and their people. For all these reasons, Didi-Huberman argues, these images not only should but must be viewed.
     
    Most provocatively, for his opponents, Didi-Huberman opens his essay with the assertion, “In order to know, we must imagine for ourselves” (3). The idea that anything about the Holocaust-surely one of the best documented and most thoroughly researched crimes in history-and particularly about the experience of the Sonderkommandos needs to be “imagined” caused an uproar of misunderstanding. Those supporting Lanzmann’s formal proscription read Didi-Huberman to be invoking an impossible kind of empathetic evidence, indeed an irresponsible form of subjective speculation. But Didi-Huberman offers a more specific and more useful understanding of the nature of this particular photographic evidence. He writes, “An image without imagination is quite simply an image that one didn’t spend the time to work on” (116). Work is required of ethically- and historically-minded viewers. He reminds us of the Nazi intention to document the genocide, which produced a massive amount of damning evidence even after they changed their minds in the midst of the war and began to destroy it. Against this intention to document successful destruction, he places the Sonderkommandos’ heroic efforts to document criminal destruction as successful resistance. Recalling the words of Sonderkommando survivor Filip Mueller (one of the most haunting witnesses in “Shoah”), Didi-Huberman argues that just as the surviving victim claims that the impossible was real and that “one must imagine” or one cannot conceive of Auschwitz, so too must we challenge the limits of the visible and our understanding. In German, this would be rendered as vorstellen: “to imagine” is “to place before oneself” what is otherwise unknowable; thus imagining is an act that bears with it an ethical imperative, because knowledge has been gained and we are therefore responsible for it. As Didi-Huberman argues, “To imagine in spite of all, which calls for a difficult ethics of the image: neither the invisible par excellence (the laziness of the aesthete), nor the icon of horror (the laziness of the believer), nor the mere document (the laziness of the learned). . . . I would say that here the image is the eye of history: its tenacious function of making visible” (39).
     
    And since even the Nazis appear to have refrained from filming or photographing the actual operations of the gas chambers (though of course this evidence may have been destroyed), these images are the most proximate available. Critics have worried that the exhibition of these four images might inspire deniers or draw only perversely attracted viewers who wished to be titillated by horror. Attempting to “imagine” oneself in the midst of this most inhumane of human crimes, they argued, created an ethical risk of either dishonoring the experience and memory of the victims, or placing the viewer in the untenable position of the perpetrators. They also feared that these partially legible images depicting only a subset of the destruction process would come to be seen as representative of the entire genocide, thus reducing the scope, scale and extension of the horror to a few randomly captured moments. But the critics were, according to Didi-Huberman, creating an impossibly high bar for admissible evidence. Since there is no single image which can depict the entire Holocaust in its ghastly diversity, they refused to view any other actual images of the genocide, and turned Lanzmann’s ethical, situational decision into a dogmatic one. Critics objecting to the lack of representativeness in these images fall into a reductive trap: “Wajcman sought the all image, the unique and integral image of the Shoah; having found only not-all images, he dismisses all images” (124). Didi-Huberman plays with the notion of comprehensiveness while critiquing the possibly fetishistic delectation of iconic images-an ethical risk particularly in the case of these “special” photographs.
     
    In the context of this very French debate, Didi-Huberman insists on the necessity of viewing these images, which had so improbably been created and more improbably survived: “They are infinitely precious to us today. They are demanding too, for they require archeological work. We must dig again in their ever so fragile temporality” (47). Here he adds a significant dimension to the ethics of historical memory: mere viewing is insufficient. It is not enough to look at the exhibit, in order to “never forget.” These images represent a “flash,” in Walter Benjamin’s terms: they are a rip, or a “rend” to use Didi-Huberman’s term, in the flux of time (47). Benjamin, in his “Theses on the Philosophy of History,” sees such moments as dangerous and significant; in these moments, history is recognized as a process rather than a static or given “past.” The second half of Images in Spite of All, written in response to the storm of criticism (rather like Benjamin’s famous “angel of history,” blown backwards into the future yet still looking at the past), articulates the meaning of “imagining” in response to the inspirational “rend” in time. In a certain sense, all historical understanding requires an intuitive leap into the abstraction of historical distance; R.G. Collingwood on “historical re-enactment” or Wilhelm Dilthey on subjectivity would be useful here, but Didi-Huberman speaks from within a poststructuralist, primarily Lacanian and Foucauldian critical framework. This intuitive leap is not easy; it requires imaginative “work,” which must not be confused with irresponsibly assuming that one can “feel” or “identify with” the trauma that others felt or experienced.
     
    In order to imaginatively “see” the four photographs and attempt the archaeological work, Didi-Huberman argues, first of all they must be seen together rather than separately. They were taken in a sequence and they were taken under duress, which is more vivid when they are seen together. Reproductions of the images often crop them so as to highlight the figures, presumably because this is seen as the most useful documentary element, showing the victims themselves; they also realign the image so that the figures appear more “natural,” standing straight up. The photos have also been retouched to outline distinct female figures (35-6). While this ostensibly retrieves the possibility of some individual identity, these retouched images also tend to make the women look young and attractive in a disturbingly sexualized manner (it’s impossible to know the actual ages or names of these female victims, and the sexualizing of the images suggests the Nazis’ gaze rather than the photographer’s). Didi-Huberman highlights the way in which cropping out the original blackness at the edges of the images dislocates the photos from their original perspective and deletes information about their authorship: the fact that the clandestine photographer had to hide in the crematorium building and shoot the images through a doorway or window, which contributed to their blurriness and distorted angles (34-6).
     
    Using the images as they were made, in a series, offers the possibility of montage. For Didi-Huberman, montage is a technique that “opens up our apprehension of history and makes it more complex. . . . it gives us access to the singularities of time and hence to its essential multiplicity” (121). No single image, however iconic, comprehends the diversity of a flow of single instants that is the human experience of reality. The films of Jean-Luc Goddard and Alain Renais suggest to Didi-Huberman a mode of expressing that diversity through motion in time (discussed at length in the last two sections). A montage of text and images can contribute to the same imaginative work in historical inquiry. Just as for the filmmaker there is no one image, but rather images working together as film, for the historically sensitive viewer no photograph should stand alone or be assumed to speak for itself. Montage is thus potentially a new ideal form for illustrated historical narrative, and histories derived from visual evidence. Didi-Huberman argues that “montage intensifies the image and gives the visual experience a power that our visible certainties or habits have the effect of pacifying, or veiling” (136), drawing an allusion to Alfred Hitchcock’s thriller Notorious, where fear is instilled via distillation (the audience knows that Cary Grant is uncovering the secrets hidden behind vintages of wine, but afraid that he will be caught in the act). Here Didi-Huberman is also alluding to an argument developed throughout his oeuvre, about a distinction between the visible and the visual, the realm of the apparent and the realm of the transcendent. The visual will only sometimes, through art, appear in traces: “With the visible, we are of course in the realm of what manifests itself. The visual, by contrast, would designate that irregular net of event-symptoms that reaches the visible as so many gleams or radiances, ‘traces of articulation,’ as so many indices…. Indices of what? Of something-a work, a memory in process-that has nowhere been fully described, attested, or set down in an archive, because its signifying ‘material’ is first of all the image” (Confronting 31). In his Confronting Images (2005), Didi-Huberman goes into greater detail about the way a Renaissance painter such as Fra Angelico could deploy “a whack of white” to signify divine miracles such as the Annunciation (24). Didi-Huberman’s attention to figuring the visual iconically, a distinctive Christian art practice, opened him to criticism once the images under scrutiny were Holocaust photographs. If the montage produced a holy icon, the critics argued, Didi-Huberman’s ethical quest to honor the memory of the victims was a failure. No “rend,” no differend, no trace, no “whack” nor any visual transcendence was to be received through the document of suffering, because none was offered to the victims.
     
    These photographs haunt us, which is one way of saying that we can’t seem to see them or talk about them sufficiently to exorcise the evil that travels with them. Perhaps the sonder attribute of these four photographs can be revised, not as a statement of the limits of representation, but as an exception that provokes new rules. They remain contentious because of the ethical stakes involved in acknowledging the humanity of the crime they record. Didi-Huberman reminds us that these four exceptional images survive “in spite of all,” and as such demand imaginative work in order to be received and recorded within memory “in spite of all.”
     

    Susan A. Crane is Associate Professor of Modern European History at the University of Arizona. She has published on the history of museums and collecting, historical subjectivity, and collective memory. Her most recent article considers the ways atrocity photography is used by historians as evidence: “Choosing Not To Look: Representation, Repatriation and Holocaust Atrocity Photography,” in History & Theory (October 2008).

     

     

    Footnotes

     
    1. Georges Didi-Huberman’s essay first appeared in Clément Chéroux, ed., Mémoire des camps: Photographies des camps de concentration et d’extermination Nazis (1933-1999) (Paris: Marval, 2001), and was reprinted in Didi-Huberman, Images malgré tout (Paris: Les Editions de Minuit, 2003). Page references are to Lillis’s translation.

     

     
    2. See also Rousso, The Haunting Past: History, Memory, and Justice in Contemporary France (Philadelphia: University of Pennsylvania Press, 2002) and Peter Carrier, Holocaust Monuments and National Memory Cultures in France and Germany since 1989 (New York: Berghahn Books, 2005).

     

     

     

    Works Cited

     

    • Didi-Huberman, Georges. Confronting Images: Questioning the Ends of a Certain History of Art. Trans. John Goodman. University Park, Pa: Pennsylvania State UP, 2005.
    • Rousso, Henry. The Vichy Syndrome: History and Memory in France since 1944. Cambridge, Mass.: Harvard UP, 1991.

     

     
  • Kenneth Goldsmith’s American Trilogy

    Darren Wershler (bio)
    Wilfrid Laurier University

    Review of: Kenneth Goldsmith, The Weather. Los Angeles; Make Now, 2005, Goldsmith, Traffic. Los Angeles: Make Now, 2007, and Goldsmith, Sports. Los Angeles: Make Now, 2008.

     

    I can’t help it: trilogies are nerd Kryptonite. My childhood library was chock-full of science fiction and heroic fantasy books organized into epic troikas, all of which made grandiose claims about their ability to forever change my sense of literary genre, if not of consensual reality itself. As a result, any three books that self-consciously present themselves as a trilogy have for me an aura of importance about them, one that requires further interrogation. Kenneth Goldsmith’s American Trilogy-The Weather, Traffic, and Sports-is no exception.
     
    In the first half of the last century, Ezra Pound claimed in his ABC of Reading that “artists are the antennae of the race” (73). In a global digital economy, though, both wireless and networked signals come at such speed and quantity that a set of rabbit ears will no longer suffice. In 1980, Canadian poet Christopher Dewdney updated Pound’s metaphor in “Parasite Maintenance,” comparing contemporary artistic sensibility to the satellite dish. From such a perspective, artists are devices for the accumulation and concentration of cultural data, cool and dispassionate. The quality of the objects and texts that they produce depends in part on what “Parasite Maintenance” refers to as “the will to select” (77). The individual’s ability to receive and process the ambient signals that constantly bombard all of us helps constitute contemporary criteria for a successful artistic career.
     
    As Craig Dworkin notes, self-declared “Word Processor” Kenneth Goldsmith’s ongoing personal project-which Goldsmith has successively dubbed “nutritionless writing,” “uncreative writing,” and “conceptual writing”-falls squarely into this tradition of poetry as a sort of technologized, high-volume appropriation (34). This is especially true of recent works such as the massive, audacious Day (Figures, 2003): a volume that transcribes an entire issue of The New York Times and presents it in book form. In this context, even Goldsmith’s curation of the decade-old UbuWeb <www.ubu.com>, a large digital archive of avant-garde sound recordings, concrete poetry, video, outsider art and related critical materials, is arguably part of the practice of uncreativity-perhaps even Goldsmith’s greatest work.
     
    Goldsmith normally proceeds by identifying a neglected (because mundane, or, in Goldsmith’s terms, “boring”) repository of cultural discourse, such as an average edition of The New York Times (Day), or the names of artists and albums from his extensive LP collection (6799). He then transcribes the contents of that repository meticulously, reconfigures the resulting digital manuscript as a book, and attaches his name to it. Though such projects have been common in the art world since the heyday of Conceptualism, they are relatively rare in what Charles Bernstein refers to as “official verse culture” (246), where even Jackson Mac Low and John Cage (two of Goldsmith’s muses) occupy an uneasy position. By porting an established practice for aesthetic production from one field of cultural endeavour (gallery art) to another (poetry), Goldsmith has simultaneously constructed himself a career and staged an intervention that has changed the stakes of contemporary poetics.
     
    As a kind of briefer epic, The Weather, Traffic, and Sports serve collectively as a formal denouement to Day, because they codify and professionalize the practice I’ve just described. The similar size, shape, and design of these books suggests what even a cursory read will confirm, that the same basic dialectical move is at work in all of them: a reframing of the “everyday” that defamiliarizes it and allows us to return to mundane moments in order to reexamine them in a new light. As such, The American Trilogy succeeds admirably, but also suggests that there are limits to the artistic shelf-life of the “uncreative” moment (more on this notion shortly). These books are united formally by more than their explorations into a series of neglected but omnipresent cultural forms (the weather report, the traffic report, the sportscast). They all have a specific relationship to a specific medium: the radio-and, for the last two books in the trilogy, to digitally streamed radio broadcasts in particular. It is relatively easy to establish a typology of Goldsmith’s work in relation to the particular medium he happens to be transcribing at the moment (and even to predict where he’ll go next by considering the gaps in such a typology-film, video, and television being the most obvious omissions), yet literary studies often overlook material media. As a result, Goldsmith’s long career as a DJ on New Jersey freeform radio station WFMU is an underexamined part of his practice as an artist.
     
    The Weather, Traffic, and Sports are all profoundly aural texts, representative of particular patterns of listening to text and transcribing it. They are exercises in taking dictation, which, as Jacques Derrida and Avital Ronell (in Dictations) have argued, is always in part about a kind of negation of the transcribing self, but is also always a reassertion of the amanuensis as an author in her or his own right. Paradoxically, Goldsmith’s considerable personal reputation as an “original” author is rooted in his ability to (for the most part) cleanse his transcribed texts of the most obvious signs of his own presence and, as Ron Silliman has noted in a blog post on “the Cult of Kenny,” in Goldsmith’s ability to choose which “boring” moments to transcribe (Silliman).
     
    The Weather (2005), the first of the three books, was the result of a process that could have been executed at any point over the last half century. Beginning with the first day of Fall 2002 and continuing through the last day of Summer 2003, Goldsmith used a cassette tape recorder to transcribe New York City weather reports from the US’s oldest all-news radio station, 1010 WINS. In The Weather, “uh,” “er,” and “eh,” as in “We have, uh, cloudy skies, uh” (5), serve to mark the fidelity of Goldsmith’s transcription process. Even if these signs are always approximations, they suggest that every noise, hesitation, and unintentional vocalization in the recordings finds its way into the typescript. Of course, this is a fiction that marks both the limits of what the literary form can convey and the impossibility of going back to verify the transcription itself. Goldsmith’s earlier books, especially Fidget and Soliloquy, mobilize similar tropes to mark both what’s gained and what’s lost in the space between tape and print.
     
    True to Silliman’s hypothesis, though, these are not just any weather reports for downtown Manhattan. Beginning in the section titled “Spring,” they also include the weather reported for downtown Baghdad during Operation Desert Storm-the US invasion of Iraq. At the moment when the announcer begins the sentence, “As for Middle East weather, it continues to be favorable for military operations” (39), the politics of the mundane become visible. This is a turning point in the book; by the next page, the announcer is referring to the “battlefield forecast” as a regular broadcast feature (40). Here are shades of Marshall McLuhan’s arguments about the radio as a medium that, without requiring much from its listeners, sutures the nation together in times of war (McLuhan 260). The Weather suggests that even radio weather reports are not innocent. After the battlefield forecasts begin, the frequent mention of RADAR, for example, points to the origins of its instruments in the military-industrial complex. That the Baghdad weather reports eventually trickle down to nothing and the war continues is, in the end, more disturbing than their abrupt appearance. The result is a kind of pathetic fallacy that connects Goldsmith to the tradition of the American Transcendentalists and likely to Romanticism itself: as much as anything else, the weather in The Weather serves as an index of the national mood.
     
    As a coda, it’s worth noting that “Spring” is marked as the valuable section of The Weather in another way as well. It is an extremely limited edition of signed and numbered artist’s books from Didymus Press (2005), with wood engravings by James Siena. The alchemy of letterpress can turn even the most mundane discourse into a rarefied commodity.
     
    The cover text of Traffic cites Godard’s Week-End (1967) as a major influence. This is one of many careful positionings of Goldsmith’s work in the context of the 1960s art world. The epigraph, from an interview with Andy Warhol about his beginning the “Death” series after overhearing a traffic announcer cite the projected staggering highway death tolls for a coming holiday weekend, is another. These moments of name-checking indicate that by the time the books in The American Trilogy start to appear, the inspiration for Goldsmith’s overall aesthetics had shifted from the investigations of Cage and Mac Low into boredom and the “found” poetry of Bern Porter to Andy Warhol and 60s pop’s mechanical reproductions of popular culture (I’ll be Your Mirror: The Selected Andy Warhol Interviews, which Goldsmith edited, was published in 2004; Andy Warhol: Giant Size, a Phaidon coffee table book to which Goldsmith contributed several essays, appeared in 2006).
     
    Like The Weather, Traffic is a book that is ultimately about circulation and global-cultural flows. In terms of the emerging critical interest in circulation (after the recent work of scholars such as Benjamin Lee and Edward Li Puma, Dilip Gaonkar and Elizabeth Povinelli) this book is timely. Goldsmith’s work is about nothing if not the circulation of cultural forms, bringing tropes from 60s visual art into the realm of poetry in ways that it had not previously been, deforming and transfiguring it in the process. As with its precursor, Traffic consists of text transcribed from the radio station 1010 WINS, but there is an important difference in terms of its production: Goldsmith sourced the text in Traffic from a digital stream rather than from an audiotape. Again, there are precedents in Goldsmith’s earlier work for the transcription of large swaths of digital discourse, notably No. 111 2.7.93-10.20.96, which consists largely of text copied from Usenet newsgroups between 1993 and 1996 according to their adherence to an “Ә” (schwa) rhyme scheme, then arranged alphabetically and syllabically. Here, the material is audio, not text, but it is important to note that Goldsmith was and remains an innovator in terms of the use of digital discourse in poetry.
     
    As with The Weather, Goldsmith’s connection to the tradition of American letters in Traffic is stronger than might initially appear. Like the previous book, and in keeping with much of Goldsmith’s output since the art project “Broken New York”, Traffic is a psychogeographic exploration of a key aspect of New York City. The concern with highways and traffic raises inevitable comparisons with the American tradition of writing about the road, even if the text that, say, Kerouac transcribed was considerably more inchoate.
     
    Sports, the final volume of the trilogy, is the most ambiguous of the three. Is Goldsmith’s kind of writing a sort of athletic event, or does it attempt to lay bare the machismo of the Great American Pastime as an accountant’s recital of numbers, statistics, and trivia? The book is a complete radio transcription of the longest 9-inning Major League Baseball game on record (New York Yankees vs. Boston Red Sox, August 2006), and thus not boring or mundane at all. Brian Kim Stefans has observed that, counter to Goldsmith’s claim that he doesn’t have a readership because his books are unreadable, this is actually quite a gripping text. Like Traffic, Sports was transcribed from digital audio, more precisely from the WFAN broadcast of the game on the YES (Yankees radio) Network. Goldsmith’s original idea was to transcribe the game as a broadcast from WEEI, a Boston station, and to publish the two versions of the game as a mirror-text, but he could not locate a source for the Boston transmission. As the old cliché goes, history is written by the winners.
     
    A well-developed mythology has developed about Goldsmith’s absolute refusal to alter his source material in any way. The cover text of Sports invokes Goldsmith’s “exact parsing of language,” but the idiosyncrasies of transcription and copy editing are all over the book. For example, p. 117 presents “baked lays” for “Baked Lays.” And how are we to read “$39.95 per month” (43)? Did the announcer say “thirty-nine ninety-five per month” or “thirty-nine dollars and ninety-five cents per month,” or something else entirely? Whether Goldsmith is concerned with or even capable of “exact parsing,” part of what makes these texts intriguing is that they demonstrate over and over again the slippage that is part and parcel of every instance of signification.
     
    As media history scholar Susan J. Douglas has described, many early radio “broadcasts” were actually recreations from textual notes (201, 210 and passim). Thus, this book’s aesthetic move is already part of a long tradition; it’s easy to imagine someone using this text as a performance score. Like Goldsmith’s No. 111 2.7.93-10.20.96 (one of the few print samples of the kind of text that was typical of the pre-Web Internet), Sports is a valuable historical document, because it includes all ads and other information normally cut out of game transcriptions.
     
    In the cheeky tradition of much appropriation art (e.g. Emergency Broadcast Network’s 1992 classic Commercial Entertainment Product), Sports begins with the reproduction of the full copyright statement from the New York Yankees, explicitly forbidding reproduction or transmission in any form. Goldsmith sent copies of this book to as many people as he could identify in the Yankee organization in an attempt to provoke them, but nothing happened. Goldsmith had a similar experience when he approached the Warhol estate to secure the necessary permissions to reprint Warhol’s interviews. They laughed and told him that for all they cared, he could take the words; the multimillion dollar branding deals in which media juggernauts like the Warhol estate and the Yankees are constantly involved are in the realm of images and branding, not script. Stakes are low in poetry.
     
    The Weather, Traffic, and Sports together mark an ending to the “uncreative” or “boring” phase of Goldsmith’s larger project. Goldsmith has already remarked on several occasions that his next book, whose working title is Capital, will be a spiritual sequel to Walter Benjamin’s Arcades Project, focusing on New York in the 20th century rather than Paris in the 19th. In what appears to be a move away from the refusal to explicitly edit his source material, Goldsmith insists that in Capital, “all the lines are zingers.” This reiterates earlier moments in Goldsmith’s oeuvre (particularly No. 111 2.7.93-10.20.96) as much as it does something new.
     
    Goldsmith has always been a movement of one. His work will inevitably spark imitators as various innovative writing practices did before it, but there is a unique trajectory here-what Deleuze & Guattari call a “line of flight” constituted by nothing so much as the avoidance of what others have done before, and the careful resuscitation and poaching of moments of potential betrayed by the actual events of history.
     

    Darren Wershler is the author or co-author of ten books, most recently The Iron Whim: A Fragmented History of Typewriting (McClelland & Stewart, Cornell UP), and apostrophe (ECW), with Bill Kennedy. Darren is an Assistant Professor of Communication Studies at Wilfrid Laurier University, part of the faculty at the CFC Media Lab TELUS Interactive Art & Entertainment Program, and a Research Affiliate of the Ip Osgoode Intellectual Property Law & Technology Program.
     

    Works Cited

     

    • Bernstein, Charles. “The Academy in Peril: William Carlos Williams Meets the MLA.” Content’s Dream: Essays 1975-1984. Los Angeles: Sun & Moon Press, 1986. 244-251.
    • Dewdney, Christopher. “Parasite Maintenance.” Alter Sublime. Toronto: Coach House Press, 1980. 73-92.
    • Douglas, Susan J. Listening in: Radio and American Imagination. Minneapolis: U of Minnesota P, 2004.
    • Dworkin, Craig. “The Imaginary Solution.” Contemporary Literature 48.1: 29-60.
    • [Project MUSE]
    • McLuhan, Marshall. Understanding Media: The Extensions of Man. New York: McGraw-Hill, 1964.
    • Pound, Ezra. ABC of Reading. New York: New Directions, 1960.
    • Ronell, Avital. Dictations: On Haunted Writing. Lincoln: Nebraska UP, 1993.
    • Silliman, Ron. “Silliman’s Blog: A weblog focused on contemporary poetry and poetics.” 27 Feb. 2006. 21 Feb. 2009 <http://ronsilliman.blogspot.com/2006/02/what-does-it-mean-for-work-of-art-to.html>.

     

  • Watchmen Meets The Aristocrats

    Stuart Moulthrop (bio)
    University of Baltimore
    samoulthrop@ubmail.ubalt.edu

     

    This essay reveals key plot details of the graphic novel Watchmen and the film based upon it.

     

    On March 6, 2009, Warner Brothers released a motion picture based on Alan Moore and Dave Gibbons’s graphic novel, Watchmen, directed by Zack Snyder and written for the screen by David Hayter and Alex Tse. The history of this project is long and contentious. Moore has insisted the work can never be filmed successfully. According to legend, when the director Terry Gilliam planned an earlier attempt, Moore offered one word of advice: don’t.1 Several months before the release of the Snyder version, Moore declared, “I am spitting venom all over it,” and added a “magical curse” against the enterprise (Boucher).
     
    Perhaps Moore’s curse lacked sufficient throw-weight to reach California; or it could be that even the cleverest wizard cannot thwart the Sauronic power of Warner Brothers, at least not without a posse. The film at this writing seems on track for profitability, primarily through strong response from the comic’s dedicated fan community (Thrill). So another effects-heavy, green-screened, $200 million epic goes into the ledgers, vindicating (or flouting) bullish (or bearish) views about the box office in hard times. Why should we care, old fan-boys who have always been watching the Watchmen?
     
    On first inspection, Snyder’s film seems mainly a technical achievement, remarkable for its frame-to-panel fidelity, but perhaps not deeply engaged with the best virtues of the original, such as its notoriously non-linear narrative and its relentless interrogation of all media, including its own. Is the Watchmen movie just another Inevitable Comics Conversion, part of a cinematic tulip craze that must inevitably bring us Superbaby, or Submariner vs. Pirates of the Caribbean? On the other hand, could there be something more substantial at stake in what is, after all, a careful attempt to translate a notably difficult work into a powerful, rapidly evolving medium?
     
    In fact, Snyder’s film does not belong among the hothouse flowers, and ought to be considered as much for its significant departures from Moore and Gibbons as for its uncanny ability to translate their conception to the IMAX Experience. We should take the film seriously, if only because, in the mortal words of the Comedian, “It’s all a joke.” In fact, a particular joke comes to mind.
     

    (1) Check out this act!

     
    The joke to which the Comedian refers (though not yet the one of which I speak) is the central crime in Moore and Gibbons’ graphic novel: a massively destructive prank involving teleportation, a giant artificial organism, and psychic fallout designed to induce post-traumatic nightmares. (As will be apparent, the jokes under discussion here are not strictly speaking funny.) This horrible trick provides a gravitational center for the constellation of doublings, pratfalls, taunts, and twisted recognitions that illuminate the panels of Watchmen. In most if not all these instances, the operative trope is savage irony, as in the bloodstained smiley button with which the comic opens, resonating against the psychotic anti-hero Rorschach’s claim to know the “true face” of the city. Echoes and variations ripple through succeeding pages in passing references to faces, smiles, and bloodstains. At its most ambitious, this trope gives us the memorable moment in the Martian crater Galle, where the disintegration of Dr. Manhattan’s clockwork flying machine produces a planet-scale model of the stained icon, laid out as the point-of-view zooms steadily up from the planet, though unperceived by the figures who occupy the scene (Moore and Gibbons, chapter IX, pages 26-28).2
     
    These juxtapositions and cross-cuttings, and the deep logic of double meaning to which they answer, evolve naturally from Moore’s basic approach to comics art, which he has described as a particular design idiom, or “under-language”:
     

    What it comes down to in comics is that you have complete control of both the verbal track and the image track, which you don’t have in any other medium, including film. So a lot of effects are possible which simply cannot be achieved anywhere else. You control the words and the pictures -and more importantly -you control the interplay between those two elements in a way which not even film can achieve. There’s a sort of “under-language” at work there, that is neither the “visuals” nor the “verbals,” but a unique effect caused by a combination of the two.
     

     

    According to Moore, comics afford unmatched opportunities both for “interplay” and other sorts of play, especially puns, doublings, echoes, and other strategies for overloading the signifier. The fifth chapter of Watchmen, for instance, represents a graphic palindrome, in which the number and placement of panels on the first page represents a mirror reversal of those on the last, the second reversing the penultimate, and so forth. The centerfold spread in this remarkable design, the two innermost pages, presents an X or chiasmus (or perhaps two mirrored Vs), a figure that simultaneously incites and frustrates interpretation.3 As Moore says, this type of design language seems unique to comics. Just try anything like it at 24 frames per second.

     
    Yet that is, more or less, what Zack Snyder and company have attempted, and their remarkable feat of cinematic chutzpah sets up the dark joke to which we are coming. Despite the reputation Snyder has earned for textual fidelity from his previous film, 300, Moore remained hostile to the Watchmen project. Asked for comment a few months before its release, he offered this view of the relationship between comics and the movie business:
     

    There are three or four companies now that exist for the sole purpose of creating not comics, but storyboards for films. It may be true that the only reason the comic book industry now exists is for this purpose, to create characters for movies, board games and other types of merchandise. Comics are just a sort of pumpkin patch growing franchises that might be profitable for the ailing movie industry.
     

    (Boucher)

     

    Those who have tuned their receivers to the resonance frequency of irony may need to drop the gain a bit, because Moore’s observation pins the needle in the red. It is hard to imagine a twist of fate quite so pure, intense, and nasty. If Moore is right (and the point seems at least plausible), the relationship between film studios and comics publishers has become more than usually corrupt. Leading publishers no longer care about comics in and of themselves, that is, as explorations of the under-language, but only as storyboards, the genetic material of films and other franchise commodities. Yet here, among the stack of stock-keeping units, we have a movie called Watchmen, a likely commercial success, and creditable on a technical level as well. Its general design and visual texture are remarkably faithful to the graphic novel. Time and again, key panels from the comic are reproduced with apparently obsessive precision. Overall, the outcome could have been much worse (see League of Extraordinary Gentlemen, or better yet, don’t).

     
    It would seem to follow, then, that Watchmen is one of the most successful storyboards in cinematic history. The man who curses Hollywood has, entirely against his will, produced something of great value to his adversaries. This is, to one way of looking, simply our old friend the political economy of the sign: same as it ever was, infinitely capable of subsuming any impulse to critical distance, or difference. Or, if we retain some capacity for resentment, we might describe the situation as an irony worthy of Alan Moore. To find a more egregious case, we would have to turn to truly historic instances: the face of Che Guevara on a billion sweatshop T-shirts, or the relics of the saints.
     
    Ironies on this scale demand an approach both cosmic and comic. On the one hand, they call to mind the phenomenon called a singularity, an infinitely dense point that swallows everything within its gravitational grasp. Welcome to late- (or end-?) stage capitalism, where as Thomas Friedman says, the world is truly flat: spun down into an accretion disk circling the central, all-devouring maw, a scenario ruled by that other great law of cultural physics: Never give a saga an even break. As noted, there seems to be a deep correspondence between cosmology and comedy. So the singularity has its correlative in the world of stand-up comedians. It is the dirtiest joke in the world, popularly known as “The Aristocrats.”
     
    Here is the general form of the joke, which is traditionally told serially by a group of comedians, each trying to extend or embellish the previous effort: A family act auditions for a talent agent. The agent is unimpressed with the standard performance. When he asks what else the performers can do, family members present a series of bizarre sex acts, a sort of Homeric catalog of organs, orifices, parts, products, and possibilities, which grows more extensive with each iteration of the joke. The punchline is both obligatory and largely meaningless. When the last perversion has been performed, the agent asks what the act is called. The answer is, The Aristocrats!
     
    Penn Jillette and Paul Provenza’s documentary about this joke (2005) makes two things very clear. First, the joke is not especially funny. Second, it says something profound about the entertainment industry and the culture in which it operates. The Aristocrats joke is the black hole rendered into language, a limitless accretor of charged expression. It is the very emblem of the process that spirals in from the funny papers, to the comics houses, to the movie studios, ultimately reaching the central anomaly, an infinite concentration of transnational capital. As we have said, Watchmen has now passed the event horizon of this economic catastrophe. Thus Moore’s tour de force of cosmic irony has been fed into its own trope, ironically fueling the industry its author abominates. Watchmen thus collapses into that general version of The Aristocrats, joke without end, that we call contemporary entertainment. We could say, with every measure of regret, that the joke is now on Alan Moore; but to leave matters here would minimize a complex situation that deserves further treatment. The cosmic joke is not simply on Moore, but perhaps on all of us.
     

    (2) A stronger loving world

     
    Several times in the graphic novel, Moore and Gibbons use the print equivalent of a match cut, where a shot of a character in one context dissolves to a new scene or point in time, the character’s position and posture unchanged. This effect, like most of Watchmen‘s semiotic signatures, answers to a general principle of similarity-in-difference which is the logical underpinning of irony. The greatest divergence between comic and film lies with the machinations of Adrian Veidt (Ozymandias), the story’s world-conquering supervillain. Both film and graphic novel include passing references to an episode of the 1960s television series, The Outer Limits, entitled “The Architects of Fear” (first aired October 30, 1963, a year after the Cuban missile crisis). In the TV episode, a scientific cabal contrives a phony alien invasion to convince the superpowers to end nuclear conflict in the interest of planetary defense. This is, of course, very like Veidt’s plot in the graphic novel.4 Veidt teleports a gigantic, telepathic lifeform to an address on 7th Avenue in New York. The creature dies in agony, unleashing a psychic pulse that kills every person in the vicinity, leaving millions subject to recurrent nightmares about invaders from another dimension. The apparently alien corpus delicti, and the piles of dead bodies choking the streets (as Veidt has promised in an earlier advertising slogan: “I WILL GIVE YOU BODIES BEYOND YOUR WILDEST IMAGINING”), give tangible evidence of a cosmic threat, securing the new peace.
     
    If Moore’s architecture of fear is Rococco (or perhaps Deconstructionist), Hayter, Tse, and Snyder offer something more along Bauhaus lines. They eliminate the giant, cloned psychic brain, oneiric fallout, and any suggestion of interdimensional travel. Instead, the attack on New York (in the film, one of several world capitals struck simultaneously) involves a more conventional weapon of mass destruction. In the film, Veidt teleports to each of his targets a device that apparently applies the same intrinsic-field nullification that transforms physicist Jon Osterman into the superbeing called Dr. Manhattan. Veidt evidently builds his cosmic bombs from a prototype power reactor given him by the blue superman. The devices are said to leave an “energy signature” tying them indisputably to Dr. Manhattan.
     
    No doubt this change in the narrative was dictated primarily by the need to keep the film’s running time under three hours; but even so, the revisions change the story in very important ways. For starters, Dr. Manhattan becomes central to the film’s plot, while in the graphic novel he remains essentially incidental, in spite of his superhuman abilities. In the comic, once Veidt has deceived him into withdrawing to Mars, Dr. Manhattan has no immediate significance for humanity. Though he makes several important appearances on the comic’s stage (silently blessing the union of Laurie Juspeczyk and Dan Dreiberg; blasting Rorschach out of existence), he plays no direct role in Veidt’s Alexandrian master-stroke, beyond failing to stop it (indeed, there is always Moore irony).
     
    The situation in the film is radically different. Here, Veidt does not simply distract Dr. Manhattan in order to pull off a bizarre prank; rather, Veidt makes Dr. Manhattan the focus of the fraud, the butt of his massively murderous joke. Veidt produces Dr. Manhattan as the alien threat, appropriating the destructive component of his superpower to devastate the world’s great cities. Like his print predecessor, Veidt encourages the superman to remove himself from the new society; but the film’s Veidt goes a crucial step further, converting Dr. Manhattan’s absent presence into a source of world-dominating power, both political and thermodynamic. In the film, Dr. Manhattan is not merely tricked into exile; he is stripped of his charisma as the condition for a new world order.
     
    The realignment of the plot in the film makes a considerable difference for the overall shape of the narrative. This impact is most clearly visible in the concluding scene, which is nearly identical in both versions. The last moments take place in the editorial offices of The New Frontiersman, defined in the comic as a radical right-wing tabloid. Incensed at the US-Soviet detente that has followed Veidt’s coup, and desperate for material to print, the editor assigns his assistant, Seymour, to fill a hole in the upcoming issue with an item from a “crank pile” of unsolicited manuscripts. The top item in this pile (which evidently works on a Last In, First Out basis) is the journal compiled by Rorschach and committed to the mails before his final confrontation with Veidt. The journal contains a complete account of Rorschach’s investigations, including a direct indictment of Veidt, backed up by business and financial details.
     
    In the final panel as well as in the final frame, Seymour reaches for Rorschach’s book, teasing us with the possibility that the world is about to See More, though there is (in either case) no more Moore to see. Yet for all its visual fidelity, this moment reads very differently on the screen than it does on the page.
     
    In the graphic novel, publication of the journal may destabilize Veidt’s balance of terror, by starting an investigation that could unravel the threads of his fraud. Once the phony alien in New York is debunked, there will be no threat from beyond the stars to constrain nuclear brinksmanship. Rorschach’s journal thus represents a terrible presence: quite possibly a truly ultimate weapon, or Doomsday Book.
     
    In the film, however, prospects seem both happier and more deeply perverse. Even if we assume exposure and prosecution of Veidt (an enterprise that would likely demand cooperation of both adversarial powers), the foundation of his bloody peace would almost certainly survive. The Veidt of the film does not invent aliens from space, but rather demonstrates the murderous potential of a real superbeing, using aspects of his own power. In both comic and film, Dr. Manhattan remains at large, whereabouts unknown; but in the film, this absence constitutes an impending threat. No matter what befalls Adrian Veidt, any future geopolitics must account for his possible return. After Veidt’s horrible Halloween prank, the world will always live in fear of Dr.Manhattan’s judgment-in every sense of the word.
     
    Read on this level, Snyder and company’s ending seems to improve on Moore’s fatalistic vision. The joke we have just heard may be The Aristocrats, yet we may smile all the same, at least on first presentation. Perhaps, in this regard, the Watchmen film simply reflects the enormous cultural difference between the late 1980s (Thatcher, Reagan, and the climax of the Cold War) and the post-Millennium years (the decade of 9/11). Since a visually faithful adaptation of Watchmen must include the Twin Towers in its cityscape, as well as images of mass murder in New York, some avoidance or tropism seems in order. So the film’s moment of mass murder features bodies gracefully rising from the ground, not falling from the skies, before they disintegrate without trace. After the attack, we see a giant, hemispherical crater (an image unique to the film), but none of those no-longer-unimaginable bodies that might affront audience sensibilities. The extension of Veidt’s holocaust to sites beyond New York also seems consonant with this process.
     
    Yet for all its careful evasions of real, historical horror, the Watchmen film nonetheless proceeds from, and reproduces, a distinctly post-9/11 ideology. Moore insists on the implausibility of any utopia, while Snyder and company seem attuned to a different Realpolitik. By re-engineering Moore’s implausible plot, the architects of the film imagine a more durable and impenetrable balance of terror. Their world will live in constant fear of further attack even if it learns the first incidents were spurious. The implications seem clear enough. The film gives us terror absolute, terror metastatic, terror as inevitable condition of everyday life. The revelation-proof utopia of the Watchmen film thus offers a rather clear portrait of the current world order-a recognition that might wipe away our initial smile.
     

    (3) Picture book strange loop

     
    If these connections to 9/11 and the Homeland Security State seem too far-fetched for a discussion of popular entertainment, we might instead consider the divergence of comic and film as a matter of media and technology. Here again, the altered status of Dr. Manhattan seems crucial. In both versions, he withdraws from the world before the final scenes; but as we have seen, this fact reads differently in each. In the comic, the world becomes obsessed with invaders from beyond the stars, shifting the balance of anxiety away from Dr. Manhattan. By the end of the book, he is gone and largely forgotten. In the film there is no such displacement: Dr. Manhattan becomes World Enemy Number One, so his absence exerts a paradoxical presence. Though gone, he is unforgettable (as an ad in the comic for one of Veidt’s perfumes declares, Oh how the ghost of you lingers!). Moore subjects the superhero to something like deconstruction, laying bare the limits of his relationship to humanity, and ultimately abstracting him from our experience. By contrast, Snyder and company weave the absent superbeing into the heart of their new world order, producing something more like apotheosis.
     
    Anyone who has been monitoring the development of cinefantastique over the last thirty years may detect a parable here. Dr. Manhattan is in every sense a virtual superman; and as far as the industry of spectacle is concerned, we can say actual as well. The great blue nude of Snyder’s film is an elegant amalgam of old-fashioned, carbon-based acting (Billy Crudup’s remarkable characterization) and computer-generated imagery (CGI). Close-ups featuring the character’s disconcerting, actively scintillating eyes take us deep into the so-called Uncanny Valley, where CGI efforts historically come to grief; yet Snyder’s reintegrated superman seems monstrously unstoppable, both in the world of his story, and perhaps in ours. Those eyes are deeply disturbing, but hard to erase from memory.
     
    Dr. Manhattan belongs to a proliferating line of comic-book and fantasy figures (Jar-Jar Binks, Gollum, Ray Winstone’s Beowulf, most of the Marvel superheroes) who populate the leading edge of Posthuman Hollywood. Precisely where this front is headed remains a matter of speculation. The recent finale of Battlestar Galactica, with its montage of Japanese robotica insinuating that even now Cylons walk among us, may prove as prophetic as it is corny. Gibson’s Idoru comes to mind, leading one to wonder whether a state that elects character actors and other players (Reagan, Schwarzenegger) might someday be led by a Non-Player Character. So perhaps it is fitting that Snyder, Hayter, and Tse refocus the plot of Watchmen to center on their indestructible, ineluctable superman. Whether or not the Watchmen film says anything about the contemporary politics of terror, it certainly reflects a cinematic watershed. To update Super Powers and the Superpowers: the superman exists, and he’s digital.
     
    Perhaps the two versions of Watchmen belong to different aesthetic contexts, divided not so much by the transition from Cold War to War on Terror, as by another Millennial passage. Consider a second offering from the discontented winter of 2009, this one by the blogger Clay Shirky:
     

    With the old economics destroyed, organizational forms perfected for industrial production have to be replaced with structures optimized for digital data. It makes increasingly less sense even to talk about a publishing industry, because the core problem publishing solves-the incredible difficulty, complexity, and expense of making something available to the public-has stopped being a problem.
     

    (Shirky)

     

    As Rorschach might say, an industry died in New York last night-or in Denver, or in Seattle, and if Shirky is right, all round the networked world. This obituary for the publishing business casts stark light on many matters covered here: on the one hand, on Moore’s lament about the decline of comics into a “pumpkin patch,” and on the other, on the epiphany of the CGI superman that shines through the film’s plot changes. Above all, though, this apocalyptic note rings out over the final visual signature of both comic and film, that moment when Seymour reaches for a fatal or futile book.

     
    While the book in the comic seems dire, in the film it is more of a grace note. We might extend this diegetic or literal reading to higher levels as well, turning from the message to its mediation. The final image in the comic represents a last, emphatic assertion of Moore’s ironic master-trope: the convergence of opposites, or as it is often called in Watchmen, Fearful Symmetry. Here is a picture of a book that has not been opened, completing the last page of a book that is about to close. Like most other points of convergence in the comic, this moment is haunted by Rorschach, whose “face” is marked by mirror shapes. By the end of the story, Rorschach has been revealed as the man who knew too much, so when he symbolically reappears, we should prepare for dire enlightenment. Yet the subject of this final revelation may be not so much the world, as the work itself. Though Rorschach’s journal is very different from the graphic novel in which it is imagined, it seems fair to say the final image of the book refers at least obliquely or artifactually to the comic-which is, after all, the book we are holding in our hand, as we study an image of a hand and a book. Read in this way, Moore’s Watchmen goes out with a glowering reminder of the power of reading, writing, and perhaps the “under-language” of comics.
     
    By definition, the film cannot produce this immediate self-reference, since it abducts Watchmen into a very different medium. The film’s final recourse to the image of a book risks a certain nostalgia. Nostalgia (the pain of memory) implies loss or devaluation. Moore complains of cinematic “spoon feeding” (Boucher) and the writer and comics artist Adam Cadre notes that for all the visual genius of the film, its messages are thrown serially across a giant screen, not deployed in an elegant, convoluted sign-system that demands artful discovery (Cadre). Since these points seem undeniable, it is easy to feel a certain cynicism about the film’s reproduction of Seymour and the book. Perhaps the final tableau, viewed on the IMAX screen, comes down to nothing more than this: Hey kids, hope you enjoyed the movie-remember to read a book now and then: preferably a comic from the DC division of Warner Brothers!
     
    Having sunk this far, those of my generation (especially academics) may slip readily into the next stage of descent, which has been named the Gutenberg Elegy (Birkerts). How sad, goes the whinging chorus, that we have fallen away from the good, old world of books-even comic books. If one were persuaded by cultural conservatives in the last, or indeed in the present administration, that reading is imperiled by new technologies, or by the collapse of commercial publishing, one might beg space for Alan Moore aboard Professor Bloom’s Ark-not that any berth would be found, even far below the waterline, or that Moore would accept such passage.
     
    Not to put too fine a point on it: whinging never helps. If any past master deserves remembrance here, it is not Gutenberg the goldsmith, but William Blake the prophet, grand master of fantasy comics avant la lettre. Further, there seems no particular reason to mourn, since unlike the Blake of Watchmen (the Comedian who dies in New York), the Blake of our visionary tradition seems very much alive, at least in certain hearts and minds. Not for nothing is Alan Moore’s current work in progress a massive project called Jerusalem (Boucher).
     
    One clear indication of Blake’s spiritual survival may be Alan Moore’s notoriously renegade stance toward the popular culture industry, illustrated by his staunch refusal to view any film made from his work. Who watches the Watchmen? Not Alan Moore. Moore’s refusal to participate in the industry of spectacle strikes a bright line between page and screen, in spite of all attempts to confuse them. His feud with the film business asks those of us who care about his writings to keep them out of the pumpkin patch, remembering that they are formally challenging, highly original efforts, not simply frozen embryos of movies.
     
    Yet, as we have seen, for all its revolutionary consciousness, Moore’s ending is at least potentially less hopeful than Snyder and company’s. His numinous book may open to ultimate revelation or Apocalypse, evoking, as Moore quotes John Cale, “a stronger loving world to die in.” On the other hand, the film’s book seems more likely the image of a new world order, a stable dominion, albeit one of architectural terror.
     
    Such is, in effect, the way we live now, and perhaps there is something to be said for making the best of it. If we swap elegy for paean, it might be possible to elicit a more hopeful reading from the final image of the Watchmen film. Where the comic offers Fearful Symmetry, perhaps, if we can avoid the pitfall of cynicism, the film might supply a less ominous pattern. Specifically, the film’s repetitious return to the book might constitute what Douglas Hofstadter calls a Strange Loop:
     

    an abstract loop in which, in the series of stages that constitute the cycling-around, there is a shift from one level of abstraction (or structure) to another, which feels like an upwards movement in a hierarchy, and yet somehow the successive “upward” shifts turn out to give rise to a closed cycle. That is, despite one’s sense of departing ever further from one’s origin, one winds up, to one’s shock, exactly where one had started out. In short, a strange loop is a paradoxical level-crossing feedback loop.
     

     

    Applying Hofstadter’s terms, the “upwards movement in a hierarchy” would be the transition from the old medium of ink and paper to the brave new world of polygons and bits. The paradox or strangeness would manifest on two levels, literal and symbolic, the first supplied by the image of the book, the second by the mechanism of absent presence, which Snyder and company have made even more prominent in their version than in the original. In the most immediate sense, this absent presence is Rorschach, author of the Doomsday book, whose identity is always linked to his mirror opposite, Dr. Manhattan, the present absence of Watchmen‘s world order. Behind both these figures, however, lies the ultimate uninvited guest: Alan Moore, whose credit you will not find in the marathon roll that follows the final shot.

     
    The “strangeness and charm” of this procedure (to borrow Moore’s borrowed language) lies in the paradoxical reassertion of primary genius against overcoming or obsolescence. No matter how plausible or faithful its appropriation, the film does not fully displace the comic book, or indeed, its author. Things might perhaps have been different had Moore signed on with the American dream machine, but to his lasting credit, he refused. So when we come back to the book, in the radically different context of Zack Snyder’s posthuman epic, we are, in Hofstadter’s sense, closing the uncanny circuit. We may not be “exactly where we started out,” but we must acknowledge certain lingering presences.
     
    If we manage to see the film’s bibliophanic moment as a “level-crossing feedback loop” then perhaps there is some hope for narrative, after all, even in the Valley of the Uncanny, among all those strange faces with deeply spooky eyes. Dr. Manhattan, the latest poster-boy of CGI, is not the only spectre haunting our technological sublime. Alan Moore is out there, too, channeling William Blake, casting spells and curses, continuing to cover the page. If we have to bury Gutenberg, or newspapers and publishing houses-and perhaps someday, in these increasingly hard times, even the mighty Warner Brothers-the idea of magical, subversive texts will remain.
     
    Irony survives the death of irony, if by no other process then through the perdurably perverse logic of the World’s Dirtiest Joke, whereby, the poet advises from Hell, “the most sublime act is to set another before you” (Blake 151). If absence can be presence in the Rorschach space of modern media, then obsolescence can just as well signify vitality. Snyder and company may offer what is, logically considered, an impotent parody of Moore’s book of revelation; but their inversion reminds us that other works, other worlds, and other revelations remain to be produced. No invention is final, no weapon ultimate, no act so sublime (or obscene) that it cannot be topped by the next guy. So we may imagine, in the mental frames that always roll off after the end of any film, books of the future, both wonderful and terrible.
     
    Perhaps these are books of new strangeness and charm, the kind that never appear in print. In any case, we read on.
     
    Who watches these watchmen?
     
    We’re the Aristocrats!
     

    Stuart Moulthrop has been watching the Watchmen since serial publication of Moore and Gibbons’s graphic novel in 1987. A practitioner and theorist of digital art, Moulthrop’s on-line credits include “Watching the Detectives,” an open annotation site for Watchmen, as well as several works of electronic literature. In 2007, he won twin international awards for digital poetry and narrative. Moulthrop is currently Distinguished Professor of Information Arts and Technologies at the University of Baltimore. He served as Co-Editor of PMC from 1995-99.

     

    Footnotes

     
    1. This incident was mentioned in the Wikipedia article on Watchmen as recently as January 2007, but has since been removed.

     
    2. A complete account of Moore’s vast system of visual jokes would probably require a book-length study. There is a highly condensed selection in my chapter, “See the Strings: Watchmen and the Under-Language of Media,” in Pat Harrigan and Noah Wardrip-Fruin, eds., Third Person, MIT Press, 2009. Readers can consult my open-annotation project, called “Watching the Detectives”: http://iat.ubalt.edu/moulthrop/hypertexts/wm.

     
    3. See again “See the Strings,” and Jessica Fure’s paper about the fifth chapter of Watchmen, included in “Watching the Detectives.” Among other interesting facts: this obsessively symmetrical composition occurs not, as we might expect, in the middle of Moore’s twelve-part epic, but in what appears to be a deliberately de-centered position, one chapter early.

     
    4. Moore apparently arrived at his plot independently, having learned about “Architects of Fear” well into the writing. He included the reference to the TV series as a tribute. See the Wikipedia article on the TV episode, http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/The_Architects_of_Fear. However, those who think Veidt’s plot stretches plausibility may find this detail more functional than decorative. If one does not know about Moore’s belated discovery of the show, the allusion may suggest Veidt himself drew his inspiration from TV melodrama, a reading that seems consistent with Veidt’s self-description as a non-linear, video-inspired thinker. If anything, this reading deepens the satiric impact of Watchmen.

     

    Works Cited

     

  • Cyborg Masochism, Homo-Fascism: Rereading Terminator 2

    David Greven (bio)
    Connecticut College
    dgrev@conncoll.edu

     
    Abstract

     

     

    As the most important and sustained cyborg narrative in Hollywood film, the Terminator films, particularly the first two, continue to demand a considerable amount of critical scrutiny. When the highly charged allegorical power of the figure of the cyborg is added to Arnold Schwarzenegger’s star persona, now evolved into that of national political figure, this persona emerges as a welter of gendered, sexual, and racial anxieties that relate in multivalent ways. In his famous essay “Is the Rectum a Grave?” Leo Bersani argues that the “logic of homosexual desire includes the potential for a loving identification with the gay man’s enemies.” This essay argues that films like Terminator 2 enact the queer theory debates indexed in Bersani’s essay, revealing the complicity with normative standards of gendered identity in queer desire, but also exposing the queer nature of these normative standards. The film forces us to acknowledge that while queer desire may be troublingly complicit in the structures of normative power that pathologize it, those very same structures proceed from an oddly analogous fascination with the homoerotics of power, especially in its most virulent, which is to say, its fascist, form. Terminator 2 cloaks its sadomasochistic fascist fantasies in the guise of the violent, melodramatic family film. The film is exemplary of the “Bush to Bush” era-from 1989 to 2008, the period presided over by Bush I, Clinton, and Bush II. Terminator 2 illuminates the split between narcissistic and masochistic modes of male sexuality that informs the period’s representational practices.
     

    Perhaps the most iconic cinematic image of manhood from the days of the presidency of George Bush 41 (1989-1993) is that of Arnold Schwarzenegger as the titular cyborg in the ad for the 1991 film Terminator 2: Judgment Day, sitting atop a motorcycle, wearing a black leather jacket, black T-shirt, and black sunglasses from whose left lens a red point of light glows, an enormous phallus of a gun held in his right hand and pointed aggressively upwards, the entire image darkly swathed in an ominous blue-black neon glow. The image encapsulates the menace and might of Schwarzenegger’s newly rearticulated identity as a futuristic killing machine. Always a bit of joke in such films as Stay Hungry (1976) and Conan the Barbarian (1982) and its sequel, Schwarzenegger benefited from James Cameron’s innovative use of him as the implacable Terminator in the 1984 film of that name, a sleeper box-office hit and one of the great films of the 80s. But, as Schwarzenegger told talk-show hosts unironically when he campaigned for the 1991 sequel, he was now playing a “kinder, gentler Terminator.” This sequel, Schwarzenegger suggested, had been tailored to fit the ideological and rhetorical design of the Bush presidency. In the first film, Schwarzenegger’s cyborg, returning from a future in which machines bent on eradicating all the remnants of human life rule the earth, was an unstoppable agent sent to kill the woman, Sarah Connor (Linda Hamilton), whose unborn child, to be named John, would eventually lead the human resistance against the machines. In contrast, Schwarzenegger’s cyborg killer in the sequel is the hero, programmed to save the now teen-aged John Connor. The cyborg, to be sure, retains his uncouth instincts to destroy all in his path, and must be counseled by sarcastic but sensitive John in murder-etiquette. This kinder, gentler Terminator learns not to annihilate the hapless humans who inconvenience him but, with cybernetically enhanced precision, merely to wound them in non-vital areas. The spectacle of crippled, wounded, whimpering, maimed men, lying at the feet of the looming Terminator, is an exact image of its time. As J. Hoberman writes, “Politically, Terminator 2 suggests the merging of Schwarzenegger and Schwarzkopf, techno-war and Technicolor. This is truly the Desert Storm of action flicks” (qtd. in Rushing and Frentz 201). I think that this film’s associations with war extend beyond Desert Storm to World War II and its cultural afterlife, specifically its images of fascism and the Nazi. Fusing tropes of Nazism in American popular culture with its homoerotic tableaux, tableaux embedded in the construction of fascism, Terminator 2 is a pivotal text poised between the backward-looking Reagan years, in which a Classic Hollywood star turned national leader presided over the nation, and the era of both postmodern techno-war and postgay articulations of sexual identity.
     
    In his famous essay “Is the Rectum a Grave?” Leo Bersani argues against the utopian impulses in queer theory-as evinced by Jeffrey Weeks’s argument for the “radical pluralism” of homosexuality-to celebrate the socially progressive aspects of queer culture. Bersani writes
     

    It has frequently been suggested in recent years that such things as the gay-macho style, the butch-fem couple, and gay and lesbian sado-masochism, far from expressing unqualified and uncontrollable complicities with a brutal and misogynous ideal of masculinity, or with the heterosexual couple permanently locked into a power structure of male sexual and social mastery over female sexual and social passivity, or, finally, with fascism, are in fact subversive parodies of the very formations and behaviors they appear to ape. Such claims, which have been the subject of lively and intelligent debate, are, it seems to me, totally aberrant.
     

    (207)

     

    As Bersani points out, these claims ignore the troubling possibility that such phenomena as “the gay commitment to machismo” reveals that queer desire runs the risk “of idealizing” (208) the very forms of gendered identity that condemns queer desire in the first place. Bersani continues:

     

    The logic of homosexual desire includes the potential for a loving identification with the gay man’s enemies. . . . a sexual desire for men can’t be merely a kind of culturally neutral attraction to a Platonic Idea of the male body; the object of that desire necessarily includes a socially determined and socially pervasive definition of what it means to be a man.
     

    (208-9)

     

    If what we desire as queer men and women is precisely implicated in the very constructions of gendered identity we must challenge and attempt to topple in order to secure our erotic and social freedom, our path to this liberation, Bersani argues, is hardly a clear-cut one. It can only be “a struggle not only against definitions of maleness and of homosexuality as they are reiterated and imposed in a heterosexist social discourse, but also against those very same definitions so seductively and so faithfully reflected by those (in large part culturally invented and elaborated) male bodies that we carry within us as permanently renewable sources of excitement” (“Rectum” 209).

     
    In this essay, I argue that films like Terminator 2 enact the queer theory debates indexed in Bersani’s essay, forcing queer desirers to acknowledge the complicity with normative standards of gendered identity in our desiring, but also exposing the queer nature of these normative standards. After all, any viewer of the film is asked to marvel at and share in the spectacle of myriad forms of masculine perfection in the film, ranging from Edward Furlong’s all-American boy ephebe to Schwarzenegger’s hypermasculine cyborg to the Aryan perfection of Robert Patrick’s more advanced T-1000 to Linda Hamilton’s futuristically jacked, hypermaculinized womanhood. The film incites desire for the varieties of male beauty, albeit in a prescribed version. Maleness-in these properly Aryan forms, of course-becomes a smorgasbord of visual delights in this film, an ever-beckoning display of queer delectation for the whole family. Terminator 2 is a family film that reoedipalizes its audience by presenting the Father as a kinder, gentler Terminator; as a perverse family film, it remakes the family in its own queer image. The film forces us to acknowledge that while queer desire may be troublingly complicit in the structures of normative power that pathologize it, those very same structures proceed from an oddly analogous fascination with the homoerotics of power, especially in its most virulent, which is to say, its fascist, form. Terminator 2 cloaks its sadomasochistic fascist fantasies in the guise of the violent, melodramatic family film. In that lies the sickening allure of this duplicitous and agonized film, an allure that promises covert queer themes within the film’s allusive system of unacknowledgeable yet undeniable fascist images.
     
    The present essay emerges from a larger study of the representation of masculinity in Hollywood film of the “Bush to Bush” era-from 1989 to 2008, the period presided over by Bush I, Clinton, and Bush II. My study examines the fate of the figure Susan Jeffords discovers, in her important study Hard Bodies, at the threshold of the Bush I era, the “New Man,” who represents a break with 1980s hardbody masculinism. The Beast of Disney’s 1991 Beauty and the Beast metonymically represents this new development in cinematic manhood: “He is the New Man, the one who can transform himself from the hardened, muscle-bound, domineering man of the eighties into the considerate, loving, and self-sacrificing man of the nineties” (Jeffords 153). Shifting the focus to Terminator 2, Jeffords prophetically glimpses what would be the result of this seeming innovation in manhood: “The film’s complex reasonings supply a ‘new’ direction for masculinity, not, as in the 1980s, outward into increasingly extravagant spectacles of violence and power (as Rambo and Ronald Reagan showed, these displays had become self-parody), but inward, into increasingly emotional displays of masculine sensitivities, traumas, and burdens” (172). The New Man of the 1990s, argues Jeffords, shifts “the ground away from the externalities through which [masculine] logic had been defined in the 1980s to the ‘new’ internal qualities of the more ‘human’ man” (176). “But,” she continues,
     

    this is not a simple negation but rather a rewriting, a repetition, a retelling of the story of masculinity… And though that rewriting seems on its surface to be a rejection of so many spectacular identifications of masculinity of the 1980s-technology, violence, power, command, strength-its mainframe is still very similar: the reproduction of masculine authority (now freed from civil authority) through the affirmation of individualism.
     

    (176)

     

    If film is the language in which nations dream, and if dreams are indeed wish fulfillments, as Freud taught us, Terminator 2 is a dream of American manhood that fulfills a wish to combine the “hard, stoic, isolate” and “killer” American manhood of D.H. Lawrence (65) with a newly awakened sensitivity. This unwieldy fantasy of reconciling killer with nurturing instincts continues to play out in American movies and in the national construction of gender in the inter-Bush years.

     

    The Cyborg as Queer Allegory

     
    Freud’s 1919 essay on the uncanny has proven extraordinarily suggestive for studies of the cyborg. Following Freud’s formulation of the uncanny, Bruce Grenville writes that
     

    the cyborg is uncanny not because it is unfamiliar or alien, but rather because it is all too familiar. It is the body doubled-doubled by the machine that is so common, so familiar, so ubiquitous, and so essential that it threatens to consume us, to destroy our links to nature and history, and quite literally, especially in times of war, to destroy the body itself and replace it with its uncanny double.
     

    (20-21)

     

    The greatest threat the cyborg poses is that its danger is too familiar to be readily recognized and “worse yet, we may be unnaturally attracted to it” (Grenville 21). Donna Haraway has described her influential feminist “cyborg myth” as being “about transgressed boundaries, potent fusions, and dangerous possibilities which progressive people might explore as one part of needed political work” (154). Haraway’s utopian cyborg emerges as the result of “three crucial boundary breakdowns”: human/animal, animal-human/machine, and physical/non-physical (151). As such, “a cyborg world might be about lived social and bodily realities in which people are not afraid of their joint kinship with animals and machines, not afraid of permanently partial identities and contradictory standpoints” (154). But the Terminator films are afraid, very afraid, of a cyborg world, seeing it as decidedly dystopian.

     
    The cyborg has emerged as one of the most productive topics for postmodern work on feminism, race, class, and gender. As the most important and sustained cyborg narrative in Hollywood film, the Terminator films, particularly the first two, continue to demand a considerable amount of critical scrutiny. When the highly charged allegorical power of the figure of the cyborg is added to Schwarzenegger’s star persona, now evolved into that of national political figure, this persona emerges as a welter of gendered, sexual, and racial anxieties that relate in multivalent ways. “Arnold’s ability to insinuate himself into any discourse or any metaphoric moment or any narrative thread is a remarkable feature of his stardom,” write Louise Krasniewicz and Michael Blitz (22). Such an understanding of Schwarzenegger’s Terminator-like ability to infiltrate discourses and cultural spaces relates to an important aspect of the Terminator’s metaphorical value: the human-metal cyborg serves as an allegory for sexual “passing” and closeted homosexuality. Able to pass as human but containing within him a secret identity destructive to human life, the Terminator, the enemy of human reproductivity, is an unstable and challenging metaphor for queer people. Moreover, the cyborg-as-superman-the heightened, cartoonish version of manhood represented by the hypermasculine Terminator image-allows us to consider the nature of queer desire. Like Bersani’s “Is the Rectum a Grave?,” written between the release of the two Terminator films, the Terminator films themselves fuse themes of fetishism and gay desire. The queer cyborg of these films, in its utterly adamant opposition to futurity, can be read, in the paradigms of Lee Edelman, as the embodiment of the queer death drive.1
     
    Terminator 2 occupies a central allegorical position in the cultural effort to denature homoerotic imagery so that it can be redeployed for mass-consumption, in order to effect, in the words of Michael DeAngelis, the “accommodation of homosexual and heterosexual positions of spectatorial access” (157). The Terminator’s association with leather culture is the most vivid indication of its fusion of straight and gay sensibilities. As DeAngelis writes, the cultural “configuration of black leather as an element of gay culture . . . has no inherent or exclusive associations with homosexuality” (157). But the postwar leather phenomenon “was appropriated by emerging gay biker clubs in the 1950s” (157).2 William Friedkin’s 1981 film Cruising appeared to associate leather-clad gay men with violence in the popular mind.3 The Terminator films draw on longstanding cultural fantasies of gay leather culture but also on the denaturing straight appropriations of this culture to produce a hybrid new masculine identity that embraces hypermasculinity while attempting to keep homoerotic energies and associations at bay-a wobbly enterprise, indeed. Adding to its leather-daddy themes, the film’s dependence on tropes of biker masculinity corresponds to overlapping fixations in gay S/M subcultures. “Images of bikers started cropping up in homoerotic physique magazines of the 1950s,” writes Juan A. Suárez, in “elaborate fetishistic scenarios” (156): “the physicality of the biker contrasted with the effeminacy, frailty, and neuroticism attributed to homosexuals both in popular representations and medical and psychological discourses” (158). In addition to representing fused straight and gay iconographies of manhood, Terminator 2 provides extraordinarily vivid evidence of the resurgence of an interest in fascist iconography in Bush-to-Bush films, which here bears directly on its appropriation of homoerotic imagery. Discussing his difficulty in explaining his project of the linkages between fascism and homosexuality in modernity, Andrew Hewitt notes the response he would sometimes receive: “Oh, now I get it! You mean leather and S&M, and all that stuff!…” (3). Hewitt’s project reminds us that fascism used homosexuals as objects and victims; Terminator 2 redeploys gay leather and S&M imagery appropriations of fascist iconographies for newly proto-fascist purposes. Indeed, all the Terminator films, but especially the first sequel, revisit the imagery of avant-garde filmmaker Kenneth Anger’s disturbing Scorpio Rising (1964), another film that may be said to fuse leather, biker, and S/M iconographies in a manner suggestive of the controversial overlap between Nazism and homosexuality. “The Nazi imagery in the film,” writes Suárez, “assimilates the bikers to Nazi troopers on the basis of their violence and gang-like structure” (164). If juvenile delinquent John Connor stands in for the “nihilistic and mutinous young outlaw” in search of a leader, the two Terminators stand in for the leaders whose guidance may result in fascism. Like Anger’s film, Cameron’s demonstrates the “connection between totalitarianism and kitsch” (Suárez 165). Indeed, Terminator 2 can be described as, to use Andrew Hewitt’s phrase, “fascist kitsch” (206).4
     
    Schwarzenegger’s star image provides the fascist logic of the Terminator films. As Yvonne Tasker writes, Schwarzenegger embodies “two poles, of excess and narcissism on the one hand, ‘heroic health’ on the other, [that] can be seen to provide the limits for the meaning of the muscular body” in cinema and popular culture. He has been widely admired by the American public for the latter qualities. Yet admiration
     

    quickly shifts into unease, which shifts into speculation about the appeal of Schwarzenegger to the masses of America. In particular Schwarzenegger’s foreignness, his immigrant status, carries [for critics like Ian Penman, who sees Schwarzenegger as “American Fascist art exemplified, embodied,”] disturbing associations of a Nazi past, a Europe from which so many fled . . . . [reminding] us of the appeal that Nazi art made to an idealized classical culture.
     

     

    Terminator 2 signals that along with an increasingly less covert deployment of homoerotic imagery in Hollywood films came the volatile cultural baggage associated, most often perniciously, with this imagery. Given that Schwarzenegger’s own star manhood synthesizes fascistic and homoerotic themes, Terminator 2 represents an overdetermination of linkages among hypermasculine bodies, homoeroticism, and the fascist manifestations of both.

     

    Homoerotics of The Fascist Male Body

     
    We can consider Terminator 2 as a recent example of the fictions of eroticized fascism created by nonfascists (if Cameron can be given the benefit of the doubt) treated by Laura Frost in her discussion of modernist texts. Frost distinguishes between historical fascism, with its ever present real-world threat, fictionalized modernist fascism, and the “pure literary masochism on the Sacher-Masoch model” (36). The chief fascist figures of Terminator 2, like those in modernist novels, undergo “transformations, often switching from aggression to submission”-this is clearly the case in Schwarzenegger’s cyborg and to a certain extent of Sarah and even the T-1000. These transformations, however, never occur in Sacher-Masoch:
     

    when the masochist’s manipulations are unmasked or the “torturer” is submissive, the scene is over. . . . In Sacher-Masoch’s texts, the “tormentor” must always be coaxed into playing her role; in fictions of eroticized fascism, the fascist figure is historically circumscribed as unremittingly cruel. However, in [fictional erotic scenarios], a passive or sexually compelling fascist can be imagined.
     

    (36)

     

    These works of “imaginatively distorted fascism” “play masochistically with fascism . . . . Fantasy makes possible a sexually responsive fascism and can transform enacted political violence into erotic sadomasochism” (Frost 36).5

     
    In a particularly striking moment in the first Terminator, Kyle describes post-apocalyptic life in the machine-world hell to Sarah, and explains why the machines have targeted her for termination:
     

    Most of us were rounded up, put in camps for orderly disposal. [Pulls up his right sleeve, exposing a mark.] This is burned in by laser scan. Some of us were kept alive… to work… loading bodies. The disposal units ran night and day. We were that close to going out forever. But there was one man who taught us to fight, to storm the wire of the camps, to smash those metal motherfuckers into junk. He turned it around. He brought us back from the brink. His name is Connor. John Connor. Your son, Sarah, your unborn son.

     

    The mark Reese shows Sarah, burnt into his skin, resembles a concentration-camp number. His description of the machines’  
    relentless campaign to “exterminate” human life parallels the Third Reich’s program in WWII Germany to exterminate social undesirables like Jews, gypsies, the infirm, the mentally retarded, and homosexuals. Terminator 2‘s aesthetic constructions of manhood also informed the rise of fascism in World War II Germany. I would argue that the films’ uses of Schwarzenegger draw upon collective, popular images of Nazi masculinity, the image of the Nietzschean superman that the Nazis distorted for their own purposes. Terminator 2 all but explicitly develops these implicit themes in the first film, threatening to reveal the films’ secret-that they enshrine and fetishize fascist manhood-drawing upon as they disavow the homoeroticism that undergirds it.

     
    In his essay “The Contemporary Political Use of Gay History: The Third Reich,” gay filmmaker and scholar Stuart Marshall reminds us of the overvaluation of Aryan masculinity and male friendship in the Nazi era in Germany. Aestheticizing and eroticizing “the masculine fighting man,” the Nazis “produced endless representations of male beauty for the populace to identify with or to idealize, most notably through their official art, which made frequent references to Hellenic Greek art and culture” (Marshall 79). The Hellenic masculine colossi of Arno Breker, the Official State Sculptor of the Nazi era, emblematized this interest. The German state did not equate the eroticism that undergirded the socially and politically necessary institutionalization of male friendship with sexuality but rather with “desexualized” and “cosmological love.” “But homoeroticism can easily become transmuted into homosexual desire, and this was the root of the Nazis’ problem” (Marshall 79-80). The homoerotic history of Nazi ideology demands a far denser scrutiny than can be provided here, but we can focus on a few salient points. All the Terminator films share Nazi Germany’s simultaneous adulation for and anxiety over the idealized nude form, and a desire to return to origins. The first three films open with sequences that depict the barren, laser-lit nightmarish nighttime world of our post-apocalyptic, machine-run future, in which enormous death-machines crunch their immense tires over rows of human skulls. We then see Terminators being born into our present, crouching in fetal positions that also resemble the cool tranquility of classical sculpture. (In sharp contrast, cries of anguish and a quivering body accompany human Reese’s “birth.”) Invited to admire their form without succumbing to baser voyeuristic impulses, what Freud called the “tormenting compulsion” to look at others’ genitals, we see nude Terminator bodies but no full-frontal nudity. (After repression sets in, the desire to see others’ genitals becomes a “tormenting compulsion.” Even more independent an impulse than scopophilia, cruelty comes easily to the child, for the affect of pity, like shame, develops late [Freud Three Essays 58-9].6) This device extends even into the time-travel-free Terminator Salvation (2009), which, through the wonders of digital technology, restores the massive Schwarzenegger-cyborg to his younger 1984 form, which we are invited to gape at anew in all of its naked perfection even as male frontal nudity remains decisively obscured.
     
    Considering the work of art critic Johann Joachim Winckelmann (1717-1768) as the foundation of the German cult of male beauty that culminated in the fascist movement, George L. Mosse describes the ways in which the Nazis resolved the problems posed by the fetishized image of the male nude, which threatened to inspire homoerotic feeling. Winckelmann “had already attempted to make his Greek sculptures acceptable to middle-class sensibilities by raising his naked youths to an abstract plane, transforming them into a stylistic principle.” Key to the minimization of these figures’ erotic impact was their “transparent whiteness” and tranquility. “Reese, what’s it like to go through time?” asks Sarah in the first film. “White light,” he responds, adding that he alone, being human, experiences pain in time travel. The white light of transparent classical beauty rendered potentially disturbingly erotic nudity into “universally valid and immutable symbols. The Nazis took up this argument and extended it,” making sure that when the male nude was displayed, male skin was always “hairless, smooth, and bronzed,” the body rendered “almost transparent,” in hope that “with as few individual features as possible, it would lose any sex appeal,” becoming an “abstract symbol of Aryan beauty, not unlike the athletes in Leni Riefenstahl’s film of the 1936 Olympics” (Mosse 172-3). Given the supreme and idealized whiteness of all the Terminators, including Reese’s anti-Terminator human protector, the films may be said to constitute a revisiting of the Nazi problematics of beauty, with much the same result, an abstraction of nude physicality into mythic symbol. In the first film, the Schwarzenegger Terminator’s first confrontation, with punks in shabby clothes and Mohawk haircuts, pits his idealized form against their degenerate masculinity. When he dons their clothing, however, he symbolically merges his ideal form and their degeneracy, giving his first version of the Terminator a kind of punker trashiness, a hobo chic, one adumbrated by Reese’s stealing of a homeless man’s pants. But in Terminator 2, Schwarzenegger’s Terminator, though he steals clothes from a redneck-typed tough in a country and western bar, appears sleek and blemishless, a rarefied abstraction of his punk-trash former self. In fact, with his newly refined, cut-down physicality, no longer bulgingly Mr. Universe but now much more humanly proportionate, Schwarzenegger is, in some shots, very beautiful, almost, relatively speaking, femininely soft. His massive bulk a sign of vulnerability, Schwarzenegger provides an incoherent, disorienting sign of manhood here.
     
    One of the commonplaces of the Hitler biography is that, as an Austrian with dark hair and features, he himself did not embody the model of Aryan perfection he promulgated as the universal standard. As an Austrian with dark hair and features, Schwarzenegger does not fully represent the master race of the Nazi ideal, either, even if he otherwise embodies the “superman.” For this reason, the T-1000 of Robert Patrick is especially fascinating as an upgrade of masculine perfection, the ideal Aryan “often compared to the ancient Greek ideal type,” who exemplifies heath in mind and body, pointing backward to a “healthy world before the onset of modernity.” The T-1000 comes closer than Schwarzenegger’s Terminator to copying the Nordic perfectionism of the ideal Nazi male, “tall and lean, with broad shoulders and small hips” (Mosse 169). Schwarzenegger’s cut cyborg body here seems like an attempt to match Patrick’s ideal measurements, but still emerges as a less perfect model of male physicality from a fascist perspective. It is little wonder that the T-1000 is a more advanced model, and Schwarzenegger, however hulking, the underdog; this conceit only makes sense from a racist perspective.
     
    Terminator 2 draws on two of the most familiar images in gay iconography, both of which have fascist undertones: the leatherman and the cop. Given Schwarzenegger’s status as a cartoon of manhood, it is easy to see in Terminator 2 a kind of parodistic disposition towards the fascist male ideal, precisely because of its homoerotic overtones. The depiction of both Schwarzenegger’s and Robert Patrick’s bodies, competing perfectionist models of male physicality, recalls the classically chiseled bodies of Nazi art, but also of gay artists like Tom of Finland, who incorporates such iconography in his drawings of hypermasculine (yet strangely softened) men engaged in various baroque configurations of gay sex. Like Tom of Finland’s work, and also the theoretical work of queer theorists like Leo Bersani, Terminator 2 engages in the dangerously unstable project of drawing out the appeal of fascist manhood for gay men, an appeal then remanufactured as a spectacle for straight audiences. As such, the kinder, gentler Terminator 2 is a much less reassuring film than it would appear.
     
    “Military life, as glorified by the Nazis, did indeed attract gay men,” writes Micha Ramakers in a study of Tom of Finland’s work, “the best-known example being Ernst Röhm’s doomed SA corps, which, at Hitler’s command, and with his personal involvement, was destroyed during the Night of the Long Knives (June 30, 1934). The attraction German soldiers-and their outfits-held over gay men also is clear from the work of a number of gay writers” (161). (We should note that while Röhm was gay and so were some SA officers, the SA eventually had around 3 million soldiers, so not all of its members can be assumed to have been gay.) Ramakers, in an exculpation of charges frequently brought forth against Tom of Finland, argues that his work cannot be equated with Nazi iconographer Arno Breker’s: “Tom’s work is dedicated to the glorification of the male body,” Ramakers argues, “in all its vulnerability: his bodies are constantly being penetrated in every possible way and through every orifice. In that sense they form the antithesis of the Nazi body, which was in every way a closed, impenetrable body” (165). If Breker’s “anti-bodies” express the Nazi fear and loathing of the corruptible body, the bodies in Tom’s work glorify, for Ramakers, “an abject form of corruption, indeed one persecuted by the Nazis” (165). Even if we appropriate Terminator 2 as a queer work that plays with the transgressive appeal of fascist forms of masculinity-the leatherman, the cop, and also the butch woman; even if we treat the film precisely not as Schwarzenegger and company would have us see it, as some kind of weirdly hyperviolent but resolutely sentimental family-values film (which framing of the film is also a disavowal of the violence and eroticism of sentimentalism as a genre), the film’s fascist imagery cannot be defended in the terms Ramakers uses to defend Tom of Finland.
     
    Cameron’s work indulges in and explores fantasies of the corruptible, vulnerable male body to a degree that is unseemly and transgressive for a conventional Hollywood film, but there is no celebration of this explosion of the confines of the representation of male physicality. Rather, there is something else: a fascinated, wonderstruck desire to see this explosion again and again, in ever more ingenious and voyeuristic ways. The film exhibits, in the ample imaginative license for dark fantasy it gives the viewer, a fascination with precisely the most volatile, potentially pernicious tropes of gay male identity. For example, in one shot of the T-1000 in silver liquid metal form, we see him fall from the ceiling of an elevator on to the ground. The shot unmistakably suggests falling excrement. The T-1000 returns cyborg masculinity to the anal/excremental/sadistic stage of Freud’s theory of childhood psychosexual development, a regression related to fantasies in the popular imaginary of homosexuality as regressive returns to childhood sexuality or to arrested development. Phobic associations such as these abound. Yet the film also truly does disturb its solicited straight audience in its sustained suggestion that all forms of manhood and masculinity are inherently fascistic and homoerotic in their appeal. In its own bizarrely self-conflicted and bombastic way, it’s a radically de-minoritizing movie, making homoerotic desire universal.
     

    Pedophilic Fantasies

     
    Kristen Thompson writes of Terminator 2 that “although there is no romance, John’s friendship with the Terminator and that relationship’s humanizing effect on the latter provide considerable emotional appeal” (42). I would go further to argue that it is precisely in the nature of the John-Terminator relationship as a romance that the film’s emotional appeal lies. If Terminator 2 is diabolical fun for the whole family, perhaps the film’s most awesomely perverse touch is its family-unfriendly foregrounding of pedophilic themes which organize all of the other themes we have examined.7 Even more perversely, Terminator 2 is a pedophilic fantasy from a child’s perspective.8
     
    The fascist fantasies circulating in the film center upon young male John Connor’s body, which both Terminators war over. In classical Greek culture, the eromenos is the young male object of desire for the erastes, the older man, who initiates the eromenos into intellectual and sexual knowledge. As played by Furlong, John Connor is a surprisingly vulnerable young man, an ephebe who suggests the eromenos of Greek pederasty, even as the Terminators, with their secret reserves of knowledge past and future, suggest the erastes. The battle of two military “men” over the vulnerable young John also recalls a popular image in gay appropriations of Nazi masculinity. In a typical Tom of Finland construction-it should be noted that this artist always fiercely denied any associations with Nazism (which, unlike Ramakers, I do not find convincing)-“two men are depicted, an army officer and an undressed, muscular young man. The military man penetrates the youngster and at the same time jerks him off. The young man uses both hands to push the soldier’s buttocks towards him, to enable him to enter his rectum as deeply as possible.” So intense is their passion that they fail to notice “a second soldier,” of lower rank, spying on them, and “clearly aroused by the performance” (Ramakers 162). Terminator 2 replicates this Tom of Finland scenario by having two “soldiers” war over the possession of a young male’s body. In one deleted scene, the T-1000 investigates John’s room, running his hands fetishistically over John’s possessions; numerous shots of John riding a motorcycle with the T-800 suggest sodomitical intercourse. But Terminator 2 also suggests desire on the part of the pedophilic object. After the first encounter with the T-1000, after which the T-800’s body is riddled with bullets, John examines the T-800’s body, uttering such suggestive lines as “This is intense” and “Get a grip, John” as he runs his own hands over the Terminator’s supple leather-clad body. The running theme of the Terminator’s education by John, his obeisance even to orders from the boy such as “stand on one leg,” continue this theme of switched-tables in the erastes-eromenos relationship, the eromenos initiating the innocent erastes into knowledge.
     
    Bersani’s “Is the Rectum a Grave?” corrects the oddly utopian streak in queer theory, its often uncritical celebration of homosocial brotherhood, as exemplified by Michael Warner’s work.9 One point Bersani fails to note, however-and which Terminator 2 makes spectacularly apparent-is straight culture’s appropriation of homosexual iconography and homoerotic themes. If gays have sometimes disquietingly fetishized the very contours and textures of a murderous sexual regime, this regime has also acted upon its fascination with our own fascinations, seen our appropriation of its own form as a form of inimitable worship it itself seeks to imitate. Terminator 2 gives us a series of prismatic lenses through which to view mythic masculinity, gay, straight, homoerotically heterosexual, even heteroerotically queer (if we think of Sarah’s multivalently phallic sexiness).10Terminator 2 is as steeped in homoerotic desire as an Alan Holingshurst novel.11
     

    The Fascist Family

     
    E.T.A. Hoffman’s 1817 short story “The Sand-Man” is the central literary work that Freud analyzes in his essay on the uncanny. In one particularly harrowing episode in the story, the young boy Nathanael surreptitiously observes a nighttime discussion before a blazing hearth between his father and an odious friend, Coppelius: “Good God! as my old father bent down over the fire how different he looked! His gentle and venerable features seemed to be drawn up by some dreadful convulsive pain into an ugly, repulsive Satanic mask. He looked like Coppelius” (175). Nathanael’s terror allows him to be discovered. Coppelius first threatens to take away his eyes, but after the father’s desperate protestations, instead unscrews the boy’s hands and feet, realizing in the process of reattaching the appendages that “the old fellow”-presumably God-knew what he was doing after all. The Oedipal confusion between his kindly old father and loathsome Coppelius, the two men’s subsequent war over the body of the boy, and the images of castration-not just eyes but hands and feet, a parodistic orgy of the castration-complex Freud will theorize a century later-illuminate the battle between the Terminators in Terminator 2.
     
    Rushing and Frentz argue that the Terminator of the first film is “the technological telos of the ego, the sovereign rational subject of modernism,” the “eradication of the inferior [human] shadow” that appears to us as “unspeakably Satanic,” “a macabre caricature of the obsolete human self” (168-9). In their view, Terminator 2 “rehabilitates its central commodified icon, Arnold Schwarzenegger, from a demon into the savior of humanity-thus effectively stealing John Connor’s destiny” as the messiah, as his initials would suggest (184). The transformation of Schwarzenegger from Satan to messiah in Terminator 2 brings us back to the confusion between the kindly father and Satanic Coppelius in Hoffman’s “The Sand-Man.” Terminator 2 represents a fantasy of oedipal father-son relations in which the “Satanic” nature of the Father can be controlled, deployed at will, and rendered a secondary sub-routine, as evinced in the scene in which John both orders the Terminator to brutalize some musclebound dudes who have rushed to John’s defense and teaches the cyborg not to kill. Transforming the cyborg into the murderously benign father relies upon an understanding of the Father as inherently murderous, far from benign.
     
    Sarah’s speech in the sequel makes this view astonishingly explicit: “Of all the would-be fathers that came and went over the years, this ‘thing,’ this machine, was the only one who measured up. In an insane world, it was the sanest choice.” In the “family values” era of Reagan and Bush I, Sarah’s speech has a powerfully surprising resonance. She exposes the family-values myth as such by arguing that a crisis in fatherhood exists pervasively, suggesting it cannot be limited to, say, the poor black community. Clinton, the child of a single mother whose brutalization he witnessed and fought, would make a war against “Deadbeat Dads” a feature of his Presidency. (Evincing the incoherency of his presidency, he would also demonize the so-called “Welfare Queen.”) The uncanny resonance of Terminator 2 for many viewers is precisely its re-deployment of the killer cyborg as killer father-protector. As the adult John says movingly to the “obsolete” T-800 model in the 2003 Terminator 3: Rise of the Machines, “Do you know that you were the closest thing to a father that I ever had?” The dark joke in this film is that Skynet sent this T-800 to kill John’s future self precisely because John’s emotional attachment to the model allows the model to infiltrate John’s stronghold. The futuristic machines understand the enduring power of oedipal attachments. In the Terminator films, it is the father who is hard, isolate, stoic, and a killer-and in Terminator 2, we get the father who finally melts, a symbolic wish literalized in the climax.
     
    This longing for a loving father whose innate brutality is reprogrammed for protectiveness is parodied in the T-1000, whose ardent interest in John is no less intense than the T-800’s, but also in the figures of Sarah and Miles Dyson (Joe Morton), the African-American scientist at Cyberdyne who will be the catalyst for Skynet’s take-over. Sarah’s fearsome phallic mother pointedly withholds emotional love from John, admonishing him for having rescued her from the asylum as she checks his body for injuries, her stinging words making him cry. With her taut body and black military gear, she looks like a rogue commando and, as many critics have pointed out, very much like a Terminator. The movie struggles over whether or not to affirm Sarah’s phallic motherhood. In large part, it revels in her musculature and fierce martial prowess, but it also makes the scene in which she finally breaks down, hugs John, and tells him that she loves him an especially wrenching moment. It has her sacrificially lower John into safety at the refinery at the end so that she can face off the T-1000 herself, and, though it gives her a thrilling near-triumph at the climax when, like Ripley in Aliens, she shoots volley after volley of bullets into the T-1000’s disoriented form, it also refuses to allow her to destroy the T-1000, reserving the final heroic stroke for Arnold. Thrillingly taut and courageous an action heroine though she is, Sarah is the most highly ambivalent figure in the film, because according to the homoerotic logic of the film the phallic mother is an inadequate compensation for the tender toughness of the cyborg father.
     
    Dyson is depicted as a loving but absent father. In a scene in the Special Edition DVD, his wife (S. Epatha Merkerson) chastises him for not wanting to spend more time with the kids; he smilingly relents and agrees to take them to an amusement park. While Dyson represents both the absent father and the evils of cold, rationalist science-Sarah accuses him from a maternalist standpoint of not “really knowing what it is to create a life, to feel it growing inside you”-he is nevertheless in many ways a warmer, more humane figure than Sarah, more malleable, less inflexible, as his decision literally to trash his life’s work to avert nuclear holocaust shows. The film also locates in this upwardly mobile black family a sensuality not present elsewhere in the film. In a scene with disquietingly racist overtones, Dyson’s wife licks his neck as she greets him clad in a bathing suit: even if middle-class aspirers, blacks sign sex. The implication is that the white family-John’s loveless adoptive parents, phallic Sarah who stands alone and refuses affection-is bereft of love, emotion, and sexuality, whereas the black family risks losing their ties to and claims on such affectional intensities in their pursuit of white middle-class ideals. They’re in danger of becoming white machines, losing their sexual and emotional vitality. If Sarah represents a fantasy of transforming into the ultimate white machine-masculinist and devoid of emotion-when her uncomputerized yet no less efficiently murderous, Terminator-like vision takes in the Dyson family, she fuses gendered modes of white supremacist gazing at the objectified black body. “White surveillance, incorporating both male and female gazes, of black bodies is sexualizing and dehumanizing,” writes Janell Hobson (39). Capturing this black family within her phallic gaze, fascistic-leather-garbed Sarah objectifies them as freaks of sexual appetite despite their middle-class, aspirationist trappings.
     
    Sharon Willis considers the relationship between Dyson and Sarah Connor, particularly in light of the speech in which Sarah accuses Dyson of being one in the line of masculinist scientists who create destructive technologies (“Men like you built the hydrogen bomb…You don’t know what it’s like to create a life, to feel it growing inside you,” says Sarah to Dyson, in a triumph of the essentialist, maternalist rhetoric that runs uncomfortably alongside masculinist violent ideologies throughout Cameron’s increasingly constrictive oeuvre). The film’s association of traditional scientific power and its disturbing potentialities with the African-American Dyson endures as a troubling, underexplored feature of the film’s more overtly articulated gender politics and implicit racial politics. Dyson, like Charles S. Dutton’s supporting character in Alien 3 (1993), is the African-American who must sacrifice himself so that the white, female hardbody-heroine may live, as his self-sacrifice in the destruction of the Cyberdyne offices evinces. As Willis writes, “why do white women’s hardbodies seem to be propped on the ‘ghosts’ of African-American men? [This is a] displacement of one difference onto another . . . . that should alert us to the mixed and ambiguous effects of our popular representations, where figures of social and sexual ambivalence” and of “undecidable identity” are all intensely eroticized. Because of race’s ongoing difficulty for culture, its difficulties can be more reassuringly “siphoned off” onto sexuality (126). But surely this is only in relative terms-sexuality proves to be a highly disturbing figure in the film, especially when seen in the context of race.
     
    Sarah’s paramilitary look and skills adumbrate the film’s larger connections to the world of military might and its ramifications for social “others.” Combat-geared Sarah, like Schwarzenegger’s Terminator, parodies the uniformed authority of T-1000’s cop, himself (itself) the parodistic version of military authority. The figure of the cop as the incarnation of “formless evil” comes across, in Fred Pfeil’s words, as a “particularly pungent if fortuitous maneuver, given national exposure of the racist brutality of Police Chief Gates’ Los Angeles Police Department a scant few months before this film’s release” (239). The Los Angeles Riots inspired by the beating of an African-American man, Rodney King, by police officers and their subsequent acquittal provide an eerie backdrop for the film’s figuration of villainy as “steely-eyed Aryan form” (Pfeil 238). Though Dyson and his family never come into contact with the T-1000, Sarah’s suggestively fascist look signals that she, too, embodies the T-1000’s connection to the fetishization of military power and phallic form. If this film appears to be suggesting a resurgence that must be disavowed as fascist imagery, then Sarah’s home invasion of the Dyson family reminds us, chillingly, that Africans have been available as targets of not only United States racism but also of the murderous ideologies of other nations, most pertinently that of Nazi Germany. We tend to think, understandably, predominantly of the annihilation of the European Jewish population in this period. “The sheer magnitude of crimes against Jews has tended to obscure the issue of state-sponsored violence against Black Germans,” Heide Fehrenbach notes in a book on the subject (87-8). Terminator 2 eerily recalls the themes of the Nazi regime in all of its frightening dimensions.
     
    The role of the phallic mother-domineering and dominant-in the national imaginary was pivotal to fascism in Nazi Germany, as Andrea Slane has demonstrated. Though I am in complete disagreement with her assessment of Hitchcock, her discussion of his 1946 film Notorious, whose chief villains are Alex Sebastian (Claude Rains), a European Nazi living in a secret Nazi stronghold in Brazil, and his mother, sheds light on the representation of Sarah here. Parsing the views of Philip Wylie, who in his 1942 study Generation of Vipers compared the domineering Nazi “mom” who destroys the men of the nation to Hitler, Slane writes that “Domineering mothers might not only cause their sons to become fascist but in fact act like fascists themselves. Madame Sebastian is a fascist by virtue of her suffocating mothering in Wylie’s sense as much as she is a suffocating mother by virtue of her fascism” (130). Slane points out that the effeminate Alex Sebastian is presented not as the violent, frightening oedipal Nazi father but instead as the victim of the “masculinized, domineering mother Madame Sebastian…As a result of this emphasis, Alex emerges as surprisingly sympathetic for a Nazi character in 1946, precisely because he is less to blame for his politics than his mother is” (131).12
     
    Sarah’s masculinized sexuality serves several functions, one of the most important of which is to accommodate the retooled Schwarzenegger/Terminator image to the reshaped Terminator mythos of this film. Sarah is the split-off, “bad” mother-father to the good Terminator’s new benevolent, masochistic father-mother; her aggression highlights his vulnerability and emotional accessibility. The Aryan fantasy of the T-1000 everywhere suggests a transforming social world for which Sarah prepares her son, a new fascist state in which all is warfare, aggression, and fetishized military surfaces. The relevance of these configurations for queer theory lies in the ways in which the T-1000 bears the residues of queer sexual appropriation of images of masculinist power. Moreover, the character demonstrates the endurance of cultural erotic fixations upon these very images, libidinal investments that are to a certain degree sublimated but are also explosively prominent. Sarah functions as a queer sexual fetish object as well as a disciplining force. She is the Law of the Father as much as its enemy, chastising sensitive John for his sensitivity, conditioning him always to be more properly masculinist, not to care about her or to care about anything at all except his mission (this is why Sarah’s breakdown, in which she hugs John as she weeps, is heartbreakingly moving rather than some kind of concession to essentialist gendered stereotypes of motherhood, or at least not only a concession: this is the moment in which Sarah finally relents in her unyielding campaign to masculinize John). She is both the Law of normalization and its perverse undermining, in that it is precisely the hypermasculinity she adopts to socialize John properly that lends her an air of sadomasochistic, queer sexuality as exciting as it is disturbing. (This hypermasculinism can also be said to have a resistant quality in that it allows her to defy her hystericization by the phallocratic psychoanalytic institution that incarcerates and brutalizes her. The extraordinarily unpleasant scenes of her abuse at the hands of smug psychiatrists and lascivious and violent security guards stand in for the discourse of hysteria that attends to the construction of womanhood from the late nineteenth-century forward.13) Sarah seems the fulfillment of the maddeningly indecipherable, haunting final image of Karen Allen in the gay S/M leather gear get-up in William Friedkin’s disturbing, distasteful, and brilliant film Cruising (1981), about an undercover cop (Al Pacino) investigating a serial killer’s murders within the gay S/M subculture of late-70s New York City. Sarah’s narrative arc transforms her from the Sacher-Masoch model of the icy, sadistic female tormentor into the proper Oedipal mother, nurturing and disciplining John. If, as we noted earlier, Terminator 2 can be described as fascist kitsch, the figures of the good Terminator as leather-daddy, the evil Terminator as cop, and the Terminator-like phallic mother correspond to S/M culture’s fetishistic appropriation of fascist tropes. And in its redeployment of these themes, the Terminator franchise has lost none of its popular culture appeal, as evinced by the fourth installment of the film franchise, Terminator Salvation (2009), starring Christian Bale as an adult John Connor, and the FOX television series version of the films, Terminator: The Sarah Connor Chronicles, which extends the mythos to its rightful place as fascist kitsch’s double, sentimental family drama, albeit in often challenging, daring ways (which may account for the series’ abrupt 2009 cancellation after only two seasons).
     

    Cyborg Narcissus: Or, the Queerness of Cyborgs

     
    While Susan Jeffords’s argument in Hard Bodies was oracular in many respects, on a key point it was not: Hollywood’s depiction of individualism from the end of the Reagan era forward has turned out to be much less than affirming. The masculine individualism that Hollywood has represented since the late 80s has been a fissured one, as demonstrated by the roaming identities of Carter Nix in De Palma’s Raising Cain (1992), the bifurcated male psyche in Fight Club (1999), and the collective male ego of Zodiac (2006), representations that defy any notion of a structural masculine coherence. I propose that this split in the Hollywood representation of masculinity reflects a sustained conflict between narcissistic and masochistic modes of male identity. A narcissism/masochism split informs the conflict between Schwarzenegger’s masochistic Terminator-protector and the narcissistic villainous Terminators of the sequels, a split that epitomizes the larger one that runs through Bush-to-Bush films.
     
    In Slavoj Žižek’s view, the Terminator of the 1984 film represents the mindlessness and relentlessness of the drive: “The horror of this figure consists precisely in the fact that it functions as a programmed automaton who, even when all that remains of him is a metallic, legless skeleton, persists in his demand and pursues his victim with no trace of compromise or hesitation. The terminator is the embodiment of the drive, devoid of desire” (22). This point is intensified and literally articulated in the 2003 sequel Terminator 3: Rise of the Machines, when the short-circuiting Terminator rather desperately shrieks at John (Nick Stahl), now a man in early adulthood: “Desire is irrelevant. I am a machine!” On the face of it, Žižek is right. If the Terminator represents the desireless machine, then it most successfully embodies that American fantasy of an inviolate male body, now not only resistant to but utterly devoid of desire. Yet how irrelevant is desire to the Terminator films, especially the sequels? I would argue that part of the Oedipal drama of the films, especially its sequels, is the growing and plangent desire on the part of the Terminators, not just Arnold but the villainous ones as well: Terminator 2‘s sleekly upgraded T-1000 (Robert Patrick), whose liquid metal body can morph into new shapes, and Terminator 3‘s T-X, more commonly referred to as the Terminatrix (Kristanna Loken), an even more advanced robot whose human-looking mimetic liquid metal exterior covers a lithe endoskeleton. The Terminator comes to seem not a figure of desirelessness but of queer desire that is typed as narcissistic.
     
    In section VII of his famous 1836 essay “Nature,” Ralph Waldo Emerson writes that “man is a god in ruins” (231). To consider this suggestive phrasing within the parameters of a new narcissistic/masochistic split in American masculinity, we can say that Hollywood manhood, shown as fundamentally split, in its masochistic mode corresponds to this Emersonian view, representing the ruination of the chief American god, the normative white male. With this theme of ruination also comes a desire for wholeness, to see the destroyed male body reconstituted. The first sequel to Terminator establishes the Bush-to-Bush pattern of the destruction and restoration of the white male body. Again and again, Schwarzenegger’s body undergoes physical assault: he is bashed into walls, riddled with bullets, punctured with an iron spear that goes completely through his prostrate body. His head is pounded by a movable anvil into the wall; half of his face gets torn off in combat, revealing the pulsing-red-eyed metal man beneath; his arm gets caught in the grinding wheel of a metal press that recalls Industrial Age accidents. Shorn of arm and deficient of face, the cyborg delivers his final, deadly blow to his enemy while lying on a conveyor belt.
     
    Panning the film, Terrence Rafferty locates the central flaw in the “insane conceit” of making Schwarzenegger the underdog. Schwarzenegger’s T-800 model is outmatched by the T-1000, “a more advanced Terminator model.” “This new Terminator isn’t a brute: he’s made of some sort of liquid metal, with shape-shifting properties, and he’s sleeker and more versatile than the old Arnold model” (316). In contrast, the “T-800 is almost human here: since he’s been superseded by the spiffier model, we can see him as a vulnerable guy (or guyoid), and shed a tear when he sacrifices himself to save humanity from nuclear holocaust” (317). Pace Rafferty’s view, there are several interesting implications in the film’s refit of Schwarzenegger. One of these is the disorganization of the traditional male spectatorial position-instead of exclusively looking through Schwarzenegger’s eyes, we also look at him, invited to gape at his dismembering even as we marvel at his body’s endurance and prowess. The first Terminator effected this same spectatorial disorganization, inviting us to gawk at Schwarzenegger’s cyborg as a cartoon spectacle of manhood, but in the sequel we are asked also to sympathize. We are asked to sympathize with the taciturn Terminator’s increasingly masochistic availability as an icon of stoic suffering. As Brett Farmer writes in a reconsideration of Freudian theories of masochism, masochism, while highly conventional for the female subject position, is “profoundly disruptive for male subjectivity, in which it subverts the moorings of an active phallic identification” (242), and however motivated by opportunistic commercial desires on the part of director and star to present Schwarzenegger as a family-values hero, the film’s make-over of Schwarzenegger as a suffering and violated machine-body has some unsettling implications.14
     
    Terminator 2 brings out the Christian core of masochism, the destruction and restoration of the body of a beautiful white man. When John holds up the cyborg’s bullet-riddled leather jacket to the sunlight, the pattern of light through the bullet holes recalls the purported image of Christ on the Shroud of Turin. The T-800 sacrificially gives up its life at the end of the film, countermanding John’s tearful demands that he remain alive-the cyborg father dying for the teenage delinquent’s would-be Christ. In this film, the good cyborg’s destruction at the end, endlessly anticipated in a series of brutal physical pulverizations, is a kind of restoration, an honorary achievement of humanity upon the killing machine.
     
    There is an extraordinarily plangent moment (in the Special Edition DVD) when the cyborg submits to a special operation in which the chip in his “learning computer” brain is removed to allow for adaptability and change-in other words, to allow him to become more human, “and not such a dork all the time,” as John puts it. In full phallic woman mode, Sarah, like a postmodern Judith, the biblical heroine who cut off the head of the evil ruler Holofernes, attempts to smash the chip, thus rendering the Terminator inert. Like the angel staying Abraham’s hand, John prevents her from destroying the chip, screaming “No!” Noticing the delay when reactivated, the Terminator asks very simply, “Did something happen?” The vulnerability and the innocence of the Terminator here matches the refinement of his physical image. The cyborg is D.H. Lawrence’s hard, isolate, stoic, killer American manhood as New Age man, as vulnerable as he is murderous.
     
    Maintaining a tortuous tension between the simultaneous murderousness and vulnerability of Schwarzenegger’s cyborg, the film expresses and fulfils the desire to see a male body violated and destroyed, but then reconstituted. This film innovates the now-ubiquitous computer-generated imagery (CGI) technique of morphing, which allows one image to blend or melt seamlessly into another. The god in ruins theme is expressed not only through the endurance and suffering of the T-800 but also through the endless reconstitutions of the morphing T-1000, whose constant physical transmogrifications connote his liquid properties-the essential softness of his hard, chiseled body, which nevertheless looks diminutive and even fragile in comparison to Schwarzenegger’s hulking own. In addition to being able to simulate the surfaces it touches-human bodies, checkerboard-pattern linoleum floors-the T-1000 can recover from almost any injury. Though the T-1000, who can turn parts of its body into deadly phallic instruments-long, protuberant, knifelike blades an especial favorite-routinely punctures and pulverizes human victims (to say nothing of other machines), its own body is a site of constant injury. Robert Patrick’s cop experiences as much trauma as he delivers. Routinely the recipient of furious rounds of machine-gun bullets, turned into crumbling ice by an oceanic tide of liquid nitrogen, his head punctured by bombs that leave gaping holes in their wake, his torso sheared in half, the cyborg cop absorbs recurring rude shocks, displayed as gaping silver-edged wounds in his hard/soft flesh that swell and then fade away, restoring his Teflon-smooth body to pristine perfection. Oscillating between modes of male power and violability, switching from phallic murderousness to pliant malleability, the T-1000 is both god and ruin.
     
    Masochism and narcissism have both been associated with queer masculinity. In “Homo-Narcissism: Or, Heterosexuality,” Michael Warner critiques the psychoanalytic construction of homosexuality as narcissistic desire. “Imagining that the homosexual is narcissistically contained in an unbreakable fixation on himself,” Warner writes, “serves two functions at once: it allows a self-confirming pathology by declaring homosexuals’ speech, their interrelations, to be an illusion; and more fundamentally it allows the constitution of heterosexuality as such” (202). The queerest aspect of cyborg manhood in Terminator 2 is the T-1000’s narcissism, his unbreakable fixation on his own infinitely malleable body. A mimetic poly-alloy, this morphing cyborg can resemble any surface it touches, but no matter how many permutations it undergoes or the alterity of its myriad forms, the T-1000 always reverts back to its own primary image, that of a lean, chiseled white man. One would expect to see, in this scene of his birth in our present, the T-1000 initially appearing as a silver blob of liquid metal, but from our first glimpse of him he is his white male self. We never see the mimetic T-1000 assume the shape of this man; he is always already this white male body. The T-1000 appropriates an unfortunate cop’s professional identity, but not, significantly, the cop’s physical body; the implication is that the T-1000 already has a perfect body all his own. A copy with no original, the T-1000, no matter how many other bodies he copies, always reverts back to his first image, as if he were constantly attempting to capture an imaginary illusion of wholeness. Though pounded, pummeled, punctured, perforated, and pulverized, the T-1000 always restores his own image, surveying his own recreated form, staring at parts of his body, getting a charge from his own endlessly renewed cohesion.
     
    The homo-narcissism of the T-1000 fully conveys itself only in a scene that appears to carry the opposite message. In a purely excessive, extraneous moment in the psychiatric hospital where Sarah is imprisoned, the T-1000, phallically rising up in the form of a tiled linoleum floor, duplicates the form of a portly, plug-ugly security guard as he gets an automated cup of coffee. Duplicated, the guard stares at his own replicated image; but the T-1000 is also staring at itself now in the original model of the guard. Suggesting that it feels it has unsatisfactorily replicated itself, the T-1000 pointedly shoots its phallic finger into the guard’s eye, as if retaliating against an original yet inferior image. The phallus through eye serves as a kind of phallus-restoring castration, the narcissistic cyborg’s rebellion against an original that utterly lacks the clone’s smooth and sleek perfection.
     
    In an especially striking scene in which the T-1000 transforms into ice in the nitrogen-tide, he looks like a piece of postmodern art. (One imagines a title: “Untitled [Cop in Ice].”) Parts of his body break off, and he stumbles to the ground, losing limbs. When his forearm breaks off, he looks at it with horror and shock: this is Narcissus’s despair at the loss of his idealized image, the stared-at stump no less graphic a sign of castration than the boy Nathanael’s twisted-off hands and feet in Hoffman’s story. Now Schwarzenegger’s T-800 utters his famous line, “Hasta la vista, Baby,” as he shoots the frozen and maimed T-1000, blowing him to smithereens. We see not only the T-1000’s narcissistic trauma, the loss of his ideal image, but also the masochistic T-800’s satisfying vengeance, a vengeance that confers a kind of masculinist integrity upon the older, less advanced, but more honorable model.15
     
    If masochistic manhood has emerged in psychoanalytically inflected queer theory as a radical break with normative manhood, films made during the Terminator 2 era, such as Dances with Wolves (1990) and Schindler’s List (1993)-and later films as disparate as Fight Club (1999), The Passion of the Christ (2004), The Chronicles of Riddick (2004), and A History of Violence (2005)-make clear that masochism can have normalizing as well as disruptive effects. In these works, the ravaged, ruined male body, writhing in masochistic pain, can destabilize audience expectations and spectatorial positions, forcing an audience to see normative manhood in highly unusual and challenging ways that defy and disrupt normativity. But they can also, by fulfilling the audience’s own masochistic fantasies and ennobling theatrical, self-conscious suffering, restore the model of normative masculinity with an unflinching resolve that results in this model’s greater cultural and social entrenchment. If the normative male body is left vulnerable in the face of challenges to it in the form of new, probing, questioning critiques from feminism, culture and race studies, and queer theory, masochism emerges as an ingenious method for fatiguing this vulnerability, subjecting manhood to an apparent critique that leaves it wounded and thrashing but ultimately restored, better for the challenge, stronger for having demonstrated its resilience. Masochism provides normative manhood with a regimen that ensures its resilient health.
     
    As Suárez writes of Kenneth Anger’s Scorpio Rising, “masochism and self-immolation are the subject matter of the last section of the film, which features bikers riding at night through a city,” as the “sound of roaring engines and screeching tires” punctuates their revels. These revels become more and more dangerous as the bikers lose control of their bikes and crash: we can see that “the sadism of [previous sequences] appears introjected by the group and leads to self-annihilation in the final climactic shattering of man and machine.” Again, these could be descriptions of Cameron’s film. Like Anger’s film, Cameron’s culminates with an image of “final self-annihilation”: Schwarzenegger’s sacrificial demand for his own termination (Suárez 171). Schwarzenegger’s masochism cannot, however, be called the introjection of a previously exhibited sadism; rather, his position has been masochistic all along, the images of the maimed police officers allegorizing his own masochistic subjectivity. Schwarzenegger’s self-immolation at the end does not represent resistance but rather the ultimate acquiescence to the normative order, albeit one that he sanctions through his death: the restoration of the family, his exclusion from which renders the restoration poignantly bittersweet. Masochistic self-sacrifice emerges here as a way of purging difference on all registers-foreignness, outsize bodies, homoerotic associations, cyborg bodies, the damaged, irreparable body-leaving the properly heterosexual, if pointedly fatherless, human family intact.
     
    The queer subject position in Terminator 2 emerges not in the vulnerable, underdog, masochistic Terminator but in the sleeker, craven, implacably cruel, narcissistic T-1000, shaking his finger in disciplinary dismissal of the phallic mother and writhing in anguish at the climax in his enforced destruction in a hellfire that suggests punitive, Dantean torment. In this spectacular climax, Terminator 2 exposes the masochism inherent in reactionary, normative manhood as it revels in the queer heroism of the cruelly narcissistic villain. In the equally ideologically wobbly but also vastly underrated Terminator 3: Rise of the Machines (2003), the advanced Terminator’s narcissism is depicted even more directly: after a bathroom bout with Schwarzenegger’s once again fumbling, even more masochistic Terminator [“I’m an obsolete model!”], the sleekly sinister Terminatrix eyes herself approvingly in a row of mirror-stage bathroom mirrors. The dull and cumbersome Terminator Salvation (2009) does away with the delicious narcissism of the diabolically advanced Terminator altogether, instead aiming to restore the might and menace of Schwarzenegger’s T-800 model when it was an unstoppable killing machine of humans in the original Terminator, and to go back even further by introducing the bulky, rough-hewn, skull-faced T-600 line. Accordingly, the 2009 reboot, with its endless array of styles of masochistic manhood, is the least queer-toned of all of the films, though in its sub-plot depiction of the trio of Kyle Reese (the human hero of the first Terminator) as a younger version of himself that suggests the ephebe, a new human-machine hybrid named Marcus who appears to be a sculpted human male for most of the film, and the mute but resourceful young African-American female child they care for, the film suggests yet another new-style queer family. Terminator 2, however, remains unsurpassed in the volatility and potency of its unwieldy brew of themes. The film suggests the centrality of queer identity in constructions of masculinity in the inter-Bush years, even or especially when those constructions reveal their ambivalence towards fascistic monumentality, raising new questions in turn about the implications of such gender constructions for queerness as well.
     

    David Greven is an Assistant Professor of English at Connecticut College. He is the author of Manhood in Hollywood from Bush to Bush (University of Texas Press, 2009), Gender and Sexuality in Star Trek (McFarland, 2009), and Men Beyond Desire: Manhood, Sex, and Violation in American Literature (Palgrave Macmillan, 2005).

     

     

    Footnotes

     
    1. See Lee Edelman’s No Future. While I make positive use of Edelman here, the view I take in Manhood in Hollywood from Bush to Bush of his recent work is much more skeptical.

     

     
    2. De Angelis continues, “With Marlon Brando’s look in The Wild One (1954) as its model, the culture used the motorcycle and the leather jacket as a countercultural antidote to social demands of the bourgeois conformity in the 1950s. By the time that the first gay leather bars appeared in the early 1960s, leather had come to signify an aggressive masculinity that many gay men used to separate themselves from associations of homosexuality with effeminacy. [Soon straight culture began to appropriate the homo-leather look, but at] the same time, however, black leather culture was also being targeted and stereotyped by the mainstream as the realm of self-obsessed, threatening, and specifically homosexual hypermasculinity” (157-158).

     

     
    3. I’m in agreement with Robin Wood, who brilliantly analyzes the film in Hollywood from Vietnam to Reagan, that Cruising, despite its reputation as a homophobic text, is one of the most daring (and difficult) films about sexuality ever made in Hollywood, surely one of the most effectively unsettling. The film has finally been released on DVD and now appears to be getting a bit of the critical attention it deserves.

     

     
    4. Drawing on Eve Kosofsky Sedgwick’s discussion of camp and kitsch, Andrew Hewitt, in his discussion of the conflation of homosexuality and fascism in Modernist texts, writes that “kitsch representationalism…marks the aesthetic meeting point of homosexuality and fascism for the contemporary cultural imagination” (206). Provocative for our discussion of Terminator 2, Hewitt notes that “The representation of cute boys in sharp black uniforms is (considered to be) homoerotically charged, not simply as a result of the specific object of representation, but by virtue of the frisson that representation-a dirty pleasure-invokes” (206) The problem for queer viewerships posed by the camp/kitsch split is located with the debates over representation itself, “both aesthetically and politically suspect from the perspective of modernism” (206). See also Sedgwick, Epistemology, 150-7. These themes came up in our comparative discussion of Bersani’s “Is the Rectum a Grave?” and Cameron’s film.

     

     
    5. The term “sadomasochism” remains highly controversial. Deleuze debunked the notion of masochism and sadism as the inverse of each other, thereby dispelling as well the myth of sadomasochism as a fused perversion. But Estela V. Welldon problematizes Deleuze in her recent study on sadomasochism. “Interestingly enough, at the beginning of the [twentieth] century, before sadism was adopted as an official psychiatric term, the noted psychopathologist Albert von Schrenck-Notzing introduced the term alolagnia, which meant lust for pain, and although it defined the desire to cause pain as an end in itself, it did not make any differentiation between sadism and masochism.” In some ways, the same can be said for the erotics of Terminator films. See Welldon, Sadomasochism, 9.

     

     
    6. Freud wrote Three Essays on the Theory of Sexuality in 1905 but kept adding to it until 1924.

     

     
    7. For a discussion of the crucial role played by the incendiary topic of pederasty in fascist ideologies and discourses, see Hewitt, Political, especially Chapter Four.

     

     
    8. Many factors enable the film to engage in such deeply dangerous fantasies. One of these is the tacit assurance audience members have that family films such as Terminator 2 would never depict such erotically threatening tableaux, especially with Schwarzenegger’s retooled kinder gentler star image (as the same year’s Kindergarten Cop makes clear) at its center. Another is that the rampant violence and mayhem distract one from considering the erotic impulses behind them. American cinema is firmly split between sex and violence, believing that one cannot be represented along with the other, even if such a proposition is patently absurd. The ingeniousness of such films as Terminator 2 lies in their ability to indulge in deeply disturbing and volatile cultural fantasies-fascism, homoeroticism, pedophilia, carnal desires that erupt in spectacular violence-while maintaining the aura of family entertainment. One can say the same of Spielberg’s Jurassic Park (1993), which uses its family-friendly storyline to camouflage its predilection for terrifying moments such as the one in which the mammoth T-Rex bites the head off an obnoxious lawyer. The debates over violent movie content that surrounded Spielberg’s earlier Indiana Jones and the Temple of Doom (1984)-one of his most entertaining and subversive films-which featured the pulling out of a man’s heart from his chest, transformed into paranoiac denunciations of sexual content in Bush-to-Bush cinema, as evinced by the debate over Philip Kaufman’s Henry and June (1990). Memorably, the late French filmmaker Louis Malle remarked, “You can show a breast being cut off and get an ‘R’ rating, but if you show this breast being kissed or fondled you get an ‘X.’” Terminator 2 uses violence as an inexhaustibly broad palette for the expression of every human desire, and uses the cyborg body to suggest every human desirer. As such, it is entertainment for the posthuman family.

     

     
    9. In his essay “Pleasure Principles,” Caleb Crain provides a good portrait of Warner’s celebration of the queer homosocial as utopian and “world-making.” I take this disquieting strain in queer theory to task in Chapter One of my Men Beyond Desire.

     

     
    10. Here the contentious question of camp and kitsch responses comes up again. “In the highly contestative world of kitsch and kitsch-recognition there is no mediating level of consciousness; so it is necessarily true that the structure of contagion whereby it takes one to know one, and whereby any object about which the question ‘Is it kitsch?’ can be asked immediately becomes kitsch, remains, under the system of kitsch-attribution, a major scandal….Camp, on the other hand, seems to involve a gayer and more spacious angle of view. I think it may be true that, as Robert Dawidoff suggests, the typifying gesture of camp is really something amazingly simple; the moment at which a consumer of culture makes the wild surmise, ‘What if the person who made this was gay, too?’ Unlike kitsch-attribution, then, camp-recognition doesn’t ask, ‘What kind of debased creature could possibly be the right audience for this spectacle?’ Instead, it says what if: What if the right audience for this were exactly me?’” (Sedgwick 156). Along these lines, Terminator 2 is kitsch-vulgarly naïve, sentimental art-that provokes a gay camp response. As Hewitt writes, “the kitsch of fascism potentially becomes a homosexual camp through the workings of a logic identified by Sedgwick as the logic of identification” (208). Queer audiences no less than straight respond to the film’s kitschy reformulation of the Oedipus complex as a new union with an apparently murderous but actually benign and loving patriarch, reconfigured here as masochistic cyborg.

     

     
    11. Terminator 3 also makes the suggestion of fascist homoeroticism in the 1991 film newly explicit: in its version of the standard scene in which Schwarzenegger brutalizes humans in order to get their clothes and a pair of dark sunglasses, his reprogrammed cyborg demands the leather outfit of an obviously gay male dancer, gyrating to the sounds of The Village People’s “Macho Man,” in a “Ladies Night” performance at the local bar. “Wait your turn, honey,” the dancer tells Schwarzenegger, then rebuking him with “Talk to the hand, honey.” Schwarzenegger grabs the dancer’s hand, crushing it in the process as he repeats his request for the dancer’s clothes into his hand. Sauntering out of the bar, now wearing the explicitly gay man’s leather, Schwarzenegger completes his queer blazon by reaching into a pocket and pulling out what should be dark sunglasses but are, instead, Dame Edna-esque pink, sequined, campy spectacles, which he pulverizes into the ground with his ponderous cyborg foot. This depiction of male revolt against the effeminating threat of a queerness it has also just completely appropriated is an exact image of the cultural practices the Terminator films exemplify.

     

     
    12. It’s absurd to write, as Slane does, that Hitchcock incites “spectators to the postwar vision of proper political subjectivity based upon gender conformity and heterosexuality” (124); I can think of no director less devoted to maintaining and promoting heterosexist conformity, an institution Hitchcock’s films determinedly, even obsessively, challenge.

     

     
    13. See Foucault: “The hystericization of women, involving “a thorough medicalization of their bodies and their sex, was carried out in the name of the responsibility they owed to the health of the children, the solidity of the family institution, and the safeguarding of society” (147). Recently, however, Juliet Mitchell has offered a striking critique of the dismissal of hysteria as a psychological phenomenon. See Mad Men and Medusas: Reclaiming Hysteria. One of the crucial elements of Mitchell’s argument is, interestingly, the overlooked importance of sibling relationships.

     

     
    14. For further discussions of a politically useful disorganization of normative manhood, especially interested in a revised version of Freudian masochism, see Brett Farmer’s excellent Spectacular Passions, 241-6; Farmer builds on the pioneering work in this line: Kaja Silverman’s Male Subjectivity at the Margins and Leo Bersani’s Homos.

     

     
    15. For a further discussion of masochistic male vengeance on the narcissistic male, see my article “Contemporary Masculinity and the Double-Protagonist Film” in Cinema Journal 48:4 (Summer 2009), and, in a more expanded version, Chapter 4 in my Manhood in Hollywood from Bush to Bush.

     

     

     

    Works Cited

     

    • Bersani, Leo. Homos. Cambridge, MA: Harvard UP, 1995.
    • —. “Is the Rectum a Grave?” AIDS: Cultural Analysis and Cultural Activism. Ed. Douglas Crimp. Cambridge, MA: MIT Press, 1989. 197-223.
    • Crain, Caleb. “Pleasure Principles: Queer Theorists and Gay Journalists Wrestle over the Politics of Sex.” Lingua Franca 7.8 (Oct 1997): 26-37.
    • DeAngelis, Michael. Gay Fandom and Crossover Stardom: James Den, Mel Gibson, and Keanu Reeves. Durham, NC: Duke UP, 2001.
    • Edelman, Lee. No Future: Queer Theory and the Death Drive. Durham, NC: Duke UP, 2007.
    • Emerson, Ralph Waldo. Essays, Lectures, and Orations. London: William S. Orr, 1848.
    • Farmer, Brett. Spectacular Passions: Cinema, Fantasy, Gay Male Spectatorships. Durham, NC: Duke UP, 2000.
    • Fehrenbach, Heide. Race After Hitler: Black Occupation Children in Postwar Germany and America. Princeton, NJ: Princeton UP, 2005.
    • Foucault, Michel. The History of Sexuality, Volume I. Trans. Robert Hurley. New York: Vintage Books, 1988-1990.
    • Freud, Sigmund. Three Essays on the Theory of Sexuality. Ed. James Strachey. New York: Basic Books, 1962.
    • —. “The ‘Uncanny.’” Writings on Art and Literature. Trans. James Strachey. Stanford, Ca.: Stanford UP, 1997. 193-233.
    • Frost, Laura. Sex Drives: Fantasies of Fascism in Literary Modernism. Ithaca: Cornell UP, 2002.
    • Grenville, Bruce. The Uncanny: Experiments in Cyborg Culture. Vancouver, Canada: Arsenal Pulp Press, 2001.
    • Greven, David. Men Beyond Desire: Manhood, Sex, and Violation in American Literature. New York: Palgrave Macmillan, 2005.
    • [CrossRef]
    • —. Manhood in Hollywood from Bush to Bush. Austin: U of Texas P, 2009.
    • Haraway, Donna. Simians, Cyborgs, and Women: The Reinvention of Nature. New York: Routledge, 1991.
    • Hewitt, Andrew. Political Inversions: Homosexuality, Fascism, & the Modernist Imaginary. Palo Alto: Stanford UP, 1996.
    • Hobson, Janell. Venus in the Dark: Blackness and Beauty in Popular Culture. New York: Routledge, 2005.
    • Hoffman, E. T. A. Weird Tales, Volume 1. BiblioLife, 2009.
    • Jeffords, Susan. Hard Bodies: Hollywood Masculinity in the Reagan Era. New Brunswick, NJ: Rutgers UP, 1994.
    • Krasniewicz, Louise and Michael Blitz. “The Replicator: Starring Arnold Schwarzenegger as the Great Meme-Machine.” Stars in Our Eyes: The Star Phenomenon in the Contemporary Era. Ed. Angela Ndalianis. Westport, CT: Greenwood Publishing Group, 2002. 21-44.
    • Lawrence, D.H. Studies in Classic American Literature: The Works of D.H. Lawrence. Ed. Ezra Greenspan, Lindeth Vasey, and John Worthen. New York: Cambridge University Press, 1979.
    • Marshall, Stuart. “The Contemporary Political Use of Gay History: The Third Reich.” How Do I Look?: Queer Film and Video. Ed. Cindy Patton et al. Seattle: Bay Press, 1991. 65-102.
    • Mitchell, Juliet. Mad Men and Medusas: Reclaiming Hysteria. New York: Basic Books, 2001.
    • Mosse, George L. The Image of Man: The Creation of Modern Masculinity. New York: Oxford UP, 1996.
    • Pfeil, Fred. “Home Fires Burning: Family Noir in Blue Velvet and Terminator 2.” Shades of Noir. Ed. Joan Copjec. New York: Verso, 1993. 227-260.
    • Rafferty, Terrence. The Thing Happens: Ten Years of Writing about the Movies. New York: Grove Press, 1993.
    • Ramakers, Micha. Dirty Pictures: Tom of Finland, Masculinity, and Homosexuality. New York: St. Martin’s Press, 2000.
    • Rushing, Janice Hocker, and Thomas S. Frentz. Projecting the Shadow: The Cyborg Hero in American Film. Chicago: U of Chicago P, 1995.
    • Sedgwick, Eve Kosofsky. Epistemology of the Closet. Berkeley: California UP, 1990.
    • Silverman, Kaja. Male Subjectivity at the Margins. New York: Routledge, 1992.
    • Slane, Andrea. A Not So Foreign Affair: Fascism, Sexuality, and the Cultural Rhetoric of American Democracy. Durham, NC: Duke UP, 2001.
    • Suárez, Juan A. Bike Boys, Drag Queens, and Superstars: Avant-Garde, Mass Culture, and Gay Identities in the 1960s Underground Cinema. Bloomington: Indiana UP, 1996.
    • Tasker, Yvonne. Spectacular Bodies: Gender, Genre and the Action Cinema. 1993. New York: Routledge, 1996.
    • Thompson, Kristin. Storytelling in the New Hollywood: Understanding Classical Narrative Technique. Cambridge: Harvard UP, 1999.
    • Warner, Michael. “Homo-Narcissism: Or, Heterosexuality.” Engendering Men: The Question of Male Feminist Criticism. Ed. Joseph A. Boone and Michael Cadden. New York: Routledge, 1990. 190-206.
    • Welldon, Estela V. Sadomasochism. Cambridge, UK: Icon Books, 2002.
    • Willis, Sharon. High Contrast: Race and Gender in Contemporary Hollywood Films. Durham, NC: Duke UP, 1997.
    • Wood, Robin. Hollywood from Vietnam to Reagan. 1986. New York: Columbia UP, 2003.
    • Žižek, Slavoj. Looking Awry: An Introduction to Jacques Lacan through Popular Culture. Cambridge, MA: MIT Press, 1992.

     

     
  • Tolerating the Intolerable, Enduring the Unendurable: Representing the Accident in Driver’s Education Films

    Jillian Smith (bio)
    University of North Florida
    jlsmith@unf.edu

    Abstract
     
    Driver’s Education, like all accident-prevention discourses, attempts to govern that which it cannot represent. Representing the accident reduces the multiple, complex force of its coming forth. The images of accidents shown to students in driver’s education can never be the accident that awaits them, and the accident that awaits them can never be known in advance. Such conservative management produces a blindly reactive discourse (in the Nietzschean/Deleuzian sense) deeply preoccupied with self-preservation. Faced with active forces of potential disorganization, accident prevention aims to conserve, not spend, to turn forces back toward the conservation and enclosure of the integral self and to harness repetition toward the security of the same. In accident prevention, variation is the enemy.
     

     
    How do we represent the accident? And what do we see in its representation? How can we represent an event of disorganizing forces overpowering organized forces, and how can we see it?
     
    The engineering feat of The World Trade Center, New York, consisted largely in organizing the towers so they would repeatedly overpower the forces of disorganization they would encounter: wind, gravity, rain, fire, impact. Could we have seen the accident waiting within the very invention of the World Trade Center? Every day the towers endured multiple forces, and then one day they didn’t. Could we have foreseen the accident? And what do we see in the accident?
     
    Paul Virilio, in a plea for a “perception of accident” that could counter some of the dominating disorganizing forces on our cultural and political horizon, posits this idea, in the words of Hannah Arendt, “Progress and catastrophe are opposite faces of the same coin” (Virilio 40). In emphasizing that accident is immanent to all invention, Virilio isn’t calling for an end to invention or progress; he’s calling for a refinement of our perception of the accident because in the accident we are offered a perception of the invention that may not be open to us if not for its accident. And as accident looms in increasingly global proportions, the need to break cultural habits of perception becomes more urgent. In The Accident of Art, Virilio offers his proper perception of the World Trade Center accident/attack. To watch the collapse of two of the tallest buildings in the world (tragic effects and intolerance of terrorism aside) reveals the hubris of having built them in the first place, especially without a cement core (Virilio and Lotringer 103-8). I would guess that most people, upon seeing the fall of either tower, among a complex of responses, were surprised at the strange and sudden melting grace with which each tower crumbled. This perhaps was evidence of a hubristic design flaw, a flaw that reveals how the power of the building can be turned against itself, its metal weave enduring wind but not extreme heat, a flaw that allows us to see the tragedy of unchecked zeal. But can Virilio’s visual exhibit of numerous accidents, both “natural” and “man-made,” produce such a critical insight? Does his “museum of accidents” escape the aestheticization of horror with which he is concerned? And does it foster complex perception of the hubris upon which the towers were erected and stood, some critical insight into a complexity of forces including distribution of wealth and resources within and among nations as well as sensibilities of national/ethnic/religious/economic/military identities and loyalties?
     
    While Virilio longs ultimately for the accident to be prevented, he focuses his energy on sharpening the perception of the accident. With this goal, he became the focus of an exhibition of the accident, on the first anniversary of the terrorist attack on the World Trade Center New York, for the Fondation Cartier Contemporary Art Museum in Paris. Both the exhibition and its catalog contain images of numerous and diverse accidents, including airline crashes, earthquakes, nuclear detonations, and the World Trade Center collapse. This exhibit of representations of accidents, for Virilio, attempts to respond to a weak and susceptible state of perception:
     

    By progressive habituation to insensitivity and indifference in the face of the craziest scenes, endlessly repeated by the various “markets of the spectacle” in the name of an alleged freedom of expression . . . we are succumbing to the ravages of a programming of extravagance at any cost which ends not any longer in meaninglessness, but in the heroicization of terror and terrorism.
     

     

    Consumer appetite for what Virilio calls “real time”-the witnessing of accident or spectacle (seemingly) at the same moment it occurs, an opportunity now offered endlessly through twenty-four hour news media, reality television, and YouTube videos-is a principal culprit in our weakened perception. Virilio answers by reintroducing the lost “interval,” the distance between the event and its representation that produces the more important distance: “critical distance.” Yet while the simplicity of the plan here is enticing, it is tied to the same reactive energy that it produces. The unexamined assumptions of causality and direct correspondence in Virilio’s logic prove disturbing, especially when set beside the nostalgic desire for what appears to be an auratic art experience that would reintroduce presence in the representation by way of its physical distance, a presence confirmed primarily by the contemplative state induced in the viewer, in other words by the viewer’s own security of presence.1 Precisely this kind of distancing from the event of the accident in the name of accident-prevention and self-security can be seen in the reactive momentum of accident prevention over and over again. In other words, the intolerance to the accident that necessarily drives accident-prevention quickly becomes an inability to endure the force, production, and productivity of accident itself. Here Virilio gives us an instance of the dangers of reactive thought. In his exhibit the reactive, conservative underpinnings are covered with a rather queer artistic celebration of trauma that, it could be argued, delights in an aestheticization of horror, limiting the encounter with accident through a classically-principled, aestheticizing display of its representations.

     
    Virilio wants exhibition of accident to play a role in prevention of accident but seems more to exert a critical and aesthetic control that blinds itself to the accident even as it claims to open perception to it. J.G. Ballard, best known for rendering the car crash a libidinal event in his novel Crash, also displayed three crashed cars in a London gallery, where the audience response, far from having the “critical distance” called for by Virilio, “verged on nervous hysteria” (Ballard 25). Rather than limiting the encounter with the representations of accident-the cars-Ballard opens it by assembling elements for further disorganization. He hired a “topless girl” to interview guests and provided alcohol for the opening night, which “deteriorated into a drunken brawl” where “she was almost raped in the back seat of the Pontiac” (25). Far from being encouraged to seek a critical distance, viewers are provoked to respond in the moment of their engagement with accident, opening the exhibit itself to include viewer participation, where nudity and alcohol incite a less measured, less inhibited response to interview questions, and where viewers enter into the representations, violating the (critical) distance between the two. Here contact between things and participants speeds up to the point of creating more violence. Something about the deformed cars opens the enclosure of the representation and invites commingling. After the naked “girl” and the alcohol were gone, the exhibit continued for a month to provoke the same violent refusal of distance, for the cars “were continually attacked by visitors to the gallery, who broke windows, tore off wing mirrors, splashed them with white paint” (25). Ballard created an exhibit of the Open as defined in the epigraph to this essay: “its nature is to change constantly, or to give rise to something new, in short, to endure” (Deleuze, Cinema 1 9). In this he created an exhibition of accident, where accident is less viewed than it is provided duration, where the disorganizing forces of accident remain active. Ballard constructed an uncontrolled space of representation where expression was undetermined, where shape was unknown, where forces were disorganizing. It is an exhibit of production rather than of prevention, and as such it recognizes uncritical, unreasonable production. “[R]eason rationalizes reality . . . providing a more palatable or convenient explanation, and there are so many subjects today about which we should not be reasonable” (Ballard 54).
     
    Perhaps the most enduring experiment in accident exhibition is found in the institution of driver’s education in American high schools. It was a long-standing practice in this pedagogy to show gruesome highway accidents and fatalities in films with names such as “Wheels of Tragedy” (1963) and “Highways of Agony” (1969). The sensational titles suggest the explosive quality of these films, aberrant in an otherwise reactive and conservative pedagogy of accident prevention. Because of its disparate practices, driver’s education provides something of a survey of accident response generally, spanning from a Ballardian orgy of disorganizing forces, as seen in the cinematic event of highway safety films, to a Virilian command to perceive the accident critically, and thus preventatively. Within this tangle of contrary forces and discourses in driver’s education is thus a confused command for viewers to secure self control but also to be subject to their own dispossession, as well as a confused sense of representation as a tool of reason but also as a disorganizing force beyond our control.
     
    By and large, accident prevention is a conservative discourse (literally, self preserving) dominated by reactive force. To the unforeseen terrorist attack that led to the collapse of the World Trade Center, for example, America responded with a self-securing statement of intolerance that further required a series of reactive responses to support it, including the invasion of Iraq in 2003. We can turn to Friedrich Nietzsche, and more directly to Gilles Deleuze’s influential interpretation of Nietzsche, for insight into the movement of such reactivity. In his interpretation, Deleuze focuses on Nietzsche’s understanding of active and reactive force as the two qualities of productive force. One general distinction between the two (which are always in relation) lies in “whether one affirms one’s own difference or denies that which differs” (Deleuze, Nietzsche 68). Becoming active is a matter of taking a force to the limit of what it can do and affirming that becoming, hence affirming difference. Reactive force is negating and nihilistic because it turns force against what it can do. In light of these basic definitions, accident-prevention is reactive and even at times nihilistic, for it aims precisely to turn force against what it can do. Nietzsche’s method of tracing specific active and reactive forces through their historic formations and deformations is genealogical, a historical practice that attends to the differential relations of forces in order not to discover the causal origins of things but to trace their transformations in value. For the purposes at hand, I do not pursue Nietzsche’s conception of value further, but instead note, following D.N. Rodowick, the contrast between genealogical thought and classic conceptions of event and historical understanding. Whether by emphasizing causal origin or a priori form, this classical way of thought belongs to “what Deleuze called the Platonic order of representation,” an order that structures understanding of identity, thought, representation, and time as grounded in the possibility of exact repetition or endurance of the same (Rodowick, Reading 189). For such repetition there is assumed an original form that is being repeated; thus Nietzsche notes that the conventional philosophy of history takes as its topic something outside of history, as it is “an attempt to capture the exact essence of things, their purest possibilities, and their carefully protected identities, because this search assumes the existence of immobile forms that precede the external world of accident and succession” (qtd. Rodowick 189). The external world is a world of difference, and hence of accident and chance, that which does not necessarily return back to conserve the self through its repetition, a repetition that always suggests the original outside the world of difference.
     
    Deleuze invents concepts that open these bulwarks of classical thought by way of difference. To the “exact essence of a thing,” Deleuze’s thought generally juxtaposes becoming, the incessant movement of being toward difference; to “purest possibility,” virtuality, the irreducible diversity of potential configurations possible in any being or event; and to “carefully protected identity,” the Body without Organs, the body not defined by the totality of its organism, but rather by forces of intensity that engage and connect its varied parts with external parts to form spontaneous, provisional “bodies.” These concepts make differential the forms of similitude that classically and commonly ground ideas of time, being, and representation. Time as structured and linear, being as stable and enclosed, and representation as a confirmation of prior presence all steady a world where we must encounter the outburst of accident and endure the irregularity of becoming. They provide a ground of regularity and so allow us to judge the accident as aberrant. Breaking these classical concepts releases irregularity as a constant, constitutive, and active force and allows us to understand representation not as a repetition of the same but as a reproduction of affective forces and intensities in a world where accident is ubiquitous within becoming and movement.
     
    Driver’s education demonstrates that active forces emerge even amidst a density of conservative, reactive forces. Over and over, in this education, self-security is enacted in rhythms of repetition-of-the-same in an attempt to craft a state of endurance, in an attempt to remain constant in a world of accident. The priority of self-security in accident prevention here produces a securing of the self, a continual and blindly confident reactive enclosure of the subject, of representation, and of time. Into this confluence of conservative forces crashes the documentary highway safety film head-on, without regard to the painstaking construction it renders frail. Quite by chance, on this one active current, the accident is opened to perception in all its painful potential. It is not so opened, however, by way of what the films represent, nor by establishing a critical distance from them, but by their offering of a non-representational image of perception itself, in this case of perception as the sensational endurance of the unendurable, of the time of accident itself. This wildly active effect of the films, this taking cinematic force to the limits of what it can do without reactively coiling it back to the security of the familiar, contrasts starkly with the effect of the conservative discourses within which the films are pedagogically configured. Driver’s education shows repeatedly the conservative force of security that, oddly, prevents, not the accident, but the ability to endure its possibility.
     

    The Strange Accidental History of Driver’s Education

     

     
    Equation representing the "accident-prone" individual.

     

    Click for larger view

     

    Equation representing the “accident-prone” individual.

     

     

    “Speed is a relative matter. It’s what comes with it that kills.”
     

    -“Signal 30” (1959)

     
    The advent of driver’s education, it can be said, comes from the Virilian recognition that accident is immanent to invention-from the ability to see that the invention will occasion its accident. The invention here is the automobile. In 1960, there is one auto registration to every three people in the United States; by 1970 the ratio is closer to one in two, these being the peak decades of highway carnage film use in driver’s education. But this sort of simple cause/effect and linear sense of time and development is precisely what Nietzschean/Deleuzian thought works against. Driver’s education, rather, emerges as a Deleuzian assemblage, built from points of blockage and connection, flows that converge and diverge through military needs, industrial accidents, Cold War conformism, police surveillance, pornography, social hygiene, and more; it configures a multiplicity with multiple origins, intersections of numerous discourses, and an unmappable diversity of effects. In other words, its development is non-linear and aleatory, an assemblage moving by way of variation analogous to the variation it, ironically, attempts to stem-the chance variation that produces the accident.
     
    While the first integration of driver’s education into the high-school curriculum was in 1933 (in State College, Pennsylvania), the war made it national. Since America was by World War II an automotive culture-in 1940 there were four persons to one car in the country-t he United States military assumed its troop pool would consist of capable drivers. It was disappointed. When recruits were found wanting in motor skills, the Quartermaster General of the Army asked the State Superintendents of Public Instruction that “preinduction driver-training programs” be instituted to pre-train the trainees. Twenty-three states complied. Thus the institution of driver’s education emerges to construct mobility both as a military discipline based in uniformity and deindividualization and as the practice of individual freedom. In fact, the two converge in the concept of national responsibility. For subsequent pedagogical rhetoric of the driver-as-free-citizen carries traces of this national service lineage. In driving pedagogy the individual is frequently exhorted to fulfill his/her responsibility as citizen for the success of the democratic social system, to the point where the “traffic citizen” and the “democratic citizen” are one and the same:
     

    There are several basic characteristics of the good traffic citizen. The Constitution of the United States contains those citizen rights and responsibilities that traffic citizens should strive to develop in the fullest. The very social and economic basis of our civilization is the mobility provided by cars. Individual responsibility is essential to the safe and efficient operation of our transportation system.
     

     

    The paradox of the free world is that, while its economy and ethos are animated by free individuals each with her or his own engine of free will, it cannot tolerate an absolute diversity of will, for such a whole would be ungovernable. The Enlightenment subject, upon which the United States was founded, internalizes self-governance through its transcendental potential for rational thought, thought driven by its propensity for perfection. A nation of freely circulating, free-thinking individuals must depend upon their similar predictability to prevent the intolerable irregularity of a chaotic society. Thus we hear exhortations in the accident-prevention of driver’s training, the simultaneous recognition of the individual as the source of chaos and as the source of responsibility that will overcome the chaos, the reactive, organizing force that must be greater than disorganizing forces.

     

    The road situation is part of a social world. The other users of the road are fellow men, all with the same right to freedom of action within the boundaries of the traffic laws. Other automobiles are not things which move about on the road surface according to strictly determined rules, but as it were widened bodies of fellowmen who have their own freedom of action and, therefore, in the final instance, unpredictability.
     

    (Qtd. Rommel 26)

     

    Accident prevention in driver’s training is forced to acknowledge the endless potential for accident, but at the same time, it is blind to it as an external event, as the purview of Nietzsche’s “external world of accident.” Instead, in essentialist thinking action originates in the individual, in the interiority of will and reason, and thus accident comes from the free action of a class of individuals whose freedom is inadequately disciplined by reason and responsibility. Causal thought cannot tolerate accident as always multiple and non-linear, part and parcel of the ongoing external process of a productive world.

     
    If action originates in humans, and if humans are essentially reasonable, and if the trajectory of properly employed reason is toward perfection, then humanist discourse must still account for accident but without veering from its primary assumptions. Enter: classes of humans who are essentially wrong. The essential deviant had already had extensive scrutiny in the arena of industry, which began conducting social studies of accidents that, in fact, determined beforehand what they set out to discover-the “accident-prone” individual. Inescapably, the heat, metal, mobility, and machinery of industrial sites occasion accidents. Faced with the problem of repeated accident, repeated variation in occurrence, science seeks similarity and finds it in the repetition of accidents in connection with the same individual. One influential industrial study, “Incidents of Industrial Accidents upon Individuals with Special Reference to Multiple Accidents” (Greenwood 1919, in Rommel), was conducted by the Medical Research Council, Industrial Fatigue Research Board (emphasis added). A board focused explicitly on fatigue-a condition caused largely by working conditions-finds not a problem with working conditions, but instead a problem with workers, and thereby invents the accident-prone individual by subjecting all that is accidental to the control of the sovereign subject. Securing the doer, not even behind the deed, but behind the occurrence, relieves industry of the financial burden of renovation and of the blame implicit in reform. Production can continue as before, and the social scientist can go to work on the deviant individual.
     
    These industrial studies articulate with auto accident studies and quickly establish that accidents happen repeatedly to certain individuals, and what’s more, those individuals are repeatedly found to be from a lower social stratum. The social research of car accidents finds, for instance, that “accident repeaters” were remarkably better known to various “social agencies”: thirty percent more had been contacted by the credit union and fourteen percent more had gone to a venereal disease clinic, this last statistic salient next to accident-free individuals, none of whom had attended clinics. Robert Rommel’s 1958 thesis, “Personality Characteristics, Attitudes, and Peer Group Relationships of Accident-Free Youths and Accident-Repeating Youths,” legitimates its aim and methods with industrial accident studies and reaches conclusions that further converge with the 1950s Cold War trends of normalizing group behavior, producing the necessary social element of the intolerable juvenile delinquent.2 One famous convergence of juvenile delinquency and accident-proneness illustrates well, not the descriptive, but the inventive energy of representation. The driver’s education dramatization film “Last Date” (1950) sees one invention beget another when the accident-prone merges with the juvenile delinquent to produce the concept teenicide, the art of killing oneself, and often others, before the age of twenty by way of motor vehicle. As inventive as this is, representations, from the melodrama of instructional film to the sterility of a mathematical equation, nonetheless service the assumption of an extant identity or substance that the representation merely describes, and further reinforce the notion of self-same internal identity, the self as representation, a consistent, and therefore identifiable, repetition of the same from moment to moment. Thus, the accident prone individual can even be represented by an equation, as in the one from Greenwood’s seminal industrial study of 1919, which has the constancy to remain in use through the 1960s3:
     

     

     

    Click for larger view

     
     

     

    Embedded in representation is the assumption of an original, the ideal and unequivocal form to which Nietzsche contemptuously refers, outside of both time and empirical reality. By this logic, the juvenile delinquent already exists before the studies name it. Threat must be meaningful, a known quantity, so threat will often become organized and secured through invention (the accident-prone) by way of the valuing (intolerable) process of representation (studies and films).

     
    The subgenre of driver’s education films is one among many produced by the industry of mental hygiene. The catalog of classroom mental hygiene films reads like a national history of social fear-in-transformation, from the external threat-“Always remember, the flash from an atomic bomb can come at any time!” warns “Duck and Cover” (1951)-to any number of internal threats such as germs, teenage delinquents, and domestic accidents-“Joan Avoids a Cold” (1964), “Teenagers on Trial” (1955), “Why Take Chances?” (1952). The way to avoid germs and accidents is to learn, and repeat, certain behaviors, to be vigilant against the variation. To avoid germs, family members should always spit into the toilet not the sink, kids should always use their own towels in gym class, and mom should always boil the dishes for 10 minutes. Failing to habituate behavior is to open oneself to the variation that is accident. Variation is the enemy. Training one’s action toward predictable repetition-of-the-same creates a prophylactic barrier against threatening organisms, prevents one from becoming a juvenile delinquent, makes one popular in school, and prevents one from courting the variation that produces accident.
     

    Unendurable Intrusion of the Human

     

     
    Phoebe Gloeckner's illustration from J.G. Ballard's The Atrocity Exhibition. © Phoebe Gloeckner. Used by permission.

     

    Click for larger view

    Fig. 1.

    Phoebe Gloeckner’s illustration from J.G. Ballard’s The Atrocity Exhibition. © Phoebe Gloeckner. Used by permission.

     

     

    “As if American motorists were suddenly obsessed with the urge to destroy.”
     

    -“Highways of Agony” (1969)

     
    The humanist logic that allots to people the power to prevent accidents also locates the human generally as the cause of accident. Accordingly, the rhetoric of driver’s education, whose goal is accident-prevention, frequently deploys the stabilizing effect of scientific representation, but this ideal mode of representation is in continual tension with empirical humans and with the singular occurrences it represents, a tension that sometimes breaks-producing its own accident. Responding to the threat of movement and chance that it struggles to prevent, the world of driving in the driver’s education textbook and classroom becomes an accident-free world. It is a regulated, mappable, rational world that can be navigated perfectly; with the proper training and proper use of the senses, the driver can make correct decisions, repeatedly. In this way, the driving environment in the classroom becomes a scientific environment, as this (dubious) claim in a textbook for teachers of driver’s education shows: “Science and mathematics are used in the classroom as the student learns to apply such laws as kinetic energy, centrifugal force, and friction. He studies human characteristics and their limitations relative to the driving task” (Aaron, Driver and Safety 22). The laws of science and math counter the potential force of disruption that necessitates understanding these laws-human limitation. The contingent element of human behavior unfortunately limits the full, active expression of (potentially error-free, and therefore accident-free) science, and thus needs itself to be treated as scientifically as possible. The driver needs to become a calculable entity, as in Greenwood’s equation above, because in an accident-free environment all entities would be calculable, an idea inculcated by the wealth of geometric diagrams of traffic flow and angles of vision in driver’s instruction textbooks.
     
    The protagonist of J.G. Ballard’s fictional study of accident, sex, affect, and celebrity, The Atrocity Exhibition, finds the human-as empirical, aleatory disruptions of conceptual discourses-nearly intolerable in his desire for a world of regularity:
     

    Tallis . . . considered the white cube of the room. At intervals Karen Novotny moved across it, carrying out a sequence of apparently random acts. Already she was confusing the perspective of the room . . . . Tallis waited for her to leave. Her figure interrupted the junction between the walls in the corner on his right. After a few seconds her presence became an unbearable intrusion into the time geometry of the room.
     

    (42)

     

    Phoebe Gloeckner’s illustrations accompanying the text in the Re/Search edition of Ballard’s The Atrocity Exhibition also suggest how intolerable the empirical irregularity of the human is to the vision of a regulated world. One illustration depicts a spark plug, a penis specimen, and a broken tailbone, each angulated within its own superimposed triangle, bringing into relation an assemblage of discourses similar to that found in driver’s education: geometry, pornography, injury, and automobiles (see Fig. 1). Geometry is a discourse of Euclidean ideals, of precise repeatability, of objects of study that are analyzed and combined and transformed on a Cartesian grid transcendent to specific contexts in space and time. The triangle proper exists nowhere but on this grid, an ideal environment free from contingency. Like geometry, medical illustration is predicated on the spatial and temporal transcendence of the object, resulting in infinite repeatability and standardization. A circular force of the similar is at work in representation-in-service-of-the-standard, whereby representation assumes a prior ideal form but also crafts the empirical ideal by presenting a specific specimen as a tool of standardizing comparison-the example is the ideal representative of the ideal. But at what cost? The tailbone that appears to have been broken upon its display, rather than before, draws our attention to the triangle superimposed over it, which now rather appears to be the cause, or force, of the break-this is not a specimen of a broken tailbone, but a tailbone that was broken in the act of being a specimen. And while the other objects don’t appear to have been deranged by their triangles, our perception has now been opened to the violence of display, the violence of standardizing the specimen, of representation itself, and suddenly now that active sensation is reintroduced to “objective” representation the cross sectional cut on the penis becomes excruciating because we can see that it too was broken in its service of becoming a representative specimen. Standardization is violent in its intolerance of the dissimilar. The illustrations allow us to see the image but also allow us to see perception at work. What do we see? We see the accident occurring in the act of representation itself. We see that these attempts to render specimens non-empirical are violent deformations of the specimen itself, a kind of belligerent insistence that the specimen be a standard. We also see that representation is force. Against the irrepressible force of variation that is the empirical, standardizing discourse counters with a force of organization, showing that forces of disorganization and forces of organization are always in relation and often in tension.

     
    Ballard allows us to see that the human itself will always be intolerable to ideal thought; an empirical tailbone will never fit inside a proper triangle. No matter how many triangles are drawn to represent the driver’s field of vision, any particular driver’s sight may or may not reach the scope of the field for any number of unforeseen reasons. Responding to the threat of accident, driver’s education invents the representative driver, but this driver has been abstracted from the world of accident. Representationally, the driving subject fulfills the classic desire of metaphysics, but does creating a position outside of the system that can control the system prevent accident? What of the problem that the subject is never outside of the system, never outside of variation, and in fact that there is no system at all, but rather an open field?
     

    Rhythm of Perception

     

     
    The Aetna Drivotrainer. © Huton Archive/Getty Images/Orlando. Used by permission.

     

    Click for larger view

    Fig. 2.

    The Aetna Drivotrainer. © Huton Archive/Getty Images/Orlando. Used by permission.

     

     

    “You are responsible for all of your actions and reactions whenever you are driving.”
     

    -“Mechanized Death” (1961)

     
    Yet no calculation, representation, or attribution of blame can save driver’s education from acknowledging that driving is a highly sensory experience. Driving cannot be taught through abstraction alone. The National Academy of Sciences informs us that “vision influences more than 90 percent of the decisions that are made behind the wheel of a moving automobile” (not my emphasis), a statistic that launches the textbook’s urging driver’s education teachers to take control of their students’ senses and train their “perception” (Aaron, Driver and Safety 208). “Because the purpose of seeing is to feed input data to the brain, it is extremely important that such data be correctly received, transmitted, and interpreted” (208), especially given that “four out of five drivers do not use their eyes correctly” (209). Since the goal of driver’s education is to achieve an accident-free environment, the human variable needs to be made as constant as possible, which inevitably requires the regulation of sensory response.
     
    The relationship between the military and driver’s education continues when the Air Force lends its pilot-training technology to the school system in the form of driving simulators, stationary driving compartments from which students watch documentary road footage that prompts their interface with the “car,” an interface that is recorded and transmitted to the central control panel for monitoring and for providing “a permanent printed record of every individual driver action, correct and incorrect” (Aaron, Driving Task 156). This technology, in concert with the entrepreneurial spirit of insurance companies, gave our schools in 1953 the Aetna Drivotrainer and in 1961 the Allstate Good Driver (see Fig. 2), designed to provide practice “in complete safety, in driving under adverse conditions, such as emergencies, foul weather, and heavy traffic” (197). While the desire to train young drivers without putting them in danger is laudable enough, the standardizing of sensory response, recorded and corrected, speaks a deep intolerance of the contingency and variation that is sensory experience.
     
    One of the most enduring claims in safety scholarship is known as the “three E’s”-Enforcement, Education, Engineering. This encapsulation of accident prevention was first introduced in 1923 and survived for decades. In the highway carnage film “Mechanized Death” (1961), engineering is lauded early in the film as the purview of the “mind” that designs the highway, while contractors execute the skillful building of highways using “known variables.” However, the voice-over announces, “when you come into the picture too often the word ‘execute’ takes on another meaning.” “Highways of Agony” (1969) is unequivocal in narrating that the “penalty for failure to see or to obey is instant death.” Thus the goal of the driving simulator is to train one’s unruly and irrational vision to obey. But to obey what? Where are the rules that structure the obedience of proper vision? Classical perception theory, as articulated by Immanuel Kant, shows the Drivotrainer to be an exemplary Kantian machine that provides the rules of perception.4 Driver’s education must confront the challenge of training individuals to operate machinery through fields of perception that can only ever be incalculable multiplicities of sensation. In an accident, the field of vision often overwhelms perception with sensible diversity. The pedagogical counter measure is to insert Kantian object categories that can precede and subsume the perceptual chaos that awaits the driving individual. Students are trained to apprehend, reproduce, and recognize in the style of a Kantian perceptual schema. Simulators train students, first, to see a blur of movement in their peripheral vision, second, to endure this perception through time by reproducing its parts from moment to moment, and third, to exercise judgment by recognizing what the thing is. This recognition, “judgment” for Kant, requires accessing preexisting object categories and making a match between them and the empirically perceived. The transcendental categories allow us to collect a number of stimuli in one entity. Thus, students’ perceptions can be trained toward repeated, successful judgments by familiarizing students with the categories into which they can organize stimuli. Showing the students films, over and over, of a ball rolling into the road while the students sit behind the wheel of the Drivotrainer will strengthen the precision of their identification of, for example, a visual blur as a “ball” often followed by a “darting child,” and further trigger their confident and quick depression of the brake pedal. On this level, accident prevention is perception training, which involves translating ambiguous sensible diversities into certain representations-immediate perceptual ordering of disorder.
     
    Yet Kant recognized that object categories alone could not provide for the synthesis of perception. Simple apprehension, even of fragments, involves some stable measure, independent of the thing apprehended, in the empirical world. Most often this measure is one’s own body. In assessing the size, movement, quality of some thing, we create a rhythm between ourselves and the unknown thing, an otherwise unnoticed process that can become apparent while driving when we are met with momentary uncertainties of perception-something flying through the air, the speed and distance of a car ahead, a blotch on the road. Driving can also make apparent Kant’s next observation, that the perceptual measure is subject to variation and can change from moment to moment, and from person to person. In short, the stabilizing ground of perception is fluctuation. The corresponding goal of the Drivotrainer is to create reliable object categories and to prevent syncopation. For Kant, in the Critique of Judgment, this accident is a part of perception: the acute sensation of a fundamental heterogeneity among and the fluctuating unit of measure of the perceived is the experience of the sublime, when rhythm turns potentially to chaos, when what I perceive cannot be reliably reproduced from one moment to the next, when I perceive that the sheer size of a mountain exceeds my capacity to stabilize it, and I am sent into a vertiginous, frightening, and thrilling state where unities and measures break down and I am subject to intensities of perceptual sensation that I cannot comfortably name or represent in my mind, for their identity continually moves beyond its own resemblance. Although for Kant the sublime is a perception of the incommensurate, within perception is its own potential dislocation. “Between the synthesis and its foundation, there is the constant risk that something will emerge from beneath the ground and break the synthesis” (Smith xx). In other words the Drivotrainer cannot correct perception, no matter how much the process is repeated, because the accident of perception is in perception itself when it moves from the ideal world of object categories to the empirical world of sensible diversity that will always show resistances to form and regularity.
     
    Still, there is something wonderful about the high immersion of the Drivotrainer, which has lineage not only in military training, but also in pre-cinematic sensational events that aim precisely to dislocate the perception of viewers and to shake their foundation. In the early 20th-century Hale’s Tours of the World, patrons would pack tightly into stationary street cars in which they then found themselves surrounded by movie screens, images rolling past as fans blew, steam hissed, whistles shrieked, and rollers beneath the car produced reeling movement (see Fielding). Here viewers could respond variously to sensible diversity, without having to account for themselves, as sensational forces coursed through them, each viewer further contributing heat, sound, vibration, to the assemblage of sensations running its deviant course. Hale’s Tours harnessed the sensational qualities of cinema and provoked ir-responsibility from viewers. On the other hand, though using the same immersive techniques, driving simulators attempt to re present the sensory world and to regulate the representations viewers draw from it, to regulate the rhythm of perception and to render it predictable.
     
    The highway carnage films take another tack. These films seemingly want to show students starkly the results of unregulated perception and irresponsible driving; however, their unmanageable force does not effect such rational conclusions or critical distance. They rather seem more to project the fear of the accident of perception within perception training, the haunting sense of “the constant risk that something will emerge from beneath the ground and break the synthesis.”
     

    Perception of Rhythm

     

     
    Stills from "Signal 30" (1959) and "Wheels of Tragedy" (1963). Public Domain. Used by permission of Bret Wood.

     

    Click for larger view

     

    Stills from “Signal 30” (1959) and “Wheels of Tragedy” (1963). Public Domain. Used by permission of Bret Wood.

     

     

    “These are the sounds of agony.”
     

    -“Mechanized Death” (1961)

     
    Amidst a confluence of reactive, conservative discourses, during a conservative historical era, how did it ever come to pass that America began showing snuff films in schools? In a recent documentary film, Hell’s Highway: The True Story of Highway Safety Films (2003), those directly involved in their making, including the cameramen, repeatedly, and without further definition, claim that the films work by their “shock value.” The primary cameraman, in fact, consistently uses the phrase “shock treatment.” Indeed one unspoken logic behind the pedagogical value of shock and sensation, from Saint Augustine’s Confessions through to driver’s education films, is that we endure here, in a controlled environment, the intolerable so that we do not have to tolerate it later in an environment where it could be unendurable. Logic aside, the enduring attraction to this practice saw it run two decades through our schools (with remnants still in circulation) and saw an irrepressible production of shock-value educational films. The rationale short-duration-now-prevents-the-unendurable-later was rendered somewhat dubious as the spools of film grew and grew. Highway Safety Enterprises expanded the scope of its film production to cover crime, police training, child molestation, and sexual “perversions,” all marked by the same use of explicit documentary images the likes of which viewers had never seen. Images of hanged people, shot people, and butchered people found their way into montages for police training. Numerous acts of fellatio and anal sex among men were captured through a peephole in a public bathroom for Camera Surveillance (1962). Most stunning of all, the bloody, twisted, raped corpses of small children tossed into the overgrown grasses of isolated fields were shown to kindergarteners in The Child Molester (1964), where children learn that “there are good adults and there are bad adults, and the bad adults look just like the good adults.” So much for object categories.
     
    While The Child Molester did find its way into schoolrooms, it was more common for students to see highway carnage films, whose sole function was to show explicit documentary images of death on the highway. “Signal 30” is not only the highway patrol code for “death on the highway,” but also the title of the 1959 inaugural film in an enduring catalogue well used by America’s education system. Nationally, there is a “Signal 30” every fourteen minutes, or so viewers are soberly told by the patrol officer in “Mechanized Death” (1961). Beyond this bit of information, viewers learn little else. The films are remarkably short on the facts, statistics, and figures that often give the stark emotional pull to scare rhetoric. “Death sometimes plays an overture of torture,” begins the voiceover on black screen, leading first to an aural exhibit of pleading and shrieking and then to a visual exhibit-a barrage of bodies, burned, broken, bloody, smashed, and worst of all sometimes still alive, as in the case of the shocked, keening woman who sings for viewers the “overture of torture.” Her baby blue farm dress cannot even begin to offset the deep maroon blood coagulating over her face and head as she is slowly pried from a tangle of red vinyl and dark steel. This scene opens “Mechanized Death”, the woman’s garishly lit white face startlingly exposed with the same sudden force as the bombastic soundtrack. From here the barrage never lets up. Body after body after body, smeared, charred, twisted, crushed, dismembered, with a voiceover flatly addressing us in the second person, “Put yourself or your family in one of these unstaged scenes,” as if the reality of accident needs to be confirmed, as if the brutal sensational impact upon viewers weren’t enough to convince them of the actuality bludgeoning them.
     
    Reportedly it was the loss of a friend to a highway accident that provoked Richard Wayman to buy a police scanner and a camera to take with him as he traveled the Ohio highways for business. Once he had assembled a sizable portfolio of photographs of bloody, grisly highway slaughter, he made a slide presentation and sent copies to every patrol post in Ohio (Smith 79). Soon enough, barking troopers coaxed viewers into the slide show exhibit at county fairs. Wayman advanced to moving pictures with footage from a 16mm movie camera that he gave to a newspaper reporter; this, combined with footage troopers had begun enthusiastically shooting themselves, was finally spliced together to make “Signal 30” (1959). Already in this history, one pauses at the enthusiasm Wayman and others display for filming dead and dying people in excruciating states of pain or dismemberment, but the bizarre corruption of Safety Enterprises Inc. eventually reaches nearly comic proportions. Wayman establishes a not-for-profit safety organization that outsources to the for-profit safety organization that he and his boards also establish. One organization is used for tax breaks; the other organization to practice self-dealing, or “charity for profit” (Yant 36).5 When Safety Enterprises is audited, it is found to be 5 million dollars in debt, acquired largely from fraudulently sponsored loans, and spent largely on parties such as the one for the telethon hosted by Sammy Davis Jr., then chair of the organization. The telethon made 525,000 dollars for Safety Enterprises, but it cost them 1.2 million dollars. Apparently this was the general trend for other fund raising events that acquired debt through extravagant perks for the participants. The rumors concerning Safety Enterprises’ involvement in pornography centered around their headquarters at the home of Wayman’s mistress and intrepid accident-scene camerawoman, Phyllis Vaughn, who turned up dead the morning after she had fearfully told a friend she was afraid she was going to be killed for threatening to expose the organization. Her home had apparently become quite a hang-out for both Ohio state troopers and business men; there they would watch pornographic films, including the surveillance footage from the homosexual bathroom sting. Through various reports it came to be known that films were being made there as well: one popular stag film was made by the local “businessman of the year” and starred a local “retarded” man.
     
    The compulsive movement toward sensation with the camera speaks a desire driven by something other than the stability provided by representation. In claiming that the benefit of the films is their “shock value,” the filmmakers and educators name the salient quality of the films-sensational communication. For all the persistent appeals made to the rational responsibility of the subject and the regularity and certainty of perception and representation, here in the midst of this staid pedagogy is an explosive accident, erratic within the trajectory of driver’s education discourse, where the carefully secured subject, perception, and representation are all shaken from their mooring. Yet these films, not in their content as much as in their force, ironically, come closest to communicating accident within a set of accident discourses that have blinded themselves to it. While the images of dripping faces, blue lips, and crushed torsos surge toward viewers with a force that has been known to cause students to lose consciousness, the images remain remarkably fleeting. Generally, people who viewed these films in driver’s education do not recall specific images, but rather the impact the film had on their sensorium. The narrator’s urgent claims, the interludes of trooper physical training, the occasional explanatory reenactment, the images themselves, none of these endure. Anecdotal recall of the films by viewers suggests that representation, even documentary representation, does not communicate the identity and substance of what the camera captures. Transcendental object categories and prior presence wither in their task of prioritizing representation in the act of perception. Viewers of these highway carnage films aren’t blinded to the accident; they see the event of the accident even if the automobile accident itself is never on film. In fact, we can call this strange cinema, after Deleuze, a “cinema of the seer” (Cinema 2 2), an ironic claim given that what is being seen is not representation. The film images are often not recognizable in object categories. Yes, we see man, car, tree, but very often those forms have been severely deformed to the point where we struggle to perceive them properly. An officer picks up a prone lifeless body by its shoulders, and as the viewer tries to place the position of the body, to make out the head from the legs-because in the grainy, deep colors characteristic of 16mm film the form lacks definition-t he front of the man’s head pulls away from the pavement, leaving bone, flesh, and gore to stretch and pour, the face melting into nothing before we manage to see it, the figure maintaining the new and unexpected connection formed between body and road. The forms represent and enact deformation and resist the object categories that secure their identity. The screen is populated by deformed figures of bodies and cars, but that fact alone does not account for the representational deformation that characterizes this cinematic experience.
     
    Significantly, the moment of accident itself is never captured on these educational films, only its aftermath, yet viewers are left to endure multiple residual forces that remain active-in the pain of trembling victims, in accordioned steel, in the buzzing movement of emergency personnel, and most important, in the channels that forces of on-going momentum seek. Forces and sensations require connection, puncturing and opening the figures they connect, breaching their boundaries and deranging their self-secure identities. The active forces in car crashes illustrate this. The force of speed courses forward even after the car is stopped by the tree it hits; the tree’s roots, moving an inch, turn and loosen the soil, through which worms frantically squirm, the whole of that ecosystem having been opened to air through vibration; the movement of the startled arm raised to shield the driver’s face continues on an upward path even after the action is completed, even after the arm breaks backwards; the current of pain keeps flowing long after the impact; blood flows from torn flesh penetrating the vinyl of the car’s seat, saturating the stuffing, where mold will take residence in the moisture; moaning noise continues to issue from the body of the victim, silencing nearby birds; the sound, heard by a gawker, combines with the sight, and triggers a wave of peristalsis in the gut; and so on, in countless directions. Because the explosive accident is not imaged on film, because on the level of action nothing really happens, because time is not structured by event and resolution, the effect of the film capturing this slow, unstoppable movement of force is all the more palpable. As viewers become connected to the deforming assemblage, themselves parcel to the reverberations of forceful contact (they have a flash memory; they get dizzy, squirm, vomit), they cannot identify the originating source of deformation. What would be the Kantian “object category” of a representation such as this? As Deleuze concludes in Francis Bacon: The Logic of Sensation, although here by different means, the representation itself becomes the force of the deformation of representation.
     
    Inasmuch as the accidents recounted on film have already occurred, there are no sensory-motor situations on screen, sensory-motor being Deleuze’s phrase for the organization of time and action by way of conventional stimulus-response, the will-driven action that structures most narrative cinema. The helplessness with which accident personnel mill about the lifeless scenes only emphasizes that there is no situation calling for action. There is no narrative organization of cause and effect, no action stimulated and performed that furthers the temporal chain of action and confirms subject agency. Rather there is outward, multi-directional disorganization continuing to flow slowly from the intensive disorganization of the accident itself. This flow breaks the bounds of the screen image as the viewers configure with the open whole that is the film, themselves Bodies without Organs, or open organisms whose connective intensities break the enclosure of the subject. In other words there is an entirely active potential to cinema, even though it is often assumed to be and often is used for its reactive potential. Reactive forces of similarity turned interiorly, toward representation and identity, can here rather be seen to move endlessly, productively outward as waves of rhythms, rhythms not contained in the Kantian judgment of perspective.
     
    The enclosure of the subject, of representation, and of time, in fact, are all actively broken, whereas in conventional narrative cinema they are reactively secured. In his cinema studies, Deleuze makes the distinction between the movement-image and the time-image. In the movement-image, the interval (literally the space between shots, frames, sequences) provides a hinge for the movement of units, creating a coherent sense of movement and time. The movement image was/is often used in conventional cinemas that offer time as a familiar form-beginning, middle, end-and in this way time becomes an object of perception, with a Kantian “object category” and a harmonizing rhythm between viewer and viewed. In the time-image-the cinematic image that Deleuze claims opens our perception to time itself-the interval is less an empty between than a virtual connection where the image houses the virtual (always multiple potential configurations), just as it does in the actual passage of time, what for Deleuze is a pure experience of time. “Every interval becomes what probability physics calls a ‘bifurcation point,’ where it is impossible to know or predict in advance which direction change will take. . . . an image of uncertain becoming” (Rodowick, Time Machine 15). In conventional cinema, then, time is a reliably familiar, organized and organizing form; in the highway carnage films, time is a constant force of potential disorganization. The films are dominated by their seriality-they set one accident next to another, with no sense of progression or logic: the viewer must simply endure. Their seemingly endless stream of accident scenes create a sense of incessant differential recurrence, where sequence does not point to a conclusion nor issue from an inaugural moment. These accidents, in their illogical serial appearance, and these people on film, are strung together solely by chance, and the resulting form is formless, only connection, a foregrounding of the interval. “Because the interval is a dissociative force, succession gives way to series. Images are strung together as heterogeneous spaces that are incommensurable one with the other. . . . The irrational interval offers a nonspatial perception-not space but force” (Rodowick, Reading 195, 200). The viewer is not an agent acting upon the image through the distance of visual organization. “This is a cinema of the seer and no longer of the agent” (Deleuze, Cinema 2 2). The people in the image are not acting agents following the narrative logic of sensory-motor response. In sensory-motor logic, the interval is the between that structures the unfolding of time in the narrative trajectory. Between stimulus and reaction is interval; between frames of a film is interval. In this organization the interval is an empty space that enables the unfolding of time by allowing for the linkage of parts. In the time-image, however, interval is extended. Rather than an invisible emptiness that defines form, it is indeterminacy as multiple possibility; it is what sees the form deconstructed into flowing movement itself, for rather than a mechanical hinge, the interval is multiple possible connection; it is what renders the whole open. In the time-image, the elements of Kantian perception can no longer be relied upon because the rhythm that stabilizes the subject’s perception of the object is syncopated through diverting waves of sensational vision; the synthesis fails, and the ability to reproduce the parts of what has been apprehended from one moment to the next weakens because viewers are no longer looking at things. Viewers are positioned more in the interval in the image than in front of the image, in the moment of chance, the “bifurcation point,” in “an image of uncertain becoming” (Rodowick, Time Machine 15).
     
    Again, “[t]his is a cinema of the seer and no longer of the agent” (Deleuze, Cinema 2 2). In accident films, somewhat devoid of agency and action, time is measured by the structure of the interval as a place of potential possible productive lines of flight. These films resonate and connect sensorily without securing the subject but rather opening the whole. So, what is being seen? Here we are in the realm of “the purely optical and sound situation which takes the place of the . . . sensory-motor situations,” and when freed of the subject-securing, time-structuring habits of action, or the “sensory-motor schemata,” we find ourselves in the realm of the image that is able “to free itself from the laws of this schema and reveal itself in a visual and sound nakedness, crudeness and brutality which make it unbearable, giving it the pace of a dream or nightmare” (Cinema 2 3).6 As Steven Shaviro suggests, the films reproduce the sensational intensity of an event and in so doing produce a new sensational event. “[V]ision is uprooted from the idealized paradigms of representation and perspective, and dislodged from interiority. It is grounded instead in the rhythms and delays of an ungraspable temporality, and in the materiality of the agitated flesh,” occasioning, in fact, “the shattering dispossession of the spectator” (Shaviro 44, 54).
     
    Viewers are clutched in the experience of uncontrolled, deformed time, the timeless time of the accident, where the interval reigns as indeterminate potential of unpredictable convergence and potentially violent change. The highway carnage film projects a series of images to viewers that they don’t really see, but rather endure, and places them in the perception of time that is unendurable. The films capture the intolerable interval that is the force of accident. “[I]f the whole is not giveable, it is because it is the Open, and because its nature is to change constantly, or to give rise to something new, in short, to endure” (Deleuze, Cinema 1 9).
     

    Tolerating the Intolerable: Enduring the Unendurable

     

     
    Pages from the Fondation Cartier accident exhibition catalogue, Paul Virilio Unknown Quantity. © Associated Press/Amy Sancetta/Sipa; AFP/Getty Images/Stan Honda. Used by permission.

     

    Click for larger view

    Fig. 3.

    Pages from the Fondation Cartier accident exhibition catalogue, Paul Virilio Unknown Quantity. © Associated Press/Amy Sancetta/Sipa; AFP/Getty Images/Stan Honda. Used by permission.

     

     

    “You cause it. We try to prevent it.”
     

    -patrol officer in “Mechanized Death” (1961)

     
    In his 1962 book The Highway Jungle: The Story of the Public Safety Movement and of the Failure of “Driver Education” in Public Schools, Edward Tenney argues that the push for Driver Education was backed with specious statistics driven by the profit-seeking of insurance companies, such as Aetna, who by outfitting 1,000 schools with Drivotrainers would make $18,000,000. Counter statistics, for example that there was a 16% increase in fatalities from 1958-1960, suggest that this education had failed. Regardless, automotive accident prevention arguably can be considered a serious project, yet set next to the sort of global accident that Paul Virilio addresses, it appears small. Nonetheless, watching the confluence of reactive forces in driver’s education foster active moments of production, we can pause over one striking observation: the accident is without representation in as much as it resists the containment and the ontological structure of representation; the accident, rather, is the open whole.
     
    In light of this, the Virilian exhibition of accident comes across as a bit disturbing in its aesthetic balance and proportion, the control it exerts over the sensational reception of accident. The catalog for Unknown Quantity assembles images of accidents, from tornados and avalanches to oil spills and the Twin Towers collapsing, with such harmonizing, artistic attention to color, line, and movement that response tends to be tempered by the containment of form as well as by the rhythm of similarity in graphic matching from one image to its neighboring image (see Fig. 3). The critical distance at work in the composition of Unknown Quantity, more than anything, seems to have domesticated the accident, become comfortable with its representations, taken time to arrange images carefully with elliptical text, so that any disturbing, sublime trembling that may overtake the viewer by encounter with the enormity of what is represented in the exhibit becomes quickly controlled, for any one image is hard pressed to take flight beyond this tightly composed, balanced arrangement. The open is closed. The exhibit seems to blind us to that to which we are meant to respond.
     
    In emphasizing Freud’s comment that “accumulation puts an end to the impression of chance,” Virilio reveals perhaps an overdependence on the forces of reason and intention in the accident and its prevention. Reason blinds us to the accident as event. Here it is worth repeating the Ballard epigraph to this essay: “reason rationalizes reality . . . providing a more palatable or convenient explanation, and there are so many subjects today about which we should not be reasonable” (54). If one cannot see chance, productive irrationality, unreason-if one cannot see that there is that which one cannot see because of these elements-one will never see the accident, even the intended accident. To assert reason and reflection in order to deny chance is to begin a reactive response to accident that, while it may indeed service prevention in this accident or that accident, more importantly, and dangerously, grounds the belief that the accident can be represented and thereby prevented. Was this not the logic used in the United States’ targeting of Iraq as the source of past and future accidents? Rather than recognizing the dynamic distribution of terrorist elements, the Bush Administration found it easier to point to this contained, representable, geopolitical entity in order to organize its own decisive action-the classic sensory-motor logic of conventional narrative cinema, stimulus-response, further organized by the accompanying agents, the all-too-representable good guys and bad guys. The accident of perception that Virilio worries over, far from being the result of a lack of critical distance, is rather more the result of critical distance. The images of accidents that are shown to students in driver’s education can never be the accident that awaits them, and the accident that awaits them can never be known in advance. Must we nonetheless respond to accidents of the past and the future? Yes. But too often reactive responses marshal their representational products in an assertion of secure knowledge that obscures the very difficulty and difference that accident presents. When Secretary of State Colin Powell presented his obligatory photographic evidence before the United Nations in 2003 in preparation for the United States’ war on Iraq, his primary rhetorical grounds lay in the securing function of representation that would warrant action, action that promised to restore to time its coherence and linearity. Securing representation is the first move in securing the United States. To counter the fear of the indeterminate interval, the potential of the accident as perhaps a new logic of productivity, the Bush Administration asserted transcendental object categories: the “axis of evil,” “yellow cake,” “aluminum tubes.” These entities, now known quantities, would return time itself to us by anchoring the disorganized time of the interval. Just like in the movies, stimulus-response is the form of action that structures the logical beginning, middle, and end, and would enable us to close the whole. Action ensures the end. How many reasonable men and women, after all, reflectively took the photograph of aluminum tubes that Secretary Powell presented as representational evidence of a pending nuclear accident, of the accident to come that threatens the chaotic destruction of time itself? How many rational people recognized in this accident the need for swift action, action that would rescue time through resolution-we stand here before you with the evidence of what the enemy has done in the past; therefore, we must determine the future with action that resolves this present problem. Yet the reasoned response to these representations of accident did not inaugurate a recognizable duration of time with a sensible end, but rather has opened multiplicity without end.
     

     
    Slide #32 from Colin Powell's speech to the United Nation's Security Counsel. Public Domain.

     

    Click for larger view

     

    Slide #32 from Colin Powell’s speech to the United Nation’s Security Counsel. Public Domain.

     
     

     

    Jillian Smith is Assistant Professor in the English department at the University of North Florida where she teaches film and theory. She also makes and teaches documentary film, which is her primary research interest. She has published in Postmodern Culture, Politics and Culture, and Studies in Documentary Film.
     

    Footnotes

     

     

    1. This is, of course, Walter Benjamin’s analysis in “The Work of Art in the Age of Mechanical Reproduction,” where he diagnoses auratic art as bourgeois and as providing the tools for both capitalistic and fascistic ideology. Virilio reverses Benjamin. By bringing the accident to the art museum and to edgy cultural theory books, he restores art to the critical thought of the bourgeois and gets it away from the masses, who are gorging on sensation with their webcams. Whereas Virilio sees auratic art as preventing the “heroicization of terror,” Benjamin sees auratic art as its tool.

     
    2. Rommel’s thesis ultimately finds no correlation between personality type and being repeatedly in accidents, nor does it find any consistency among socializing groups in terms of accident or aberrant behavior. He used an extended personality questionnaire whose most notable questions were clearly designed to determine paranoia and schizophrenia. Intelligence tests and personality tests are still methodological protocol for accident study today.

     

     
    3. “The model for accident causation proposed by Greenwood (1919) which subsequently was called accident proneness (Farmer & Chambers, 1926, 1929, 1939) assumes that accidents to an individual in time t form a Poisson process with parameter λt, and that λ is a random variable distributed according to the Type III law, with parameters p and q. The resulting unconditional distribution for n accidents in time t is negative binomial” (Haight 298).

     

     
    4. See Daniel Smith’s lucid outline in his introduction to Deleuze’s Francis Bacon: The Logic of Sensation.

     

     
    5. All facts and figures in the following account come from Martin Yant.

     

     
    6. These descriptions come from Deleuze’s general discussion of the time image, specifically using the example of neo-realism as a disruptor of the classic movement-image. Here he is describing the effect of setting in neo-realist films when it does not serve simply as a resource for the action of the characters. The image becomes defined by its emission of sound and sight through duration rather than by a structured causal relation.

     

     

     

    Works Cited

     

    • Aaron, James E. and Marland K. Strasser, eds. Driver and Traffic Safety Education: Content, methods, and Organization. New York: Macmillan, 1966.
    • —. Driving Task Instruction: Dual-Control, Simulation, and Multiple-car. New York: Macmillan, 1974.
    • Ballard, J.G. The Atrocity Exhibition. Illustrations by Phoebe Gloeckner. San Francisco: Re/Search Publications, 1990.
    • “Camera Surveillance.” Prod. Highway Safety Films, 1964. 16mm. Hell’s Highway.
    • “The Child Molester.” Prod. Highway Safety Films, 1964. 16mm. Hell’s Highway.
    • Deleuze, Gilles. 1983. Cinema 1: The Movement-Image. Trans. Hugh Tomlinson and Barbara Habberjam. Minneapolis: U of Minnesota P, 1986.
    • —. Cinema 2: The Time-Image. 1985. Trans. Hugh Tomlinson and Robert Galeta. Minneapolis: U of Minnesota P, 1989.
    • —. Nietzsche and Philosophy. 1962. Trans. Hugh Tomlinson. New York: Columbia UP, 1983.
    • Fielding, Raymond. “Hale’s Tours: Ultrarealism in the Pre-1910 Motion Picture.” Cinema Journal 10:1 (Autumn, 1970): 34-47.
    • [CrossRef]
    • Haight, Frank A. “On the Effect of Removing Persons with ‘N’ or More Accidents from an Accident Prone Population.” Biometrika 52.1-2 (1965): 298-300.
    • Hell’s Highway: The True Story of Highway Safety Films. Dir. Brett Wood and Richard Wayman. KinoVideo, 2002. DVD.
    • Highway Safety Films. Something Weird Video, 2006. DVD.
    • “Highways of Agony.” Prod. Highway Safety Films, 1969. 16mm. Highway Safety.
    • “Mechanized Death.” Prod. Highway Safety Films, 1961. 16mm. Highway Safety.
    • Rodowick, D.N. Gilles Deleuze’s Time Machine. Durham: Duke UP, 1997.
    • —. Reading the Figural, or, Philosophy after the New Media. Durham: Duke UP, 2001.
    • Rommel, Robert Charles Sherwood. “Personality Characteristics, Attitudes, and Peer Group Relationships of Accident-Free youths and Accident-Repeating Youths.” Dissertation, Pennsylvania State University, 1958.
    • Shaviro, Steven. The Cinematic Body. Minneapolis: U of Minnesota P, 1993.
    • “Signal 30.” Prod. Highway Safety Films, 1959. 16mm. Highway Safety.
    • Smith, Daniel. “Deleuze on Bacon: Three Conceptual Trajectories in The Logic of Sensation.” Translator’s Introduction. Francis Bacon: The Logic of Sensation. Minneapolis: U of Minnesota P, 2003.
    • Smith, Ken. Mental Hygiene: Classroom Films 1945-1970. New York: Blast Books, 1999.
    • Tenney, Edward A. The Highway Jungle: The Story of the Public Safety Movement and of the Failure of “Driver Education” in Public Schools. New York: Exposition Press, 1962.
    • “U.S. Secretary of State Colin Powell Addresses the U.N. Security Council.” Transcript. 5 Feb. 2003. 1 Jul. 2009 <http://www.whitehouse.gov/news/releases/2003/02/20030205-1.html#39>.
    • Virilio, Paul. Unknown Quantity. London: Thames and Hudson, 2002.
    • Virilio, Paul, and Sylvère Lotringer. The Accident of Art. Trans. Michael Taormina. Cambridge: MIT Press, 2005.
    • “Wheels of Tragedy.” Prod. Highway Safety Films, 1963. 16mm. Highway Safety.
    • Yant, Martin. Rotten to the Core: Crime, Sex, and Corruption in Johnny Appleseed’s Hometown. Columbus, Ohio: Public Eye Publications, 1994.

     

     
  • Others’ Organs: South Asian Domestic Labor and the Kidney Trade

    Kalindi Vora (bio)
    University of California
    San Diego
    kavora@ucsd.edu

    Abstract
     
    “Others’ Organs” explores the particular limits on the mobility of rural agriculturalist South Indians, middle class Sri Lankan women, and young Indian and Pakistani men, whose needs for jobs become entwined with the commodification of “life.” I argue that the material constraints on these workers, as well as the creation of excess body parts and lives through medical and transportation technologies, creates a system where Indian lives function to support other lives in the West, rather than their own. Using recent ethnographic material on these sites, I juxtapose these different forms of migrations and labor to see how certain bodies, body parts, and portions of life can be made surplus in the interests of the market. I argue that the selling of kidneys in South India and the exporting of feminized labor from Sri Lanka to the Gulf, can be explained in terms of supply and demand, and result from an interaction of changing economic structures in India, the gendering of labor, and India’s postcolonial structural relationships to external centers of production. The excessiveness of certain parts, like the kidney, of particular family members, or even of certain arenas of existence, is produced in conversation with the production of need within the market, in this instance of the need for transplants and for hired labor within the home, creating the “need” to sell a kidney or to migrate. The second kidney and “spare” family members are actually necessities that are made surplus and then commodified.

     

     
    In the parking lot of a large shopping complex near Heathrow airport, the body of a young South Asian man was found and reported to the police in June of 2001. Upon investigation, the London police found that the body had been seen falling from the sky by a worker at Heathrow the previous day. The body turned out to be that of Mohammed Ayaz, a 21-year-old stowaway who failed in this last attempt to escape the harsh living conditions of his village on the Pakistan/Afghanistan border. Almost surely unaware that he would not be able to survive the extreme cold and lack of oxygen in the undercarriage of the plane, Ayaz likely died long before his body was released by the lowering of the landing gear. His body was found in the same parking lot where five other such bodies have been found.
     
    Before sprinting across the tarmac at Bahrain’s airport to climb into the wheel-well of the British Airways jet about to taxi for takeoff, Ayaz had worked as a contract laborer for seven months in Dubai. The debt his family accrued to pay for his journey from Pakistan was contracted to be repaid through two years of labor. This indenture was made unrelievable when Ayaz’s employer took his passport away and paid him less than a fourth of his promised wage, which was barely enough to pay for his own food, no less to send money to his family (Stephens, Mody, Addley and McCarthy). The mainstream British press versions of this story present Ayaz’s action in sensationalist phrases: desperate, radical, a last resort. Yet these interpretations read the story through a specific regime of value within the workings of capitalism, and imagine it to be independent of the workings of the international division of labor. Though his situation illustrates the way that the international division of labor relies on the restrictive and differential valuing of human lives as sources of labor power, or as labor-commodities, Ayaz’s recovered body figures more than a failed act of desperation. How does the role of imagination direct the migrant’s choice of last resort when he is unable to obtain visas and immobilized by untenable material circumstances?
     

     

    Generating Life as Value

     
    The story of Mohammed Ayaz helps us ask how value is produced and transmitted through the controlled mobility of subjects in contrast to the hyper mobility of abstracted elements of their lives, including body parts and labor. The story also forces us to think that these lives, their labor, and their value may circulate outside the logic of capital. I argue that there are alternate constructions of value within such narratives of capital that point to ways of thought that do not reproduce capitalism. This article juxtaposes two sites of the production of commodities that directly transmit human vital energy from South Asian producers to those who consume them: the sale of human kidneys for transplant and of the labor affective work, or work involved in caring for others, by migrant domestic workers. These biological and affective commodities, invested into societies apart from those of the producers, illustrate some of the capitalist processes at work between more and less wealthy populations in the global division of labor. I track the transmission of valuables out of South Asia through affective and biological commodities by re-reading recent ethnographic accounts of the sale of human kidneys by rural South Indians and of the migration of Sri Lankan domestic workers to the Persian Gulf nations. These re-readings alternate with analysis that theorizes the production and circulation of the value created by this labor. Juxtaposing the two sites of production helps get at the complexities of the cultural and economic value of the vital commodities involved in these systems. The juxtaposition of kidney selling with domestic labor migration is meant to highlight the sometimes non-intuitive yet compelling parallels between the economic processes and consequences of the transnational economy of affective and human biological commodities. Thinking about value through these juxtapositions also allows for acknowledgement of the other cultural systems-ways of knowing and evaluating-that exist alongside capitalist processes, something that is emphasized in studies of labor and migration in the field anthropology. Working from a cultural studies framework and building upon feminist and postcolonial theories of value and production, I suggest that we need to rethink the terms of Marx’s labor theory of value: our understanding of globalization and the generation of value should account for the production of life and of vital commodities through affective and biological labor from the Global South for consumption elsewhere.
     
    Like the value produced by migrant labor, the value inherent in and produced by human kidneys removed from Indian people for transplant elsewhere is transmitted from these people’s original communities to recipients in wealthier nations such as the Gulf states, the US, and the UK. Beginning in the late 1970s, materialist feminism developed the idea that feminized labor, labor that is constructed so as to be gendered feminine (see the discussion of Neferti Tadiar below), which occurs in the private realm and has often been termed reproductive labor, is actually itself productive (Eisenstein, Fortunati, Mies, Hennessy and Ingraham). I pick up this argument and juxtapose kidney selling and domestic labor to show that this labor not only reproduces the conditions of capitalist production by reproducing the worker, but produces life directly. Despite many differences, the trade in Indian kidneys has much in common with the migration of South Asian laborers to work in the Gulf. Both the migrant and the organ are freed by a process that constructs them as surplus. There are also important differences between these two processes: organs, imagined as independent of the original source body, become unmarked in their mobility and can therefore be reincorporated fully into valued life. The migrant laborer, on the other hand, retains a marked body that excludes him or her from entering fully valued social existence. The organ can be understood as carrying biocapital because the human organism is a means of production for the labor of self-care and preservation. The domestic laborer, on the other hand, produces value through affective labor: the production of personality, feeling, and emotion that is consumed by and invested into the lives of those who receive her care. In both cases, other people become the sites of accumulation of the value of these commodities, value that can be marked if not quantified. Finally, I return to the story of Mohammed Ayaz, suggesting that a sympathetic imagination of subaltern spaces may gesture to systems of value that co-exist with the dominant system, even if the dominant system cannot make them completely legible.
     

    Entanglements of Value in Affective and Biological Labor

     
    What makes an organ or labor (a specific portion of a person’s body and life) free to travel is its initial status as being “extra” or not needed in its current location. The making of peoples’ labor and their body parts surplus relies on material and cultural understandings of what is necessary. Buying and selling human organs in the market works as both a material and metaphoric example of the way processes of capital intersect with the mobility and identity of subjects, and with their bodies as surplus. It is particularly the second kidney that illustrates these intersections. As the product of a specific idea of excess, that is, the idea that there are parts that the body doesn’t need, the kidney is “freed” to have an existence separate from the body that produced it. However, tracing the flows of capital that allow for the mobility of the kidney also reveals limitations on the mobility of bodies. These limitations are created by the same processes that free the kidney in the first place.
     
    The examination of commodities that are produced by an individual body without additional “means of production,” like affective commodities and human biological materials such as kidneys, provokes questions about the value carried by such commodities, and about the nature of what is expended in its production. Marx’s labor theory of value understands all value to derive from human labor, mediated by instruments that are also human-made and whose value also contributes to the objects they help produce. There are a number of other ways in which value can be imparted to a commodity (the training and education of the person performing the labor, the labor entailed in converting natural resources into the materials used in production, etc.), but all of this value derives from human labor. For Marx, value in its multiple forms can be quantified through labor time, or time spent expending the energy of the body and mind in producing an object, which under capitalist production becomes a commodity. He argues that at the level of the commodity, value can exist as both exchange value and use-value, but these are ultimately different moments in the life of value produced by labor.
     
    The gendering of specific tasks, bodies, labor markets, and nations, particularly as it intersects with racial formations, is an important aspect of the division of labor that escapes geographical and class analysis. For example, a focus on the role of class that does not account for gender erases the feminized labor in households and across the global labor spectrum. This feminized labor produces life, but has not been part of the way that labor is theorized because of political economic theory’s focus on public labor that yields a physical commodity.1 Michael Hardt and Antonio Negri have begun to address this lack with the formulation of “immaterial labor,” but they do not fully address the erasure that has occurred and continues to occur through feminization (Hardt, Hardt and Negri).2 The processes behind the commodification of affective and biological labor and of the production of life are not vastly different from the selling of labor power for a wage identified by Marx, but the dominant currencies and epistemic understandings that shape this articulation of capitalism are different. A Marxist framework that accounts for the role of representation and the productivity of labor whose value accumulates in human lives allows for an analysis of new commodity forms while identifying the expansion of commodification into further reaches of the body and subject as in fact continuing and extending the logic of capitalism.
     
    In order to conceptualize affective labor, it is useful to engage it in a way made possible by postcolonial theory. One cannot separate an understanding of how specific bodies are seen to be useful from how capitalist forces already use these bodies as labor and materials. For example, Gayatri Spivak argues that because human relations are made abstract under capital, exploitation-the extraction of value-is a process of signification, assigning meaning to what has been abstracted. She identifies the complicity of two senses of “representation” in Marx: portrayal/signification (darstellen) can simultaneously be speaking for/standing in for (vertreten) (“Can the Subaltern Speak”). If representation is a way that value comes into being, then dominant portrayals of bodies and populations, for example, as structured by racialized and gendered norms, can stand in for other meanings those subjects once had. Once such representations become naturalized as part of a shared “common sense” knowledge, they constitute specific labor markets by marking bodies as appropriate for some kinds of labor and not others. In this sense, to know something or someone is already to understand them within a capitalist system of representation, so that value as a labor-commodity is tied up with the ability to command access to the material means of securing a good life. Such an understanding provides a way to view cultural struggles over representation, often occurring in arenas such as popular culture that seem removed from the international division of labor, as simultaneously economic and political. Thus value has both cultural and economic consequences, though dominant capitalist processes are never all-encompassing. For example, I recognize the labor theory of value advanced in Marx’s Capital as the dominant logic of the way new forms of commodities and commodified labor forms behave under capital, but at the same time, as subaltern historiographies and feminist materialist scholarship have established, I suggest that other economies are made illegible within the dominant logic. These other articulations of value establish multiple meanings of commodities and labor, and therefore the lives and bodies entangled in systems of value.3
     
    Globalization, intimately involved in the international division of labor, is defined and defended on the basis of processes and modes of understanding that contain their own justification within their very conceptualization. Tautologies around which these mainstream discussions of globalization are organized can be found in the discourses of supply and demand, modernization, and development. Economic rationality as an approach tends to see globalization so conceived as inevitable and homogenous, neglecting the ways in which global economies take advantage of pre-existing and idiomatic structures of value, power, and meaning. At the same time, one cannot simply say that there exists a separate realm, apart from the idiomatic or the dominant, in which cultures always find a way to survive. Recent challenges to the rationality and tautologies of globalization discourse propose new modes of thinking through global processes and their interfaces with specific social and individual bodies. Some examples include the notion of friction and global connection and the situated articulation of neoliberalism (Tsing, Ong). For the purposes of thinking about the global tendencies of capitalism in tandem with the failure of these tendencies to adequately represent the full range of possible relationships between culture and economics, it is useful to think of globalizing forces as producing places and bodies with new meanings that accord with a dominant logic, as territorializing and coding in addition to translating or hybridizing them. Most importantly, none of these explanations of the ways globalizing forces work must be understood as a comprehensive model, for as a number of postcolonial and subaltern theorists point out, there will always be systems of value that are illegible from within the dominant system. It is only from within this dominant system that one can even imagine that one is analyzing an entire system. For this reason, methods, like juxtaposition, through which one tries to discern or at least to gesture to such systems must themselves be somewhat experimental.
     

    The Repression and Recognition of Difference in the Generation of Surplus

     
    The idea that a second kidney is excessive is one example of a new mode of abstraction allowed for by the expanding commodification of human biological materials. Scholars in Science and Technology Studies have referred to the way that the sciences of life construct and articulate new historical modes of capitalism as “biocapitalism.” Lawrence Cohen, in his ethnography on South Indian kidney sellers, sees the second kidney become excessive as the result of biotechnological knowledge and of the market’s ability to capitalize on this knowledge. Organ sellers do not sell a life (the correlation in terms of labor would then be slavery), but rather an extra life that is deemed not necessary. In order to understand the connection between the migrant laborer and the commodified kidney, we must understand the link between the construction of surplus labor and surplus body parts, as well as capitalism’s dependence on this surplus.
     
    In October 2002, an article was published in the Journal of the American Medical Association (JAMA) on the economic and health consequences of selling one’s kidney in India. Reports of problems with kidney transplants in several journals (Scheper-Hughes, “Commodity Fetishism” 44) led to the discovery by the international medical community of the surprisingly large number of impoverished Indians who, for more than a decade, had been selling their kidneys (Goyal et al.). The authors of the JAMA study concluded that payment for kidneys did not help the poor overcome poverty, and that in fact family income declined by one-third when a family member sold a kidney. Almost one hundred percent of sellers cited debt as the primary reason for the decision to sell a kidney, and this debt was acquired primarily to cover food/household expense and rent. Most sellers stayed in debt after the sale. The authors cite data that seventy-nine percent of sellers would not recommend that someone else sell a kidney, which they argue implies that potential donors would be less likely to sell a kidney if they were better informed of likely outcomes (1591). The article argues for the right of everyone to make informed decisions about their bodies (1593). The question of choice and what constitutes an “informed decision” is not raised, nor do the authors say how a situation would come about in which one would have to or even could sell a kidney in order to live.
     
    The JAMA study is one of the first in mainstream medicine to recognize the phenomenon of the organ trade. Popular knowledge of the global trade in organs has circulated primarily in the form of rumor (Scheper-Hughes, “Global Traffic”). The critical discourse about the organ trade focuses on ethics, values, and human rights as they allow for and can potentially limit the exploitation that occurs through the market in human organs. For example, the Bellagio task force, a small international group of transplant surgeons, organ procurement specialists, social scientists, and human rights activists, was organized by social historian David Rothman to address the “urgent need for new international ethical standards for human transplant surgery in light of reports of abuses against the bodies of some of the most socially disadvantaged members of society” (Scheper-Hughes, “Global Traffic” 191). Nancy Scheper-Hughes describes the task force as “examining the ethical, social and medical effects of human rights abuses regarding the procurement and distribution of organs to supply a growing market” (ibid.). This work within the discourses of rights and ethics is necessary, utilizing as it does already existing modes and institutions to address the trade in organs. These discourses also provide a language with which to communicate the depth of the problem to a wide audience. However, an understanding of the global economy that explains how subjects become the appropriate source of different kinds of labor and vital commodities casts a large shadow of doubt on the ability of discourses such as those of rights and ethics to control practices of organ commodification and extraction. It can be argued that the very values to which these rights and ethics refer are implicated in the international division of labor itself, as examples of forms of thought inherent in processes of capital. Such forms of thought, for example the question of who is represented by the “human” in “human rights,” rely at least partially on common-sense conceptions that are already constructed by the interests of capital. The practice of kidney selling demonstrates how processes of material abstraction lead to abstraction in understanding. An example For example, Lawrence Cohen’s study of the village of Villivakkam in South India, nicknamed “Kidneyvakkam” because so many of its residents have undergone the operation to sell a kidney, uses the notion of “the other kidney” to approach the complicity between the global market and lived hierarchies of power and value (“The Other Kidney”). Cohen argues that the development of cyclosporine, an immunosuppressant drug that allows the transplanting of organs between increasingly distant biological matches, precipitated a shift in biomedicine from a politics of recognition to a politics of suppression. Instead of searching for the closest biological match for organ donation, surgeons using cyclosporine can use more distant matches for transplant. Cohen elaborates on this shift in biomedicine to describe a multiple biopolitics of suppression that allows for the development of new markets for organ sellers and recipients.
     
    The suppression of difference enabled by the technology of cyclosporine occurs at once on the biological level and on the socio-structural level. Cohen argues that “cyclosporine globalizes, creating myriad biopolitical fields where donor populations are differentially and flexibly materialized” (“The Other Kidney” 11-12). In this process, difference is “selectively suppressed,” allowing specific subpopulations of others to become “same enough” for their members to be fragmented and their parts to be reincorporated (ibid.). For example, Cohen mentions one woman’s response to his questions about her decision to use a kidney broker to find an organ for an ailing family member instead of searching among biological relatives: “Why should I put a family member at risk when I can just buy a kidney?” (“The Other Kidney” 19). One can spare blood kin from the sacrifice of donating an organ because the “other kidney” is not recognized as a sacrifice. In the respondent’s statement, “a kidney” does not come from a life that is like the ones she values-that of her family members. The suppression of difference as a biotechnology of transplant allows a kidney to shed its mark of difference while the body from which it originated remains marked or coded.
     
    Like labor power, the second kidney’s value comes from its positioning as partially excessive to life or living. In Capital, Marx describes the separation of workers from common land used for agriculture and grazing livestock. Once disenfranchised, or “freed” from the means of production, the laborer was also free to sell his labor in the market. Because this subject can provide more labor than covers the cost of keeping herself alive, there is a surplus of labor possible in labor power. This surplus is the origin of capitalization, and it is labor power’s use-value to capital. The “freeing” of the subject as labor power, the event that for Marx defines the relationship between the laborer and capitalist production, is parallel in some ways to the “freeing” of the kidney for circulation. Once the kidney is constructed as surplus, debt structures shift so that the kidney as collateral is taken into account by money lending at the village level, and so the “need” to sell a kidney is created as labor becomes devalued to the point that it cannot even provide minimal subsistence. When one cannot subsist by labor, then the individual on the losing side of the international division of labor must get the means of survival from the other side. Suddenly the idea of the extra kidney, the broker, the lender who knows that the sale is possible, and the system that will rapidly get the kidney to someone on the other side all fall into place. The bodies having “commodity candidacy” (Appadurai 13-14) are determined by cultural systems of value that pre-date their incorporation into the global market as commodities-though Appadurai’s concept of “regimes of value” is meant to account for the “transcendence of cultural boundaries by the flow of commodities”-systems already incorporated into local divisions of labor, and it is onto these that capital maps its forms of meaning and value.
     

    Use-value and Commodity Candidacy

     
    The bodies and subjects that emerge as sources of organs are found in places that have been prefigured, both in the sense of their cultural signification and of their material circumstances, for heightened commodity candidacy. Racialization is a primary factor in this prefiguring, in the investment of norms that position bodies in relation to limitations on mobility in global labor markets. In her work on organ harvesting in Brazil and South Africa, Nancy Scheper-Hughes gives the example of Mrs. Sitsheshe in South Africa, whose son had been killed in gang warfare. Her son’s body was subsequently mutilated and mined for organs in a police morgue (“Commodity Fetishism” 39). As a black South African situated in a geography of violence pre-determined by the remaining structures of Apartheid, Mrs. Sitsheshe’s son’s body was multiply determined as abject, as outside of socially valued life. The overlap and complicity of this cultural and structural determination with the cultural values and structures of the immediate market account for the ease and speed with which this nineteen year old was literally broken into pieces. Scheper-Hughes refers to this multiple-determination as the “excess mortality” of young black bodies in South Africa. Excess mortality appears to go hand-in-hand with the organ-as-surplus life, as both are held in the balance of biopower and capitalist production. In both South Africa and India, organs from these bodies travel up the hierarchy of power and production for transplant. Foucault’s reading of race through biopower, where racism determines who must live and who can die, is revealed to be relevant simultaneously on multiple levels of power (Foucault 241-52).
     
    As we can be see from the ways that certain bodies are determined to be suitable kidney sellers, and certain laborers suitable for export to the Gulf, processes of commodification follow extant social hierarchies and incorporate idiomatic, situated sets of power relations into the process of exploitation. Racialization is only the most widespread example of a system of cultural values, or a threshold of exception, that masks the valuing of subjects as labor-commodities and as the source of biological commodities such as organs. Robin Monroe’s work on the harvesting of organs from executed prisoners in China reveals that the number of crimes designated as capital crimes-and hence the number of executions-is increasing, and that a systematic relationship exists between the hospital’s preparation of the transplant recipient while the matched “donor” prisoner is prepared for an execution (“Global Traffic” 196). Scheper-Hughes also discovered that at one mental institution in Buenos Aires, organs were harvested from inmates without even the pretense of consent. She has referred to the kidney as “the last commodity,” representing as it often does the final option for disenfranchised people to survive, and perhaps the furthest extreme of commodification (“Commodity Fetishism” 42). Even in the relatively wealthy and privileged centers of capital, some citizens are marginalized to the point of approaching the threshold of exception. In one example, a California man without dental insurance offered to sell “non-essential” organs in order to obtain money for dentures (ibid.). A 2003 article in the San Francisco Chronicle tells the story of a British man selling his kidney on eBay to finance medical treatment for his six-year-old daughter. The offer ran for a week with no bids before eBay shut it down, stating: “Humans, the human body or any human body parts may not be listed on eBay or included as a gift, prize or in connection with a giveaway or charity” (Associated Press). “Unnecessary” body parts have become potential surplus that can be sold as an action of last resort for those who are too disenfranchised to have other options.
     

    Necessity, the Good Life, and the Usefulness of Labor

     
    The privileging of the language of supply and demand within economic analyses of migration to explain how certain people become the appropriate sources of specific labor and commodities over other economies-social, cultural, political, and so on-conceals the relationship between the division of labor and the ways that subjects are valued in relation to one another. This relative valuing happens in ways that are often explained as cultural but that reflect the relative value of subjects as labor-commodities and as the source of biological and affective commodities. As Fredric Jameson explains, not only ideology as recognized “ideas” but as our very forms of thought/perception is at work in the processes of capital. In Capital, Marx argues that by laboring in capitalist production, the worker is made abstract. He or she becomes the producer of a certain number of units of abstract labor, where abstract labor is defined as the averaged labor of a society overall (128). In Dialectic of Enlightenment, Horkeimer and Adorno argue that the first violence of abstraction is in forgetting the specificity of bodies and the specificity of the context of those bodies. The meaning attributed to abstracted bodies, their resignification, is arbitrary in the sense that it cannot be explained when removed from systems of value within capitalism. However, their meaning as objects and what they signify then becomes a form of thought embodied in capital itself (173). In other words, the way that a subject is understood as useful, or for what purpose valuable, depends on how that body is read within a system of coding that is incorporated into an understanding of reality that resides in the way that capitalism functions. This understanding of a subject’s value in turn becomes part of a structure of values, or common sense understandings, that exist within the predominant tendencies of global capitalism.
     
    Conceptual violence, the understanding or reading of some people as less human or not human at all, has implications that are simultaneously naturalized, systemic, economic, and ‘logical.’ For example, we can identify the way that India’s colonial history, a history of British resource extraction without the building of a social and material infrastructure, has contributed to India’s post-independence economic history. The resulting material poverty of many of India’s inhabitants could then help explain the sale of kidneys by the rural poor in South India. However, if we ask simply why the rural poor everywhere aren’t succumbing to the same process at the same rate, we see that there is more than the economics of supply and demand at work. A similar argument can be made for the relative cheapness of products in specific labor markets in different parts of the world. The perception that these particular subjects are somehow appropriate sources of organs for those who can afford them plays an important role in their exploitation. This perception works along with a set of other conditions, including relevant technologies and other infrastructures, but these infrastructural elements can also materialize on demand, as in the case of kidney brokers and lenders in India. One of the arguments made by those who want to let the market control the selling of human organs is that there are people who “need” to sell their organs, and people who need to be able to buy them, so those who need the resources gained by selling an organ are appropriate sources (Scheper-Hughes, “The Ends of the Body”). However, the market logic of this explanation doesn’t address the way such a need comes about, how market logic itself reinforces culturally understood structures of power already in place, nor the necessary dehumanizing of specific populations. We cannot separate an understanding of the way specific bodies are recognized as useful, or seen to have a particular use-value, from the way they are already understood to be “useful” within production processes. Someone is seen as useful to dominant society because of feedback between the labor he does and the types of labor for which he is seen as appropriate.
     
    Although belief in the separation of political economy from the cultural realm is part of a dominant capitalist ideology, I argue that the connection between the signification of subjects and capitalist economics is vital to understanding the value assigned to people as labor-commodities and as the source of bodily commodities. Traditional economic logic allows us to see labor migration and the creation of labor markets only in terms of labor supply and demand, or in terms of cultural diaspora. Figuring affect and desire into economics becomes impossible because of this division, as does seeing the distinction between types of labor as a distinction of degrees of human-ness. Examining the limitations on bodies and the constraints on different lives reveals that the nature of economic value is also implicated in how we assess the humanity of laboring human beings, and that the process of valorization, of assigning value, is a process of figuration, of decoding and translating someone into comprehensibility.
     
    Though exchange value, which is the most obviously economic value form, comes to dominate our thinking about the way commodities and labor circulate, for Marx and Marxist theorists like Spivak it is just one face of value. Without an already existing concept of something’s usefulness, it cannot have exchange value; hence the latter is a parasite of use-value. Because of this relationship, something or someone deemed by society to be not useful, or useful in limited ways, also loses its exchange value, its ability to command monetary compensation for its value. This begins to explain both how some lives become more constrained than others, and how some lives are seen as more appropriate sources of organs or of specific types of labor than others. The quality of the material conditions under which different people live indicates differences in the perception of the appropriateness of some subjects over others for the investment of vital energy into those lives. At the same time, the amount of value, defined as human vital energy, invested into lives has immediate bearing on the quality of those lives. It is this investment of vital energy through affective and biological commodities that I refer to when speaking of the work of producing life. A process that transmits the product of labor directly from one life to another, mediated by commodities that aren’t physical objects yet carry value all the same, cannot be quantified through labor time. For this reason, looking at a given person or society and analyzing the conditions and quality of life (where quality marks the ability to meet perceived needs) is a way to at least track and evaluate this labor.
     
    While ideas about what makes a good life differ, they all require a balance of needs and the ability to fill those needs in a way that minimizes suffering. Analysis of domestic workers in the affective labor market (those who produce affective commodities for export or investment abroad) has shown that those workers cannot always fill their needs (on class distinctions between migrants and non-migrant families, see Parreñas 575). As the example of the created need to buy and sell kidneys demonstrates, needs are not stable; in fact, the generation of always new necessities is at the core of the operation of capitalist accumulation. The denial of needs works to maintain the relative cheapness of some laboring populations in relation to others. The cheapness of someone’s labor and life therefore reflects only the “outlawed necessities” that maintain this cheapness (Hennessy, Profit and Pleasure 228). For example, the communities of those who sell their kidneys almost never have access to transplants themselves. Thinking from within a space already organized by capitalism, Marx imagines the good life against the nature of life under capitalism: Under capitalism “life appears only as a means to life.” This is opposed to Marx’s imagination of directly “being”: the impact of this form of alienation, where life is a means to living instead of “being,” upon lived experience is that once we become aware that our life does not fully belong to us, we suffer (Marx and Engels 76-7). If part of the drive of capitalist cultures is to increase the numbers of hours a day that human activity is spent doing labor that produces capitalist value, it is important to identify value produced by affective and biological labor, often performed in non-public spaces and accomplishing ends that do not reveal themselves in objects or other quantifiable entities, and to distinguish this as additional to the value produced by more visible wage work. It is also important to establish the necessity of such labor and commodities for material existence, which can be less obvious than the traditional measure of quality of life as access to food, shelter, and safety, among others.
     
    The way that feminized bodies and labor are represented within the common sense of the global market complicates the already strained separation of labor from the actual physical body of the worker and from the life she lives. As Marx’s analysis explains, the usefulness of labor is the way it can produce more than it costs to maintain. For Marx there is a distinction between productive labor that results in commodities with exchange value, and reproductive labor. Any type of energy expended to preserve the worker and his future replacement qualifies as reproductive labor. However, the increasingly common phenomenon of the commodification and sale of domestic labor, a form of what Marx calls reproductive labor, belies this division. In addition, because of the ways bodies that perform domestic labor are marked by race and gender, the commodification of the worker’s body itself must be addressed in discussing this form of labor. Neferti Tadiar explains that because domestic helpers are paid not for a specific skill, but for their gendered and raced bodies, they are labor-commodities. Unlike men, who sell their labor power as a commodity, women’s labor is appropriated with their bodies and sexuality. Tadiar notes that under the conditions of slavery often imposed upon Filipina domestic workers-rape and other forms of sexual assault, beating, near-confinement, non-payment of salary, passport deprivation, and indefinite labor-time-one of the largest Filipino diaspora populations is in some ways immobile. Not only does this labor condition rely on structures of racialization and gendering in both the sending and receiving societies but, as Tadiar argues, it is a component of the conditions of globalization that rely upon the dehumanization of bodies and subjects (145-146).
     

    Affective Labor and the Production of Value

     
    Paid domestic work, such as the work done by South Asian women in the Gulf states, requires not only the performance of tasks that invest labor into a product, but also the repetitive performance of a certain persona and the complicated category of “care” labor, all of which makes distinguishing labor power from personhood problematic. While the employer of a migrant domestic laborer acquires time and needs to perform fewer duties, the migrant’s domestic responsibilities “at home” must be covered by unpaid female relatives or poorly compensated local domestic help (Parreñas). When one identifies this hierarchy, one can see how the value of the migrant domestic worker as a human being with human needs, that when denied entail suffering, becomes inseparable from shifting relations between states, from the state and society, and from notions of morality that entail particular family relations and labor relations.
     
    Munira Ismail’s fieldwork interviewing domestic labor migrants in transit between Sri Lanka and the Gulf states also shows how the commodification of domestic labor creates a shift in necessity and makes other adjustments in the local economy, wherein that which is made surplus becomes essential to sell. In the early 1980s, many infrastructural projects in the Middle East that had been funded by high oil prices in the previous decade and that used migrant construction labor were completed, leading to a lower demand for imported skilled workers. Meanwhile, a growing middle class needed domestic workers, resulting in the feminization of expatriate labor in the Middle East. National economic policies in Sri Lanka were liberalizing the import of commodities formerly produced by handloom and textile industries which employed primarily female laborers. The Sri Lankan government created an infrastructure to facilitate the export of this “surplus” labor to the Middle East, in contrast with other South Asian countries, which had curtailed female migration to the Middle East in response to reports of abuse and harassment of maids (Ismail 224-225). The women who had the means to take advantage of this infrastructure, however, were not the unemployed Sri Lankan industrial laborers. They were middle class women from families that could support the cost of travel to the Middle East. Ismail reports that all of the women she interviewed claimed to have never worked outside their own homes before migrating and had been entirely dependent on their husbands’ earnings. Once their wives secured work in the Middle East and began sending remittances to their families, these men tended to give up their jobs, and the mothers of the migrant women tended to take over their childcare and household management. Its economic reorganization led the family to depend on the migrant’s income, meaning that after the migrant returned home, she usually needed to return to work in the Middle East (Ismail 231-232). Scholarship on domestic labor migration attends not only to the constraints it places upon migrants, but also to the spaces of opportunity it opens up for them. Michele Gamburd notes that within limits, housemaids in the Middle East who played their cards right could achieve a degree of power and autonomy in the homes where they worked (102-3). In eighteen months spent interviewing returned migrants and the families of current migrants in one Sri Lankan village, she also found that for some women, the only way to escape abusive or otherwise unpleasant conditions in their home or village was to migrate to the Middle East and become a maid. Both Ismail and Gamburd acknowledge a certain expansion of options for Sri Lankan migrants provided by their jobs-a recognition of the agency of these individuals and their families. However, this recognition of agency does not address the choices involved in these options, specifically why certain groups of people find themselves in situations with extraordinarily and specifically limited options. As with the situation of kidney sellers in South India, supply and demand, individual agency, and the strategies involved in remittance economies apply here. What is not accounted for in either this understanding of the laborer’s agency or in that of the kidney seller is the dehumanizing force of capitalist logic within the international division of labor. This force devalues these women’s labor and bodies as surplus, indicating the non-essential nature of this labor and of these parts to their lives. This becomes problematic when these situations are compared to others within the division of labor where these elements of life are understood and valued as essential.
     
    The costs to the migrant, aside from those recognizable as economic, do not figure into the equation of supply and demand, or into the role of the female worker as extra and therefore exportable labor. Gamburd explains that in their places of work in the Gulf, domestic laborers are often told what to wear and where to worship (regardless of religion). The material control of the employer over sleeping space, food, and hygiene may be meant to protect employees, but is also symbolically charged (see Moors 390). Commensality, the sharing of food and drink that often also has cultural connotations of shared community, is an example of control that can signify belonging and status or their lack. Gamburd explains that Sri Lankan live-in care workers are both insiders and outsiders in the households where they work, experiencing great intimacy but also loneliness. Most are confined to the house or proximate neighborhood and denied a social space of their own, yet are kept on the margins of family life (Gamburd 109). The process of accepting the labor of migrants but not their lives operates like the politics of suppression and recognition that Lawrence Cohen identifies in the circulation of kidneys. Both the commodified kidney and the migrant laborer shift location to support the lives of those fully “inside” socially valued existence. The migrant domestic laborer is like an organ of her home that has been made excessive by the international division of care work. Unlike the kidney, however, the body of the migrant does not shed its coding in transit. There remains a sphere of valorization from which migrants are excluded, and it is this exclusion that helps define what is included as relatively more valuable, in both a cultural sense and in the sense of the value of subjects as labor-commodities.
     
    Situating the female Sri Lankan laborer as extra and exportable not only denies her a realm of choice that would be considered by most people to be humanly necessary-for example, the choice of whether or not to live in one’s home with one’s social and kin groups-it also denies her full participation in socially valued existence, whether she chooses to remain in Sri Lanka or to work elsewhere. Rhacel Salazar Parreñas explains that the choice to maximize earnings as transnational low-wage workers denies the workers the intimacy of the family, thus making care-giving more painful. This cost has material implications yet is not quantifiable by traditional measures of labor. The nature of this labor in particular adds to the problem, because it encompasses every waking hour of life and operates in the realm of emotion. Accounting for the labor of care and the value of the commodities it produces becomes extraordinarily difficult in terms of labor-time. It is for this reason that thinking about the production of life through the investment of human vital energy into other people and communities is useful to indicate both the difficulty of compartmentalizing domestic labor and the violence inherent in the international division of labor’s impact on the movement of these women to devalued spheres of existence.
     
    Marx’s original formulation in Capital defines reproductive labor against productive labor. If productive labor was understood as the investment of socially averaged labor time into an object for exchange, reproductive labor was the energy put into making sure the person doing productive labor could return to work each day. It recreated or replenished the labor power of “he” who worked outside the home in the public sphere by supporting the biological reproduction of the worker’s body and strength, as well as a replacement worker in the form of child-rearing (270-80). In the form of care, love, and nurture, it also reassured the worker of his humanity, allowing him to continue to participate in his own commodification as labor. Contemporary feminists and queer theorists have extended this analysis by redefining such labor as productive in itself, producing immediate life and not just supporting the (male) worker who earned the means to immediate life.4
     
    In the work of maids, nannies, and other domestic service workers, the provision of comfort through smiling, soothing remarks, or the meeting of subtle wishes and desires of the client often requires the person providing such commodities to evoke the actual feelings of indulgence, care, worry, and concern behind such actions.5 Paid childcare, for example, illustrates how such intimate expression, requiring the production of genuine feelings, can then be completely alienated from the producer. The state of living in alienation from the physical products of one’s labor is a kind of loneliness, even in the traditional understanding of productive labor found in Marx’s work. In The Economic and Philosophical Manuscripts of 1844, Marx explains the difference between working to live when selling labor-power for a wage is the only means of subsistence, and working in a way that is integrated in a good life. The alienation of self and of individual vitality that results from the necessity of working to live is not “the good life” Marx imagines. The more hours spent in such labor, the less time there is for what Marx calls “human use” (Marx and Engels 87) and Neferti Tadiar calls “human potential” (131). I read the question of the good life, and the potential for a future good life, as an expression of a person’s ability to accumulate the investment of value into that life. For this reason, I argue that if human lives are becoming a site for the accumulation of capital transmitted by biological and affective commodities, and a place where value is carried by non-object commodities from producers and invested directly into an individual or community’s life in a way that leads to increased potential future life, we can describe this process as biocapital.
     

    Imagination and Value Revisited

     
    The connection between the signification of subjects and capitalist economic processes is necessary for understanding how the accumulation of value functions. Figuring affect into economics becomes very difficult because of this division, as does seeing the distinction between types of labor as one of degrees of human-ness. What is revealed when one examines the limitations on bodies and the constraints on different lives is that social acts and economic acts can be simultaneous and sometimes indistinguishable, for example in the process of representation described above (vertreten/darstellen), and that these are also always acts of figuration. How then can we think about the importance of use-value outside of capital? As Dipesh Chakrabarty and Gayatri Spivak have argued, the heterogeneity of use-value is a “private grammar” (Spivak, “Scattered Speculations” 119), having meaning outside the dominant system of coding. In these other logics or systems of meaning we may find alternate ways to think about bodies and lives even as they remain limited and undervalued by market processes.
     
    The vitality of living labor yields both the recognizable historical archive and other histories that do not get represented in that archive. Dipesh Chakrabarty argues that living labor necessarily exceeds what capital can subsume, which is both its use-value to capital and uncontrollable excess as the capacity for human living (Provincializing Europe 60). He explains that the temporality of what is legible from within the dominant system of capitalism constitutes the linear narrative of canonical history in Western culture. This history is posited retroactively as everything leading up to the “now” of capital. Until it is clear that they have reached this “now,” capitalists and workers do not belong to the “being” of capital. They are “becoming,” a category that organizes all temporalities either as in the “now” of capital or as moving towards it. Reading Marx, Chakrabarty refers to this history of capital as History 1. To approach spaces and times in the past without seeing them only as “becoming” in this way, Chakrabarty describes History 2s. These alternative narratives are antecedents of capital in that “capital encounters them as antecedents” but “not as antecedents established by itself, not as forms of its own life-processes” (64). For this reason, History 2s can be said not to contribute to the reproduction of capital, though they are coextensive with those that do, interrupting and punctuating capital’s logic. This reading of history allows Chakrabarty to conclude that difference is not something external to capital, nor simply subsumed into it, but rather something that lives in “intimate and plural relationships to [it], ranging from opposition to neutrality” (66). It also marks the multiple systems of meaning that create use-value in circulation with and against the flows of capital.
     
    For Spivak, “time” refers to the singular temporality and history of capital, but there are still temporalities that have not been subsumed by capital’s history. Spivak refers to this indeterminacy in temporality as “timing” (Spivak, Critique 38). There is room for “timing” and alternate spaces in Spivak’s reading of use-value, though she does not try to represent a subject that would exist in such time and spaces. Similarly, Chakrabarty describes the excess of living labor, upon which capital relies yet which it fails to ever entirely control, as becoming imbued in the commodity itself (“Marx After Marxism” 1096). Just as the labor invested in the production of the commodity cannot be contained or mapped entirely, the nature of the commodity is similarly indeterminate. The nature of the commodity and therefore its use-value, upon which exchange value is again a parasite, is not fixed or stable. As Geoffrey Bowker and Susan Leigh Star point out, each standard and each category of classification valorizes some point of view and silences another, a process which they deem not inherently bad, but as requiring “an ethical choice” (5). For example, we can ask who benefits at whose expense from a given system of classification and understanding. They also point out that classifications and standards are related in ways that impact one’s membership in different social worlds or communities of practice as well as the “taken-for-grantedness of objects” within these spaces (15).
     
    These complications of the production and bearers of value also implicate the spaces of life, allowing us to think through imaginative practices occurring among Sri Lankan domestic labor migrants or Indian kidney sellers that aren’t necessarily legible in the terms of capital. For example, if life becomes legible to capital only as the source of labor power, perhaps the best way to approach what falls outside of discussions focusing on coercion and agency in relation to domestic labor migrants is to think about illegible areas of life to which Chakrabarty and Spivak direct our attention. For example, how do pleasure and other meaning-making practices involved in labor, and particularly care labor, complicate our understanding of the lives of workers? In her examination of Filipina domestic helpers working in the Gulf, Neferti Tadiar points to the subjective sense of living that remains present within the concept of living labor. She recognizes a creative capacity and potential political power in this space of life that is also a space of self-production for workers. Though these elements of life may be excluded from socially valued life, and therefore remain in many ways invisible, their existence continues to escape capital’s system of value and hence its imagination.
     
    The act of Mohammed Ayaz with which we opened takes on a different meaning when put in the context of his having been made surplus, and of the denial of value to him as a migrant worker. Described in mainstream press as an act of desperation or radical migration, Ayaz’s seemingly hopeless attempt to travel towards a center of value ended in his death. In the media portrayal, his body became testament to this death, described as it was found on the pavement near Heathrow. Ayaz’s body was freed as the kidney is freed. However, whereas the kidney is allowed to become a new part of someone’s socially valued life, the migrant’s habitation of fully valued existence is suppressed. Can we read Ayaz’s imagination as something other than an irrational hope or an ill-advised act of desperation? Achille Mbembe finds that even the slave is able to use the very body that has been commodified as an instrument for his or her own expression: “Breaking with uprootedness and the pure world of things of which he or she is but a fragment, the slave is able to demonstrate the protean capabilities of the human bond through music and the very body that was supposedly possessed by another” (36). In a political and economic system that needs to determine who may live and who must die, can Ayaz’s trip to his death be seen as excessive to that system?6 If we approach Ayaz’s action as the result of a refusal to reside where his life was unrecognized, his story seems to be a testimony to the excess life of the migrant that is not allowed recognition along with his or her commodified body. By refusing to stay in Dubai, where the limits on his mobility made possible his exploitation, Ayaz rejects his exclusion from socially valued existence. Though we cannot know exactly why Ayaz took his journey, and though it may have made no noticeable changes in the world, we begin to see why the undertaking of this journey had more to do with life than with death.
     

    Accumulation of Capital: Vital Energy and the Good Life

     
    Given the availability of English in South Asia, the lingering of postcolonial fantasies that sustain continuing connections with and interdependence on Europe and America, diasporic networks and their economies tied into the region, and the span of life conditions on the subcontinent, India’s labor populations yield a particular picture of value as the infusion of vital energy into the future life chances of a given body. Focusing on other populations would inflect this analysis in useful and meaningful ways. For this reason, I am not trying to produce a theory of value as much as to supplement the labor theory of value by thinking through bodily and historical difference as mediated by contemporary tendencies in capitalism represented in the production of biological and affective commodities. Dwelling on these contexts as they are implicated in the production and commodification of life through affective and biological labor bears upon some of the terms of Marx’s labor theory of value in useful ways I briefly overview here.
     
    Use-value can only be observed once it has entered a system of legibility. The dominant concepts of mainstream capitalist common sense, including usefulness, constitute the most obvious system of legibility. Through this system, markers of bodily difference (class, race, gender, sexuality, ability) become markers of appropriateness for certain places in the work of production and consumption, rather than others. However, if we examine the life-cycle of value in current capitalist practices, the moments of transition between the manifestations of different facets of value, or between positions in the chain of value, act as moments of transmission or communication (Spivak, “Scattered Speculations”). Thinking of value in this way points to the necessity of acknowledging the other systems of knowing, reality, and value that exist as intertwined with capitalist processes, though they may not always be communicated.
     
    Use-values that do not “make sense” within a capitalist logic may become illegible as exchange values, but that does not mean that they no longer characterize a given commodity, be this an object, non-object, or a subject as labor-commodity. Exchange value relies on dominant concepts of use and travels via currencies to which many have limited access, for example programming code or the English language. At the same time, those without access to these currencies, such as rural agriculturalists in South India, are left with choices of last resort that do not require the mediation of labor to carry the physical vitality of their bodies to another. This is one way to explain the shift from selling the labor that a sound body can perform to selling a part of that body itself, which is then invested as value in another’s life. The problem of measuring value in traditional political economic terms, resulting from increasingly complex production and the non-quantifiable nature of value carried by affective and biological commodities, necessitates a non-positivist mode of analyzing value. If value is always simultaneously socio-cultural (some lives and spheres of existence are valorized at the expense of others, and are produced and enhanced by dominant modes of understanding) and economic (there is a cost of imagining one’s life through others’ modes of understanding in terms of comfort, satisfaction, meaning, and in terms of what conditions of living can be produced by the work designated as appropriate to one worker over another), it makes little sense to calculate it only in terms of labor time. I argue that accumulated value manifests as the quality of vitality in a given human’s or human population’s current life and potential for future life. Labor power as Marx defines it has been the most obviously commodified form of this vitality. However, labor power as a commodity must be able to reach the consumer, and as the work of consumption expands in both breadth and depth, those who do not have access to technologies of travel and to ways of transmitting labor power to consumers have few options besides expending the actual energy. I see this shift as also being behind what social scientists such as Sarah Franklin, Donna Haraway, Kaushik Sundar Rajan, and Catherine Waldby and Robert Mitchell have observed as a growing trend for capitalist processes to be organized around life in the form of biotechnology and bioinformatics.
     
    Class alone does not tell us about the relative value that has been invested in a given person’s life through his or her ability to consume objects and affects produced by others. This investment of the vital energy originating from the lives of others is at the heart of Marx’s labor theory of value, so in a sense, all labor operates like biocapital, where the product of human vital energy is consumed to promote the well-being and future life of someone else. One important difference, however, is that in Marx’s analysis, exchange is mediated by the embodiment of that energy in a physical commodity. The work of care, attention, and service produce commodities like comfort, security, and self-worth that confirm one’s humanity-commodities that are not physical objects yet that when consumed can make one feel better and more valuable. These feelings turn out to be essential to human life and to the ability to imagine oneself or one’s community as having a viable future. This is at the heart of an understanding of value that takes into account the direct relationship between the balance of production and of consumption in a given individual or social body, and the future life of that body.
     
    The differential value invested into the lives of people in the US and South Asia provides a starting point for thinking about how value is transmitted by the non-physical commodities exported by South Asia’s service, human biologicals, and care industries. While measuring this value quantitatively is not my objective, I suggest that one way to think about value is in the obvious differential allocation of quality of life between those who are free to consume these commodities and those who must only produce them.
     

    Kalindi Vora is Assistant Professor in the Department of Ethnic Studies, University of California San Diego. Her work draws from critical race and gender frameworks in the study of transnational movements of people and labor between India and other nations, particularly the U.S.

     

     

    Footnotes

     
    1. See texts noted in footnote two for elaborations of this critique.

     

     
    2. Hardt and Antonio Negri argue that this inability results from a tendency in capitalist production to become increasingly internally complex, as well as from there being few if any referents left outside the time of labor to provide an objective measure for labor. Feminist materialists have recognized that production has always been more internally complex than the concept of labor time can account for, because domestic labor in the worker’s home was not calculated in the wage-earner’s remunerations. In this sense, there was always a form of immeasurable labor in the history of capital, the labor that Marx called “reproductive labor.”

     

     
    3. This understanding of value and the bodies of scholarship from which it derives differs from other traditions of reading Marx’s theory of value, for example in mainstream political science, in that it allows us to see how the labor theory of value can explain the expansion of commodification into individual bodies and subjects.

     

     
    4. Queer theorists in particular have challenged the idea of reproductive labor by troubling the meaning of care work as simply reproducing what is already there, arguing instead that new forms of life and family life do not line up with the imperatives of the heteropatriarchal household economy. See for example Cvetkovich and Muñoz.

     

     
    5. Arlie Hochschild’s The Managed Heart: Commercialization of Human Feeling, a study of airlines attendants, is an example of this process.

     

     
    6. This is Mbembe’s reformulation of Foucault’s formulation of biopower, which claims that racism is an instrument that divides those who must live from those who can die.

     

     

     

    Works Cited

     

    • Addley, Esther, and Rory McCarthy. “The Man Who Fell to Earth.” Guardian 18 Jul.2001. 1 Oct. 2005 <http://www.guardian.co.uk/uk/2001/jul/18/immigration.immigrationandpublicservices>.
    • Appadurai, Arjun. “Introduction: Commodities and the Politics of Value.” The Social Life of Things: Commodities in Cultural Perspective. Ed. Arjun Appadurai. Cambridge: Cambridge UP, 1986.
    • Associated Press. “Internet Site Removes Advertisement for Sale of Human Kidney.” San Francisco Chronicle. 4 Dec. 2003. 1 Oct. 2005 <http://www.sfangels.com/Kidney%20article-%20sfgate.html>.
    • Bowker, Geoffrey C., and Susan Leigh Star. Sorting Things Out: Classification and Its Consequences. Cambridge, MA: MIT Press, 1999.
    • Chakrabarty, Dipesh. “Marx After Marxism: A Subaltern Historian’s Perspective.” Economic and Political Weekly 29 May 1993: 1094-1096.
    • —. Provincializing Europe: Postcolonial Thought and Historical Difference. Princeton, N.J.: Princeton UP, 2000.
    • Cohen, Lawrence. “The Other Kidney: Biopolitics Beyond Recognition.” Body & Society 7.2/3 (2001): 9-29.
    • Cvetkovich, Ann. An Archive of Feelings: Trauma, Sexuality, and Lesbian Public Cultures. Durham, NC: Duke UP, 2003.
    • Eisenstein, Zillah, ed. Capitalist Patriarchy and the Case for Socialist Feminism. New York: Monthly Review Press, 1978.
    • Fortunati, Leopoldina. Arcane of Reproduction: Housework, Prostitution, Labor and Capital. Brooklyn, NY: Autonomedia, 1995.
    • Foucault, Michel. Society Must Be Defended: Lectures at the Collège De France, 1975-76. Trans. David Macey. New York: Picador, 2003.
    • Gamburd, Michele Ruth. The Kitchen Spoon’s Handle: Transnationalism and Sri Lanka’s Migrant Housemaids. Ithaca, NY: Cornell UP, 2000.
    • Goyal, Madhav, et al. “Economic and Health Consequences of Selling a Kidney in India.” Journal of the American Medical Association 288.13 (2002): 1589-93.
    • [CrossRef]
    • Hennessy, Rosemary. Profit and Pleasure: Sexual Identities in Late Capitalism. New York and London: Routledge, 2000.
    • Hennessy, Rosemary, and Chrys Ingraham. Materialist Feminism: A Reader in Class, Difference, and Women’s Lives. New York: Routledge, 1997.
    • Horkheimer, Max, and Theodor Adorno. The Dialectic of Enlightenment. Trans. Edmund Jephcott. Ed. Gunzelin Schmid Noerr. Stanford: Stanford UP, 2002.
    • Ismail, Munira. “Maids in Space: Gendered Domestic Labor from Sri Lanka to the Middle East.” Gender, Migration and Domestic Service. Ed. Janet Henshall Momsen. London: Routledge, 1999. 223-36.
    • Jameson, Fredric. The Cultural Turn: Selected Writings on the Postmodern, 1983-1998. London: Verso, 1998.
    • Marx, Karl. Capital: A Critique of Political Economy. Trans. Ben Fowkes. New York: Vintage Books, 1977.
    • Marx, Karl, and Friedrich Engels. The Marx-Engels Reader. Ed. Robert C. Tucker. 2nd ed. New York: Norton, 1978.
    • Mbembe, Achille. “Necropolitics.” Public Culture 15.1 (2003). 11-40.
    • [Project MUSE]
    • Mies, Maria. Patriarchy and Accumulation on a World Scale: Women in the International Division of Labour. London: Zed Books, 1986.
    • Mody, Anjali. “Stowaway Sikh Hopeful of Getting Asylum in UK.” Indian Express. 21 Aug.1997. 30 Sept. 2005 <http://www.indianexpress.com/ie/daily/19970821/23350603.html>.
    • Moors, Annelies. “Migrant Domestic Workers: Debating Transnationalism, Identity Politics, and Family Relations.” Comparative Studies in Society and History 45.2 (2003): 386-94.
    • Muñoz, Jose. Feeling Brown: Ethnicity, Affect, and Performance. Durham, NC: Duke UP, forthcoming.
    • Ong, Aihwa. Neoliberalism as Exception: Mutations in Citizenship and Sovereignty. Durham, NC: Duke UP, 2006.
    • Parrenas, Rhacel Salazar. “Migrant Philipina Domestic Labor and the International Division of Reproductive Labor.” Gender and Society 14.4 (2000). 560-80.
    • [CrossRef]
    • Scheper-Hughes, Nancy. “Commodity Fetishism in Organs Trafficking.” Body & Society 7.2-3 (2001): 31-62.
    • —. “The Ends of the Body-Commodity Fetishism and the Global Traffic in Organs.” SAIS Review 22.1 (2002): 61-80.
    • [Project MUSE]
    • —. “The Global Traffic in Human Organs.” Current Anthropology 41.2 (2000): 191-224.
    • [CrossRef]
    • Spivak, Gayatri Chakravorty. “Can the Subaltern Speak?” Marxism and the Interpretation of Culture. Ed. Cary Nelson and Lawrence Grossberg. Urbana: U of Illinois P, 1988.
    • —. A Critique of Postcolonial Reason: Toward a History of the Vanishing Present. Cambridge, MA: Harvard UP, 1999.
    • —. “Scattered Speculations on the Question of Value.” The Spivak Reader: Selected Works of Gayatri Chakravorty Spivak. Ed. Donna Landry and Gerald M. MacLean. New York: Routledge, 1996.
    • Stephens, Avril. “Desperate Journeys Fraught with Danger.” CNN.com. 31 Jul. 2001. 15 Sept. 2005 <http://archives.cnn.com/2001/WORLD/europe/07/31/immigration.daring/index.html>.
    • Tadiar, Neferti Xina M. Fantasy Production: Sexual Economies and Other Philippine Consequences for the New World Order. Hong Kong: Hong Kong UP, 2004.
    • Tsing, Anna Lowenhaupt. Friction: An Ethnography of Global Connection. Princeton, NJ: Princeton UP, 2005.

     

     
  • Code-Scripting the Body: Sex and the Onto-Theology of Bioinformatics

    Steve Garlick (bio)
    University of Victoria
    sgarlick@uvic.ca

    Abstract
     
    It is generally acknowledged that molecular biology has been enamored with discourses of information theory and cybernetics from its earliest days. Equally common, in critical theory, is the belief that biological science has lost purchase on important dimensions of embodied life as a result. This essay suggests, however, that when we examine the work of ‘cyberscience’ pioneers such as Edwin Schrödinger, Norbert Wiener, and Claude Shannon, we find an ambiguous embrace of the complexity of embodied life and freedom at the level of the living organism or cybernetic system, counteracted by a underlying desire for order and informatic determinism at the level of code or message. Moreover, these competing tendencies towards organicism and informatics feed into two central and interrelated tensions that inhabit modern biological thought. The first tension concerns the efforts of biologists to dispel vitalism and the specter of God underlying the natural order, while the second involves the concept of (hetero)sexual difference and its substitution for God as guarantor of biological knowledge. This essay makes the argument that sex is often an unrecognized point of articulation in attempts to resolve these tensions and, as such, is central to the potential of bioinformatic bodies.

     

     
    Molecular biology has been enamored with discourses of ‘information’ from its earliest days.1 The notion that the stuff of life possesses informatic qualities, especially as found in the form of DNA, is frequently proposed. Equally common, in critical theory, is the belief that biological science has lost purchase on important dimensions of embodied life as a result, and that this loss generates a disembodied conception of life that is most fully realized in contemporary genomics. Beginning in the 1940s and gaining traction in the postwar years, ideas about information, control, and communication have circulated in scientific discourses. It would be a mistake, however, to think that these factors simply coalesce into a single paradigm that determines the direction of biological research. Evelyn Fox Keller, for example, argues that while information theory, cybernetics, and computer science shared common interests, conceptual approaches, and forms of representation-to the extent that we may refer to them all under the general title of “cyberscience”-this interdisciplinary formation diverged from the program of molecular biology in an important sense. She points to an apparent difference in perspective between the disciplines:
     

     

    Cyberscience . . . was developed to deal with the messy complexity of the postmodern world, over the very same period of time in which molecular biology was crafting its techniques for analyzing the simplest strata of life. The one repudiated conventional wisdom about the analytic value of simplicity, whereas the other embraced it; the one celebrated complexity, whereas the other disdained it.
     

    (85)

     

    From Keller’s perspective, cyberscience and molecular biology emerged at the same moment in time, yet took different paths. Such an account, however, makes it difficult to explain the influence that discourses of information, of coding, and of cybernetic control and communication have had on the constitution of contemporary biological science. It may perhaps be more useful to look at cyberscience itself as an uneasy amalgam of two divergent tendencies-an ambiguous embrace of complexity and freedom at the level of the living organism or cybernetic system, counteracted by a desire for order and determinism at the level of the code or message, which idealizes the simple, linear transmission of information and the exclusion of noise.

     
    In this essay, I suggest that this dual perspective and tension can be found in the work of cyberscience pioneers like Edwin Schrödinger, Norbert Wiener, and Claude Shannon. Moreover, I argue that although cyberscience may appear to offer a single, biotechnological framework that posits a disembodied conception of life, the competing tendencies towards organicism and informatics at work within this framework feed into two central and interrelated tensions that inhabit modern biological thought. The first of these tensions concerns the efforts of biologists to dispel the specter of God, or what is often referred to as “vitalism,” underlying the conceptualization of nature, and which appears frequently in the persistent religious imagery that the concept of information bears through its association with metaphors of text, writing, and the “Book of Nature” (Brandt).2 The second tension involves the concept of (hetero)sexual difference and its substitution for God as guarantor of the legibility of a natural order and the possibility of biological knowledge. I suggest that sex is often an unrecognized point of articulation between these tensions and, as such, is central to the potential of bioinformatic bodies.
     

    Life vs. Thermodynamics

     
    The story of how Gregor Mendel’s pioneering work in genetics was rediscovered and incorporated into studies of inheritance in the early twentieth century is well known. This event inaugurated a period of research activity generally known as “classical genetics,” which extends up to Watson and Crick’s 1953 model of DNA. Working with a chromosomal theory of inheritance, classical geneticists focused on the study of mutations in their attempts to follow the path that Mendel had opened up-a path that led towards the subindividual, molecular level of life-but their efforts were frustrated by the limits of their resolving power. Individual chromosomes appeared unwilling to divulge the genetic secrets they held, and resisted all attempts at decomposition by the scientific gaze. The sought-after revelation of the structure of DNA was only to be achieved through the intervention of ideas from the physical and chemical sciences in combination with certain technical and rhetorical innovations. Indeed, in 1944, it was a physicist who made a decisive entry into the biological field. Erwin Schrödinger’s What is Life? The Physical Aspect of the Living Cell exerted a formative influence over the constitution and shape of early molecular biology. Schrödinger’s book drew many physicists and chemists into the biological conversation, and provided them with a metaphorical vocabulary and way of thinking about “life” that was to shape biological discourse at the molecular level.
     
    Like Mendel, Schrödinger brought a physicist’s concern for the lawful mechanics of matter to the study of biological phenomena. Each sought to give an account of the physics of “life itself.” Unlike Mendel’s Newtonian physics, however, the explicit impetus for Schrödinger’s intervention lay in questions posed by quantum theory and the science of thermodynamics. This is important because the second law of thermodynamics, in particular, challenges the centrality of the reproductive imperative in nature by suggesting that the telos of life is ultimately death. At the same time, however, the apparent stability and reproduction of organic life puts the second law, which posits the existence of a universal cosmic tendency towards dissipation, disorder, and eventually entropic heat-death, into question as the immortality of biological life across generations seems to elude the reach of the physicist’s explanatory powers. From the time of Mendel through to the moment of Schrödinger’s challenge to the uneasy confidence of biological epistemology, a tension between the dissipating force of thermodynamic physical law on one side, and the organizing power of organic life on the other, inhabits the natural sciences.3
     
    In What is Life, Schrödinger draws upon twentieth-century quantum theory in an effort to explain how the reproductive order of life-as represented by the living organism-defies the second law, and therefore requires the formulation of a new physics. Gesturing towards what would later become the predominant understanding of DNA, Schrödinger argues that the chromosomes within a fertilized egg must “contain in some kind of code-script the entire pattern of the individual’s future development and of its functioning in the mature state” (22). Governed by this code-script, an organism maintains itself “by continually drawing from its environment negative entropy” (76). Organic life, for Schrödinger, is characterized by its ability to renew its own organized nature continuously by feeding off the natural order around it. Rather than manifesting unpredictability at the micro level, while submitting to a slow decline towards eventual heat-death at the macro level, the organism resembles the stable, orderly functioning of a pure “clockwork,” which is able to resist the second law of thermodynamics. For Schrödinger, “the point of resemblance between a clockwork and an organism . . . is simply and solely that the latter also hinges upon a solid-the aperiodic crystal forming the hereditary substance, largely withdrawn from the disorder of heat motion” (91). He speculates that this molecular quantum state allows the organism to defeat thermodynamic decay. In other words, the time of the organism is its own. The aperiodicity of what will later be called the genome allows nature to reproduce itself in a process that Schrödinger calls “order from order.”
     
    In this new physics of life, Schrödinger’s influential contribution is the idea of a “code-script,” which he likens to an “all-penetrating mind” that always already knows the future development of the organism (22). The term “code” implies that there is an underlying systematicity to nature, or a technic that is fundamental to life itself. Yet a code is also something that conjures up secrecy. Presumably, the secret possessed by a genetic code-script concerns the origin of the natural order that sustains the life of the organism as it battles thermodynamic entropy. For modern biological thought, the secret may lie in a quasi teleological concept of (hetero)sexual desire, which is itself a surrogate for God. At least, I claim this is what holds for Schrödinger’s intervention.
     
    Today, What is Life? is conventionally regarded as the first text to propose that the essence of life lies in an underlying genetic code. James Watson, for example, credits Schrödinger’s book as his inspiration for turning to genetic questions as it offered a mechanism for reducing biological life to a potentially decipherable “instruction book inscribed in a secret code” (36). This is a common reading of Schrödinger, yet I think it oversimplifies his position. In Schrödinger’s desire for a “new physics” there is a good deal of ambiguity around the question of whether the code-script of life may be deciphered through the optic of modern science. Watson recasts the notion of code in such a way as to evacuate the secret of its secrecy. He presumes the secret of life to be simply hidden below the surface, awaiting discovery by a technoscientific key that will unlock the chemical-mechanical order. Yet in important respects, Schrödinger’s work runs counter to this approach. For example, he claims that, “It seems neither adequate nor possible to dissect into discrete ‘properties’ the pattern of an organism which is essentially a unity, a ‘whole’” (30). Indeed, Schrödinger’s characterization of life in terms of discrete systems that change via “quantum jumps” might well be better read as anticipating recent theories of complexity and self-organization.
     
    In an alternative reading of Schrödinger’s text, the biophysicist Robert Rosen holds that the argument of What is Life? is actually “quite incompatible with the dogmas of today” (6). On Rosen’s reading, Schrödinger did not believe that life itself could be reduced to a code-script that may be deciphered by modern science. On the contrary, the secrecy of the code was of paramount importance to its functioning. Rosen argues that answering the question posed in What is Life? would require coming to terms with life as something that escapes the predictive laws of physics. For him, in claiming that the organism feeds upon negative entropy (or information), Schrödinger “was saying that, for the entire process of order from order to work at all, the system exhibiting it has to be open in some crucial sense” (17). From this perspective, the living organism constitutes a complex open system that exchanges energy, matter, and information with its environment. Hence, for Rosen, the new physics of life envisioned by Schrödinger “can be expressed as a shift from material causations of behavior, manifested in state sets, to formal and efficient causations” (27). This reading, however, still relies upon a somewhat restricted account of causality. I suggest that, for Schrödinger, the “secret” of life is not merely that the organism is a thermodynamically open system; rather, there is for him the matter of a final cause. Moreover, here we find the signs of a divine perspective in the place of the “demon” that is central to the history of thermodynamics.
     
    Maxwell’s Demon is the name given to an imaginary being conceived by the physicist James Maxwell in the 1860s in order to explain how it might be possible to thwart the second law of thermodynamics. This demonic entity was charged with combating the increase of entropy within a closed system by controlling the flow of molecules in such a way that no work is performed, and hence no heat/energy is lost. The question of whether this scenario would be consistent with other tenets of physics has been subject to much dispute, but the crucial point for us here is found in Keller’s suggestion that a line can be drawn from Maxwell’s Demon right through to Schrödinger’s code-script. Insofar as the code-script directs the biological reproduction of life, it runs counter to the entropic tendency and serves the same purpose as the demon. “The most important point,” Keller claims, “is [the demon’s] shift in reference from God to humanlike intelligence” (55). Yet in what sense does Schrödinger’s code-script really express a human form of intelligence? While the metaphors may in general have become more technological rather than theological over the intervening hundred years, I would argue that What is Life? still advocates a thoroughly onto-theological conception of the demon that governs life-and its (sexual) reproduction.4
     
    According to Schrödinger, the biological organism (qua open system) is informed by the order of nature. It is able to do this because the secret code of life, identified with the demon or all-penetrating mind, enables inner and outer nature to be harmonized according to the laws governing the production of order from order. The effect of this move, however, is to push back the question of the ultimate source of natural order. It may have been in response to this question-implicitly formulated by the logic of his scientific enquiry-that Schrödinger composed the epilogue to What is Life? Although entitled “On Determinism and Free Will,” the key opposition informing this supplement is clearly that of physics and biology, a reprise of the tension that animates the book as a whole. On the one hand, the mechanistic laws of nature that inform the living organism appear inviolable; on the other hand, in life we experience freedom in our thoughts and actions. Schrödinger’s conclusion is as follows:
     

    The only possible inference from these two facts is, I think, that I-I in the widest meaning of the word, that is to say, every conscious mind who has ever said or felt “I”-am the person, if any, who controls the “motion of the atoms” according to the Laws of Nature. Within a cultural milieu where certain conceptions . . . have been limited and specialized, it is daring to give this conclusion the simple wording that it requires. In Christian terminology to say: “Hence I am God Almighty” sounds both blasphemous and lunatic. But please disregard these connotations for the moment and consider whether the above inference is not the closest a biologist can get to proving God and immortality at one stroke.
     

    (93)

     

    Most readers of What is Life?, particularly those biologists who abhor nothing more than the stain of vitalism or religion, may have disregarded the epilogue. Schrödinger’s exclamation-“I have become God”-is often regarded as an unfortunate and embarrassing lapse of judgment from a somewhat eccentric scientist. His readers would prefer to consider the text to be complete, closed off as an organic whole, before the page is turned to the epilogue. But what if this confession of the onto-theological basis of Schrödinger’s speculations on life represents the return of that which biological science must always push away in order to maintain its identity?

     
    Schrödinger’s epilogue opens up the thermodynamic system of the (human) organism to a divine consciousness that informs living matter. The freedom inherent to life, however, is not possessed by the individual; rather, it is an onto-theological secret that inhabits the subindividual level of life as it flows on through and beyond its temporary instantiations in individual organisms. The conscious mind may be that which allows us to recognize our identity, but it is not the essence of life itself. Indeed, Schrödinger never explicitly defines life in his text. It appears as a somewhat mysterious, natural force that organizes thermodynamically open systems, and which evades the tendency towards maximum entropy. What remains implicit here is the fact that it is the (hetero)sexual reproduction of the organism that ensures the immortality of living matter. It is worth noting that concepts of (hetero)sexual difference first make an appearance in What is Life? at the very moment when Schrödinger sets out his account of the code of life:
     

    As we shall see in a moment, one set [of chromosomes] comes from the mother (egg cell), one from the father (fertilizing spermatozoon). It is these chromosomes . . . that contain in some kind of code-script the entire pattern of the individual’s future development and of its functioning in the mature state.
     

    (22)

     

    The code that controls the development of life and governs its functioning, and which assures its ultimate victory over time, is a script that presumes (hetero)sexual reproduction. While Schrödinger’s initial concern is with life at the level of the organism-a concept that is essentially defined in terms of its (hetero)sexual organization-his concept of a code-script translates the reproduction of life into bioinformatic terms at the subindividual level. It challenges the sexual energies of nature according to an atemporal framework that has already determined their place and functioning in life, and yet the translation between levels is left unexplained. The dual nature of the concept of sex-both being and doing-is implied here, yet remains implicit. The secret of life lies just beyond the limits of Schrödinger’s scientific vision.

     
    Schrödinger, then, introduces into genetic science the metaphor of the code of life with implicit and interrelated connections to both onto-theology and (hetero)sexual difference. The way in which this was to be picked up in the emergent discipline of molecular biology depended to a large extent, however, upon the resonance that readers of What is Life? found with two other major intellectual tributaries of the mid-twentieth century: information theory and cybernetics.
     

    Life in the Information Age

     
    Discourses that concern the notion of information have been crucial in shaping the theory and practice of molecular biology since its earliest days. Nevertheless, the concept of biological information has always suffered from a degree of ill-definition and semantic slipperiness. Its elucidatory value within biology has frequently been the subject of considerable dispute, which continues today among philosophers of science (Maynard Smith; Sarkar) as it does among social and cultural critics. It can be argued that informatic theories have always been more of a metaphorical resource than a source of rigorous concepts imported into the life sciences. The language of coding and information has functioned as “rhetorical software” (to employ Richard Doyle’s term) for biological discourses that have been enamored with computer science metaphors since the 1940s. At that time, Schrödinger was posing the question of life, and of its code-script, in a way that complemented and fed into two other influential contemporary approaches to problems concerning the communication of information and the control of bodies (both mechanical and living): Claude Shannon’s information theory, and Norbert Wiener’s cybernetic theory. This section discusses the former, while cybernetics is the topic of the following section.
     
    Claude Shannon and Warren Weaver’s The Mathematical Theory of Communication put forward an unconventional quantitative concept of information, which, like Schrödinger’s understanding of life, bears an essential relation to the thermodynamic notion of entropy. Shannon and Weaver’s concept of information, however, was defined as having a positive correlation with entropy, rather than as resisting it. On first appearances, then, information and life seem to be divergent concepts. At the same time, however, there were many structural and rhetorical similarities between the two ideas that served to draw them together. Not least of these convergences was the connection that each maintained to a certain notion of freedom that could only be realized through coding.
     
    For Shannon and Weaver, its coding is the primary means by which the information value of a freely-selected message is protected against the threat that transmission would be disrupted due to noise. Moreover, they state that “[communication] theory contributes importantly to, and in fact is really the basic theory of cryptography which is, of course, a form of coding” (115). Information requires a protective code in order that it may (secretly) reach its destination safely. In this formulation, information begins to appear as structurally similar to Schrödinger’s onto theological concept of life, which also comes to our attention through the mediation of a code-script. The convergence becomes all the more apparent when we consider that, for Shannon and Weaver, the measure of information is defined in relation to entropy, while for Schrödinger (and for the biological tradition more generally), life is defined through an antagonistic relation to the dissipating forces of death. Thus, in a sense, information theory makes apparent something that was implicit in biological discourse all along. In both cases, the freedom that belongs to information or to life is a product of the entropic disorder that sustains-through its opposition-the organization and order to be maintained. The concept of a (secret) code enables the reproduction and development of life, or the transmission of information, to take place within a context of overall disorganization.
     
    In Shannon and Weaver’s mathematical theory of communication, information is a quantitative measure of a particular message relative to the complete set of all possible messages that could have been transmitted in a given situation. The more entropy or disorder there is in a situation, the more freedom there is in selecting a message, and consequently the higher the information value it will have. As they put it, “this word information in communication theory relates not so much to what you do say, as to what you could say” (100). To take an example that is germane to our interests here, from the perspective of Shannon and Weaver’s theory, the determination of sex provides very little information. When a baby is born and it is proclaimed that “It’s a boy!” or that “It’s a girl!” we gain little information because there is very little freedom in the situation. Under the ontological limitations of (hetero)sexual difference, the options are restricted to a binary choice: male or female, boy or girl. Irrespective of the meaning attributed to this event, the message we receive is one of the only two options allowed, hence its information value is negligible.
     
    An interesting consequence of the importation of Shannon and Weaver’s information theory into biological thought is precisely its relation to (hetero)sexual difference. The rejection of meaning as a relevant aspect of information theory is a key feature here. The transmission and reception of a message are conceptualized simply as an engineering problem. Shannon and Weaver insist that, “information must not be confused with meaning. In fact, two messages, one of which is heavily loaded with meaning and the other of which is pure nonsense, can be exactly equivalent, from the present viewpoint, as regards information” (99). The meaning of a message is bracketed in order that its statistical aspects can be calculated. While the productiveness and influence of this method for genetic science are widely recognized, such an approach can actually be traced right back to Mendel’s mid-nineteenth-century experiments in breeding pea plants. While organic life in nineteenth-century thought was conceptualized in terms of the organizing force of (hetero)sexual difference, Mendel bypassed questions of sexual difference as he prepared the way for biological thought to descend to the molecular level-a move that anticipates the eventual emergence of contemporary reproductive technologies that bypass sex at the level of the organism. Information theory, as conceived by Shannon and Weaver, reinvigorates this move whereby statistical analysis becomes the key to understanding how discrete information is produced and transmitted across time without any essential relationship to a higher level of organization or meaning. Because the living organism is implicitly defined by its (hetero)sexual organization, the concept of biological information, alongside the schema of arbitrary messages that are freely selected, effectively frees up the sexual forces of life to a certain extent. Even though the implications may not have been apparent at the time, the equation of the technological transmission of information with life allows the freedom of relatively unstructured nonorganic relations to silently inhabit the body of molecular biology.
     
    From this perspective, Shannon and Weaver’s theory should not be considered as a wholly external influence imposed upon biology, for genetic science has always been implicitly figured in informatic terms. Yet insofar as the transmission of biological information comes to be taken as analogous to the reproduction of life, information theory implies a new role for sex within genetic science-one that has proven difficult to reconcile with the onto-theological commitments of earlier biological thought. Like Mendel, information theory posits the transmission of a stable message based on a statistical measure, but within the biological tradition a meaningful notion of (hetero)sexual difference, and its correlate “species,” ensure continuity in the natural order. An unarticulated tension is thereby inherent to the concept of “biological information”-which is both reductive and yet possesses the potential for a renewed understanding of freedom in relation to biological and social life. In this situation, one may easily be led to evoke a divine force that will account for the free expression and natural order of life (as was the case with Schrödinger), and this is never more apparent than in early cybernetic theory.
     

    Information, Entropy, and Cybernetics

     
    Norbert Wiener’s project of constructing a cybernetic science, begun in the context of military research the early 1940s, was undertaken in conversation with Shannon and Weaver’s work. In his two most influential books, however, Cybernetics: Or Control and Communication in the Animal and the Machine (first published in 1948) and The Human Use of Human Beings: Cybernetics and Society (first published in 1950), Wiener goes beyond the design of conventional communication systems to construct a research program that crosses the boundaries separating machine from animal from human. As such, his work is important for its attempt to understand the ways in which life or the body can be regarded as open to technology. He was especially concerned with the role of feedback processes in enabling a system to adapt to new circumstances through time. Systems, whether technological, social, or biological, which incorporate feedback hold the potential for adjusting themselves to deal with changing situations. Crucially for Wiener, to be effective as feedback the information content of a message must be resolutely defended against attacks of “noise.” Like Schrödinger, he was interested in the implications of quantum theory for the understanding of life, especially in the lack of absolute determinacy that it implies, and for the possibilities it holds for explaining the maintenance of homeostasis. Rather than the immortality offered by a code-script withdrawn from the thermodynamic flux, however, Wiener believes that the stability of the organism is wholly dependent upon its acquisition and use of reliable information from the world around it. His “demon” lies in the power to inform.
     
    Wiener is adamant that, “Information is information, not matter or energy” (132). As distinct from matter and energy, information alone resists the tendency towards entropy, and is thereby positioned as the essence or secret of life. Yet while citing Shannon and Weaver, Wiener characterizes information in a way that appears to oppose their position. He writes, “Just as the amount of information in a system is a measure of its degree of organization, so the entropy of a system is a measure of its degree of disorganization; and the one is simply the negative of the other” (11). Where Shannon and Weaver associate information value with entropy, Wiener opposes the two. This divergence in definition is more apparent than decisive for the import of the two theories. The crucial difference actually lies in Wiener’s extension of the concept of information in such a way that reintroduces the meaningful content of the message. While Shannon and Weaver measure information quantitatively in terms of the freedom of choice among potential messages within the communicative situation as whole, Wiener is not prepared to accept such a narrow definition of information.5 Most notably, by removing the bracketing of meaning from the message, and by associating information with organization, Wiener opens up the communicative system to a return of the onto-theological.
     
    Just as Schrödinger’s code-script is the expression of God at the basis of life, Wiener’s concept of information evokes a divine origin for organized life. Again, in the battle of life and death, of order and entropy, we discover the underlying dynamic that shapes the situation of the natural organism or communicative system. Wiener advocates a new conception of quantum physics that will address the element of chance and contingency in the fabric of the universe. About this element of chance he writes: “For this random element, this organic incompleteness, is one which without too violent a figure of speech we may consider evil; the negative evil which St Augustine characterizes as incompleteness, rather than the positive malicious evil of the Manichaeans” (19). Entropy-the tendency towards disorganization and disorder-is the manifestation of evil; it threatens life with a slow descent into total chaos. Information resists this evil, and therefore is on the side of the good, and, as per Wiener’s reference to St Augustine, on the side of God. Cybernetics is the study of messages that organize and are, at bottom, of divine origin.
     
    From this perspective, Wiener’s invocation of Shannon and Weaver’s concept of information may also reveal a hidden onto-theological aspect of their theory. For in reciting the central claim of the mathematical theory of communication, i.e. “the more probable the message, the less information it gives” (31), Weiner implicitly raises the question of the first message and of the origin of organization. Doyle points out the paradox here by noting that, while a message’s information content is tied to its improbability, there is a point of regress at which this logic collapses in upon itself: “A truly singular, unprecedented phenomenon would in some sense make no sense-we would lack the tools of signification necessary to read or interpret it” (45). For Doyle, this points to the existence of an unthought thought that necessarily precedes all communication. By bringing the meaning of the message back into the equation, Wiener may be said to expose the unthought thought of information theory, and we find that this is the secret of a divine origin. The question is: from whence would the message with the highest possible information value arise? What is the name that we may give to the source of order and organization, which first informs matter and energy? Wiener’s implicit invocation of God in this place of origin is reflected in the fact that, for him, information and life are identified with meaning: “In control and communication we are always fighting nature’s tendency to degrade the organized and to destroy the meaningful” (26). The fight against evil is one in which the meaning and natural order of life are clearly at stake. Whereas for Shannon and Weaver the freedom associated with information is sustained by entropy and disorder, Wiener gives voice to the other side of the tension between meaning and information insofar as he posits that entropy or freedom is a threat to life. Emerging out of this theoretical environment, molecular biology tends to side with Wiener, and to reaffirm the value of a stable natural order (even if its practice has often worked to undermine this same order).
     
    Wiener’s distaste for entropy-for its association with irrationality, incomplete determinism, and randomness-often sounds like an aversion to a certain conception of freedom, or to the free production of nature. Similarly, concepts of (hetero)sexual difference or gender may be seen as responses to the condition of freedom that emerges in the absence of a (divine) natural order. Moreover, given that Wiener is interested in applying cybernetics to questions of biology, we expect to find a (hetero)sexual component to his account of control and communication in life. Here we turn our attention to the discussion of affective tone within the human or animal nervous system in Cybernetics. Described as a feeling of pleasure or pain that accompanies an action, this bodily affect constitutes a feedback mechanism relaying messages throughout the living organism. For Wiener, this affective system is premised upon a quasi-teleological reproductive force. He writes: “Biologically speaking, of course, a greater affective tone must occur predominantly in situations favorable for the perpetuation of the race, if not the individual, and a smaller affective tone in situations which are unfavorable for this perpetuation, if not disastrous” (128). That we might easily bring to mind many exceptions to this economy of reproductive affect is not my point; I am more interested in suggesting that Wiener has sex on his mind. In speculating on how these affective messages might be sent most efficiently, he claims that, “The high emotional and consequently affective content of hormonal activity is most suggestive” (129). This is significant because to speak of hormones in the mid-twentieth century was inevitably to speak of (hetero)sexual difference, as it was a time of intense scientific interest in the role of hormones in constituting maleness and femaleness. Wiener does not disappoint us here. Immediately, albeit somewhat hesitantly, he draws a connection between the hormonal transmission of messages and unconscious sexual drives: “in the theories of Freud the memory-the storage function of the nervous system-and the activities of sex are both involved. Sex, on the one hand, and all affective content on the other, contain a very strong hormonal element” (130). What are we to make of this association? Might this unconscious connection between sex and the hormonal feedback mechanism that coordinates affective messages be a sign of some greater force or purpose in life? Is the long-term stability and direction of life a product of this flow of (hetero)sexual information in conjunction with a feedback mechanism that regulates both communication and the control of the organism, and which must be defended against all noise if a fall into evil is to be avoided?
     
    To be sure, Wiener says nothing of the sort. Yet, as Katherine Hayles has noted, he returns to the topic of hormonal flows and the circulation of sexual information between bodies in the final chapter of Cybernetics, which is ostensibly concerned with the role of communication and the flow of information in promoting homeostasis within a society. Wiener suggests that, “sexually attractive substances in the mammals may be regarded as communal, exterior hormones, indispensable, especially in solitary animals, for bringing the sexes together at the proper time” (156). Reading this passage, Hayles claims that, “The choice of examples foregrounds sexuality, but this is a kind of sex without sexuality” (109). Her point is that the cybernetic flow of information across and through living bodies threatens to dissolve the boundaries of the individual subject or autonomous self as possessor of a discrete sexual identity. At the same time, I suggest, this represents a return of the same tension that animates the work of Schrödinger. On the one hand, there is the explicit desire to affirm stability, natural order, or homeostasis in the reproduction of life; on the other hand, the concepts of coding and information theory implicitly work towards the decomposition of the individual organism. Sex is a key terrain upon which this tension is played out. As figured between God and nature, (hetero)sexual difference is presented as a crucial force of organization that connects the organic being to the natural and social orders of which it is a part. For Wiener, both the living organism and all forms of animal and human community depend upon an organizing force that resists the encroachment of noise and entropy. Evil is to be combated though that which draws living beings together, not just temporarily, but over time in a way that allows them to reproduce and to avoid death. Through (hetero)sexual difference, Wiener suggests, God and natural order are immanent to life.
     

    The Bioinformatic Body

     
    While the precise moment at which cyberscience began to exert a formative influence over biological science is a matter of debate, many commentators consider the discovery of DNA to be an important marker for the constitution of molecular biology as an informatic discourse. As Keller puts it, “With Watson and Crick’s invocation of ‘genetic information’ residing in the nucleic acid sequences of DNA, some notion of information (however metaphorical) assumed a centrality to molecular biology that almost rivaled that of the more technical definition of information in cybernetics” (94). The concept of genetic information was formalized in 1958 when Francis Crick laid out what was to become the key tenet of molecular biology: the Central Dogma. This is the idea of a unidirectional flow of information from DNA to RNA to proteins as the fundamental chain lying at the basis of life. The Central Dogma rejects the cybernetic notion of feedback in favor of an emphasis on the delivery of a message carefully composed at the origin of a causal chain. In Crick’s formulation, which was quickly to become accepted truth, genetic information is self-contained, inviolable, and holds the key to life. The physicist George Gamow characterized the task of gaining access to the secrets of genetic information as “breaking the code.” These two developments together firmly established informatics as the governing mode of representing nature within molecular biology. For many contemporary critics, however, this is precisely where the problems lie.
     
    In How We Became Posthuman, Katherine Hayles provides a critique of contemporary information-based cultures and the concept of virtuality. For Hayles, “The great dream and promise of information is that it can be free from the material constraints that govern the mortal world” (13). She traces this ideal back to the post-WWII period and the rise of cyberscience. On her account, the problem is not so much in the way that Shannon defines information, as a probability function divorced from context, as it is the way in which this heuristic bracketing of meaning tends to be forgotten as the concept transfers to other domains beyond communication engineering. As Hayles puts it:
     

    Taken out of context, the definition allowed information to be conceptualized as if it were an entity that can flow unchanged between different material substrates . . . . Thus, a simplification necessitated by engineering considerations becomes an ideology in which a reified concept of information is treated as if it were fully commensurate with the complexities of human thought.
     

    (54)

     

    Hayles’s point to the contrary is that information must always be materially instantiated in order to exist. Her concern is that information has become disembodied today and turned into a fetish.

     
    Hayles locates the emergence of this reified concept of information within a general cultural shift away from conceptualizing things in terms of presence or absence, and towards an emphasis on pattern versus randomness. She claims that Wiener’s work exemplifies this shift: “In [his] ‘dematerialized materialism’ of the battlefield where life struggles against entropy and noise, the body ceases to be regarded as a material object and instead is seen as an informational pattern” (104). For Hayles, Wiener’s concern with homeostasis exhibits too much anxiety over maintaining control of bodily boundaries, and thus closes down the possibilities that exist for rethinking what it is to be human. To her mind, the positive aspect of the posthuman condition is in its embrace of the contingency and unpredictability that goes along with reconceptualizing human being in terms of an open system. In a sense, she advocates that we affirm one of the two tendencies we have identified as coexisting within cyberscience, the tendency associated with freedom and the complexity of life, as opposed to the tendency towards affirming natural order, the simplicity of coding, and the linear transmission of informatic messages. What is not so clear, however, is whether Hayles’s antipathy towards informational discourses is necessarily on the side of freeing up these new possibilities. Indeed, it may be that the opposition she draws between information theory and cybernetics on the one hand, and embodied reality on the other, implicitly privileges a basically conservative concept of human embodiment over against other virtual or nonorganic possibilities opened up on the technoscientific landscape. For if the conceptualization of biological information enables us to think about life as freed from the straitjacket of organic function, then it may be that the disembodiment effected by informatic discourses is of a much more ambiguous and ambivalent nature than is commonly recognized.
     
    Hayles’s work asks us to consider where molecular biology stands regarding the reification of information. When she notes that, “Shannon’s distinction between signal and noise had a conservative bias that privileges stasis over change” (as did Wiener’s antipathy towards entropy), Hayles evokes a charge that has been leveled against genetic science. She continues, “The structure of the theory implied that change was deviation and that deviation should be corrected” (62). This is a value that may well be inherent to any notion of a genetic code as the “secret of life”-at least, as long as that secret is conceived as a message that must be faithfully translated and read in order to assemble a body. Hayles’s critique of disembodied information suggests that the aspect of cyberscience taken up and pursued by early molecular biology has serious limitations as a way of explaining life and living beings.
     
    This thesis is also pursued by Lily Kay in her study of the ways information came to signify biological specificity from the 1950s onwards. Where specific organization had once been the definitive biological trope, Kay shows that life increasingly came to be figured through a discourse of information. She makes the point that, among the intellectual excitement of cybernetic research, “The information discourse and its modes of signification bestowed upon the biological sciences-long beleaguered by Comtean inferiority-some of the high status and promise of command and control fields” (114-5). This, in turn, drew more funding to molecular biology and fuelled its growth. The promise of controlling life through the decoding of genetic information, however, has yet to be realized. From Kay’s point of view, this is unlikely to happen any time soon because information discourse is an imperfect fit for the object of biology: “The discrepancies resided in the categorical difference between the two: specificity denoting material and structural properties; information denoting nonmaterial attributes, such as soul, potentialities, and form (telos), previously captured by the notion of organization and plan (logos)” (328). As with Hayles, we find that information discourse is identified here as a dematerializing force that cannot comprehend the plenitude of nature’s materiality.
     
    The central problem, as Kay describes it, is that, “Though remarkably compelling and productive as analogies, ‘information,’ ‘language,’ ‘code,’ ‘message,’ and ‘text’ have been taken as ontologies” (2-3). For her, trouble arises because the separation of domains has not been respected. The qualities of living matter are thereby not recognized for what they are in themselves. For Kay, information discourse constitutes only a partial perspective on life and is effectively a form of biopower that disciplines and attempts to control life itself. Information is seen as an essentially reductionist concept that sucks the life out of bodies. Yet, following Foucault, if biopower is also productive and promiscuous in its connections and effects, then perhaps the concept of biological information cannot be so easily characterized in terms of reductionism and disembodiment. It may be that informatic discourses are only repressive in their relation to life insofar as the latter is figured solely in organic terms.
     
    Richard Doyle, to take another example, is also concerned with the deleterious effects of information discourse. In his study of the rhetorical transformations that shaped the emergence of molecular biology, he aims his critique at the informatic body. Doyle names this construction the “postvital body” and describes it as “a body in which the distinct, modern categories of surface and depth, being and living, implode into the new density of coding” (13). This is a body modeled on the computer, with its organic nature reduced to informatic codes. Eschewing analysis of communication theory and the cybernetic moment, Doyle returns us to Schrödinger’s What is Life? and emphasizes the role that the book played in effecting a “fundamental reprogramming of the rhetorical software of genetics.” For Doyle, “Schrödinger mistakes or displaces the pattern of the organism by its ‘code-script,’ injecting the life of the organism into its description” (28). Again, it is a matter of reduction-of reducing the living organism to a set of instructions. Doyle argues that Schrödinger gives voice to a previously unarticulated possibility in biological science by suggesting that, “no body, indeed, no life, need exist at all outside of the ‘aperiodic crystal’.” This means, quite simply, that “the body, and life, have disappeared” (33). As we have seen above, this is not the only possible reading of Schrödinger’s text. On the contrary, What is Life? does not necessarily set out to resolve its own question; rather, Schrödinger’s onto-theology locates the secret of life beyond the reach of a reductionist physical science.
     
    Doyle, along with Hayles, Kay and other cultural critics, holds the nascent discourses of coding and informatics responsible for stripping life of its natural body. Viewed as an external imposition-be it from physics, communications science, cybernetics, or computer science-information theory, for these critics, holds little respect for biological life. But what if an informatic discourse has always been inherent to genetic science? Moreover, what if nature or life has always been open to bioinformatic technology? The question not yet broached is whether the subindividual interactions made accessible via bioinformatics may in fact lead to the formulation of a different body and a different concept of (nonorganic) life. We may begin to approach this question, I suggest, by following Doyle in the connection he draws between informatics and onto-theology. Doyle characterizes George Gamow’s reconceptualization of the “coding problem” in terms of translation between the structure of DNA and the synthesis of proteins as “a technology that retools the depths of the body as a secret, even sacred archive” (40). I have noted above the connection between codes and secrecy, and that the response of genetic science has been to try and lay a secret bare. Doyle argues that, “Crucial to this project was the implicit notion that this ‘book of life,’ like its intertextual counterpart, the New Testament, offered one proper reading, one story, one Truth” (40). Again, the project of breaking the code of DNA and uncovering the mechanism of translation is, for Doyle, a reductionist gesture. He claims, “More than treating the molecular as the basis for the living, Gamow’s move translates the molecular as no different from the living” (42). This implies an ideal of translation without loss, which denies to living matter a reality of its own. According to Doyle, Gamow can make this move because he operates with a tacit belief that everything is readable. This is the “unthought thought” that ensures universal translation. All that is required is the key that unlocks the secrets of life and allows their legibility to be recognized. Natural order is presumed in an onto-theological move that Doyle, echoing Heidegger, describes as the coming of the “age of world scripture.”6
     
    Kay also highlights the biblical associations evoked by the notion of reading the “Book of Life.” As she puts it, “this metaphor of transcendent writing acquired new, seemingly scientific legitimate meanings through the discourse of information” (2). The question is: is this a secular takeover, or a troubling return of that which had been supposedly banished? Certainly, the conceptualization of contemporary genomics as reading or decoding DNA fits easily into the tradition of deciphering the word of God as it appears in nature. What Doyle and Kay suggest is that this onto-theological tradition remains in effect today. Under conditions of universal translatability, the ideal message will always get through. The space that frames all such translation, however, remains unthought in this picture. With this in mind, I want to quote Doyle once more:
     

    Even while the explicit aim of [Gamow’s] article, indeed of molecular biology generally, is to determine and articulate the fundamental chemical and physical mechanisms that make up the “secret” or “book” of life, it is the very allure of the “essence” of life that helps drive the investigation.
     

    (56)

     

    Beyond mere reductionism, it seems to me that Doyle is here giving voice to a key tension of molecular biology as a scientific project. If we follow molecular biology through to its avowed goal of controlling life, then does not the glow of victory dissolve along with its adversary’s? Without an onto-theological secret to reveal, molecular biology seems to feel that it is confronted with a more terrifying freedom, which is the same tension that I have identified as running throughout cyberscience. The uneasy juxtaposition of freedom, life, and code-script in Schrödinger, Wiener’s anxiety over the status of the human organism and community in a cybernetic world, and even the tension between entropy, meaning, and the very possibility of information in Shannon and Weaver’s theory of communication are all indicators of limits expressed in biological technoscience. My claim is that this tension, which revolves around the “secret” of life-of its authority, its reproduction, and of its revelation and control-is often implicitly played out through onto-theological discourses of (hetero)sexual difference.

     
    Ultimately, the tension generated between an expanding informatic discourse in biology, which aims to control life at the subindividual level, and the concurrent desire to reaffirm the precedence of a meaningful organic body, which continually defers to the final authority of a natural order, is uneasily reconciled through discourses of (hetero)sexual difference that remain largely unexamined. The tensions that inhabit molecular biology in regard to the bioinformatic body are effectively displaced by a quasi-teleological, (hetero)sexual representation of matter and energy. Concepts of (hetero)sexual difference provide a resolution (however unstable) to the problem of the paradoxical freedom of nature by distributing the divergent desires for control of nature and a subordination to a divine or natural order into separate ontological dimensions of life, implicitly coded as masculine and feminine, respectively. While cyberscience marshals an informatic discourse that implicitly throws the meaning and stability of natural order into question, the resulting anxiety is repeatedly alleviated by the reaffirmation of (hetero)sexual difference, which functions to ensure the reproduction of order, authority, and the biological knowledge of nature.
     

    Steve Garlick is Assistant Professor of sociology at the University of Victoria. His research interests focus on gender, sexuality, and the sociology of knowledge. He is the author of “Organizing Nature: Sex, Philosophy, and the Biological,” forthcoming in Philosophy and Social Criticism, and of “Mendel’s Generation: Molecular Sex and the Informatic Body,” in Body and Society 12.4 (2006): 53-71.

     

     

    Footnotes

     
    1. I would like to thank Patricia Ticineto Clough and two anonymous reviewers for Postmodern Culture for their comments on earlier versions of this essay.

     

     
    2. Vitalism emerged as a response to Cartesian mechanics and had its greatest impact on the formation of biological science via the Naturphilosophie associated with German Romanticism in the late eighteenth and early nineteenth centuries. See Robert Richards’s The Romantic Conception of Life.

     

     
    3. Freud is important in this history, especially his formulation of the death drive in relation to Eros in Beyond the Pleasure Principle and The Ego and the Id.

     

     
    4. I take the term “onto-theological” from Heidegger, who uses it to refer to the essential character of metaphysical thinking insofar as it represents beings in terms of both “the ground that is common to all beings as such” (onto-logic) and “with respect to the highest being which accounts for everything” (theo-logic) (Onto-theological 70).

     

     
    5. This is an important point because Wiener is often viewed as working with a concept of information that is essentially the same as Shannon’s. For example, see Galloway and Thacker (56). While he does share much with Shannon, Wiener is not content with a solely quantitative notion of information. In this sense, he is aligned with Donald MacKay’s “whole theory of information,” which also contests the exclusion of meaning and emphasizes the embodied dimension of information transmission. On MacKay, see Hayles (54-6) and Hansen (69-77).

     

     
    6. Heidegger’s “age of the world picture” refers to the idea that, with the advent of modern science and technology, the world can be represented as an object (Age 129).

     

     

     

    Works Cited

     

    • Brandt, Christina. “Genetic Code, Texture, and Scripture: Metaphors and Narration in German Molecular Biology.” Science in Context 18.4 (2005): 629-48.
    • [CrossRef]
    • Doyle, Richard. On Beyond Living: Rhetorical Transformations of the Life Sciences. Stanford: Stanford UP, 1997.
    • Foucault, Michel. The History of Sexuality, Volume 1: An Introduction. Trans. Robert Hurley. New York: Vintage Books, 1990.
    • Freud, Sigmund. “Beyond the Pleasure Principle.” On Metapsychology: The Theory of Psychoanalysis. Ed. Angela Richards. Trans. James Strachley. London: Penguin Books, 1984.
    • —. “The Ego and the Id.” On Metapsychology: The Theory of Psychoanalysis. Ed. Angela Richards. Trans. James Strachley. London: Penguin Books, 1984.
    • Galloway, Alexander & Eugene Thacker. The Exploit: A Theory of Networks. Minneapolis: U of Minnesota P, 2007.
    • Hansen, Mark. “Cinema Beyond Cybernetics, or How To Frame the Digital Image.” Configurations 10.51 (2002): 51-90.
    • [Project MUSE]
    • Hayles, N. Katherine. How We Became Posthuman: Virtual Bodies in Cybernetics, Literature, and Informatics. Chicago: The U of Chicago P, 1999.
    • Heidegger, Martin. “The Age of the World Picture.” The Question Concerning Technology. Trans. William Lovitt. New York: Harper & Row, 1977.
    • —. “The Onto-Theological Constitution of Metaphysics.” Identity and Difference. Trans. Joan Stambaugh. New York: Harper & Row, 1969.
    • Kay, Lily E. Who Wrote the Book of Life: A History of the Genetic Code. Stanford: Stanford UP, 2000.
    • Keller, Evelyn Fox. Refiguring Life: Metaphors of Twentieth-Century Biology. New York: Columbia UP, 1995.
    • Maynard Smith, John. “The Concept of Information in Biology.” Philosophy of Science 67 (June 2000): 177-94.
    • [CrossRef]
    • Richards, Robert J. The Romantic Conception of Life: Science and Philosophy in the Age of Goethe. Chicago: The U of Chicago P, 2002.
    • Rosen, Robert. Essays on Life Itself. New York: Columbia UP, 2000.
    • Sakar, Sahotra. “The Concept of Information in Biology.” Philosophy of Science 67 (June 2000): 208-13.
    • Schrödinger, Erwin. What is Life? The Physical Aspect of the Living Cell. Cambridge: Cambridge UP, 1967.
    • Shannon, Claude E., and Warren Weaver. The Mathematical Theory of Communication. Urbana: The U of Illinois P, 1949.
    • Watson, James D. DNA: The Secret of Life. New York: Alfred A. Knopf, 2003.
    • Weiner, Norbert. Cybernetics: Or Control and Communication in the Animal and the Machine. 2nd ed. Cambridge: The MIT Press, 1961.
    • —. The Human Use of Human Beings: Cybernetics and Society. 2nd ed. New York: Avon Books, 1967.

     

  • The Dream of Writing (review)

    Peter Schwenger (bio)
    University of Western Ontario
    pschweng@uwo.ca

    Herschel Farbman, The Other Night: Dream, Writing, and Restlessness in Twentieth-Century Literature. New York: Fordham UP, 2008.
     
    A profoundly “other” concept of writing is unfolded in Herschel Farbman’s The Other Night–other than the commonly accepted notions of writing, and other than the subject from which writing is presumed to emerge. Rather, writing comes out of the night: not the night of rest that serves the needs of the day, but the “other night” described by Maurice Blanchot: a night that exists within the one that holds sleepers secure in their beds. Associated with dreaming, it delivers not rest but restlessness. Farbman argues that this restlessness is not only the subject of writing, as in Beckett’s trilogy and in Finnegans Wake, but that it is ultimately the very movement of writing itself.
     
    Blanchot, who supplies the book’s title, is also at the heart of its thinking. The book’s second chapter, devoted to Blanchot, provides the terms for Farbman’s extended meditation on the relation between dreaming and writing. For Blanchot, the dream is a waking within sleep–indeed, as Farbman points out, it is this waking-within that prevents the sleeper from succumbing to an all too final rest. In this sense the restlessness of dream maintains a liaison with the waking world. At the same time the restlessness of dream moves, interminably, away from the presumptions that govern the state of waking: the subject’s coherence, the connectedness of thought, the stability of the world’s objects. In the dream, nothing is wholly itself; rather, in Blanchot’s words,
     

     

    The dream touches the region where pure resemblance reigns. Everything there is similar; each figure is another one, is similar to another and to yet another and this last to still another. One seeks the original model, wanting to be referred to a point of departure, an initial revelation, but there is none. The dream is the likeness that refers eternally to likeness.
     

    (Space 268)

     

    This description of dream has a likeness, as well, to the movement of writing, whose point of departure can never be pinned down; it is always already in motion before pen is set to paper. That is to say, writing is never just words being set down on a page. It is not even the idea of the “work” that precedes the attempt to physically transcribe it. It is, rather, the mind’s restless movement between associations and possibilities. At the same time it is the continual ruin of any attempt to hold those connections steady; the restlessness of too many possibilities leads to the impossibility of the work fulfilling itself as an achievement of the day. This goes for both ends of the unstable middle that is writing. The readers of the finished work (of which the author has now become one) find in it not stability but restless movement. Farbman quotes Beckett:

     

    Here everything moves, swims, flees, returns, undoes itself, remakes itself.
     
    Everything ceases, without cease.
     
    That’s what literature is.
     

    (Le Monde 35)

     
    On the other side of this unstable middle, the side that Blanchot calls (not without irony) “inspiration,” there is likewise no rest to be found. The work emerges from a restless welter of thoughts, to which it is fated to return, with or without the writer’s consent or complicity. “Thoughts,” in fact, is scarcely the right term for what one experiences in the other night, to the degree that it implies a conscious articulation, like that of words themselves. For Blanchot, though, not words but an interminable “murmuring” is to be found in that restless night. Out of that murmuring words may emerge, in somewhat the same way that symptoms may speak of an unconscious content. But no dream interpretation is wholly adequate to that content. Farbman quotes Freud’s famous admission that there is always a “navel” of the dream beyond which analysis cannot follow, a point where the dream joins with the wider world of the unconscious. He might have gone on to the metaphor with which Freud immediately follows this one, a more restless one to be sure, literally dissolving the navel’s implied promise of an origin: the mycelium, a tangled, rhizomic, jelly-like mass that is the (un)root of a mushroom.
     
    While we should not flatly equate Blanchot’s “other night” with a reified Unconscious, Freud will naturally come up in any discussion of dreaming–and, it turns out, in Farbman’s discussion of writing. Going beyond what I just called a “likeness” between the movement of a dream and that of writing, Freud asserts in The Interpretation of Dreams that dreams are writing. For him, the images of our dreams are rebuses. They represent not the things of the waking world, but syllables, fragments of words or entire words; and this is a writing that can be read. A strange enough theory, according to Farbman, but one that impels us to reconsider what is meant by “writing”–for Freud, for us. “Without defining the word in a way that would account for all its different uses,” Farbman says, “we can say that the word ‘writing’ is the common name for that kind of image that serves primarily to represent words” (26). This common understanding is shared by Blanchot, that uncommon thinker. In literature, he says, “words … are not signs but images, images of words, and words where things turn into images” (Space 34). Blanchot’s formulation, though, begins to unravel the stability of Farbman’s provisional definition, and to throw us once again into the realm of restlessness. For here everything turns into everything else–words, images, things. If there is a priority here, it must be that of image, image as Blanchot characterizes it in “The Two Versions of the Imaginary”–”pure objectless resemblance,” as Farbman calls it (63). With this pure resemblance we are returned to the region of dream, a region without terminus, one of interminable movement, continually transforming its terms. We can compare Blanchot’s formulation with one of Freud’s. In the dream, Freud says,
     

    Thoughts are transformed into images, mainly of a visual sort [what other sort might there be?]; that is to say, word-presentations are taken back to the thing-presentations which correspond to them.
     

    (228)

     

    This is a much clearer genealogy, but one of the things that Freud’s restatement makes clear is that he is here equating “thoughts” with “word-presentations.” Yet words are not to be equated with either thoughts or writing in the sense that Farbman is trying to convey, beyond that “common name” that is only a sort of way-station. Something more restless even than words is at stake here. At the end of his chapter on Freud, Farbman writes of the presence of the word within dreams as preceding the dreaming subject; he is not wrong. But his own thinking in the chapter, and in the thinkers he has used to think with, would indicate that the word is…well, not the last word. There is no last word, or even any word at all, at the edges of the dream–only interminable movement and inarticulate murmuring. And this too is writing.

     
    Nor does this interminable writing cease with the day. As Farbman elegantly puts it, “What wakes when the ‘I’ sleeps doesn’t sleep when the ‘I’ wakes. Restless night stretches on after night” (5). There is no more powerful depiction of this than Beckett’s novel The Unnamable. A sort of extreme phenomenological reduction, it strips away nearly everything from the narrating consciousness except that consciousness. That is to say, there is almost nothing to be conscious of except the movement of the narrator’s mind. Fixed within an undefined gray milieu, seeing nothing but that grayness, unable to move his gaze to the left or right, the narrator can only look within to a realm of interminable movement. If there are no physical objects in this realm–there is even doubt about whether the narrator has a body or a head—there is still, somehow, a knowledge of objects, perhaps residual. These become counters in a game without definite rules or boundaries, a game that has been played by Beckett before this, the “insane game of literature,” as Mallarmé called it. Stories, and memories of stories, float half-formulated through the narrating consciousness, and their protagonists often have the names of Beckett’s own characters: Molloy, Watt, Malone. Yet these vague attempts at story continually dissolve back into the region from which they come, a region of voices and “murmuring.” This is not a dream, and the narrator is not a dreaming subject. Rather, he is a subject stripped down to a restless movement that flows through the night world and the day world alike–though it is obscured during the day by the perceptual impress of objects and by our conscious purposes. We read the world to serve those purposes, but much more is going on than we can be conscious of–as is the case with literal reading. The reading of a book, Valéry has said, is “nothing but a continuous commentary, a succession of notes escaping from the inner voice” (80-81). This “continuous commentary” is also an aspect of the restlessness that Farbman is dealing with here: “a more or less fantastic commentary,” as Nietzsche puts it, “on an unknown, perhaps unknowable, but felt text” (119-20). “What literature is” according to Beckett is also what we are.
     
    But since literature is described by Beckett as an interminable restlessness, we must consider whether the subject has a place in all this movement. “Place,” Farbman reminds us, has been associated by both Levinas and Blanchot with the fixity that is the condition of sleep. The paradox is that within sleep’s fixity is its opposite, the restlessness of dream. It would seem, then, that within dreams the subject has no place. And if that is the case, it is only a short step to Blanchot’s assertion that in the dream “the subject becomes absence” (Writing 51). This somewhat theatrical statement lends itself all too readily to misunderstanding. For if the subject is only an absence, how can the experience of the dream take place at all? Doesn’t the subject need to have a place within dream if dreams are to be experienced? This is the argument of one philosopher, Norman Malcolm, for whom dreams are always a past-tense phenomenon, a matter of remembering and telling, and thus are never present except as hallucinations; nor is the dreamer present in the dream any more than what is dreamt is. Farbman resists this analysis through a comparison (Blanchot’s comparison) of dream to death. It is logically impossible for the dissolution of the self in death to be experienced by that self. Nevertheless this may take place, in Blanchot’s subtle sense of “experience,” and precisely because of an element of impossibility:
     

    Impossibility is nothing other than the mark of what we so readily call experience, for there is experience in the strict sense only when something radically other is in play.
     

    (Infinite 46)

     
    Responding to Farbman’s implicit invitation to think with him on these matters, we might consider the differences between waking and dreaming states as centripetal and centrifugal. No matter how much one engages with an other in the waking state, that experience must always be pulled back to a putative core that is the subject. In the dreaming state, the experience may be made up of recognizable elements from one’s waking day or waking life, but we have an “unspooling”1 that is not only centrifugal but interminable in Blanchot’s sense. This movement loosens the core that defines the waking subject, but it is still a subject that is loosened. At what point in this loosening can it be said, then, that the subject is truly absent? Jean-Luc Nancy comments on Hegel’s handling of sleep:
     

    Sleepy, dreamy subjectivity remains at the stage of the abstract universality of representations, as a “tableau of mere images,” and does not grasp the “concrete totality of determinations.” Thus the subject itself can consist only in “the being-for-self of the waking soul.” [Before this] there was no subject but only the lethargic essence of subjectivity.
     

    (14)

     

    The distinction between the “subject” and the “essence of subjectivity” may not be so easily made; it may have more to do with the “lethargic” than with anything else. Dreamers are lethargic in a sense that Jacques Lacan gestures toward when he writes, “Our position in the dream is profoundly that of someone who does not see. The subject does not see where it is leading, he follows” (75). There is movement, a movement that is leading what Lacan here calls a subject; but since that subject grasps no “concrete totality” and has relinquished its “being-for-itself,” it is at the same time a non-subject, if not a completely absent one.

     
    With terms such as these we attempt to grasp an ambiguous experience that is profoundly other than those of our waking hours, even though it undoubtedly underlies them. Farbman’s analysis applies in a particularly intense way to writing and to the nature of literature; but it might well apply to any experience that is stripped of readymade frameworks and assumptions to reveal a radical otherness. So radical is this otherness that it can only be described with words like “impossible” and interminable.” That is to say, Farbman’s book must necessarily fail–in a way that is worth any number of more easily attained successes. It stretches toward something that is in the end beyond words, something that words can only gesture toward. Literature can try to evoke it, and at times comes uncannily close to doing so–literature, and the kind of passionate theorizing that Farbman gives us here. This book about restlessness generates a restlessness of its own, a ferment of ideas, hints, and possibilities. Adventurous and subtle, The Other Night should be read by anyone who is interested in thinking otherwise.
     

    Peter Schwenger is Resident Fellow at the Centre for the Study of Theory and Criticism, University of Western Ontario. He has published Phallic Critiques (1984), Letter Bomb (1991), Fantasm and Fiction (1999) and The Tears of Things (2006). His current project is titled “Liminal: Literature between Waking and Dreaming.”
     

    Notes

    1. This intriguing term for what happens to the subject in dream was given to me by Jacques Khalip in conversation.
     

    Works Cited

     

    • Beckett, Samuel. Le Monde et le pantalon suivi de Peintres de l’empêchement. Paris: Minuit, 1990. Print.
    • Blanchot, Maurice. The Infinite Conversation. Trans. Susan Hanson. Minneapolis: U of Minnesota P, 1993. Print.
    • —. The Space of Literature. Trans. Ann Smock. Lincoln: U of Nebraska P, 1982. Print.
    • —. The Writing of the Disaster. Trans. Ann Smock. Lincoln: U of Nebraska P, 1995. Print.
    • Freud, Sigmund. A Metapsychological Supplement to the Theory of Dreams. Trans. James Strachey. Standard Edition. Vol. XIV. London: Hogarth Press, 1957. Print.
    • Lacan, Jacques. The Seminar of Jacques Lacan, Book XI: The Four Fundamental Concepts of Psychoanalysis. Ed. Jacques-Alain Miller. Trans. Alan Sheridan. New York: Norton, 1998. Print.
    • Nancy, Jean-Luc. The Birth to Presence. Trans. Brian Holmes et al. Stanford: Stanford UP, 1993. Print.
    • Nietzsche, Friedrich. Daybreak: Thoughts on the Prejudices of Morality. Trans. R.J. Hollingdale. Cambridge: Cambridge UP, 1997. Print.
    • Valéry, Paul. “Some Fragments from Poe’s Marginalia.” The Collected Works of Paul Valéry. Vol. 8. Leonardo, Poe, Mallarme. Trans. Malcolm Cowley and James R. Lawler. Princeton, NJ: Princeton UP, 1972. Print.

     

  • Cinema After Deleuze After 9/11 (review)

    Richard Rushton (bio)
    Lancaster University
    r.rushton@lancaster.ac.uk

    David Martin-Jones, Deleuze, Cinema and National Identity: Narrative Time in National Contexts. 2006. Edinburgh: Edinburgh UP, 2008.
     
    Deleuze, Cinema and National Identity is an ambitious attempt to bring together the writings of Gilles Deleuze and discourses on national cinemas. In arguing that some of Deleuze’s concepts can be relevant to national cinematic discourses, David Martin-Jones offers a critique of the concept of the nation insofar as that concept is both facilitated and reflected by films.
     
    As part of the general framework of his argument, Martin-Jones tends to criticize films that provide unified and totalizing “national narratives,” while he supports those films that undermine or complicate linear unification. In this respect, his argument falls in line with myriad contemporary condemnations of unity and linearity while championing diversity and multiplicity. His argument becomes most sophisticated and provocative when he calls into question recent U.S. cinema responses to the attacks of September 11, 2001. He argues about a number of films, Terminator 3: Rise of the Machines (Jonathan Mostow, 2003) being exemplary, that the U.S. national narrative can only solidify itself on the basis of significant historical erasures. The September 11 attacks are quite literally a “ground zero” on the basis of which a number of historical truths can be sidestepped (Vietnam, Watergate, Iran-Contra, and so on) in order that the U.S. be cleansed of its sins and any misgivings about itself swept away by a tide of renewed triumphalism. In short, if before September 11 the U.S. might have been hesitant about its need or ability to meddle in world affairs, then after September 11 it no longer needed to pursue its global aims with reserve. A film like Terminator 3 re-writes history in line with U.S. triumphalism, a reiteration of the kind of re-writing that goes back, Martin-Jones points out, at least to Griffith’s Birth of a Nation (1915).
     
    The significant counter-example to Terminator 3 and U.S. triumphalism is Michel Gondry’s 2003 film, Eternal Sunshine of the Spotless Mind. The book’s most important arguments emerge in its discussion of this film, although they are foreshadowed in the book’s opening chapters which, after introductory discussions of Hitchcock’s Vertigo and Fellini’s , chiefly deal with Sliding Doors in a British context and Run, Lola, Run in a unified German one, and are rounded off in the final chapter, which comments on films from Hong Kong, Japan and Taiwan. The book’s moral message can be discerned in the discussion of Eternal Sunshine, especially in the claim that “by not comprehending the causes of a past trauma people are destined perpetually to repeat it” (173). For Martin-Jones, Eternal Sunshine achieves one thing that most other American films since 9/11 do not: it does not eschew the troubling nature of history. Rather than erasing or re-writing history, Eternal Sunshine asks its characters to re-trace the paths that have forged their histories—to re-visit history, to question it, and to examine their relationship to and responsibility for that history.
     
    The contrast between Eternal Sunshine‘s approach to history and the triumphalist approach garnered by films such as Terminator 3 allows Martin-Jones to introduce Deleuze’s main cinematographic categories of the time-image and movement-image. While Terminator 3 affirms a logic of the movement-image by way of its commitments to linearity and an unambiguous national narrative, Eternal Sunshine more appropriately encourages an aesthetic of the time-image, in which the past is re-visited in a manner that allows it to be discovered anew. Eternal Sunshine offers an approach to the past that considers both the past’s impact on the present and also the ways in which the present shapes any approach to the past. This co-implication of past and present contrasts markedly with the movement-image’s affirmation of the separation between past and present, of a past that is safely and securely “in the past,” and of a present that is definitively separated from that past.
     
    A final set of categories is borrowed from Deleuze and Félix Guattari’s A Thousand Plateaus and brought closely into contact with the discourses on national cinema: deterritorialization and reterritorialization. Martin-Jones argues that many recent films—especially the popular films with which the book is mostly preoccupied—look and feel as though they should be time-images. In looking and feeling this way, Martin-Jones adds, such films evoke, in the context of national cinema, modes of deterritorialization; that is, they appear to offer ways of re-configuring and re-discovering national narratives in politically positive ways. However, Martin-Jones argues that most of these films, while looking and feeling like time-images, typically end up as movementimages. While they appear to open up the possibility of deterritorialization, these films (such as Terminator 3) end up reterritorializing the national narrative–they end up forcing the nation and its histories into a linear, unidirectional, triumphal shape. Needless to say, Martin-Jones finds such outcomes politically regressive.
     
    All in all, this adds up to an impressive argument. My reservations have to do with Martin-Jones’s insistence on turning Deleuze’s categories into judgmental ones. For Martin-Jones, deterritorializing time-images are positive and politically progressive while reterritorializing movement-images are politically regressive. I am not convinced this is how Deleuze’s categories are best utilized, for, if nothing else, Deleuze was a philosopher who was deeply suspicious of forms of judgment (most concisely in his essay “To Have Done with Judgment”).
     
    The question of judgment opens up a can of somewhat wriggly worms, for the major problem facing film scholars keen on using Deleuzian categories is this: how can Deleuze’s terms be used without falling into the trap of judgment? While there does seem to be a tendency in the Cinema books to affirm the properties of the time-image over those of the movement-image—especially insofar as readers will sense that the time-image gives a “proper” version of time (what Deleuze calls a “direct image of time”)—there is also a sense, I think, in which such judgments are mistaken. The Cinema books do not present a system by means of which “good” films can be distinguished from “bad” ones. Instead, they offer a system for the classification of cinematic images, arranged most broadly in terms of a historical split between the earlier movement-image and the later time-image. We know today that the strength and energy of the movement-image has not waned and that the time-image has in no way eclipsed its predecessor. But this gives us no reason to criticize and dismiss the perseverance of the movement-image, nor to regret that the time-image did not result in some kind of revolution of the senses. Rather, I think Deleuze might ask us to admire the brilliance of what the movement-image can do (in the hands of Griffith, Minnelli, Eisenstein, Lumet—or today, for Spielberg or Scorsese) alongside the achievements of the time-image. As Deleuze writes,
     

    It is not a matter of saying that the modern cinema of the time-image is “more valuable” than the classical cinema of the movement-image. We are talking only of masterpieces to which no hierarchy of value applies. The cinema is always as perfect as it can be.
     

    (Cinema x)

     

    And yet, against what Deleuze might here have hoped, film scholars tend to pull Deleuze’s value-neutral categories into shapes that might seem to have a bit more bite. It was Christian Metz who first emphasized the ways in which those who write about films so staunchly and passionately defend the films they love while rejecting and vilifying those they hate, and Metz’s views on this state of affairs seem every bit as justified today as they were in 1975. Film studies has for a long time been a game of judgment, a drawing up of tables which separate the “good” from the “bad,” most often progressive or subversive forms of cinema from regressive, conservative films. Martin-Jones claims to be inspired by Comolli and Narboni’s landmark essay on “Cinema/Ideology/Criticism” so as to leave readers in no doubt that his book continues that ideological tendency of film scholarship.

     
    If Martin-Jones over-emphasizes the grandeur of the time-image at the expense of the movement-image, then a similar complaint might be made of his endorsement of deterritorialization at the expense of reterritorialization. The process of de- and reterritorialization is just that: a process. Deterritorialization first of all clears the ground—it shatters and disintegrates existing structures and meanings—in order that new reterritorializations might then occur; that is, reterritorialization entails the putting into place of new structures and meanings. The process of de- and reterritorialization is constant and ongoing—or, at the very least, Deleuze and Guattari hope it will be an ongoing process in which structures and meanings are revised and reinvented. For Martin-Jones to prioritize the workings of deterritorialization over those of reterritorialization seems to me to miss Deleuze and Guattari’s point. It again introduces criteria of judgment (that deterritorialization is positive and reterritorialization negative) where they do not exist in Deleuze’s work. For the history of cinema, we might even see the processes of deterritorialization at work most forcefully in the films of Hitchcock, insofar as he pushes the movement-image to its limit, to the point where it begins to break down—Hitchcock’s innovations tend to deterritorialize the movement-image, as it were—so that a new type of cinema then emerges. From that point of view, and quite contrary to Martin-Jones’s argument, the new structures and categories of the time-image would be reterritorializations, new territories that arise as a consequence of the deterritorializations of the movement-image.
     
    Why then does Martin-Jones want to turn Deleuze’s categories into categories of judgment? I think he does so because he wants to draw Deleuze’s terms into conversation with some of the more dominant tropes of film studies. On the one hand, Martin-Jones uses Deleuze to subject films to symptomatic readings—to find the deep meanings of representation—while on the other hand he uses some of the guiding lights from the field of cultural studies—Judith Butler and Homi K. Bhabha are names that appear frequently in the book—in order to add weight to the cultural and political stakes of Deleuze’s categories. This approach significantly re-weights Deleuze’s books in a way not explicitly intended by Deleuze. At the same time, Martin-Jones is not alone in trying to force Deleuze’s books to conform to pre-existing notions of “politically progressive” filmmaking; D.N. Rodowick’s and Laura U. Marks’s contributions are key texts in this regard. More than anything—and surely most difficult from a Deleuzian perspective, for Deleuze’s passion and admiration for film shines through on every page of the Cinema books—is a deep suspicion of cinema which sits uneasily in the Deleuzian context of Martin-Jones’s book. The book’s condemnation of Hitchcock’s Vertigo, for example, left me slightly bemused; if one cannot say anything positive about a film as brilliant as Vertigo, then it seems to me there will be very few films that can ever be deemed worthy.
     
    And yet, having said all that, there is something alluring about Martin-Jones’s arguments. Perhaps he has done precisely what needs to be done with Deleuze’s Cinema books; even Deleuze may have conceded that today more than ever we need to make judgments about the state of contemporary cinema. I find it difficult to believe that Deleuze himself would have found much to be enthusiastic about in contemporary Hollywood cinema, and perhaps it is Martin-Jones’s deep dissatisfaction with cinema which emerges as his book’s strongest point. Deleuze, Cinema and National Identity has little time for the prophets of contemporary Hollywood cinema who, on the basis of films like Matrix (1999), Lord of the Rings trilogy (2001-2003), earlier breakthrough special effects thrillers like True Lies (1994) or Jurassic Park (1993), and even off-mainstream films like O Brother Where Art Thou (2000), praise contemporary cinema for moving beyond the confines of indexicality and analogue realism into a new era of digital freedom and unlimited expressivity, as though Hollywood’s technological innovations were the only ones worth devoting one’s time to. At the same time, Martin-Jones has little interest in that other brand of commentator on film style, who continues to chart the technical and aesthetic innovations of the “dream factory” in a manner entirely devoid of cultural or political insight. And while Martin-Jones certainly reserves praise for some recent efforts from the Pacific Rim, he is not kind to contemporary currents of European and American filmmaking. The fact that he links current filmmaking with 9/11 and with renewed instances of nationalism—in Britain, Germany and especially the U.S.—is apt and necessary. I’m not entirely convinced that Deleuze offers the best framework for this kind of political condemnation, and it is here that other commentators—Butler, Bhabha, Douglas Kellner, and others—are more effective. But Martin-Jones’s contribution is important to considerations of the political economy of cinema. It offers what might be the best and most unforgiving political critique of contemporary cinema available. If this means the book persists in drawing up categories of judgment in a manner that reprises long-standing debates in film studies (to again reiterate Martin-Jones’s indebtedness to Comolli and Narboni), then so be it, for this is one of the few recent books of film scholarship that has been brave enough to do so.
     

    Richard Rushton is Lecturer in the Department of Media, Film and Cultural Studies, Lancaster University, UK. He has published articles on film and cultural theory, and has two books forthcoming: What is Film Theory? (Open University Press) and The Reality of Film (Manchester University Press).
     

    Works Cited

       

    • Deleuze, Gilles. Cinema 1: The Movement Image. Trans. Hugh Tomlinson and Barbara Habberjam. Minneapolis: U of Minnesota P, 1986. Print.
    •  

  • Anthological and Archaeological Approaches to Digital Media: A Review of Electronic Literature and Prehistoric Digital Poetry (review)

    Stephanie Boluk (bio)
    University of Florida
    sboluk@ufl.edu

    N. Katherine Hayles. Electronic Literature: New Horizons for the Literary. Notre Dame: University of Notre Dame Press, 2008; and Chris Funkhouser, Prehistoric Digital Poetry: An Archaeology of Forms, 1959-1995. Tuscaloosa: University of Alabama Press, 2007.
     
    N. Katherine Hayles’s Electronic Literature: New Horizons for the Literary and C.T. Funkhouser’s Prehistoric Digital Poetry: An Archaeology of Forms, 1959-1995 exemplify the current disciplinary drive to establish a critical language for speaking about digital literature. The publication of these two modes of scholarship—an anthology and an archeology—demonstrates that a field of inquiry has already stabilized and is working to establish a canon and history. Hayles and Funkhouser have undertaken scholarship that reclaims as much as it reforms an “underlying sense of the literary,” as Alan Liu writes on the first page of Laws of Cool, “that is even now searching for a new idiom and role” (1).
     
    Both Prehistoric Digital Poetry and Electronic Literature have a stature and significance each in its own right, but taken together their emergence signals a larger shift in literary-humanist studies, also seen in the rise of new interdisciplinary and transmedial humanities programs. As conflicted as this development might be (simultaneously promoted and critiqued by media scholars such as Alan Liu, Marcel O’Gorman, and Gary Hall), the humanities are going digital. This can be seen in the growing attention paid to literature that is “digital born.” Just as significant, digital research tools have allowed older works to be substantially rethought in light of new interpretive models.1
     
    Hayles’s Electronic Literature is a companion piece to a projected multi-volume anthology of electronic literature co-edited by Hayles, Scott Rettberg, Nick Montfort, and Stephanie Strickland. The first volume in this series produced by the Electronic Literature Organization (ELO) is available online and as a CD-ROM accompanying Hayles’s book. ELO’s definition and selection of electronic works directly intervene in the constitution of the field. Hayles takes up ELO’s definition of electronic literature as “work with an important literary aspect that takes advantage of the capabilities and contexts provided by the stand-alone or networked computer” (3). She accepts their tautological definition of electronic literature as literature that contains an “important literary aspect” on the basis that works will inevitably be shaped by a priori assumptions from past traditions (even in their attempts to redefine what constitutes the “literary”).
     
    Expanding ELO’s definition, Hayles characterizes the literary as “creative artworks that interrogate the histories, contexts, and productions of literature, including as well the verbal art of literature proper,” adding a critical, self-referential element to her notion of the electronic literary (4). Hayles’s definition of electronic literature by default includes works that attend to the specific conditions of their medium and historical context; they are explicitly oriented by self-reflexive relays between multiple orders of textuality.
     
    Just as popular culture studies and postcolonial theory have broadened concepts of the literary in the humanities, Hayles suggests that electronic literature performs the same gesture through an expansion to include technologies beyond print. Despite this acknowledged kinship, her analysis of electronic literature remains distinct from the causes and concerns of popular culture studies. Hayles’s examples of electronic literature are generally taken from academic or fine arts contexts; the works included in ELO’s collection are the product of a relatively small and networked group of artists, critics and artist-critics including Philippe Bootz, Loss Pequeño Glazier, Stuart Moulthrop, and Noah Wardrip-Fruin. Works that Hayles discusses substantially, such as Judd Morrissey’s The Jew’s Daughter, Michael Joyce’s Twelve Blue, and Talan Memmott’s Lexia to Perplexia, are self-consciously avant-garde and not created for mainstream audiences.
     
    Thus there are notable exclusions from Hayles’s discussion of electronic literature. Collaborative artistic projects or forms that tend to be more consistently associated with popular traditions such as web comics, fan-fiction, .gif building, and meme generation, are not—for a number of disciplinary reasons—part of the canon that ELO is building. This is not an insignificant issue, as the setting aside of collaborative, serially constructed works from the field of the literary reinscribes into new media forms a Cartesian model of authorship that is the legacy of the print monograph.
     
    The extent to which the selections in the first volume of the Electronic Literature Anthology are technologically determined should also not be overlooked. ELO required that the material be viewable across different platforms and easily downloadable from the Internet. This eliminated a substantial number of important early works for possible inclusion (and thus implicitly shapes the direction that future production and study of electronic literature will take). As Hayles’s book and ELO’s collection are considerable achievements that will no doubt become standard texts in university survey courses, it is important to understand that canonicity in this context is not solely generated through the perceived aesthetic or historical value of a work, but the particular medial and technological conditions that govern its development and reception. Funkhouser’s discussion of the substantial body of digital poetry that is no longer easily accessible (or even still in existence) serves as a vital complement to the approach taken in the ELO anthology. Criteria for inclusion in his archaeological project were not dictated by any site, platform or software-specific requirements.
     
    Electronic Literature surveys and discusses works which Hayles defines as “digital born.” These are artworks created and generally intended for viewing on a computer—to distinguish them from digitized objects such as print books originally created for other media outputs, or print works refitted to the requirements of e-book hardware and software. Through examination of historical trends and the emergence of different branches of electronic literature, both she and Funkhouser establish 1995 as an important historical threshold that distinguished different generations of electronic literature. For Hayles, Shelley Jackson’s Patchwork Girl (1995) is the culminating work of the “classical” era of hypertext fiction—the end of a generation of works made using programs such as HyperCard and Storyspace (6-7). The classical era of hypertext eventually gives way to works that are more multimodal. These works feature a greater diversity of “navigation schemes and interface metaphors that tend to deemphasize the link” (7), and make more extensive use of multiple data streams containing sound, images, film, and animation.
     
    In addition to web-based forms of electronic literature, Hayles also touches on a wide range of other forms: interactive fiction (IF); “code work,” an aesthetic form that emphasizes the way in which code and literary effects may be cross-pollinated; “locative narratives,” a common sub-species of which is the Alternate Reality Game (ARG); and “generative literature” or text generators, which make use of complex algorithms to produce textual effects. Hayles also borrows Noah Wardrip-Fruin’s terms “textual instrument” and “playable media” to describe electronic works that move away from traditional notions of gaming yet retain a high level of playability. Some similar experimental practices in print that serve as antecedents can be seen in the work of the Oulipo, the “new novelists,” and William Burroughs; electronic literature serves to further facilitate these kinds of practices.
     
    Central to Hayles’s argument is her concept of “dynamic heterarchies.” Dynamic heterarchies are a “multi-tiered system in which feedback and feedforward loops tie the system together through continuing interactions … different levels continuously inform and mutually determine each other” (45). Hayles characterizes the interaction between different media, between humans and machines, and between code and language as forms of dynamic heterarchies. This model shares considerable family traits with the dialectical tradition, but it lacks the politicization built into dialectical forms. In place of an adversarial framework, she heavily relies in her theory on sexually reproductive metaphors, invoking, for example, images of a mother and fetus to describe these feedback systems.
     
    The dynamic heterarchy comes to serve as a kind of all-purpose model. It affects Hayles’s analysis on multiple levels and fits in with an idiosyncratic rhetorical tendency in her work to use reproductive imagery. She extends this trope to a discussion of the relationship between different branches of scholarly thought, producing her own dynamic heterarchy using Mark Hansen’s discussion of embodiment and Friedrich Kittler’s techno-determinism. She maps their scholarship onto her model of a dynamic heterarchy in which they exemplify two limit points engaged in a kind of (re)productive oscillation. This tendency to replace conflict with (re)productive cooperation recurs in Hayles’s scholarship. For example, Hayles (2007) has recently challenged Lev Manovich’s now notorious claim that “database and narrative are natural enemies” (225), proposing an alternative theory in which each is instead viewed as “a natural symbiont whose existence is inextricably entwined with that of its partner” (“Responses” 1606).
     
    To complement Hayles’s overview of the field of electronic literature, Funkhouser’s Prehistoric Digital Poetry presents an impressive genealogy of digital poetry from 1959 to 1995, historicizing many of the digital practices Hayles reviews. Funkhouser labels the era between 1959-1995 “prehistoric.” His terminology draws attention to the large amount of information now already irrecoverable from the early history of electronic poetry. The book is a record of Funkhouser’s archeological excavations—it is a project of reconstructing fragments of works made inaccessible through the vagaries of technological progress and a collective, sometimes alarming lack of foresight about the importance of data preservation in digital environments. In some cases, Funkhouser does not have direct access to the artworks he discusses, as they no longer exist. He reconstitutes them through exhibit programs, correspondences with artists, catalogues, and through other creative approaches.
     
    Given Funkhouser’s herculean efforts of archival collection, it would have been useful had he gone into greater detail about his own viewing process and the specific ways in which he gained access to many of the works he discusses (e.g. the process of emulation or technical troubleshooting on obsolete computer hardware). Funkhouser has put together a rich collection of obscure, barely remembered works, and it is a sad conjecture that much of what he has gathered will likely only be preserved through the screenshots and technical descriptions he provides. As much new media scholarship has recently emphasized, access to older technologies is a pressing issue because much gets lost when work migrates across platforms, even when this migration is motivated by the desire for preservation. This can have significant consequences for the history of electronic literature.2
     
    Funkhouser uses the term prehistoric to emphasize the irony surrounding the immense archival challenges of writing a history that is only fifty years old. He also argues that “[t]he work discussed here is prehistoric because no masterpieces or ‘works for the ages’ emerged to lodge the genre in the imagination of a larger audience” (6). Although Funkhouser includes many artists (Philippe Bootz, Eduardo Kac, Alan Sondheim, etc.) who have made significant contributions since 1995, he defines this pre-1995 era as a kind of anonymous, ill-recorded pre-history before digital poetry coalesced into a stable field. These digital poets can be compared to bards prior to the invention of writing, whose anonymous, collective legacy is retained through their epic poetry. Yet, to regard post-1995 digital poetics in terms of the establishment of distinguished authors actually departs from some of the poetic approaches Funkhouser promotes in later chapters. He laments, for example, that the Internet did not model itself more after Ted Nelson’s Xanadu, which could have yielded, he suggests, borrowing Nelson’s terminology, a more “deeply intertwingled” form of de-subjectivized, participatory poetics (DM54). Such a poetics would be, presumably, predicated on a model of collective authorship that is antagonistic to the one that he uses to demarcate contemporary digital poetry from the pre-historic.
     
    Funkhouser’s archaeological method sets his work distinctly apart from ELO’s anthological approach as he focuses on works that have become largely inaccessible to a lay audience using only contemporary technological devices. There are no “masters” or canons of early digital poetry not solely because of the aesthetic quality of early digital poetry, but also because of the technical constraints that surrounded production and reception. Herein lies the superb value of Funkhouser’s archeology: his book serves as a direct intervention against what Terry Harpold in Ex-foliations: Reading Machines and the Upgrade Path (2009) calls the “conceits of the upgrade path”—the most often market-driven momentum with which new technologies of the reading surface supersede the old with little interest in historical preservation (3).
     
    It is not only specific digital works, but also entire technologies that are forsaken on the path of medial innovation. Funkhouser’s discussion of MUDs (multi-user dungeons) and MOOs (multi-user dungeons, object-oriented) aptly conveys the problems of data loss and obsolescence. As the conditions produced in these systems were not reproducible in the emergent technology of the World Wide Web, the technology surrounding the MOO itself was prematurely arrested by the release of an incommensurable upgrade.
     
    In addition to an archeological framework, Funkhouser creates an interesting classification system through his chapter organization. Borrowing from the conventions of previous scholarly works such as Loss Pequeño Glazier’s Digital Poetics (2002), Funkhouser moves from discussion of text generators to visual and kinetic poems to hypertext and hypermedia and finally to online networks. In one illuminating section, Funkhouser compares a system of digital poetry classification he had set down in 1996 with his current model in Prehistoric Digital Poetry. He lists his previous organizing principles: “hypermedia, HyperCard, hypertext, network hypermedia, or text-generating software” (237). This taxonomy shows how smitten nineties new media criticism was with hypertext. Like Hayles, Funkhouser marks the historical shift away from the classic hypertext of the 1990s by demonstrating how nearly the entire spectrum of new media production was once defined in terms of the link. Funkhouser’s comparison clearly conveys that it is not only technologies, but also theoretical constructs that have an accelerated obsolescence in the field of digital literature.
     
    One can detect a kind of liberatory shift through the chapters in Prehistoric Digital Poetry. Each new form presented seems to offer an increase in agency and greater intervention on part of the reader/user of digital poetry. Throughout the book Funkhouser indicates his preference for works that open up the field for both reader and creator. Funkhouser regularly resorts to a rhetoric of “interactivity” in a way that, although it may not put pressure on this concept in terms of human-computer interaction, stretches the limits of the definition of poetry. The chapters move away from more rigidly conceived author/reader distinctions to a model of poetics in which production and reception are interleaved with one another. Whether through the discussion of the interpretive (or non-interpretive) flexibility of the aleatory text generator or the open writing space of the MOO, the progression of Funkhouser’s chapters works to expand the possibilities of reader agency in both mechanical as well as hermeneutic terms.
     
    As the horizon of digital arts and literatures expands, the question that both Hayles and Funkhouser must confront directly is how to define their field. Digital media has become ubiquitous, and the convergence of media has further eroded the boundaries between fields that were once imagined as distinct from one another. The ontological differences between work categorized as digital art or as digital literature, for example, are not as important as the fact that these works address and are situated within two different discursive contexts. These distinctions do not focus on any intrinsic technological or formal quality of the medium in which the work is produced. Both “digital poetry” and “electronic literature” self-consciously borrow from print traditions and affix a technological signifier to the conditions of writing with networked and programmable media. Both scholars devote considerable attention to defining the way in which the adjectives “digital” and “electronic” reshape older models of poetry and of literature more generally. Yet both also seem to take for granted that the terms “poetry” and “literature” have commonly understood meanings. As Funkhouser writes of “poetry”: “I examine texts made with computer processing that identify themselves as poetry, have an overtly stanzaic or poetic appearance on the screen, or contain other direct conceptual alignments with poetry as it has been otherwise known” (25). For Funkhouser, poetry is either that which defines itself as poetry or, following Hayles, that which alludes to the idea that there are commonly accepted notions about what falls into the category of poetry. Hayles, ELO, and Funkhouser are comfortable acceding to prior conventions to leave a certain undecidability in their terminology. The result is that the specific works presented shape and delimit what is included within the borders of digital literature.
     
    As with much time-sensitive new media scholarship, both Hayles and Funkhouser conclude their books with prognosticatory chapters in which they attempt to look to the future of their field. Hayles argues that the future has basically already arrived in that nearly all print literature is now inflected by the conditions of digitality (Electronic Literature itself, which comes with a CD-ROM and makes reference to supplementary materials on the ELO website, serves as an example of this). Hayles chooses to end her book with a discussion of Mark Z. Danielewski’s House of Leaves, a work that is not digital born, but that embodies this state of medial interpenetration. Hayles portrays the future of electronic literature as one of undecidable flux in which code, medial output, humans, and machines are in a constant play with one another.
     
    If Hayles recursively selects print as a way of inaugurating the future of digital literature, Funkhouser moves in another direction. He looks to video games, proposing a model for future digital poetry based on Espen Aarseth’s notion of “cybertext” and “ergodic literature”—works that require the “nontrivial effort” of a user. Funkhouser sees the growth of participatory, ergodic texts as “crucial” to the future of digital poetry, and ties the fate of digital poetry to that of games. Gaming technologies and logics offer the potential for digital poetry to be produced in an open, multi-authored, collaborative dataspace. Yet while he casts a hopeful eye in this direction, he does so with a strangely limited definition of a video game. The peculiar result is that Funkhouser both looks toward and is strangely dismissive of games, offering generally reductive characterizations of a form he would have digital poetry colonize. Like Hayles, Funkhouser reveals a blind spot about the popular and its intersection with the comparably isolated objects he examines. He pessimistically suggests that “Given a new set of stimuli—a slower pace of presentation, materials absorbed as words and artwork—the typical video game audience might change its tastes, but I do not see those radically different modes ever conjoining in titles that reach a high level of popularity in mass culture” (251). After dedicating a book to works that have never achieved more than minor subcultural fame, one wonders why Funkhouser raises the issue of commercial or mass popularity. While popular commercial videogames are still certainly dominated by a highly restrictive set of generic conditions, there is a growing movement towards avant-garde gaming—a movement that has been co-opted by the industry to varying degrees.3
     
    But this cavil is not meant to de-emphasize the significance of either Electronic Literature or Prehistoric Digital Poetry. Both discuss a fascinating collection of texts. Hayles provides useful readings and re-readings of the works of better known artists (John Cayley, Michael Joyce, Talan Memmott, and others) while Funkhouser unearths examples of early digital poetry that even specialists will delight in learning about. The importance of these works for both teaching and scholarship in the amorphously defined field of the digital humanities is substantial. Funkhouser’s archaeology and ELO’s anthology take two complementary approaches to the problem of new media historicism. Making a great deal of electronic literature freely available across platforms as ELO has done is an impressive achievement. This anthology of electronic literature will play a significant role in defining the perception of contemporary electronic literature, thus shaping the practice of future generations of digital artists. The very fact that the Electronic Literature Anthology will no doubt have a significant impact on the field as a primary resource makes a work like Funkhouser’s all the more valuable. Funkhouser’s goal is not to pass judgment or to emphasize the value of a work as much as to record that it was once there.
     
    The production of digital literature is tied quite closely to its criticism and study, as many digital poets are scholars and vice versa; the shifts and developments in one area are never without consequence in the other. This is why both an authoritative anthology and an archaeology are valuable interventions against ahistoricizing trends in digital media. They oppose claims surrounding the “newness” of new media and recuperate not merely specific histories but a larger sense of the importance and necessity of taking an historical approach to the digital—a logic always at risk of being lost in a field so deeply enmeshed in the rhetoric of technological progress.
     
    Stephanie Boluk is a Ph.D. student in English Literature at the University of Florida. She is currently writing her dissertation on seriality while working as an editor for the open access journal Imagetext. She has written essays and reviews for The Journal of Visual Culture, New Media and Society, and the proceedings of the 2009 Digital Arts and Culture Conference (forthcoming December 2009).
     

    Notes

     
    1. See the October 2007 issue of the PMLA in which Ed Folsom, Peter Stallybrass, Jerome McGann, Meredith L. McGill, Jonathan Freedman, and N. Katherine Hayles discuss how database technologies have altered humanities research not only by increasing access to historical materials, but also by transforming the theoretical concepts that undergird concepts of text, authorship, and narrative. Using The Walt Whitman Archive as a central case study for examining the changing profession, Folsom suggests that the database offers an alternative to the codex that is in many ways more suited to reading and organizing Whitman’s poetry.

     

     
    2. See for example, Matthew Kirschenbaum’s Mechanisms: New Media and the Forensic Imagination (2008), Terry Harpold’s Ex-foliations: Reading Machines and the Upgrade Path (2009), and the Platform Studies series from MIT Press, edited by Ian Bogost and Nick Montfort. These works stress technological specificity and provide case studies about which it is essential to take into consideration the unique material conditions of production and reception. For example, Harpold’s study of Afternoon, a Story demonstrates how the claims made by Joyce scholars were often only applicable to the specific platform on which they viewed the work–yet their arguments were presented as if able to be generalized to every version of the text, creating problems for establishing Afternoon’s critical history.

     

     
    3. See for example, the video game-influenced art and poetry of Jason Nelson, Camille Utterback and Romy Achituv, Natalie Bookchin, Julian Oliver, Brody Condon, Cory Arcangel, Mary Flanagan, Auriea Harvey, and Michaël Samyn.
     

    Works Cited

       

     

    • Aarseth, Espen J. Cybertext: Perspectives on Ergodic Literature. Baltimore: Johns Hopkins University Press, 1997. Print.
    • Funkhouser, Christorpher T. Prehistoric Digital Poetry: An Archaeology of Forms, 1959-1995. Tuscaloosa: University of Alabama Press, 2007. Print.
    • Harpold, Terry. Ex-foliations: Reading Machines and the Upgrade Path. Minneapolis: University of Minnesota Press, 2009. Print.
    • Hayles, N. Katherine. Electronic Literature: New Horizons for the Literary. Notre Dame: University of Notre Dame Press, 2008. Print.
    • —. “Narrative and Database: Natural Symbionts.” PMLA: Publications of the Modern Language Association of America 122.5 (2007): 1603-1608. Web.
    • Liu, Alan. The Laws of Cool: Knowledge Work and the Culture of Information. Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 2004. Print.
    • Manovich, Lev. The Language of New Media. Cambridge: MIT Press, 2000. Print.
    • Nelson, Theodor. Computer Lib: You can and must understand computers now/Dream Machines: New freedoms through computer screens—a minority report. South Bend, IN: Tempus Books of Microsoft Press 1987. Print.

     

  • “God Knows, Few of Us Are Strangers to Moral Ambiguity”: Thomas Pynchon’s Inherent Vice (review)

    Bernard Duyfhuizen (bio)
    University of Wisconsin-Eau Claire
    pnotesbd@uwec.edu

    Thomas Pynchon, Inherent Vice. New York: The Penguin Press, 2009.
     
    With his seventh novel, Inherent Vice, Thomas Pynchon brings his readers back to late 1960s California for the third time—though the story is set in 1970. As with The Crying of Lot 49 (1966) and Vineland (1990), Pynchon is again exploring a particular moment in America when social change seemed simultaneously both possible and impossible. The hippie culture of sex, drugs, and rock ‘n’ roll believed a chance had arrived for a new way of organizing American politics and society as the first of the baby boomers came of age, but simultaneously the Vietnam War and Richard Nixon defined an America that would at best tolerate the hippie ethos and then later exploit it for commercial purposes. In Gravity’s Rainbow (1973), the masterpiece he wrote largely while living in California during the late 60s (and where he sets the final scene of that book), Pynchon records a graffiti slogan from the Weimar period in Germany: “AN ARMY OF LOVERS CAN BE BEATEN” (Gravity 155), which comments on the naiveté of the Vietnam War era slogan, “Make love not war.” The cultural event haunting Inherent Vice is neither the 1967 “Summer of Love” nor the 1969 Woodstock Music & Art Fair: An Aquarian Exposition: 3 Days of Peace & Music, but rather the aftermath of the Charles Manson Family murders.
     
    The Los Angeles of spring 1970 in which Inherent Vice is set is a sprawling mass of freeways and land development concepts. Like Pynchon’s other novels, Inherent Vice is populated by a wide range of characters, often with wacky names. Most are extreme caricatures of dopers, sex fiends, police and other government agents, and paramilitary vigilantes who police LA’s more troublesome individuals, although “troublesome” is a relative category depending on the ideology of the one providing the “policing.” As the novel’s title suggests, there is “vice” inherent in nearly every aspect of LA life, and “moral ambiguity” (7) surrounds nearly every event and every decision the characters make. Although Pynchon’s narrator winks at hippie drug users like Doc and his close friends and at the various sexual encounters between consenting participants, he fills the novel with examples of other activities that could easily be labeled “vice”; the legal definition might be termed more properly “corruption.” Part of the text’s project is for the reader to determine which forms of “vice” truly threaten society at large and which are harmless. The hippie dopers are essentially harmless (only a danger to themselves), but the vast heroin cartel of the multivalent “Golden Fang” needs to be taken down. Given the suspected police and government corruption protecting the cartel, the task falls in large part to Pynchon’s protagonist, Larry “Doc” Sportello, hippie private investigator, or gumsandal.
     
    All Pynchon novels are in some degree “detective” stories, although they tend to be described as quest narratives. Whether it is Herbert Stencil seeking the mysterious lady V., or Oedipa Maas trying to unravel the skein of the Trystero, or Tyrone Slothrop pursuing the Schwarzgerät, or the Traverse brothers’ tracking down their father’s killers, Pynchon has used the mystery plot to give his often sprawling narratives a skeleton—even though the central character, an innocent who stumbles upon seemingly vast conspiracies operating just below the surface of perceived reality (and recorded history), typically fails to solve the mystery in the end. With Inherent Vice Pynchon gives us his first “professional” detective as protagonist; Lew Basnight in Against the Day (2006), a novel that ultimately takes the reader to 1920s Los Angeles and a string of serial killings, and Manny di Presso in Lot 49 were also professionals, but not central characters, and I’m leaving out of this class government agents such as Brock Vond or Hector Zuñiga in Vineland. The detective plot of the novel unfolds more conventionally than any Pynchon text to date—even the trademark paranoia experienced by Doc and others seems to have more logical than fantastic sources. Like his precursors in the hard-boiled detective genre (though Pynchon’s text plays parodically with the genre), Doc often finds he has to make ethical decisions about how to go about his investigations—balancing the moral dimension and legitimacy of each client. In previous novels the protagonists’ moral and ethical dilemmas arise more on the spur of the moment (Dixon turning on the slave trader or Slothrop rescuing der Springer from Soviet agent Tchitcherine), while for Doc it is his stock in trade.
     
    Gone in Inherent Vice are the long, convoluted historical insets (whether factual or fictional) that have allowed Pynchon over the years to layer his narratives with contexts that construct an historical depth to his fictional plots. As a result, long time readers of Pynchon might be disappointed and find this text a bit too conventional, a bit too “mainstream,” as other reviewers have said—it is the most potentially filmable Pynchon novel yet. Nonetheless, there are plenty of Pynchon’s tricks to entertain and confound Pynchon readers. As with his other texts, many of the rewards come through rereading, when one has time to savor the clever patches of prose, the multiple intersections of plots, the diverse characters, and the density of pop culture references (Tim Ware’s Wiki page for the novel provides a good starting place for readers needing to verify [or add] references—including audio files for many of the over 100 references to popular music in the text).
     
    The book opens with a nod to the style made famous in the LA noir detective fiction of the 1930s and 40s:
     

     

    She came along the alley and up the back steps the way she always used to. Doc hadn’t seen her for over a year. Nobody had. Back then it was always sandals, bottom half of a flower-print bikini, faded Country Joe & the Fish T-shirt. Tonight she was all in flatland gear, hair a lot shorter than he remembered, looking just like she swore she’d never look.
     

    (1)

     

    But it is not the 30s or 40s, though the “case” Shasta Fay Hepworth, Doc’s ex-girlfriend, brings him—an apparent scam being run by the wife of Shasta’s current lover, Mickey Wolfmann, to gain control of his fortune and real estate empire—has the opening ring of a classic crime fiction. At each turn Doc finds the case spiraling in different directions, yet those various directions often reconnect in a complex plot, a plot that requires the reader’s attention even if the perspective is almost entirely restricted to Doc’s (rather than being told from the multiple perspectives typical in Pynchon’s novels). Most sinister among the plots is the one involving the enigmatic Golden Fang, which on one level appears to be a consortium of dentists with a diversified portfolio of investments (including cocaine distribution), but on another appears to be a cartel of highly connected criminals with a diversified crime portfolio that includes all stages of the heroin trade, including the rehab centers for those trying to kick the habit.

     
    Among the various dopers in the text, Coy Harlingen and his wife Hope present the most affecting picture. Coy fakes his own death to break the cycle of his addiction, but the cost of this fake death is an absolute separation from Hope and their daughter Amethyst. Coy, a surf-band saxophone player by trade, becomes a tool of the Golden Fang and of right-wing political groups when in a mistaken effort to reclaim himself and his patriotism he works for them (Them?) in various capacities. Coy embodies the confused morality of the late 60s as he tries to find ways to provide for his family by not being with them. Hope believes Coy is still alive, and asks Doc to track him down. As in Against the Day, Pynchon shows a respect for reconnecting this family, giving them a future together out from under the thumb of the forces that control Coy for much of the novel. The one unambiguous bit of morality in Pynchon’s later fiction centers on the primacy of a family unit, especially when children are involved.
     
    Holmes has Lestrade and Poirot has Japp; Sportello has LAPD lieutenant and occasional TV actor Christian F. “Bigfoot” Bjornsen, “one of America’s true badasses” (202). A staple of detective fiction is the relationship between the detective hero and the representative of the police, who is often a foil that helps reveal the detective’s superior powers of deduction. In Bjornsen, Pynchon has created a foil of much greater complexity than the occasionally bumbling chief inspector (my examples are British rather than American, and it would be useful for a scholar of American detective fiction to explore Bjornsen’s place in this tradition). As Doc’s seeming nemesis, Bjornsen places obstacles in the way of Doc’s investigations and ultimately exploits Doc’s discoveries for his own purposes. Bjornsen is haunted, however, by his own demons—he is not involved in the Manson “case of the century,” and he believes he should be higher in the LAPD hierarchy than he is—but none of his demons is more compelling than his desire to avenge the murder of his former partner, which the department wants to cover up because it would threaten one of their prime snitches (the “snitch” culture outlined in Vineland is in full force in Inherent Vice). Although on the surface Doc and Bjornsen have a mutual antagonism, Pynchon signals with the label “badass” (a character category he valorizes in the essay “Is It O.K. to Be a Luddite?” [1984]) that there may be more to “Bigfoot” than meets the eye. With each new action, the reader’s sense of Bjornsen’s moral register slides positively or negatively, making his position chronically ambiguous. If Pynchon wants to develop a series of Doc Sportello novels, the interplay between Doc and Bjornsen presents fertile ground for development.
     
    Although Doc has a police foil in Bjornsen, he lacks a Watson. In a novel that at times reads like a Cheech & Chong film script, it is a bit surprising that Doc is essentially a loner in his investigations (occasionally companions tag along, but mostly they provide comic relief rather than substantive assistance). On the other hand, the faithful companion trope in detective fiction is often a device that allows a first-person narrator to tell the story of the case and to display the brilliance of the detective from a vantage point of one who can express proper amazement at his deductions. Such a narrator would have, however, made it harder to maintain the moral ambiguity of the text; the reader would expect this sort of narrator to comment on the struggle between morality and vice. Inherent Vice would have been an opportunity for Pynchon to produce a novel in the first person, but maybe Doc is just too habitually stoned to be a reliable teller of his own tale. On the other hand, Pynchon does not take full advantage of his narrator’s omniscience—as he has in his previous fiction—to take the reader on wild associative digressions into arcane histories and counter histories. There still is the regular Pynchon sensibility in this text that “everything is connected” (108), and it won’t be surprising if Inherent Vice contains many more connected layers operating beneath the surface of this seemingly accessible detective fiction.
     
    Yet that same accessibility masks the “moral ambiguity” that permeates Inherent Vice. Although Pynchon has always dabbled in such ambiguity, he has also deployed unambiguous villains (IG Farben, Scarsdale Vibe, Brock Vond) throughout his fiction—the individual character villains are usually metonymies for large institutional villains. Although a clear “villain” eventually emerges from the convolution of plots in the novel, it is neither a character nor a plot the reader has been necessarily following from the start. In Pynchon’s earlier novels the “villain” is a subject of narrative exposition that clues in the reader long before the protagonist’s paranoia merges with fact. This time the villain deserving an act of retribution emerges from the detection that organizes Doc’s movement through the various plots constituting LA in 1970. The “moral ambiguity” of the novel is not so simply located in specific characters or entities like the Golden Fang; instead, it is the entire milieu of LA that has slipped its moral moorings and seems adrift, waiting for next big wave to roll in off the Pacific. The reader is left to determine his or her own moral register for the fictional world of Inherent Vice, and like Doc in the end, we find ourselves driving in the fog at night, looking for that existential exit off the seemingly endless freeway.
     

    Bernard Duyfhuizen is Professor of English and Associate Dean of Arts & Sciences at the University of Wisconsin-Eau Claire. He is the editor of the journal Pynchon Notes. He is the author of Narratives of Transmission (Fairleigh Dickinson, 1992) and his articles have appeared in such journals as Postmodern Culture, College English, ELH, Comparative Literature, Novel, Modern Fiction Studies, and Studies in the Novel. A member of the musical group Eggplant Heroes, he has a CD, After This Time, forthcoming in 2010.
     

  • Performing Politics: (review)

    Phillip Novak (bio)
    Le Moyne College
    NovakPP@lemoyne.edu

    Jennifer Fay, Theaters of Occupation: Hollywood and the Reeducation of Postwar Germany. UP of Minnesota, 2008.
     
    The usual approach to writing about film culture in postwar Germany is to restrict the discussion to films made by Germans, in order, as Jennifer Fay puts it in the introduction to Theaters of Occupation, “to assess how they negotiate Germany’s complicated relationship to anti-Semitism and to the country’s National Socialist past” (xxvi).1 Fay, however, is more interested in the postwar Germans’ sense of the present than in their relation to the past; and she’s less interested in postwar German films per se than in the ways those films functioned, along with the American movies screened as part of the Allies’ efforts at reeducating the German public, in the staging of the encounter between a shattered Germany and a politically and culturally ascendant United States.2 Indeed, although much of the book’s time and space are devoted to the examination of individual films and their reception, with all but one of the chapters turning around the consideration of what Fay calls a “nodal film” (144), Theaters of Occupation is less concerned with film than with ideology, cultural politics, policy, and political theory.3 Fay’s main aims are to lay out a critique of American ideological commitments—especially, but not exclusively, those informing U.S. policy during the occupation; and to argue, in the course of laying out that critique,4 first, that the U.S. effort to reeducate the Germans, at least insofar as Hollywood fiction films and American-made documentaries figured in that effort, failed to produce the desired effects; and, second, that the German experience of America’s reeducation campaign nonetheless promoted—inadvertently and in quite ironic ways—the development within Germany of a more genuinely democratic sensibility than the one the Americans were self-consciously aiming at.
     
    This redefining of the discursive terrain is on the whole very productive. As Fay’s analysis consistently demonstrates, a consideration of U.S. occupation policy regarding the reeducation of the postwar German population brings American ideologies into stark relief—mainly because the process of promoting American cultural identity more or less forced the Americans into wearing their ideological positions, as it were, on their sleeve. Moreover, the interdisciplinary nature of Fay’s work—which masterfully weaves together elements from an array of disparate fields—produces treatments of individual films that are at once novel, compelling, and persuasive. Helmut Käutner’s Der apfel ist ab (The Apple Fell, 1948), for example, has previously been thought to be of interest mainly because of the objections it raised among the clergy both before and during its release. Fay mostly sidesteps discussion of both the blurred religious allegory the film suggests and the cultural controversy that that allegory engendered. Instead, she presents Der apfel ist ab as a parody of democratic origins and as a political allegory satirizing the paucity of choices being made available to Germans as tensions between East and West began to rise. Her reading of this film is set in the context of a broader discussion of American cold-war propaganda as represented by Ernst Lubitsch’s Ninotchka (1939), which the Americans put into heavy rotation in Germany in 1948, the same year Der apfel ist ab premiered, and by the Welt im Film (World in Film) newsreels that were a principal tool in the reeducation effort (and whose screening was, as Fay notes, “compulsory for all exhibitors in the U.S. and British zones until January 1950” [46]). As Europe generally and Germany particularly became staging grounds for the conflicts between the U.S. and the Soviet Union, both Lubitsch’s film and the newsreels, Fay argues, presented reductive images of the competing political systems and of the distinctions between them—and by so doing worked to make the political choices before the Germans seem clear and straightforward. In Ninotchka, the choice between capitalism and communism is simplified to “one between embodied enjoyment and the suppression of desire, affect, and appetite” (90-91); the newsreels, simplifying further, offer a decision “between pleasure and unpleasure, survival and starvation, freedom and unfreedom” (112). Der apfel ist ab highlights the absurdity of these sorts of impossible choices where there is really no choice to make. And in its depiction of a protagonist unable to choose between a pair of polar opposites, figured as potential mates, the film raises questions about the very possibilities of self-government. Theaters of Occupation‘s analysis of the films and their relations, and of the cultural situation in which their interplay occurred, is rich, informative, nuanced, and clever.
     
    Cagier still is Fay’s work on, and with, George Cukor’s female gothic film Gaslight (1944), which surveys revealed to be highly popular among German audiences when it was released in Germany in 1948 (152). Fay doesn’t offer a reading of the film. Rather, by way of explaining its popularity, she teases out what she takes to be the various ways it resonates with occupation experience. She then uses it to build a portrait of “democratic subjectivity” (169). Citing studies by several scholars doing work on gothic literature, Fay argues that, historically, the gothic as literary genre is tied to concerns about “democracy … foreign invasion, loss of sovereignty, and violent regime change” (147). These ties make the genre amenable to analysis in the context of military occupation. Female gothic fictions and films, moreover, which center around images of disempowered women victimized by men who, shortly after the women marry them, turn out to be exploitative and murderous, would have appealed, Fay suggests, to an audience that was comprised largely of women; that as a whole, including both men and women, had been feminized—and made critical of masculine authority—by the experiences of war and occupation; and that felt betrayed—regardless of whatever commitments to National Socialism there might have been before the war—by Hitler and the Nazis. As for Gaslight: on Fay’s account, it can be, and might well have been, seen as having an almost allegorical relation to occupation history: there’s the paranoia inducing experience of the main character Paula’s relation to her “mystifying East European husband” (161), onto whom “we could variously map the Hitlers and Stalins of Europe” (162); there’s the “demystifying American rescuer” (161-62); there’s the threat of loss of identity, with Paula’s psychic disintegration paralleling German cultural disintegration; there’s the general sense of anxiety generated by the possibility that the present will collapse into a repetition of the past (“that Paula is fated to end as her mother did: alone in an asylum” [163]; that “the injunction that Germans imitate Americans and reproduce their popular culture,” given the “racism, xenophobia, militarism, and anticommunism” encoded in that popular culture, “could be interpreted as a terrifying call to reenact the very kinds of violence that prompted the occupation in the first place” [142]). “We could say,” Fay notes, “that Gaslight offers its German spectators a national script of female victimization, authoritarian manipulation, and perhaps also liberation that could find wide historical application” (163).
     
    In addition to capturing postwar German concerns and resonating with occupation experience, Gaslight also serves, according to Fay, an educational function—mainly by endorsing Paula’s mistrust of the male authority figures in her life. In female gothic plots, that is, the sanity of the protagonist is typically put into question: shortly after marrying a mysterious and charismatic man she doesn’t know well enough, the heroine comes to believe that the man is trying to kill her; but circumstances are usually such that the legitimacy of the heroine’s suspicions remains in doubt. There is a history of insanity she may be repeating. She may simply be paranoid, her sense of victimization a delusion. And in some female gothic films—Alfred Hitchcock’s Suspicion (1941), for example—the heroine’s concerns do turn out to be a fantasy. Not so in the case of Gaslight: Paula is right to be suspicious of her husband; he is, in fact, trying to drive her mad and destroy her. Moreover, Paula’s mistrust—a “gothic skepticism” (172)—carries over into her relation to the man who helps save her—from whom she accepts, not a proposal of marriage, but of friendship. “Paula learns the folly of falling too quickly and too completely for the man who would rescue her from her dark past, and she learns that the only way to avoid history’s return is by knowing that history to the best of her ability” (171). The implications, in terms of political allegory, are clear: “where Ninotchka allows herself to be seduced by capitalism, the gothic heroine would be suspicious of the regime that lures her. She would be wary that this new government may harbor a violent history and may be just as untrustworthy as the regime it replaces” (171). The suffering the Germans endured as a consequence of their allegiances to Hitler and National Socialism has, in other words, predisposed the population toward a healthy skepticism concerning authority and an acute awareness of the violence necessarily associated with the institution of law. The American effort at reeducating the Germans—at least where the use of films is concerned—only served to reinforce the Germans’ wariness: the Welt im Film newsreels recalled Nazi propaganda; Hollywood movies, made ambiguous by their efforts to abide by censorship codes, often contained material that could be seen as signaling similarities between American history and the history of Nazi Germany (both of which are marked by genocidal violence) and between Nazi Germany’s and America’s ideological commitments (a shared faith in capitalism and fear of communism, shared anxieties about race that translate into the production and promotion of a white national identity, a shared veneration of military valor and the glories of war). “Rather than feeling propelled forward into a new political reality,” Fay writes, “there is a sense that Germans may have experienced the occupation as history’s uncanny return, or perhaps the return of uncanny history” (142)—a circumstance that produced in Germany, however, a productive paranoia, a suspiciousness about power and those who seek and wield it. Gaslight thus reflects German postwar dispositions and predispositions, but it can also be said to “foster,” Fay argues, “a democratic subjectivity” (169).
     
    What’s most striking about Fay’s analysis is the facility with which she organizes insights drawn from a diverse array of disciplines—literary criticism, literary theory, film studies, political theory and history—into a coherent whole. It’s a very rich tapestry that she weaves. But as smart as the analysis surely is, it does raise, for me a least, a few questions. The first has to do with the methodology Fay uses, not just here—in the chapter on the political implications for Germany of the reception of the female gothic film—but throughout the book.
     
    Much of Theaters of Occupation—most of the discussion of Hollywood films, parts of the chapters dealing mainly with films made in Germany—presents itself as a contribution to film reception history. That is, one of Fay’s chief concerns is to identify the ways Germans living under the American occupation were responding to particular films and to particular types of films. The persuasiveness of her claims on that score is an issue in its own right. But the force of what she has to say about U.S. foreign policy—that the reeducation effort failed to deliver the results the Americans desired but did produce a sort of inadvertent success when looked at from the standpoint of the Germans—depends at least in part on how convincing she is on the issue of reception: if the Germans aren’t seeing echoes of their disastrous National Socialist past in the American films they are watching, then they don’t acquire the “gothic skepticism” that is, for Fay, a key to the evolution of democracy in Germany after the war. And if the specifics involved in Fay’s account of Germany’s transformation into a democracy don’t hold up, either we’re left with a historical conundrum or we’re forced to return to a more conventional assessment of the historical situation (that, however flawed in details, U.S. occupation policies succeeded in laying the groundwork for the development of a democratic Germany).5
     
    The problem, of course, is that, in the absence of some sort of hard evidence—detailed surveys of audience reactions, collections of response cards filled out at the time of the viewing, broad cultural discussion (in the form, say, of editorials or letters to editors), or extensive review—it is difficult to make fully convincing claims about the ways actual viewers respond, or have responded, to films. In the case of films shown to German audiences during the occupation, as Fay herself admits, there is little hard evidence concerning audience attitudes to work with.6 Her chapter on Gaslight cites surveys and some contemporary reviews (both of Gaslight and of a few other films whose reception, according to Fay, bears on our understanding of the reception of Cukor’s film). While the survey results do tell us that Gaslight was the most popular film shown in Germany in 1948, they have nothing to say (going by Fay’s presentation of the material) about the reasons for its popularity. And the reviews Fay quotes don’t really speak to the issues at the core of her analysis. They do, in a sort of loose way, support her claim that “film reviewers in occupied Germany conspicuously engaged films … as ideological and even ethnographic texts that were meaningful within the wider discursive environment of occupation” (155), but the ideological and ethnographic concerns most on display in the passages she quotes have to do, not with worries about the possible reestablishment of a totalitarian regime in Germany (a gothic suspicion that history is repeating itself), but with German anxieties about the vulgarity or banality of an encroaching American culture.
     
    Given the lack of hard evidence and the vagueness of the evidence that does exist, Fay’s representation of postwar German responses to the films in circulation has to remain highly conjectural—a problem made more acute by the sometimes circular reasoning involved in Fay’s efforts at reconstructing the probable interplay between viewers and films. To return to the discussion of Gaslight and the female gothic: Fay asserts that for the Germans living under the occupation, the fear arose “that your Allied protector—this emissary of democracy—[was] in fact out to harm you, steal your property, commandeer (literally occupy) your body and house, and drive you mad” (150). She offers little in the way of support for the assertion.7 Rather, it’s the popularity of Cukor’s film that serves to justify the positing of this gothic occupation subjectivity. But then the existence of that subjectivity in turn serves to explain the popularity of the film. Given the number and the heterogeneity of the Hollywood films shown in Germany during the occupation, and given the almost willful indeterminacy of those films, one could probably use such a process of reasoning to justify just about any statements one might be inclined to make about the postwar German world. And there are aspects of Fay’s own analysis that raise questions about the conclusions she draws. Assuming that Fay is right that the Germans’ experience of occupation resonated with the experience of the heroines of female gothic films, and assuming that such resonance explains the popularity of Gaslight, it seems to stand to reason that gothic films generally would have enjoyed a marked popularity. Fay notes that several such films were shown in occupied Germany. But of the three she mentions by name (aside from Gaslight), only one—Alfred Hitchcock’s Suspicion (1941)—was well received. German critics, according to Fay, lambasted The Spiral Staircase (Robert Siodmak, 1945) and found Jane Eyre (Robert Stevenson, 1944) to be laughable. Thus in the context of an argument for the centrality of the female gothic film to postwar German experience, the author’s own research forces the reader to wrangle with the troubling fact that the Germans apparently liked only half of the female gothic movies the author discusses.
     
    This sort of tenuousness marks other moments of the analysis as well. I’ll mention just one. Fay contends, plausibly enough, that given their awareness of the aims of the Allied reeducation campaign, German audiences during the occupation would have been inclined to read the Hollywood films for their encoded political messages. She also contends, with equal plausibility, that Hollywood films, which, because of the pressures of the censorship codes, were forced to be highly ambiguous, encoded political messages quite at odds with the aims of reeducation. American films, Fay writes, produced an “unruly image world of America’s democratic unconscious” that “revealed in its fissures, obscurities, and curious asides a darker side of American politics to those audiences open to alternative readings, as indeed Germans were” (58). Fay unveils this “darker side of American politics” in the course of a series of brief readings of particular films, all of the readings focusing on some aspect of American racial politics or America’s racist past: the Sonja Henie star vehicle Sun Valley Serenade (H. Bruce Humberstone, 1941) exposes the exclusionary aspects of America’s assimilationist mythologies; John Huston’s The Maltese Falcon (1941) and Across the Pacific (1942) “are shot through with national and racial substitutions that were animated by America’s pernicious orientalism” (64); John Ford’s Drum’s along the Mohawk (1939) and Fritz Lang’s Western Union (1941) reveal (by seeking “to authorize”) “the genocide that made possible America’s democratic founding” and “implicitly question the costs of cultural conformity by working through the outsider’s relationship to America’s civilizing mission” (75). These readings are, while not especially original, surely tenable. They would have been available, that is, to German viewers. But, again, Fay has no real evidence to suggest that the Germans did in fact read these films as she reads them. Maybe they did. But, then again, maybe not.
     
    My second concern about Theaters of Occupation has to do with some of the juxtapositions in play throughout the work. Inasmuch as Fay’s thesis is that the Germans living under occupation came to experience American efforts at reeducation as an eerie re-imposition of their fascist past, the whole of the work serves as something of an extended meditation on the analogy to be drawn between the U.S. and Nazi Germany. A host of specific comparisons punctuate the text. In the first chapter, for example, in the course of a discussion of an American movie, Tomorrow—the World! (Leslie Fenton, 1944), that was released shortly before the end of the war and that was designed to show how the soon-to-be conquered German people could be rehabilitated, Fay remarks on the similarity of Fenton’s film to a Nazi-era propaganda piece entitled Hitlerjunge Quex (Hans Steinhoff, 1933), which concerns the political conversion of a young German boy to Nazism and his eventual murder by communists. Referring to the latter as “[a]lmost a prequel to” (27) the former, Fay notes: “the similarities between Hitlerjunge Quex and Tomorrow—the World! leave little doubt that American cinema is not Weimar or even Nazi cinema’s opposite but its shadow” (32). In the following chapter, Fay offers a comparable correlation between Across the Pacific and another Nazi propaganda film. “What is interesting about [Across the Pacific] in the German context is that its representation of Japanese otherness bears comparison to the stereotypes of Jewish culture in Veit Harlan’s Jud Süß (Jew Süss, 1940), a Nazi-era film that likewise dramatizes the danger of assimilating the ethnic minority” (74). Fay goes on to note that just as Jud Süß “enables a ‘consent to genocide’” (Fay is citing Katrin Sieg here [Sieg 85]), Across the Pacific “foments a consent to internment” (74). In the concluding paragraph of this same chapter, Fay states that the film program that was put together by the American Military Government (and that Fay has, in some sense, briefly reviewed) “suggests that even the American occupiers sensed a disturbing similarity between themselves and their Nazi-era German wards” (82). The end of Chapter 3 sounds the same refrain. After examining the propaganda purposes to which Ninotchka was put by the Americans as the cold war began, Fay writes: “[t]hat Goebbels also celebrated Ninotchka … raises the possibility that in choosing as Ninotchka does, Germans may in fact restore themselves to ideals of Nazi citizenship” (113). As I noted earlier, these sorts of comparisons are common in Theaters of Occupation; and many more examples could be adduced. My aim in drawing attention to them is not to question the legitimacy of any of the particulars but to suggest that in their totality—in their number and in their insistency—they work over the course of the book to insinuate that there isn’t finally much to distinguish the United States from Nazi Germany. Such a flattening of meaningful distinctions is a problem in its own right. But the distraction it produces also makes it difficult to attend fully to the moments in Fay’s book of more trenchant analysis.
     
    I want briefly to discuss one of those moments. In the introduction and first chapter of Theaters of Occupation, Fay lays out the logic of the American reeducation campaign in Germany. U.S. policy, Fay argues, was grounded in the ideas—promulgated by a number of academics working in the emergent field of psychoculturalism—that each country possesses “a unified ‘national character structure’” and that this structure is mutable (3): “[a] product of traditions passed on from one generation to the next, character structure was an evolving cultural construct that, while manifested and reinforced in all aspects of a national, social, and psychic life, could nonetheless be changed” (3). Germany’s national character, according to the psychoculturalists, was diseased, paranoid, primitive. America’s national character is democratic. Since, for the Americans, democracy was less a matter of institutions and political practices than “a type of behavior, a public attitude, and an affective relationship to the state” (xiv), reeducating the Germans would involve getting them to learn, by miming, these behaviors and attitudes. The “master trope” for the process of reeducation (58), Fay maintains, was immigrant assimilation. Germans living under the occupation could learn, just as Germans who immigrate to the States learn, to be good democratic citizens. In order to accomplish this transformation, the Germans in the old country, like those in the new, would be required to give up their ethnic and cultural distinctiveness. In effect, they would have to become Americans. “The logic of reeducation,” Fay writes, “is that ‘democracy’ depends on a mimesis that erases difference” (xvi): as the Americans conceive it, that is, “democracy is not an enlightened pluralistic philosophy so much as a homogenizing force” (xvi).
     
    This homogenizing aspect of American culture and of the reeducation policy the U.S. pursued, this intolerance of difference, is one of the central failings, according to Fay, of both the country’s political culture and of its policy in postwar Germany. It’s a chief preoccupation of Fay’s work. To be sure, the idea that American democracy—which, as Fay suggests, is majoritarian in principle and tends to reduce the idea of freedom to market choice—functions as a sort of machine for producing sameness is not original to Fay’s book. But the particular focus of her study, as I’ve said, brings the country’s ideological operations into the open. Fay’s concern with culture loss and with the elimination of difference, moreover, acquires considerable weight as a consequence of more recent historical developments. As Fay points out, the administration of George W. Bush presented America’s occupation of Germany as a context for its invasion and occupation of Iraq.
     
    The universalizing impulses that motivated the reeducation campaign in Germany, and the assumption of a universality of human being that made sense of the effort, were in play as well in the case of Iraq. Given the ways they worked and were worked to make possible that still ongoing catastrophe in the Middle East, these impulses and assumptions are not just troubling but dangerous. Theaters of Occupations provides a valuable service in drawing attention to them.
     
    The question of how—and to what extent—to accommodate difference is, however, vexed and vexing. And Theaters of Occupation doesn’t really acknowledge the problems the issue presents. There’s a point, for example, near the end of the book, where Fay, summarizing a critique of American liberalism presented by Eric Erikson in 1950, notes that American “majoritarianism” is not really interested in “universal justice or pluralism” (181).8 This easy yoking of those two terms suggests there is no tension between them. They aren’t, I think (and hope), antithetical, but the ideas (that we ought to aim at producing “universal justice”; that we need to value “pluralism”) don’t reconcile easily. If, in the face of the homogenizing force of a metastasizing American market empire, our central commitment needs to be, as Fay suggests, to foster different cultural modes of being, we will be hard pressed to promote universal justice. Local cultures generate local forms of justice—which are not infrequently at odds with one another. In certain cases, in relation to certain sets of issues, celebrating the local becomes problematic. The limit case, of course, is genocide. One of the features of the local culture Hitler governed was the belief that dispossessing and murdering Jews constituted a form of justice. And while it is true that preventing this distinctive cultural practice was not the reason the U.S. (or any other country) went to war with Germany, one of the lessons the world seemed to think it learned from its encounter with the camps (as measured most clearly by the United Nation’s adoption in 1948 of the Convention on the Prevention and Punishment of the Crime of Genocide) was that interfering with the expression of cultural difference is, in this instance at any rate, a moral imperative.
     
    Arguments can be, indeed have been, made for seeing one culture’s interfering with another culture as always illegitimate, even in the case of genocide. Perhaps a really thoroughgoing commitment to the value of difference is our primary ethical obligation.9 But the counter-arguments (those critical of the notion of sovereignty, for example, or those in favor of the enforcement of international law) are also compelling—especially at a time when it is possible to imagine Bush administration officials being indicted for crimes against humanity. We are—at this moment when the forces of an inevitable globalization produce increasing cultural conflict—just at the beginning, I believe, of what will be a protracted international, multicultural, and multidimensional negotiation of just these tensions: between sameness and difference, between the belief, on the one hand in the principle of universal justice, and the desire, on the other, to embrace diversity. Although Theaters of Occupation doesn’t fully register the difficulties involved in that negotiation, it is a rich and engaging contribution to the discussion.
     
    Phillip Novak is an Associate Professor at Le Moyne College, with a joint appointment in the Department of English and the Department of Communication and Film Studies. His published work includes essays on William Faulkner, Toni Morrison, and Walter Mosley, on movie musicals, and on Roman Polanski’s Chinatown.
     

    Endnotes

     
    1. See, e.g., Robert Shandley, whose book is designed to respond to the New German Cinema’s “angry critique of the previous generation” (181). New German Cinema directors, that is, faulted German filmmakers of the postwar period for failing to confront Germany’s Nazi past. Shandley argues that the “rubble films” made in the immediate aftermath of the war did indeed engage that past. As his analysis of the films makes clear, however, they did so in sometimes very indirect or troubling ways—a point, which, to my mind, leaves the New German Cinema concerns pretty much in play. In any case, Rubble Films, like much of the discussion of postwar German cinema, focuses on the issue of German accountability. Fay is not especially engaged with that issue.

     

     
    2. I use the term staging above advisedly since, as the title of Fay’s study suggests, the book is much concerned with the issue of theatricality. On Fay’s account, that is, occupied Germany itself became something of a large theater, with both Americans and Germans putting on a show. The Americans, for their part, sought to show the Germans, by means of showing them movies, how best, by their lights, to live a democratic—by which, Fay argues, the American’s mostly meant a consumer capitalist—existence. And the Germans, by copying American manners and by appropriating American movie types, tropes, and conventions, put on a show for the Americans of learning their lessons. These performances were, all around, necessarily ambiguous and open to interpretation: imitation is not always a form of flattery; it may constitute a type of burlesque. And Hollywood films (designed, as Fay argues, to make their appeal to the masses by avoiding unpleasantries, that is, by eliminating or veiling controversial content) were almost willfully indeterminate, and thus open to readings at odds with the aims of the American Military Government. There was, in short, a good deal of fluidity in, and a certain slipperiness to, this cultural interplay mediated by the presentation and reception of performances. A primary purpose of Theaters of Occupation is to analyze the interplay, the cross-cultural encounter of the occupation as it got negotiated through film.

     

     
    3. In the introduction, Fay writes “[t]hough Germany is my example, the politics and culture of occupation is my subject. Where today Germany stands as a shadow paradigm for U.S. nation building in Afghanistan and Iraq, we should look to this historical example for what it tells us about an occupation more generally” (xxviii; italics in the original). Fay doesn’t finally press too hard on showing how the lessons learned from occupied Germany might apply to the occupation of Iraq. As I note later, marking that potential connection does give her analysis some added weight. But it’s not clear to me that there is such a thing as a “politics” or a “culture of occupation.” The occupation of Germany and the more recent military interventions in the Middle East are, it seems to me, incommensurable. The Allies’ decision to demand Germany’s unconditional surrender was a matter of heated debate at the time; and it remains a point of contention. But a very compelling case can be made for that decision. Very little can be said in defense of the invasion and occupation of Iraq. Then, too, the material conditions and the interaction between occupier and occupied differ wildly in these two cases. Surely some of the same ideological commitments that motivated the decision to occupy Germany and reeducate its population also motivated the neoconservative push to invade and occupy Iraq. That’s worth thinking about. But assuming some sort of analogy can be drawn between these two very different historical events risks reproducing the neoconservatives’ flawed reasoning.

     

     
    4. The relation of elements here might be better described by shifting the figure and the ground—that is, by thinking of the ideological critique as embedded in—and permeating—the book’s argument concerning the American attempt to use Hollywood films as tools in the reeducation campaign.

     

     
    5. See Merritt for an extended analysis of the U.S. occupation of Germany that makes a strong case for seeing U.S. policy as, on the whole, successful; esp. Chapter 14, “German Society Changed,” 387-411.

     

     
    6. At the outset of the chapter most devoted to tracking the kinds of readings German audiences would have been engaged in, Fay notes the following: “Film reviews and questionnaires can give us the most general sense of the film audience and the range of reading practices. But for the early years of the occupation, especially, this documentation is rather scarce and limited in detail. Thus I construct a horizon of reception that is attentive to the material conditions and ideational predispositions of German audiences” (41). Material conditions do, surely, inform reading practices. But responses to material conditions no doubt vary a good deal. Speculating generally, without evidentiary support, about the ways material conditions might affect reading practices can be suggestive but not, finally, very decisive. Then, too, tracking “ideational predispositions” is necessarily tricky business. Fay argues, for example, that German audiences would have been predisposed by the experience of occupation to “a critical rewriting” of the depictions “of the American West” that they were seeing in Hollywood westerns (81). To support that claim, Fay refers to the “popular phenomenon” of Indian impersonation that arose in Germany in the postwar period. “Rejecting Hollywood’s western formula,” Fay writes, “Germans refused identification with their occupiers and thus resisted both the Americanization of their culture during the occupation and the explicit assimilationist mandate of reeducation” (80). German audiences identified, rather, with the dispossessed Native Americans. But as Fay herself acknowledges, the German “fascination with American Indians” predates the occupation. From at least the early twentieth century, when Karl May was producing extremely popular novels about the American west—Hitler was, himself, a huge fan—Germans saw in romanticized images of Native Americans an idealized image of themselves: embattled but free, pure-blooded warriors.

     

     
    7. Fay notes that rape was common in postwar Germany, but she acknowledges that the rapes were for the most part committed by, and associated with, Soviet troops. She cites one historian, Robert G. Moeller, who argues that the Germans came to see themselves as being “victimized by the Western Allies, who were shortsighted, inefficient and incompetent at best and deliberately vengeful at worst” (Moeller 14; qtd. Fay 150). There’s a long way to travel, however, between seeing the Allies as incompetent and sometimes vengeful to seeing them as trying to drive the Germans “mad.”

     

     
    8. This particular phrase is Fay’s, not Erikson’s.

     

     
    9. For a compelling defense of the value of cultural particularity and critique of the notion of human rights as conventionally conceived, see Peterson.
     

    Works Cited

     

    • Merritt, Richard L. Democracy Imposed: U.S. Occupation Policy and the German Public, 1945-1949. New Haven: Yale University Press, 1995. Print.
    • Moeller, Robert G. Introduction. West Germany Under Construction: Politics, Society, and Culture in the Adenauer Era. Ed. Moeller. Ann Arbor: University of Michigan Press, 1997. 1-30. Print.
    • Peterson, V. Spike. “Whose Rights? A Critique of the ‘Givens’ in Human Rights Discourse.” Alternatives 15.3 (1990): 303-344. Print.
    • Shandley, Robert R. Rubble Films: German Cinema in the Shadow of the Third Reich. Philadelphia: Temple University Press, 2001. Print.
    • Sieg, Katrin. Ethnic Drag: Performing Race, Nation, and Sexuality in West Germany. Ann Arbor: University of Michigan Press, 2002. Print.

     

  • A Brief Reply to Kalindi Vora’s “Others’ Organs: South Asian Domestic Labor and the Kidney Trade”

    Neil Larsen (bio)
    University of California at Davis
    nalarsen@ucdavis.edu

     
    Basing itself largely on an emergent body of ethnography concerning the contemporary traffic in human organs, and especially on the buying and selling of human kidneys in South Asia, Kalindi Vora’s “Others’ Organs: South Asian Domestic Labor and the Kidney Trade” can certainly lay claim to a considerable degree of ethical and political urgency. It quite rightly insists as well on the need to view this horrific new form of globalized commerce as inseparable, from the standpoint of the logic of capital, from the no less desperate circumstances leading to the export of “whole” South Asian laboring bodies themselves, here the Sri Lankan women who make up a large proportion of the domestic “care” workers in wealthy enclaves such as the Gulf State of Dubai. To the extent that it draws the attention of its readers to this real and sinister index of the South Asian economic “miracle” even now still being touted in the pages of mainstream media and among the diehard apologists for neoliberal economics and development policies, its appearance in the pages of Postmodern Culture is a welcome occurrence.
     
    Less fortunately, however, “Others’ Organs” regards these “vital commodities” insofar as they are products of what Vora also terms “affective and biological labor from the Global South” as, when viewed from a “cultural studies framework and building upon feminist and postcolonialist theories of value and production,” arguments for “the need to rethink the terms of Marx’s labor theory of value” (par. 3). The bulk of the essay attempts to make good on this theoretical claim. The results are disappointing, and purport to engage in a debate with or somehow emend the theoretical axioms laid out in the first chapter of volume I of Capital in which the latter, for this reader at any rate, have become virtually unrecognizable. At one point Vora does offer the following reasonably approximate gloss on what she refers to only as the “labor theory of value”:
     

     

    For Marx, value in its multiple forms can be quantified through labor time, or time spent expending the energy of the body and mind in producing an object, which under capitalist production becomes a commodity. He argues that at the level of the commodity, value can exist as both exchange value and use-value, but these are ultimately different moments in the life of value produced by labor.
     

    (par. 6)

     

    One wonders what “multiple” can be referring to here, but otherwise fair enough. Yet with what is virtually this one exception, the word “value” itself undergoes a bizarre and, it would seem, symptomatic process of continuous ambiguation or conceptual slippage throughout the pages of “Others’ Organs.” So, for example, Vora’s opening anecdote concerning the tragic death of the Pakistanti/Afghani airborne stowaway Mohammed Ayaz, fallen from the undercarriage of a plane at Heathrow airport in 2001, becomes a “story [that] also forces us to think that … lives [such as Ayaz’s], their labor, and their value may circulate outside the logic of capital” (par.3; my emphasis). “Outside”? For anyone the least bit attuned to the argument of Capital I, this is a sheer oxymoron: value, or valorization, is the logic of capital: “buying in order to sell,” or, in Marx’s celebrated formula, M-C-M’, the conversion of money, or a quantum of value, via its conversion into its commodity form and sale, into more money (Marx 247-257). To be “outside” value in this sense—and Vora never specifies any other that connects in any way to the terms of Marx’s theory of value—surely, is eo ipso to be outside the other, capital. “Value” that circulated outside the logic of M-C-M’ would not be value any longer.

     
    But “Others’ Organs” proceeds as though some other, intermediate sort of “value,” neither the socially necessary abstract labor that, per Marx, constitutes the “substance” of value and whose duration constitutes the latter’s “magnitude” (Marx 125-130) nor the common sense cultural or ethical sense of the lexeme as, say, “norm” or subjectively-held judgment or belief were discoverable in the organ-trafficking and the “affective” labor of South Asian care workers. “I recognize,” writes Vora,
     

    the labor theory of value advanced in Marx’s Capital as the dominant logic of the way new forms of commodities and commodified labor forms behave under capital, but at the same time, as subaltern historiographies and feminist materialist scholarship have established, I suggest that other economies are made illegible within the dominant logic. These other articulations of value establish multiple meanings of commodities and labor, and therefore the lives and bodies entangled in systems of value.
     

    (par. 8)

     

    But to insist however stubbornly on the point in question here: if the “meanings” of these “other” economies are in fact articulable (and therefore, in the end, surely “legible”) within the dominant and contradictory logic of value (of capital)—and surely, on this precise point, Vora is right: other, non-capitalist relations of production may still persist in a subordinate position within the capitalist mode of production as a whole—then what sense does it make to refer to them as articulations of “value” at all? It is not that value has no other. It is that the other of value is something other than value. Value, like the Hebrew deity of the book of Exodus, “shall have no other gods before” it. That, as the great, systematic and unequalled concretion of Marx’s thought throughout his mature work makes clear over and over again, is precisely the historical specificity of “self-valorizing value,” i.e., of capital. By settling for what soon enough becomes the transparent and facile rhetorical sleight in which one speaks of “value” as at one and the same time the “dominant”—and consummately objective—”logic of capital” and as nevertheless a function of how people are represented (“valuable” or not?), of “value” as something “assigned to people as labor-commodities” (Vora par. 19) may alleviate some immediate multiculturalist anxiety lest one be suspected of failure to respect difference. But it does so at the cost of effacing what is precisely the historical difference of value, i.e., of the commodity-form, as, to use Moishe Postone’s invaluable phrase, a “form of social mediation.”

     
    The word matters here, because the concept, and the theory, and the critique towards which it beckons and refers, matter, and this not only for purposes of mere intellectual rigor but ultimately for the lives of the South Asian—as of all—victims of capital over whose plight Vora evinces her unquestionably sincere and deeply felt agony in this essay. In this sense it is worth considering (as Vora appears to do at one point; see par. 24)1 whether in fact the terrible, barbaric necessity that forces South Asian villagers to sell their kidneys in the vain attempt to escape from debt-peonage no longer obeys the logic of the labor theory of value at all but that of its historical crisis and breakdown—the fact that the de-valorized, in effect (to use Robert Kurz’s term) “unexploitable” labor-power of the vendor—and of an immense proportion of the globe’s pool of potential wage-laborers—makes of her organ (in Scheper-Hughes’s term, as cited by Vora) the “last commodity” precisely because the labor-power of its “owner” is itself no longer saleable as a commodity. Here the theoretical terms of Capital allow us to be quite precise:2 the kidney, we might reason, is sold not for its value—it has none in this case—but for its price. It takes the form of a commodity, but is not itself a commodity—here because it is literally all that remains to the seller when what is truly the “last commodity,” labor-power, now no longer commands any market whatsoever. Contra “Others’ Organs,” there can, in fact, be no “supplement” (par. 34) to the labor theory of value—no more than there can be a “supplement” to the history that produced it and that now seems well on its way to driving it, with what for now at least appear to be the immediate prospect of even more catastrophic social consequences, to its own self-abolition.
     

    Neil Larsen teaches in the Critical Theory and Comparative Literature Programs at UC Davis. He is the author of Modernism and Hegemony (University of Minnesota Press, 1990); Reading North by South (University of Minnesota Press, 1995); and Determinations (Verso, 2001). He lectures and publishes frequently in the areas of Marxian critical theory and Latin American studies.
     

    Endnotes

     
    1. “What is not accounted for in either this understanding of the laborer’s agency or in that of the kidney seller is the dehumanizing force of capitalist logic within the international division of labor. This force devalues these women’s labor and bodies as surplus, indicating the non-essential nature of this labor and of these parts to their lives. This becomes problematic when these situations are compared to others within the division of labor where these elements of life are understood and valued as essential” (Vora par. 24).

     

    2. See Marx, Capital I: “The price-form, however, is not only compatible with the possibility of a quantitative incongruity between magnitude of value and price … but it may also harbour a qualitative contradiction, with the result that the price ceases altogether to express value, despite the fact that money is nothing but the value-form of the commodity. Things which in and for themselves are not commodities, things such as conscience, honour, etc. [and human organs as well? N.L.] can be offered for sale by their holders and thus acquire the form of commodities through their price. Hence a thing can, formally speaking, have a price without having a value” (197).
     

    Works Cited

     

    • Kurz, Robert. Der Kollaps der Modernisierung. Leipzig: Reclam, 1994. Print.
    • Marx, Karl. Capital, Volume I. Trans. Ben Fowkes. London: Penguin, 1992. Print.
    • Postone, Moishe. Time, Labor and Social Domination. New York, London: Cambridge University Press, 1996. Print.

     

  • New Media Critical Homologies

    Brian Lennon (bio)
    Pennsylvania State University
    blennon@psu.edu

    Abstract
     
    New media studies, we might say, has discovered temporality. After fifteen years in which its cultural dominant was presentist prognostication, even a kind of bullying, the field has folded on itself with such new guiding concepts as the “residuality,” the “deep time” or “prehistory,” and the “forensic imagination” of a new media now understood as after all always already new. This essay rereads the legacy of hyperfiction pioneer and demiurge Michael Joyce through Fredric Jameson’s call, twenty years ago, for a “deeper comparison” than new media studies is yet ready to make, even today. It argues that new media studies, as a disturbance in both the practices and production regimes of humanistic discipline, is and always has been best thought less as an emergent field than as a site of such double vision. If we still want to consider Joyce’s work a founding moment in new media literary studies in the U.S., we will have to recognize the radical untimeliness of, and at, that foundation: the extent to which the negativity of Joyce’s secession from this emergent field must be understood not as the end of his influence in it, but in antinomian fashion, as its beginning again.
     

    Ideally perhaps one should, like the novelist, have one’s subject under control, never losing it from sight and constantly aware of its overpowering presence. Fortunately or unfortunately, the historian has not the novelist’s freedom.
     

    –Braudel, The Mediterranean

     

    I.

     
    The computer is one of those swerves in the history of built things that bring whole ways of life to an end–and seldom with the drama with which the first to sense a change often pronounce it. Real change is painfully slow, building to crisis well off the range of dailiness-numbed sense: a pattern of sun and shadow filtering into a room, here illuminating a particular object for no particular reason, there, with precisely the same absence of portent, shrouding another. There are regressions, and some habits and routines left precisely as they were or are, while others vanish or metastasize. Newness covers the old with a creeping patina, in which what will be and what no longer is exchange places and seem to intermingle, at the same time.
     
    New media studies, we might say, has discovered temporality. After fifteen years in which its cultural dominant was presentist prognostication, even–often enough–a kind of bullying, the field has folded on itself with such new guiding concepts as the “residuality,” the “deep time” or “prehistory,” and the “forensic imagination” of a new media now understood as after all always already new.1 This is a more absorbent fold, perhaps, than that embedded in one of the field’s originary figures, “remediation”–a determinedly modern progressive figure, though one whose conceptual plasticity always suggested the possibility, beyond linear reframings, of non-modern medial cycles or folds (see Bolter and Grusin). Without a doubt, it is that depth that sends us searching, now, for a reading of the temporal turn that seems all at once to discard and even undermine the prime rhetoric of a field of study settled in self-establishment. Read symptomatically, there is perhaps more to all of this than the usual need for professional distinction in the field itself, which like any mode of absorption of surplus, needs a manufactured boom and bust, on a regular cycle. To the shaming of the slow, the skeptical, and the selfrespecting who refuse the unfunded mandates of technocratic reactivity, in the New Economic home-classroom-office pod of unrelievedly public life online, new media studies now adds to its figural repertoire a synchronic complement, in the reflection of what the Jameson of the 1970s, writing Marxism and Form, calls the “commodity structure of academic intellectual life” (393).
     
    Were it not for the institutional dynamic of critical desire through which one is forced to embrace what one declines, in order to scale the heights from which to renounce it again, one might have begun there. But what is done is done. With the swap-file virtualities of an endless present suffering stain, again, we might suspect this anachronic return to time, in a new media studies that seems never to have known it at all, of being sensitive, registrative, or even merely, vulgarly reflective of the sociotemporal order-as-disorder of U.S. imperial and global capitalist crisis, as an apparent crisis of progress. To materialist critiques of the disembodiment of information, which corrected the intellective disposition of an early euphoria without doing much to blunt its complacent productivity, one can certainly imagine being attached, now, a materialist critique of the conditions of the critique of disembodiment, itself, in a resource-intensive field of inquiry into disproportionately resource-intensive social behaviors whose future is inseparable from the future of U.S. consumerism–above all, the consumption of energy. Our appetite for the materiality, as much as for the virtuality of new media, is also a form of systems maintenance. One might say that the specter haunting new media studies today is the late imperial “peak energy” spectacle of middle-class U.S. Americans in sweaters, riding their bicycles to work.2
     
    This is no merely elected sentiment. Rather, it marks a disposition that is hidden in plain sight, today, in so far as its material conditions of recognition burden it also with gratuitous blindness. To come to accept the long duration of intellectual history, without which episodic conurbations of research cannot thrive, is to accept the destiny of decline, compressed in Braudel’s formula “All conquests lead to exhaustion” (166). Necessarily, it is to come to permit the presentation of unavoidable, and unavoidably disturbing, questions.3 Let me air only one that comes to my own mind, without suggesting that I imagine my own way of life and work, in the field of new media studies, as in any way immune from its most damaging imputations. That question is this: is it possible that we may have lost literacy, all at once and already, without yet, or without ever, gaining “electracy”?–and that in some unimaginable future, we might be charged with simply getting it back–of retrieving literacy for sheer survival?
     
    I think we can say that we are, at last, officially of two minds on this issue–which is what one of our first leaders, and first seceders, insisted we be. I speak, of course, of hyperfiction pioneer and demiurge Michael Joyce, about whose legacy I will, in what follows, have something I believe is unprecedented to say. But first, we need to ask a second set of questions, comprising the frame for the first, in an inversion that carries with it all the abject cruelty of admission, at last, to the club that one would never want to belong to if it had one for a member, just as it is about to close. That in some ways, literary studies now appears prepared to absorb new media studies, as once upon a time it absorbed (and then purged itself of) cinema and cultural studies, certainly prompts some reflection.4 What can explain our radically untimely embrace, in English studies, of gaming, Second Life, and (naturally) “netlish,”5 along with (at last) the old hyperfiction and ergodic literature, just as global food, energy, and political and environmental security re-enter the second of two major postwar systemic cycles of scarcity–now canonically bound, in the immensely influential world-system historiography of Immanuel Wallerstein, Giovanni Arrighi, and others, to the historically decisive routine decline of empire?6
     
    In comparative literary studies, meanwhile, where something more than cinema is now definitively on the extraliterary agenda (see Andrew and Poster), one wonders why the comparative project, in its essayistic substitution of transitive (and translative) articulation for critical substantiation, should be so eager to seize what it already predicts must elude its (as any) grasp. Hasn’t comparative literature “won its battles,” in dissemination to fields once supremely confident of their objects (Saussy 3)? Isn’t it the unacknowledged legislator of our humanities disciplines today? Why would it go prospecting now, when anticolonial comparative methods and models are firmly entrenched even in departments of English, in the study of peoples without a phone? Hasn’t comparative literature always embraced its own amateurism, anyway, even at its philologically rigorous origin? (Picture once more Erich Auerbach, famously marooned, without a working library, in wartime Istanbul.) At their very best, we might say, all the innovative formations of the last thirty years of literary studies have demanded respect for the indiscipline with which they resisted and lamented the objects of their own disciplinarity: on their radical work of the imagination, finally closer to the mode of production of the literary object, itself, than anyone dared to dream.
     
    In response to the unanswerable question implicit in my opening gambit, here–that of how, and why, new media studies might all at once have “arrived,” and how its arrival takes the form of a temporal loop, cycle, or fold–let me, before proceeding any further, offer something of a frame for the frame. Always, in attempting to look through the reified critical object of a disciplinary research field, we are necessarily attempting to look at the technocratic procedures producing that object. Inasmuch as it can be said to have emerged as such, new media studies, as a disturbance in both the practices and production regimes of humanistic discipline, is and always has been best thought less as an emergent field than as a site of such double vision.7 For this question to be of any use to us, we must frame it critically, in the sense that that term has always carried in the history of Euro-Atlantic philosophical modernity, where it denotes the impossible secular task of structural self-understanding. To confront the question of how something eventally new, for going on at least a decade and a half, can only now have emerged, let us do what comparative criticism is supposed to do, and compare. Let us look, in this case, for new media critical homologies embedding new media literary-critical formations, in a non-selfevident temporal relation, in their historical antecedents. To honor the convention of providing an example, I suggest one such homology in a moment.
     

    II.

     
    During the New Economic 1990s, as new media invaded literary-critical workspace through the portals of the Web, the discrete and combined hazards of deconstruction and cultural studies for autonomous art as manipulable object reawakened in anxieties focused on the ephemerality of critical writing and publishing “on line,” in time and in motion. Such fear of the virtualization of the literary-critical took many forms, of course, from Gutenberg elegies, to new formalisms, to the ballyhooed returns of sincerity, nature, personal voice, affect, pleasure, and any number of other monads said to have been squashed by demoniac posthumanist theory. If the lessons of modernity and postmodernity had already been learned, that only means, perhaps, that routine vulgar dialectics provided the means to affirm what one salvaged, in such operations, without its preening innocence. And yet latent in this double reading of the standing present, we might say, was an entirely accurate sense that matters had already grown very complicated, indeed, in the interanimation of cultural time and critical history–and that it was that complication itself, if anything, that was going to have to be what post-modernization would come to mean. Already, then, what Benjamin, then read to excess, pictured as “an orchid in the land of technology” (“Work” 233)–an impossible palpability, within the impassable virtuality of the film set–at once described and militated against the quest for pre-virtual critical authenticity, not because such quests were hopelessly doomed, but because as the Jameson of the 1990s put it, they offered “the expressive raw material of a deeper comparison” (Postmodernism 301) that needed to be made.
     
    Many of us, in those days, conceived things straightforwardly. We proposed to consider the impact of electronic media–specifically, the document formats or “sites” of the so-called World Wide Web–on United States literature, just for example, at the turn of the twenty-first century: an inquest that took as its narrative flashpoints 1991, the year Jameson completed a provocative U.S.-centrist statement of ephemeralist postmodernism, and 1993, when the appearance of the Mosaic browser began to renegotiate some of the ground terms of publication in the literary arts.8 To the extent that such impact was presupposed and determined, by the question itself, to construct an object-pattern or trace of itself as legible, we might say that it hardly occurred to many involved in this enterprise that it might take the form of erasure before the archival fact. That the secession, not so many epochal years later, of Michael Joyce from the field he was now to set on its feet might in fact proceed from the very logic of that pursuit of the new, rather than obstructing or contravening it.
     
    The proximity of artifactual life to death, in this new field of critical awareness, was underscored by the panic over object stability that followed discovery forthwith, in a radical compression of the purview of antiquarian desire. Such efforts as the Electronic Literature Organization’s Preservation, Archiving, and Dissemination (PAD) project, which registered widespread alarm at the developmental precocity, velocity, and caprice of the new literary artists, were no better prepared to question the mandate for conservancy itself than to uphold it, on a U.S. scene yoked to the startup venture-capitalization of proprietary data file formats and dominated by freelance coders making Web art in their Gleitzeit. The running battle between an art culture producing faster and faster–indeed, living art online (see Breeze)–and a curator culture determined to find careers in it, nevertheless, offered a dramatic update of the antitheses on the avant-garde formulated by Paul Mann around (snail) mail art, earlier in the decade.9
     
    It is clear, in any case, that Jameson’s postmodernism was a vital branch of the storyspace charting the complex relation of the literary art practice of the time to its academic theory, and that it had specifically recursive effects on the relation of art practice to theory and criticism, in its wake. As a publishing medium, the WWW invited U.S. literature to a set of changes that would recursively alter the Web-as-medium without collapsing into it, or expiring within its limits. By 2001, for example, one could speak of an overlap zone populated on the one hand by print poetries radically animated by cybernetics, and on the other by “code poetries” importing and renovating the interpreted conservatism of a lyric tradition.10 Within such a new order of things, Monique Roelofs’s “Zwischenology” was a handy figure for the study of such paradox, overlap, or betweenness, which resisted the easier postures of apocalyptic and utopist futurism. And yet print literature was already being used to augur the ruin of post-print irreality. In the commentary on Bob Perelman’s poem “China” that formed such a controversial sideshow within Postmodernism, for Jameson’s readers working in literary studies, the figure of the poem’s absented referents or unities is used to illuminate what the Jameson of the 1990s calls “the crisis in historicity,” a temporal limit in, of, and to contemporary cultural criticism become a limit-site of postmodernist euphoria in dissolution.11 While for Jameson, the danger lies in the seductions of irreconcilability in situ, his dialectical critic’s characteristic ambivalence pursues a discussion of Perelman’s poem to its peremptory conclusion (or break), which finds Jameson now famously pitting the ephemeral video art of Nam June Paik against the nihilism of a “traditional” poetic poststructuralism enjoined to no longer dare utter its name.
     
    And yet all this is better re-read, in 2009, as a problem of research and temporality, posed by the critical life-span of a “reading” itself, than as a debate over the form (or content) of the curator’s object, now or then. Not least of the durable provocations of Jameson’s project, in Postmodernism as everywhere else, is the tropism of his dialectical prose, which has always invited, and received, many comically speculative and many more ploddingly positivist thetic refutations. Among the alignments in what Gayatri Chakravorty Spivak, in a contemporaneous and complementary stylization, terms “the battle between marxism and deconstruction” (314), the Jameson of Postmodernism is illuminated, on one side, by the novel and generous use he found for the Baudrillardian chiasmus of the simulacrum, and on the other by his doggedly restricted Lukácsian insistence on cognitive mapping. It is from this conjuncture that the new media literalists of the 1990s, stalking auguries of the brave new office, drew their sanctions for reading Jameson, poorly, through a McLuhan read even more poorly, in a mode of reception remarkably alienated from the long intellectual history of a philosophical concept of mediation–and so unable to imagine “virtual reality” as a descriptor of unavoidably abstract critical thought itself. Looking back in counterpoint, it seems that Perelman’s poem suffers, in Jameson’s never less than withering estimation, not only as an artifact of print culture, but in its typicality as a vanguard expression of the avant-garde type, itself; in the Jamesonist typology, the materially practicing poet was the ephemeralist, fixing “joyous intensities” in the self-celebrating play of shallow disjunction (Postmodernism 29), while the video-tracer recovered a “positive concept of relationship” (31) in transient screen flicker.
     
    All along, it was a matter of the relationship between the time of the work and the temporality of criticism itself, in their mutual imbrication, from which no historical materialist can or must dare to retreat. Video, the Jameson of Postmodernism tells us, disembedded us from the fictive phenomenological-subjective time of film and television representation as always already destined for entertainment, re-embedding someone–or something–as dematerialized subject-in-relay with dematerialized object, in the flow of radically neutral (and deadly boring) social-machine time (Postmodernism 76). In the process, it bypassed altogether the blank parody of schizomorphic postmodernism, as a “virtual grab bag” of creatively pure and ahistoric selfpresence, and as a breakdown of temporality itself, in the infinite jest Jameson thinks he discerns, correctly or incorrectly, in Perelman’s “China.” But where that chaff promises enduring diversion, we must, Jameson suggests clearly, rather be prepared to be bored, in order to be critically stimulated at all. If to identify video as the most important and distinctive new artmedium of late capitalism was, then, to arrive on the scene an epoch too late, from the point of view of those needing to promote something new (the World Wide Web as re-remediation), Jameson’s demand for lassitude, in its all the hazard it poses to research productivity at an urgent moment of innovation (none of which, of course, blunted Jameson’s own prodigious output one whit), refused to apologize for that.
     
    From the beginning, Jameson had linked the resistance of Adornian prose style to the simple difficulty of temporality, in his exegesis of negative dialectics as the rescue of philosophy, as of all the object pursuits descended from it, from “a fetishization in time, from the optical illusion of stasis and permanency” (Marxism 58). Such “falling into time” (to reproduce a tropism Jameson extracts, for his purposes, from Barthes writing on Proust) mandates the production of dialectically comparative sentences, whose strength grows “proportionately as the realities linked are distant and distinct from each other” (54)–producing just that “massive failure” affirmed, in Adorno’s project, as a kind of success.
     
    It is here, perhaps, that we can mark a form of reserve in Jameson’s work, through which the more or less gentle criticism Adorno receives, at his hands, rebounds. “No doubt the emphasis on method and on the theory rather than the practice of negative dialectics,” Jameson observes, “risks giving an exaggerated and distorted importance to the moment of failure which is present in all modern thinking: and it is this overemphasis, more than anything else, which seems to me to account for that lack of political commitment with which radical students reproached Adorno at the end of his life” (59). The history of Marxist literary criticism is the history of an advocated interpenetration of (literary?) theory and (literary?) practice, which in Lukács and Jameson, no less than in Adorno, produced nothing more or less than another magisterial scholar-critic, who abandons the primary production of works of literature to that division of labor affirmed as the very price of Marxist modernity–though never without secretly protesting it, again. In an earlier critical review of Jameson’s The Political Unconscious: Narrative as a Socially Symbolic Act (1981), Perelman himself toes this austere, if never ascetic line, observing that “in the arena Jameson is working in, ‘theory writing,’ writers, the producers of the raw material, are a bit dispensable” (175). And who can forget the outburst of Mike Featherstone, protesting in his contribution to the 1989 volume Postmodernism/ Jameson/ Critique that Jameson was “unwilling to become an advocate of the new methods and practice postmodernism in his writings” (129)? For every one of the terrifically prolific critics in Lukács’s direct or indirect line of descent, it is precisely that nonproductive boredom Jameson theorizes that, in so many ways, is really a nonstarter.
     
    Thus it is that Jameson throws into relief, in the nascent new media studies of the epoch of the postmodernism debates, the substantive reifications of the “commodity structure of academic intellectual life” (Marxism 393)–while not escaping from them himself, any more than Adorno might or could have. We might say it is this unbearable distance of cultural criticism from cultural practice that drives the trope of comparison, in Jameson’s work, as the maximal flex of critical discourse to–but never over–the brink of critical silence. To speak, again, of the impact of new media on literature, it might be imagined that cultural opacity or noise, in any such composition of influence, would necessarily grow alongside complex critical transparency or “silence”: indeed, a Jamesonist mind must posit “homologies” between them, structured affinities whose very dynamic consumes something of the tissue of resemblance itself. Here is this thought, as expressed late in Jameson’s “Conclusion: Secondary Elaborations”:
     

    There may also be structural parallels to be established between these new “informational” machineries that are neither basely physical nor “spiritual” in any nineteenth-century sense, and language itself, whose model has become predominant in the postmodern period. On this view it would not be the informationality of the new technology that inspires a meditation on language and spurs people on to the construction of new ideologies centered on it, but rather the structural parallels themselves between two equally material phenomena which equally elude physical representation of the older type.
     

    (Postmodernism 386)

     

    Is it through just such a negative dialectical construction that the disciplinary object of new media studies has to have come at once, now, to embrace disciplinary “information” and noise? For the transpositions, paradoxes and regressions of media to “replace” their remediative linear displacement and (and or) succession, in a kind of noctilucent disturbance that might be understood, now, always to have been underway, if only, suddenly, self-evident? If in 2009 scholarship in literary studies yet evinces precious little of the real possible impact, as one must think it, of new networked and programmable media, is it possible that that is because the structural-historical configurations of print culture and electronic publishing have been mingled–sometimes deliberately, often by chance, in a Babel of avant-garde, epochally middling, and “dead,” dying and spectral media, in a process that no one may regulate, and to which all are accountable?

     
    But one of the consequences of that might be that we would have to learn to learn in two drifts, moving contiguously both forward and backward in time, in that flexion the desire for objects impedes. Indeed, to do that, we will have to accept the unacceptable fortuity that tells us that new media studies might, for those of us most invested in it, always already have come to an end. To get back to where we went back to, then, we must skip forward to the near past.
     

    III.

     
    Last modified on March 3, 2004, the Vassar College faculty Web page of Michael Joyce offers little more than a telegraphic summary of Joyce’s work and teaching, prefaced by a small photograph image of a rock cairn and the statement: “Michael Joyce is no longer maintaining a public web presence.”12 One cannot exactly say that this end of events, and the order of things marked by it, is much of a secret, as by any measure Joyce has, in the years since he thus returned to writing books in print, made his absence as pivotal to new media studies as his presence had been. We might say that the power of such end-punctuation has always rested in its injunction not to exercise one’s hermeneutical training on it–to honor its apparent nihilism as both something more and something less than a simple, baffling “no.” And yet, that the undisputed leader of an emerging field might so decisively step back, on what might have been considered the verge of something like victory, is apparently something of a scandal for new media studies. The wrench that Joyce thus threw into the perpetual motion machine of bureaucratic culture–his implicit demand that we simply stop for a while–is not discussed at any length or in any depth in any peer-reviewed published scholarship on Joyce’s work currently on record.13 That is understandable, of course, given that when I say Joyce implicitly demanded we “stop,” I mean, of course, that he demanded we stop speaking (and writing) with such consensually unadulterable zeal on our topic of choice: an endeavor which, as most every reader of this essay will know–for reasons I will therefore not bother to detail–is structurally impossible.14
     
    All supervisory protestation aside, we scholars, who have been gifted with speech, know that we will always be haunted by those who cannot speak, whether or not we choose to regift or to yield them speech, and even if we do finally just choose to be quiet. The sources of Joyce’s enormously influential work lay in the sociality of a twenty-year career as a writing educator at Jackson Community College in Jackson, Michigan, on the one hand, and in the textuality of the essayist counter-tradition of poststructuralist French feminism, on the other. Joyce went out of his way, in his critical and personal essays, to advance these elective affinities, which describe two of the territories most evenly at odds with the bureaucratic research-intensive regime of the new object for whose sake new media studies, in its self-constitution through Joyce’s work, was embraced. For literary scholars eager at once to seize the object “hyperfiction” and to both subordinate and elevate themselves, in traditional fashion, in the critic’s relation to the writer, the institutionalized activism of writing pedagogy, at the intake valve of the educational system, represented an anonymous form of professional labor conveniently discarded with Joyce’s transition to the more rarefied environ of Vassar. And if a determinedly continental écriture féminine was never wholly marginal to the first-wave U.S. hypertext theory that hitched its critical wagon to Joyce’s writerly star, it was certainly never central, either, at least to the extent that the usual alchemies of Anglo-American import substitution, administered by both masculinist and feminist notaries, transformed its practices and procedures into works and theories. The red thread of Joyce’s life-work might thus be said to traverse a blind spot in the voluminous body of scholarship chronicling it, to the extent that the lesson it leaves for the curator’s habitus has always already, in a way, been unlearned.15 That lesson lies in the capacity of the literary artifact to make counter-claims on the method and form of the criticism literally regarding it: and not because what we call social and historical “context”–a wealth of found or imagined realia–impresses the work, in an emplacement the critic can demand from the research object while tactically bracketing it in her own effort. Rather, in the unavoidably sublimated and so inadmissible homology, or structural affinity, of critical with literary writing itself (which finds departments of English studies, for example, serving today as common homes for dedicated “creative writers,” who create literary objects, dedicated literary scholars, who analyze their creative colleagues’ published products, and dedicated rhetoric and composition scholars, to whom the theory-praxis of writing about writing itself now falls and belongs). To begin to discern the outline of the new media critical homology I am proposing, one would have to look to the theory of the essay as it lives, today, in U.S.-based rhetoric and composition studies, in its constructive intimacy with democratic statism. Simultaneously, and with tolerance for their conflict, one would have to look to its legacy in what Todd May has called “poststructuralist anarchism”–and its afterlife in the early hypertext theory of Joyce’s moment.
     
    To “see” both at once, one would need something like what the compositionist Douglas Hesse, combining concepts from Ricoeur and Heinrich Schenker, calls the Auskomponierung or “composing out” of the essay, as the diachronic prolongation, in sophistic narrative, of the synchronic chord of the scholastic proposition (“Essay Form and Auskomponierung” 292ff). Already, in the very first of the “theoretical narratives” of his book of densely tropological essays, Of Two Minds, Joyce writes in the collective first person of being “too late at the end of something and unable to speak” (1). To write, as Joyce writes, that the book’s “interstitial” documents were not composed from nomadic and iterative detachments, but rather were composed as such Bruchstücke,16 in a form that places them radically at odds with the generic professional self-reproduction constructing a field, is after all only to remind ourselves that fourteen years after the University of Michigan Press published Joyce’s radically essayist multigraph, traditionally peer-reviewed scholarship emerging from literary studies itself into the research field of new media studies, as such, remains scarce.17 That Of Two Minds is a book of critical fragments introduced by a parable reproduced from the author’s unpublished “twenty-some-year old” novel (1) invokes a homology on which I have elaborated elsewhere,18 between the productive activity contained and managed by the term “creative writing” and the act of invention, rather than discovery, constituting a new field of inquiry. That a few pages later Joyce goes on to invoke a “tradition of hypermedia studies” is in turn arguably something of a feint, in so far as the division of labor solicited here is metastasized to the point of failure as division:
     

    We had generally completed the underlying functionality of the [Storyspace] program before we heard the term hypertext or read Ted Nelson’s Literary Machines (1990). Yet from the earliest point in our collaboration we progressively found ourselves in contact with the tradition of hypermedia studies, beginning with Bush and Engelbart and continuing to Nelson. That tradition of scholarship and active collaboration existed as something of an iceberg–or, more aptly, like some huge octopus with only its eye above water but with submerged tentacles reaching almost everywhere around us, including pedagogy, linguistics, cognitive science, literature, physics, database theory, classics, media studies, medicine, and so on. Because it was a tradition concerned with links and interrelationships, it observed no intellectual boundaries.
     

    (32)

     
    A credulous reading of the first two sentences, here, will overlook their excavation by what follows them, the concealed inertia of the iceberg yielding to the life of the disciplinary octopus, itself exceeded and erased in its substantiality by an abstract conceptual image–of the genrecidal impossible possibility, as it were, of a tradition recognizing no bounded corpus or archive or division of labor. Here is the double writing of much of Joyce’s body of work, in its both critical and creative forms, which finds its reception, for the most part, in uncompounded readings: that of the eager scholar-entrepreneur who seizes on the historical trope of discrete continuity (a “tradition”) essential to the institution-building project of discipline, and that of his counterpart for whom that discretion itself, more (or less) than a pragmatically ineluctable, bureaucratic fiction, is the very trace of that disavowal without which such fictions may never come to be.
     
    It was the extrusion of the computer itself, Joyce explains, as a mediator of scholarship that epistemically reframed our “work” on, in, and of knowledge: an event whose meaning lay in the negative critical disturbance of discipline, rather than in the positivized fulfillment of “interdisciplinarity” that it certainly always suggested:
     

    As we appropriated computers to our uses and modeled complex understandings upon a foundation of low-level concerns, we found ourselves in dialogue with others who, though they proceeded from much different disciplines, shared a common process of tool building and intellection with us.
     
    I knew of, and for years had given lip service to, the interdisciplinary nature of my professional life. I had done my work at the Iowa Writers Workshop and so was in touch with a widespread and active artistic and learning community as well the scholarly and critical community that Sherman Paul had introduced me to. I had trained myself as a composition theorist in the line of fire, as chair of a community college English department, and knew that field through research, practice, conferences, and anxiety attacks. Not only did each of these domains interact with one another; they also actively espoused essentially interdisciplinary stances.
     
    Despite all this, the problem was that, if we talked at all, my colleagues and I more often than not spent more time talking among ourselves about interdisciplinary learning than we did putting it into practice.
     

    (32-33)

     

    Read attentively, in 2009, such meditation perhaps displays some of that patina of enigmatically recent age, so disturbing to the temporization of research, to which Nietzsche, writing of the utility and disadvantage of scholarly historiography for life, gave the not entirely translatable term unzeitgemäß. If the narrative through which Joyce appears to construct the fulfillment of interdisciplinary desire in computerization thus seems, in its presentist or futurist naïveté, like something from what Glenn Willmott calls the “junk pile of critical history” (207), that is because, ever the rhetorician, Joyce knows how to declare one thing while suggesting another or, what is another way to put it, how to use language to suggest the difference of language from code, without reducing that insight, itself, to transmission. It is in this respect that, then as now, many of Joyce’s more comfortably technocratic peers and promoters simply have not, and do not, read him.

     
    Through all the periods of the periodizations that followed, from a first generation of link-focused “verbal” hyperfictions received with inflated deconstructive claims, to the structural-functionalist restoration of Espen Aarseth’s Cybertext: Perspectives on Ergodic Literature (1997), to a third wave as yet exposed to reification,19 Joyce’s legacy has perhaps too often turned on readings of his hyperfictions–above all, the inaugural Afternoon, a story–which reconstruct the work implicitly or explicitly as the work of a working artist or writer, demandedly distinct from that of the thinker, critic, theorist, or essayist Joyce always already also was (and is).20 To be sure, such readings have often made good use (if often in precritical fashion) of Joyce’s various declarations of authorial and other forms of procedural intention, as a mode of indulgence of such hyperprofessionalized ethnographic consultation. It is less often that the critic of Afternoon is committed to reading the thinker’s essays in Of Two Minds (just to start with) in determined counterpoint with the writer’s artifact. And never, as far as I can tell, has anyone pondered the modification of that counterpoint, itself, by the self-consciously Bartlebyesque resignation of the intention declared on that very strictly access-controlled and verified means of publication, Joyce’s personal “not at home” page.21 Let me suggest, by way of a kind of testimony, if not an accomplishment of compensation, that if we still want to consider Joyce’s work a founding moment in new media literary studies, in the United States, we have to recognize the radical untimeliness of, and at, that foundation. I mean the extent to which the negativity of Joyce’s secession from this emergent field must be understood not as the end of his influence in it, but in antinomian fashion, as its beginning again.
     
    For the reduction of Joyce to hyperfiction author, in the new media studies scholarship that more or less brackets Joyce’s critical project, is in fact nothing new as a disciplinary gesture; rather, it is a repetition of the founding ruse of literary-critical modernity, in what Clifford Siskin has called “novelism”: the generation, from a heterogenous and yet unified (or combined and uneven) field of writing, of the separate positions of the self-identified critic and her critical object, produced by the writer. In the subordination of writing, a discourse and an institution, to the (fabricated) research object “the novel,” modern disciplinarity in the literary sphere naturalizes writing as mimesis–that is, gives it a job to do, in determined opposition to the radical self-reflexivity of writing as mass professionalization itself, in its capacity simultaneously to expand and to contract the division of intellectual labor. Over and against this “novelism” of U.S. new media literary studies, I am suggesting, Joyce’s work must be read–must be reread–in context of the German and French counterconcretions of what R. Lane Kauffmann and Claire de Obaldia call “Continental essayism,” and which has to be seen as a legacy of the moment of “high theory” and its import substitution in the U.S academy. As a problem of form and of style in the temporizing of the knowledge-object, that legacy, as Jameson observes apropos of Adorno, is nothing if not the incitement to rereading, itself, as juxtapositional comparison, the generation of critical homology:
     

    Such essays are thus the fragments of or footnotes to a totality which never comes into being; and what unites them, I am tempted to say, is less their thematic content than it is on the one hand their style, as a perpetual present in time of the process of dialectical thinking itself, and on the other their basic intellectual coordinates. For what as fragments they share in spite of the dispersal of their raw material is the common historical situation itself … which serves as the framework within which we understand them. To this concrete situation itself the language makes fateful and monitory allusion: the administered world, the institutionalized society, the culture industry, the damaged subject–an image of our historical present which is Adorno’s principal sociological contribution and which yet … is never expressed directly in the form of a thesis. Rather, it intervenes as a series of references to a state of things with which our familiarity is already presupposed …. The mode is that characteristic German sarcasm which may be said to have been Nietzsche’s contribution to the language and in which a constant play of cynical, colloquial expressions holds the disgraced real world at arm’s length, while abstractions and buried conceptual rhymes compare it with the impossible ideal.
     

    (Marxism 52-53)

     

    IV.

     
    The capacious and considered retrospective treatment of Joyce’s Afternoon offered by Matthew G. Kirschenbaum in Mechanisms: New Media and the Forensic Imagination, an ambitious and successful recent attempt to bring U.S.-based new media studies to disciplinary self-consciousness, is a good place to start. Kirschenbaum’s reading, if he would want to call it that, begins with the dramatic historicizing, in a journalistic mode, of Joyce’s conversion from print novelist to hyperfiction writer, upon his seduction by the personal computer as writing tool:
     

    Storyspace was a product of the early 1980s personal computer boom. At the time, Joyce, whose first novel The War Outside of Ireland (1982) had just won a regional literary prize, was interested in exploring what he termed “multiple fictions,” the concept that would eventually be made manifest as “a story that changed with every reading,” the mandate with which Joyce wrote Afternoon. He had become a home computer hobbyist, acquiring first an Apple II and later a Macintosh. Early in January of 1982 (the same year “the computer” would be dubbed Time Magazine‘s “Man of the Year”) Joyce wrote to Howard Becker, a sociologist at Northwestern who had read and admired his first novel and whom Joyce has since characterized as his earliest hypertext supporter. Becker was a self-professed Apple evangelist.
     

    (168-69)

     

    Kirschenbaum’s account ends, meanwhile, not with Joyce’s own authorial closing parenthesis of 2004, under that sepulchral rock cairn, but with an equally moving first-person narrative of Kirschenbaum’s own archival work with the Michael Joyce Papers now housed at the University of Texas. This was singularly temporizing work, involving the emulation of obsolete software environments and other forms of “hacking” at the intersection of what Kirschenbaum distinguishes, in a conceit fundamental to his argument, as “forensic” and “formal” concepts of medial materiality. Fittingly, perhaps, it is the one moment in this industrious and exacting work of structural retrospection when its author yields to the melancholy of the digital archive’s unavoidable juxtaposition of immaterially presentist facilitations with the future anterior dilations of software and bit rot:

     

    The digital objects in the DSpace repository are what are known in the trade as BLOBs, Binary Large OBjects. DSpace knows how to manage both item-level metadata and access to these files, but it does not facilitate the use of them. To actually work with the Afternoons or with any other material it must first be downloaded to the desktop of the Ransom Center’s laptop, where I use what means and know-how I can to make cranky old binaries execute on the up-to-date operating system. Sometimes I am unsuccessful…. At the end of every work day I leave the Ransom Center and cross busy Guadalupe Street to a coffeehouse that offers public WiFi service. I log on and immediately copy and paste my notes into an e-mail message that I send to myself, the bits beamed into the late Austin afternoon to be sprayed across the surface of a hard disk spinning in the silo of a server farm I will never see.
     

    (207-8)

     
    Objects hidden in space and vanished in time are juxtaposed, here, in an analogy for the distinction between forensic and formal materiality (the bit as inscribed, yet only microscopically legible, vs. the bit as manipulable self-present symbol), itself designed to facilitate a procedural intervention in the wayward idealism of new media literary studies, without allowing it much of an answer. To the extent that that distinction informs Kirschenbaum’s approach to Afternoon as an archival object, it includes a pointed demonstration of critical distance from one of the fancies of so-called first-wave hypertext criticism, in a gambit that does more to emplace Kirschenbaum’s study in the dislocations of its own moment than anything else in the book. That fancy is the euphoric identification of electronic writing or textuality, in its play of absence and presence, with the theses of poststructuralist literary and cultural theory, as exemplified in George P. Landow’s landmark 1991 study Hypertext: The Convergence of Contemporary Critical Theory and Technology.
     
    Landow’s book, Kirschenbaum reminds us, was typical in placing Joyce’s Afternoon at its center, as a reunion of the mutually alienated cultures of the writer and critic, as well as a triumphally performative material enactment of antithetic poststructuralist “theories” whose thetically conceived credibility was under assault, then as now, from latter-day Johnsons willing to bruise their toes on the rock of positive common sense to score a point. This untimely “convergence,” which Landow more or less continues to defend in the updates producing Hypertext 2.0 (1997) and Hypertext 3.0 (2006), was right from the start, Kirschenbaum tells us, “oddly out of step with mainstream literary studies,” which had already sloughed off its poststructuralist torment for (a presumably less culpably faddish) cultural studies and the new historicisms (165). But it turns out that the impairment of Hypertext‘s critical modernity, as Kirschenbaum sees it, has another, deeper or wider source, in the “latent Romanticism” of literary studies of which poststructuralist criticism was merely a single convenient symptom, and which Kirschenbaum suggests infected “much of the writing about the experience of reading (or playing) Afternoon” (166).
     
    Aware, for all that, that the period under discussion was not simply a moment of addled hallucination, but a meaningfully different critical-historical conjuncture, Kirschenbaum makes a somewhat cursory nod, in Mechanisms‘ coda, to the simultaneously ethnographic and philosophically critical concept of media appropriate to cultures that still, so to speak, believe in ghosts–or modernities in revolt:
     

    The recovery of the past through objects in the present is our one recourse, besides spiritualism, to satisfying a desire to speak with the dead. Storage, which I have discussed throughout this book, is all about creating a systemized space in which this activity can unfold.
     

    (251)

     

    But Kirschenbaum does not seem all that interested in the negativity of the spectral that was integral to the French poststructuralist teratology of Nietzsche with Freud and Marx, through which we might say the subject of Euro-Atlantic techno-modernity, at a particular criticalhistorical conjuncture, pursued the ethical imagination of the unheard (or the violently silenced) speech in its “dead” peripheries. That, if anything, needs to be taken as the most charitable understanding of the impulse that drove what Kirschenbaum calls “high poststructuralism,” read not for its theses on the administered world of literary criticism, but for the indirection, both modal and stylistic, through which it operated as what the Jameson of the 1970s, himself barely tolerating its challenge to Lukácsian Marxism, calls a “problem of continuity” (Marxism 50).

     
    To be sure, Landow’s exponence of hypertext was characterized by an eagerness to make connections that were always, in his own eyes (and his own words), slightly embarrassing.22 But that is perhaps merely a way of pointing to its roots in a tradition (Jameson’s word) other than, and other to, the Anglo-American tradition in which Kirschenbaum’s own determinedly empiricist work appears to move–and which carries what Jameson calls an “anti-speculative bias,” in the emphasis placed “on the individual fact or item at the expense of the network of relationship in which that item may be embedded.” The liberal positivism of that tradition, Jameson tells us, is characteristically resistant to the forging of fanciful links (Marxism x)–among such ostensibly irreconcilable categories, for example, as a software program and a theory of reading. To this observation, one would perhaps have to add Adorno’s trenchant readings of that chorismos or “block” in the Kantian modernity to which he saw Euro-Atlantic thought as having regressed today–yet which he characterizes, with something more (or less) than uncomplicated hostility, as “what a Romantic artist once named the innermost life of the world” (Kant’s Critique 178). It is no pointlessly arcane disclamation to observe that Jameson’s dialectical thought shares with poststructuralist theory (or whatever we want to call it) a stance inimical to that disavowal of reflexive critical attention that is in some ways implicit in thirdwave new media criticism’s disavowal of its first-wave pro-theoretical naïveté–as it is explicit, perhaps, in a now vast corpus of restorationist work on literary studies “after theory.” Implicit and explicit, we might say, in the disavowal of poststructuralism, is a disavowal above all of the need to read that massive corpus of cultural criticism, grounded in Continental European philosophy and social theory, that was generated in its name–and to read it, so to speak, closely: a term marking not claims for the ontological primacy or exclusivity of texts, but simply the practice of not taking things literally, of thinking twice, looking before one leaps, and so on. All the uncomfortable pauses in textual practice, that is to say, that in truth do interfere in the regimented progress of a properly professional body of work (Joyce’s own irregular and finally negative path to his professional profile today is ample evidence of that). Counterposed with such ritual circumscription, Landow’s inadroit claim for hypertext as the embodiment of literary theory (and later, as the disembodiment of postcoloniality)23 might be described as sincerely enthusiastic.
     
    But Landow’s pronouncements were perhaps never as unreflectively thetic, in the first place, as Kirschenbaum, with others before him, makes them out to be. In the tropisms of those “shocks of recognition,” of those concepts that “cry out for hypertextuality” (Hypertext 3.0 1, 53), one finds not, in fact, the advancement of theses, but rather imagined comparisons between factical and fictional worlds–offered not to falsifiability tests, but to what Elizabeth Bruss, writing in 1982, calls the criterial, rather than evidential ground of argument (44). Indeed, one might say this was the very premise of the now justly famous opening gambit of Hypertext:
     

    When designers of computer software examine the pages of Glas or Of Grammatology, they encounter a digitalized, hypertextual Derrida; and when literary theorists examine Literary Machines, they encounter a deconstructionist or poststructuralist Nelson. These shocks of recognition can occur because over the past several decades literary theory and computer hypertext, apparently unconnected areas of inquiry, have increasingly converged…. A paradigm shift, I suggest, has begun to take place in the writings of Jacques Derrida and Theodor Nelson, Roland Barthes and Andries van Dam. I expect that one name in each pair will be unknown to most of my readers.
     

    (Hypertext 3.0 1)

     

    To be sure, Kirschenbaum’s extended argument for the diachronic remanence of data in inscribed storage, over its static ephemerality in the endless present of screen memory, is a successful corrective of some bad habits in the reception of new media literary artifacts–including what he would call the “medial ideology” of self-evident representation, as marked by the volatile enthusiasm Landow imputes, in this more or less famous passage, to the “encounter” between theory and machine. Quite plausibly, those bad habits were themselves built on bad habits in the Anglo-American literary reception of the endgame of continental European philosophy, as an import substitution scheme and editorial racket the legacies of which have yet to be sorted out coherently even today. Speaking as a literary scholar, writer and humanist partisan who for five years has used a Concurrent Versioning System repository for all of my text production, itself taking the form of document-records simply numbered in time, I was delighted to find in Kirschenbaum’s book a substantive meditation on a problem I had so far been unable to frame for myself with any degree of critical adequacy whatsoever. While checking into my personal CVS repository successive drafts of the essay you are now reading, on this page or screen, I realized why, for reasons Kirschenbaum’s book has helped me think through, that practice of self-archiving has displaced my own previously vigorous interest in “screening” individual new media literary artworks, as a primary mode of “doing” new media studies, in the sense that one “does” one’s work in one’s field.24 It is the cyclic or folded temporality and historicity in critical practice itself, we might say, that goes missing in the acquisitive pursuit of critical objects whose volatility our very profession forces us to undermeasure.

     
    I must admit I am haunted, on the other hand, by the confidence implied by Kirschenbaum’s emphasis on the persistence of data, in the legacies of the inscribing technologies of nineteenth-century Euro-Atlantic imperial modernity–and in the confidence it implies in that modernity as a civilization.25 Among other places, it was precisely in that firstwave hypertext theory, which Kirschenbaum (not without precedent) now proposes we discard, that what we might call poststructuralist essayism “survived,” in the sense of that term familiar to readers of Derrida’s readings of Benjamin’s altogether too famous essay on translation, where it marks the fragile founding twilight of “our” modernity as a guarantor of secular truth. Indeed, this emphasis on continuity seems to sit at some odds with the reaching for figures of cyclic or folded temporality, in some of the more imaginative new work emerging from the field into which the argument of Kirschenbaum’s book is crafted to intervene26–work one can read as embracing a newly self-conscious and justly sensitive form of temporizing attention to its own imperial Euro-Atlantic First Worldism. To its own dependence, that is to say, on wealthdependent (and as such, highly leveraged) habits and levels of energy consumption. If, among its many valuably singular insights, Mechanisms contains one potentially fatal intellectual infelicity, it lies in this emphasis on the remanence of data, deployed against the virtualities of the poststructuralist imagination, at precisely that cultural moment when the permanence of the progressive civilizational legacies of Euro-Atlantic modernity is a question, rather than an answer, for more core subjects of the United States empire than at any time since the 1970s.
     
    In postwar U.S. literary studies at its boldest, anyway, “literarity” has always been understood to include the undisciplined Nietzschean temporality of the event, as well as its Weberian secular avocation. Kirschenbaum glances in this direction, I think, when he concedes that “software is also ineluctably part of a proleptic now” (203), empirically affirming Joyce’s own assertion, in the lines echoing Marx and Engels that Kirschenbaum quotes from Of Two Minds, that “Electronic text appears as dissipate mist” (233). But that assertion, like others in Joyce’s essay into which it is woven, is rhetorical–by which I mean simply that we are forced to find in it the possibility, the certainty, even, that Joyce was and is saying something other than, or in addition to, what he actually wrote. What we call poststructuralist theory, which we would do better to call poststructuralist writing, was not a body of falsifiable propositions, least of all about the positive qualitative ephemerality of anything, including the object “writing.” What we call poststructuralist theory, in its particulate presence in U.S. literary culture, was an intensity of writing practice through which the works of Derrida, Deleuze, and all the other usual suspects served temporarily to reverse the programmatic suppression of rhetoricity in bureaucratic academic modernism. As a committedly literary user of the Concurrent Versioning System whose arborescent constraint Kirschenbaum delicately counterposes with the rhizomorphist euphoria of literary theory,27 let me insist that, all revisionist hopes and dreams notwithstanding, the disciplinary question of what we call “theory” is still very much unsettled. Because as an essayist I set out (with no illusions of freedom) to write rhetorical essays, rather than deliberatively structured text, the hierarchical tree that I cannot escape is something for which I nevertheless have no substantive use. And to speak of archiving, rather than writing, I find little need, in preserving my own work, for the disciplined programmer’s branch invoked by Kirschenbaum against early hypertext theory’s imagined comparisons, which he permits to be marked, in his text, as another form of humanist naïveté. That he claims, on one page of Mechanisms, that the appeal of poststructuralism for new media studies has been “abandoned, or at least … diluted” (43), and on the next that the “medial ideology” it promoted remains entirely intact (45), speaks to the weight that the CVS tree is being made to bear, in the strife of faculties marking Kirschenbaum’s clearing of space for himself in critical history:
     

    From this perspective the poststructuralism that has held sway over discussions of electronic writing since the late 1980s is a demonstrable medial artifact, one that had more to do with its moment (and marketing) than with the fundamental nature of electronic textuality. By contrast, an industrial-strength CVS environment is perhaps the ultimate realization of the kind of document science that has been practiced since the first stemma were printed in 1827 to display the relationships amongst a group of Swedish legal manuscripts.
     

    (201)

     
    To demand, as Kirschenbaum demands, that those who study books also study software, is to make claims on the modernity of literary studies itself, asserting priority for the mechanism and its technical administration (and administrators) at a level that exceeds the modesty, and indeed the genuine appeal, of Kirschenbaum’s proposals for those of his readers already with him in the letter, if in agreement or disagreement in spirit–and rather than not yet there. New media studies has always generated forward momentum through grandiose claims for renovation and threatened consequences for those left (or staying) behind, and while it seems only fair to grant Kirschenbaum’s own theses their own aspect of indirection, it needs to be said that since no “poststructuralist theorist” has ever asserted thetically the ideal rhizomorphism of anything, be that anything textual or nontextual, first-wave hypertext theory cannot credibly be accused of doing that, either, no matter how crudely and schematically some of its individual exponents may have (and have been) read. The critical clout of Kirschenbaum’s intervention pales where its foils are literally spectral, in this sense–a kind of ghost data, or intrasystemic ideal–and where “poststructuralist theory,” the thing he pursues to debunk, eludes him only because it was never there.
     
    Joyce’s sentence “Electronic text appears as dissipate mist” was written in the language of manifesto–which as Janet Lyon observes in her study of the form, “marks the point of impact where the idea of radical egalitarianism runs up against the entrenchment of an ancien régime” (1) and is difficult to read, in so far as “its apparent rhetorical straightforwardness obscures the degree to which the form is embedded in the contradictions of political representation” (2). In its “literally, inexorably, and grindingly absolute” linearity, the genetic CVS architecture that Kirschenbaum mobilizes against the misguidedly rhizomorphist theses of poststructuralist theory (and its hypertext-theoretic avatars) seems in some ways to serve to reproach Landow not only for his bureaucratic First-Worldist left anarchism, but for the still more irredeemable excess of a vision of hypertext as decolonization, as well.28 But it was Edward Said himself who, in the essay that places the anti-systemic form of the essay at the heart of what Said calls “secular criticism,” describes Euro-Atlantic imperial modernity as a product of the inexorably democratic displacement of the natal and vertical filiations of family and culture, by institutions such as the university, whose social character was best figured as agenealogically horizontal (17). To the extent that such “affiliation,” whether conservative (in, e.g., Eliot) or progressive (in Lukács), tends to recreate a “systematic totalizing world-view”–that is, to reinstate, in new form, the authority previously evacuated from genealogical filiation–Said argues that affiliative orders become cultural systems through which university-based intellectuals, for example, lose touch, in time, with “the resistance and the heterogeneity of civil society” (26). Despite the abdication of the genuinely insurrectionary literary theory of the 1960s (Said is no more sympathetic to “poststructuralism” than Jameson), this compensatory cultural system, Said suggests in 1983, is now feeling decisive pressure for the first time, as the dynamic legacy of decolonization replants the world-system’s peripheral regions squarely in front of (and even within) the campus gate. That one looks in vain, in the pages of Mechanisms, for any sense of that pressure, leaves one wondering what has replaced it–and what form its own criticism must take.
     
    An antipositivist might take a page, so to speak, from the double negation of a romantically ironic book on note-taking entitled “How to Make a Complete Map of Every Thought You Think.” That “book” is a freely available PDF document authored by software programmer Lion Kimbro, who advocates the deliberate creation, in note-taking practice, of what, with doomed aspiration to polysyntactic perversity, he calls “imaginary false links.”29 Here is a useful point of convergence–or opposition–between comparative literary-critical practice and new media studies. In the now strategically anachronistic first-wave ephemeralist concept of the differential hyperlink, a liminal interval traversing and demarcating at the same time, one might determine a homology with what Adorno (writing in 1958) calls the essay as form, in which our non-elective capitulation to modernity is balanced by a non-frivolous dream of freedom (“Der Essay”). Is it really too much to say, lending the word all the weight it deserves, that this matters?
     

    Brian Lennon is Assistant Professor of English and Comparative Literature at the Pennsylvania State University. He is the author of In Babel’s Shadow: Multilingual Literatures, Monolingual States, forthcoming in 2010 from the University of Minnesota Press.
     

    Endnotes

     
    1. See, for example, Acland, Funkhouser; Gitelman; Kirschenbaum; Zielinski. In what follows, when I speak of “new media studies,” I am referring to the emergent field defined mostly by scholars working, willingly or unwillingly, in English studies or other national literary studies departments in universities in the United States. That, of course, is a circumscribed referent, which some of the sources just named (Zielinski) may be argued to exceed — but just barely.

     

     
    2. One popular manifestation of this late imperial consciousness can be found in the journalistic fascination greeting Alex Wissner-Gross’s research on the environmental impact of computing infrastructure and activity. See, for example, “Revealed: The Environmental Impact of Google Searches,” The Sunday Times Online, January 11, 2009.

     

     
    3. See Mills: “Certain types of critics… judge work… according to whether or not its conclusions are gloomy or sunshiny, negative or constructive…. Personally, I happen to be a very optimistic type, but I must confess that I have never been able to make up my mind about whether something is so or not in terms of whether or not it leads to good cheer. First, one tries to get it straight, to make an adequate statement — if it is gloomy, too bad; if it leads to hope, fine. In the meantime, to cry for ‘the constructive program’ and ‘the hopeful note’ is often a sign of an incapacity to face facts as they are even when they are decidedly unpleasant — and it is irrelevant to truth or falsity” (78).

     

     
    4. For skeptical readings of the absorption of new media studies by literary studies (which are skeptical in different ways from one another, as well as from my own reading here), see Tabbi; Fitzpatrick.

     

     
    5. On gaming and Second Life, see Jones, The Meaning of Video Games and “Second Life, Video Games, and the Social Text,” PMLA 124.1 (January 2009): 264–272. On “netlish,” see Apter, 239ff.

     

     
    6. See Arrighi, The Long Twentieth Century; Arrighi, Adam Smith in Beijing; Arrighi, “The Winding Paths of Capital”; Wallerstein, The Modern World-System I; Wallerstein, The Decline of American Power. For a recent comprehensive summary of applications of Fernand Braudel’s historical models to literary studies, see Beecroft.

     

     
    7. Hayles’s “autocritography” Writing Machines is arguably one of the few influential recent works in U.S. new media literary studies to renew meaningful contact with this idea — working backward, as it were, from her position as an authority, in the conventional sense, in this field. In some ways, the autobiographical meditation and storytelling that frames the book as a personal critical retrospective — and a kind of “time out” — leads it closer to common cause with the ground impulse of Michael Joyce’s work, as I read it, than anything else recently published by the field’s leaders (with the possible additional exception of Alan Liu’s meditations on “destructive creation” and the negative dialectics of David Golumbia’s The Cultural Logic of Computation).

     

     
    8. Tim Berners-Lee had developed a hypertext GUI (Graphical Use Interface) browser for the NeXT computer in 1990. It wasn’t until 1993, however, that Mosaic (now Netscape) released a browser for Windows PC and Macintosh. In a recent assessment of a second wave (often termed “Web 2.0”) of this revolution, promising (once again) an unprecedented mass of authorship, Lev Manovich has argued that “the explosion of user-created media content on the web (dating from, say, 2005) has unleashed a new media universe” (319).

     

     
    9. Mann, Masocriticism: “Every manifesto, every exhibition, every review, every monograph, every attempt to take up or tear down the banner of the avant-gardes in the critical arena, every attempt to advance the avant-garde’s claims or to put them to rest: no matter what their ideological strategy or stakes, all end up serving the ‘white economy’ of cultural production. It is, finally, circulation alone that matters…. What if there were an avant-garde that was no longer committed to throwing itself on the spears of its enemies but operated in utter secrecy? What if the very history of cultural recuperation led us to imagine that some segment of what had once been the avant-garde must finally have learned from its mistakes and extended its trajectory into silence and invisibility? It might be necessary then to turn that silence and invisibility back against the critical project; it might be necessary to inflict that silence on one’s own discourse and suffer it as a kind of wound” (x, xii). See also Mann, The Theory-Death of the Avant-Garde: “If the death of the avant-garde is its complete representation within the white economy, then one must assume that other projects have realized this and decided to disappear. In the end it is the theoretical condition of this disappearance that poses the greatest challenge” (143).

     

     
    10. See Lennon, “Literature and the Transposition of Media.” On “code poetry,” see Raley.

     

     
    11. See Jameson, Postmodernism, 28ff. For an exhaustive reading of this episode, see Hartley, Textual Politics and the Language Poets.

     

     
    12. See http://faculty.vassar.edu/mijoyce/. Following completion of an abridged first draft of the present essay (in November, 2008), Joyce’s faculty Web page was modified once, on December 26, 2008. Before that date, the page had been unmodified since March 3, 2004, as stated here. As of the date of composition of this endnote (October 28, 2009), Joyce’s page has not been modified again since December 26, 2008. I can think of no better way to point to the epistemological gap produced by the publication-suppressive quality control of peer review and editorial mediation (even, as in the present case, on an unusually and gratifyingly rapid schedule) than to let the original date stand as a mark of the real present tense of this essay, modified by a kind of posthumous temporality: where Joyce could and can edit his personal Web page publication at any (and in real) time, this endnote must stand for the critical invisibility of the present essay during its composition, revision, review, editing, and production for publication. None of this is inevitable: proposals to reverse the order of the entire process, beginning with publication and concluding with peer review, are now part of the administrative mainstream, and collective work-flows approximating this reversed order of priority and labor already exist, in the form of the open access academic journal Philica and the Naboj “dynamical” peer review system for article preprints in physics, mathematics, computer science, and other science areas deposited in the arXiv.org repository hosted and operated by Cornell University.

     

     
    13. In one of a series of generous and thoughtful essays tracking Joyce’s work, Dave Ciccoricco devotes some discussion to what he charmingly terms Joyce’s “Not Home Page” – but (somewhat disingenuously, to judge by his tone) pronounces himself baffled by it, deferring its reception to the uncertified philosophical speculator of the realm of “theory” and the hidebound archivist who presumably defined literary studies (or perhaps history) in its salad days. “Whether he intends to return home,” Ciccoricco writes of Joyce’s withdrawal, “to ‘his storytelling roots’ (as the dust jacket of his recent print novel suggests) or just home for the day is a question best left to amateur prophets; probing his personal motivations, similarly, is best left to the ‘biographiles’.” With that question dispatched as more or less out of bounds, Ciccoricco moves on to discussing at length Joyce’s collaborative work with Mark Bernstein (whose career provides conveniently contrasting institutional-modernist continuity) and conducting an exhaustive dialectical analysis of the demi-concept Contour (capitalized in ironic reification) in hypertext theory. That Ciccoricco’s essay is perfectly, admirably successful at what it sets out to do, need not keep us from marking the detachment with which it begins — which in some ways recalls Kant’s observation, in the Preface to Prolegomena to Any Future Metaphysics That Will Be Able to Present Itself as Science, about liminal questions:
     
    To ask: whether a science is possible, presupposes that the actuality of the science is in doubt. But such a doubt offends everyone whose entire goods and chattels may perhaps consist in this supposed jewel; and hence the person who permits himself to utter this doubt should be prepared for resistance from all sides. Some, proudly conscious of their old and hence supposedly legitimate possession, with their metaphysical compendia in their hand, will look down on him and despise him; others, who nowhere see anything that is not the same as something they have already seen somewhere else, will not understand him; and everything will go on for a time as if nothing had occurred that might give occasion for fear or hope of an imminent change. (64)
     

    14. Anyone working in U.S. academe who is so isolated as to require clarification here might consult two documents: the Report of the MLA Task Force on Evaluating Scholarship for Tenure and Promotion, published in 2006, and Mark Bauerlein’s center-right response, in a report entitled “Professors on the Production Line, Students on Their Own,” produced in 2009 for the conservative American Enterprise Institute’s Future of American Education Project. Both reports attempt to address the structural function of the now entirely indigestible (if not, for that reason, unsustainable) quantity of scholarly publication in the humanities.

     
    15. Indeed, we would do well to read this Joyce’s embrace of silence, within the cultural Kraftfeld he created, in counterpoise with the noise of the other, historical Joyce, who, as Christine Brooke-Rose has put it, “was careful to leave… keys that initiated and continued to feed the immense Joyce industry” (3).

     

     
    16. On Bruchstücke (better translated “broken pieces,” Jacobs argued, than “fragments”), see Jacobs and De Man.

     

     
    17. One might say that new media studies scholars’ engagement of change in the material conditions of production for their own work virtually guarantees its fragmentation by multiple modes, streams, and media forms (both print and electronic journal articles and books, but also electronic resources, genres, and modes of distribution of various kinds — Web sites, blogs, wikis, and so on). This is not just because some of the historically most conservative, and therefore most prestigious print journals in literary studies, for example, have been slow to welcome work in the field. Rather, or also, it is because that dilation itself embodies a sedimented attachment to the artificial scarcity of a print economy and its control mechanisms. (We might say as well that a collective fixation on “quality control,” invoked to justify the competitive suppression of publication in literary and cultural studies — “mistakes” made in which never in fact endanger human life, or any other public resource — seems finally to be facing meaningful challenge, today.)

     

     
    18. See Lennon, “The Essay, in Theory.”

     

     
    19. This periodization follows that of N. Katherine Hayles; see Hayles, 27ff.

     

     
    20. “A self-avowed ‘postmodern classic’,” Kirschenbaum notes, “Afternoon is the single bestknown work of the nascent electronic literary canon. Nearly every serious critic in the field has found occasion to write about it at one time or another” (164).

     

     
    21. The phrase is Ciccoricco’s.

     

     
    22. “Hypertext,” Landow wrote in one of the sentences most often extracted from Hypertext, “creates an almost embarrassingly literal embodiment” of aspects of Barthes’s and Derrida’s theories of reading (Hypertext 3.0 52).

     

     
    23. See Hypertext 3.0, which finds Landow advancing the claim that “Hypertext in its most commonly encountered form, the World Wide Web, provides a particularly important way for the empire to write back” (345).

     

     
    24. See Lennon, “Screening a Digital Visual Poetics.”

     

     
    25. “We live in a time of the forensic imagination,” Kirschenbaum observes in the book’s subtitular passage, “as evidenced by the current vogue for forensic science in television drama and genre fiction. Forensics in this popular sense returns us to the scene of the crime; as a legal and scientific enterprise forensic investigation has its origins in the same nineteenth-century era that produced the great inscribing engines of modernity – the gramophone, film, and the typewriter all among them” (250).

     

     
    26. At this juncture, no one has done more than Alan Liu to articulate a negative dialectics for new media studies, as an emerging field, and to link it, as a form of thought and writing, to what I am calling “essayism.” Apropos of the negativity of critique (and drawing directly on the polemics of Arif Dirlik), Liu observes: “Put in the past tense, such questions concern what Jean-François Lyotard has called the ‘metanarratives’ of progressive humanity and speculative reason that academic historicism once sustained but that now, from the viewpoint of cultural critics, seem just so many empty postures. But it is the present tense of these questions – the sense that they bear on a gigantic ‘now’ inclusive of the Enlightenment and the nineteenth and twentieth centuries together – that cultural criticism has found most compelling. That now is modernity. In the broadest sense, the underlying historical concern of cultural criticism has been modernization, the centuries-long ‘progress’ of rationalization, routinization, institutionalization, organization building, and empire building (with their attendant political, market, and media effects) engineered by post-Enlightenment industrial societies. Cultural criticism is the critique by disjunction of such progress” (5). The temporality of what Liu calls “academic historicism,” here, needs supplementing or supplanting by the temporalities of an imagined or comparative historicity: “Where once the job of literature and the arts was creativity, now, in an age of total innovation, I think it must be history. That is to say, it must be a special, dark kind of history. The creative arts as cultural criticism (and vice versa) must be the history not of things created – the great, auratic artifacts treasured by a conservative or curatorial history – but of things destroyed in the name of creation” (8).
     
    To the extent that it builds on the critiques elaborated in such essays as “Dark Continents: Critique of Internet Metageographies” and “Of Bugs and Rats: Cyber-Cleanliness, Cyber-Squalor, and the Fantasy-Spaces of Informational Globalization,” caps a productive deviation from narrowly conceived new media studies as such, and evidences the complex long duration of a personal intellectual history, Terry Harpold’s recent Ex-foliations: Reading Machines and the Upgrade Path presents a meditation on Joyce’s Afternoon (pp. 175ff.), among other objects of the disciplinary temporality of new media studies, that is very much in the spirit of my own thinking, here. I thank an anonymous reader for Postmodern Culture for encouraging me to consult this last work, which reminded me of the influence Harpold’s polemical interventions, at the very end of the 1990s, had on my own formation at that altogether earlier stage.

     

     
    27. See Mechanisms: “The textual practices embodied by a CVS stand in marked contrast to the ‘version’ of electronic textuality that is perhaps better known in literary and artistic circles, largely as a result of first-wave hypertext theory. At no time is this more obvious than when comparing the figures of the tree – the basic data structure of any versioning system – and the rhizome, or network. That Storyspace embodied both from the start is no surprise, given that it was also intended to support a rudimentary versioning system for its authors…. The same story spaces that modeled evanescent postmodern theory, in other words, could also, at least in principle, be made to enforce just the kind of versioning protocols that were then emerging in the software development industry” (206).

     

     
    28. See Hypertext 3.0: “The chief value of placing these essays online is simply that Zimbabweans can speak – or rather, write – for themselves rather than having critics from the [sic] Europe, the United Kingdom, and the United States write for them” (346).

     

     
    29. See Kimbro, How to Make a Complete Map of Every Thought You Think: “TOLERATE ERRORS. If this is hard for you, start fucking things up by attaching imaginary false links in one place (I guess). Start making up links that go to creatively unrelated places” (PDF version, 84).
     

    Works Cited

       

     

    • Aarseth, Espen. Cybertext: Perspectives on Ergodic Literature. Baltimore: Johns Hopkins University Press, 1997. Print.
    • Acland, Charles, ed. Residual Media. Minneapolis: University of Minnesota Press, 2007. Print.
    • Adorno, Theodor W. “Der Essay als Form.” Gesammelte Schriften II: Noten zur Literatur. Ed. Rolf Tiedemann. 1958; Frankfurt am Main: Suhrkamp Verlag, 1996. 9-33. Print.
    • —. Kant’s Critique of Pure Reason. Ed. Rolf Tiedemann. Trans. Rodney Livingstone. Stanford: Stanford University Press, 2001. Print.
    • Andrew, Dudley. “The Core and the Flow of Film Studies.” Critical Inquiry 35 (Summer 2009): 879-915. Print.
    • [CrossRef]
    • Apter, Emily. The Translation Zone: A New Comparative Literature. Princeton University Press, 2006. Print.
    • Arrighi, Giovanni. Adam Smith in Beijing: Lineages of the Twenty-First Century. New York: Verso, 2007. Print.
    • —. The Long Twentieth Century: Money, Power, and the Origins of Our Times. New York: Verso, 1994. Print.
    • —. “The Winding Paths of Capital: Interview by David Harvey.” New Left Review 56 (March-April 2009): 61-94. Print.
    • Beecroft, Alexander. “World Literature without a Hyphen: Towards a Typology of Literary Systems.” New Left Review 54 (November-December 2008): 87-100. Print.
    • Benjamin, Walter. “Die Aufgabe des Übersetzers.” Gesammelte Schriften IV. Frankfurt am Main: Suhrkamp Verlag, 1972. 11-21. Print.
    • —. “The Task of the Translator.” Selected Writings Volume 1, 1913-1926. Ed. Michael W. Jennings & Marcus Bullock. Trans. Harry Zohn. Cambridge, MA: Belknap Press of Harvard University Press, 1996. 253-264. Print.
    • —. “The Work of Art in the Age of Mechanical Reproduction.” Illuminations. Trans. Harry Zohn. New York: Schocken Books, 1968. 217-251. Print.
    • Bolter, J. David, and Richard A. Grusin. Remediation: Understanding New Media. Cambridge, MA: MIT Press, 2000. Print.
    • Braudel, Fernand. The Mediterranean and the Mediterranean World in the Age of Philip II, Volume I. Trans. Siân Reynolds. Berkeley: University of California Press, 1995. Print.
    • Breeze, Mez. “Inappropriate Format][ing][: Craft-Orientation vs. Networked Content[s].” Journal of Digital Information 3.3 (January 2003). Web.
    • Brooke-Rose, Christine. The Christine Brooke-Rose Omnibus. Manchester, UK and New York: Carcanet, 1986. Print.
    • Bruss, Elizabeth. Beautiful Theories: The Spectacle of Discourse in Contemporary Criticism. Baltimore: Johns Hopkins University Press, 1982. Print.
    • Ciccoricco, Dave. “The Contour of a Contour.” electronic book review, June 13, 2003. Web.
    • De Man, Paul. “‘Conclusions’: Walter Benjamin’s ‘The Task of the Translator’.” Yale French Studies 69 (1985): 25-46. Print.
    • Featherstone, Mike. “Postmodernism, Cultural Change, and Social Practice.” Postmodernism, Jameson, Critique. Ed. Douglas Kellner. Washington, DC: Maisonneuve, 1989. 117-138. Print.
    • Fitzpatrick, Kathleen. “Media Studies and Literary Studies.” Planned Obsolescence, February 13, 2009. Web.
    • Funkhouser, Chris. Prehistoric Digital Poetry: An Archaeology of Forms, 1959-1995. Tuscaloosa: University of Alabama Press, 2007. Print.
    • Gitelman, Lisa. Always Already New: Media, History and the Data of Culture. Cambridge, MA: MIT Press, 2006. Print.
    • Harpold, Terry. “Dark Continents: Critique of Internet Metageographies.” Postmodern Culture 9.2 (1999). Web.
    • . Ex-foliations: Reading Machines and the Upgrade Path. Minneapolis: University of Minnesota Press, 2008. Print.
    • Hartley, George. Textual Politics and the Language Poets. Bloomington and Indianapolis: Indiana University Press, 1989. Print.
    • Hayles, N. Katherine. Writing Machines. Cambridge, MA: MIT Press, 2002. Print.
    • Hesse, Douglas. “Essay Form and Auskomponierung.” Essays on the Essay. Ed. Alexander Butrym. Athens: University of Georgia Press, 1990. 289-306. Print.
    • Jacobs, Carol. “The Monstrosity of Translation.” Modern Language Notes 90 (1975): 755-766. Print.
    • Jameson, Fredric. Marxism and Form: Twentieth-Century Dialectical Theories of Literature. Princeton, N.J.: Princeton University Press, 1972. Print.
    • —. Postmodernism, or, The Cultural Logic of Late Capitalism. Durham: Duke University Press, 1991. Print.
    • Jones, Steven. The Meaning of Video Games: Gaming and Textual Strategies. New York: Routledge, 2008. Print.
    • —. “Second Life, Video Games, and the Social Text,” PMLA 124.1 (January 2009): 264-272. Print.
    • [CrossRef]
    • Joyce, Michael. Afternoon, a story. Cambridge, MA: Eastgate Systems, 1990. CD-ROM.
    • —. Of Two Minds: Hypertext Pedagogy and Poetics. Ann Arbor: University of Michigan Press, 1995. Print.
    • Kant, Immanuel. Prolegomena to Any Future Metaphysics. Ed. Günter Zöller. Oxford: Oxford University Press, 2003. Print.
    • Kauffmann, R. Lane. “The Skewed Path: Essaying as Un-methodical Method.” Diogenes 143 (1988): 66-92. Print.
    • Kimbro, Lion. How to Make a Complete Map of Every Thought You Think. Lion’s Den. 2003. Web.
    • Kirschenbaum, Matthew G. Mechanisms: New Media and the Forensic Imagination. Cambridge, MA: MIT Press, 2008. Print.
    • Landow, George P. Hypertext: The Convergence of Contemporary Critical Theory and Technology. Baltimore: Johns Hopkins University Press, 1992. Print.
    • —. Hypertext 2.0. Rev., amplified ed. Baltimore: Johns Hopkins University Press, 1997. Print.
    • —. Hypertext 3.0: Critical Theory and New Media in an Era of Globalization. 3rd ed. Baltimore: Johns Hopkins University Press, 2006. Print.
    • Lennon, Brian. “The Essay, in Theory.” Diacritics 38.3 (Fall 2008). Print.
    • [Project MUSE]
    • —. “Literature and the Transposition of Media.” American Letters & Commentary 12 (2000): 72-76. Print.
    • —. “Screening a Digital Visual Poetics.” Configurations 8.1 (Winter 2000): 63-85. Print.
    • [Project MUSE]
    • Liu, Alan. The Laws of Cool: Knowledge Work and the Culture of Information. Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 2004. Print.
    • Lyon, Janet. Manifestoes: Provocations of the Modern. Ithaca: Cornell University Press, 1999.
    • Mann, Paul. Masocriticism. Albany, NY: SUNY Press, 1999. Print.
    • —. The Theory-Death of the Avant-Garde. Bloomington and Indianapolis: Indiana University Press, 1991. Print.
    • Manovich, Lev. “The Practice of Everyday (Media) Life: From Mass Consumption to Mass Cultural Production?” Critical Inquiry 35.2 (2009): 319-331. Print.
    • May, Todd. The Political Philosophy of Poststructuralist Anarchism. University Park: Pennsylvania State University Press, 1994. Print.
    • Mills, C. Wright. “Types of Practicality.” The Sociological Imagination. New York: Oxford University Press, 2000. 76-99. Print.
    • Obaldia, Claire de. The Essayistic Spirit: Literature, Modern Criticism, and the Essay. Oxford, New York: Clarendon Press, Oxford University Press, 1995. Print.
    • Perelman, Bob. “Exchangeable Frames.” Poetics Journal 5 (May 1985): 168-176. Print.
    • Poster, Mark. “Global Media and Culture.” New Literary History 39.3 (2009): 685-703. Print.
    • [Project MUSE]
    • Roelofs, Monique. “From Intervention to Zwischenology. With love to Wolfgang, Bey, and Lucille.” Nettime, February 6, 2000. Web.
    • Said, Edward. The World, the Text, and the Critic. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press, 1983. Print.
    • Saussy, Haun. “Exquisite Cadavers Stitched from Fresh Nightmares: Of Memes, Hives, and Selfish Genes.” Comparative Literature in an Age of Globalization. Ed. Haun Saussy. Baltimore, MD: Johns Hopkins University Press, 2006. Print.
    • Siskin, Clifford. “The Rise of Novelism.” Cultural Institutions of the Novel. Ed. Deidre Lynch & William B. Warner. Duke University Press, 1996. 423-440. Print.
    • Spivak, Gayatri Chakravorty. A Critique of Postcolonial Reason: Toward a History of the Vanishing Present. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press, 1999. Print.
    • Tabbi, Joseph. “Locating the Literary in New Media.” Contemporary Literature 49.2 (2008): 311-331. Print.
    • [Project MUSE]
    • Wallerstein, Immanuel. The Decline of American Power: The U.S. in a Chaotic World. New York: New Press, 2003. Print.
    • —. The Modern World System, Vol. 1: Capitalist Agriculture and the Origins of the European World-Economy in the Sixteenth Century. New York: Academic Press, 1974. Print.
    • Willmott, Glenn. McLuhan, or Modernism in Reverse. Toronto, Buffalo, and London: University of Toronto Press, 1996. Print.
    • Zielinski, Siegfried. Deep Time of the Media: Toward an Archaeology of Hearing and Seeing by Technical Means. Cambridge, MA: MIT Press, 2006. Print.

     

  • Irreducible Vagueness: Mixed Worlding in Diller & Scofidio’s Blur Building

    Ulrik Ekman (bio)
    University of Copenhagen
    ekman@hum.ku.dk

    Abstract
     
    This article argues that Blur Building, Diller & Scofidio’s architectural project for the Swiss Expo 2002, demonstrated performatively and interactively how contemporary worldmaking involves cultural and technological invention and construction both, implying our cultural co-evolution with ubiquitous computing and media such that “worlding” must today be approached and approximated as a question of realities that mix virtuality and actuality. This article not only touches upon the actual inventions produced in this project–with its atmospheric architecture of tensegrity structures, its vast artifactual mist-cloud, its bio-genetic pumping system, its smart weather system, and its complex systems for ubicomp surveillance and wearable computing–but also goes on to problematize the implications of mixed realities for existing notions of practical contextuality or the “life world.” Specifically, it is argued that mixed worlding in an epoch of calm ubiquitous computing necessarily confronts us with a lived experience (Erlebnis) of embodiment whose irreducible vagueness stems from a transduction of the imperceptible and the unimaginable, i.e., from a being-among in originary tactility as that which affects and animates us and remains structurally earlier than or ahead of any commonsensical hermeneutic horizon of conscious, linguistic, or discursive meaning.
     

    Before the End of the World

     
    American artist-architects Diller & Scofidio and Team Extasia presented their Blur Building as a media pavilion for the World Fair or Expo in 2002, on Lake Neuchatel in Yverdon-les-Bains, Switzerland. Its participation in this kind of event situates the Blur Building in the modern world, as belonging to the modern epoch. But after three and a half years of extensive preparations, constructions, and tests, this project managed to interrogate any environment–built, controlled, artifactual–including the climate, as well as the predominantly visual, cognitively mapped, and perceptually oriented culture that surrounds us today. The Blur Building produces different spacing and temporality from those of the modern world, hovering uncertainly at the limit or at the end of the world (as we know it). Doubtlessly, this renewed questioning of the limits of our world and time is intimately related to the fact that Diller & Scofidio were quick, among architects, to embrace the potential for alternative productions of presence found in 21st century information technology and new forms of electronic mediation. Notably, in opening a blurred, mixed world in the era of globalization, Diller & Scofidio both affirm and develop Fredric Jameson’s earlier diagnosis of postmodernism as predominantly synchronic and spatial. It is perhaps in the realm of architecture qua living space that modifications of cultural and aesthetic production make themselves felt most dramatically–not least by problematizing modernist distinctions between high and low culture, as well as by a more populist shaping and sharing of the multiplicitous surfaces of our milieu or world (Jameson 189, 200). As an open-ended becoming of mixed reality, the Blur Building takes on “the new machine” of a hyperspatial postmodernism of surfaces, along with the imperative from new architecture “to grow new organs, to expand our sensorium and our body to some new, as yet unimaginable, perhaps ultimately impossible, dimensions” (Jameson 219).
     
    However, the Blur Building also leaps forward to overtake more recent developments in architecture, as well as in IT and new media, including those pertaining to the thoroughly distributed, networked, and embedded multitudes of computational entities in ubiquitous computing. In this way, the installation project approaches a ubiquity of what I am calling mixed presencing (new modes of technological and mediatory production of our life form) as an informative principle of work that leads to a certain displacement and deferral of the existing demarcations of our world. The Blur Building embraces a virtual and computational architecture for ubiquity and seeks its actualization in various combinations or mixes, so that architecture, along with life itself, mediates and negotiates habitable spaces, each unfolding as very provisional “solutions” to the problem of how to inhabit space bodily with others. Diller & Scofidio’s architecture attempts to further negotiate the problem of spatialization that life poses to bodies, a negotiation that opens itself to “the movements of time and becoming” (see Grosz 148). The Blur Building thus places itself experimentally and virtuactually among current research and artistic productions involving IT and new media. If the Blur Building moves towards “the end of the world,” this is because it follows the strong interest in virtuality in the 1990s and the exploration of more radically actual modes of tele-presence beginning in the mid-90s. Diller & Scofidio’s project bespeaks a slow reontologizing of these fields today, which one might call an immanentizing physical turn or a movement towards the encounter of bits and atoms, as Hiroshi Ishii and Brygg Ullmer would have it.1 This project might well be described as a turn towards mixed worlding, understood as a dynamic ecotechnics liable to sense. Alternately, one might call it a turn towards technologized worlding qua a virtualization of the physical, but this would emphatically concern those whose actualization of technics facilitates embodied relations and interactions of the end of the world.
     

     
    BLUR, Yverdon-les-Bains. 4 Mar. 2002. Image © Yves André (www.yves-andre.ch). Photo courtesy of Diller Scofidio + Renfro. Used by permission.

     

    Click for larger view

    Fig. 1.

    BLUR, Yverdon-les-Bains. 4 Mar. 2002. Image © Yves André (www.yves-andre.ch). Photo courtesy of Diller Scofidio + Renfro. Used by permission.

     

     

    1. Of the End of the World I – Mixed Reality and the Embeddedness of Ubiquitous Computing

     

    … we are not intending to make a volume of space covered with fog. We intend to make a building of fog with integrated media. –Diller and Scofidio, Blur: The Making of Nothing 39.

     
    Diller & Scofidio and their team oversaw years of projective planning and invention while working on the Blur Building, which had a nebulous impact on its visitor-inhabitants, – not least because of the complexity and dynamics of its vast, artifactual mist-cloud.2 Only after the initial design period were the architects confronted with the many obstacles involved in the actual construction and installation of this contribution to the Swiss Expo. In between inventive projection and actualization, several creative initiatives were abandoned. Unfortunately, then, the final building included neither an LED text forest of vertical panels with scrolling text (from Internet feeds or from artist Jenny Holzer), nor a Hole in the Water restaurant made of submerged twin glass cylinders with an aquarium layer in between, in which diners would sit at eye level with the lake and eat sushi. Nor did we get an open air Angel Bar on top of the building’s mist cloud (to be served: a great variety of water beverages, from glacial tappings to municipal waters from around the world) (Diller and Scofidio, Blur 100-111, 146-155, 163, 324). Nevertheless, the opening of the Blur Building in 2002 was provocative and transformative enough to present us with the end of the world, to put it pointedly. But why should one approach the Blur Building as a question of the end of the world?3
     

     
    Photo courtesy of Diller Scofidio + Renfro. Used by permission.

     

    Click for larger view

    Fig. 2.

    Photo courtesy of Diller Scofidio + Renfro. Used by permission.

     

     
    Blur is of the end of the world because, as an exemplary artistic-architectural project, it involves new media and information technology in ways various and extensive enough so as to begin to problematize any strict distinction between a given sense of the world and what one might call contemporary ecotechnics. Ecotechnics here designates the almost sovereign capacity of current information technology to perform calculative operations by the quantifiable means that pervade globalized culture, cosmopolitan democratic values, a sociocultural sense of community, and embodied attempts to delineate the world as an already meaningful environment.4 For any one visitor-inhabitant of the Blur Building, then, the body as the spacing or sharing out of sense emerges as the place of that originary relation of technicity, at work both in the presencing of bodies and in the way we disclose a world. The relation of bodily sense to the ecotechnical apparatus informs the way the world of Blur may come to seem meaningful to us. It is pervasive and originary technicity, the manner in which you are connected, which delineates your mode of existence and your experience or constitution of world-hood. If Blur affirms this originary technicity at stake in the world-hood of the world, it is without positing technology as a substantial fixed origin or a projected finality. Rather, it is a matter of worlding in radical finitude, that is, the event of the emergence of the world in the absence of a solid ground or a determinable end.5 As Jean-Luc Nancy formulates it, “[e]cotechnics … substitutes projections of linear history and of final goals with local differences and multiple bifurcations. Ecotechnics deconstructs the system of ends, it renders them nonsystematizable and nonorganic” (Corpus 78; my translation). To experience Blur as an event of worlding, we depend upon that sharing out of embodied sense that takes place as a technical-mechanical relation between material bodies, partes extra partes, or as a delineation of material bodies in a contact-separation, a touching-letting go, of sense and matter. When inhabiting Blur one would have to concede, with Nancy, that our world is of the ecotechnical that marks out our bodies, lets them proliferate, and plugs us in a multitude of directions:
     

    Our world is the world of “technical,” the world whose cosmos, nature, gods, whose system, complete in its intimate jointure, are exposed as “technical”: the world of an ecotechnics. Ecotechnics functions with technical apparatus, with which it connects us in all directions. But what it makes is our bodies, which it puts into the world and connects to its system, our bodies, which in this way it creates as more visible, more proliferating, more polymorphous, more pressed together, more in “masses” and “zones” than they have ever been.
     

    (Corpus 77-78; my translation)

     
    Diller & Scofidio’s building project, its pursuit of ecotechnics, and its polymorphous zoning of bodies participate in a time when the third main wave of computing is emerging, a movement which both partly sidesteps and goes beyond the earlier developments of mainframes, desktops, laptops, and their stable networked infrastructure. Their work does not so much reflect what is currently happening on the large infrastructural scale (where the speed and data-capacity of grid computing promises to enhance and gradually replace the Internet),6 nor the scale of supercomputing (where quantum computing is still under development),7 nor the microscale of biomedia and nanotechnology.8 Rather, the Blur Building inserts itself in the middle, into a context marked by research in and the actual installation of pervasive or ubiquitous computing. This kind of computing–marked by the deployment of multitudes of relatively inexpensive, mobile, wireless, and relatively intelligent machines–is flexible, complex, and massive enough to warrant speaking of a technicity whose sensors and actants not only pervade the human life world, but become almost indistinguishable from the environment or the world as such (Umwelt).9 Whether in terms of spacing or of temporal unfolding, Diller & Scofidio’s project presents a mutual overlaying of the world and technics that arise from a transductive relation, that is, when both the world and technics appear in their co-implication on the basis of their more primary individuating relation.10
     
    Consequently, the Blur Building is of the end of the world to the extent that here “the world” does not have or display a pregiven sense. Rather, a sense of the world emerges as it undergoes a vague transformation via the movement of this project, whose overlaying and combination of ubiquitous computing and existential worlding paves the way for a mixed reality.11 For Diller & Scofidio, an augmented and mixed reality emerges as our problematic of temporalization and spacing in the first decade of a young millennium. Here ubiquitous computing poses as the concrete technical way to approach a decidedly mixed reality where virtuality and actuality are combined to such a degree that one is not readily separable or distinguishable from the other. It should be pointed out, then, that upon encountering the Blur Building we sense a complex set of relations between a real physical world and the potential generated via virtualizations, something that compels us to wonder whether their mutual overlays and interlacing interfaces constitute and transform our experiential reality. The world of the Blur Building does not display a given sense precisely because it comes into presence as a mixed worlding where actuality and virtuality (of phusis and techné both) are superimposed upon and mixed with each other. In Blur the physical and the virtual cannot immediately be distinguished or even made into objects of awareness. Thus we must consider the question of an invisible, vague, unnoticeable, and typically pre-conscious combinatoire of interminglings in real time and in a three-dimensional world space.
     
    This mixing of world and ubiquitous computing, actuality and virtuality, constitutes the enigma of Diller & Scofidio’s project insofar as virtuality is largely embedded before awareness and to the point of invisibility. A chief characteristic of ubiquitous computing is its efforts to proceed towards pure immanence or strict embeddedness in the world. Approached from that angle, one might say that the vagueness, apparent invisibility, enigma, or secrecy of Blur as mixed worlding increases alongside the inhabitants’ inability to become aware of these characteristics, to the degree that it pursues the ideal goal of embeddedness that Mark Weiser and others at the Palo Alto Research Center (PARC) set up for “calm computing”:
     

    We wanted to put computing back in its place, to reposition it into the environmental background, to concentrate on human-to-human interfaces and less on human-to-computer ones …. In the end, ubi-comp created a new field of computer science, one that speculated on a physical world richly and invisibly interwoven with sensors, actuators, displays, and computational elements, embedded seamlessly in the everyday objects of our lives and connected through a continuous network …. [We] have begun to speak of calm computing as the goal, describing the desired state of mind of the user, as opposed to the hardware configuration of the computer. Just as a good, well-balanced hammer “disappears” in the hands of a carpenter and allows him or her to concentrate on the big picture, we hope that computers can participate in a similar magic disappearing act.
     

    (Weiser, Gold, and Brown)

     
    The Blur Building, as a mix of the world involving calm, ubiquitous computing, performs a series of more or less complete disappearing acts, a whole flock of moves towards a more or less pure immanence which our modes of embodiment and sense encounter as so many variants of a vagueness that comes to seem irreducible.12
     

    2. Of the End of the World II – Blurring the Given Worldview

     

    The complete critique is perhaps not one that aims at totality (as does le regard surplombant) nor that which aims at intimacy (as does identifying intuition); it is the look that knows how to demand, in their turn, distance and intimacy, knowing in advance that the truth lies not in one or the other attempt, but in the movement that passes indefatigably from one to the other. One must desire that double excess where the look is always near to losing all its powers. –Starobinski 52 (my translation)
     
    … Diller & Scofidio have concentrated on the undefined. It is almost as if they are reacting against their own desire to control and produce recognizable images, places, and objects by creating works in which one is never quite certain what one is seeing. –Betsky, “Display Engineers” 35.

     
    Of the several immanentizing moves at stake in the mixed worlding of the Blur Building, perhaps the most noticeable one is the disturbance, blurring, or bringing down of world-vision. The mist-cloud, the biogenetic pumping system at the Expo site lakeshore, and the smart weather system embedded in the building are the most obvious generators of a new immanentism because they disrupt the obvious: they impinge on and disturb our cultural and bodily habits of privileging the obvious, most notably our continuous foregrounding of vision and its alleged clarity of sense. Extremely aware that their project found itself inserted in the context of a World Fair, information technology, and cosmopolitanism, Diller & Scofidio intended for their building to become a counter-strategy to the predominant access to the world via visual appropriation and an assured world-view.
     

     
    Image © 2002 Beat Widmer. (www.beatwidmer.ch). Photo courtesy of Diller Scofidio + Renfro. Used by permission.

     

    Click for larger view

    Fig. 3.

    Image © 2002 Beat Widmer. (www.beatwidmer.ch). Photo courtesy of Diller Scofidio + Renfro. Used by permission.

     

     
    One might say that in its immanentizing problematization of an assured, meaningful Weltbild, the Blur Building engages in a wider exploration of the phenomenology of the senses, an exploration that circumvents what Hans Jonas has calls “the nobility of sight.” Therefore what is at stake here is not so much another hailing of vision as the most excellent sense, nor the pursuit of theoria as the noblest activity of the mind, which is also traditionally described primarily in visual metaphors. Rather, the building involves a certain experimentation with the supports or supplements of vision, i.e., with the other senses, sensation in general, as well as “the more vulgar modes of commerce with the importunity of things” (Jonas 136). To that extent, mixed worlding cannot but blur the three main characteristics of the image-performance unique to sight. The Blur Building resists having its presentation of a sensate manifold yield to simultaneity; the causality of sense-affection insists on its non-neutrality; and it will remain difficult, if not impossible, to achieve a proper, objectifying distance in the spatial and cognitive mental senses. In other words, Diller & Scofidio’s counter-strategy very much brings a different sort of attention to vision, while in the process making felt the otherwise forgotten or suppressed, but all the more originary, need for complementation from the other senses and from the motility of our bodies (Jonas 152). Thus, blurring here implies a movement towards an embodiment of the forces at play within differentiated and distributed sensation.13
     

     
    Photo courtesy of Diller Scofidio + Renfro. Used by permission.

     

    Click for larger view

    Fig. 4.

    Photo courtesy of Diller Scofidio + Renfro. Used by permission.

     

     
    More specifically, the Blur Building is of the end of the world on any general, grand scale of viewing, because of its trans-immanent resistance to becoming part of a tourism dominated by spectacular sights and attractions, an official set of scenic views, image expectations as “good” photo opportunities, and a certain scopic control granted to the “sightseer” (Diller and Scofidio, “SuitCase Studies” 42-44). This artifactual architectural installation refuses to be primarily a visual cultural object for consumption in the experience-economy of today, just as it problematizes in quite ironic ways any God’s- or eagle-eye view of the world from above. As the architects themselves state in an interview:
     

    We knew right away that we wanted to use the touristic setting as a foil. We realized we could use the lake water to problematize vision, to get in the way of the lake view. We also wanted to produce an anti-heroic architecture in the form of a special effect, an atmosphere. It was a reaction to the new orthodoxy of high-definition and simulation technologies. We wanted to create a low-definition space, a blur.
     

    (Anderson 147)

     

    If there is any view of the world involved in this lo-fi world-spacing, or that participates in a clear vision of the sense of the world, this view is minimized place-wise and remains a delayed and deferred epiphenomenon, such as the one that takes place on the Angel Deck, which hovers uncertainly above the more primary, extensive, and chaotically dynamic mistclouds down here, and which all inhabitants of this fuzzy mixed world must traverse first and last. Diller & Scofidio’s alternative engagement with the commodification of vision by globalized tourism might well lead one to suspect that the Blur Building concretizes a version of that “profound suspicion of vision and its hegemonic role in the modern era” which Martin Jay traces, with a certain disapproval, in recent French thought, only to counter such antiocularcentrism with an unrepentant enlightened clarity.14 From this perspective, the Blur Building would be of the end of the world to the extent that it simply and strictly refuses any certain, stable, and visual domestication of world space as both inherently meaningful and as clarifiable to the point of having light or enlightenment eradicate all remnants of its obscure metaphorical texture. However, identifying in this project only a pure “suspicion of vision” remains too reductive, as does an inverse movement towards an altogether live metaphor of the sun, i.e., what Jacques Derrida retraces as the circle of the heliotrope whose pervasive, dazzling light (whether ideal or a question of lumen naturale) allegedly illuminates everything (“White Mythology” 266-267). Here the blurring of Weltbild and vision is a matter of neither a fall into strict blindness, nor an unwarranted celebration of an accidental obscurity that will be removed by the return of or to radiant enlightenment. Rather, Diller & Scofidio’s project pursues what moves differently within vision and its illuminating image-performance–what makes presencing disappear in its own radiance, or the indefinite selferasure of light that permits it to come as light. Blur is after another self-erasure or withdrawal of the visible, one whose different and deferred textures of light touch its worldinhabitants in practice.15 Perhaps in this way it approximates an archi-texture within an architectural project, drawing on supplementary haptic practices so as to transform a visible building into an unfolding of the inhabitants’ critical debate of and interactive engagement with vision. Diller & Scofidio’s Blur Building is thus a gentle and affirmative critique of tourism from within.16 It makes itself felt as an ongoing questioning of the very fabrication of the aura and authenticity of tourist sites, the gaze, and the meaningful imaging of memorial or memorable places in the world of today (Zavatta 12-14).

     

    3. Before an Announced or Desired World-Construction: Practicing Haptic World-Vision

     

    The media event is integrated with the enveloping fog. Our objective is to weave together architecture and electronic technologies, yet exchange the properties of each for the other. Thus, architecture would dematerialize and electronic media, normally ephemeral, would become palpable in space. Both would require sophisticated technologies that would be entirely invisible, leaving only their effects. –Diller and Scofidio, Blur: The Making of Nothing 44.

     
    The Blur Building questions built, controlled, and artifactual environments, including climate, alongside the hegemony of visual culture in the western tradition. By leaping through more recent developments in architecture as well as in IT and new media, it approaches an open-ended becoming of mixed reality. As such, this large-scale installation project takes up mixed presencing qua new modes of technological and mediatory production of our life form so as to displace at least two architectural trends. First, it displaces the more traditional view of digital technology and electronic mediation as inherently foreign to any architecture of durability, utility, and beauty. Second, it counters the tendency over the last 10 years for a contemporary generation of architects who do embrace virtual architecture to remain stuck with fascinatingly innovative, but very abstract computer models that seldom become actual buildings.17 The blobs of Greg Lynn and others, Marcos Novak’s liquid architectures, the work of NOX and Lars Spuybroek, Neil Leach’s swarm tectonics, Asymptote’s NYSE trading floor, and Peter Eisenman’s rethinking of his notion of the interiority of architecture via the diagram would perhaps serve as a first set of indices tracing the development of virtual hypersurface architecture.18 Although Diller & Scofidio make a different move towards actualization, there is no small echo here–in their obsession with the fluid flock, the cloud, and the movement in time of water–of the virtual architects’ efforts to embrace the computer as an instrument for viewing form as generated in time in order to stop modeling from the outside and to undertake a shift, as Lars Spuybroek writes, “from Euclidian geometry to topology, from tectonics to textile, from object to process, from crystalline space to the undulating field or medium” (20).
     
    The Blur Building thus embraces a virtual architecture for ubiquity and goes on seeking its actualizations so that architecture, and life itself, develop in a mediatory negotiation of habitable spaces, each unfolding as very provisional “solutions” to the problem of how to inhabit space bodily with others and the other. Diller & Scofidio’s architecture negotiates certain experiments with spatialization as a question life poses to bodies, opening them to what Elizabeth Grosz calls “the movements of time and becoming” (148). In this way, the Blur Building presents itself as a matter of a slow re-ontologizing of mediatory architectures and life forms. It involves virtuality, tele-presence, and the mixed realities of ubiquitous computing. Its immanentizing, physical turn moves towards a mixed worlding, understood as a dynamic ecotechnics liable to sense, as Jean-Luc Nancy puts it.
     

     
    Photo courtesy of Diller Scofidio + Renfro. Used by permission.

     

    Click for larger view

    Fig. 5.

    Photo courtesy of Diller Scofidio + Renfro. Used by permission.

     

     
    As part of such a turn, the Blur Building relinquishes the earlier emphasis on first generation virtual reality, head-mounted displays, immersion in perfect simulations of 3-D scenery, and a long line of formal, abstract, or metaphysical idealizations, perhaps best recognized in William Gibson’s literary evocation of cyberspace and the engagement with virtuality in the Wachowski brothers’ Matrix movies. Accordingly, the Blur Building turns physical in order to newly emphasize corporeality and actualization of the virtual. This turn situates its architecture in a context of developments that we also see in today’s art world. Broadly speaking, the current coupling of artistic cultural production, IT, and new media leads to the emergence of a multiplicity of large, complex, intermedial, and interactive installations, sometimes spanning the planet network-wise. This context has made the installation something like a paradigmatic art form–momentarily parenthesizing traditional mass-media frames for visual information-culture (images, advertising, mainstream movies, TV). Blur relates to the world of installation art found in museums and art institutions, but also to the installation art found in all the public spaces of globalized culture. Via networks, computers, cell phones, and a host of new types of interfaces, actants, and sensors, these installations find their way across traditional distinctions between bodily intimacy and distance, the private and the public, interiority and exteriority, making them extraordinarily porous. In “The Poetics of Augmented Space,” Lev Manovich historicizes this physical turn and concisely articulates its media-specific and technological tendencies:
     

    The 1990s were about the virtual. We were fascinated by new virtual spaces made possible by computer technologies. The images of an escape into a virtual space that leaves the physical space useless and of cyberspace–a virtual world that exists in parallel to our world–dominated the decade. It started with the media obsession with Virtual Reality (VR) …. At the beginning of the 21st century, the research agendas, media attention, and practical applications have come to focus on a new agenda–the physical–that is, physical space filled with electronic and visual information …. While the technologies imagined by [current] research paradigms accomplish this in a number of different ways, the end result is the same: overlaying layers of data over the physical space.
     

    (220-223)

     
    The Blur Building is a singular fragment of the installed world that does not have a pre-existing sense. It takes place as an intersection of contemporary architecture, art, and cybernetics. It installs mixed worlding to the extent that it opens not only an augmented space, with physical and information dimensions overlaid, but also an augmented temporality insofar as the temporal object is layered with digital eventualization of experience. This project towards mixed worlding may not have a sense. However, the ingenuity and the innovations involved on artistic, architectural, and cybernetic planes may well lead one to claim that the Blur Building is all about an already announced or desired construction or creation of the sense of the mixed world, relying on what goes on in practice or in performance. Such a claim would then be in alignment with a number of efforts in more or less radical versions of socio-cultural constructivism and with certain implications of ideas of unfolding parallel worlds (possible and/or actual).19 On this score, Diller & Scofidio’s work and our involvement with this work supposedly demonstrate that contemporary worldmaking makes sense of the mixed world through cultural and technological inventions that mix virtuality and actuality functionally, given various contextual constraints for us and the architects. The Blur Building would thus be of interest because it makes a double enactive and constructive effort: not only towards virtualizing an otherwise stable architecture to the point of “losing the building” in any traditional (visual) sense (see Wolfe), but also an effort towards actualizing an otherwise transcendentally inclined technology so as to affect embodiment and the inhabitants’ relation to sense and to the sensible. This double effort will lead away from a transcendent worldview and an image of Blur as having a pregiven sense to be revealed or disclosed. It will likewise dispel notions of an external, pre-existing, independent world, and attendant ideas of resemblance and representation. It should lead one past thinking that this project is meaningful by way of an adequate resemblance to the world that we as visitor-inhabitants may uncover. Rather, as a mixed world it becomes meaningful through a more difficult or complex practice of worldmaking that occurs through the architects’ ingenious creation and construction, as well as through our experiences in Blur that surely construct the sense of this world in many ways. It engages in an adaptive, functional symbolism of the world that we might come to share, through a long, perhaps infinite pragmatic conversation concerned with a worlding blurred in various ways.20
     
    Certainly, constructive worldmaking accounts for much of what is at stake in Blur as inventive mixing. The relevance of this approach makes critics consider the possibility of characterizing Diller & Scofidio as “engineers of experience,”21 and it seemingly allows a treatment of their work as part and parcel of constructing a “technological sublime” for a mixed world–one that makes landscape, climate, and technology intersect with its inhabitants.22 From this perspective, Blur is essentially a manufactured cloud with an embedded viewing deck, the Angel Deck, hovering over Lake Neuchatel in Switzerland. Significantly, the exterior “skin” of the building is based on reactualizing the tensegrity concept developed by Buckminster Fuller in the 1950s. The entire building (100 meters wide, 65 meters deep, and 25 meters in height), including all the decks, can thus be seen as a structure that is, in principle, omnidirectional, non-linear, and yet able to distribute all the local loads because the combinations of tension and integrity allow for coupling a number of continuous cables (in tension) and discontinuous members (in compression) so as to enclose a volume (Schafer 93). Access to the building is secured by tunnels and bridges across the water, along with walkways and stairs that start and end at the surface of the lake, so as to allow passages through the Blur Building as a made environment.
     
    A constructivist approach also informs us that the artifactual mist-cloud is generated from the lake through a hidden, complex system that pumps and filters the water. Visitorinhabitants meet this system primarily at the end-interface, in the form of more than 31,000 small, high-pressure fog nozzles passing through the building, a design invented by Japanese artist Fujiko Nakaya for the Pepsi Pavilion at the 1970 World Fair in Osaka.
     

     
    Photo courtesy of Diller Scofidio + Renfro. Used by permission.

     

    Click for larger view

    Fig. 6.

    Photo courtesy of Diller Scofidio + Renfro. Used by permission.

     

     

    The pumps are operated via a computerized climate control. This smart weather system reads temperature, humidity, as well as the speed and direction of the wind in order to regulate water pressure and continuously adjust to changing climate conditions. This weather system keeps the spread of the mist-cloud largely within range (a 300 meter radius from the lakeshore entry) and also controls the intensity of the fog, while limiting the amount of chlorine, bacteria, and toxins in the water and fog, in accordance with the values decreed by the Swiss authorities (Diller and Scofidio, Blur 362-363). One might observe that this weather system is the aspect of the Blur Building that goes furthest in stressing the porosity of the distinction between architecture and the environment, and in commenting, somewhat silently, on the remarkable development of environmentally sustainable architecture.23

     
    However, although both the mist-cloud itself and the smart weather system controlling it can be said to make good constructive sense of this world, they are also hinges around which turn all practically constructive strategies for redeeming a clear vision of and insight into this world. For they simultaneously introduce a perpetual blurring of any horizon and imprint registers of sensation other than those open to the clear and appropriative sense of sight. In fact, the delimiting exploration in the Blur Building of visual modalities of sense and sensation might well lead one to rather strong statements regarding epistemological and ontological aspects of the mixed world in play. To be sure, in this project there is very little world in the visual sense of an exterior, transcendent mundus, that is, the cosmos as a well composed, complete order in which one might find a place, a dwelling, and identifiable elements of orientation. Thus, this is not of a world down here that one could pass through to a télos outside this world, just as there is no longer any spirit of the world, nor a History before whose tribunal one could stand. The blur as “the vague open” of the building, as the fuzzy sense of a mixed world, suggests that there is no longer any assignable signification of “world.” Alternatively, that the “world” is withdrawing, bit by bit, from the entire order of clear signification available to us as its living, traversing, desiring inhabitants. Except, perhaps, the non-assured cosmic signification of world as universe–announced or called up as an infinite, misty expansion. A mixed world, the Blur Building is not a matter of meaning that is either revealed or disclosed, announced or desired.
     

    Consideration of the Blur Building as mixed world has led Mark B. Hansen to claim, rather pointedly, that Diller & Scofidio’s project is a consequence of today’s “historically unprecedented interpenetration of body and media,” following up on the necessity to develop “a post-visual, affective phenomenology”: “what is at stake in the Blur Building is not simply a ‘seeing that can no longer interpret,’ but a wholesale short-circuiting of the role of vision, such that the affective body is literally compelled to ‘space the void’” (“Wearable Space” 369-370). The strongest confirmation of such a claim for the Blur Building qua “a wholesale short-circuiting of the role of vision,” whose literal forces operate before or beyond insight, is perhaps found rather deeply embedded within the constructions mentioned above: the system of wearable computing as yet another cluster of computers and an extensive wireless network with tracking capacity, distributed across the building. Visitor-inhabitants meet this system at the lakeshore in a two-fold manner. First, there is a personal preferences questionnaire that is filled out at the log-in station. This is scanned and sent to a (hidden) central computer that interprets the information supplied and creates a social profile. These profiles are then downloaded into wireless devices in waterproof “braincoats,” wearable computing raincoats that are handed out to all visitors-inhabitants and that constitute the second component of the wireless system. Once inside the wet mist-cloud of the Blur Building, the wireless network functions as an embedded surveillance system which is, both as a back-end system and as a front-end multitude of micro-scale device-components, largely on the order of the invisible as far as visitor-inhabitants or wearers of its mixed spacing are concerned.

     
    Nevertheless, one would want to move at a slower pace here and relinquish, at least for a moment, the emphasis on the historically unprecedented, the strictly post-visual, as well as the literally compelling, non-hermeneutic, and extra-significatory force of the Blur Building qua mixed worlding. To begin, the dematerialization of architecture takes place alongside and inside a revitalization of existing, concrete architectural traditions (e.g., Buckminster Fuller). There is, moreover, no shortage of visual presencing when approaching the Blur Building from a distance, just as a certain modicum of visibility is retained when one can see from the more or less foggy decks, when the numerous LED posts and their colored displays installed as part of the system of wearables send off their blinking signals, and when the braincoats operate their visual interface in red and green colors. Finally, the experiential passage through linguistic or discursive signification towards the literal force of mixing with alterity seems continually complex, to the point of being infinitely extendable. Generally speaking, then, the “post-visuality” at stake, if there is any, seems to solicit a different internal working-through of image-performance and the visible by way of the various immanent modes of blurring vision encountered in this project. Moving carefully along this path, one could begin to approach blurring both by means of the visible and of the auditory spheres of haptics so as to trace how the Blur Building is perhaps not immediately of a literal force beyond sense, but rather remains liable to sense. It touches us both via haptic vision and via an auditory ambience or atmosphere (Stimmung) before or beyond a worldview qua definite cognitive map (Leitbild).
     
    Insofar as it touches us from the outside inside global visual culture and its image-world, the Blur Building is not forcing us outside sense without further ado but remains liable to sense as it exposes us to worlding as (our) infinite finitude, letting us ex-ist on the contours, at the sensate limit of the world of sense. It keeps leading us to this limit. By integrating a set of originally or surprisingly inventive cultural-technological experiments in interactive practice, it attracts us towards that which draws the contours of the world as sense. These experiments undertake an immanent transformation of visuality, displacing clarity of sight and sense–here towards a haptic vision in the first place. The LED displays in the mist-cloud and the vaguely graded spectrum of red and green emissions from the braincoats worn in Blur give rise to a kind of new Egypt in Diller & Scofidio’s project: haptic spaces composed in unique ways, of color and by color, juxtapose so many pure tones on flat surfaces (see Deleuze, Francis Bacon 107-113). These haptic spaces solicit a properly haptic functioning of the eye capable of dealing with the “sense” of colors, not primarily in the representational manner related to depth, contour, or relief in an ideal tactile-optical space, nor in a purely manual space where touch is strictly superordinate to the eye. Rather, the sense of the Blur Building qua haptic space implies an in-between seeing, a non-optical close-up rhythm of viewing whose sense of sight behaves just like the sense of touch and generates an inventive experience where figure and ground are perceived to be on the same plane.
     
    Thus, Diller & Scofidio’s experiments link cultural conventions and contemporary technics so as to facilitate and even necessitate a haptic exploration of ways to transform the sense of the world. This exploration involves haptic vision but also comprises, sometimes alongside and at other times internal to, several more planes and events in what one would call the multisensory dimension and process of the Blur Building. To the extent that even haptic vision blurs, converting the haptic in the direction of manual space, the sense of this mixed world draws increasingly on other modes of sensation, notably the hearing involved in delineating minimal rhythms and refrains, not only within the large scale ambience of the environment as such, but also, and perhaps especially, within the more intimate data space laid out via the auditory sonar pulsing interface integrated into the braincoats (Diller and Scofidio, Blur 209-223). This pulse undergoes continuous variation, but never ceases to indicate whether other visitor-inhabitants are far away (a decelerated or steady sonar pinging pulse) or close by (an accelerated sonar pinging pulse) and so touches one aurally, providing pressures that are vaguely dispersed but retain a certain regularity that makes possible an outline of semi-distinct dot-lines or sensible navigational horizons in the auditory atmosphere, in the soundscape that forms a rather indeterminate ambient socio-cultural environment.24
     

    4. Blurred to Blindness: From Haptic World-Spacing to Originary Tactility

     

    salut, obscurity! Salut to this erasure of figures and schemas! And salut to the blind whom we become … salut to the vision that did not cling to forms and ideas but that let itself be touched by forces. –Nancy, “Salut” 313.

     
    Constructivist paths, even ones of haptic vision and hearing, provide us with a sensible image of the Blur Building as a world that mixes virtuality and actuality, just as they facilitate an interpretation of the building as a functionalist symbol of the world at large. Such approaches may vary considerably, may be open to dispute, meet constraints, and go on to reconstruct themselves in the face of a complex environment like this one. Nonetheless, precisely by being too sensible, by making too much sense constructively, and by providing too much of a world-image, be it only one of lo-fi ambient tones, they may be missing the point. They do not address what remains the most difficult question: how is it that Diller & Scofidio’s mixed worlding never ceases to elude the desire for clear sight and its productive, efficient, making and announcement of sense? We cannot answer this question if we presumes that we operate primarily, or even just largely, as demiurges, semi-transcendent creators of the sense of the world.25 We can hardly consider mixed worlding as what touches us, in a blur radical enough to blind, if we hold to the notion that we, or Diller & Scofidio, are the creative enactors at the genesis of the sense of the world, if not of the world as such. Rather, this project shows that the architect is not a traditional manager, bringing order to social space by designing and fashioning the world. Perhaps this argument parenthesizes form, style, and signature in favor of the processual opening of a situation, relinquishes control in favor of a lived experience of indefiniteness and chance, and downplays order and the permanence of inclusion in favor of a more flexible, plastic, and fragmentary potential for transductive individuation. Along these lines, the Blur Building is less a demiurgic, semisublime construction of a meaningful world than an opening formation felt through the ongoing arrangements and modular elements that it proposes in reciprocal cooperation with its visitor-inhabitants. It moves as a uniquely mediating ecotechnical assemblage (of landscape, air, water, steel, and a host of actual architectural vectors alongside networks, computers, databases, sensors and actants, and software code) that proposes to reweave a strong affective bond with and between people, liable in its mixes to unfold towards yet another territory without being constructed as one.26 The charge that a kind of collaborative appropriation of the situation is at stake here should perhaps be tempered by an awareness of the degree to which the Blur Building remains variable, presents possibilities for meaning that cannot be foreseen, and offers an architectural spacing of the moment that involves timeeffects and installs a movement rather like a developing organism.27
     
    The Blur Building is, as Hansen has observed, an installation involving wearable space, understood as our experience of phenomenalizing embodiment (our mediatory relation to a now highly technologized life world).28 However, it is perhaps not primarily as an experience of wearable space that it touches us. The Blur Building is also, as Cary Wolfe has argued, an artful system of social communication that uses a perceptual blur to perturb the normativity of mass-mediated global communication. Diller & Scofidio’s project is clearly both, and Hansen and Wolfe respond to important traits: embodiment, wearable computing, and media intimacy in Hansen’s case; perception, communication, and artistic perturbation of massmedia constructions of reality in Wolfe’s. Nevertheless, they are also too eager to enact semantic sense, via strict foci on embodied experience (although this is open to affective sensation) and on social communication (although this is undergoing perturbations of perception). They tend to marginalize or leave out the fact that the Blur Building is not just of a world on meaningful display: it is a problematization of making clear, visual, imaged, productive, consumptive sense of the world.
     
    As the subtitle of the artist-architects’ book indicates, the Blur Building attests to a certain care for “the making of nothing.” They, along with the Blur Building, can problematize making sense because the remnants of transcendence in an announced or desired sense, inherent in constructivist making, have already been abandoned in favor of affirming haptic worldspacing as the transimmanence of the world.29 In favor of a practico-tactile sense as existence and techné (Nancy, Sense 45). The world is not the sense we make of it, but rather what we transform transimmanently during our approach to it as a presencing liable to sense. The Blur Building comes into presence not only as a dynamic set of informational affordances liable to sense, but also, and earlier on, as flows of matter and energy affecting us, letting us feel anew that architectural mediation qua territorial spacing was always already intimately connected with providing a protected set of food sources, and that it is the flow of energy that creates stabilizations of worlding in the first place.30 Using this approach, we would be towards the Blur Building when we touch it; touching it is an eventual process of mixed worlding that comes before and surprises current versions of experiencing the life world. It is, then, of an a-visual architexture, a matter of tactile relations opening onto a different existential contact and reaching out energetically at the blurred limit of sight and hearing.31 As Diller & Scofidio have it, Blur is “decidedly low definition: there is nothing to see but our dependence on vision itself” (Blur 162). Blurring world-vision and imaging, beyond, or rather inside-below, haptic vision and Stimmung, to the point of contacting what affects and animates us, is structurally earlier than or ahead of any commonsensical hermeneutic horizon of meaning, as Husserl’s thought of the life world would have it. When the tactile interface of your braincoat, located at the lower and rather intimate bodily region, is activated during the encounter with another world-inhabitant whose scanned profile matches yours with 100% affinity, its tactile vibrancy is hardly a matter of sensible interpretation of an experience.32 Rather, this coming to presence of the touch of the other’s life form, and of other forces and energeia, takes you to the limit of Erlebnis qua a sensation of originary tactility. The ongoing specific differentiation of the Blur Building offers up to us a mixed medium, that is, a dynamic environment for a life in transduction between technology and live culture or, in other words, a mixed medium qua an epiphylogenetic processing of culture, biology, and technics that also lets us live on through means other than life.33
     

    5. At Our Discretion: Among the Almost Immanent … and Untouchable Embeddedness

     

    … the there is nothing other than the Wittgensteinian “That” of the world, while at the same time being the world’s original “how”…. It is not a place of places, or a sensorium Dei, or an a priori form. More likely, it would be a priori matter–but here the a priori, in its act of birth, would be the sensible entelechy itself: the unity, opened within itself, of the touched/touching … the worldliness of the world, qua absolute existential condition, exhausts its finite sense–exhausts it, that is, opens it infinitely. Mundus patet. –Nancy, The Sense of the World 159-160.

     

     
    Photo courtesy of Diller Scofidio + Renfro. Used by permission.

     

    Click for larger view

    Fig. 7.

    Photo courtesy of Diller Scofidio + Renfro. Used by permission.

     

     
    As mixed worlding, the Blur Building directly engages the way in which information and communication technologies today move towards becoming indiscernible from any ontological exterior inside (nature, the environment, the milieu, embodiment, organs, bodies, the body). Participating in the emergent movement of pervasive computing, Diller & Scofidio’s project pursues both the disappearance of the computer and the pervasive embedding of computing, and so places us among the invisibly integrated world-spacings of ubicomp, as described by the Intel Corporation around 2001:
     

    Computing, not computers will characterize the next era of the computer age. The critical focus in the very near future will be on ubiquitous access to pervasive and largely invisible computing resources. A continuum of information processing devices ranging from microscopic embedded devices to giant server farms will be woven together with a communication fabric that integrates all of today’s networks with networks of the future. Adaptive software will be self-organizing, self-configuring, robust, and renewable. At every level and in every conceivable environment, computing will be fully integrated with our daily lives. (qtd. in McCullough 7)34

     

    Here and now, the Blur world and its events are not that of which we make sense. Rather, blurred worlding invisibly overlaid with the pervasively embedded and calm computing of mixed reality (in the widest “sense”) is ecotechnics as how we exist. The world is not what we make or manipulate, but how we exist with a cultural and technological sentiment or affect.35 The sensible entelechy of the Blur Building, its originary opening of the touching/touched in uniquely vague artifactual dynamics and movements, calls for and allows transformation of the sense of our existence in an interactive and performative practice at the edge of the world. It attracts and leads us most when and where it approaches an infinitely finite world delimiting sense, sentiments, and affect. An impersonal, inoperative, disorganized, scattered, and discrete world of tactility prior to rhythmic pulse, image, and clear vision. Structurally earlier than or evading haptic vision, hearing, and manual spacing. Withdrawing even from the distinction between self- and other-reference, which it allows. A world of relational existential tangens which remains fuzzily vague, because liable to sense, whether originally or as a world to come. One whose traits are perhaps not just being-in-theworld or being-towards, but just as much being-with, being-between, being-among … other existents and things. An irreducibly vague world of ecotechnics, because discretely different. One whose touches are delightful or terrifying, beautiful or technologically sublime, depending on the character of the exposition to becoming other elsewhere, in singularly plural contact-among. Perhaps the tangens of this mixed worlding in a place and an era of ubiquitous computing is at its most difficult when its demand is exorbitant, when the embeddedness of the pervasive altogether smoothes space and time and thus demands an impossible tact. At this level of tactful giving/withdrawal, the mixing of the world, which may be all, cannot be struck, grasped, stroked, caressed, kissed, licked, or tasted on any one plane. Of necessity, it can only be mourned, with a certain respect for what exceeds the smallest fragment of erotic light or Eros qua texture, at the limit where touch cannot remain within the confines of the tactile but learns and is learning anew what it feels like to touch without touching. Blur with its blurring goes and comes as it invents the world as an affinity of disjunction and conjunction (do not touch, but touch). As an inventive building of the world, it brings into contiguity, partes extra partes, contact and non-contact where all it touches is the other.36

     

     
    Photo courtesy of Diller Scofidio + Renfro. Used by permission.

     

    Click for larger view

    Fig. 8.

    Photo courtesy of Diller Scofidio + Renfro. Used by permission.

     
     

     

    Ulrik Ekman is Assistant Professor in Digital Aesthetics and Communication at the Department of Arts and Cultural Studies, University of Copenhagen. He is the coordinator of more than 150 researchers in the Nordic and internationally oriented research network, “The Culture of Ubiquitous Information,” and is currently involved in two book projects directly related to the problematics dealt with in this network. Ekman is the editor of Throughout: Art and Culture Emerging with Ubiquitous Computing (Cambridge, Mass.: MIT Press, forthcoming), a comprehensive anthology of more than 40 research articles from scholars across the world at work on the cultural and technical implications of the third wave of computing. He is also writing a book on the aesthetics of contemporary media art and culture focusing on the increasing import for our life form of haptic technics and spatio-temporality.
     

    Endnotes

     
    1. I am alluding to Ishii not only as head of the Tangible Media Group at MIT, or as a motivating force behind the exploration of “Things That Think,” but also as a researcher deeply involved in conceiving interactivity at the limit of tangible interfaces as a matter of the movement of bits and atoms.

     

     
    2. For further visual representation or graphic illustration of Diller & Scofidio’s project, see Rubin; “Diller & Scofidio,” Designboom, “Diller & Scofidio,” Arcspace; Leerberg; and “Diller & Scofidio,” Hipercroquis. For a brief video, see Schm1822.

     

     
    3. In my treatment of the sense of the world I draw in particular on Nancy, The Sense of the World.

     

     
    4. The term “ecotechnics” is coined by Jean-Luc Nancy, and I endorse both his careful delineation of the ways in which “technology” tends to conceal our inability to grapple with the infinite finitude of our existence, and his insistence that we speak of technologies in the singular plural so as to avoid the assumption that, both generally and now specifically in the case of pervasive computing, we are dealing with an omnipresent techno-conspiracy qua an absolute nexus of a vast machinic or combinatorial apparatus embracing all particular technologies. It is better to stay with the difficult task of deconstructing globalized ecotechnics so as to meet again the finitude of sense, taking note along the way of the multiple ways in which technologies both shatter the notion of such a nexus and disseminate potential relations for a human culture and world to come–even when transforming and partly destroying nature, even when approaching a technicization of existence itself so as to exhaust human life and seemingly withdraw or efface the sense of the world (Being Singular Plural 185). See also Hutchens and Nancy, “Interview” 165.

     

     
    5. Ian James offers an interesting exposition of Nancy’s concept of ecotechnics (143-151).

     

     
    6. For a more detailed account, see Foster and Kesselman.

     

     
    7. For a short introduction to recent advances in quantum computing, see Daley, Cirac, and Zoller.

     

     
    8. See also Thacker’sBiomedia and The Global Genome; Hayles and Foushee.

     

     
    9. See Michael Beigl’s thought-provoking introduction on the status of ubiquitous computing. For more detailed book-length studies, see Steventon and Wright; Philip Robinson, Vogt, and Wagealla; Loke; Cook and Das.

     

     
    10. I am referring to the notion of transduction as thought by Gilbert Simondon.

     

     
    11. Throughout this article, I consider the Blur Building as constituting a very extensive and interesting reopening of the question of the relation between information and its embodiment. My insistence on living also with the latter emphasizes the way in which this project brings virtuality into the physical world so as to entertain a mixed reality. In this, I am in keeping with Mark Weiser’s notion of an “embodied virtuality” as that which is centrally at stake in ubiquitous computing as it draws computation out of its electronic shells so that the “virtuality” of computer-readable data–all the different ways in which it can be altered, processed and analyzed–is brought into the physical world.” Cf. “The computer for the 21st Century.” I provide a more extensive treatment of this problematic in the introductory remarks to Ekman, ed., Throughout: Art and Culture Emerging with Ubiquitous Computing. This is in any case part of what I consider in this article as “mixed reality” (MR), being the wider notion, encompassing “augmented reality” (AR) among others. Any approach via “augmentation” will therefore, to my mind, remain restricted to a subset of what is involved in the notion of MR – in computer science, cultural theory, and elsewhere. Mediations specifically within augmented reality will tend to leave aside “augmented virtuality” and will also not refer to a merging of real and virtual worlds so as to produce new environments and relations where physical and digital objects co-exist and interact in real time. In other words, I assume the Blur Building project to be explicitly unfolding a mix of reality, augmented reality, augmented virtuality and virtual reality. To appreciate this, it may well be useful to engage in a finely differentiated manner with what Paul Milgram and Fumio Kishino defined in the mid-1990s as a mixed reality that would unfold anywhere between the extrema of the virtuality continuum. In contrast, please consider Ronald Azuma’s influential definition of AR, which addresses a strict subset of AR’s original goal, but has come to be understood as representative: “Augmented reality” is an environment that includes both virtual reality and real-world elements, and an augmented reality system is one that combines real and virtual, is interactive in real time, and is registered in 3D. Typical examples, in a concrete sense, would comprise what Lev Manovich describes in “The Poetics of Augmented Space” as the new but already broadly distributed technologies of augmented space, such as surveillance technologies (translating physical space and its inhabitants to data), cellspace technologies (continuously presenting data in and as mobile inhabitants’ changing surroundings or milieu), and not least dynamic electronic planes (surfaces and interfaces, typically in the form of displays or screens). See also Bimber and Raskar.

     

     
    12. I refer, indirectly, to “the body” and “embodiment” with a view to the distinction between these that Katherine Hayles employs. That is, “the body” refers to an abstract, generalizing, and normative concept which grasps the body as a cultural construct, while “embodiment” indicates an individual’s unique experiences of embodiment as an experience lived from the inside – including the entire span from one’s own sensations and affects to “textures of life” on different biological and physical planes. See Hayles, “Flesh and Metal.” I remain interested in the investigation of distinctions today among (1) our experience (Erfahrung) of a generalizing and normatively trendsetting design of the body, (2) our lived experiences (Erlebnis) of embodiment, and (3) singularly living embodiment and its contingently possible interlacing with (in)human complexity and otherness, specifically respecting implications and ramifications that make themselves felt along with Diller & Scofidio’s project towards a worlding of mixed realities.

     

     
    13. Note Edward Dimendberg’s characterization of Diller & Scofidio, stressing as key in their installations their status as embodied conceptual art “in which visitors ‘perform’ the installation through their bodily negotiation of its space and their varying intellectual and emotional responses to it” (71).

     

     
    14. I am thinking here not least of Jay’s statement: “… I remain unrepentantly beholden to the ideal of illumination that suggests an Enlightenment faith in clarifying indistinct ideas …. I will employ a method that unapologetically embraces one of the anti-ocularcentric discourse’s other major targets, a synoptic survey of an intellectual field at some remove from it” (17).

     

     
    15. Compare Jacques Derrida “White Mythology,” 268-271. Responding to Jay’s reading on this score, one would want to emphasize that Derrida traces two courses open to a heliotrope constructing its destruction. One course would remain close to Jay’s call for enlightenment, never ceasing to follow a line of resistance to the dissemination of the metaphorical in syntactics and meaning. The other, however, while resembling the first to the point of being taken for it, will traverse and double it as its supplement without limit, thus disrupting the oppositions of the semantic and the syntactic, the metaphoric and the proper – along with the traditional privileging of the latter above the former. In this context, the Blur Building remains with vision and illumination, but is perhaps more enticing in its affirmation of the haptic textures of light that move as immanent, sensate supplements to clear sight and Weltbild. I am alluding also to the attractions of Cathryn Vasseleu’s reading of Luce Irigaray’s thought of erotic light as texture. Here texture would be both the language and material of visual practices, an invisible interweaving of differences which form the fabric of the visible. One interesting aspect of the texture of light is that it “implicates touch in vision in ways that challenge the traditional differentiation of these senses within the sensible/intelligible binarism of photology” (Vasseleu 12).

     

     
    16. Compare Diller & Scofidio’s statement that they operate “with an understanding that the target and the weapon can be the same: a ‘gentle’ critique of tourism from within, for the installation accepts its own role as tourist attraction” (“SuitCase Studies” 22).

     

     
    17. The general theoretical and computer scientific context for virtual architecture has been treated by Bertol and Foell. A rich set of exchanges among practicing architects, cultural critics, and theoreticians appeared shortly after the millennial turn. See Leach, Turnbull, and Williams. Around the same time, Malcolm McCoullough provided an in-depth theoretical study of architecture and computation.

     

     
    18. For two influential and very interesting volumes cutting across the issues of the theory and practice of hypersurface architecture, see Perrella, Hypersurface Architecture, and Hypersurface Architecture II.

     

     
    19. See Goodman; von Glasersfeld, et al., Konstruktivismus Statt Erkenntnistheorie; von Glasersfeld, Radical Constructivism; Ryan.

     

     
    20. In approaching the Blur Building we are, most often, beyond the strictly epistemological frame of cognitivesymbolic mental worldmaking proper to the work of Goodman or Glaserfeld. Here worldmaking is obviously extended far into practice, aesthetics, technics, and the physical–into delimitations of the existential–just as we cannot but encounter the virtual which Goodman (but not Ryan) explicitly brackets by considering only the actual world.

     

     
    21. Cf. Aaron Betsky’s argument that Diller & Scofidio make us aware of the seductions of visual sense-making in contemporary consumer culture by “displaying display,” “by heightening, questioning, or frustrating the act of display, and by doing this within display itself” (“Display Engineers” 23).

     

     
    22. I am referring to David Nye’s coinage of this term in American Technological Sublime. When reactualizing this term, I am at one with Wolfe (pars. 4-5) in resisting the temptation to set a tone of Romantic sublimity of the kind sought by Ned Cramer in his article on the Blur Building. Rather, Diller & Scofidio approach a notion of the technological sublime that bespeaks an mutually implicating interlacing of human culture and technology, where technology is sought for its generative potential to be more and other than conventional, productive, and efficient. Here, technology would be approached neither in technophobic, nor in technophilic terms, but for its open-endedness and uncertain or artistically inventive in-operation. Cf. Schafer 93-94. Compare Wolfe’s remark that Diller & Scofidio “understand the relationship between art, the subject, and world in resolutely posthumanist terms … the human and the non- or anti- or a-human do not exist in fundamentally discrete ontological registers but–quite the contrary–inhabit the same space in mutual relations of co-implication and instability. This boundary-breakdown tends to be thematized in their work in the interlacing of the human and the technological” (par. 8).

     

     
    23. I am thinking broadly here of the off-the-grid buildings which now demonstrate complete energetic self-sufficiency, recent “zero energy buildings” that reduce net annual energy consumption while producing excess energy and selling it back to the power company, as well as passive solar building designs that reduce energy consumption by 70% to 90%. More specifically, I have in mind the statement from the American Institute of Architects that immediate action by the building sector is essential to avoid hazardous man-made climate change, since half of the global warming greenhouse gas emissions today come from buildings – more than transportation or industry. See also the “The 2030 Challenge Stimulus Plan” for reducing new building energy consumption by 90% over the next two decades, submitted to the Obama administration.

     

     
    24. Cf. Diller & Scofidio’s strategy of embedding mixing qua blurring/navigational ambience: “We propose to replace the focused attention of a visual spectacle with the attenuated attention of an immersive acoustic encounter. As disorientation is structured into the Blur experience, navigation is put to the test.… However, in this space of disorientation and unregulated movement, a very precisely spatial logic is invisibly mapped: space is acoustically digitized and can only be comprehended through physical movement” (Blur 195-198).

     

     
    25. This is, in other words, where one would want to consider departing from a number of the implicit shortcomings of versions of social and cultural constructivism that remain on quasi-transcendental planes of active, functional discourse and significant, semantic sense-making. Not only because these will consistently and reductively circle back from any contact with the complex risks pertaining to a transimmanent and existential practice with and as techné (rather than semiotic mediation), but also because their principled ontological silence will reduce questions concerning the dynamis and energeia of a multiplicitous chaosmos to mere perturbations and irritations by the “other” of “our” positively constructive processing of sense.

     

     
    26. By indicating the Blur Building as a singularly mediating assemblage involving ecotechnics, I am signaling a certain agreement with a call for a media-specific approach to this artistic-architectural project, as structurally earlier than any (digital) convergence. This would perhaps not belong too easily to any modernist notions of moving towards medium-specificity via technical and material supports or conceptual-situational constellations. It would rather take for granted the problematization after postmodernism of the work of art and of aesthetic autonomy and would thus be responding to the multiplicitous dissemination of the aesthetic and aesthetic experience throughout the socio-cultural field. This response would, generally speaking, unfold as a pursuit of differential specificity in which the medium as such will have to be reinvented, which is also to say that media must be approached as differential or self-differing. Compare also Krauss 53-56. More precisely, the mediumspecificity of installation projects of ubicomp and mixed reality, such as this architectural one, would have to become sensitive to both sides of the mixing oscillation between the actual and the virtual, and to the transductive oscillation itself. One would, for instance, wish to cross social constructivist discourses with the somewhat more robust notion of materiality that Katherine Hayles calls for in order to entwine instantiation and signification from the outset by conceiving of materiality as the interplay of physical characteristics and signifying strategies. This would open onto media-specific analysis by making materiality an emergent property open to debate and interpretation, while also allowing the consideration of concrete projects as embodied entities to be interpreted. Cf.,”Print Is Flat, Code Is Deep.” But one would also, for instance, wish to cross the valuable and materially aware but decidedly technicist analyses of (new) media (e.g., the early Friedrich Kittler), with a different sensitivity to software studies in an age of post-media aesthetics. In a manner of speaking, this is also what is currently taking place; see the developments in Marino; Fuller; Manovich, Software Takes Command; and Wardrip-Fruin. In short, I am moving towards a sensation and affect of the differential mediaspecificity of a mixed ecotechnics which emerges transductively between phenomenology and materiality, where media-specifics invent displacements and deferrals of our traditional sense of the empirical-transcedental divide.

     

     
    27. For a brief delineation of architectural problems in a globalized network economy of flows, see Simonot.

     

     
    28. Hansen’s text was published in revised form in his more recent book Bodies in Code: Interfaces with Digital Media, 175-220.

     

     
    29. Architecture affects us in and as a haptic space. It is embodied in felt sensation and experienced perceptually as a sense of place, location, and orientation in haptic or smooth space. Such a sense of place emerges from haptically embodied signals and affective traces of exterior forces such as light, sounds, smells, tastes, temperatures, resistances, weights, contours, and textures. Architecture may likewise have a certain hapticoaffective impact on the senses when a given place momentarily returns a symbolic or semantic weight to perception. Using this approach, the Blur Building presents a haptic medium closely related to kinesthesis, proprioception, and interoception, and to the fact that human embodiment processes (its own) haptic information as it moves through (sensible) space. Briefly, I am here interested in the multiple ways in which one exists with a culturally and technically informed sentiment in the Blur Building, just as one is moved by the indefinite number of live and machinic intensities at play in its smooth space. Cf. Nancy, The Sense of the World, and Deleuze and Guattari 310-350, 474-500.

     

     
    30. Compare Manuel De Landa, Homes: Meshwork or Hierarchy?.

     

     
    31. I embrace J. Pallasmaa’s notion of the skin as the primordial architecture (of the senses), including his displacement of the bias for vision and the suppression of the other senses in favor of approaching the heart of lived experience as molded by hapticity, and thus by an irreducibly peripheral, unfocused, and blurred vision. I approach all the senses as extensions of the tactile, as specializations of skin tissue, and all sensations as modalities of touching. If touch is the mode that (dis)integrates our experience of the world with that of ourselves, the Blur Building is perhaps best approached as a “life-(in)formative” architecture addressing all the senses simultaneously to articulate the edge of a lived experience of being in the world while permitting our sense of reality and self. Cf. Pallasmaa 10-11.

     

     
    32. Cf. Diller and Scofidio, Blur 217: “There is also a tactile response. Occasionally, visitors in Blur will have a 100% affinity. To register this rare occurrence, a third response system may be integrated into the coat. A small vibrating pad, modeled after the vibrating motor of a pager … would send a vibration through the coat, mimicking the tingle of excitement that comes with physical attraction.”

     

     
    33. I refer to Hansen’s notion of “medium” as “an environment for life,” where the medium is implicated in technical life, naming that transduction between the organism and the environment which constitutes life as essentially technical. “Medium” concerns the exteriorization of the living along with the selective actualization of the (architectural) environment, the demarcation of a world, or the differential delineation of an existential domain. Cf. “Media Theory” 299-300. I am also indicating the relevance, for approaching our life form in mixed realities today, of Bernard Stiegler’s rethinking of André Leroi-Gourhan and Gilbert Simodon’s important work so as to offer contemporary notions of “ephiphylogenesis” and “technics.” Our co-evolution with technics in mixed realities can perhaps best be approached in its interlacing hybridizations of life forms by drawing on a notion of technics qua a third ontic domain of “organized inorganic beings,” and on a notion of “epiphylogenesis” qua that co-originarity of the human and technics which lets us evolve specifically via the invention of technics, i.e., via living on through means other than life. Cf. Stiegler 17. For a further treatment of Stiegler’s work and its indebtedness to the thought of Simondon, see Ekman, “Of Transductive Speed–Stiegler.”

     

     
    34. See also the more recent statement from the research program “Future and Emerging Technologies” launched by DG Information Society and Media, the European Commission: “‘the-computer-as-we-know-it’ will soon have no role in our future everyday lives and environments. It will be replaced by a new generation of technologies, which will move the computing power off the desktop and ultimately integrate it with real world objects and everyday environments. Computing becomes thus an inseparable part of our everyday activities, while simultaneously disappearing into the background. It becomes a ubiquitous utility taking on a role similar to electricity–an enabling but invisible and pervasive medium revealing its functionality on request in an unobtrusive way and supporting people in their everyday lives” (Streitz, Kameas, and Mavrommati).

     

     
    35. “Sense” here suggests the greatest semantic generality as sensing, affective directionality and orientation.

     

     
    36. I remain inventively indebted to the other places Jacques Derrida will have gone with the untouchable. Hence I will not even thank. See “The Untouchable, or the Vow of Abstinence” 66-68.
     

    Works Cited

       

     

    • The 2030 Challenge Stimulus Plan.” Architecture2030.org. Achitecture2030, 2008. Web. 1 Oct. 2009. <http://www.architecture2030.org/2030_challenge/index.html>.
    • Anderson, Laurie. “Interview with Elizabeth Diller and Ricardo Scofidio.” Scanning: The Aberrant Architectures of Diller + Scofidio. Ed. Aaron Betsky. New York: Whitney Museum of American Art, 2003. 147-160. Print.
    • Azuma, Ronald T. “A Survey of Augmented Reality.” Presence: Teleoperators and Virtual Environments 6.4 (1997): 355-385. Print.
    • Beigl, Michael. “Ubiquitous Computing – Computation Embedded in the World.” Disappearing Architecture: From Real to Virtual to Quantum. Eds. Michael Beigl and Peter Weibel. Berlin: Birkhäuser, 2005. 52-61. Print.
    • Bertol, Daniela, and David Foell. Designing Digital Space. New York: Wiley, 1997. Print.
    • Betsky, Aaron. “Display Engineers.” Scanning: The Aberrant Architectures of Diller + Scofidio. Ed. Aaron Betsky. New York: Whitney Museum of American Art, 2003. 23-36. print.
    • Bimber, Oliver, and Ramesh Raskar. Spatial Augmented Reality. Wellesley, Mass.: A K Peters, 2005. Print.
    • Cook, Diane, and Sajal K. Das. Smart Environments. Hoboken, NJ: Wiley, 2005. Print.
    • Cramer, Ned. “All Natural.” Architecture 91.7 (2002): 51-59. Print.
    • Daley, Andrew, Ignacio Cirac, and Peter Zoller. “The Development of Quantum Hardware for Quantum Computing.” Disappearing Architecture: From Real to Virtual to Quantum. Eds. Michael Beigl and Peter Weibel. Berlin: Birkhäuser, 2005. 62-76. Print.
    • De Landa, Manuel. “Homes: Meshwork or Hierarchy?” Mediamatic. Netherlands Design Institute,16 Feb. 1995. Web. 1 Oct. 2009.<http://www.mediamatic.nl/Doors/Doors2/DeLanda/DeLanda-Doors2-E1.html>.
    • Deleuze, Gilles. Francis Bacon: The Logic of Sensation. New York: Continuum, 2003. Print.
    • — and Félix Guattari. A Thousand Plateaus. Minneapolis: University of Minnesota Press, 1987. Print.
    • Derrida, Jacques. “The Untouchable, or the Vow of Abstinence.” On Touching, Jean-Luc Nancy. Stanford: Stanford University Press, 2005. 66-91. Print.
    • —. “White Mythology: Metaphor in the Text of Philosophy.” Margins of Philosophy. Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1982. 207-272. Print.
    • “Diller & Scofidio.” Arcspace.com. Arcspace, n.d. Web. 15 Sept. 2007. <http://www.arcspace.com/architects/DillerScofidio/blur_building/index.htm>.
    • “Diller + Scofidio: How They Obtained the Blur Effect.” Hipercroquis.net. Hipercroquis, 26 Oct. 2006. Web. 8 Nov. 2009. <http://hipercroquis.net/2006/10/25/diller-scofidio-how-they-obtained-the-blur-effect/>.
    • “Diller & Scofidio: The Blur Building.” Designboom.com. Designboom, n.d. Web. 15 Sept. 2007. <http://www.designboom.com/eng/funclub/dillerscofidio.html>.
    • Diller, Elizabeth, and Ricardo Scofidio. Blur: The Making of Nothing. New York: Harry N. Abrams, 2002. Print.
    • —. “SuitCase Studies: The Production of a National Past.” Back to the Front: Tourisms of War. Eds. Elizabeth Diller and Ricardo Scofidio. New York: Princeton Architectural Press, 1994. 32-107. Print.
    • Dimendberg, Edward. “Blurring Genres.” Scanning: The Aberrant Architectures of Diller + Scofidio. Ed. Aaron Betsky. New York: Whitney Museum of American Art, 2003. 67-80. Print.
    • Ekman, Ulrik. “Of Transductive Speed – Stiegler.” Parallax 13.4 (2007): 46-63. Print.
    • —, ed. Throughout: Art and Culture Emerging with Ubiquitous Computing. Cambridge, Mass.: MIT Press, forthcoming 2009.
    • Foster, Ian, and Carl Kesselman. The Grid. 2nd ed. Amsterdam: Elsevier, 2004. Print.
    • Fuller, Matthew. Software Studies: A Lexicon. Cambridge, Mass.: MIT Press, 2008. Print.
    • Gibson, William. Neuromancer. New York: Ace Books, 1984. Print.
    • Glasersfeld, Ernst von. Radical Constructivism: A Way of Knowing and Learning. Studies in Mathematics Education Series. London: Falmer Press, 1995. Print.
    • [CrossRef]
    • —, et al. Konstruktivismus Statt Erkenntnistheorie. Edition Tri. Klagenfurt: Drava, 1998. Print.
    • Goodman, Nelson. Ways of Worldmaking. Indianapolis: Hackett Publishing Co., 1978. Print.
    • Grosz, Elizabeth. Architecture from the Outside: Essays on Virtual and Real Space. Cambridge, Mass.: MIT Press, 2001. Print.
    • Hansen, Mark B.N. Bodies in Code: Interfaces with Digital Media. New York: Routledge, 2006. Print.
    • —. “Media Theory.” Theory Culture & Society 23.2-3 (2006): 297-306. Print.
    • [CrossRef]
    • —. “Wearable Space.” Configurations 10.2 (2003): 321-370. Print.
    • [Project MUSE]
    • Hayles, N. Katherine. “Flesh and Metal: Reconfiguring the Mindbody in Virtual Environments.” Configurations 10 (2002): 297-320. Print.
    • [Project MUSE]
    • —. “Print Is Flat, Code Is Deep: The Importance of Media-Specific Analysis.” Poetics Today 25.1 (2004): 67-90. Print.
    • [Project MUSE]
    • —, and Danielle Foushee, eds. Nanoculture: Implications of the New Technoscience. Bristol: Intellect Books, 2004. Print.
    • Hutchens, B.C., and Jean-Luc Nancy. “Interview: The Future of Philosophy.” Jean-Luc Nancy and the Future of Philosophy. Ed. B. C. Hutchens. Chesham: Acumen, 2005. 161-166. Print.
    • Ishii, Hiroshi and Brygg Ullmer. “Tangible Bits: Towards Seamless Interfaces between People, Bits and Atoms.” Tangible Media Group. MIT Media Laboratory, 1997. Web. 15 Sept. 2009. <http://tmgorchard.media.mit.edu:8020/SuperContainer/RawData/Papers/331-Tangible%20Bits%20Towards%20Seamless/Published/PDF>.
    • James, Ian. The Fragmentary Demand: An Introduction to the Philosophy of Jean-Luc Nancy. Stanford: Stanford University Press, 2006. Print.
    • Jameson, Fredric. “Postmodernism, or The Cultural Logic of Late Capital.” The Jameson Reader. Eds. Michael Hardt and Kathi Weeks. Oxford: Blackwell, 2000. 188-232. Print.
    • Jay, Martin. Downcast Eyes. Berkeley: University of California Press, 1993. Print.
    • Jonas, Hans. “The Nobility of Sight: A Study in the Phenomenology of the Senses.” The Phenomenon of Life: Toward a Philosophical Biology. Evanston: Northwestern University Press, 2001. 135-156. Print.
    • Krauss, Rosalind E. “A Voyage on the North Sea”: Art in the Age of the Post-Medium Condition. The Walter Neurath Memorial Lectures, 31. London: Thames & Hudson, 2000. Print.
    • Leach, Neil, David Turnbull, and Chris William, eds. Digital Tectonics. Hoboken, NJ: Wiley-Academy, 2004. Print
    • Leerberg, Thomas. “Blur by Diller & Scofidio.” Leerberg.com. Designskolen Kolding, 25 Apr. 2006. Web. 15 Sept. 2007. <http://thl.dskd.dk/view.php/page/BLUR>.
    • Loke, Seng. Context-Aware Pervasive Systems. Boca Raton, FL: Auerbach Publications, 2006. Print.
    • [CrossRef]
    • Manovich, Lev. “The Poetics of Augmented Space.” Visual Communication 5 (2006): 219-240. Print.
    • [CrossRef]
    • —. “Software Takes Command.” Software Studies. Software Studies, 2008. Web. 20 Nov. 2008. <http://lab.softwarestudies.com/2008/11/softbook.html>.
    • Marino, Mark C. “Critical Code Studies.” Electronic Book Review. Electropoetics, 4 Dec. 2006. Web. 11 Jan 2009. <http://www.electronicbookreview.com/thread/electropoetics/codology>.
    • McCullough, Malcolm. Digital Ground : Architecture, Pervasive Computing, and Environmental Knowing. Cambridge, Mass.: MIT Press, 2004. Print.
    • Milgram, Paul, and Fumio Kishino. “Taxonomy of Mixed Reality Visual Displays.” IEICE Transactions on Information and Systems E77-D.12 (1994): 1321-1329. Print.
    • Nancy, Jean-Luc. Being Singular Plural. Stanford, Calif.: Stanford University Press, 2000. Print.
    • —. Corpus. Berlin: Diaphanes, 2003. Print.
    • —. “Salut to You, Salut to the Blind We Become.” On Touching, Jean-Luc Nancy. Ed. Jacques Derrida. Stanford: Stanford University Press, 2005. 313-314. Print.
    • —. The Sense of the World. Minneapolis: University of Minnesota Press, 1997. Print.
    • Nye, David E. American Technological Sublime. Cambridge, Mass.: MIT Press, 1994. Print.
    • Pallasmaa, Juhani. The Eyes of the Skin: Architecture and the Senses. Hoboken, NJ: John Wiley & Sons, 2005. Print.
    • Perrella, Stephen, ed. Hypersurface Architecture. New York: John Wiley & Sons, 1998. Print.
    • —, ed. Hypersurface Architecture II. New York: John Wiley & Sons, 1999. Print.
    • Robinson, Philip, Harald Valt, and Waleed Wagealla, eds. Privacy, Security, and Trust within the Context of Pervasive Computing. New York: Springer, 2005. Print.
    • [CrossRef]
    • Rubin, Ben. “Diller + Scofidio: The Blur Building, National Expo 2002, Yverdon-les-Bains, Switzerland.” ProHosting, n.d. Web. 15 Sept. 2007. <http://hammer.prohosting.com/~soa/diller/>.
    • Ryan, Marie-Laure. Possible Worlds, Artificial Intelligence, and Narrative Theory. Bloomington: Indiana University Press, 1991. Print.
    • Schafer, Ashley. “Designing Inefficiencies.” Scanning: The Aberrant Architectures of Diller + Scofidio. Ed. Aaron Betsky. New York: Whitney Museum of American Art, 2003. 93-102. Print.
    • Simondon, Gilbert. Du Mode D’existence Des Objets Techniques. Paris: Aubier, 1989.
    • —. L’individuation Psychique Et Collective. Paris: Aubier, 1989. Print.
    • Simonot, Béatrice. “Strategies and Tactics.” Archilab’s Future House: Radical Experiments in Living Space. Eds. Marie-Ange Brayer and Béatrice Simonot. London: Thames & Hudson, 2002. 10-13. Print.
    • Spuybroek, Lars. “The Motorization of Reality.” Archis 11 (1998): 18-21. Print.
    • Starobinski, Jean. L’oeil Vivant, Essai. Paris: Gallimard, 1961. Print.
    • Steventon, Alan, and Steve Wright. Intelligent Spaces. London: Springer, 2006. Print.
    • [CrossRef]
    • Stiegler, Bernard. Technics and Time. Vol. 1: The Fault of Epimetheus. Stanford: Stanford University Press, 1998. Print.
    • Streitz, Norbert A., Achilles Kameas, and Irene Mavrommati, eds. The Disappearing Computer. Berlin: Springer, 2007. Print.
    • [CrossRef]
    • Thacker, Eugene. Biomedia. Minneapolis: University of Minnesota Press, 2004. Print.
    • —. The Global Genome: Biotechnology, Politics, and Culture. Cambridge, Mass.: MIT Press, 2005. Print.
    • Vasseleu, Cathryn. Textures of Light: Vision and Touch in Irigaray, Levinas, and Merleau-Ponty. New York: Routledge, 1998. Print.
    • [CrossRef]
    • Wachowski, Andy and Larry Wachoski, dirs. The Matrix. Warner Brothers, 1999. DVD.
    • Wardrip-Fruin, Noah. Expressive Processing. Cambridge, Mass.: MIT Press, forthcoming 2009.
    • Weiser, Mark. “The Computer for the 21st Century.” Xerox.com. n.p., 1991. Web. 1 Sept. 2009. <http://nano.xerox.com/hypertext/weiser/SciAmDraft3.html>.
    • —, R. Gold, and J. S. Brown. “The Origins of Ubiquitous Computing Research at PARC in the Late 1980s.” Pervasive Computing 38.4 (1999): n. pag. Web..
    • Wolfe, Cary. “Lose the Building: Systems Theory, Architecture, and Diller+Scofidio’s Blur.” Postmodern Culture 16.3 (2006): n. pag. Web.
    • [Project MUSE]
    • Schm1822. “The Blur Building by Diller & Scofidio.” YouTube. YouTube, 16 Feb. 2009. Web. 15 Sept. 2009. <http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=0WT5Lu1MKYs>.
    • Zavatta, Sylvie. “Preface.” Back to the Front: Tourisms of War. Eds. Elizabeth Diller and Ricardo Scofidio. New York: Princeton Architectural Press, 1994. 8-17. Print.

     

  • Unknowing Susan Sontag’s Regarding: Recutting with Georges Bataille

    Louis Kaplan (bio)
    University of Toronto
    louis.kaplan@utoronto.ca

    Abstract
     
    This essay reviews and challenges Susan Sontag’s use and abuse of Georges Bataille in her last book, Regarding the Pain of Others. Sontag takes up Bataille’s understanding of and fascination with a group of Chinese torture (or lingchi) photographs from the beginning of the twentieth century. Her somber reading glosses over Bataille’s “anguished gaiety” in the face of these images and his post-Nietzschean tendency to laugh in the face of the impossible. Sontag overlooks Bataille’s atheological and iconoclastic approach to these images steeped in transgression and non-knowledge in an attempt to frame his thinking as somehow full of religious meaning and allied to the Christian transmutation of suffering into sacrifice. Bound to a restricted (or Hegeilian) economy that remains servile to knowledge, Sontag’s encounter with these images misses the opportunity to acknowledge the sovereign (and comic) operation as “absolute rending” inscribed in an excessive economy without reserve. Unlike Sontag in Regarding, Bataille looks to these deathly images in terms of an ethics of the impossible and risks bringing together non-knowledge, laughter, and tears. The essay concludes with a look at the limits of Sontag’s analysis of Jeff Wall’s Dead Troops Talk to underscore the profound practical joke that non-knowledge plays on those who would seek to turn death into a pedagogical exercise. The essay also suggests the relevance of Jean-Luc Nancy’s thinking about such images (and photography in general) beyond the logic of representation and in terms of exposure (or of being posed in exteriority).

     

     

     

    Real reading goes forward unknowing, it always opens a book like an unjustifiable cut in the supposed continuum of meaning. It must go astray at this break.
     

    –Jean-Luc Nancy, “Exscription”

     
    In confronting the visual representation of pain and suffering as its object of study and the role that the medium of photography plays in this global enterprise, Susan Sontag’s final book Regarding the Pain of Others (2003) has served as a touchstone for post-9/11 political and ethical debates, especially in connection with the amorphous “war on terror” that has been waged during the Bush administration, when the state of emergency became standard in American foreign policy.1 The book took on an even greater resonance in the spring of 2004 with the release of the Abu Ghraib torture photographs in Iraq and against the backdrop of revelations of the harsh treatment of prisoners (or so-called “enemy combatants”) in Guantanamo Bay.2Regarding the Pain of Others contains Sontag’s conscientious reflections and objections to the images of death and destruction that constitute the genres of war and torture photography (see cover art). Her account traces the venerable history of war photography from Roger Fenton’s propagandistic images in the Crimean War that served the nationalist agenda of the British sovereign in 1855 through the Golden Age of photojournalism featuring the auteurship of such celebrated figures as Robert Capa and W. Eugene Smith in the Spanish Civil War and World War II to more recent examples of the horrors and disasters of war in places like Rwanda, Somalia, and Sarajevo. Completely lacking in photographic illustrations, Sontag’s survey carefully avoids visual spectacle. Instead, the book features an onslaught of horrific photographs that flash up and pass away in the minds’ eyes of her readers. Eduardo Cadava theorizes the reading and regarding of photographic images as a way we learn about death—as a way of “learning to die.”3 As Cadava and others argue, this lesson relies in large part on the relationship of the photographic image to time—as it exposes finitude and mortality as markers of our being-in-common.4 While one is tempted to generalize this as the property of every photograph, it is the unfortunate characteristic of war photography that it puts the corpse (of the dead soldier or civilian) and the ruin (of the destroyed building) at the center of its action. As Sontag writes quite early in her book and in a manner that articulates her view that the photograph is an indexical trace of the referent and therefore cannot but tell the truth: “Look, the photographs say, this is what it’s like. This is what war does. And that, that is what it does, too. War tears, rends. War rips open, eviscerates. War scorches. War dismembers. War ruins” (Regarding 8). Sontag’s description of what war photography does foregrounds a litany of destruction–of violent actions that rip open and break apart the body politic and the soldiers who serve its commands (tearing, rending, dismembering, ruining, etc.). But rather than envisioning these images as indexical traces to be comprehended in terms of a transparent logic of appearance (“this is what it’s like”), it would be more to the point in the face of the destruction and the havoc wreaked by and in these images to view these photographs as deadly exposures that occur at the limits of meaning and understanding. Here I am recalling the etymological root of exposure as “being posed in exteriority.”5 Such deadly exposures and scorched illuminations put both photography and the reading of photographs on a perpetual war footing.
     
    It is interesting to note that the violent imagery that is conjured here—of tearing and rending, of ripping open and eviscerating—returns later in the book with Sontag’s close reading of a photograph that depicts the infamous Chinese torture of a hundred cuts (lingchi). This leads Sontag to the ideas and desires of Georges Bataille and to a group of lingchi photographs derived from the beginning of the twentieth century, from before this practice was outlawed in China in 1905. The images were taken by French troops stationed in cities like Beijing and Tianjin and were first published by Louis Carpeaux just a few years later in France. These photographs were to become a crucial site for philosophical reflection (as well as Buddhist meditation) throughout Bataille’s life, especially after he was given one of these images as a present by his psychoanalyst, Dr. Adrien Borel, in 1925. While Sontag seeks to enlist Bataille’s support for her own arguments, the question remains whether this post-Nietzschean philosopher of laughter and unknowing can be made to serve the somber rhetoric of Sontag’s Regarding. For when Bataille introduces us to something like absolute dismemberment or rending in one of his subversive readings of Hegel and the master/slave dialectic, it is framed in terms of the complicated (or even tortuous) concept of anguished gaiety. In contrast to Sontag, Bataille writes in “Hegel, Death, and Sacrifice” with the blackest of humors: “On the contrary, gaiety, connected with the work of death, causes me anguish, is accentuated by anguish, and in return exacerbates that anguish: ultimately, gay anguish, anguished gaiety cause me, in a feverish chill, ‘absolute dismemberment,’ where it is my joy that finally tears me apart, but where dejection would follow joy were I not torn all the way to the end, immeasurably” (25). What happens to the anguished gaiety of Bataille’s gaze upon the work of death and dismemberment and/as the (immeasurable) loss of meaning, which he associates with a practice of sovereignty, that could only take place at the limits or the interruption of discourse—what happens to that gaiety when it becomes appropriated by Sontag’s Regarding, enmeshed as it is in a discourse that seeks to give a sense and a meaning to the pain of others and that thereby practices a form of Hegelian mastery that would claim to avoid the loss of meaning? In this regard, Sontag’s confident and transparent assertions about the photography of war and its horrors (with statements like “this is what it’s like”) mirror Hegel’s The Phenomenology of Spirit and a practice of lordship and mastery (Herrschaft) wherein, as Bataille states, “[d]ismemberment is, on the contrary, full of meaning” (27).6
     
    It is important to stress that Sontag’s discussion of the lingchi photographs never invokes Bataille’s practice of sovereignty and its impossible (or even laughable) relationship with death. According to Arkady Plotnitsky, the sovereign operation marks for Bataille the “irreducible loss of meaning which is also always excessive, in particular with respect to any possibility of containing it by presence, consciousness, or meaning.”7 The sovereign operation would disenable Sontag from making sense of the pain of others through the medium of photography and to enlist these images as a type of moral knowledge that is therefore full of meaning. In addition to ignoring the sovereign operation, Sontag overlooks Bataille’s engagement with general economy as the science or the theory of such sovereign practice that manifests at the level of political economy. Finally, rather than acknowledging Bataille’s (non)concept of nonknowledge (nonsavoir) in relationship to the lingchi photograph, Sontag insists that the contemplation of this image offers “a liberation of tabooed erotic knowledge” (Regarding 98). In these ways, Sontag’s writing on Bataille remains embroiled in a practice of mastery and in a restricted economy that excludes the practice of sovereignty. However, this is not to overlook that Bataille’s sovereign operation also involves mastery within certain reconfigured limits.8 This recalls one of the crucial points that Jacques Derrida makes in his groundbreaking essay on Bataille, “From Restricted to General Economy: A Hegelianism Without Reserve.” Derrida insists that the sovereign operation reconfigures meaning by marking its limits within an excessive field of chance, nonsense, play, and non-knowledge. This is exactly how Bataille practices a “Hegelianism without reserve” and why Derrida writes that unreserved play or chance includes the work of meaning not in terms of any regime of knowledge but in terms of the force of inscription. In the sovereign operation, meaning becomes a function of play and non-knowledge through a process of reinscription or what Jean-Luc Nancy calls “exscription.” Derrida’s review of Hegel’s blindspots would also apply to Sontag’s Regarding the Pain of Others in terms of its “conscientious suspension of play” in the face of the disasters of war. Derrida writes that
     

    Hegel has bet against play, against chance. He has blinded himself to the possibility of his own bet, to the fact that the conscientious suspension of play (for example, the passage through the certitude of oneself and through lordship as the independence of self-consciousness) was itself a phase of play; and to the fact that play includes the work of meaning or the meaning of work, and includes them not in terms of knowledge, but in terms of inscription: meaning is a function of play, is inscribed in a certain place in the configuration of a meaningless play.
     

    (260)

     
    We also need to ask what happens to Sontag’s Regarding and the insistence that “the moral capacity of the photograph is repeatedly defined by its relative ability to confer knowledge and understanding on the viewer” (Beckman 119) if and when one applies Bataille’s radical and unconditional unknowing to it. What is to be done in the face of Bataille’s sovereign insistence upon the “exscription” of meaning? How does one regard that which seeks to expose what Jean-Luc Nancy has called the “infinite discharge of meaning” or that which “withdraws from all signification” (“Exscription” 64)?9 This essay addresses such questions by comparing the ways Sontag and Bataille analyze and interpret—as well as fail to analyze and interpret—these infamous and painful lingchi photographs poised at the limits of the sayable and the knowable. In contrast to Sontag’s mastery, Bataille’s (non)concepts (e.g., sovereignty, unknowledge) and the specialized ways in which he deploys them seek to make meaning slide—or even to go beyond meaning—as they laugh in the face of death and the impossible. Following Nancy, the goal of unknowing Sontag’s regarding would be “to read in every line the work or the play of writing against meaning” (62). For a long time, scholars believed that the images that were in Bataille’s possession illustrated the torture of the political prisoner Fu-Zhu-Li, who had been found guilty of the murder of Prince Ao-Han-Oun and who was executed by lingchi on April 10, 1905. However, recent research by Jérôme Bourgon at the East Asian Institute at the University of Lyon has clarified that the victim in Bataille’s photographs was not actually Fu-Zhu-Li but another, unknown criminal from the same period.10 There are eight extant images from this execution, and four of them were published by Bataille in the final section of The Tears of Eros, his magisterial survey that examines the history of art at the intersection of eroticism and death.11 The confusion stems from the addition of a caption in the book that accompanies one of the photographs and that recites Carpeaux’s summary of the execution of Fu-Zhu-Li. Offering readers a date for one of these images that turns out to be five years later than the abolition of lingchi in the Chinese penal code, Sontag introduces the image in the following way:
     

    One of the great theorists of the erotic, Georges Bataille, kept a photograph taken in China in 1910 of a prisoner undergoing ‘the death of a hundred cuts’ on his desk, where he could look at it every day. (Since become legendary, it is reproduced in the last of Bataille’s books published during his lifetime, in 1961, The Tears of Eros.) ‘This photograph,’ Bataille wrote, ‘had a decisive role in my life. I have never stopped being obsessed by this image of pain, at the same time ecstatic and intolerable.’”
     

    (Regarding 98)

     

    Before delving further into this passage, one notes that an extra cut has taken place in Sontag’s transcription of the citation from The Tears of Eros. While the original quotation has a question mark after the word “ecstatic”—”ecstatic(?)”—this has been cut out of Sontag’s version, making for a world of difference. While Sontag calls Bataille the philosopher of Eros, she does not mention here that he is the philosopher for whom Eros is always bound to Thanatos, the promiscuous coupling of sexuality and death that is not that far from Bataille’s Surrealist nemesis Andre Breton’s concept of “convulsive beauty” to which Sontag also refers elsewhere in the book (Regarding 23). This contrasts with an earlier essay, “The Pornographic Imagination,” in which Sontag writes that what “Bataille exposes in extreme erotic experience is its subterranean connection with death” (61). In this context, one also recalls the title of one of Bataille’s books that binds Eros and Thanatos via the violent acts of the sensual body—Erotism: Death and Sensuality. In the “Introduction,” Bataille states the following formula: “Eroticism, it may be said, is assenting to life up to the point of death” (11). The paradoxical formula structures erotism as an exuberance of life that strives for death as its limit experience. Bataille sees death as the continuity of being that discontinuous beings strive for in the passionate embrace of erotic activity. In light of Bataille’s formulation, it is not surprising that the orgasmic climax of sexual release is called the petit mort. The domain of eroticism is marked by violation and the transgression of discontinuous bodies. Bataille writes about this in a way that again invokes the limit. “What does physical eroticism signify if not a violation of the very being of its practitioners?—a violation bordering on death, bordering on murder?” (17). While ignoring the consequences of nonknowledge, this background about erotic violation unto death helps to flesh out and elucidate Sontag’s assertion in Regarding the Pain of Others that the contemplation of this harrowing and tortuous image and its violent depiction of death involves the “liberation of tabooed erotic knowledge” (Regarding 98).

     

     
    Anonymous, The Chinese Torture of One Hundred Cuts, ca. 1905.

     

    Click for larger view

    Fig. 1.

    Anonymous, The Chinese Torture of One Hundred Cuts, ca. 1905.

     

     

    For Sontag, Bataille clearly had an obsessive and intimate relationship with these photographs, and his regard for them (and upon them) took on the aspect of a daily ritual. In turning and returning to these images, from which others would want to turn away, it seems clear that Bataille wanted to remind himself of something. Sontag comes up with three reasons Bataille would have wanted to gaze upon these gruesome images. These involve taking courage, numbing down, and attesting to injustices. She writes, “As objects of contemplation, images of the atrocious can answer to several different needs. To steel oneself against weakness. To make oneself more numb. To acknowledge the existence of the incorrigible” (Regarding 98). But Sontag does not consider another reason why images of the atrocious can become objects of contemplation, one that was very close to Bataille’s heart: to laugh in the face of death and the impossible. Steeped in solemnity, Sontag’s Regarding does not tap into the resources of the Nietzschean gay science (fröhliche Wissenschaft) that were pivotal to Bataille’s thinking and his laughter.12 Time and again in his writings, Bataille turns to “Nietzsche’s Laughter.” He quotes the following as a laudable model: “To see tragic characters founder and to be able to laugh, despite the profound understanding, emotion and sympathy that we feel: this is divine” (The Unfinished System 22). Bataille’s compulsive return to these images stages an encounter with the impossible that goes far beyond an acknowledgment of the existence of the incorrigible and that remains open to the effects of nonknowledge. But this divine laughter derived from excess and full of anguish cannot be read simply as sadistic pleasure or mere maliciousness, for it acknowledges its own foundering and ruin in the same mortal breath. In meditating on his fascination with this Chinese torture victim in The Inner Experience, Bataille considers laughter in the face of ruin without any hope of salvation: “The young and seductive Chinese man of whom I have spoken, left to the work of the executioner—I loved him with a love in which the sadistic instinct played no part: he communicated his pain to me or perhaps the excessive nature of his pain, and it was precisely that which I was seeking, not so as to take pleasure in it, but in order to ruin in me that which is opposed to ruin” (120). This inclusive view of the photographic exposure of suffering as both shared communication and as anguished gaiety is very different from Sontag’s perspective in an earlier essay, “The Image World” in On Photography, which argues that the “feeling of being exempt from calamity stimulates interest in looking at painful pictures, and looking at them suggests and strengthens the feeling that one is exempt” (168). Sontag’s disregard for this vital strand of anguished gaiety that marks the Bataillian corpus seems peculiar because she began her intellectual career in close connection with the renegades of French Surrealism and their transgressions. First of all, one thinks of her edition of Antonin Artaud: Selected Writings (1976), which includes a considered and affirmative introduction to his work. Even more relevant to this discussion, one recalls her rigorous analysis of the transgressive eroticism of Bataille’s The Story of the Eye in “The Pornographic Imagination,” published in Styles of Radical Will (1969). Sontag pinpoints here the interlocking of death and eroticism that makes Bataille’s work so distinctive. “One reason that Histoire de l’Oeil and Madame Edwarda make such a strong and upsetting impression is that Bataille understood more clearly than any other writer I know of that what pornography is really about, ultimately, isn’t sex but death” (60). However, Sontag does not explore either here or in her last book the comic aspects that arise from Bataille’s investigations of death and the laughable attempt to simulate “absolute risk” in view of the fact that death always remains at the limit of the possible and the knowable.13 Refusing to let go of the gravity of the situation, “The Pornographic Imagination” avoids an encounter with Bataille’s profound levity and the divinity of laughter. Reviewing the philosopher as pornographer, Sontag insists that Bataille’s “more effective method is to invest each action with a weight, a disturbing gravity, that feels authentically ‘mortal’” (61). While there is no argument regarding the importance of mortality as a critical concern in all of Bataille’s thought, the emphasis on its gravity alone is quite disturbing. The rhetoric of authenticity weighs heavily around the laughing philosopher’s neck in this formulation of being as “being-toward-death.” Indeed, Sontag’s analysis has a much too stuffy existentialist air about it that thoroughly represses what Mikkel Borch-Jacobsen has termed the “laughter of being” in a brilliant essay of the same name. For Borch-Jakobsen, Bataille’s engagement with mortality means to “die[] of laughter and laugh[] at dying, bent convulsively over the impossible abyss of his own finitude” (752).

     
    One of the limits of Sontag’s interpretation involves her reading of Bataille’s “high regard” for lingchi in terms of the rhetoric of transfiguration. Sontag’s move aligns Bataille’s obsession with this image with “religious thinking” in general and with the Christian transmutation of suffering into sacrifice in particular. “Bataille is not saying that he takes pleasure at the sight of this excruciation. But he is saying that he can imagine extreme suffering as something more than just suffering, as a kind of transfiguration. It is a view of suffering, of the pain of others, that is rooted in religious thinking, which links pain to sacrifice, sacrifice to exaltation” (Regarding 98-99). This is an odd conclusion for a self-professed atheological and iconoclastic thinker like Bataille who rebels against the pieties and sanctities of Christianity, who refuses the mystification of the afterlife, and who resists sublimation, sublation (Aufhebung), and transfiguration in all forms whether in its Hegelian or in its Christian martyr varieties. Indeed, Bataille follows Nietzsche in understanding salvation as a Christian mode of escape, as “the most odious of evasions” (The Inner Experience 12). This lapsed Catholic refuses to transfigure pain and suffering into a passion of the Christ. Instead, his project is to contaminate binary oppositions like divine ecstasy and extreme horror. Rather than using the Christian figure of “transfiguration” and its transcendental overtones, it would be more to the atheological point to speak of a radical reversal when referring, as here, to the site of excess and surplus where extreme suffering and joy meet and exchange places. In this way, the “something more” that Sontag invokes would remain on the side of the remainder (restance). After all, Bataille speaks in The Tears of Eros of the “infinite capacity for reversal” (renversement14) and not in terms of transfiguration. Similarly, the figure and the strategy of glissement (what makes meaning slide) is more akin to Bataille’s atheological practice than is the glorification (and the raising on high) of a Christian concept like transfiguration. In staking out an atheological resistance to transfiguration, it is important to mobilize the counterthrust of transgression as that which is vital to Bataille’s pornographic sensibility. Early on Sontag senses this in “The Pornographic Imagination” when she expresses great admiration for Bataille and his “profound sense of transgression” (60) and when she even intimates that Bataille outstrips Marquis de Sade in this respect. In her transformation of transgression into transfiguration, one is left wondering whether the late Sontag did not experience a kind of religious conversion experience herself.
     
    However, it is by no means correct to say that Bataille necessarily makes a connection between sacrifice and a state of exaltation. This glosses over the important distinction that must be made between sovereignty and lordship or mastery (Herrschaft), which offer different approaches to sacrifice and its “meaning.” Sontag’s inattention to this nuance returns us to Bataille’s confrontation with Hegel in the essay “Hegel, Death and Sacrifice.” In Bataille’s reading, Hegel sees the institution of sacrifice as a profoundly human activity that exposes one to death and that allows one to contemplate the work of the negative face to face so that the individual “dwells with it” (18). But Bataille also insists that the Hegelian model of sacrifice is built on a ruse and a subterfuge because the one who sacrifices and who tarries with the negative in this way must stay alive in order to attain mastery. This leads to the following comedic paradox as outlined by Derrida: “To stay alive, to maintain oneself in life, to work, to defer pleasure, to limit the stakes, to have respect for death at the very moment when one looks directly at it—such is the servile condition of mastery and of the entire history it makes possible” (255). Hegel’s conception of sacrifice and of “the servile condition of mastery” therefore always holds something back, in contrast to Bataille’s insistence that “sovereignty is NOTHING” (The Accursed Share Vol. 3 430).15 Bataille exposes the comedy at the heart of Hegel’s theory of sacrifice and the mastery or lordship that it pretends to maintain as sovereignty laughs at the recognition that it needs to stay alive.16 “In the sacrifice, the sacrificer identifies himself with the animal that is struck down dead …. But it is a comedy!” (“Hegel, Death and Sacrifice” 19). Bataille concludes the essay by suggesting that sacrifice remains servile when it is tied to the production of meaning and that it can only become sovereign and approach the state of exaltation when it sacrifices or lets go of meaning and the desire to make a meaning out of death. This is when it becomes, in Derrida’s words, the “heedless sacrifice of presence and meaning” (257). Bataille concludes: “Sacrifice, consequently, is a sovereign, autonomous manner of being only to the extent that it is uninformed by meaningful discourse. To the extent that discourse informs it, what is sovereign is given in terms of servitude. Indeed by definition what is sovereign does not serve” (25-26). Returning to Sontag, this close reading helps to qualify her statement that the state of exaltation necessarily follows from sacrifice while foregrounding that her own relationship to (the representation of) pain and sacrifice remains servile because she earnestly wants to figure out “What to do with such knowledge as photographs bring of faraway suffering” (99) rather than opening up to the burst of sovereign laughter that arises out of these photographic exposures of and to nonknowledge. In this context, it is well to recall a pithy statement from Bataille in the lecture “Nonknowledge, Laughter and Tears,” where he underscores that “the unknown makes us laugh(The Unfinished System 135).
     
    One can also take issue with Sontag’s assurance that “Bataille is not saying that he takes pleasure at the sight of this excruciation” (98-99). Sontag is careful here not to make Bataille into a sexual pervert or sadist who would derive pleasure from the witnessing of violent torture. Nevertheless, the attempt to shield Bataille completely from the pleasure principle and from any enjoyment of this image can only be done at the expense of overlooking those transgressive aspects of his work. In “The Tears of Photography,” Herta Wolf accurately pinpoints such ambivalent combinations as “agony and laughter” (74) and “laughter and mourning” (77) that are crucial to The Tears of Eros as a whole and that Sontag does not articulate in her analysis of Bataille. Given Bataille’s complex ideas about laughter and tears, pleasure and pain are intertwined in an impossible knot that cannot be so easily disentangled when it comes to his experience of the lingchi photographs. Derrida is also fascinated by the anguished burst of Bataillian laughter that breaks out when confronted with the comedy of Hegelian philosophy, with its notion of sublation (Aufhebung) that works to preserve meaning, and with the idealist conceit that “nothing must be definitely lost in death” (256-257). Derrida continues, “Absolute comicalness is the anguish experienced when confronted by expenditure on lost funds, by the absolute sacrifice of meaning: a sacrifice without return and without reserves” (257). It is this unsavory mixture of anguish spiked with laughter that Bataille experiences when casting his eyes upon the excruciating losses suffered by the lingchi victims, by these sacrifices without return and without reserves. Indeed, Bataille’s horrifying laughter affirms the absolute rending that cannot be contained by the Hegelian (or Sontagian) work of the negative. One encounters the same type of laughter in Bataille’s erotic classic The Story of the Eye, but here the tone becomes more mocking, shocking, and scandalous. It should be recalled that the pseudonymous and excremental author of this book is Lord Auch, a shortened form of aux chiottes (to the shithouse). In light of this discussion, Lord Auch should be viewed in the context of the passage from lordship to sovereignty. Bataille’s biographer Michael Surya believes that “[o]f all the books he wrote it is certainly the one in which laughter is the most perceptible” and that it marks the “obscene laugh of an apostate” (102). The sexual and criminal adventures of the narrator, Simone, and of Sir Edmond as they carouse their way through Spain and that climax in their murder and rape of a Catholic priest laughs in the face of Christian pieties and organized religious institutions and elucidates another facet of Bataille’s atheological deployment of a derisive and obscene laughter that functions as a mode of transgression.
     
    Returning to Sontag’s review of the Chinese torture victim, one notices that she conflates him with the Christian martyr by bridging the religious symbolism of Eastern and Western visual cultures. While Bataille’s original publication contains an illustration of Aztec human sacrifice (ca. 1500) to serve as a visual comparison with the Chinese torture victim, Sontag fixes on the figure of Saint Sebastian. Rather than attributing the comfortably numbed expression on the victim’s face to the administration of a dose of opium (which both Bataille and his biographer Michael Surya mention17), Sontag refers to “a look on his upturned face as ecstatic as that of any Italian Renaissance Saint Sebastian” (Regarding 98). Sontag invokes a comparison with this Christian saint and martyr whom the Roman emperor Diocletian in the third century A.D. had tied to a post and shot through with arrows. Saint Sebastian would become a favorite subject of many paintings of the Renaissance such as those by the Paduan artist Andrea Mantegna in the late 1400s. The ecstatic again becomes an unmarked term for Sontag as it is placed in the redemptive light of both Christian salvation and Renaissance art. However, it is important to reiterate that Bataille introduces the term “ecstatic” at the beginning of the section “Chinese Torture” in The Tears of Eros with a question mark.18 There is a mark of uncertainty as to whether Bataille feels comfortable in invoking this term in reference to the Chinese torture victim. Even when Bataille refers to ecstasy without question or mark further on in this same text, it is not to be taken uncategorically as something that is revelatory or that offers salvation. The ambivalence and the capacity for radical reversal continue here as “religious ecstasy” is coupled with that perverse mode of eroticism known as “sadism” (206), and is then followed by the unnatural pairing of “divine ecstasy and its opposite, extreme horror” (207). In these ways, the ecstatic in The Tears of Eros inscribes a contaminating movement of transgression rather than a state of redemptive transfiguration. It also should be recalled that the ecstatic is inextricably linked for Bataille to the pursuit of sovereignty. Bataille’s atheological pursuit of ecstasy at the limits of knowledge leaves one with that same empty-headed feeling from which laughter bursts–anguished gaiety. As he says, “I would gladly define ecstasy: feeling gay but anguished—from my immeasurable stupidity.”19 In contrast to any knowledge of the ecstatic that could be derived from Sontag’s comparative investigations of art historical discourse along with its gallery of tortured figures of Christian piety, Bataille’s transgressive unknowing empties out onto a logical abyss in an aporetic structure that confronts the “identity of these perfect contraries” (Tears of Eros 207).
     
    In resisting Sontag’s theological recuperation of the lingchi photographs, it is also important to remember that according to Bataille’s atheological investigations of the religious life and the spiritual domain, “God is an effect of nonknowledge” (The Unfinished System 146). Atheology—as the study of the effects of nonknowledge—can take many forms, but for Bataille it always places us in relation to something impossible. As Bataille writes in (and with) “Nietzsche’s Laughter,” “Fundamentally, the spiritual domain is that of the impossible. I will say that ecstasy, sacrifice, tragedy, poetry, laughter are forms whereby life situates itself in proportion to the impossible” (The Unfinished System 21). The impossible—where knowledge ends and where sovereign laughter breaks out—must have its place when Regarding the Pain of Others, when reading these war photographic exposures of pain, suffering, and death. However, such sovereign laughter has been repressed in Sontag’s account of the pain of others, where for her, the only morally sanctioned sentiments appear to be mourning and memorializing and where any other response is viewed as disrespectful or morally suspect. Faced with such images, Sontag writes: “No one after a certain age has the right to this kind of innocence, of superficiality, to this degree of ignorance, or amnesia. There now exists a vast repository of images that make it harder to maintain this kind of moral defectiveness” (Regarding 114-115). But from Bataille’s perspective, an account that takes these images as deadly serious and that seeks to learn from them leads only to mental servitude. One sees again how Sontag’s Regarding cannot extricate herself from Hegelian dialectics as she disregards Bataille’s sovereign insistence that “[t]aking death seriously tends one toward servitude” (The Unfinished System 254).
     
    In contrast, Bataille reinscribes the concept of ignorance in terms of the (non)concept of nonknowledge. Bataille addresses this point at the conclusion of “Nonknowledge, Laughter, and Tears” in his discussion of Ernest Hemingway’s writings. “In any case, it seems to me that if what is seductive about Hemingway, which is connected to ignorance, might be attained by us, it can only be attained on one condition, that of having first been to the end of the possibilities of knowing. It is only beyond knowledge, perhaps in the nonknowledge that I have presented, that we could conquer the right to ignorance” (The Unfinished System 150). While Sontag’s ignorance bespeaks of an innocence to which no one has a right anymore, Bataille’s is a second naivete that we must earn the right to have once again. Bataille’s ignorance is not constituted by the gaps within knowledge that are waiting to be filled. Instead, ignorance comes from “having first been to the end of the possibilities of knowing” (150). It is something derived from coming up against the limits of knowledge (as a limit experience), and it can in no way be considered as a moral defect. In contrast to Sontag’s version, ignorance of the type that goes beyond knowledge inhabits this photographic discourse of death and the sovereign loss of its meaning by necessity, and it is in a state of such ignorance that an anguished laughter bursts out. For the consequences of nonknowledge lead to the reversal of any grim apprehension of these images. In “The Consequences of Nonknowledge,” Bataille babbles: “Faced with nonknowledge, I experienced the feeling of performing in a comedy, of having a kind of weakness in my position. At the same time, I am in front of you as a babbler, offering all the reasons I would have for keeping my mouth shut” (The Unfinished System 115). Unlike Sontag’s Regarding, Bataille looks to these deathly images in terms of an ethics of the impossible and risks bringing together nonknowledge, laughter, and tears.20
     
    The comically repressed returns with a vengeance, however, at the end of Regarding the Pain of Others. For the photographic encounter with nonknowledge and the question of sovereign laughter (laughing at nothing) invades Sontag’s final analysis of Jeff Wall’s theatrical tableau, Dead Troops Talk (A vision after an ambush of a Red Army patrol, near Moqor, Afghanistan, winter 1986), 1992. Interestingly enough, Dead Troops Talk is the only avowedly fictional and staged photograph that is analyzed in the book, and perhaps this is what gives Sontag the license to speculate and to imagine at the limits and to move beyond the “truth-telling” approach to photography that guides her reading of the lingchi images and of the numerous photojournalistic images that depict the horrors of war. But before turning to a closer analysis of Wall’s image, it is necessary to review (and to question) Sontag’s theorization of the photograph and her arguments as to why and how the photograph offers a privileged mode of representation. Sontag emphasizes here that Bataille’s object of contemplation is a photograph rather than a painting, an indexical trace of the real rather than an iconic likeness governed by mimesis, and she consciously differentiates it from Titian’s mythological painting of The Flaying of Marsyas (ca. 1575). It is “a photograph, not a painting; a real Marsyas, not a mythic one—and still alive in the picture” (Regarding 98). It could be argued that the sobriety of Sontag’s account is derived in large part from her assumptions about photographs as bearers and witnesses of the truth of the world and in providing documentary evidence of its atrocities. It also should be noted that Sontag asserts this point of view in spite of the fact that she recounts a few well-known historical examples of manipulated war photographs in the book. But Sontag’s discussion of Alexander Gardner’s Home of a Rebel Sharpshooter, Gettysburg (1863) and of other staged images is still predicated on the assumption that the photograph is indexical of truth. So while we may be “surprised to learn [that] they were staged, and always disappointed” (Regarding 55), the existence of such images in no way challenges the view that even these photographs are tied to the (falsified) real. Sontag asserts that the superiority of photography over painting and other earlier modes of representation is derived from its status as a physical trace and that this is particularly important when dealing with the remembrance of things past and in respect to the dead. “Ever since cameras were invented in 1839, photography has kept company with death. Because an image produced with a camera is, literally, a trace of something brought before the lens, photographs were superior to any painting as a memento of the vanished past and the dear departed” (Regarding 24).
     
    In keeping company with death in this way, photography forges our being-in-common and utters the truth of community. This recalls Jean-Luc Nancy’s definition of community in (and of) The Inoperative Community. Nancy writes, “A community is the presentation to its members of their mortal truth” (15). In recalling death as the (groundless) ground of community, photographic theory that is responsive to such “community exposed photography” affords another approach. This is a point of view that is less concerned with Sontag’s emphasis on indexical reference and much more interested in photography as that which exposes the limits of our knowing. An expository approach to photography, with its emphasis on exposure (as being posed in exteriority), provides being-in-common with both the medium of its sharing and the incompleteness of its sharing. In The Tears of Eros, Bataille moves away from indexical concerns (e.g., the acknowledgement of the veracity of photographic representation) toward the way in which these images of torture touch him in a visceral way and expose him to the anguish and intoxication of the mortal truth of community. Such an exposure is accompanied by a distribution of the sensible that fails to make sense. Confronted by this state of unknowing, Bataille comments that “this straightforward image of a tortured man” opens up “the most anguishing of worlds accessible to us through images captured on film” (Tears 205). These Chinese torture photographs foreground for Bataille the experience of limits situated at the precipice of non-knowledge, laughter, and tears. They leave us with question marks and lay bare the disquieting magnitude of a horror at the heart of being human that remains very difficult to accept or comprehend fully. Contemplating the same torture photographs in Guilty, Bataille asks rhetorically: “Who can accept that a horror of this magnitude would express ‘what you are’ and lay bare your nature?” (39).21 While Sontag’s book certainly does review how images of war and torture induce a range of emotions from horror to numbness to compassion, such considerations move analysis away from the concrete moral knowledge obtained from the contemplation of these images as photographic indices. In contrast to Bataille’s naked exposures of a loss or surplus of meaning, Sontag’s focus on (and regarding of) the pain of others seeks to make sense of suffering and loss and to ask “What to do with such knowledge as photographs bring of faraway suffering” (Regarding 99).
     
    In reviewing Sontag’s writings on photography, one notices that Regarding the Pain of Others is just one of a number of occasions when Sontag relies on a medium-specific binary opposition between painting and photography and in a way that privileges photography and its relationship to truth or reality. In “The Heroism of Vision,” Sontag offers the conventional wisdom that the photograph represents the truth that painterly mimesis cannot hope to capture, locating the basis for this position in nineteenth-century discourses and aligning this belief with the ethics of realism found in both “literary models” and “independent journalism.” Sontag writes:
     

    The consequences of lying have to be more central for photography than they ever can be for painting, because the flat, usually rectangular images which are photographs make a claim to be true that paintings can never make. A fake painting (one whose attribution is false) falsifies the history of art. A fake photograph (one which has been retouched or tampered with, or whose caption is false) falsifies reality. The history of photography could be recapitulated as the struggle between two different imperatives: beautification, which comes from the fine arts, and truth-telling, which is measured not only by a notion of value-free truth, a legacy from the sciences, but by a moralized ideal of truth-telling, adapted from nineteenth-century literary models and from the (then) new profession of independent journalism.”
     

    (On Photography 86)

     

    Here Sontag opens up photography to the larger discursive spaces of the nineteenth century and argues that it shares the space of “truth telling” with the empirical sciences, investigative reporting, literary realism, and the disciplinary practice of history itself. All of these discourses share a belief in the transparency of their signifiers (whether using language, laboratory equipment, or images) to access the truth of the real. In delivering the physical trace of the referent in its images, photographic realism again grounds its claims to truth telling in its indexical status. By insisting upon the further dichotomy between “beautification” (derived from the fine arts) and “truth-telling” (derived from the sciences), Sontag finds yet another way to contrast photography and painting and to reinforce the binary opposition between the photographic index and the painterly icon.

     
    This semiotic distinction between photographs and paintings as two distinct types of signs has its source and fullest expression in the writings of Charles Saunders Peirce at the end of the nineteenth century. Peirce differentiates photographs from mimetic likenesses or icons because photos are direct emanations and/or physical traces of the referent. Peirce writes, “this resemblance is due to the photographs having been produced under such circumstances that they were physically forced to correspond point by point to nature. In that aspect, then, they belong to the second class of signs, those by physical connection” (106). As smoke is to fire or as a footprint is to the foot that deposited it, so is the photograph to its reference. In “The Image World,” Sontag alludes directly to one of Peirce’s examples and adds another of her own (in a way that furthers the relationship of photography and death) as she again privileges the photograph over painting on account of the material structure of the trace.
     

    [A] photograph is not only an image (as a painting is an image), an interpretation of the real; it is also a trace, something directly stenciled off the real, like a footprint or a death mask. While a painting, even one that meets photographic standards of resemblance, is never more than the stating of an interpretation, a photograph is never less than the registering of an emanation (light waves reflected by objects)—a material vestige of its subject in a way that no painting can be.
     

    (On Photography 154)

     

    From a postmodern perspective, this is a bold and dangerous claim because it would keep photography immune from Nietzsche’s famous dictum that there are “no facts, only interpretations” by granting it a sacred space of registration and emanation that is somehow exempt from either a logic of mediation or an ideological contest of positions. Nietzsche’s dictum is useful for challenging any dogmatic acceptance of photographic facts because it insists that the facticity ascribed to photography by Sontag on account of its indexical status is virtually meaningless without its immediate immersion into a field of interpretative contexts and possibilities. One can apply Nietzsche’s query in The Genealogy of Morals to Sontag as follows: “What does that mean? For this fact has to be interpreted: in itself it just stands there, stupid to all eternity, like every ‘thing-in-itself’” (107). The invocation of Nietzsche here is also particularly apt for a critique of the author of Regarding the Pain of Others in that Nietzsche does not believe that even pain is immune from the work (and play) of interpretation and the specificity of context. To recite The Genealogy of Morals, “I consider even ‘psychological pain’ to be not a fact but only an interpretation” (129). With an absolute insistence on the photograph as the material trace of the absent referent, Sontag uses the medium of photography to make a claim about knowledge (and certainty) that is a far cry from Nietzsche’s ongoing suspicion of the claim to the noumenon (and the numinous) or from Bataille’s incessant and insistent practice of unknowing. The aforementioned quotation from Sontag, with its privileging of photography over painting on the grounds of indexical registration and emanation, would also be rather troubling to Bataille in light of his views on sovereignty and loss. It is as if Sontag wants to use this presumption about the certainty of the index as a means to catapult discussion about photography beyond troubling questions that come with representation and the opening of a necessary gap between the referent and the indexical trace. But there always has to be an excess of or loss in photographic representation, and one can argue that this is exactly the type of irreducible loss that defines the sovereignty that is championed by Bataille. As Uziel Awret puts it, “For Batailles [sic], ‘sovereignty’ denotes a form of theoretical thinking that accounts for the irreducible loss in representation and meaning that any representation entails” (28-29). The fact that Sontag remains immune to the possibility of such a contamination of the real and its transparency by the apparatus of representation points to the ultimately modernist presuppositions of her photo-critical project in Regarding the Pain of Others.

     
    Another pressure on the truth claims that Sontag attributes to the photographic index has come with the rise of digital photography. Digital media are closely connected to a painterly and iconic mode of rendering even if they visually simulate the indexical signs of photographic media. This relation has been widely theorized by writers on digital photography such as Florian Rötzer, Lev Manovich, and Peter Lunenfeld. Lunenfeld’s essay “Art Post-History: Digital Photography and Electronic Semiotics” is particularly relevant for this discussion because he specifically takes up this rupture with the Peircean legacy in the section “Semiotics, Photography & Truth Value of the Electronic Image.” Lunenfeld argues, “The inherent mutability of the digital image poses a challenge to those who have striven to create a semiotic of the photographic” (94). Taking his cue from Hollis Frampton and putting pressure on indexical truth, Lunenfeld invokes the phrase “dubitative” (or inclined to doubt) to characterize the digital image and its reinsertion of the painterly icon into photography. “What has happened to this class of signs, and to the semiotics of the image in general, with the advent of digital photography? With electronic imaging, the digital photographic apparatus approaches what Hollis Frampton refers to as painting’s ‘dubitative’ processes: like the painter, the digital photographer ‘fiddles around with the picture till it looks right’” (95). The rhetoric of the dubitatively digital and the doubt it tends to produce would appear to be more in line with Bataille’s affirmation of nonknowledge and his suspicion of “a certain stability of things known” (The Unfinished System 133).
     

     
    Jeff Wall, Dead Troops Talk (a vision after an ambush of a Red Army patrol, near Moqor, Afghanistan, winter 1986). 1992. Silver dye bleach transparency in aluminum lightbox, 229 x 417 cm. © Jeff Wall. Courtesy of the artist.

     

    Click for larger view

    Fig. 2.

    Jeff Wall, Dead Troops Talk (a vision after an ambush of a Red Army patrol, near Moqor, Afghanistan, winter 1986). 1992. Silver dye bleach transparency in aluminum lightbox, 229 x 417 cm. © Jeff Wall. Courtesy of the artist.

     

     

    Returning to Jeff Wall’s Dead Troops Talk, it is important to point out that the artist has used digital photography for many years and that this particular image evinces its dubitative quality and iconic characteristics. The digital aspect of Dead Troops Talk must be stressed over and above the overt staging and theatricality of this famous 7 ½ × 13 feet photograph, displayed in a light box, that resonates with the genre of grand history paintings. Breaking with the rhetoric of the index, Wall discusses the “hallucinatory image that [he] wanted to make” in a recent interview. He confesses that “this was one of the first or second things that I ever did with a computer” and that it was “photographing things that could never have happened” so that it became a “kind of a release of all the constraints of the actual photography.”22Dead Troops Talk is also described in the recent Tate Modern retrospective on Wall’s photography as follows: “The figures were photographed separately or in small groups and the final image was assembled as a digital montage.”23 While Sontag refers to Dead Troops Talk as “the antithesis of a document” (123) in Regarding the Pain of Others, she does not mention that digital manipulation is part and parcel of its fabrication. This oversight further illustrates that while Sontag can acknowledge the constructed nature of this photograph (because this does not challenge the index, only suggesting that some photographers do lie), she does not acknowledge that Dead Troops Talk is actually a digital photograph because of the risks that the dubitatively iconic image brings to the truth claims of the indexical photograph.

     
    Jeff Wall’s photograph stages a ghastly scenario where Soviet soldiers killed in an ambush in the war in Afghanistan in the mid-eighties seem to rise up from the dead to speak of the horrors of war. In looking at Wall’s image, one is reminded of Bataille’s “The Practice of Joy Before Death” and its affirmation of an explosive laughter that cannot recuperate violence, destruction, and general havoc. One overhears a divine laughter capable of affirming its own demise and ruin when Bataille writes the following: “There are explosives everywhere that perhaps will soon blind me. I laugh when I think that my eyes persist in demanding objects that do not destroy them” (Visions of Excess 239).24 In this hallucinatory vision, one sees the dead soldiers talking, joking, and laughing with each other. One of these ghoulish characters even holds up a rat to the face of his companion as if to underscore that one must laugh in the face of death. But Sontag’s review of Dead Troops Talk avoids the mention of any such prankster antics on the part of the dead troops and offers a more somber reading that is devoid of Bataille’s anguished gaiety. While touching on the impossible and on the limits of saying, Sontag imagines for us what Wall’s “stupor troopers” would say about the horrors of war if they were to return to the land of the living. She does this by staging an archetypical scene that founds community around the death of others, which recalls Maurice Blanchot’s idea that “[i]f the community is revealed by the death of the other person, it is because death is itself the true community of mortal beings: their impossible communion” (11). But in stark contrast to Jean-Luc Nancy’s “inoperative community” and its resistance to the communal fusion of the mass subject, Sontag assumes the voice of being-in-common such that she becomes the medium that channels these dead talkers. (This is a doubly ironic scene when one considers that an image has been asked to do the talking.) Paradoxically, Sontag intervenes to speak their silence and to speak for all of us in this rather totalizing and presumptuous gesture: “What would they have to say to us? ‘We’—this ‘we’ is everyone who has never experienced anything like what they went through—don’t understand. We don’t get it. We truly can’t imagine what it was like. We can’t imagine how dreadful, how terrifying war is; and how normal it becomes” (Regarding 125-126). Finally, the communication cuts off so that Sontag’s transmissions from the dead break down and lose their subjects: “Can’t understand. Can’t imagine” (126). From Bataille’s perspective, Sontag’s gesture is a classic pedagogical ruse that plays at imagining what cannot be imagined (what comes from the dead), and that feigns and simulates the teaching of death from the land of the living. To recall Bataille’s remarks on this impossible subject: “We often imagine ourselves in the position of those who we see dying, but we can only justifiably do this on the condition of living” (The Unfinished System 119). Sontag turns from the dead to those lucky enough to be alive as she concludes: “Can’t understand. Can’t imagine. That’s what every soldier, and every journalist and aid worker and independent observer who has put in time under fire, and had the luck to elude the death that struck down others nearby, stubbornly feels. And they are right” (Regarding 126). Following Bataille and his laughter, the last sentence of Sontag’s book offers her final recuperation of the unimaginable (and its sovereignty) into the service of righteous knowledge (and its mastery).
     
    In these ravings from beyond the grave that signal the incommensurability between the living and the dead, between the photographic witness and the war victim, as well as between lordship/mastery and sovereignty, the death sentences of Dead Troops Talk on their loss of subjectivity recall another line from Bataille’s impossible text “The Teaching of Death” (1952). “Of course,” Bataille intones, “talking about death is the most profound practical joke” (119). One can only wonder what a different text Regarding the Pain of Others would have been if Sontag had incorporated here and elsewhere in her book the morbidly witty lesson of Dead Troops Talk as they touch upon the impossible and as they expose themselves and their viewers to Bataille’s triple threat of unknowing, laughter, and tears. What if a more self-ironic Susan Sontag had taken Georges Bataille’s and Jeff Wall’s profound lesson of nonknowledge to heart when writing about this image and about all the other images in the book classified as documentary photographs that cloak themselves in the “reality effect” of the index and, in this way, hold themselves sacrosanct? But these horrific images—for all their ethical demands and their calls for decisive action—cannot defend themselves against the debilitating effects of unknowledge and the surge of derision (and indecision) that they bring in their wake and in their unworking. Thus Bataille’s unknowing and his anguished gaiety ponder the profound practical joke that has been played on Sontag’s Regarding. “Reflection on death is much more seriously derisive than living, it is always scattering our attention, and we speak in vain about exerting ourselves, when death is at stake” (119).
     

    Louis Kaplan is Associate Professor of history and theory of photography and new media at the University of Toronto and Director of the Institute of Communication and Culture at the University of Toronto Mississauga. His books include Laszlo Moholy-Nagy: Biographical Writings (1995), American Exposures: Photography and Community (2005), and The Strange Case of William Mumler, Spirit Photographer (2008). He is co-editing (with John Paul Ricco) “Regarding Jean-Luc Nancy” as a special issue of the Journal of Visual Culture (April 2010). Another essay, on “Bataille’s Laughter,” is forthcoming in John Welchman, ed., Black Sphinx: On the Comedic in Modern Art (J.R.P./Ringier).
     

    Endnotes

     
    1. While one might see the criticism of a popular intellectual like Susan Sontag as too easy a target for the postmodern and poststructuralist arsenal deployed here, it is important not to underestimate Sontag’s influence in contemporary debates in post 9/11 visual culture regarding images of war and terror. This essay joins a number of recent texts by important voices that have encountered (and countered) Sontag in scholarly journals. These include Judith Butler (2005), Karen Beckman (2009), Manisha Basu (2006), and Herta Wolf (2007). Of these accounts, it should be noted that only Herta Wolf’s “The Tears of Photography” takes up Sontag’s reading of Bataille and the lingchi images. Wolf takes Sontag to task for “ignoring the sequential nature of this portrayal of torture” as well as ignoring “her own postulated obligation to critically assess her reception of images of torture” (75). More importantly, Wolf emphasizes the “horrifying laughter” (77) provoked by these images for Bataille in the section of her essay entitled “Agony and Laughter.” The ambivalent combination “of laughter and mourning” (77) as opposites that do not contradict each other drops out of Sontag’s reading completely; this is one of the prime movers of the present essay.

     

     
    2. Sontag addresses the Abu Ghraib photographs in her 2004 essay “Regarding the Torture of Others.”

     

     
    3. Eduardo Cadava’s keynote address, “Palm Reading: Fazal Sheikh’s Handbook of Death,” was delivered at The Photograph Conference in Winnipeg, Canada on March 11, 2004. I return to death’s problematic pedagogy—for both teaching and learning—at the conclusion of this essay.

     

     
    4. This linkage is at the basis of such key photo-theoretical texts as Barthes’s Camera Lucida: Reflections on Photography and Cadava’s Words of Light: Theses on the Photography of History.

     

     
    5. Influenced by the thinking of Jean-Luc Nancy, I have explored photography as a discourse of exposure that exposes our being-in-common and in relation to death and finitude, thereby opening a Bataillian space of nonknowledge, in American Exposures: Photography and Community in the Twentieth Century (2005). I refer to this expository approach to photography at various points in order to contrast it with Sontag’s emphasis on the index. For a further analysis of the challenge to the index offered to theorists like Bazin and Sontag by Nancy’s thinking, see my forthcoming essay “Photograph/Death Mask: Jean-Luc Nancy’s Recasting of the Photographic Image.”

     

     
    6. The source of the reference to “absolute dismemberment” comes from Hegel’s The Phenomenology of Spirit. Bataille quotes the master: “Spirit attains its truth only by finding itself in absolute dismemberment” (18).

     

     
    7. I have benefited greatly from Arkady Plotnitsky’s essay, “Effects of the Unknowable: Materialism, Epistemology, and the General Economy of the Body in Bataille” (2001). This includes his nuanced delineation of Bataille’s non-concepts (e.g., sovereignty, general economy, and unknowledge) as well as a rigorous attention to Bataille’s writings as an “encounter with the impossible” (17).

     

     
    8. Plotnitsky also points out that Bataille’s “general economy entails a deployment of restricted economy” (21) because there is no such thing as “purely unproductive expenditure” (22). See Bataille, The Accursed Share (Vol. 1) 12. In this way, one avoids the misunderstanding that Bataille’s thought is “uncritically idealizing expenditure, loss, and so forth” (22).

     

     
    9. Nancy concludes with the insistence that rather than merely scoff at the meaninglessness of Bataille’s project of unknowing, one should read and savor the words of Bataille’s exscripted text for “the absolute meaning of their nonsignification” (65).

     

     
    10. See the comprehensive website devoted to “Chinese Torture/Supplice chinois: Iconographic, Historical, and Literary Approaches to an Exotic Representation at http://turandot.ish-lyon.cnrs.fr/ [accessed January 11, 2009]. In addition to the reproduction of the infamous images that are under consideration here, two of Jérôme Bourgon’s essays discuss Bataille in particular. See “Bataille et le supplicié chinois: erreurs sur la personne” and “Photographing ‘Chinese Torture.’”

     

     
    11. Bataille’s Les Larmes d’Eros was originally published by Editions J-J. Pauvert in Paris in 1961.

     

     
    12. I address the question of “Bataille’s Laughter” extensively in an essay in Black Sphinx: On the Comedic in Modern Art. Ed. John Welchman.

     

     
    13. Here I follow Derrida’s analysis of Bataille’s sovereign operation in “From Restricted to General Economy: A Hegelianism Without Reserve.” Derrida ponders, “Thus it must simulate, after a fashion, the absolute risk, and it must laugh at this simulacrum” (256). Laughter in the face of death and the impossible is crucial to Derrida’s analysis of Bataille’s (non)concept of sovereignty and of the way it exceeds lordship/mastery. I will return to this point in greater detail below.

     

     
    14. In the section of Les Larmes d’Eros entitled “Supplice Chinois,” Bataille writes in the original French: “Ce fut à cette occasion que je discernai, dans la violence de cette image, une valeur infinie de renversement” (Oeuvres completes X 627).

     

     
    15. This is the famous formulation that concludes the third volume of The Accursed Share and that sets sovereignty on the path of the impossible. “The main thing is always the same: sovereignty is NOTHING.”

     

     
    16. Derrida situates the laughable situation in which sovereignty finds itself. To fill in the passage previously cited, “Laughter, which constitutes sovereignty in its relation to death, is not a negativity, as has been said. And it laughs at itself, a ‘major’ laughter laughs at a ‘minor’ laughter, for the sovereign operation also needs life—the life that welds the two lives together—in order to be in relation to itself in the pleasurable consumption of itself. Thus, it must simulate, after a fashion, the absolute risk, and it must laugh at this simulacrum” (256).

     

     
    17. “The hallucinatory appearance of these photographs … is due—perhaps because of the injection of doses of opium—to the fact that the victim looks ‘ravished’ and ecstatic” (Surya 94).

     

     
    18. In an e-mail to the author on November 12, 2004, James Elkins writes that his own research “traces the origin of that ‘(?)’ in [Georges] Dumas’s text.” Elkins is referring here to the French psychologist George Dumas’s discussion and publication of two of the lingchi images in his Traité de psychologie. Bataille notes in The Tears of Eros that “one of these shots was reproduced in Georges Dumas’s Traité de psychologie” and that “Dumas insists upon the ecstatic appearance of the victim’s expression” (205). Elkins depicts and discusses another set of lingchi photographs in The Object Stares Back, 108-115.

     

     
    19. Bataille, “Method of Meditation,” in The Unfinished System of Knowledge, 83. This definition coincides with Jacques Derrida’s reading of the ecstatic in Bataille as the eruption “of sovereign speech” which is not to be understood as the attainment of another discourse but rather an acknowledgment of the necessary blindspots that open up every discourse to the loss of its own meaning to the extent that Bataille’s writing becomes the commentary on its own absence of meaning. For Derrida, “The poetic or the ecstatic is that in every discourse which can open itself up to the absolute loss of its sense, to the (non-)base of the sacred, of nonmeaning, of un-knowledge or of play” (261). One notes here Bataille’s insistence that the sacred is also located at the limit (or the beyond) of knowledge. If the sacred is linked to ecstasy (or to Sontag’s “sacrifice to exaltation”), this is not to be conflated in any way with the attainment of any knowledge of the sacred, for these are dependent upon extreme acts of transgression that entail the loss of meaning. If this were not the case, then such a move would threaten to collapse Bataille’s sovereignty into Hegel’s lordship yet again.

     

     
    20. Bataille’s important lecture was delivered on February 9, 1953 at the Collège Philosophique in Paris.

     

     
    21. This passage begins with a description of the torture images from the subject position of the executioner (i.e., from the sadistic point of view) and it marks the intertwining of photography and haunting. “The Chinese executioner of my photo haunts me: there he is busily cutting off his victim’s leg at the knee. The victim is bound to a stake, eyes turned up, head thrown back, and through a grimacing mouth you see teeth. The blade’s entering the flesh at the knee” (Guilty 38-39).

     

     
    22. Wall is quoted in Peter Darbyshire. For the on-line version of the part of the interview that deals with Dead Troops Talk, see http://cancult.ca/2008/05/27/the-globe-talks-to-jeff-wall/ [accessed January 11, 2009].

     

     
    23. This text and image is found on the website for the retrospective exhibition at the Tate Modern in London entitled Jeff Wall Photographs 1978-2004. See www.tate.org.uk/modern/exhibitions/jeffwall/rooms/room8.shtm [accessed January 11, 2009].

     

     
    24. This was originally published in Acéphale V (June 1939): 1-8. Bataille makes a similar point in “Nonknowledge, Laughter, and Tears.” “The strangest mystery to be found in laughter is attached to the fact that we rejoice in something that puts the equilibrium of life in danger. We even rejoice in the strongest way” (144).
     

    Works Cited

       

     

    • Awret, Uziel. “Las Meninas and the Search for Self-Representation.” Journal of Consciousness Studies 15. 9 (2008): 7-34. <http://www.imprint.co.uk/pdf/Awret.pdf> Web. 15 Aug. 2009.
    • Barthes, Roland. Camera Lucida: Reflections on Photography. Trans. Richard Howard. New York: Hill and Wang, 1981. Print.
    • Basu, Manisha. “The Hamartia of Light and Shadow: Susan Sontag in the Digital Age.” Postmodern Culture 16. 3 (2006). Web.
    • [Project MUSE]
    • Bataille, Georges. The Accursed Share: An Essay on General Economy. Vol. 1. Consumption. Trans. Robert Hurley. New York: Zone Books, 1988. Print.
    • —. The Accursed Share. Volumes II & III. Trans. Robert Hurley. New York: Zone Books, 1993. Print.
    • —. Erotism: Death and Sensuality. Trans. Mary Dalwood. San Francisco: City Lights Books, 1986. Print.
    • —. Guilty. Trans. Bruce Boone. Venice: Lapis Press, 1988. Print.
    • —. “Hegel, Death and Sacrifice.” Yale French Studies 78 (1990): 9-28. Web.
    • —. The Inner Experience. Trans. Leslie Anne Boldt. Albany: State University of New York Press, 1988. Print.
    • —. Les Larmes d’Eros. Paris: Jean-Jacques Pauvert, 1961. Print.
    • —. Oeuvres complètes, Vol. X. L’érotisme – Le procès de Gilles de Rais – Les larmes d’Eros. Paris: Gallimard, 1987. Print.
    • —. The Tears of Eros. Trans. Peter Connor. San Francisco: City Lights Books, 1989. Print.
    • —. The Unfinished System of Nonknowledge. Trans. Michelle Kendall and Stuart Kendall. Minneapolis: The University of Minnesota Press, 2001.Print.
    • Beckman, Karen. “Nothing to Say: The War on Terror and the Mad Photography of Roland Barthes.” Grey Room 34 (2009): 104-134. Web.
    • [CrossRef]
    • Blanchot, Maurice. The Unavowable Community. Trans. Pierre Joris. Barrytown: Station Hill Press, 1988. Print.
    • Borch-Jacobsen, Mikkel. “The Laughter of Being.” MLN 102. 4 (1987): 737-760. Web.
    • [CrossRef]
    • Bourgon, Jérôme. “Chinese Torture/Supplice chinois: Iconographic, Historical, and Literary Approaches of an Exotic Representation.” <http://turandot.ish-lyon.cnrs.fr/> Web. 11 Jan. 2009.
    • Butler, Judith. “Photography, War, Outrage.” PMLA 120. 3 (2005): 822-827. Print.
    • [CrossRef]
    • Cadava, Eduardo. Words of Light: Theses on the Photography of History. Princeton: Princeton University Press, 1998. Print.
    • Carpeaux, Louis. Pékin qui s’en va. Paris: Maloine, 1913. Print.
    • Darbyshire, Peter. “Vancouver artist Jeff Wall Discusses Five of His Better Known Works.” The Toronto Globe and Mail, 27 May 2008. <http://cancult.ca/2008/05/27/the-globe-talks-to-jeff-wall/> Web. 11 Jan. 2009.
    • Derrida, Jacques. Writing and Difference. Trans. Alan Bass. Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1978. Print.
    • Dumas, Georges. Traité de psychologie. Paris: Félix Alcan, 1923-4. Print.
    • Elkins, James. The Object Stares Back: On the Nature of Seeing. New York: Simon and Schuster, 1996. Print.
    • Kaplan, Louis. American Exposures: Photography and Community in the Twentieth Century. Minneapolis: University of Minnesota Press, 2005. Print.
    • —. “Bataille’s Laughter.” Black Sphinx: On the Comedic in Modern Art. Ed. John Welchman. Zurich: J.R.P/Ringier, forthcoming 2010. Print.
    • —. “Photograph/Death Mask: Jean-Luc Nancy’s Recasting of the Photographic Image.” Journal of Visual Culture (forthcoming April 2010). Web.
    • Lunenfeld, Peter. “Art Post-History: Digital Photography and Electronic Semiotics.” Photography after Photography: Memory and Representation in the Digital Age. Ed. Hubertus v. Amelunxen. Amsterdam: G+B Arts, 1996. 92-98. Print.
    • Nancy, Jean-Luc. “Exscription.” Yale French Studies 78 (1990): 47-65. Web.
    • —. The Inoperative Community. Ed. and Trans. Peter Connor. Minneapolis: University of Minnesota Press, 1991. Print.
    • Nietzsche, Friedrich. On the Genealogy of Morals. Trans. Walter Kauffman. New York: Vintage Books, 1989. Print.
    • Peirce, Charles Sanders. “Logic as Semiotic: The Theory of Signs.” Philosophic Writings of C.S. Peirce. New York: Dover Publications, 1955. <http://www.iupui.edu/~peirce/ep/ep2/ep2book/ch02/ch02.htm> Web. Jan. 11, 2009.
    • Plotnitsky, Arkady. “Effects of the Unknowable: Materialism, Epistemology, and the General Economy of the Body in Bataille.” Parallax 7.1 (2001): 16-28. Web.
    • [CrossRef]
    • Sontag, Susan. On Photography. New York: Farrar, Straus and Giroux, 1977. Print.
    • —. Regarding the Pain of Others. New York: Farrar, Straus, and Giroux, 2003. Print.
    • —. “Regarding the Torture of Others.” New York Times Magazine 23 May 2004: 24-29, 42. Print.
    • —. Styles of Radical Will. New York: Farrar, Straus and Giroux, 1969. Print.
    • —. Ed. Antonin Artaud: Selected Writings. New York: The Noonday Press, 1976. Print.
    • Surya, Michel. Georges Bataille: An Intellectual Biography. Trans. Krzysztof Fijalkowski and Michael Richardson. London: Verso, 2002. Print.
    • Tate Modern. Jeff Wall Photographs 1978-2004. 21 October 2005 – 8 January 2006. <http://www.tate.org.uk/modern/exhibitions/jeffwall/rooms/room8.shtm> Web. 11 Jan. 2009.
    • Wolf, Herta. “The Tears of Photography.” Grey Room 29 (Fall 2007): 66-89. Web.
    • [CrossRef]

     

    Illustrations

       

     

    • Figure 1. Anonymous, The Chinese Torture of One Hundred Cuts, ca. 1905.
    • Figure 2. Jeff Wall, Dead Troops Talk, 1991-1992. Silver dye bleach transparency in aluminum lightbox, 229 × 417 cm.

     

  • The Well and the Web: Phantoms of Community and the Mediatic Public Sphere

    John Culbert (bio)
    University of California at Irvine
    johnculbert@lycos.com

    Abstract
     
    “The Well and the Web” examines a number of media watershed events in which the sense of community in crisis, threatened by new technologies of communication, is expressed in sensationalistic dramas of young lives in mortal danger. From the advent of live TV news to the rise of web-based interactivity, the figure insistently invoked in such scenes of crisis is that of a girl fallen into a well. This theme is echoed in the recent films Ringu and The Ring, whose horror premise makes explicit the necropolitics (Mbembe) underpinning the conventional discourse of community and televisual spectatorship. Drawing on The Phantom Public Sphere (Robbins) and new media theory (Doane, Latham, Poster), I argue that the discourse of community and morality betrays a haunted logic that must engage with contemporary theories of virtuality and spectrality (Derrida). The horror genre’s tropes of the viral and the ghost provide the means to articulate a postmodern ethics of spectatorship that, attuned to trauma and the duplicity of discourse, can challenge necropolitics and extend hospitality to the phantoms that haunt the mediatic public sphere.
     

    I.

     

    What monstrous new being appears in the gaze of a person watching another at a computer that is connected to unknown, unseen, untold others?
     

    –Mark Poster

     
    San Marino, California, 1949. A little girl falls down a well. Rescue crews are soon on the scene, and for a grueling 52 hours, working night and day, they try to save the girl. News media cover the story as it unfolds, unaware, however, that they are covering not a rescue but an exhumation: the girl had in fact died before the cameras, crews and spectators arrived.
     
    The death of Kathy Fiscus is considered a watershed in media history, as this story was the first to be broadcast live, with uninterrupted coverage, for a full 27 hours, by television news. Transfixed viewers stayed up all night to follow the story, and the news sensation is credited with single-handedly boosting sales of TV sets, still a novelty to households in 1949. Hopes dimmed as the night wore on, and viewers began to fear the worst. The race against time, covered live and shared by viewers around the world, masked a bitter irony. The first live TV coverage was not live but belated; viewers were held in suspense not by the present, or even by a future revelation, but by the uncanny and retrospective temporality of what will have been. Live TV news is born in this Orphic turn that captures not the present instant but only a belated moment and a spectral presence. One can speak in this case of a paradoxically belated horror; the future anterior haunts the spectacle, and the moment of the girl’s death returns to haunt those who unknowingly participated in her wake. If we have inherited this haunted legacy of TV, we have not yet settled accounts with the ghost that was broadcast from San Marino.
     
    Today we see in the Kathy Fiscus story the first rehearsal of now-familiar staples of television: prurient coverage of “human interest” topics, exploitative violence, permanent distraction from politics, and passive consumption. It is indeed tempting to see this media-event as the origin of our sensationalistic mediascape. Looking back this way, however, we may only repeat the Orphic turn that haunted viewers in 1949. When did media come to saturate the public sphere? How to heal the breach that makes the live moment always doubled by its alienating spectacle? How to rescue the singular life broadcast from San Marino across the world? The race against time, the struggle of life against death turned out to be unfortunately “too late” for Kathy Fiscus. But a more unsettling belatedness haunts this story. This belated horror resembles that described by Roland Barthes in Camera Lucida as he pores over the photograph of a man condemned to death. Barthes is gripped by the convergence in the image of two disparate times: the man will die, and yet he has already died (96).1 Jacques Derrida refines this insight to claim that the poignancy of the photographic image lies in its status as impossible referent and evanescent presence. Speaking of Barthes’s punctum and its haunting temporality, Derrida asks, “is not Time the ultimate resource for the substitution of one absolute instant by another, for the replacement of the irreplaceable, the replacement of this unique referent by another that is yet another instant, completely other and yet still the same? Is not time the punctual form and force of all metonymy – its instant recourse?” (Mourning 60).2 Every moment, even “live,” Derrida suggests, is made spectral by this “resource” and “instant recourse”: whatever appears appears “as” itself, yet masking the instant duplication that haunts the image. There is no source, in this light, that is not a re-source. The well in San Marino is such a haunted source; what the viewers saw as the “tragedy” of Kathy’s death–thus fully narratable, if only by an abuse of genre–covers over the poignant and punctual re-source that always and already replaced her, as live television spectacle. As such, the Kathy Fiscus “story” is an allegory of television. Viewers were drawn into a spectacle that evoked primal fears and elementary struggles, but also the consolations of community reduced to the bare essentials of myth. Here at the well we seem to see the very source of community. The re-source of the well, however, escapes from view, making the viewer the haunted carrier of a visual secret, the poignant belatedness of the live image.
     
    The aim of this essay is to bring out ghosts that haunt community in such mediatic spectacles. In so doing, I articulate a notion of community that is expanded to a global scale. I explore the figure of the viral in tandem with that of the ghost to advance a theory of the ethics of spectatorship. The ghost, I argue, emerges as the figure of community’s impossibility, indexing a confrontation with what it both banishes and aims to manage, contain, and lay to rest. The death of Kathy Fiscus is an instructive example here; it brought together a community of viewers in a spectacle of death, a redemptive, if painful, experience of common loss. As we will see, this scenario, including its haunted well, is compulsively repeated in narratives of mediatic communities. This would seem to echo René Girard’s claim that social collectivities ground themselves in the sacrifice of one of their number. And yet behind the single victim of the spectacle there looms a vast number; it is worth noting that Kathy Fiscus was born August 21, 1945, a mere twelve days after the Nagasaki strike. The race to save the little girl’s life is shadowed in this way by a global necropolitical force that relegates other people’s lives to the category of collateral damage. It may seem ungenerous to ascribe such an anti-morality of survival to the well-meaning spectators of Kathy Fiscus’s story. And yet a necropolitical logic binds together the spectators of the events in San Marino. To defend life at home is not merely to hold death at bay, but to enforce the distinction between valuable and disposable lives. Moreover, as Dina Al-Kassim argues, the figure of the innocent girl victim provides a frequent and reliable “link between social consensus and repressive force” (52), by means of which the “cultural production of innocence” both infantilizes the public sphere and legitimates the state’s discriminatory policing of minorities (53). An illusion of community, a phantom public, is conjured in this blind act of necropolitical enforcement. This illusion of community is alternately a phantom public of mass mediatic spectacle, and the phantom of a global context, the untold millions who never amount to a story, but only haunt the edges of the scene as its blindly excluded.
     
    The TV reporter on the scene in San Marino, Stan Chambers, seems haunted by the events he covers. A young man at the time, this cheerful and popular reporter has never stopped paying his respects and giving credit to the little girl who made his name, indeed his “celebrity” (KTLA 31). His unfinished mourning indicates the burden of an unpaid debt. There is indeed an awkward, though fitting, irony in the fact that television would profitably extend its “news hole” into the night by continuing to cover the fatal story of a dark well. Sixty years later Chambers revisits the story in his autobiography. “The evolution of extended television news coverage happened overnight in that open field in San Marino,” the veteran reporter says (23); one newspaper credited his coverage as “one of the greatest reporting jobs in the history of television” (28). Chambers quotes from a letter he received following his reporting of the story:
     

    Until that night, the television was no more a threat to serenity than any other bit of furniture in the living room. Now you have utterly destroyed this safety forever …you and the epic which you have been part of this weekend have made us know what television is for. You have made many of us know that we belong to the world. Through your own dignity and your recognition of the dignity of others, you have given us a flash of people at their best, as we remember them in the battle, or as I’ve seen them at Negev outposts in Israel.
     

    (27–8)

     

    This letter, the only one Chambers cites from his files, is oddly ambiguous, thanking the reporter precisely for destroying the viewer’s safety and invading his home. Television, it would seem, is the gift of the Unheimlich. And while the letter proffers the lofty moral that “we belong to the world,” it concludes, awkwardly, with an heroic evocation of Zionist war. A fleeting insight into shared precariousness–accidents happen, we are all mortal, like Kathy Fiscus–inflates into an “epic,” and ultimately inverts into a valorization of armed conquest and colonization. The spectacle of community, of people gathered together around the well and around the TV set, morphs into that of a band of fighters facing a common enemy. While it was a common feature of the news of the time that the costs of the 1948 war went virtually unreported, what is less clear is how a book published in 2008 could skirt so casually over what many now understand to have been the ethnic cleansing of Palestine.3 We can only speculate that the author sees the Israeli context as somehow still “relevant” today–though surely not in the way he intends.

     
    A postwar necropolitics of American television news is sketched out here. Between the story of the girl in the well and the larger global scene there is a striking disparity in the valuing of human lives. In this, the news media support and broadcast the state’s management of what Talal Asad calls “the distribution of pain” (508). One might add that it is local media–here, the provincial Los Angeles media–that best performs this unequal distribution in its focus on stories of local “human interest.” But this local focus only exacerbates the contradiction opened up by the extended reach of television, its widening news hole, and the global scene. This other scene haunts the spectacle of the girl in the well, for while a common accord binds together the spectators in hoping to save the girl, the very definitions of the “local” and of “community” are implicitly thrown into crisis. What rises to the level of a television “story”? Who deserves saving? And can community cohere where the audience expands beyond the local? It would seem that only the figure of an innocent white girl can suspend these contradictions, if only for a moment.4 But in so doing, the televisual public sphere reveals itself, in Alexander Kluge’s words, as a “universal provincialism,” claiming to encompass all voices yet blind to its constitutive exclusions (Liebman 44).
     
    These exclusions are subtly perpetuated even in what seem the most humane expressions of cosmopolitan fraternity. As one editorial of the time has it, “A little girl falls down a well in California and the news sweeps across oceans, waking untold millions to eager, anxious sympathy” (Chambers 29). We may recognize here the postwar American discourse of “The Great Family of Man” ironized by Barthes’s critique of media and consumer culture, Mythologies (100). Barthes shows how hypocritical sentimentality and gross abstractions of shared humanity serve to elide more concrete issues of history and politics. Barthes’s diagnoses still resonate with a broad range of arguments, most notably those of Jürgen Habermas, that media, merchandising and ideology have corrupted the public sphere. As critics of Habermas have pointed out, however, the notion of the death of the public, or a “phantom public sphere,” often grounds its critique in the nostalgic premise of an ideal state of communication that is questionable if not unfounded (Robbins viii). On the other hand, as these authors have argued, the idea of a “phantom public,” to be taken seriously, may help account for the elusive promise and phantasmatic potential of public discourse as a field of subversion, emancipation and desire. Beyond the discourse of communicative norms and nostalgia for community, such a notion of a phantom public lays bare the contradictions and exclusions that sustain the public as a vital illusion. These two versions of the phantom public reflect the main schism in leftist cultural studies: the Adornian indictment of mass culture as thoroughly complicit in the economics of exploitation, and the search for dissident and emancipatory forces within the society of the spectacle. This argument is potentially endless, given that the two sides tend not toward a dialectical synthesis but to the stalemate of a liberal politics exemplified by the collection edited by Bruce Robbins, The Phantom Public Sphere.
     
    Other ghosts, however, haunt the phantom public, and the catastrophic legacy of the Kathy Fiscus story is carried on even by media’s sharpest critics. Mary Ann Doane, for instance, argues that live TV coverage is intimately linked to the spectacle of catastrophe. “The lure of the real” sustains TV’s claim to “urgency” and “liveness,” but in so doing exposes its own failings as a medium devoted to “forgetting” and “decontextualization.” As Doane says, “the ultimate drama of the instantaneous–catastrophe–constitutes the very limit of its discourse” (“Information,” 222). Doane invokes Tom Brokaw’s coverage of the Challenger disaster, a live report complete with unscripted moments that fall in the lineage of Stan Chambers’s original broadcast.5 “It is not that we have a ghoulish curiosity,” Brokaw lamely apologizes, as he reruns the disaster footage (232). Live TV, Doane argues, is drawn to events that defy representation, which in turn reinforces the medium’s occlusion of deeper causes and political contexts that remain unrepresented. In this sense, then, the spectacle of catastrophe is a turning away from politics and the systemic causes of disaster. Doane thus contributes to an understanding of how capitalism exploits crisis as opportunity, indeed thrives on sheer catastrophe: a condition that has more recently been dubbed the “shock doctrine” (Klein). Interestingly, however, Doane’s essay betrays a similar turning away, as if TV’s fascinating “catastrophe machine” draws the critic into its own specular economy (234). “The Challenger coverage,” Doane says, “demonstrates just how nationalistic the apprehension of catastrophe is–our own catastrophes are always more important, more eligible for extended reporting than those of other nations. But perhaps even more crucial here was the fact that television itself was on the scene–witness to the catastrophe” (231). For Doane, the crucial issue lies in TV’s participation as mediatic witness of the disaster; live TV thus reveals its problematic entanglement in a general state of political-economic crisis it fails to account for. However, Doane’s claim that the presence of cameras on the scene is “even more crucial” than the show’s nationalistic bent is almost tautological, since it inadvertently reinforces the “always more important” choices critiqued in the foregoing sentence. Doane clearly does not condone those editorial choices, but she makes her own dubious decision as to what is most “important” in the scene, and in so doing, skirts the vital function of the spectacle in supporting the “distribution of pain.” As a result, Doane enacts the very “slippage” she indexes in her definition of the catastrophic media event: “There is often a certain slippage between the notion that television covers important events in order to validate itself as a medium and the idea that because an event is covered by television–because it is, in effect, deemed televisual–it is important” (222). The slippage on the critic’s part seems to follow the fateful lure of TV’s supposedly self-reflexive nature, and demonstrates how media criticism can reinforce the closed loop of TV’s self-interested perspective: “television,” Doane says, “incessantly takes as its subject the documentation and revalidation of its own discursive problematic” (226).
     
    In contrast to Doane, we might assert that the catastrophic spectacle is not a postmodern exemplum of the media-event, but rather the symptom of a technological monopoly that turns eyes inward and away from the global scene. Further, that global scene is not an additional scene that cannot fit into the broadcast slot or the critic’s commentary, but its haunting double, always present if only as lapses and asides. Doane’s own lapse may seem minor, but it is symptomatic; it may be seen as well in her reference to economic crisis: “Catastrophe makes concrete and immediate, and therefore deflects attention from, the more abstract horror of potential economic crisis” (237). Her reference to a deflected “potential economic crisis” itself deflects from catastrophe on the other scene, where crisis is not “abstract,” “intermittent,” or “potential,” but the actual realm of predatory capital; not the scene of the occasional NASA mishap, but the economic proving ground of the military-industrial complex. Doane goes so far as to say that “economic crisis does not appear to meet any of the criteria of the true catastrophe. It is not punctual but of some duration, it does not kill (at least not immediately)” (236). This last qualification is especially telling, as it betrays the limitations of the critic’s temporal emphasis which, much as it critiques the sham liveness of TV coverage, envisions economic crisis either as one of long duration (and thus unspectacular) or as temporally deferred. We can, however, restate her formula instead in spatial terms: economic crisis, in other words, does not kill (at least not here). Indeed, we might say that space haunts the critic’s analysis as its disavowed category; in this way, the argument subtly reinforces the presentness of the here even as it contests the liveness of the now. The space of the not-here, spectral and non-present, haunts both the critic and televisual catastrophe. This disparity in the coverage of disaster reflects Achille Mbembe’s trenchant formula for necropolitics as the division between “those who must live and those who must die” (17).
     
    Mbembe’s “necropolitics” draws on Foucault’s theory of biopower as “that domain of life over which power has taken control” (12). Mbembe argues, however, that modern disciplinary power over subjects is always accompanied by its necropolitical other. This entails a challenge to the normative liberal theory of a public sphere grounded in freedom, reason, and autonomy, and expressing itself in the common exercise of sovereignty (13). Mbembe argues instead that this sovereign power is always also a force negating the life of others. The double injunction that some must live while others must die reflects the twin but disparate exercises of sovereign power over populations at home and populations abroad. Race provides the persistent rationale for this distribution of the power of life and death, whose history extends from early modernity into the present.6 Plantations, colonies, occupied territories and targets of neo-imperial wars are the sites of “death worlds” that relegate other populations to the status of “the living dead” (40). “If power still depends on tight control over bodies,” Mbembe says, “the new technologies of destruction are less concerned with inscribing bodies within disciplinary apparatuses as inscribing them, when the time comes, within the maximal economy now represented by the ‘massacre’” (34). A sinister anti-morality results even for those who survive death, Mbembe says; survival becomes another means for the perpetuation of necropolitics. As Mbembe says, “in the logic of survival one’s horror at the sight of death turns into satisfaction that it is someone else who is dead” (36).
     
    For Mbembe, the necropolitics of survival are realized in their most complete form in occupied Palestine, where the first world and an advance guard of settlers abut a population in enforced destitution. The invasion of Gaza in 2008–9 seems to confirm Mbembe’s diagnoses by both ratcheting up the violence and underscoring the failed response of the media and the international community. Occupied Palestine, strangely invoked in the Kathy Fiscus story, reflects the logic of haunted community I pursue in what follows. In each case, community casts itself in the lurid terms of a battle of life against death. At the center of this struggle is the figure of the settler and the frontier, narrowing down to the figure of the frontier well. As we will see, the figure of the well supports a dubious mythology of autonomy and self-sufficiency. The autonomy of the frontier homestead allows the community to identify itself as similarly bounded, sovereign and independent. Gathered at the well as if in the forum of a town square, the community tries to save a threatened life, and thereby reaffirms its communal bonds. However, such scenes are haunted by a necropolitics they disavow; as a result, community takes shape as a phantasm haunted by ghosts of which it is only dimly aware.
     
    We have said that the Kathy Fiscus story ushered in a new era of television news. Forty years later, in October 1987, another mediatic era began with cable television’s coverage of a similar story. The Jessica McClure story seemed to replay the events of San Marino, though on a much larger, indeed hyperbolic scale. In a milestone in sensationalistic TV coverage, CNN chose to run the story around the clock, with the result that the upstart cable channel claimed its highest ratings ever, joining overnight the ranks of established television news channels. CNN’s famous scoop of Operation Desert Storm is often seen as signaling the shift toward cable news and the 24-hour news cycle, but the decisive turn in fact happened earlier, in the backyard of the McClure house in Midland, Texas. Iraq and Midland are linked, however, in more uncanny ways; Midland, Texas, after all, is George W. Bush’s “home town,” and at the time of the Jessica McClure story he had only recently left town to help in his father’s election campaign and to embark on his own political career. A boomtown of millionaires, Midland’s politics and fortunes are linked not only to its local wells and derricks but to the global geopolitics of oil and empire. As in the Kathy Fiscus story, a larger global scene haunts the phantom public’s spectacle of life and death in Midland. What emerges from the well in Midland is not only a girl miraculously saved from death, but a new force in media news, a channel whose sensationalistic bent will prove its worth in the coming years with the rise of neo-liberal empire and the security state. And while the young girl in Midland was finally rescued from the well, her story seems to have left a curse, as Lisa Belkin suggests: her rescuer committed suicide some years later, and one of the police officers on duty was convicted of sexual exploitation of a child. The curse of the Jessica McClure story does not, of course, derive from anything occult, but rather from the toxic saturation of exploitative infotainment. Moreover, the victims of this story are far more numerous. The phantom public conjured by CNN in Midland is bound together in a shared drama of intimate danger and survival, yet blind to its necropolitical participation in a broader mediatic state of emergency.
     
    As covered by CNN, Midland was not the geopolitical center of neo-liberal empire, but a middle America where political issues give way to a story of mere human interest: an ordinary white working class family confronting a private tragedy. In this way media coverage of the Jessica McClure story conveys a drama with which everyone can presumably identify, converting a “personal accident” into a “national catastrophe,” as Patricia Mellencamp puts it (252). Here lies also the characteristic ruse of the televisual spectacle of catastrophe: “TV administers and cushions shocks,” Mellencamp says, in a duplicitous “mastery and discharge” of trauma (254, 246). Not only did Jessica become “everybody’s baby,” as the film devoted to her story had it, but Midland was cast as a typical American small town, a microcosm of the country as a whole. This very restriction of focus lends a mythic political dimension to the drama, evoking fantasms and fears of the frontier, the homestead, and the embattled settler family.7 The well itself, focal point of the drama, suggests a frontier well, symbol of autonomy and belonging, gathering place of family and friends. Gathered in turn around the televisual well, viewers share in the intimate circle of this frontier myth. The well becomes a televisual agora, a collective forum embodying the nostalgic promise of the traditional public sphere. As a point of televisual gathering, this frontier well is deeply ironic, however. Its potent symbolism of self-sufficiency is, of course, a mere anachronism in a time of public water agencies and complex networks of water distribution; in suburbs across the United States, ersatz wells are planted in front yards to produce a similarly vain illusion. The spectacle of the well holds firm to this anachronism, however, in its appeal to a community of shared grief and hope. But that larger mediatic community is in contradiction with the intimate scale of the spectacle it wants to observe. Television viewers are thus viewers of the very obsolescence of community; their pious concern and fear are the ambivalent affects of a desire for community and the unknowing recognition of their impossible participation. This is not to discount, moreover, a pervasive ambivalence of the spectatorship of death and disaster: the spectacle appeals to the viewer’s sympathies, but as spectacle, it is enjoyed at a distance. Mediation thus allows both for sympathy and dissociation, though purveyors of disaster stories rigorously disavow the latter. It seems that the mediatic power of such stories lies in their ability to channel the trauma of the viewer’s ambivalence in the spectacle of another’s trauma. As Michael Warner argues, the mediatic spectator is necessarily abstracted from any corporeal, face-to-face community exchange, and in a compensatory reflex, it gloms onto the body of another in pain. Mediatic scenes of horror thus do not so much forge common bonds of sympathy as express “the mass subject’s impossible relation to a body.” As Warner argues, “the mass subject cannot have a body except the body it witnesses. But in order to become a mass subject it has left that body behind…. It returns in the spectacle of big-time injury” (Warner 250).
     
    The latent political significance of the Midland well as symbol of American imperial politics has been harnessed by the right-wing website, “Jessica’s Well,” which, headquartered in Midland itself, sports the patriotic logo-image of a frontier homestead. A toxic swill of hate-mongering ethnocentrism, militarism and religious fundamentalism, “Jessica’s Well” exemplifies the politics of George W. Bush’s political base. As discussion forum and gateway to like-minded extremist sites, the website exploits the connectivity of the internet while defending the mythic autonomy of the frontier home. The website epitomizes a radical failure of the American public sphere: knowledge is strictly partisan, and community (white, Christian and Zionist) is bound together in a war of defamation against all other ideologies, countries, religions, and races. “Jessica’s Well” is perhaps only a fringe element in a larger American public sphere, and yet it underscores the tacit politics of CNN’s nominally centrist position and that of the other dominant media outlets that manage the mediatic public sphere.
     
    There are, of course, venues that hold to a different model of civil discourse on the web. The most influential of these is none other than the WELL, “The Whole Earth ‘Lectronic Link,” founded in 1985 in Sausalito, California, and the first internet community on the web. After 25 years, the WELL still stands as a model of literate, cosmopolitan, informed discussion and debate; its image of the well supports a left-leaning ethos of community, creativity, and mutual sustenance. But even on the left, one finds echoes of the frontier mythology of Midland’s well. These are suggested by the WELL’s name and logo, but are explicitly advertised in Howard Rheingold’s history of the WELL, The Virtual Community: Homesteading on the Electronic Frontier. If Rheingold seems unconcerned about the unfortunate implications of his frontier metaphor, he might be excused for employing a well-worn figure. And yet no-one today brandishes the figure of the “plantation” with such political insouciance. The difference, of course, is that while contemporary American free enterprise seeks its profits in outsourcing, in sweatshops and call centers abroad, it takes as its favored metaphor not the plantation but the more heroic figure of the frontier. For the metaphor to “work” in leftist discourse, it must harness the adventurous spirit of the settler while at the same time denying its genocidal implications. And indeed, in Rheingold’s history of the WELL, the spirit of the entrepreneur vies constantly with a political world it implies and yet disavows. This conflict makes his “virtual community” another version of the “phantom public” we have explored so far.8 And as in those media turning points, this community centers on the figure of a young girl in mortal danger: a girl fighting for her life in the WELL.
     
    The Virtual Community offers a history of the rise of our new mediatic world of internet connectivity, and its opening pages rehearse a familiar claim to community haunted by a world it would exclude. The first chapter, titled “The Heart of the WELL,” tells how the author sought medical advice for his ailing two-year old daughter from the online “Parenting conference,” which quickly provided him vital information before his own doctor could call him back. This forum, “a small but warmly human corner of cyberspace,” has a particularly intimate and social character, Rheingold says; there is “a magic protective circle” around this part of the WELL. “We’re talking about our sons and daughters in this forum, not about our computers or our opinions about philosophy, and many of us feel that this tacit understanding sanctifies the virtual space” (1). The “magic protective circle” of the forum is defined, then, by numerous exclusions: politics, philosophy, computing–in fact the core of the WELL’s larger conversations–are all staved off. Community, imagined here as all-embracing and far-flung, narrows down to shared concerns about the nuclear family. Rheingold invokes a virtual consensus in which the liberal and leftist ethos of the WELL merges with the mentality of the security mom.
     
    Rheingold cites at length from the post of a member of the Parenting conference watching over his ailing 14-month old daughter. The father, Jay, appeals to the online community from the darkness of this quiet room in Woods Hole. “Woods Hole. Midnight. I am sitting in the dark of my daughter’s room. Her monitor lights blink at me. The lights used to blink too brightly so I covered them with bits of bandage adhesive and now they flash faintly underneath, a persistent red and green, Lillie’s heart and lungs” (3). Interestingly, even as he connects to the outside world, the scene he describes contains technical prostheses of connectedness, here more ambiguous and unsettling: “Above the monitor is her portable suction unit. In the glow of the flashlight I’m writing by, it looks like the plastic guts of a science-class human model, the tubes coiled around the power supply, the reservoir, the pump.” Jay continues, “Tina is upstairs trying to get some sleep. A baby monitor links our bedroom to Lillie’s. It links our sleep to Lillie’s too, and because our souls are linked too, we do not sleep well.”
     
    The line “we do not sleep well” echoes strangely with Jay’s observation that, unlike other friends and communities, “The WELL was always awake” (4). To connect to the forum is to bring others into the circle of a vigil where no-one sleeps well. Here, at the heart of the virtual community, its metaphoric well is incarnated in the “power supply, the reservoir, the pump” connected to a young body in crisis. Like his daughter connected to the tubes, pumps and monitors, Jay’s online connectedness is vital, and that connectedness is felt most keenly in a state of emergency and a time of need. In this way, the Parenting conference proves its worth as more than a mere venue for conversation. Its stakes are higher: the Parenting conference is a lifeline, connecting a community in a struggle to preserve life. But if the vigil of connectedness is a fight for life and survival, Lillie’s connectedness is more ambiguous. Even as her connections sustain her life, they subtly replace it as well. In the sentence that describes the lights that monitor her vital signs, two clauses are apposed, linked only by a comma that suspends the vital connection: “a persistent red and green, Lillie’s heart and lungs.” Likewise, the “science-class human model” is a prosthetic double that suggests Lillie’s replacement by her life support. As emblematic example of the virtual community, the story of Lillie and her family conveys more than a moral of friendship and support, suggesting as well a disquieting dislocation of subjects in technological life-support. Moreover, the natural family reduced to its mere essentials is at the same time a fully mediated technological interface. These tensions provide of course the pathos of Jay’s posting and Rheingold’s use of it as moral allegory of the virtual community. Cyberspace may alter the space, time and media of communication, Rheingold tells us, but contact on an intimate and emotional level is still very much possible. And yet, if connection and communication are the keys to Jay’s post, those terms are strikingly ambiguous. Community is forged precisely in the frail bonds that are alternately connecting and disconnecting, and in the substitution of electronic monitors with the “souls” of the family. Connectedness, for Lillie, carries the ambivalent meanings of both remedy and curse. Suspended between life and death, Lillie is a prosthetic survivor, a haunting figure of the virtual community’s contradictions.
     
    As such, the girl in the WELL expresses a pervasive tension, indeed an “ethical contradiction,” as Rob Latham puts it, that congeals in monstrous pop-cultural icons of youthful cyborgs and vampires (14). The figures of the vampire and of the cyborg reflect twin facets of the economic conscription of youth, Latham argues, conveyed in the double meaning of his book’s title, Consuming Youth. On the one hand, youthful bodies are vital to the economics of production, “consumed” by the imperatives of labor and production, as Marx portrays it. “The worker,” Latham says, “essentially becomes a cybernetic organism–a cyborg–prosthetically linked to a despotic, ravening apparatus” (3). On the other hand, in the post-Fordist era of increasing consumption, the “mass-market fetishization of youth” (16) encourages the insatiable appetites of youthful consumers. These two facets of “consuming youth” reflect not only an historical distinction, but a continuing conflict between labor and leisure, consumption and production. Moreover, while deriving from an earlier time of factory production, the vision of a “prosthetic and predatory” world of automation clearly remains with us today, as fantasy, sci-fi and horror films amply indicate.9 Rheingold’s parable can only address these concerns symptomatically, but in Lillie’s state of suspended animation we can discern the latent figure of the “vampire-cyborg as a twinned metaphor for youth consumption” (20). The prosthetic Lillie seems, then, to signal a problem endemic to the contemporary mediasphere: the media market strives increasingly to target children, prying little consumers from the control of their parents. Lillie’s frail body stands implicitly as symbol of online children threatened by predators, identity thieves, marketers and manipulators of public opinion.
     
    It is striking that fears of this kind can accompany a technophilic text such as Rheingold’s, but as Mark Poster shows, this is a pervasive feature of commentary on the internet. The advent of the web was accompanied by a panicked discourse in the media that focused on the figure of the online child, alternately monster and victim of the web. Poster shows that such technological fears follow a script typical of previous media innovations (106). Fearful commentary on the internet revolution thus repeats fears of mediation as such; as a result, the discourse of crime and perversion is marred by its unexamined presumptions of innocent and unmediated communication outside of the technological sphere. Rheingold’s text copes with such threats and fears by composing a moral tale of the online community as extension of family and forum of connectedness. Lillie survives her illness, we learn, but in what seems a substitutive narrative sacrifice on Rheingold’s part, another member, less innocent than Lillie, dies by the end of the chapter. “You aren’t a real community,” Rheingold pointedly concludes, “until you have a funeral” (24). What the author narrates in this way, however, passes over–and passes on–a more haunting death-work that defies his narrative choices and moral fables. Lillie’s suspended life and Jay’s lonely postings speak to a disturbing mediation that links death and deferral to the messenger’s vital signs. Life in crisis is the very mode of survival, but this ambiguous survival is only intimated in the inarticulate gaps and disjunctions of the message. To respond to such a haunted message is to pass it on, since the reader cannot realize the author’s intent without betraying it or making choices. The posting from Wood’s Hole calls for witness and response; it appeals to the support of the community. But its haunting message is not settled in narrative morals or in funeral rites. As I will argue, the responsibility for such a message is passed on precisely by means of its own inadequacy and, indeed, failure.
     
    In this sense, then, the story of Lillie’s near-death is an allegory, a parable of the origin of community, the WELL’s very source. As allegory, moreover, it organizes nagging doubts and questions that make each community member, like young Lillie, the transmitter of primal enigmas of life, death, community and identity. The WELL as forum is a gathering around the dark center of those unanswered questions. Such primal scenes tend to resolve themselves in pious claims to sacrifice and losses redeemed, and this is the moral message that irresistibly concludes Rheingold’s chapter. As in all allegories, such answers lend a consoling order to something that fails to maintain a coherent structure. Allegory attempts to cover over discrepancies that lie at the origin, and in so doing, its answers fall short of responsibility to those motivating gaps. Jay’s posting is rife with inarticulate moments in which vital questions of death, mediation and community are at stake. What is conveyed in such inarticulate relays is the non-point source of allegory, a poison or pollution that, outside the economy of sin, grounds communication in an inescapably viral mode. How, then, to respond to such relays without falling in with the pieties of community morals and their inevitable symptoms, the violent disavowal of “sin”? Responsibility should be sought less in moral choices than in the relays of deferral and failed responses that pass on like a virus the lack of structure at the heart of community. Paradoxically, then, responsibility must remain inarticulate, to the extent that it passes on the lack of structure to which it answers.10 To respond is not to put a question to rest, but to be haunted by that question and to ensure its survival.
     
    In the life and death struggles we have examined, survival inevitably bears the marks of community morality. Moreover, this morality of survival can easily accommodate even the amorality of necropolitics. And yet another notion of survival can avoid the tragic dimension of the life and death struggle. Derrida advances the notion of survival in such terms, as a feature of life that escapes the fateful binary couple of life and death. Survival, like deferral, is an originary dimension of existence, in which whatever exists is bound to negation. That negation is not simply opposed to life, but intertwined with it, to the point of calling life itself into question. Survival, then, is “a complication of the opposition life/death,” a spectral prosthesis of life, its inevitable deferral or mediation (Learning 51). This mediation of life entails for Derrida an ethics of hospitality to the ghost, in which the ghost is not the fearsome figment of moral tales, but the spectral manifestation of the subject’s paradoxically vital finitude. In what follows, I pursue the implications of this radical ethics in readings of media communities. The ethics and responsibility of mediated life require that we listen to a different ghost haunting our stories of death and survival: the spectral trace of community in the deferrals and disjunctions of the moral fable.
     

    II.

     

    I might be alive in the place of another, at the expense of another. I might have usurped, that is, in fact killed.
     

    Primo Levi

     
    The stakes of a postmodern ethics of survival are dramatically staged in a set of recent horror films that echo in an uncanny way the mediatic theme of the haunted well. Among the most terrifying and haunting films of our time, Hideo Nakata’s Ringu (1998) and its American remakes The Ring (2002) and The Ring Two (2005) deliver a new kind of ghost: a vengeful presence whose means of persecution are television and videotape. A young girl who has died at the bottom of a well sends a cryptic video message whose viewers are condemned to die seven days after seeing it. The terrifying effect of the films is compounded by the duplication of the means of haunting by the viewing experience itself; in front of the TV set, the viewer of The Ring occupies the place of the victim stricken with death. In this way, the viewer’s own television becomes a haunted medium. This shared horror, moreover, relays what is perhaps the most disturbing feature of the narrative: the delegation of killing by one viewer to another. As we learn by the film’s end, only those who duplicate and spread the fatal message are spared its punishment. The fatal videotape thus spawns a viral logic of death.11
     
    The last word in cinematic terror, Ringu and its sequels suggest a postmodern allegory of the viewership of death. The viewer of the films is not merely in a position of metaphoric or analogical substitution with the fictional viewer of the fatal message; rather, he or she repeats, in allegorical fashion, a fatal error of viewing, and this error is what is passed on by the survivor in the viral duplication of the message. The survivor does not solve the riddle of the enigmatic message but merely repeats it; to delegate death is to survive one’s own incomprehension and pass it on to another. In this way, The Ring‘s horror narrative captures graphically a necropolitical logic of televisual viewership in the age of interactive communications, file sharing, and viral video. Like Pulse, One Missed Call and Shutter, among other films, The Ring taps into technological fears that have accompanied the internet revolution, channeling the dark side of Facebook and YouTube, and making its viewer the receiver of unknown online threats and the broadcaster of the curse he or she would ward off. The Ring‘s haunted message is emblematic of viral video in the age of web-based interactivity.
     
    This new media environment and its haunting features are the implicit context of The Ring, which however conveys its televisual haunting through a wide array of media. The film features not only TV and videotape, but also telephone, photography, microfilm, drawings, and rayographs. The primary medium of the haunting message is videotape, rather than the more contemporary DVD; in this way, the film reinforces the idea that there is an uncanny materiality to the medium of the haunting message. Likewise, the first photos we see in the film are anachronistic Polaroids. This materiality is crucial to the film’s motifs of the embodiment of the specter and the passage from an intangible to a tangible realm. Moreover, these recently outdated media reinforce The Ring‘s effective use of early film as conveyor of the ghost. The haunting video message is silent and largely in black and white, its images seeming to derive from a fairly distant past. Montage, jump cuts, and static camera positions evoke the early pioneers of the moving image, while disturbing shots of animated objects suggest Surrealist film. Further, the closing shot of the haunted well can be taken for a still photograph; it is only late in The Ring that this image discloses its horrifying truth, as the ghost of the dead girl emerges from the lip of the well. The horrifying appearance of the girl confirms the narrative’s building suspense; uncanny premonitions and mounting clues foretell her murderous intent. The image of the well, however, speaks to a primal visual uncanny. In breaking with the static photographic image, the girl’s emergence seemingly recapitulates the birth of cinema. The static image becomes one of movement, and the viewer’s horror at this emerging specter is grafted onto the visual delusion, shared by all film viewers, that still images are animated, and animated images are alive. In the film’s most terrifying moment, the girl’s emergence from the TV set itself confirms this delusion, but only in the mode of horror: what reveals itself is neither alive nor dead, but a spectral entity that defies either state. The TV screen becomes the equivalent of the edge of the well; what emerges from the screen is the truth of the viewer’s delusion. And yet, as we will see, this emergence bears the marks of a different encounter between viewer and image; as Ariella Azoulay puts it, “One needs to stop looking at the photograph and instead start watching it” (14).
     
    This passage across the screen seems to place the viewer in a position akin to that of early cinema viewers, confronted with the astonishing modern spectacle of animated images. In one of the Lumières’s first films, a train approaching the screen was seen as bearing down on the viewers’ space itself. Accounts of these early screenings lead us to believe that the spectators mistook the image for reality, that they actually feared a collision with the cinematic train. However, as Akira Lippit points out, there is reason to doubt this account of naïve belief and misperception, which may in fact serve to disavow one’s own delusions and the uncanny “shadow optics” we share with those viewers. Lippit argues that it is not so much the emerging train that was feared as the illusion of deep space that seems to lie beyond the screen: “what awaits the spectator at the projected point of collision is an imaginary depth, a volume that opens onto the spectator from the other side of the screen” (65). In this light, one might say that the fear of an emerging specter in The Ring masks a more unsettling fear, that of one’s absorption by the deep space of the image. “The spectator is swallowed by the image, as if it were an oral cavity, as if the image, in this instant, revealed an interiority, vast and terrible” (65). For Lippit, this deep space is a figure of the unconscious, of the self’s interiority dimly sensed as invisible and bottomless. “Cinema generates a spectacle of the unconscious,” Lippit says, “rendering its viewers unconscious spectators” (63).
     
    This invocation of a space that swallows the viewer is strikingly apt in the case of The Ring; the cursed message turns the TV set into a well, and the viewer is doomed to fall, like the girl herself, into its gruesome space. The Ring thus reawakens primal terrors of early cinema, and turns the TV set–the familiar domestic “tube”–into a threatening well, opening an uncanny portal in the heart of the home. Freud’s essay “The ‘Uncanny’” reminds us that the home (heim) is always haunted by the monstrous and unfamiliar; indeed, at the point of deepest privacy, the home inverts into its other, heimlich into unheimlich. As Freud shows, this ambiguity lies within the term “uncanny” itself which, at a certain point, becomes indistinguishable from its opposite. In a strange semantic slippage, privacy and intimacy tend to converge with secrecy and mystery; the most intimate is also the most alien. Welling up from the depths, the unheimlich is “like a buried spring or a dried-up pond. One cannot walk over it without always having the feeling that water might come up there again” (198). The image of a “buried spring” reprises Freud’s favored metaphors for the unconscious and the return of the repressed: what is cast into the unconscious is buried alive, and always insists on returning from below. The image of a buried spring resonates with that of a well, which is, after all, an artificial spring buried underground. In The Ring, we discover that the well lies directly beneath the cabin floor. It is this hole that threatens to swallow each viewer, once the haunting video is played at home on a private TV set.12
     
    For Freud, the uncanny and its monstrous effects ultimately call for therapeutic cure; the patient is called on to recognize that what appears as alien and frightening is only the product of an alienating repression. This psychoanalytic insight agrees with a moral dimension common to ghost stories, and which derive from the folklore of many cultural traditions. People wrongly killed return to haunt not only their killers, but a larger complicit community. To exorcise the vengeful spirit requires a labor of sleuthing and a confrontation with a buried past. Like such narratives, The Ring seems to conclude with exorcism once the girl’s murder is fully brought to light. We learn that the girl was killed by her mother who dropped her into the well, though she survived for seven days in her premature grave. Accordingly, seven days of life are allotted to the viewers of her message. It is at this point, however, that the narrative defies the logic of redemption, cure, and exorcism. The dead girl is never avenged, but insists instead that her haunting be perpetuated. The videotape is more than a message from the dead, it is a viral agent of killing that spares no innocents. The narrative of exorcism and redemption thus gives way to that of the curse.
     
    This mixture of the logic of redemption with that of the curse is a feature of some of the most haunting ghost stories, and what results is a complication that defies both psychoanalytic cure and moral resolution. The passing on of the ghost story becomes a modality of the curse, reinforcing the impression that as readers caught in an abyssal structure, attempting to interpret a series of passed-on messages, we may ourselves inherit it. Such haunting seriality opens Henry James’s The Turn of the Screw, with its initial scene of assembled guests, an exchange of tales, and the relating of the ghost story passed from the governess to a pair of narrators, one framing the other. In a masterful reading of The Turn of the Screw, Shoshana Felman tracks the infectious “ghost-effect” of James’s story in the critical literature soon after its publication. Two camps dominate this body of writing: those who subscribe to the occult happenings in the tale, and those who ascribe to the narrating governess some form of hysteria or madness. These camps reflect two inextricable facets of the ambiguous narrative, and in this way the text perpetuates itself in the symptoms of its readers. Of particular interest to Felman is how suspicious readers, those who doubt the occult version of the story’s events, inadvertently find themselves “duplicating and repeating the governess’s gesture” (“Henry James” 219). If such readers, the supposedly enlightened “non-dupes,” would blame the governess herself, rather than the ghosts, for the killing of young Miles at the end of the story, duplicating her gesture would amount to a repeating, or at least seconding, of that murder. “We are forced to participate in the scandal,” Felman claims (199). This fatal participation is noted by one of the story’s first critics, who complains that “one has been assisting in an outrage upon the holiest and sweetest fountain of human innocence, and helping to debauch–at least by helplessly standing by–the pure and trusting nature of children” (198). Tellingly, the critic’s plaint invokes the image of a pure source that has been sullied; the innocent children, metaphorized by that source, are debauched by the author and his guilty readers. An odd equivocation mars this righteous diatribe, however, since the reader is cast as both “helping” and “helpless.” Here, at the very source of goodness, and confronted with “the most hopelessly evil story that we have ever read in any literature,” the reader’s implication in the story’s evil doings is curiously ambivalent, and virtually hysterical. However, a pathologizing diagnosis–whether of the governess or of the story’s critics–skirts too quickly over the story’s contaminating ambivalence. This ambivalence may instead converge in the lure and promise of a singular source of evil, one that the text defies, defers, and denies at every step. The quest for this source ends only in the repeated confrontation with a divided point of origin. Dupe of the text, the reader can only repeat its dizzying duplicities. The unparalleled atmosphere of haunting in The Turn of the Screw lies, then, not so much in its imagery, psychological conflict, or narrative drama as it does in its textual ghost-effects, whereby any statement or act is accompanied by its alternate meaning, its immediate self-duplication as other than itself. For Felman, this makes the text eminently allegorical, understood as the mirroring, in the act of reading, of the narrative’s inadequation with what it claims to relate.
     
    In James’s story, as in The Ring, seriality, duplication and repetition are at the heart of the narrative. Both stories pass on a curse that condemns the reader or viewer to “duplicating and repeating,” as Felman says, the guilty acts at the heart of the story, and each defies the reader’s attempt to sleuth out the crime and its causes. Felman is not, of course, content to merely assent to the text’s contaminating force. However, unlike readers who are bent on solving the mystery and closing the book on the scandal, she resists the desire to assign a single meaning or cause to the governess’s story. In this way she avoids the moralizing plaints of the offended readers, as well as the pathologizing judgments of vulgar Freudians. The discourse of sin and morality give way in her analysis to the recognition of a common and shared error. Attuned to the haunting duplicity of narrative, this practice of reading informs an ethical practice of interpretation Felman has developed in her more recent Testimony. Testimonies of crime, torture and suffering are seen as orienting the reader toward a truth that is not a mere referential datum, but a discourse that is inherently duplicitous, and which must be repeated, duplicated and disseminated by the reader. Responsibility thus lies not simply in faithful recording but in bearing witness to a truth that is never simply referential. Indeed, as she argues, it is the very duplicity of the “truth” that allows for its duplication, and thus its communication to others.
     
    Ross Chambers draws on Felman’s Testimony in his reading of Laurie Lynd’s R.S.V.P. (1991), a short film dealing with a death from AIDS. Before his death, Andy makes a request to a radio show to broadcast a song of Berlioz, “Le spectre de la rose,” which, based on a poem by Gautier, is itself about death and survival. The song is broadcast after Andy’s passing and thus becomes a message from beyond the grave to his lover Sid who, hearing it on the radio, records it on his stereo. This leads Sid to contact Andy’s sister by phone, who tells Andy’s parents to listen to the radio broadcast as it plays later that day, in their time zone. Chambers insists on the mediatic relays, delays and repetitions that mark the transmission of the haunting message: answering machines, telephones, and radio assure the afterlife of Andy’s message, and allow for a final reconciliation between Sid and Andy’s homophobic parents. Chambers reads this process of delay and relay as the death-work that sanctions any discursive act. Deferral passes on the message, but at the cost of its author’s singular énoncé; the énonciation that survives its author does so at the cost of its author’s singular intent and control. “A message survives,” Chambers says, “but subject to an effect of deferral that prevents it from becoming ‘the’ message that remains forever potential” (17). From this results an ethics of “responsiveness,” as Chambers says, which is aware both of the loss of the original message and of the inadequacy of the response, and is caught up in “a relay of inadequacy” (18). “Our inadequate responses thus take the form of deferral, as the passing on of the message, relay-fashion, and each time in a modified form. Each retransmitted message will be in some sense continuous with the message to which it responds but also, and inescapably, discontinuous with it” (23–4).
     
    R.S.V.P., like The Ring, concerns a message from the dead, one that is broadcast and retransmitted through multiple media. But Chambers’s model of ethical responsiveness is hard to square with The Ring‘s horror narrative. The moral dilemma The Ring‘s protagonist confronts is whether, in order to save her son, she should have him duplicate the videotape as well. In choosing to do so, she makes the boy into yet another source of the tape’s murderous intent. This moral dilemma is heightened by the implication of the protagonist’s own latent violence in the transmission of the message, a plot element in The Ring that departs from the original Ringu; her first victim is her own ex-husband, against whom she manifestly harbors resentment, and possibly an unconscious urge to kill. In this way the mother herself, not unlike the dead girl, is a femme fatale.13The Ring does not fully resolve this contamination of the heroine, though two versions of feminine power separate off into the monstrous and the (more or less) respectable. The young boy, for his part, has telepathic qualities that not only channel the dead girl’s thoughts but seem to identify him with her dangerous powers.
     
    In this way, the duplicators of the message do not merely reproduce a source, but disseminate it. Indeed, that dissemination calls into question the well as source and origin. Fittingly enough, a well is precisely an artificial source, tapping a natural one. The Ring‘s terrors and its moral dilemmas plunge the viewer into an abyssal field of dangers without simple origin; even as it insists on the haunting source of our fears, The Ring haunts us with the idea of a viral message beyond the logic of duplication and representation. We might then speak, using the vocabulary of pollution, of a non-point source of the virus. The viral video belongs to a regime of simulation and virtuality according to which reproduction occurs in the absence of any original source.14 This is not to dispense with the moral dimension of the story, which graphically confronts the viewer with her or his tainted responsibility. At the same time, by tampering with the source, the viral logic of The Ring takes us beyond the comfortable distinctions of pollution and innocence, betrayal and fidelity, and even life and death. The Ring is a postmodern allegory of ethics in an age of simulation and virtuality.
     
    The “RSVP” of The Ring is not an appeal for recognition and response, but rather a demand that the viewer pass on the curse on pain of death. Moreover, one cannot decide whether this demand is motivated or not by a righteous cause; the girl may have been cruelly murdered, and even abused by the scientists studying her telepathic abilities, but her insatiable vengeance points as well to some irredeemable evil. It would seem, then, that there are few points of comparison between R.S.V.P.‘s message of tolerance and The Ring‘s sensationalistic horror. But I would argue that The Ring raises the stakes of R.S.V.P. by making its passed-on messages not only communicative relays but a contaminating force; an ethics of responsiveness is to be sought not merely in inadequacy but in an inherited curse. In this way, an ethics of viewing, rendered nearly moot by The Ring‘s terrifying premise, is made to confront a necropolitics of viewership in the age of the internet and globalization. This may help shed light on a persistent problem of moral discourse on the passive spectatorship of catastrophe. Writing on the televised spectacle of death in Sarajevo, Tom Keenan argues that to assume that the image of suffering speaks for itself is paradoxically to condemn it to silence. As Keenan shows, a common belief holds that the image of another’s suffering is enough to spur viewers to action; and yet, the viewer is insistently paralyzed by such scenes, as if by the evil eye (“Publicity” 110).15 What constrains moral discourse here, as in Felman’s Testimony, is the premise of an unmediated truth that can inform the public sphere. The binary correlative of the self-evident image is the equally pervasive notion of the deceptive image, inheritor of a long tradition of the image as mere illusion. Jacques Rancière has submitted the latter to an extensive critique, arguing that the image is always a “sentence-image,” object of a creative work of interpretation. In each case, ethical and political critique allows for interpretation by opening up room for error. In the horror film, this error is terror; the unconscious viewer is the viral agent of something “crucial enough to pass along,” as Carol Clover says (95).16 Clover shows that horror compulsively displays the phantasmatic lability of desire and gender; what is “uninterruptible” and “crucial enough to pass along” in the infectious thrill of horror is the persistent misreading of a violence both feared and desired in the obscure theater of primal fantasy. This viral and compulsive feature of horror is undeniably popular, and The Ring has established itself as a successful franchise in the genre. Indeed, I would argue, it is popular to the extent that it taps into a common error and shared enigma. Here viral, like infectious, carries a double meaning, as has emerged in colloquial parlance; what is viral is both popular and threatening to the community. Similarly, Rancière points to “the disruptive power of community” contained in the violence of the dialectical image (57). To promote an ethical viewership would not be to dispel the curse of the viral, but instead to follow the trace of its popular contagion, and to infect the public sphere with another death-work, one that contests the necropolitical.
     
    To pursue this ambiguous virality is to read against the grain of The Ring‘s overt message that compels its viewer to assume the position of a sociopathic survivor. It is this seemingly inescapable compulsion that defines the necropolitical force of the viral video. The spectator is and must remain a survivor; accordingly, others must be eliminated. Moreover, the evil viral force mitigates the moral crime of passing on the curse, since one cannot be guilty of the curse itself, but only of circulating it. Further, the film locks the work of sleuthing and interpretation into this vicious cycle. To solve the mystery of the video is not to lay the ghost to rest or to settle scores, but only to submit inevitably to the logic of survival. According to the logic of the video, there is no other interpretation; one has no choice but to survive, killing in good conscience, or at most with a nagging sense of responsibility for a crime that, nonetheless, is never one’s own. The viewer is pressed into service by a terrorizing dictate, whose self-evidence is akin to the tautological force of ideology, one that conveys no other message than the necropolitics of survival. It is significant that the protagonist’s choice to survive is bound to the survival of her child. This allows for a saving alibi in the film, for if it is selfish and amoral to choose one’s life over another’s, to condemn another to save one’s child is less so. But the mother-bond, an arbitrary narrative choice of the film, is merely the film’s ultimate alibi, serving to naturalize the protagonist’s sociopathological acts as inevitable. A family morality is grounded in the film in a natural imperative, but not without conflating, at a certain point, the contrary options of killing and saving.
     
    In our earlier examples, we have seen that the imperative of survival perpetuates economic imperatives by negating the possibility of self-sacrifice and disavowing murder. Similarly, what is strictly foreclosed by The Ring is the option of self-sacrifice. It is true that both of the girl’s parents commit suicide; on the other hand, it may be that in doing so they merely submit to the girl’s sinister force. Either way, the family relationship seems to have no bearing on the video itself, which is addressed to unknown innocent others. In this way, The Ring compels us to deny the option of self-sacrifice, which is cast unambiguously as the (impossible) choice of suicide. However, one may read suicide here as an exorbitant and paranoid denial of more ordinary political and ecological sacrifices, sacrifices invoked yet dispelled as impossible. Within the horror film’s paranoid economy, The Ring conflates “survival” with abundance and profit; to live within one’s means would amount to dying. The Ring thus confirms the theory of necropolitics, but only by grounding itself in a hyperbolic supernatural premise. If this premise seems to occlude the properly political implications of the story, it sheds light on the paranoid and fantasmatic order of the necropolitical itself. The Ring‘s necropolitical double injunction comes not from a sovereign power with which one identifies, but from an ineffable otherness that invades the home, and to which one submits. In this, the monstrous otherness would seem to be the double of the threatening others that contest one’s privilege to life and security. As a threat to one’s life, in other words, the evil figure of the girl is the alibi of the threatening others, out there and everywhere, on whose death one’s life depends. Paradoxically, then, she demands death, and her own first of all. Her inexplicable evil dictates death because she is herself the spectral manifestation of what we have relegated to the world’s zones of death. This phantasmatic misrecognition of the monster resembles that which enables the racist to see in the other someone less than human or marked for death; these misrecognized others are put to death in all innocence by people who, as Hannah Arendt says of murdering colonists, “somehow were not aware that they had committed murder” (qtd. Mbembe 24).17
     
    The Ring captures the phantasmatic features of our modern mediascape, and speaks eloquently of the fears and repressions that define the phantom public sphere. Might we say, then, that by confronting the viewer with the price of his own survival, the film implicitly calls that survival into question? Would this be the moral message of the film, one we should heed in spite of our reflexes of terror? I have suggested as much, but would argue further that the claim the film has over its viewer, its monstrous appeal, defies a simple reversal of values and indeed challenges the notions of both morality and message. The most potent features of The Ring are not only the images of the cursed video itself, but also the inhuman, enigmatic insect-like sounds that accompany them. At the heart of The Ring is a message that haunts us, not simply because of its implicit threat, but rather because it remains enigmatic and opaque. And though we are interpellated by horror, we remain unconscious spectators in the face of the message from the well, misreading the film, passing over its enigma and passing it on as a curse. The disturbing sounds that accompany the cursed images–a repeated faint squeaking or muted screech–are most suggestive of this enigmatic dimension of the film.18 Here the film does not deliver a message or a clue, but only a sound that disturbs. Moreover, the sound may not even derive from the ghost herself, since it resembles the kind of faint “noise” passed on in the process of re-recording and duplication–what in French are called parasites. This sound also lends a horrifying quality to the scrambled white noise that precedes and ends the video transmission; in a moment of horror, the mother realizes her son is condemned to die when she comes upon him staring at the white noise of the video he has just finished watching. The most terrifying aspect of the film does not, then, derive from the other world, but only from the process of passing on the video. This “ghost in the machine” is and remains perfectly opaque, a signifier without a content, the zero degree of symbolic exchange.19
     
    It is tempting to see this aspect of the film as conveying what Jean Laplanche calls the “enigmatic signifier.” To explore the unconscious dimension of an artwork, clinical case, or social pathology is, in Laplanchian terms, to uncover the trace of the subject’s primary encounter with the unconscious of the other. This encounter is that of a child with an adult and his or her compromised signals; the seduction of the child by the adult is the fundamental given of this primal scene of traumatic encounter (Otherness 93). Laplanchian theory allows us to refine the psychological dimension of the stories we are examining here, and to bring out their shared compulsive features: an oneiric world symbolized by the underworld; childhood innocence betrayed by sin, evil and death; and a message that defies reason and is passed on from one person to another. And while this psychological framework may not seem to illuminate the necropolitics of globalism, our horror stories show us that community is persistently figured in lurid terms richly evocative of primal seduction. Here we find the wellspring of the ambivalence expressed in the contraries of killing and saving, in the governess’s terrorizing inquisition, and in the mediatic community’s dubious fascination with children in danger. Every girl in a well seems to revive Alice’s marvelous and disturbing fall down the rabbit-hole, a journey into a netherworld of illicit desires, extravagant fears, and latent pedophilia.
     
    Laplanche’s “enigmatic signifier,” deriving from the unconscious of the other, is not the index of a deep meaning the subject can ever hope to recover. At best, the subject can only interpret a signifier that was itself received in translation. Passed on as a mystery, and received as a translation of that mystery, the enigmatic signifier holds out no promise of a return to the source. This surely does not defeat the purpose of interpretation, though it does set a limit to the passionate quest for the source of one’s fears, fantasies, and suspect desires. As Laplanche argues, the quest for the origin of a fantasy always risks repeating a fantasy of origins (“Fantasy” 24–25). We have seen how some readers of The Turn of the Screw fall into a similar vicious circle by opting either for a narrative of sin or for a supernatural premise. An ethics of reading, however, works with a non-point source of sin and evil, which one translates as best as one can, passing on a contaminated message. Responsibility to the other must bend, then, to the necessity of betrayal and infidelity in a shared error that provides the basis for an ethics beyond morality. We have read The Ring as an allegory of such contaminated messages; the narrative of horror and death, as well as its necropolitical implications, spring from an insight, however compromised, into a viral error of viewing.
     
    The Ring dramatizes the stakes of a postmodern ethics of viewing, in which responsibility is figured not as the choice of a moral subject but as the response to the enigmatic call of the other, a response, as Emmanuel Levinas has it, that turns the respondent into the “hostage” of the other, compelled to answer against his will. Drawing on Levinas, Tom Keenan argues that ethics is incomplete to the extent that it does not call into question the will and autonomy of the self, purported agent of moral acts directed at a separate other, object of knowledge and compassion. “Our responsibilities, somehow in excess of our knowledge if not simply opposed to it, are to the other, to the undetermined other, and our vigilance consists in the care with which we attend to the noise that precedes our question, the mark or trace to which we respond at the beginning” (Fables, 11). Keenan emphasizes that this other is not simply someone else, but also “something else,” an “undetermined other,” often a “ghost.” In this reframing of ethics, the self responds to the call of the other in terms evocative of the horror film: accused, persecuted, implicated in an other who calls one’s own existence into question. Keenan quotes from Levinas: “I have not done anything and I have always been under accusation: persecuted. The ipseity … is a hostage. The word I means here I am, answering for everything and everyone” (20). Indeed, the self who is called on is in a sense called up by a question that precedes it. Further, that self is not a singular entity but a mere placeholder for an open address. “The call,” Keenan says, “exposes me, as anyone, to an unincorporable alterity that has no interest in me as anything other than as a placeholder, as a singular substitute” (23). This post-idealist ethics radicalizes the commitment to the other by enmeshing self and other in absolute “proximity,” but at the cost, precisely, of the moral compass that habitually orients our sense of responsibility.
     
    Such comparisons between Levinas’s traumatizing other and the ghost of The Ring may seem perverse, given that the horror film encourages not responsibility but murderous self-interest. Levinas, moreover, states clearly that self-preservation is no justification for murder. Judith Butler points to this aspect of Levinas as an admirable pacifism, but she also subjects his ethics to a thoughtful critique that brings out a certain violence that serves as the ground of Levinas’s own ethical imperative. Further, Butler points out that politics interferes with ethics in a public sphere that manages and exploits the face of the other. Reading with and against Levinas, Butler insists that the ethical cannot be divorced from politics; Levinas’s “face” of the other, index of sheer alterity, is made to confront those broadcast by the dominant media. As Butler says, “We cannot, under contemporary conditions of representation, hear the agonized cry or be compelled or commanded by the face. We have been turned away from the face, sometimes through the very image of the face, one that is meant to convey the inhuman, the already dead, that which is not precariousness and cannot, therefore, be killed; this is the face that we are nevertheless asked to kill” (Precarious 150). Butler’s point is to oppose an ethics to the necropolitics of these conditions of representation. By the same token, however, ethics must confront the political conditions of its agency.20 This political-ethical conjuncture is one that troubles Levinas’s own positions, notably his Zionism, but it also seems to infect his more abstract formulations of ethical non-violence, which pose the stubborn dilemma of a non-violence predicated on a primary urge to kill. As Butler says, “the non-violence that Levinas seems to promote does not come from a peaceful place, but rather from a constant tension between the fear of undergoing violence and the fear of inflicting violence” (137). Though this tension seems to vitiate the prospects of ethics, it avoids the abstract claims of moral purity and innocence. Indeed, ethics gains by claiming violence as its own motive force: “The struggle against violence,” Butler says, “accepts that violence is one’s own possibility” (Frames 171). This tension within radical ethics lies at the heart of The Ring as well. The Ring answers to two aspects of the media-image that Butler hopes to turn in an ethical direction. One is the dimension of sound, cast in terms of an address that is bound to fail; the second is that of the “critical image,” which “must not only fail to capture its referent, but show this failing” (Precarious 146). The critical image captures nothing, yet captivates the viewer, who is exposed in her or his precariousness to an alterity that defies representation. I would suggest that The Ring, and especially its cursed video, contains both aspects of Butler’s sound-image. Inevitably, we turn away from or are terrified by the video, but this is itself the ground on which we meet the specter: “chasing it away only so as to chase after it,” as Derrida says, in a duplicitous act of conjuration and an always failed encounter with its enigmatic trace (Specters 140).21
     
    A haunting message, then, is viral because enigmatic; to pass it on is a symbolic act that, however, exposes the tenuousness of community and of symbolic exchange itself. We have followed the traces of this virality in our stories of haunted wells and in The Ring‘s infectious premise. A final example here will refine what is at stake in this haunting virality. In his late work, Derrida advances a theory of immunity and auto-immunity, which emerges in the course of a discussion of religion, conceived as a practice oriented toward the holy, or heilig, which Derrida glosses as meaning unscathed, immune, safe and sound. Community at its most metaphysical is forged in a shared faith in transcendent immunity. At a certain level of analysis, this metaphysical bid is merely a compensatory illusion, which goes some way toward explaining religion’s sacred terrors, but also the terrorism and “radical evil” that concern Derrida in his essay. Derrida, however, displaces the metaphysical gambit of the afterlife to advance a theory of survival, one that implicates the life of community in an inevitable death-work. Community thus combines the contradictory features of immunity and auto-immunity, its self-preservation always simultaneously self-destructive. “There is no opposition, fundamentally, between ‘social bond’ and ‘social unravelling’. A certain interruptive unraveling is the condition of the ‘social bond’, the very respiration of all ‘community’” (“Faith” 64).22 Derrida’s deconstruction of this opposition is not, of course, a complacent acquiescence to society’s failings or to the sociopathology of The Ring; nor is it an accommodation to the notion of a phantom public sphere. Rather, the phantom is linked to one’s prosthetic survival–exemplarily in writing, as Derrida has often argued, but here in terms of automation and teletechnoscientific machines–a survival that is claimed for the purpose of immunity, but whose technical means are usually denied, repressed, and disavowed. Immunity is thus paired with auto-immunity, in the ambiguous pact of an “enemy of life in the service of life” (48).
     
    An insistent motif in Derrida’s essay is that of the source, here defined as always split and divided, “two sources in one”: a source haunted by its double, indeed by its duplication and dissemination. “The same unique source divides itself mechanically, automatically, and sets itself reactively in opposition to itself” (28). Against this reactive logic, Derrida asserts that the two sources do not oppose but rather “contaminate” each other (29). Here, at the wellspring of community, its very re-source, there can be no immunity from contamination. The viral and the ghost derive from this haunted place, where self is bound to otherness, identity to mediation, community to teletechnological dislocation. While the sense of a contaminated source often spurs technophobia, fears of contagion, necropolitics, and wars of religion, it also attests to an “auto-co-immunity” that defies the vain claims to immunity, self-defense, and aggression. A secret tradition derives from this source, a “spectral tradition,” Derrida says, always haunted by its uncanny other (51). This tradition provides another means to ground community, to reckon with the phantom, and to accommodate viral contagion. “Community as com-mon auto-immunity: no community <is possible> that would not cultivate its own auto-immunity, a principle of sacrificial self-destruction ruining the principle of self-protection (that of maintaining its self-integrity intact), and in this view of some sort of invisible and spectral sur-vival” (51). We have traced a similar spectral tradition in our history of media communities and their haunted sources; what is “crucial enough to pass along” from each instance of the well is a haunting auto-immunity that defies the script of terror and the necropolitical imperative.
     

    III.

     

    I do not know how long I sat peering down that well.
     

    H.G. Wells

     
    On December 30, 2006, three years after he was pulled from the “spider hole” where he had been hiding, Saddam Hussein was put to death. The execution was recorded on a cell phone and quickly went viral on the web; for weeks it was one of the most popular videos on YouTube. “Welcome to the sordid world of the execution chamber, brought to you by the YouTube generation,” said Amnesty International (Huggler). While Amnesty’s response to the flawed trial and execution of Hussein was morally principled, its righteous and sarcastic targeting of YouTube is somewhat less so. Indeed, Amnesty’s indignation scarcely hides its scapegoating reflex, which would blame social networking and file-sharing youngsters for the events they merely witness. And in a familiar turn, fears of internet crime, perversion and indecency are attributed to a generation of seemingly monstrous youths. These lapses on the part of the world’s preeminent moral watchdog signal a crisis, not only of the morality of online spectatorship, but also of the discourse of morality itself.
     
    The YouTube execution video seems to realize the terrible premise of The Ring. A horrifying message of death is transmitted virally by seemingly amoral subjects, infecting the larger world, if not with death itself, then with the off-limits world of capital punishment. In so doing, it also makes explicit The Ring‘s necropolitical implications. The privilege of wired youths is brutally manifested as the corollary of a vengeful and opportunistic neocolonial massacre in Iraq. It is no doubt chilling to imagine that some of the video’s viewers may have enjoyed the spectacle. If so, one may assume that those who did were the hapless consumers of media manipulation that equated Hussein with Bin Laden, and thereby with evil itself. In these terms, such morally crippled viewers would be not so much guilty parties as unwitting victims of a demonizing media, agent of the state, that forges a national community with the fictional resources of terror, horror, and delusion. As children, they may submit more readily, yet surely less accountably, than as adults who accede to that ideology. The YouTube execution video is the late progeny of CNN, the monster from Midland, and the phantom public is repeatedly conjured to rally in wonder and horror at the spectacle of its secret necropolitics.
     
    Amnesty’s moral lapse betrays a desire to assign blame to a particular party, even one as amorphous as a “generation.” In so doing, it passes over the complexity of the file-sharing site as venue for multiple and contradictory political interests. It is notable, for instance, that internet file-sharing allowed for massive dissemination of the controversial images from Abu Ghraib. Similarly, during the demonstrations that followed the Iranian elections in 2009, video clips of a young woman’s dying moments went viral on the web, promoted by CNN in many links and stories.23 YouTube constitutes less a forum than the switchboard of a global public sphere, a multitude that is centripetal and centrifugal, its popularity variously pulled into the orbit of corporate power and escaping the dictates of the market, morality, and law. Here again, virality is highly ambiguous, connoting both the subversive promise of popular agency and the cynicism of marketing, which cheerfully adopts the language of disease to hawk its wares. Inevitably, then, even viral popularity is the object of manipulation. One programmer, selling his services to companies avid to monopolize the site, gloats at the host of techniques he employs to orchestrate artificial virality; in a technique called “strategic tagging,” he succeeds in “leading viewers down the rabbit hole” (Greenberg).” Cynical as it is, the hacker’s metaphor is strikingly apt: every viewer becomes a young Alice accidentally fallen into a world of primal fears and fantasies. From the live telecast from the San Marino well, to Midland, Wood’s Hole, and YouTube, media communities converge in the insistent figure of a young girl in danger. The cynicism of the YouTube hacker is a fitting rejoinder to the hypocrisy of its television and cable precedents. Despite corporate inroads on the site, YouTube, unlike television and cable, remains a broadcast site without a center. Its videos derive not from a single source or well but from global non-point sources of virality. And it is precisely this non-point source of internet “pollution” that seems to exasperate Amnesty and drive its moral accusation.
     
    World-wide wells? In 1895, the futurist H.G. Wells offers such a vision in The Time Machine, a moral fable of the dangers of technology and of cultural decline. The fears and monstrosities evoked by YouTube’s excesses seem anticipated in Wells’s wells. Having voyaged far into a degenerate human future, Wells’s Time Traveler notices that the landscape of England is studded with mysterious wells that lead to a monstrous underworld. He learns to his horror that a devolved race of humans lives underground, climbing at night from the innumerable wells to prey on the happy race of the Eloi. The monstrous Morlocks, whom he at first mistakes for ghosts, are the victims of a necropolitical division of man into laborers and capitalists, and though they devolve underground, they retain a physical and mechanical advantage over their former masters. Wells’s story is a cautionary tale of political oppression, evoking as well the haunting psychic terms of Freud’s “The ‘Uncanny.‘” Futurist, moralist, and fictional inventor of the atomic bomb, Wells chose to sign with his own name the dark passage to the haunting world of the necropolitical other. Ironically, however, today Wells’s vision serves instead to rally a panicked world against that enemy. In Stephen Spielberg’s War of the Worlds (2005), the battle against the alien species is made to echo with colonial war in the Arab and Muslim world, and in this way, the hysterical tone of the Cold War is updated to evoke the polarizing fears of the “clash of civilizations.”24 The beginning of the film invokes a familiar image: in the city square, a Norman Rockwell small-town community, the townfolk gather around a hole opened up in the earth. A phantom public, conjured by Hollywood, they are spectators of an imaginary other. Out of that hole, a monstrous machine emerges, and before it proceeds to vaporize the public, it blinks a giant eye at the fascinated onlookers.
     

    John Culbert is Research Associate at the Critical Theory Institute, UC Irvine. He is the author of Paralyses: Literature, Travel and Ethnography in French Modernity (University of Nebraska Press, forthcoming 2010). This essay derives from his current research project on space, spectrality, and modern memory.
     

    Acknowledgement

     
    My thanks to Dina Al-Kassim, Jonathan Hall, Daniel Katz, Targol Mesbah, Kavita Philip, and Ward Smith, who commented on earlier drafts of this essay.
     

    Endnotes

     
    1. Speaking of the photograph of the would-be assassin Lewis Payne by Alexander Gardner, Barthes says, “This will be and this has been; I observe with horror an anterior future of which death is the stake…. I shudder, like Winnicott’s psychotic patient, over a catastrophe which has already occurred. Whether or not the subject is already dead, every photograph is this catastrophe” (Camera Lucida 96).

     

     
    2. The more recent English version of this essay translates “instant recourse” as “last recourse.” See Derrida, Psyche 291. Neither translation, however, fully captures the resonance of Derrida’s “dernière instance,” which combines the finality of the “last” with the iterability of the “latest.” Further, Derrida’s “instance” plays on the notion of an appeal, as to a judge, over a death sentence, and suggests that Barthes’ punctum confronts the viewer with a specter that cannot be put to rest.

     

     
    3. For the authoritative account of this history, see Ilan Pappe, The Ethnic Cleansing of Palestine.

     

     
    4. The memorial plaque to Kathy Fiscus at the San Marino Public Library reads, “A little girl who brought the world ‘together’ for a ‘moment.’” The scare quotes are eloquent in their very incoherence.

     

     
    5. Brokaw pays his respects to Chambers, his former colleague, on the opening page of KTLA’s News at Ten.

     

     
    6. Roberto Esposito’s Bíos devotes a chapter to what he sees as a theoretical slippage in Foucault between sovereignty as death-dealing power and the more modern governmentality devoted to “health, longevity, and wealth” (36). Mbembe’s postcolonial perspective allows him to solve what Esposito calls an “aporetic knot” (40) in Foucault’s theory of modern power by insisting that sovereign power continues to exert its force in colonial and neo-colonial rule. Esposito’s book advances its own “thanatopolitics” but makes no mention of Mbembe.

     

     
    7. Mellencamp highlights the “myth of the frontier” in the Challenger disaster, thus bringing out an uncanny resonance between the story of Baby Jessica and the ill-fated flight of would-be “Teacher in Space” Christa McAuliffe (256).

     

     
    8. Rheingold’s other favored figure of community, modeled after sociologist Ray Oldenburg’s “Third Place,” is similarly dubious. Oldenburg’s Third Place–a forum for community between the poles of home and work–was famously taken up as a predatory corporate business model by Starbucks Coffee. Curiously, Oldenburg advances the notion of the Third Place in his The Great Good Place, the title of which echoes that of a Henry James tale. Oldenburg thus inadvertently pairs his nostalgic appeal for a lost public sphere with a supernatural ghost story.

     

     
    9. Andy and Larry Wachowski’s Matrix trilogy provides a compelling version of this narrative. Alex Rivera’s more recent Sleep Dealer (2008) cleverly updates The Matrix by giving its premise a neo-colonial and necropolitical spin.

     

     
    10. My argument here is indebted to Judith Butler, who argues that “enigmatic articulations” and the “failure to narrate” provide the grounds for ethics, conceived as “the risk, if not the certainty, of a certain kind of death, the death of the subject who cannot, who can never, fully recuperate the conditions of its own emergence.” See Butler, Giving an Account of Oneself, 64–5.

     

     
    11. Based on Koji Suzuki’s 1991 novel Ringu, the story’s sequels and adaptations seem themselves to follow a viral logic; Suzuki would compose a trilogy of novels on the theme, which also inspired a manga series before Nakata adapted Ringu for the screen. Several film remakes, sequels, and prequels followed, both in Japan and abroad; the Korean version of the film is titled The Ring Virus. For a fuller account of the Ring franchise and its inter-mediatic and cross-cultural adaptations, see Julian Stringer, “The Original and the Copy.” As the American scene is my focus here, in what follows I draw largely on Gore Verbinski’s The Ring, which is mainly faithful to the original Ringu, while indicating significant differences between the two films.

     

     
    12. To create an “uncanny” impression of stilted, even mechanical movement, Ringu employs a simple technique to great effect, adopted as well in The Ring: the girl’s dreadful emergence from the well is played backwards. The scene of her emergence, in other words, is actually based on a shot of her descending into the well, recalling in a striking way Freud’s claim that what comes out of the unconscious derives from a prior repression.

     

     
    13. Mary Ann Doane has shown that the figure of the femme fatale in film mobilizes contradictory emotions about feminine agency and power, alternately desired and repelled. Significantly, Doane invokes the language of disease in speaking of the feminine agent; the femme fatale “is an ambivalent figure because she is not the subject of power but its carrier” (Femmes Fatales 2).

     

     
    14. Julian Stringer’s “The Original and the Copy” makes a similar case about The Ring, arguing from an adaptation studies standpoint that the notions of “originality” and “fidelity” are called into question by the franchise’s complex borrowings and rewritings across many media and cultures. But in an essay that deliberately excludes any concern with “content,” “style” or “‘meaning’” (the latter in scare quotes), Stringer passes over the ethical implications of the film’s missing source, and in this way makes adaptation studies itself a medium for passing on the film’s curse (305). “The Ring virus itself resembles the very processes of textual translation it so gleefully spawns. Ring, The Ring, and all the rest, provide a paradigmatic example of the kinds of cultural ‘retellings’ [that] have by now completely infiltrated contemporary media culture” (304). Our approach here is different; if Ringu is indeed the “paradigmatic example” of our media culture, as Stringer puts it, we must certainly ask what its haunting and sociopathic message shares with those larger networks of viral communications and entertainment media.

     

     
    15. Keenan’s essay critiques the notion of a public sphere composed of citizens who, supplied with raw information, might be trusted to take rationally-informed decisions. “The conceit or fantasy of this kind of public sphere must, after Bosnia if nowhere else, contend with what we could call the rule of silence–no image speaks for itself, let alone speaks directly to our capacity for reason. Images always demand interpretation, even or especially emotional images” (“Publicity and Indifference” 113).

     

     
    16. “Horror is the least interruptible of all film genres,” Clover claims. “That uninterruptibility itself bears witness to the compulsive nature of the stories it tells” (“Her Body” 95).

     

     
    17. Such “misrecognition” takes on an additional twist in the process of translating Ringu into an American version. If, as Akira Lippit argues in Shadow Optics, all postwar Japanese film is marked by the history of the atomic strikes, Ringu‘s haunting would carry a quite different legacy of victimhood and survival than The Ring (images of crawling stricken bodies in Ringu‘s cursed video are evocative here). A foreclosed history thus returns to the United States in The Ring‘s cursed video, haunting the very process of translation.

     

     
    18. Verbinski’s The Ring, in other respects more conventionally narrative than Ringu, conveys a more haunting noise than the original film, in which the sound-effects invoke familiar codes of cinematic dread and suspense. Here, Verbinski may have drawn on Kiyoshi Kurosawa’s Séance (1999), which features a similar enigmatic sound as in The Ring whenever a spirit is about to appear. The motif of the enigmatic sound in Séance is linked to an insistent theme of recording and playback; one of the film’s protagonists, the husband of the spirit-medium, is a sound engineer.

     

     
    19. This echoes a scene from Tobe Hooper’s film Poltergeist (1982), in which the young Carol Anne sits rapt in front of a scrambled screen, listening to the faintly audible whisperings of the ghosts haunting her family’s home. This scene, and the opening sequence that shows in extreme close-up a late-night TV sign-off message (patriotic monuments and the national anthem), are perhaps the only “uncanny” moments in the film’s formulaic moral spectacle of terror. The Poltergeist series anticipates The Ring‘s premise of a haunted video: the actress who played Carol Anne, among other actors in the series, died a premature death, leading to the popular theory of a “Poltergeist curse.” Both Suzuki and Nakata have credited Poltergeist as influence on their work.

     

     
    20. Butler returns even more pointedly to this critique of Levinas in Frames of War, insisting on the political and mediatic framings that constrain the scope of ethical responsiveness. “It is not enough to say, in a Levinasian way, that the claim is made upon me prior to my knowing and as an inaugurating instance of my coming into being. That may be formally true, but its truth is of no use to me if I lack the conditions for responsiveness that allow me to apprehend it in the midst of this social and political life” (Frames of War 179).

     

     
    21. “In the occult society of those who have sworn together [des conjurés], certain subjects, either individual or collective, represent forces and ally themselves together in the name of common interests to combat a dreaded political adversary, that is, also to conjure it away. For to conjure means also to exorcise: to attempt to destroy and to disavow a malignant, demonized, diabolized force, most often an evil-doing spirit, a specter, a kind of ghost” (Derrida, Specters of Marx 47–8).

     

     
    22. In the wake of 9/11, Derrida applied the model of an “autoimmune crisis” to an analysis of terrorism and the security state. See Giovanna Borradori, Philosophy in a Time of Terror: Dialogues with Jürgen Habermas and Jacques Derrida. On a similar “paradigm of immunization,” see also Roberto Esposito, Bíos, 45–77.

     

     
    23. Neda Agha-Soltan, the girl in the graphic video clips, rolls her eyes toward the camera at the moment of losing consciousness. An early comment posted to an online discussion thread was evocative of The Ring‘s haunting curse: “While viewing it, I wished I could turn back and had never clicked the play button.” Craig Stoltz, “#Neda and the Power of the Viral Image.”

     

     
    24. At the beginning of the alien attack, the protagonist’s daughter is working on a homework assignment dealing with the Algerian War of Independence. The father reacts with disgust to the Arab food she offers him, a small gesture rich in necropolitical implications.
     

    Works Cited

       

     

    • Al-Kassim, Dina. On Pain of Speech: Fantasies of the First Order and the Literary Rant. Berkeley: University of California Press, 2010. Print.
    • Asad, Talal. “Trying to Understand French Secularism.” Political Theologies. Eds. Hent de Vries and Lawrence E. Sullivan. New York: Fordham University Press, 2006. 494–526. Print.
    • Azoulay, Ariella. The Civil Contract of Photography. Trans. Rela Mazali and Ruvik Danieli. New York: Zone Books, 2008. Print.
    • Barthes, Roland. Camera Lucida. Trans. Richard Howard. New York: Hill and Wang, 1981. Print.
    • —. “The Great Family of Man.” Mythologies. Trans. Annette Lavers. New York: Hill and Wang, 1972. 100–102. Print.
    • Belkin, Lisa. “Death on the CNN Curve.” The New York Times Magazine, July 23, 1995. Print.
    • Borradori, Giovanna. Philosophy in a Time of Terror: Dialogues with Jürgen Habermas and Jacques Derrida. Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 2003. Print.
    • Butler, Judith. Frames of War. London and New York: Verso, 2009. Print.
    • —. Giving an Account of Oneself. New York: Fordham University Press, 2005. Print.
    • —. Precarious Life: The Powers of Mourning and Violence. London: Verso, 2004.
    • Chambers, Ross. “The Responsibility of Responsiveness: Criticism in an Age of Witness.” Paroles Gelées 14:2 (1996): 9–27. Print.
    • Chambers, Stan, and Lynn Price. KTLA’s News at Ten: Sixty Years with Stan Chambers. Lake Forest, California: Behler Publications, 2008. Print.
    • Clover, Carol J. “Her Body, Himself: Gender in the Slasher Film.” Fantasy and the Cinema. Ed. James Donald. London: British Film Institute, 1989. 91–133. Print.
    • Derrida, Jacques. “Faith and Knowledge.” Religion. Eds. Jacques Derrida and Gianni Vattimo. Stanford: Stanford University Press, 1998. 1–78. Print.
    • —. Learning to Live Finally: An Interview with Jean Birnbaum. Trans. Pascale-Anne Brault and Michael Naas. Hoboken, N.J.: Melville House Publishing, 2007. Print.
    • —. Specters of Marx: The State of the Debt, The Work of Mourning, and the New International. Trans. Peggy Kamuf. London: Routledge, 1994. Print.
    • —. The Work of Mourning. Eds. Pascale-Anne Brault and Michael Naas. Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 2001. Print.
    • —. Psyche: Inventions of the Other. Vol. 1. Eds. Peggy Kamuf and Elizabeth Rottenberg. Stanford: Stanford UP, 2007. Print.
    • Doane, Mary Ann. Femmes Fatales: Feminism, Film Theory, Psychoanalysis. London: Routledge, 1991. Print.
    • —. “Information, Crisis, Catastrophe.” Logics of Television: Essays in Cultural Criticism. Ed. Patricia Mellencamp. Bloomington: University of Indiana Press, 1990. 222–239. Print.
    • Esposito, Roberto. Bíos: Biopolitics and Philosophy. Trans. Timothy Campbell. Minneapolis: University of Minnesota Press, 2008. Print.
    • Felman, Shoshana. “Henry James: Madness and the Risks of Practice (Turning the Screw of Interpretation).” The Turn of the Screw: Authoritative Text, Contexts, Criticism. By Henry James. Eds. Deborah Esch and Jonathan Warren. New York: Norton, 1999. 196–228. Print.
    • Felman, Shoshana, and Dori Laub, eds. Testimony: Crises of Witnessing in Literature, Psychoanalysis and History. London and New York: Routledge, 1992. Print.
    • Freud, Sigmund. “The ‘Uncanny.’” Writings on Art and Literature. Ed. James Strachey. Stanford: Stanford University Press, 1997. 193–233. Print.
    • Girard, René. Violence and the Sacred. Trans. Patrick Gregory. Baltimore: Johns Hopkins University Press, 1977. Print.
    • Greenberg, Dan. “The Secret Strategies Behind Many ‘Viral’ Videos.” TechCrunch. Np. 22 Nov. 2007. Web. 11 Nov. 2008.
    • Huggler, Justin. “After the YouTube execution, what now for death penalty?” The Independent. 4 Jan. 2007. Web. 15 Feb. 2007.
    • Jessica’s Well. n.d. Web. 7 Apr. 2009.
    • Keenan, Thomas. Fables of Responsibility: Aberrations and Predicaments in Ethics and Politics. Stanford: Stanford University Press, 1997. Print.
    • —. “Publicity and Indifference (Sarajevo on Television).” PMLA 117:1 (January 2002): 104–116. Print.
    • [CrossRef]
    • Klein, Naomi. The Shock Doctrine: The Rise of Disaster Capitalism. New York: Metropolitan Books, 2007. Print.
    • Laplanche, Jean. Essays on Otherness. Ed. John Fletcher. London: Routledge, 1999. Print.
    • Laplanche, Jean, and Jean-Bertrand Pontalis. “Fantasy and the Origins of Sexuality.” Formations of Fantasy. Eds. Victor Burgin, James Donald, Cora Kaplan. London: Methuen: 1986. Print.
    • Latham, Rob. Consuming Youth: Vampires, Cyborgs, and the Culture of Consumption. Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 2002. Print.
    • Liebman, Stuart. “On New German Cinema, Art, Enlightenment, and the Public Sphere: An Interview with Alexander Kluge.” October 46 (Fall 1988): 23–59. Print.
    • [CrossRef]
    • Lippit, Akira Mizuta. Atomic Light (Shadow Optics). Minneapolis: University of Minnesota Press, 2005. Print.
    • Mbembe, Achille. “Necropolitics.” Trans. Libby Meintjes. Public Culture 15:1 (2003): 11–40. Print.
    • [Project MUSE]
    • Mellencamp, Patricia. “TV Time and Catastrophe, or Beyond the Pleasure Principle of Television.” Logics of Television: Essays in Cultural Criticism. Ed. Patricia Mellencamp. Bloomington: University of Indiana Press, 1990. 240–266. Print.
    • Oldenburg, Ray. The Great Good Place: Cafés, Coffee Shops, Bookstores, Bars, Hair Salons and Other Hangouts at the Heart of a Community. New York: Paragon House, 1989. Print.
    • Pappe, Ilan. The Ethnic Cleansing of Palestine. Oxford: Oneworld Publications, 2006. Print.
    • Poster, Mark. “Nations, Identities, and Global Technologies.” What’s the Matter with the Internet? Minneapolis: University of Minnesota Press, 2001. 101–128. Print.
    • Rancière, Jacques. The Future of the Image. Trans. Gregory Elliot. London: Verso, 2007. Print.
    • Rheingold, Howard. The Virtual Community: Homesteading on the Electronic Frontier. Boston: MIT Press, 2000. Print.
    • The Ring. Dir. Gore Verbinski. Dreamworks, 2002. Film.
    • Ringu. Dir. Hideo Nakata. Omega Project, 1998. Film.
    • Robbins, Bruce. “The Public as Phantom.” Introduction. The Phantom Public Sphere. Ed. Bruce Robbins. Minneapolis: University of Minnesota Press, 1993. vii-xxvi. Print.
    • Stoltz, Craig. “#Neda and the Power of the Viral Image,” The Huffington Post. 22 Jun. 2009. Web. 22 Jun. 2009.
    • Stringer, Julian. “The Original and the Copy: Nakata Hideo’s Ring (1998).” Japanese Cinema: Texts and Contexts. Eds. Alastair Phillips and Julian Stringer. Abingdon: Routledge, 2007. 296–307. Print.
    • Warner, Michael. “The Mass Public and the Mass Subject.” The Phantom Public Sphere. Ed. Bruce Robbins. Minneapolis: University of Minnesota Press, 1993. 234–256. Print.

     

  • Notes on Contributors

    Stephanie Boluk is a Ph.D. student in English Literature at the University of Florida. She is currently writing her dissertation on seriality while working as an editor for the open access journal Imagetext. She has written essays and reviews for The Journal of Visual Culture, New Media and Society, and the proceedings of the 2009 Digital Arts and Culture Conference (forthcoming December 2009).

    John Culbert is Research Associate at the Critical Theory Institute, UC Irvine. He is the author of Paralyses: Literature, Travel and Ethnography in French Modernity (University of Nebraska Press, forthcoming 2010). This essay derives from his current research project on space, spectrality, and modern memory.

    Bernard Duyfhuizen is Professor of English and Associate Dean of Arts & Sciences at the University of Wisconsin-Eau Claire. He is the editor of the journal Pynchon Notes. He is the author of Narratives of Transmission (Fairleigh Dickinson, 1992) and his articles have appeared in such journals as Postmodern Culture, College English, ELH, Comparative Literature, Novel, Modern Fiction Studies, and Studies in the Novel. A member of the musical group Eggplant Heroes, he has a CD, After This Time, forthcoming in 2010.

    Ulrik Ekman is Assistant Professor in Digital Aesthetics and Communication at the Department of Arts and Cultural Studies, University of Copenhagen. He is the coordinator of more than 150 researchers in the Nordic and internationally oriented research network, “The Culture of Ubiquitous Information,” and is currently involved in two book projects directly related to the problematics dealt with in this network. Ekman is the editor of Throughout: Art and Culture Emerging with Ubiquitous Computing (Cambridge, Mass.: MIT Press, forthcoming), a comprehensive anthology of more than 40 research articles from scholars across the world at work on the cultural and technical implications of the third wave of computing. He is also writing a book on the aesthetics of contemporary media art and culture focusing on the increasing import for our life form of haptic technics and spatio-temporality.

    Louis Kaplan is Associate Professor of history and theory of photography and new media at the University of Toronto and Director of the Institute of Communication and Culture at the University of Toronto Mississauga. His books include Laszlo Moholy-Nagy: Biographical Writings (1995), American Exposures: Photography and Community (2005), and The Strange Case of William Mumler, Spirit Photographer (2008). He is co-editing (with John Paul Ricco) “Regarding Jean-Luc Nancy” as a special issue of the Journal of Visual Culture (April 2010). Another essay, on “Bataille’s Laughter,” is forthcoming in John Welchman, ed., Black Sphinx: On the Comedic in Modern Art (J.R.P./Ringier).

    Neil Larsen teaches in the Critical Theory and Comparative Literature Programs at UC Davis. He is the author of Modernism and Hegemony (University of Minnesota Press, 1990); Reading North by South (University of Minnesota Press, 1995); and Determinations (Verso, 2001). He lectures and publishes frequently in the areas of Marxian critical theory and Latin American studies.

    Brian Lennon is Assistant Professor of English and Comparative Literature at the Pennsylvania State University. He is the author of In Babel’s Shadow: Multilingual Literatures, Monolingual States, forthcoming in 2010 from the University of Minnesota Press.

    Phillip Novak is an Associate Professor at Le Moyne College, with a joint appointment in the Department of English and the Department of Communication and Film Studies. His published work includes essays on William Faulkner, Toni Morrison, and Walter Mosley, on movie musicals, and on Roman Polanski’s Chinatown.

    Richard Rushton is Lecturer in the Department of Media, Film and Cultural Studies, Lancaster University, UK. He has published articles on film and cultural theory, and has two books forthcoming: What is Film Theory? (Open University Press) and The Reality of Film (Manchester University Press).

    Peter Schwenger is Resident Fellow at the Centre for the Study of Theory and Criticism, University of Western Ontario. He has published Phallic Critiques (1984), Letter Bomb (1991), Fantasm and Fiction (1999) and The Tears of Things (2006). His current project is titled “Liminal: Literature between Waking and Dreaming.”

  • Notes on Contributors

    Vicki Callahan is an Associate Professor in the Peck School of the Arts at the University of Wisconsin-Milwaukee and a Visiting Scholar at the University of Southern California’s Institute for Multimedia Literacy. She is the editor of the recent collection, Reclaiming the Archive: Feminism and Film History (Wayne State University Press, 2010), and with Lina Srivastava co-authors <http://transmediaactivism.wordpress.com>, a resource site for implementing cross platform media strategies for social change.

    Patrick F. Durgin teaches cultural studies, literature, and writing at the School of the Art Institute of Chicago. His latest publications include a hybrid genre collaboration with Jen Hofer, The Route (Atelos, 2008), and essays on “post-ableist” poetics in Contemporary Women’s Writing and the Journal of Modern Literature. He is concluding work on a critical monograph entitled Indeterminacies and Intentionalities: Toward a Poetics of Critical Values, as well as a play on the subject of failed bilingualism entitled PQRS: A Drama. As series editor and publisher, he has just finished work on The Kenning Anthology of Poets Theater: 1945-1985, edited by Kevin Killian and David Brazil, recently published by Kenning Editions (2010).

    Orit Halpern is an Assistant Professor of History and Media Studies at the New School for Social Research and Eugene Lang College. She works on histories of temporality, archiving, and representation in digital systems. Her manuscript The Eye of Time: Histories of Representation, Perception, and Archiving in Cybernetic Thought is currently under review. Her research has appeared or will be appearing in C-theory, Configurations, and the Journal of Visual Culture. She has also produced multi-media installations and web-based works at the intersection of art and science that have appeared in venues such as ZKM and Rhizome. Currently, she is working to develop new lab-based research spaces integrating art, design, and the social sciences at the New School and Parsons School of Design. She is the co-founder of The Visual Culture Lab, a group bringing historians and theorists of media, art, design, and politics together to rethink the relationship between politics and aesthetics, and she is also a member of the Center for Transformative Media at Parsons. All her work and material can be accessed at: www.orithalpern.net.

    Michael Harrison is Assistant Professor of Spanish at Monmouth College. He is currently working on a book project exploring the development of queer culture in Spain through an analysis of Spanish comics and graphic novels.  

    Ken Hillis is Professor Media and Technology Studies, Department of Communication Studies, The University of North Carolina at Chapel Hill. His research interests focus on the intersection of the forms that media technologies take and the techniques, practices and desires such technologies promote, enable, and constrain. Publications include Digital Sensations: Space, Identity and Embodiment (1999, Minnesota), Everyday eBay: Culture, Collecting and Desire (2006, Routledge), Online A Lot Of The Time: Ritual, Fetish, Sign (2009, Duke). He is currently co-authoring Google and The Culture of Search (Routledge).

    Lili Hsieh is Assistant Professor in the English Department at the National Central University, Taiwan. She teaches on transnational modernisms, theory and practice of translation, and feminist theory. She works on poststructuralist theories of affect and its role in transnational politics and has published a few journal articles on related issues in Virginia Woolf’s Three Guineas, the Buddhist parable Tu Zicun, the empire of English language in Taiwan, and Brian Massumi’s Parables for the Virtual and Eve Sedgwick’s Touching Feeling. She is completing a book manuscript on the worlding of the politics of affect in Deleuze, Lacan, and transnational feminisms.  

    Agnieszka Pokojska is a freelance translator and editor, tutor in literary translation at the Jagiellonian University in Krakow, and author of a number of articles on translation. Her translations into Polish include poems by Seamus Heaney, Robert Pinsky, and Derek Walcott. Her translations of Grzegorz Wróblewski’s poetry appeared in the anthology Carnivorous Boy Carnivorous Bird, in Lyric Poetry Review, West Wind Review, Eclectica, Jacket Magazine, The Journal, Cambridge Literary Review, The Delinquent and Poetry Wales and most recently in the chapbook A Rarity, to be published by Cervena Barva Press.  

    Alessandro Porco is a Ph.D. student in English Literature at the State University of New York at Buffalo. He is currently completing a dissertation on hip-hop poetics and American poetry. He is the editor of Population Me: Essays on David McGimpsey (Palimpsest Press, 2010) and writes an online hip-hop column for Maisonneuve, Montreal’s city magazine.  

    Paul Stephens is a postdoctoral fellow at the Fox Center for Humanistic Inquiry at Emory University. From 2005 to 2009 he taught in the literature department at Bard College. His recent articles have appeared in Social Text, Rethinking Marxism, and Don’t Ever Get Famous: New York Writing Beyond the New York School. He is currently completing a book-length project titled The Poetics of Information Overload: From Gertrude Stein to Conceptual Writing.  

    Grzegorz Wróblewski, born in 1962 in Gdansk and raised in Warsaw, has been living in Copenhagen since 1985. He has published nine volumes of poetry and two collections of short prose pieces in Poland; three books of poetry, a book of poetic prose and an experimental novel (translations) in Denmark; and a book of selected poems in Bosnia-Herzegovina, as well as a selection of plays. His work has been translated into eight languages.

    The English translations of his poems and/or plays have appeared in London Magazine, Poetry London, Magma Poetry, Parameter Magazine, Poetry Wales, The Delinquent, Chicago Review, 3rd bed, Eclectica, Mississippi Review, Absinthe: New European Writing, Common Knowledge, Word Riot, Practice: New Writing + Art, The Mercurian – A Theatrical Translation Review, Lyric, CounterPunch, Exquisite Corpse, Guernica, Jacket Magazine, Otoliths, Cambridge Literary Review, West Wind Review and in the following anthologies: Altered State: The New Polish Poetry (Arc Publications, Todmorden, UK 2003), Carnivorous Boy Carnivorous Bird (Zephyr Press, Brookline, USA 2004), A Generation Defining Itself – In Our Own Words (MW Enterprises, USA 2007). Selected poems are available in Our Flying Objects (Equipage Press, Cambridge, UK 2007), and new and selected poems are forthcoming in A Marzipan Factory (Otoliths, Rockhampton, Australia 2010). His chapbooks to date are: These Extraordinary People (erbacce-press, Liverpool, UK 2008) and Mercury Project (Toad Press, Claremont, USA 2008), and A Rarity (Cervena BarvaPress, W. Somerville, USA, 2009).

  • Liu’s Ethics of the Database

    Vicki Callahan (bio)
    University of Wisconsin-Milwaukee and University of Southern California
    vacall@uwm.edu

    Review of: Alan Liu. Local Transcendence: Essays on Postmodern Historicism and the Database. Chicago: U of Chicago P, 2008. Print.

     

     

    In many ways, one might see Alan Liu’s collection, Local Transcendence: Essays on Postmodern Historicism and the Database, as a kind of retrospective or career long response to the issues raised by Katherine Hayles and Johanna Drucker’s individual reviews in the journal Criticism of his earlier book, The Laws of Cool: Knowledge Work and the Culture of Information. While Liu directly responds in the same issue with “Understanding Knowledge Work” to Hayles’s and Drucker’s queries regarding the definition and function of history and aesthetics–indeed regarding the very “future of the humanities”–in the information age, his Local Transcendence takes the discussion much further and into the world of methodology. In Local Transcendence, Liu not only maps out a critical approach that will draw together the diverse terrains of the humanities, arts, information, and technology, but also argues that this very interdisciplinarity is the crux of the method. Interdisciplinarity as method is vital not so much due to the breadth of data revealed, that is as additional content in itself, but rather because it produces a “line of flight” away from established and rigid knowledge systems to an “unclosed otherness” (Local 185).
     
    The question for Liu is: can there be an open method for history that can tell us anything politically instructive or ethically useful, especially in an age that has seen the so-called “death of theory,” “death of history,” “death of the author,” “death of the subject,” “death of cinema,” etc.? What, for Liu, is left in the absence of essential meanings except as Liu notes a sense of the “cool?” The “cool” as Liu defines it is basically whatever brand we have decided to take on from our corporate and media-saturated culture. Our larger fascination with endless flows of information and with perpetual innovation, a world-view of “creative destruction,” leaves us awash in data but strips the world of past knowledge that can anchor the present (Local 2-4). In such an environment, we do not have history but rather historicism–that is, only the signs or the effect(s) of a history (4). Moreover, for Liu our path of resistance comes from within our “cool culture” as a strategy of reversal or “destructive creation” and also from within postmodern historicism by turning its symptomatic “contingency” into a method (Local 11; “Understanding” 250). Ultimately, Liu maps out both the logic and critical method for our era of “remix culture,” a phrase perhaps more apt than “information age” at capturing the blurred worlds of creation/consumption, art/culture, data/media, form/content, persona/person, public/private of the current epoch.
     
    To understand the feasibility and value of Liu’s method as detailed in Local Transcendence–as well as to situate his work in relation to a range of current remix practices from the archive to the arts to rhetorical strategies–it is useful to turn to the Hayles and Drucker essays. Both Hayles and Drucker take issue with Liu’s “destructive creativity” as a value either for the arts or for the humanities. On the one hand, Hayles notes that this assumes a ubiquity of corporate culture in which we are trapped and can act only as borderline terrorists, albeit “critically” destructive ones. As Hayles quite rightly points out, the presumed corporate cultural “trap” and attendant critical subversion confirm the status quo via the negation or erasure of history since they effectively eliminate the possibility of imagining a counter-history or alternative positive possible pathways of resistance (236-239). Drucker is equally troubled by Liu’s vision for the arts as “destructive,” since it replays what she believes are tired oppositions from aesthetic discourses regarding the “resistance” of art (and specifically of the avant-garde) to dominant social/popular cultural order. Rather than a didactic or utopian purpose for the arts, Drucker says she prefers “embodied examples of a practice that has no purpose whatsoever except to be” (246-47).
     
    Of course, the discussion of the shape, objective, indeed possibility of history and the arts haunts these essays and Liu’s books, that is, what should teaching and scholarship look like given that the objects of study are themselves in question? Drucker argues for no less than an “overhaul” of academics from the object of study (“static artifacts”) to its purpose (“self-improvement” “moral uplift”) (“Games”). While “cultural preservation,” “critical thought,” and “artful expression” are core values retained in Drucker’s educational re-tooling, the revolution in digital media is not insignificant in shaping the new practice. The tools of digital media are not in themselves the core, but rather what one learns from the engagement or more specifically the practice of these tools–that is, a diverse and flexible set of skills across a range of informational, expressive, reflective and critical tasks (Drucker 246).
     
    Liu’s direct response to Drucker (and to Hayles) in his Criticism essay follows closely on Drucker’s (new) media literacy/fluency model, and indeed, he points to their collective work in assorted digital humanities initiatives that reflect the core values noted above. But a fault line appears towards the end of the essay when Liu draws a parallel between the objectives of formalist “close readings” and his own postmodernist approach in line with “deeply felt human ‘experience,’” which he claims shares an affinity with Drucker’s and Hayles’s attention in their work to “experience” and “embodiment,” respectively (“Understanding” 257). Setting aside whether or not these multiple uses and related terms share precisely the same meaning, it is more useful here that Liu’s comment seem to confirm that we are now forever in a culture of remix (and may very well always have been) from which nothing “new” or outside can emerge. While Drucker and Hayles may not give up all hope of the “new,” Liu implicitly exchanges this for the larger goal of education: “humanity” (252).
     
    Is the “humanity” that Liu pursues from within “postmodern historicism” any different qualitatively from the formalist, romanticist, or indeed enlightenment individualized notions of the self, something from which our postmodern “cool” must surely diverge? In Local Transcendence Liu both draws important connections between seemingly disparate forms–especially between romanticism and postmodernism–and shows how such linkages provide an insight into his method of “contingency” and have implications for our contemporary “humanity.”
     
    Both romanticism and postmodernism offer an important counter-movement to the singular rational historical line followed by the Enlightenment and to the current techno-instrumentalist teleology of “innovation” (Local 7). Moreover, both romanticism and postmodernism offer an aesthetic or style that can set out the principles to an historicist, i.e., non-unitary, method. Liu’s discussion of Wordsworth’s The Prelude (1805) points to the crucial romantic component–and key historicist principle–of immersion, and connects that quality to the “localism” and attention to contextual detail found in historicism. Further, Liu notes that Wordsworth seems to dislocate description from historical time as he blurs past and present temporality into a “now” (13). Thus within this aesthetic/critical frame, we are “in” or “immersed” in history and yet “free from history”–another key principle–that is, set loose from contextual and temporal blind spots and able to see “alternative pathways between past and future” (20).
     
    Liu’s third chapter meticulously explores the nuances and workings of “context” within cultural criticism. He notes that while it is necessary to provide detail for cultural criticism, it is not a sufficient basis for his critical approach and is at times a hindrance to what he believes should be the postmodern historicist objectives. Too often detail and cultural context are set up in stark opposition to theory and method, but in fact the rigidity of this resistance to theory, not to mention the reification of anti-method, turns into a deterministic method in and of itself (116). Here we are at the heart of his critique from within postmodern historicism, which is that detail and especially the mechanics of historicist detail conceived as a densely layered repetitive loop of struggle and resistance lead to a totalizing, detached, and far too comfortable observation of culture (137). More specifically, the sheer volume of detail, as well as its reiterative nature, makes this a “faceless” enterprise that turns away from the needed “emancipation seeded within, but not without ethical choice [that is] able to emerge from, the complexity of the past” (136, 21).
     
    If the ethical turn brings us back to the question of “humanity,” Liu’s situating of our “choice” as both within and without history shifts the ground from the unique and highly individualized romantic self, but not to one completely in the domain of the “cool” postmodern “subjectivity.” That said, the model for ethical choice and thus our method of contingent postmodern historicism is derived for Liu from the intersection of–or perhaps rather the related rhetoric found within–romanticism and postmodernism, which we might label as assemblage, montage, or remix depending upon the context and media forms we might implement. Time and again, Liu references Wordsworth and the romantics for their nonlinear pathways, a skipping between, zigzagging around time and objects as illustrative of the contingent method. Perhaps more significantly, he likens the contingent “method” to a chain of modernist and postmodern “reverie,” encompassing cubism, Eisensteinian montage, and ultimately, less directly but logically, the database form.
     
    Like Drucker, Liu invokes digital media as important historicist tools not for any utopian qualities they have themselves, nor primarily for the media fluency required in our digital age (which Drucker promotes), but precisely for the rhetorical opportunities they present towards a method. Ethical choice, without moral determinism or relativism -that is to say, “humanity” without singularity, universals, or moral anarchy–comes from a strategic engagement with information (117). Here, Liu’s commentary on the “pragmatics” of interdisciplinarity is instructive about his idea that rhetoric and diverse media forms are central to his method. An interdisciplinary approach is not important because it transcends traditional boundaries (since it often only establishes other larger ones) but because it can help us rethink the assumptions and boundaries within our own “home” disciplines. It accomplishes this through the movement or translation of information from one discipline (or format) to another. As Liu notes, the “relation between the home discipline and the other or exotic discipline is really the relation between what might be termed a convention and a figure for knowledge”–in effect, a tropology–whose goal is “the very art of doing an end run around epistemological closure in order to say the impossible” (181). Visual media, images, extend that gap between convention and figure, or rather open up more possible pathways against closure (183).
     
    The digital and networked world transforms the translation of information exponentially but also qualitatively. For Liu, that is, digital data’s immaterial “base” facilitates exchange from one format to another, one receiver to another, thereby erasing form/content distinctions (234-35). Importantly, however, data translation occurs as the result of a highly structured consistent logic, meaning that this “open-ended” movement occurs within a “closed” system, and thus potentially ensnares us within the ethos of the endless circulation of meaningless signs. How then does the digital fit within Liu’s paradigm–can it maintain the ethical turn and “humanity” within this structure? Here it is important to remember that Liu’s strategy is not simply one of movement and displacement; it is a contingent, not random methodology. Liu closes the eighth chapter, “Transcendental Data: Towards a Cultural History and Aesthetics of the New Encoded Discourse,” by asking, “what experience of the structurally unknowable can still be conveyed in the structured media of knowledge (databases, XML, and so on)? Perhaps the arts–if they can just crack the code of ordinary cool and make it flower–know” (236).
     
    While Liu prioritizes the arts, especially the romantics and 20th century avant-garde, both here and throughout the book, his title for chapter eight and his emphasis on “contingency”–what lies next to–are particularly instructive. That is, the chapter title situates “cultural history and aesthetics” in proximity, or in conversation, not in dialectical opposition or hierarchical form. Here we might well return to Liu’s attention to the kind of movement he values early in his discussion of Wordsworth’s The Prelude, which allies the poetic and montage (13). The move is nonlinear but relational, or to put this another way, both within and outside of a history. In many ways, Liu’s discussion is reminiscent of assorted proponents of montage as a new form of language–or particularly, as in the case of the filmmaker Jean-Luc Godard, a new model for writing history.1 As James Williams notes, Godard sees montage (in cinematic and video form) as offering “a return to a moment before the order of linguistic and cinematic syntax has taken over and words and images have lost their immediacy, freedom, and innocence” (313). Godard’s epic series Histoire(s) du Cinéma (1988-1998) explicitly reasserts the “promise” of cinema and more specifically, of montage, to envision a more ethical world. This failed mission or “promise” is then reconfigured by Godard for video and digital media contexts with an intricately layered, collage like form that flows effortlessly between historical and cinematic epochs with a dazzling interweaving of text, image, sound, music, and spoken word collected from across a diverse spectrum of the arts and culture. Alifeleti Brown suggests in the journal Senses of Cinema that Godard’s Histoire(s) can be seen as pioneering model of remix/sampling culture as the work is driven exclusively by quotation, certainly testing the limits of copyright, while at the same time making no claims for rights for Histoire(s). A rich array of related experimental creative and critical efforts might then be sketched, which share and/or exceed the terrain mapped out by Godard’s montage: for example, Gregory Ulmer’s extensive work on electronic/digital fluency or “electracy“; Critical Art Ensemble’s assorted activism/artistic interventions and especially their “Utopian Plagiarism” in The Electronic Disturbance; Eduardo Navas’s history of “Remix“; and McKenzie Wark’s “Hacker Manifesto,” to note but a few.2 All of these works situate their effort in a dynamic interplay between the clearly “contingent” areas of aesthetics and history, and all have ethical/political objectives.
     
    I would like to close by noting that, in my experience, montage can play a strategic part when students use it to learn to make compelling and coherent arguments by editing together materials that often skip or zigzag across disciplinary terrains. Interdisciplinary translation, as we have seen through Liu’s investigations, forces reconsideration of received knowledge, but the rhetoric of “montage” can helps us to envision connections, to discern what is random and what is “contingent” (i.e., to see a field of relationships), and finally allows us to make ethical choices. Montage may at different times be called the “poetic” or a “remix”; it is a powerful method that may lead us out of the “cool” as Liu defines it and back to the “human” in its most open-ended sense of the term.
     

    Vicki Callahan is an Associate Professor in the Peck School of the Arts at the University of Wisconsin-Milwaukee and a Visiting Scholar at the University of Southern California’s Institute for Multimedia Literacy. She is the editor of the recent collection, Reclaiming the Archive: Feminism and Film History (Wayne State University Press, 2010), and with Lina Srivastava co-authors <http://transmediaactivism.wordpress.com>, a resource site for implementing cross platform media strategies for social change.

     

    Footnotes


    1. Godard’s video series, Histoire(s) du Cinéma (1988-1998), contains both the argument and the illustration of cinema as a tool for historical method.

     

     
    2. See also Wark’s “A Hacker Manifesto” Version 4.0.
     

    Works Cited

       

      • Brown, Alifeleti. “Histoire(s) du cinéma.” Annotations for January through March 2008 Melbourne Cinémathèque Screenings. Senses of Cinema. 2008. Web. 29 Apr.2010.
      • Critical Art Ensemble. The Electronic Disturbance. Autonomedia, 1994. 2009. Web. 29 Apr. 2010. [End Page 9]
      • Drucker, Johanna. “Games and the Market in Digital Futures.” Criticism 47.2 (Spring 2005): 241-247. Print.
      • Godard, Jean-Luc, dir. Histoire(s) du Cinéma, 1988-1998. Film.
      • Hayles, N. Katherine. “Attacking the Borg of Corporate Knowledge Work: The Achievement of Alan Liu’s The Laws of the Cool.” Criticism 47.2 (Spring 2005): 235-239. Print.
      • Liu, Alan. Local Transcendence: Essays on Postmodern Historicism and the Database. Chicago: U of Chicago P, 2008. Print.
      • —. The Laws of the Cool: Knowledge Work and the Culture of Information. Chicago: U of Chicago P, 2004. Print.
      • —. “Understanding Knowledge Work.” Criticism 47.2 (Spring 2005): 249-260. Web. 29 Apr. 2010.
      • Navas, Eduardo. Remix Theory. Word Press. 13 May 2010 Web. 29 Apr. 2010.
      • Ulmer, Gregory. Electronic Monuments, Minneapolis: U of Minnesota P, 2005. Print.
      • Wark, McKenzie. A Hacker Manifesto. Cambridge: Harvard UP, 2004. Print.
      • —. “A Hacker Manifesto.” Version 4.0. Ed. Joanne Richardson. n.d. Web. 29 Apr. 2010.
      • Williams, James. “The Signs amongst us: Jean-Luc Godard’s Histoire(s) du Cinema.” Screen 40.3 (September 1, 1999): 306-315. Print.

       

       
    • From Capital to Karma: James Cameron’s Avatar

      Ken Hillis (bio)
      University of North Carolina at Chapel Hill
      khillis@email.unc.edu

       

       

      James Cameron’s Avatar (2009) participates in an underacknowledged yet widespread contemporary resuscitation of Neoplatonism. In the Timaeus (c. 360 BCE), Plato introduces the concept of the demiurge: “Therefore, we may consequently state that: this world is indeed a living being endowed with a soul and intelligence . . . a single visible living entity containing all other living entities, which by their nature are all related” (29-30). Pandora, the distant, color-saturated moon on which most of Avatar‘s action takes place, is precisely such a world. The Egyptian-Roman philosopher Plotinus (c. 204-270 CE), influenced by Plato, identifies the demiurge as the nous, the divine mind–a universal One containing neither division nor distinction. Unlike the orthodox Christian belief expressed in the concept of ex nihilo, that a deliberative and thoughtful God created the universe out of nothing, Plotinus understands the cosmos as emanating ex deo (out of God), and, therefore, that the unfolding of the cosmos is a consequence of the existence of the One and a confirmation of its absolute transcendence. Plotinus’s concept of World Soul synthesizes these beliefs. While Avatar does not reference Neoplatonism directly, for Pandora’s humanoid inhabitants, the Na’vi, all Pandoran life, their own included, is organized through the power of Eywa. Eywa is, as the film’s narrative makes explicit, the indivisible “mother” who emanates from and is the crystallization of Pandora itself. She safeguards that world’s “balance of life.”
       
      We might expect critics on the right to denounce the film’s “soft-headed environmentalism” and identify Avatar as a product of “Hollywood’s long history of anti-military sloganeering”, as well as scorning the film as pagan, emblematic of a “Godless Hollywood” that “ignores, laughs at or disrespects religion” (Goldstein). Vatican Radio pronounced the film “a wink towards the pseudo-doctrines which have made ecology the religion of the millennium” (Squires). Patrick Goldstein suggests that “moviegoers are far more comfortable with a fuzzy, inspirational form of pantheism like ‘Avatar’ than they are with an openly biblical message” (Goldstein). While moviegoers cannot be so conveniently lumped together, the ideas depicted in the film that contribute to its “fuzzy . . . pantheism” help explain Avatar‘s enormous appeal.
       
      Now, to write within the academy about any contemporary influence of the Neoplatonic beliefs expressed in the concept of World Soul outside of philosophy or religious studies is not a common undertaking. The concept’s explicit metaphysical orientation, its inherent forms of magical thinking, are traditionally seen as largely opposing the foundations of empiricism, rationalism, dualism and materiality that inform Western academic thought. To examine Avatar as indicative of a wider popular resurgence of such metaphysical beliefs, however, does not mean that one must hold such beliefs.1 Nevertheless, Avatar‘s core politics are animated by its depiction of an idealized future society predicated on a carbon-based, biological network of networks operationalized through the metaphysical logic of World Soul. Avatar‘s future world, where the precepts of World Soul appear to have materialized through a fusion of a religious calling with those of networked sentience, appeals to contemporary U.S. society, which is both increasingly networked and professes a high degree of religious faith. Moreover, the film operates within a culture whose political economy is in part based on the technology that feeds into building the networked world that, in a virtuous circle, we are told as users we ought to desire. The fetishization of new digital technologies, and of the new more generally, plays a role here, yet in complementary or accretive fashion, so too do the immersive 3D techniques that Cameron applies to Hollywood filmmaking. 3D allows audiences greater experientially-induced identification with the onscreen spectacle, and the film’s coupling of technological affectivity with its genre hybridity of fantasy and science fiction works synergistically to propose to audiences that the fantastical “magical empiricism” on offer might actually come to pass. In short, the affect of the visual technology itself helps validate the potential that the Neoplatonic ideals on display can be actualized.
       
      Writing for Salon, Scott Mendelson calls the film “a staggering achievement in visual effects and 3D technology” (Mendelson). Technology is also the star of Andrew Leonard’s Salon review: “‘Avatar’ is a film that people want to see, because, quite simply, the 3D special effects used to create the astonishingly beautiful alien world of Pandora are, ahem, out of this world.” For the New York Times‘s Manohla Dargis, “‘Avatar’ shows us a future in which movies will invite us further into them and perhaps even allow us to choose not just the hero’s journey through the story, but also our own” (Dargis). “Amateur” reviewers on sites such as imdb.com variously assert that the film’s 3D effects work to include spectators in the cinematic experience in ways not before experienced. Computer generated (CG) animation allows Cameron to create what many consider a new cinematic spectacle. For many commentators, technology is Avatar‘s implicit hero.
       
      While Avatar has become the poster child for the much anticipated onslaught of 3D entertainment devices, I nonetheless find it odd but telling, given the culture’s ongoing fascination with networks and the information technologies upon which they rely, that the issue of the connections between networks and the world of spirit explicitly raised in the film’s narrative has been all but ignored by reviewers. In a Facebook review, science fiction author Samuel Delany does acknowledge that “the rhysomatic [sic] wholeness of the alien world is suggested several times,” but he is more concerned to argue that the film fails ethically due to its aesthetic incoherence. Chasm-wide plot holes, Delaney suggests, inhibit viewers from connecting the dots in ways that Cameron might have wished. What viewers are left with are the haptic sensations delivered through CG and 3D effects (Delany). Yet the “rhysomatic wholeness” noted by Delaney–a wholeness manifesting through a wetware- or carbon-based future world network–lies at the core of the film’s oddly nostalgic appeal: for two hours and forty-two minutes, spectators experience fluttering on the edges of a collective post-Hive Mind fantasy: an inverted prelapsarian vision of the individual as a networked empath who is also already part of the tree of knowledge. Experientially, then, the film’s outstanding special effects work synergistically with its depiction of the Na’vi as a pre-Cartesian society, a 3D global village literally in touch and connected with the wider sentient world they inhabit.
       
      As the film’s narrative unfolds, the Na’vi’s long queues of braided hair are revealed as neural links able to mesh with other Na’vi as well as with Pandora’s other sentient creatures, trees included, which also possess similar biologically-constituted, USB-like connective links. The Na’vi are more than “noble savages”: while conducting field experiments on the root system of one of Pandora’s giant trees, scientist Grace Augustine (Signourney Weaver), head of the corporate research unit responsible for developing avatar bodies that replicate the Na’vi, explains to her associates the power of the rhizomatic system that undergirds the “sacred” Hometree around which the Na’vi organize their existence. In Cameron’s screenplay, copyrighted in 2007 following a decade’s work, Augustine’s announcement occurs more than halfway through the film as part of an argument inside the corporation’s base of operations. In the film release, however, the revelation is depicted at the tree itself and occurs much earlier. This suggests a heightened comprehension by the filmmakers that Avatar‘s plot would cohere better if the idea that the Na’vi constitute a biological networked society were communicated earlier on. The key parts of Augustine’s dialog are as follows:
       

      I’m not talking about pagan voodoo here–I’m talking about something real and measureable in the biology of the forest. . . . What we think we know–is that there’s some kind of electrochemical communication between the roots of the trees. Like the synapses between neurons. Each tree has ten to the fourth connections to the trees around it, and there are ten to the twelfth trees on Pandora . . . That’s more connections than the human brain. You get it? It’s a network–a global network. And the Na’vi can access it–they can upload and download data-memories . . . . The wealth of this world isn’t in the ground–it’s all around us. The Na’vi know that, and they’re fighting to defend it.2

       

      The scene makes clear that the Na’vi form part of a sentient planetary whole–a network linked not through wires or Wi-Fi but through carbon-based forms of wetware. The entire network constitutes a biological life form. It is here that the film most directly reveals itself as participating in a resurgence of Neoplatonic thought reformulated to concord with what Manuel Castells terms “the rise of the network society” and the concomitant rise of real virtuality. The utopian suggestion is that the Na’vi have evolved biologically in ways that humans have not. Their network, while vulnerable to Earthly fire power, is vastly superior as a form of planetary intelligence to anything conceived by the human intelligence of Pandora’s marauding colonialists. Those humans in the film with whom the narrative asks us to identify are open to understanding the Na’vi as part of a global network within which each component constitutes a biological interface. As such, the Na’vi are allegorical, a figural device that serves to simulate the possible (and therefore, the desirable). By depicting the Na’vi in this way, the film hints at the seductive powers potentially available to beings of all kinds able to move beyond ideologies of overly atomistic individualism so as to see the world as One.

       
      The genealogy of Neoplatonic influence on Idealist expectations for transcendence through electronic and, more recently, digital technologies is lengthy. The Web and services such as Google offer a contemporary vision of the world’s intelligence as a single, organized network. Earlier Neoplatonically-inflected networked visions include H.G. Wells’s 1938 prophesy of a World Brain, Teilhard de Chardin’s 1950s utopian proposal for an electronic noosphere (1964), Kevin Kelly’s aforementioned Hive Mind that reduces each individual human to a “dumb terminal” until connected to electronic networks (1994), and Pierre Lévy’s concept of the electronic hyperbody (1997). What distinguishes Avatar‘s future vision of a Neoplatonic World Soul from these earlier proposals is that it can depict the actualization of a networked intelligence through an evolved collectivity of embodied agents, humanoid and otherwise, who retain individuality yet are always collectively conjoined to Eywa, the earth Mother. In this way, Pandora’s world of empathetic networked individualism is a hybrid of Neoplatonism’s World Soul and of Cartesianism’s mind-body dualism. This is one strong reason why the film resonates so powerfully with contemporary audiences increasingly directed to understand themselves primarily as individuals yet also as monads networked through information technologies.

       
      Given the metaphysics on display in Avatar, the film, it is useful to recall the original Hindu meaning of the avatar. In Hindu theology, an avatar is the manifestation, incarnation, or embodiment of a deity, especially Vishnu (the Preserver), in human, superhuman, or animal form. A Sanskrit term, “avatar” means “he passes or crosses down.” In taking various animal and other hybrid forms of animals and humans, avatars carry the idea that a variety of life forms considered inferior to human beings also have divine intimations. If ignorance or evil are ascendant on earth, the Supreme Being incarnates itself in an avatar form appropriate for fighting these blights. An avatar might also manifest as a warning against hubris, as a way to convey ideas to humankind, or even as a ritualized form of divine playfulness.
       
      Some critics have accused Avatar of being “a racial fantasy par excellence” that celebrates the “white Messiah fable” (Brooks) through the character of marine amputee Jake Sully (Sam Worthington). If one interprets Sully’s avatar solely (or even principally) as the Supreme manifestation of a generalized white embodiment, and as “passing or crossing down” from the plane of Supreme Being to assist the Na’vi in their quest for a restoration of the good, then an argument can be advanced that the film applies aspects of the Hindu myth to a reification of white subjectivity in ways that might support reactionary cultural work this side of the screen. However, something rather more complex is going on with avatars in Avatar than a one-way passing over or down in order to rescue. While Sully’s early forays into Na’vi territory in avatar form are, indeed, efforts to gain corporate intelligence that will be applied to convincing the Na’vi to abandon their Hometree, under which enormous mineral wealth is located, Sully undergoes a conversion of intent. In a key scene, his voiceover lets audiences know that whereas he had initially understood his human body and the corporation’s base of operations to be “reality,” and the world of the Na’vi a “dream,” his continual passing between these states has been central to his inversion of the binary. Sully’s consciousness changes. His move from capital to karma is in direct proportion to the ever greater lengths of time he experiences consciousness through his avatar form.
       
      As I argue elsewhere, digital avatars in web-based formats such as Second Life allegorize the Gnostic belief that the essence of humanity is disembodied awareness (Hillis). Emily Apter, complementarily, sees digital avatars “as a kind of ‘puppet-homunculus’ or totem.” Both dynamics are at play in Avatar. While inhabiting his avatar form, Sully experiences a profound resolution of “lack”–in this case less a psychoanalytic or subject-related lack than the restoration of an experience of a mobility he lacks as a paraplegic amputee. Sully’s avatar makes him whole, and as he comes to understand the complex psychic, physical and therefore political ramifications of this making whole, he change sides–he does indeed “pass over or down” to the Na’vi world, but in ways that repurpose the Hindu myth, with its focus on rescue through bodily transformation of divine spirit, so that he also passes over or down from the Na’vi world back to the corrupt world of purportedly Supreme Beings from which his consciousness first transmitted. The longer he experiences being present in his avatar form, the more his “return” to human status on the base comes to equal the avatar’s function of passing over: When Sully returns to the corporation’s base, it is his human form that increasingly brings messages of salvation from the Na’vi back to the crazed military-industrial complex intent on ruining yet another Eden. In this Sully-as-avatar also conforms to the Hindu myth’s instruction that, when necessary, the avatar manifests a warning against human hubris.
       
      The sign/body of Sully’s avatar, then, indicates the compromise between the unitary goodness of World Soul depicted via the Na’vi’s Pandoran world and an alienated, liberal consciousness negotiating its way through networks as a disincorporated monad somehow in possession of a body yet not actually of that body. In so doing, Avatar‘s avatars also ironically embody the inter-orientation between the reality of silicon-based IT and the dream of realizing the Neoplatonically-inflected fantasy of carbon-based IT to which many corporate and academic subjectivities would, if it existed today, accord the status of Hive Mind liveliness. Avatar positions the avatar as a form of biotechnology, one more “natural” than the colonialists and their disenchanted scientists interpellated into capital’s deadly bottom line.
       
      How definitions of the human get repurposed is a crucial indicator of the ways that modernity produces subjectivity. In its own Hegelian fashion the film suggests that these definitions should be expanded to reincorporate that (the Na’vi) which has long been expunged from the definition–expanded, however, less to acknowledge future forms of posthumanism than to acknowledge, through forms of 3D reenchantment of the world, that “other” Ancient and Ideal side of human being, that side which has, in Neoplatonic fashion, been running alongside “modern” consciousness all along. This is Jake Sully’s “happy fate”: at the film’s end he becomes part of Pandora’s World Soul. As an allegory, Avatar embodies belief. It provides seemingly direct contact with its idea of a transcendental world, a way by which disenchanted audience members–destabilized by endless wars on terror, buffeted globally by crony capitalism’s financial chicaneries that have left many bankrupt and with reduced hope–can momentarily access a Platonic ideal by contemplating the film’s networked imagery of the divine. Perhaps audiences, many of whom collectively applaud at the film’s end, are indicating that the worship of technologies that support the belief that representations are equivalent to what they represent has become a new civil religion. If so, I, for one, would not wish to identify them as cultural dupes or as suffering from false consciousness. In any case, Avatar embodies a resurgent and digital-dependent political economy of metaphysics if ever there was one.
       
      Ken Hillis is Professor Media and Technology Studies, Department of Communication Studies, The University of North Carolina at Chapel Hill. His research interests focus on the intersection of the forms that media technologies take and the techniques, practices and desires such technologies promote, enable, and constrain. Publications include Digital Sensations: Space, Identity and Embodiment (1999, Minnesota), Everyday eBay: Culture, Collecting and Desire (2006, Routledge), Online A Lot Of The Time: Ritual, Fetish, Sign (2009, Duke). He is currently co-authoring Google and The Culture of Search (Routledge).
       

      Footnotes

       
      1. Until recently such work has been located at the “fringes” of academic thought. See, for example, Victoria Nelson’s The Secret Life of Puppets, her comprehensive account of why Neoplatonism continues as a cultural force and the ways that new digital and media technologies such as online games exemplify a resurgence of this kind of magical thinking and a collective desire to reenchant a disenchanted modern world. See also Erik Davis’s TechGnosis: Myth, Magic, and Mysticism in the Age of Information; Davis dissects such concepts as Gaia or collective intelligence as sterile because disembodied, but also assesses the ongoing desire for a Godhead as the collective manifestation of the human achieved entirely through networked information machines.
       

      2. 2007 version of screenplay downloaded 8 Jan. 2010 from Twentieth Century Fox Film Corporation.http://www.foxscreenings.com/media/pdf/JamesCameronAVATAR.pdf
       

      Works Cited

         

       

      • Apter, Emily. “Technics of the Subject: The Avatar-Drive.” Postmodern Culture 18.2 (Jan.2008). Project Muse. Web. 22 Dec. 2009.
      • Brooks, David. “The Messiah Complex.” New York Times 8 Jan. 2010. Web. 9 Jan. 2010.
      • Castells, Manuel. The Rise of the Network Society. London: Blackwell, 2000. Print.
      • Dargis, Manohla. “Floating in the Digital Experience.” New York Times 3 Jan. 2010. Web. 3 Jan.2010.
      • Davis, Erik. TechGnosis: Myth, Magic and Mysticism in the Age of Information. New York: Harmony Press, 1998. Print.
      • Delany, Samuel. “Avatar Review.” Facebook 19 Dec. 2009. Web. 8 Jan. 2010.
      • Goldstein, Patrick. “Conservatives’ Attack on ‘Avatar’ Falls Short.” Chicago Tribune 6 Jan.2010. Web. 7 Jan. 2010.
      • Hillis, Ken. Online a Lot of the Time: Ritual, Fetish, Sign. Durham, NC: Duke UP, 2009. Print.
      • Kelly, Kevin. Out of Control: The Rise of Neo-Biological Civilization. Reading, MA: Addison-Wesley, 1994. Print.
      • Leonard, Andrew. “What the News Biz Can Learn from ‘Avatar’.” Salon 4 Jan. 2010. Web. 5 Jan. 2010.
      • Lévy, Pierre. Collective Intelligence: Mankind’s Emerging World in Cyberspace. Trans. Robert Bononno. Boston: Perseus, 1997. Print.
      • Mendelson, Scott. “Avatar: The 3D IMAX Experience.” Salon 16 Dec. 2009. Web. 22 Dec.2009.
      • Nelson, Victoria. The Secret Life of Puppets. Cambridge: Harvard UP, 2001. Print.
      • Plato. Timaeus. Trans H.D.P. Lee. Baltimore: Penguin Books, 1965. Print.
      • Squires, Nick. “Vatican calls ‘Avatar’ Bland.” The Telegraph 11 Jan. 2010. Web. 11 Jan. 2010.
      • Teilhard de Chardin, Pierre. The Future of Man. Trans. Norman Denny. New York: Harper and Row, 1964. Print.
      • Wells, H.G. World Brain. London: Metheun and Co., 1938. Print.

       

    • “Time is Illmatic”: A Critical Retrospective on Nas’s Groundbreaking Debut

      Alessandro Porco (bio)
      SUNY Buffalo
      asporco@buffalo.edu

      Review of: Michael Eric Dyson and Sohail Daulatzai, eds. Born to Use Mics: Reading Nas’s Illmatic. New York: Basic Civitas Books, 2009. Print.

       

       

      There are indisputable watershed years in hip-hop history. 1979, of course, is the year Fatback Band and The Sugarhill Gang released rap’s first singles. In 1984, Rick Rubin and Russell Simmons found Def Jam in an NYU dorm; the label would define the sound of hip-hop throughout the 1980s. In 1986, Run DMC signed a million-dollar endorsement deal with Adidas, an early instance of the relationship between hip-hop, fashion, and branding. Yo! MTV Raps debuted in 1988, prompting a more sophisticated approach to the video format; meanwhile, at Harvard, juniors David Mays and Jon Shecter “pooled two hundred dollars to put together a one-page hip-hop music tipsheet which they grandly named The Source” (Chang 410). By the 1990s, that small zine would become the “the bible of hip-hop music, culture, & politics.”1
       
      1994 is another watershed year–arguably the most important of all. By then, the gangsta rap genre had started to exhaust itself, inadvertently descending into cliché-ridden self-parody. (Tamra Davis’s 1993 film CB4, starring Chris Rock, captures this decline perfectly.) The dominance of the West Coast’s musical aesthetic, known as “G-Funk,” began to dim in the smoky afterglow of Dr. Dre’s The Chronic. In February and May of that year, the Subcommittee on Commerce, Consumer Protection, and Competitiveness held two congressional hearings on “Music, Lyrics, and Commerce,” focusing on gangsta rap’s violent imagery, misogyny, and homophobia.2 That year, Wesleyan University Press published the first academic monograph on rap and hip-hop, Tricia Rose’s canonical Black Noise: Rap Music and Black Culture in Contemporary America.
       
      Many fans view 1994 as the last gasp of creative breath before media-conglomerates put hip-hop aesthetics on life support. In part, this view is nothing more than hip-hop pastoralism; but 1994 was, in fact, an especially fecund moment in terms of musical production, with the release of several landmark albums: The Notorious B.I.G.’s Ready to Die, Common’s Resurrection, Outkast’s Southernplayalisticadillacmuzik, Scarface’s The Diary, Organized Konfusion’s Stress: Extinction Agenda, Method Man’s Tical, The Roots’s From the Ground Up EP, and Wu-Tang Clan’s Enter the Wu-Tang.3 But no album from that year has received as much attention, then or now, as Nas’s Illmatic. It transformed the twenty-one-year-old MC from Queensbridge, New York–who once famously declared that he “went to hell for snuffin’ Jesus” (Main Source, “Live at the Barbeque”)–into a savior figure.4 Today, the aura that surrounds both him and the album persists.
       
      Born to Use Mics: Reading Nas’s Illmatic, edited by Michael Eric Dyson and Sohail Daulatzai, is a collection of scholarly essays and historical documents. Given the high volume of books published every year on hip-hop music and culture, it’s surprising that Born to Use Mics is the first book of its kind, one dedicated to a single epoch-defining record. In his introduction, Daulatzai explains that the book’s primary aim is to demonstrate why and how Illmatic is still “relevant” fifteen years after its release (3)–that is, relevant both to hip-hop’s past and future as well as to race relations in America. There are other similarly worthy albums, explains Daulatzai, such as Boogie Down Production’s Criminal Minded and Ice Cube’s Amerikkka’s Most Wanted (3). But he writes that there’s “something” ineffable about Illmatic that makes it different (3).
       
      The table of contents is divided into two “sides,” “40th Side North” and “41st Side South.” (The street names refer to the location of the Queensbridge House Projects.) The paratextual conceit reproduces the A-side/ B-side format of the album’s 12-inch pressing. Each contributor is assigned a single track to analyze. Some essayists use the assigned recordings as a jumping-off point for extended riffs on race, power, gender, and politics. Others insist on more localized readings–for example, Adilifu Nama’s “It Was Signified: ‘The Genesis’” posits that samples from the early hip-hop film Wildstyle (1983) provide the interpretive key to the album. The contributors cast Nas in a variety of roles: he’s a “black public intellectual” (97), a “lyrical ethnograph[er]” (181), a metaphysician (40, 251), and a “poet” (196).
       
      Born to Use Mics concludes with a wonderfully edited section titled “Remixes.” It includes interviews, reviews, and personal reminiscences that historicize the album. (It’s comparable to the “Contexts” section one finds in Norton Critical Editions.) For example, “Remixes” reprints the infamous “5 Mic” review from The Source magazine, which is notoriously difficult to come by. Ultimately, the “Remixes” section situates Illmatic in what Pierre Bourdieu calls “the mood of the age” (Bourdieu 32), while also introducing a decidedly less academic tone into the overall discussion.
       
      The strongest essays in the collection make a concerted effort to attend to the album’s historical and formal particulars. Marc Lamont Hill’s “Critical Pedagogy at Halftime” argues that Nas’s “Halftime,” the first song recorded for the album, signifies the MC’s “first full-fledged foray into the world of black public intellectuals . . . Nas performs the most critical function of the public intellectual: linking a rigorous engagement with the life of the mind to an equally rigorous engagement with the public and its problems” (98). As a black public intellectual, Nas relocates “previously overlooked stories from the margins to the center of public consciousness,” and thus has as much in common with thinkers like Michael Eric Dyson, Marc Anthony Neal, and Cornel West as he does with rappers like Kool G. Rap, Mobb Deep, and Foxy Brown (108). In addition, Nas’s dialectical performance as a black public intellectual allows him to bind “two allegedly irreconcilable camps within the hip-hop community” (98): the conscious and commercial, or underground and popular. The former is associated with original hip-hop values and formal innovation; the latter is associated with cultural industry imperatives and aesthetic compromise. Nas traverses these market-driven designations and throws into relief the values symbolically attached to each. In other words, for Hill, one lesson to be gleaned from Illmatic is that we must rethink the “division of labor” in rap (98), a division that has stunted the music’s progress.
       
      Ironically enough, Hill’s essay is also important because it’s one of the few to uphold the black public intellectual tradition insofar as it dares to introduce a dissenting opinion about Nas into the book. Hill offers two critiques: first, that Nas paints “romantic, or at least uncritical, portraits of Africa,” which suggest a lack of knowledge about the continent (111); second, that Nas reproduces the “male-centered political agendas” that have historically dominated hip-hop discourse (112).
       
      Michael Eric Dyson’s “‘One Love,’ Two Brothers, Three Verses” considers how Nas’s “One Love” flips hip-hop’s carceral canon on its head. Rather than rapping about time in prison, Nas instead pens three missives to incarcerated friends, “offering them not a way out but at least a view outside the prison walls that confine them” (133), a view that includes “shifting allegiances, shattered affections, and sustaining alliances” (135). As is typical of the epistolary tradition, Nas’s lyrics are infused with a colloquial ease and emotional intimacy only possible between close friends. According to Dyson, the epistle enables Nas to articulate a theme of brotherhood: “By acting as his brothers’ keeper, their eyes and ears, their scribe and conscience, Nas generates a holistic vision of black brotherhood that reflects the goodness and potential of one man reflected in the eyes of the other, despite the prevalence of negative circumstances” (138). Stylistically, Dyson’s essay pulls off a delicate but important balancing act, moving between personal narrative (“When I first heard Nas’s ‘One Love’ . . . I thought immediately of my brother Everett, who is serving a life sentence for a murder” [129]), analysis of the prison industry (“During the 1980s and 1990s, state spending for corrections grew at six times the rate of state spending on higher education” [130]), and a close reading of Nas’s lyrics, which “[marry] vernacular and formal poetic devices” (133). By moving between subjective and objective modes of analysis, the essay re-enacts the central formal dynamic at work in Nas’s “One Love.”
       
      Throughout Born to Use Mics, the public housing development of Queensbridge is repeatedly alluded to in passing, but only Eddie S. Glaude Jr. maps the place and its meanings. In “‘Represent,’ Queensbridge, and the Art of Living,” Glaude Jr. reads Nas against the Queensbridge Housing Projects, “the largest low-income housing development in [New York City], with 3,142 apartments” (180). Glaude argues that the everyday violence Nas witnessed in the Queensbridge Housing Projects as a young man shaped, at least in part, a creative disposition that tends toward “lyrical ethnography.” As such, Nas’s language is a window into a place that’s ignored or willfully deserted by institutions like the New York Housing Authority.5 On the other hand, Glaude also emphasizes that Nas’s lyrics offer more than just faithful mimesis. Rather, Nas’s lyrics are instances of political “self-fashioning” and “making oneself present” (192). Nas depends on aesthetic approach to everyday life in order to survive, transcend, and transform Queensbridge’s horrors.
       
      Not all the essays are as compelling as those by Hill, Dyson, and Glaude Jr. One persistent problem is that several contributors want to confer upon Nas the status of rap’s premier MC, the charismatic genius who stands head and shoulders above the rest. This uncritical desire is manifest in especially purple passages of praise and oddball evaluative analogies. Imani Perry writes that Nas’s “rhymes hit you like heroin, and they freeze listeners like the crystals in the nostril of the user” (“‘It Ain’t Hard to Tell’: A Story of Lyrical Transcendence,” 197); Daulatzai compares Illmatic to The Battle of Algiers and later describes Nas’s imagery as “black dadaist” (“A Rebel to America: ‘N.Y. State of Mind’ After the Towers Fell,” 57); Guthrie P. Ramsey Jr. describes the album’s music as “immaculately, eclectically, even delicately produced, and rich in layered textures and colors: a hip-hop version of Miles Davis’s signatures work, Kind of Blue (1959), if there ever was one” (“Time is Illmatic: A Song for My Father, A Letter to My Son,” 62); and Gregory Tate says that “Nas’s work exudes the ephemeral, fugitive resonance of trace memory-conjuring hardened lozenges of a ritual-habitual space time and chaos already vanished into thin air” (“An Elegy for Illmatic,” 237). This type of language is counterproductive; it works to further mystify rather than clarify what’s going on with Illmatic.
       
      Some essayists implicitly reject the book’s conceit–that is, they fail to address the assigned track. In “‘Memory Lane’: On Jazz, Hip-Hop, and Fathers,” Mark Anthony Neal, an otherwise excellent cultural critic, only ostensibly writes about Nas’s “Memory Lane.” His essay, however, is a personal reflection on how the archive of black music audibly mediates father-son relationships that are otherwise marked by silence. As Neal puts it, “via sampling hip-hop has long occasioned opportunities for intergenerational conversation and intervention” (124). Kyra D. Gaunt’s “‘One Time 4 Your Mind’: Embedding Nas and Hip-Hop into a Gendered State of Mind” argues that Nas “is a perfect candidate for exploring gender issues within hip-hop” because “he has performed different manifestations of black masculinity and patriarchal dominance” (154). In each case, Nas’s songs are instrumentalized in service of persuasive arguments–but arguments that, to be frank, have little to do with Nas or Illmatic specifically. They could be made about any number of artists or albums.
       
      If Born to Use Mics occasionally drifts away from Illmatic, its final section of reviews, interviews, and personal reminiscences redresses the situation, swinging the focus back to questions of production, consumption, and distribution. Especially useful is Jon Shecter’s “The Second Coming” (from the April 1994 issue of The Source). It presents interview excerpts from the rappers, producers, and executive producers involved in the recording process: Large Professor, MC Serch, DJ Premier, Q-Tip, L.E.S., Faith Newman, and, of course, Nas. It includes Nas’s description of his first attempts at being an MC: “The first time I grabbed the mic was at my man Will’s house–bless the dead. He lived right upstairs from me on the sixth floor. . . . We used to rhyme on ‘White Lines’ and that old shit. Then later on, he bought equipment, like turntables, fader, we was makin’ tapes like that” (214). Other excellent moments in the piece include one in which Larger Professor and DJ Premier say how excited they were by Nas’s first recorded appearance on Main Source’s 1991 recording “Live at the Barbeque.” And Illmatic‘s executive producer MC Serch explains the difficulty he encounters finding a label home for Nas: “I took [the demo] to Russell [Simmons] first, Russell said it sounded like G Rap, he wasn’t wit’ it” (216). These tidbits of information are instructive: they demystify the eschatological aura around Illmatic and ground the album in a series of strategic actions by various agents in the field of hip-hop.
       
      “Remixes” also includes “Born Alone, Die Alone,” an illuminating personal essay by writer and filmmaker Dream Hampton. Hampton’s essay posits Nas’s Illmatic as an artistic common ground between otherwise aggressively antagonistic West Coast / East Coast factions embodied by Tupac Shakur and the Notorious B.I.G., respectively.
       
      In 1994, Hampton was working as a journalist for The Source. For six months, she covered three court cases involving Tupac. During that period Hampton became friendly with Shakur. While staying in Los Angeles, where one of Shakur’s trials was taking place, Hampton got an advance-copy of Illmatic. She immediately dubs a cassette version for Tupac, who “was an instant convert” (243). The next day Tupac “arrived in his assigned courtroom blasting Illmatic so loudly that the bailiff yelled at him to turn it off before the judge took his seat on the bench” (243). Hampton subtly proposes that Nas’s lyrics on Illmatic inspired Tupac’s “first important album,” Me Against the World, recorded in 1994 (243).
       
      Hampton tells another story, this one related to the Notorious B.I.G. Prior to relocating to L.A. for the Tupac trials, Hampton lived in New York. There, she got a copy of an Illmatic bootleg: “[I] seem to remember,” says Hampton, “passing dubs back and forth to my neighbor Biggie” (242; the two lived near each other in Bed-Stuy.) This would have been sometime in 1993, as Biggie recorded his debut album Ready to Die. This fact about the bootleg tape sheds new light on the call-and-response relationship between the two MCs. For example, in “Represent,” Nas says: “Somehow the rap game reminds me of the crack game, / Used to sport Bally’s and Gazelle’s with black frames . . .” The references to “Gazelle” sunglasses and the “rap game” / “crack game” equivalence are reiterated a year later in the Notorious B.I.G.’s “Things Done Changed”:
       

      Remember back in the days, when niggaz had waves
      Gazelle shades, and corn braids
      . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
      If I wasn’t in the rap game,
      I’d probably have a key knee deep in the crack game . . .

       

      Nas via Hampton is a key agent who alters the making of seminal albums by both Tupac and Biggie.

       
      Hampton’s recollections shed light on how hip-hop is produced and consumed. First, Hampton’s narrative turns on an empowering use of technology: she “dubs” cassette copies of Illmatic. The circulation of cassette dubs is analogous to today’s digital file-sharing and mix-tape culture. Hampton’s story demonstrates how hip-hop culture has always transformed technology, putting it to creative use.6 Second, Hampton is one of three women integral to Illmatic‘s history. She joins Faith Newman, one of the album’s executive producers, and “Shortie,” the writer who awarded Illmatic the “5 Mic” review. They demonstrate the active roles women play in hip-hop and offer a useful counter-argument to Kyra Gaunt’s aforementioned feminist critique of Illmatic. That Hampton, Newman, and Shortie are only present in the book’s final section is indicative of the kinds of material knowledge absent, at times, from the book’s first half. A more material approach to hip-hop would enrich the solid scholarship.
       
      At times, Born to Use Mics seems overeager in its attempt to make Illmatic “relevant,” in the process ironically rendering the album, or rather the experience of listening to the album, irrelevant. However, on the whole, the book demonstrates how a single record can yield and absorb richly diverse readings from across the disciplines. In his introduction, Daulatzai indicates that Born to Use Mics is the first in a proposed series of books dedicated to examining individual rap albums. This means that the next few years may be an exciting time for hip-hop scholarship, as other deserving albums from hip-hop’s near past may soon be reintroduced into our historical consciousness.
       

      Alessandro Porco is a Ph.D. student in English Literature at the State University of New York at Buffalo. He is currently completing a dissertation on hip-hop poetics and American poetry. He is the editor of Population Me: Essays on David McGimpsey (Palimpsest Press, 2010) and writes an online hip-hop column for Maisonneuve, Montreal’s city magazine.

       

       

      Footnotes

       
      1. “The bible of hip-hop music, culture, and politics” is The Source’s official slogan.

       

       
      2. The rhetoric of moral panic is especially prevalent during the hearings. For example, Washington, D.C. based syndicated talk show host Joseph Madison suggests that the “dehumanization” present in gangsta rap is one step away from the dehumanization experienced by Jews in Germany with the rise of the National Socialist Party:
       

       

      Sixty years ago in another country the Jewish people had their character attacked through the use of cartoons and other methods of mass media. The process of dehumanization often began with seemingly innocent expressions of free speech, only to gather strength and become part of the fabric of the country’s culture.
       

       
      3. Unlike the other albums listed, The Wu-Tang Clan’s Enter the Wu-Tang was actually released in 1993. However, it was released near the end of that year, in early November. The album’s aesthetic and cultural impact really happened throughout the following year, culminating in the November 1994 release of group member Method Man’s hit album Tical.

       

       
      4. Main Source’s “Live at the Barbeque” is the first recording on which Nas performed. At that point, Nas’s performance name included the epithet “Nasty.” The track caused a lot of buzz because of Nas’s introductory verse, which included the lines: “When I was twelve, I went to hell for snuffin’ Jesus / Nasty Nas is a rebel to America / Police murderer, I’m causin’ hysteria.”

       

       
      5. Glaude Jr. writes:
       

       

      Residents complained of random shootings and worried about their safety. Given the widely shared belief that the state had abandoned them to rogue forces, residents even asked the New York Housing Authority in 1992 to hire the Fruit of Islam to patrol the project. The agency refused citing that of the 324 public house projects, Queensbridge ranked forty-third in the rate of crime; it was not the worst place in New York after all. But the violence and overall environment of crime remained palpable.
       

      (180)
       
      6. In Black Noise, Tricia Rose argues that female participation in rap music has been mostly delimited to graffiti and breaking, in part because “women in general are not encouraged in and often actively discouraged from learning about and using mechanical equipment. This takes place informally in socialization and formally in gender-segregatedvocational tracking in public school curriculum” (57). Hampton’s essays, however, highlights a woman’s productive use of technology. Hampton uses dubbing as a means of creating socio-aesthetic connections.
       

      Works Cited

       

      • Bourdieu, Pierre. The Field of Cultural Production. Trans. Randal Johnson. New York: Columbia UP, 1993. Print.
      • Chang, Jeff and D.J. Kool Herc. Can’t Stop Won’t Stop: A History of the Hip-Hop Generation. New York: Picador, 2005. Print.
      • Coleman, Brian. Check the Technique: Liner Notes for Hip-Hop Junkies. New York: Villard, 2007. Print.
      • Main Source. “Live at the Barbeque.” Breaking Atoms. Wild Pitch, 1991. CD.
      • Nas. Illmatic. Columbia, 1994. CD.
      • Notorious B.I.G. “Things Done Changed.” Ready to Die. Bad Boy, 1994. CD.
      • Rose, Tricia. Black Noise: Rap Music and Black Culture in Contemporary America. Middleton: Wesleyan UP, 1994. Print.
      • United States. Cong. Senate. Subcommittee on Commerce, Consumer Protection, and Competitiveness. Music, Lyrics, and Commerce. Hearing. 11 February and 5 May, 1994. 103rd Cong., 2nd sess. Washington: GPO, 1994. Print.

       

       
    • Matches, in Our Time

      Patrick F. Durgin (bio)
      School of the Art Institute of Chicago
      pdurgin@saic.edu

      Review of: Carla Harryman, Adorno’s Noise. Ithaca, NY: Essay Press, 2008.
       

       

       

      The first of two major new works collected in Carla Harryman’s new book of “literary nonfiction,” Adorno’s Noise, begins by eliding two otherwise remote passages from Minima Moralia: “If normality is death then regard for the object rather than communication is suspect” (Harryman 21). Equally spirited by Adorno’s negative dialectics–a Hegelian counter-pointillism meant to ameliorate the devaluation of subjective experience in Marxist and Freudian categories–and the aphoristic, indeed noisily lyric, style of Adorno’s prose, Harryman entertains the most dissolute promise of the opposite in “Regard for the Object Rather Than Communication Is Suspect”:
       

      I wonder if it would be the case that if normality were not death, regard for the object would be purely an entailment of belief and communication would in turn become the object of thought. This may seem a bit mad as well as inappropriate content for a meaty essay. Bear with me for a little while. You and I will go on an excursion together and discover something along the way if we’re lucky. If we are not lucky, neither you nor I will be worse off than when we started. I can’t guarantee this but it is something I believe with enough confidence to proceed to the next sentence. The next sentence is not a death sentence.
       

      (Adorno’s Noise 21)

       

      The kind of improvisatory churning of antitheses that Adorno’s most radical utopian dictates–in particular his initially liberatory extension of Fourier’s critique of the commodification of gender norms–and the syllogistic force of dialectical thought are pitched as an aesthetic problem unresolved and yet still legible in the language of critical theory, the same problem that famously worried the question of writing poetry “after Auschwitz.” Modernity’s most rank expressions of positivist enlightenment genius pose the historical problem of “normality” in the wake of “defeated Germany,” to which, in Adorno’s assessment, only “a thoroughly unsatisfactory, contradictory answer, one that makes a mockery of both principle and practice” is available; is it not then barbarism to entertain the thought that “the fault lies in the question and not only in me” (56)?

       
      With her alternative formulation, Harryman provides amply the “rigor and purity” of which Adorno speaks in his section on “Morality and style”:
       

      A writer will find that the more precisely, conscientiously, appropriately he expresses himself, the more obscure the literary result . . . . people know what they want because they know what other people want. Regard for the object, rather than for communication, is suspect in any expression: anything specific, not taken from pre-existent patterns, appears inconsiderate, a symptom of eccentricity, almost of confusion. . . . Few things contribute so much to the demoralization of intellectuals. Those who would escape it must recognize the advocates of communicability as traitors to what they communicate.
       

       

      Quite literally appropriating the question of what remains an appropriate response to modernity’s twilight produces an “essay” form that matches, in our time, the beleaguered “rigor” Adorno’s friend Thomas Mann spoke of when he wrote, “in order to read you, one should not be tired” (qtd in Jäger 128). It’s not enough to say that Adorno’s Noise is citational, and not exactly accurate to say Harryman writes like Adorno. While these observations may be “true,” it’s only because they are tautological, logical coincidences that define normative forms of exposition and “rigor.” Harryman’s writing is full of wry humor and critical attentiveness, by turns lapidary and bombastic, sometimes maddeningly self-conscious, but in a thoroughly motivated, astonishingly informed manner. When Harryman cites Adorno, it is transformative. She renders him elliptical. Adorno himself worried about this nascent quality which, in postmodern American poetics, becomes a virtue; the apology that forms a substantial amount of his dedicatory preface to Minima Moralia posits the aphoristic texture of what follows as a revision of Hegel’s proto-Fascistic denial of the “for-itself,” the defining trait of the aphorism’s pithy concision. Harryman’s book begins with a tiny treatise on the “cell of meaning,” the “in-itself” of language: “A might be an abbreviation for something inside itself, inside A,” which, “[o]nce exposed, [grows] out of proportion to the language that [has] ushered it into the brain of someone else and now it is mushrooming” (Adorno’s Noise 5).

       
      How this disproportion takes shape makes Adorno’s Noise an important object lesson in literary form. That the poet’s primary skill or duty should be the imitation of life–of human action, perception, and emotion emulsified and expressed–is a notion that has only recently been challenged with sufficient seriousness. The same notion justified the expulsion of the poets from the good society in Book X of the Republic. Even in light of the Aristotelian correctives of catharsis and irony in the Poetics, the Platonic theory of imitation concerns dramatic representation, a context fully pertinent to Harryman’s oeuvre (she co-founded the San Francisco Poets Theater in 1979, an important venue for the development of West Coast language writing). Harryman has long written within and about the contamination of mimesis by capitalist ideology; it is both the leitmotif and the textual condition of her estimable body of writings, which duly violates the values of such market categories as genre, topic, and plot. Ostensibly a book of essays, Adorno’s Noise is distinctly imitative, not so much a sustained reflection of (or on) Adorno, but rather an example of poetic imitation that honors the distinction between influence and appropriation. This sort of imitation counts as something more than homage and just short of collaboration. Among signal works such as Robert Duncan’s Writing Writing: Stein Imitations and Benjamin Friedlander’s Simulcast, Adorno’s Noise points to a new imitative mode. In the latter, this point is rather obvious, because it is both discussed and itself imitated (being self-referential in the sense that the best essays are expository and demonstrative). Harryman’s book ponders how we acknowledge an author or text as a resource that is alive to us–as a catalytic agent and not an inert inheritance. The poetics of imitation arises with the fact that what sets such writing in motion also inhabits it; the writer suffers and celebrates an observer’s paradox, is “tinged with its prior potent identity” (Harryman, Adorno’s Noise 22).
       
      At least since the Romantics’ recycling of etiological narratives and the high modernist “poem including history,” there have been two primary reactions to the ethical failure of mimetic impulses: taking refuge in a prosthetic voice, and denying the veracity of such idealized adequation. In either case, imitation has been out of favor in all but a few creative writing classrooms. Amazingly, Harryman shows no trace of such deadlock, borrowing freely and creating beyond the bland aspiration to originality. For her, and especially for this book, imitation might signify more than the fact of intertextuality. It seems to be a historical principle. Of course, history is a textual affair, a matter of record (the book’s epigraph is from Barrett Watten’s Bad History: “Fill the measurable time with indeterminate noise to show we are not happy about being figured in advance”). But where Schoenberg signified to Adorno the denouement of history’s grand march, Harryman reads Sun Ra. The “noise” she attributes to Adorno implies the contingencies of “being figured” between contemporary events and the mythos that would explain them. “Adorno was attracted to, in fact relied upon, mimesis,” Harryman writes in the last piece collected here; “Did I desire him even after he forgave me for faking the orgasm?” His hypothetical forgiveness would have stemmed, one gathers, from the “eleg[iac]” character of the orgasm, “an escape hatch in the negative dialectic” (Adorno’s Noise 179-180). Here, Harryman translates the disjunctive but wholly appropriate utterances of ecstasy homophonically–“low light lit little tick flea migrant sip pissy wit twill twill low will piano”–as if language itself were coming (Adorno’s Noise 178). At the same time she injects herself into the student protests of 1969 that radically upended Adorno’s status as a guru of leftist critique, even and especially his efforts to adjoin sexual liberation and the struggle to stop the oppression of women in the capitalist matrix:
       

      If I had been among the students in Frankfurt, would I have opened up my leather jacket and showed him my breasts in a parodic manner, in solidarity with a leaflet that proclaimed “Adorno as an institution is dead?”
       
      Direct socialization is structurally determined by the patriarchal or Oedipal family, so the gender politics of parody is hopeless if you want meaningful social change. In this story however the people live and Adorno dies. Yet I am convinced that I would have refused to think of Adorno or any individual as an institution and instead would have removed myself from the scene . . . I would have underscored my subject position as a mirror of the fragile component of the social sexual contract.
       

      (Adorno’s Noise 179)

       

      In this passage and in an earlier piece in the collection, “Just Noise,” we see a response to Adorno, who wrote in Minima Moralia, “Imagination is inflamed by women who lack, precisely, imagination . . . Their lives are construed as illustrations” (169). Doing history might entail a dizzying sonic representation of “Orgasms” under a heading culled, again from Minima Moralia, which, in context, reads, “Happiness is obsolete: uneconomic. For its idea, sexual union, is the opposite of slackness, a blessed straining, just as that of all subjected labor is cursed” (Adorno 217). If Adorno as a hypothetical object of imitation comprises a character in her story, it’s difficult not to see the subject of imitation to be Harryman herself, the same character of her notorious send-up of the solipsistic seductions of artistic and entrepreneurial techne, “In the Mode of.” Masturbating in front of the modernist nude or making an exhibition of oneself, Harryman’s animation of the ostensible history of modernism’s caddy wake is exhilarating to read, even if it’s now somewhat familiar.

       
      Adorno’s Noise sustains the humorous and nuanced gender-play of Harryman’s earlier work, though to sometimes disquieting extremes. For example, “Beware of Seeking out the Mighty” plays the syntactic template, “in writing a poem she is not writing a novel in writing a novel she is not writing an essay” and so on, far past the initial wit of the genitive negation (89); “Just Noise” is reprised with a tribute to Jackson Mac Low and linked to a quasi-concrete poem, “Inverse / Mirror,” and together they perhaps sacrifice too much in the recombinatory procedure, especially when what’s in question is the corruption of “the imagination” in the gendering of class politics (57-61). The cacophonous tone achieved in “Just Noise” is pursued elsewhere in the book with deft responsibility.
       
      What’s more, the “noise” subverts the hierarchical distinction between form and genre–to the point of folding her own texts into the structure, including a passage from her unpublished play Performing Objects–and the table of contents alone is so intricate as to make terms like “chapter,” “section,” and “essay” redundant. One wants to fall back on that most inclusive category: poetry. The once reputed antithesis of noise, poetry recommends the figure of musicality that defines the ostensive lyricism of all we tend to hold under that rubric. Without rehearsing Adorno’s formidable theoretical investment in atonality, worrying his prudishness where jazz is concerned, nor collapsing into a similitude, there is something uncanny in that the lyricism of Adorno’s Noise serves as the basic thrust of many of the book’s arguments. Rob Halpern’s back-cover blurb claims that the book “reinvents ‘the essay as form.’” His point is not as tendentious as your typical blurb, as it illuminates the way the structural and generic contrivances of this book collude atonally. Writing of a very different kind of book by a similar, younger poet–Taylor Brady’s Yesterday’s News, a book whose reinvention of lyric’s means and materials he claims points “toward a radically different kind of negation,” perhaps toward a revision of Adorno’s dialectical schema, the tenets of which render lyric a form of barbarism–Halpern recuperates the notion that the lyric’s “fundamental is address to a world from a place within the world.” Barbaric or not, this is necessary “because neither of these [worlds] can be known or given in advance” (50). Hence the brand of and motivation for lyricism in Harryman’s book–one must qualify the observation that it is not a collection of lyric poems by sounding off the infinitely ostensible status of the essay, a word which means “try” and is more about drives and motives than about accomplishment and structure.
       
      The “worlds” of Harryman and Adorno are mutually constitutive, so to address one from the other is to denude them with the very force of the language, to construct and deconstruct them –and this is the problem that gives the book thematic consistency. A truly breathtaking example is the long chapter, “It Lives in the Mimetic,” which takes up the work of Robert Smithson, Kenzaburo Oe, and William Blake. Smithson’s notion of “waning space” is first used to describe the structural peculiarities of Oe’s novel Rouse Up O Young Men of the New Age! What emerges from the aphoristic mini-essays that comprise it is an imitative cultivation of the claim Harryman made of her own work in one of her first books, Animal Instincts: “I prefer to distribute narrative rather than deny it” (107). Eventually, what “lives in the mimetic,” the subject and its stories, lives not in a space dwindling under the weight of its denial, but in a “transitional space,” and marks the turning point of the chapter:
       

      … even if writing is reading, to parrot another writer and word copiest, Kathy Acker. But the reader who writes may be a reader of things other than text. She locates her resources, which may also include a window and soft air. She abandons herself to a project and her projections. She conflates the potential legibility of a person with the potential legibility of written description.
       
      I enter you here–as you and a fiction.
       

       

      This sort of conflation is introduced in the aforementioned “regard for the object,” marking the etiological opportunities and existential vulnerabilities that the poetic, the lyric, mimetic, and dramatic construct, in the right hands, derive. Harryman’s “resources” come by way of echolocation, or imitation reconceived as a fictional cosmos. “[S]trange planets beyond those orbiting our own are now available to ascription.” And since “the world is bigger than it was before,” those mild honorifics we ascribe to the worlds available as such, words, enter our purview (Adorno’s Noise 21).

       
      The prose of “Regard for the Object” has such agility that the momentum eases the many discursive flights, such that an otherwise discontinuous set of asides exudes something somber, ethically fraught, and perfectly germane to the violence of globalization’s latest implosions. Here is where Harryman parts ways with Adorno; in Harryman’s hands, the negative dialectic reads as a series of virtual connections rather than the staid resolve its various articulations exude. The objects in question morph from starlight to a hand basket to a corpse, each being “reassigned by the action” of the writing, and also, of course, by the intimations imitated from a meshwork of sources, including the mind of the reader–one’s own regard. Just as Pluto’s identity as a planet was “eradicated by edicts,” so the “wishes” that transpire between the subject, subjects, and objects “glue up that which we are not” in as much as their communicative “resona[nce]” hides, in fact reverses, our physical contiguity beneath their discretions (Adorno’s Noise 22, 24-5). With allusions to Katrina and Iraq, Harryman discloses the finally cosmological ambition of the neoliberal idealist: “Extremists believe my heartbeat exists because the doctor has put her ear to the heart and your freedom exists because I have been profiled” (Adorno’s Noise 25). And in “Lesson,” a title even more cloying than any in Adorno’s book, neoconservative ambition is lampooned in a global battle royal that reads, though tongue in cheek, like The Rape of Lucretia in a cover version by Wolf Eyes. The noise is all that survives that or any analogy, for the mimes can be taken literally: “I give up you are going to be on top forever” in “the protective armor we now both share” (Adorno’s Noise 47-8).
       

      Patrick F. Durgin teaches cultural studies, literature, and writing at the School of the Art Institute of Chicago. His latest publications include a hybrid genre collaboration with Jen Hofer, The Route (Atelos, 2008), and essays on “post-ableist” poetics in Contemporary Women’s Writing and the Journal of Modern Literature. He is concluding work on a critical monograph entitled Indeterminacies and Intentionalities: Toward a Poetics of Critical Values, as well as a play on the subject of failed bilingualism entitled PQRS: A Drama. As series editor and publisher, he has just finished work on The Kenning Anthology of Poets Theater: 1945-1985, edited by Kevin Killian and David Brazil, recently published by Kenning Editions (2010).
       

      Works Cited

         
      • Adorno, Theodor. Minima Moralia: Reflections on a Damaged Life. 1951. Trans. E.F.N. Jephcott. London: Verso, 1974. Print.
      • Brady, Taylor. Yesterday’s News. Ithaca, NY: Factory School, 2005. Print.
      • Duncan, Robert. Writing Writing: a Composition Book: Stein Imitations. Portland: Trask House, 1971. Print.
      • Friedlander, Benjamin. Simulcast: Four Experiments in Criticism. Tuscaloosa: U of Alabama P, 2004. Print.
      • Halpern, Rob. “Sensing the Common Place: Taylor Brady’s Dialectical Lyric.” ON: Contemporary Practice 1 (2008): 43-54. Web. 8 Jul. 2010.
      • Harryman, Carla. Adorno’s Noise. Ithaca, NY: Essay Press, 2008. Print.
      • —. “In the Mode of.” There Never Was a Rose Without a Thorn. San Francisco: City Lights, 1995. 7-12. Print.
      • —. “Toy Boats.” Animal Instincts: Prose Plays Essays. Oakland: This Press, 1989. 107-110. Print.
      • Jäger, Lorenz. Adorno: A Political Biography. Trans. Stewart Spenser. New Haven: Yale UP, 2004. Print.
      • Watten, Barrett. Bad History. Berkeley: Atelos, 1998. Print.

       

    • Three Poems

      Grzegorz Wróblewski (bio)
      Translated by Agnieszka Pokojska (bio)

       

       

      In A Christianshavn Pub, Larsen Talks About His Undeservedly Settled Life

       

       

      I know what you mean, Larsen. Just like me,
      you are now a big fat pig stuffing yourself
      with salted peanuts and reading gossip columns
      about the Austrian Nazis who dominate
      the Internet with impunity.
      Don’t worry, Larsen! This could happen
      to anybody! Fucking hell… Just look at the sad-faced
      boys in orange jumpsuits, trimming shrubs
      on the moat since morning. Would you like to have
      anything to do with them again?

       

      Rhododendrons

       

      Rhododendrons absorb
      the fumes of the roasting pig:

       

      Do I remember the Vietnam war?
      No, I don’t.

       

      Would I like some meat?
      No, thanks. No meat for me.

       

      What I am doing here, then?
      Watering the rhododendrons.

       

      Dreaming Of Dragons (Mixed Media On Canvas)

       

       

      1.

      Francis would add more water.

       

      2.

      Treacherous pewter, Germanic symbols… The climate changes
      slowly bring about hallucinations.

       

      3.

      The second-hand stuff seller noticed a juggler in the left-hand corner.
      The juggler then challenged Arnaut Daniel.
       
      (Feeling silly now? That’s not how you work your way up to gold teeth and a villa in Tuscany.)

       

      4.

      Nature painters hang themselves too.

       

      5.

      What we need is resistance poetry.
      Guts!

       

      6.

      Are known to be local parts of the priest and the rhinoceros.

       

      7.

      I had no idea (the male lover dressed up as an intellectual).
      Leaving grayness, you enter an even greater lack of contrast.
      You’ll walk through a wall, remaining underground.

       

      8.

      A prisoner will be despised.

       

      9.

      And you’ll open one eye in the baths innkeeper’s room.

       

      10.

      Love manoeuvres?

       

      11.

      In the baths’ owner’s room.

       

       

       

      Grzegorz Wróblewski, born in 1962 in Gdansk and raised in Warsaw, has been living in Copenhagen since 1985. He has published nine volumes of poetry and two collections of short prose pieces in Poland; three books of poetry, a book of poetic prose and an experimental novel (translations) in Denmark; and a book of selected poems in Bosnia-Herzegovina, as well as a selection of plays. His work has been translated into eight languages.
       
      The English translations of his poems and/or plays have appeared in London Magazine, Poetry London, Magma Poetry, Parameter Magazine, Poetry Wales, The Delinquent, Chicago Review, 3rd bed, Eclectica, Mississippi Review, Absinthe: New European Writing, Common Knowledge, Word Riot, Practice: New Writing + Art, The Mercurian – A Theatrical Translation Review, Lyric, CounterPunch, Exquisite Corpse, Guernica, Jacket Magazine, Otoliths, Cambridge Literary Review, West Wind Review and in the following anthologies: Altered State: The New Polish Poetry (Arc Publications, Todmorden, UK 2003), Carnivorous Boy Carnivorous Bird (Zephyr Press, Brookline, USA 2004), A Generation Defining Itself – In Our Own Words (MW Enterprises, USA 2007). Selected poems are available in Our Flying Objects (Equipage Press, Cambridge, UK 2007), and new and selected poems are forthcoming in A Marzipan Factory (Otoliths, Rockhampton, Australia 2010). His chapbooks to date are: These Extraordinary People (erbacce-press, Liverpool, UK 2008) and Mercury Project (Toad Press, Claremont, USA 2008), and A Rarity (Cervena BarvaPress, W. Somerville, USA, 2009).
       

      Agnieszka Pokojska is a freelance translator and editor, tutor in literary translation at the Jagiellonian University in Krakow, and author of a number of articles on translation. Her translations into Polish include poems by Seamus Heaney, Robert Pinsky, and Derek Walcott. Her translations of Grzegorz Wróblewski’s poetry appeared in the anthology Carnivorous Boy Carnivorous Bird, in Lyric Poetry Review, West Wind Review, Eclectica, Jacket Magazine, The Journal, Cambridge Literary Review, The Delinquent and Poetry Wales and most recently in the chapbook A Rarity, to be published by Cervena Barva Press.
       

    • The Queer Spaces and Fluid Bodies of Nazario’s Anarcoma

      Michael Harrison (bio)
      Monmouth College
      mharrison@monm.edu

      Abstract
       
      At a time when Spanish culture was attempting to emerge from the shadow of an oppressive dictatorship, a generation of queer artists used comics to comment on the time’s significant cultural changes. This essay examines the original queer sensibility of the comic Anarcoma, by Nazario, as a symbol of the changes that were happening all over post-Franco Spain. Centering on the exploits of the titular transsexual detective, Anarcoma takes the cultural and sexual expectations inherited from franquismo and queers them, resulting in a new set of images which can be associated with democratic Spain.
       
      With its distinct visual representations, Anarcoma refigures gendered and sexual bodies while navigating real Barcelona spaces. This use of urban space rhetorically ties the boundary crossing of Anarcoma as a fictional individual with the developments and changes in the gay community of Barcelona and in Spain at large. An analysis of the specific spaces and how they are refigured and linked to the body of Anarcoma serves to reflect the development of gay identity in Spain. The fluid body of the detective, visually tied to masculinity and femininity, sometimes simultaneously, elucidates the way gender is presented in comics and shows how questions of gender and gender norms figure prominently in the nascent gay movement of Spain. A further analysis of the comic’s secondary characters also highlights this queering of the norms through the further abstraction of coded images of gender.
       

       

      There’s a ladder in her nylons
      Where we can climb up to the stars
      Join a queue of Borsalinos
      As you bend over the bar
      Tattoo on her muscle says
      ‘Beware, Behave, be mine’
      She’ll eat them up for breakfast
      One at a time

      Anarcoma, Anarcoma, Anarcoma -Lyrics to “Anarcoma” by Marc Almond

       
      During the 1970s in Spain, the comic series Anarcoma stands out as emblematic not only of the social and political reality of the day, but also of the openness and freedom that accompanied the end of the dictatorship of Francisco Franco. It is a series that openly discusses taboo subjects such as homosexuality and gender identity, while at the same time questioning the myriad of issues tied to Spain’s transition to democracy, and especially the normative forces that had forced Spain into compliance with a rigid set of social expectations for so long. Anarcoma, created by the artist Nazario (Nazario Luque Vera), first appeared in serial form in El Víbora magazine in 1979, and later as a compilation, in 1981.1
       
      Born in Castilleja del Campo, Sevilla, Nazario grew up in an environment of Spanish traditionalism that soon made him realize that his creative destiny lay elsewhere, and so he made Barcelona his home in the early 1970s. The Catalan capital that welcomed the young artist was a city with a flourishing youth culture that was growing increasingly uneasy with the aging dictatorship.2 Along with this culture came an active drive to break, bend, and refigure the norms that had oppressed Nazario and his contemporaries for so long. Nazario, in fact, calls himself a “militant homosexual,” and “militant” activists like Nazario were pushing to contribute to the rapid progress that Spain was attempting to make after years of oppression (“Disección” 55). Anarcoma emerges from this environment of radical change in Barcelona and in the rest of Spain. While various artists of this period fostered strong ties with the emergent gay political movement, Nazario viewed his artistic work itself as his contribution to militant activism. In an interview with the artist in Armand de Fluvià’s El movement gai a la clandestinitat del franquisme, Nazario says, “Jo en aquella època ja feia les meves històries d’Anarcoma, les meves històries de mariconeo. I pensava que amb això ja hi havia prou militància com perquè no em fes falta entrar en cap grup” ‘During that period I had already written my stories about Anarcoma, my queer stories. And I thought that with this there already was quite a lot of militancy so I felt it was unnecessary for me to join any group’ (76).3 The militant queerness of Anarcoma is precisely what distinguishes it and makes it such an important cultural text from this time period.
       
      Anarcoma revolves around the life and adventures of the detective, Anarcoma. Dopico describes Nazario’s heroine as “un famoso travesti que pulula por las Ramblas barcelonesas, cuyas características físicas saltan a la vista y que se autodefine como ‘una maricona con tetas’” ‘a famous transvestite who mills around the Barcelona Ramblas, whose physical characteristics are obvious and who defines herself as ‘a faggot with tits” (393). Her actions and visual presentation can be interpreted as the ultimate symbol of the changes that were happening all over Spain.4
       
      More than just a representation of the blurring of gender presentation or the reversal of established gender norms, however, Anarcoma is also a product of the Spanish comics traditions of the period in which it appears.5Anarcoma recalls the tradition of Spanish police-drama comics, like the Doctor Niebla series (see Fig. 1 below), populated with square jawed men and curvy women, which appeared beginning in the 1940s (Coma 425).6 Nazario describes Anarcoma in the introduction thus: “Es una mezcla, tanto en el físico como en su comportamiento, entre Lauren Bacall y Humfrey Bogart” ‘She is a mixture, as much in her appearance as in her behavior, between Lauren Bacall and Humphrey Bogart,’ a description that also connects the comic to a tradition of film noir detectives (Anarcoma 10). Still, despite the noir-inspired scenes and characters and themes of deception and intrigue, Anarcoma is far from a traditional comic (see Fig. 2 below).7Anarcoma simultaneously draws from these traditions and questions them, replicating in this sense the country’s attempt to reconcile its centuries-old culture with the need to transition into modernity. In effect, the comic queers the heteronorms which had, until this point, unwaveringly guided the nation. Juan Vicente Aliaga describes this process of questioning and queering: “Nazario ha recuperado, para el texto y la imagen, desde un punto de vista combativo y burlón, en un terreno imaginario preñado de realidad, los valores positivos de la feminización del varón y de la sexualidad despendolada, dándoles un toque queer avant la lettre” ‘Nazario has recovered, for the text and the image, from a combative and mocking point of view, in an imaginary land pregnant with reality, the positive values of the feminization of the male and of sexuality gone wild, giving them an avant la lettre queer touch’ (Aliaga and Cortes 68).
       

       
      Doctor Niebla (1952)  © 1988 Nazario & Ediciones La Cúpula, SL. Used by permission.

       

      Click for larger view

      Fig. 1.

      Doctor Niebla (1952)

      © 1988 Nazario & Ediciones La Cúpula, SL. Used by permission.
       
       
      Anarcoma (17)  © 1988 Nazario & Ediciones La Cúpula, SL. Used by permission.

       

      Click for larger view

      Fig. 2.

      Anarcoma (17)

      © 1988 Nazario & Ediciones La Cúpula, SL. Used by permission.
       

       
      Anarcoma and its original queer sensibility appear at a time when Spanish culture was attempting to emerge from the shadow of an oppressive dictatorship. A number of cultural texts of the time move specifically to forget the Franco period, and to re-create a sense of national cultural identity, in many cases by moving toward a kind of postmodern aesthetic that relies heavily on the primacy of images and eschews deep political discourse. Cristina Moreiras Menor highlights this trend:
       

      Salir del ostracismo y el aislamiento que el antiguo régimen de Franco había impuesto, dejar de ser una comunidad ‘premoderna’, se convierte en prioridad fundamental y, a partir de ella, la construcción de una nueva imagen y de unas nuevas señas de identidad pasan por la destrucción, reconstrucción o incluso el desinterés aniquilador (como si no hubieran existido) de todos aquellos símbolos que se asocian con la vieja España.”
       

      (65)

       

      (Escaping from the ostracism and isolation that the former regime had imposed, ceasing to be a “pre-modern” community, became the fundamental priority and, from this, the construction of a new image and of new signs of identity go through the destruction of, reconstruction of or even an annihilating lack of interest in (as if it had never existed) all those symbols associated with old Spain.)

       

      Anarcoma, we will see, takes the cultural and sexual expectations inherited from franquismo and queers them, resulting in a new set of images that can be associated with a democratic Spain.8

       
      With its distinct visual representations, Anarcoma refigures gendered and sexual bodies while navigating real Barcelona spaces. This use of urban space rhetorically links the boundary crossing of Anarcoma as a fictional individual with the developments and changes within the gay community of Barcelona and of Spain at large, because the boundaries crossed by Anarcoma’s gender transgressions and those of supporting characters are linked to the real Barcelona spaces they inhabit. An analysis of the specific spaces and how they are refigured and tied to the fluid body of Anarcoma serves to reflect the development of gay identity in Spain.
       
      Under the right-wing dictatorship of Francisco Franco, a large portion of the Spanish population had to remain “closeted,” in some sense of the word. Spaniards with more progressive or left leaning political views had to meet in secret; women who did not desire to be limited only to the domestic sphere had to carefully curtail any open expression of dissent, and Spanish gays and lesbians had to meet clandestinely, encode their correspondence to one another, and often endure life in a double closet.9 As the dictatorship of Franco entered its final years, Spanish people began to push back against the boundaries that had confined them for forty years. Beginning at first as a gradual transgression of these guiding norms, upon the death of Franco, as a nation, Spaniards began to emerge from the many closets where they had hidden themselves. This emergence on a number of fronts (political, social, cultural) was the beginning of what is widely known as the transición. During this period, Spain experienced an explosion of new production and thought that appeared as an attempt to reconcile its dark recent history with the promise of a new democratic country. With the increasing visibility of non-normative sexualities in Spain, and as a manifestation of this cultural and political transition, the figure of the transsexual became a popular, though controversial, metaphor for this period of Spanish history. A number of social and political thinkers who have examined the transición have pointed out that the figure of the transsexual can be rhetorically linked to it as a means of understanding social transformation in the period.10 “Such celebratory displays of cultural transvestism . . . were directly related to the euphoric sense of unlimited possibilities that came with ‘not having Franco’” (Vernon and Morris 7). The transsexual’s freedom from rigid sexual/gender models emblematizes the freedom of the country from a variety of rigid roles imposed earlier by Francoism. Cristina Moreiras Menor makes the connection between the presence of the transsexual in texts from this period and a move toward a more superficial, image based culture. She says, “En este sentido, ponen en escena una política de la transexualidad o travestismo donde lo que domina no es tanto la sexualidad como placer (jouissance) como la sexualidad como artificio y el juego de los signos sexuales” ‘In this sense, they stage a politics of transsexuality or travestism where what dominates is not as much sexuality as pleasure (jouissance) as sexuality as artifice and the game of sexual signs’ (78). The metaphor of the transsexual is not necessarily one that should be wielded universally, though. Many critics, including Garlinger and Pérez-Sánchez, have expressed “concern about uncritical endorsements of the drag metaphor of national identity” (Garlinger 367-68, Pérez-Sánchez 94). I argue, however, that the specific modes of queering of expectations of masculinity and femininity in Anarcoma themselves open up a space from which a new gay identity can emerge.11 Built on this troubling of expectations, the freedom gained by this generation of Spanish gays and lesbians becomes less one tied to the specific political freedoms granted under democracy and more about the individual freedoms to more authentically express their sexuality.
       
      The movement of transsexual and transvestite bodies through the evolving spaces of its cities, such as Barcelona, also highlights their role as focal points for the development of new identities. Barcelona during the transition was, in many ways, the birthplace of the gay community in Spain, as it was home to the first gatherings of gay and lesbian Spaniards, with a large number of transsexuals among them, who marched for the recognition of their rights.12 While these now vocal groups disrupted the expected norms by taking to the public spaces of Barcelona, their openness resulted in a disruption of those discursive spaces. Public spaces had only recently been opened up to more freedom of expression, and in this specific expression (that of self-identification as gay) the concept of a gay community, both in more abstract cultural terms and very physical corporeal terms, began to form.
       
      Other cultural and spatial factors figure into the development of gay identity. Barcelona is a city with strong ties to its traditional Catalan heritage, but this background was simultaneously rooted in the stricter traditions that had kept gay Spaniards in the closet, as well as a cultural tradition that allowed for the transition out of this closet. Barcelona and Cataluña as a whole had struggled with a desire for more cultural autonomy under the Franco regime, and with the end of the dictatorship, a more authentic expression of Catalan identity was possible. This revitalization of Catalan identity is reflected in the prized Catalan virtues of seny and arrauxment.13 The combination of common sense and tolerance of seny with the violent upheaval of arrauxment arguably provided Catalan cultural support for what would become the gay rights movement in Spain. The closeting forces that silenced Spanish gays and lesbians can be rhetorically linked to the oppression of Catalan cultural identity under the one-nation, one-culture rhetoric of the dictatorship, and so when free of these restraints, the resulting upheaval and demonstration of gays on the streets of Barcelona can be viewed as tied to a more open expression of Catalan cultural values.
       
      In examining the city of Barcelona as a type of birthplace for gay identity in Spain, however, one must consider that the residents of the city are not necessarily Catalan, and that Catalan identity is not the only national/regional formation at play, and in fact many authors have thematized the migration of Andalusians and Murcians, known in Cataluña as Xarnegos, to the region. As one of the two largest cities in Spain, Barcelona would also have been a preferred destination for many closeted gay and lesbian Spaniards during and after the dictatorship. Often facing a greater degree of religious and social pressure due to their avowed or possibly closeted homosexuality, these men and women fled their home towns for more accepting environs. Before the death of Franco, their migration could have been couched in terms of artistic expression, as Barcelona had an active art scene, but the important point is that they came from all over, and they often brought their own distinct cultural heritages and expressions with them.14 This diverse mixture of backgrounds and experiences contributes not only to the types of cultural expression that came out of the transition in Barcelona, of which Anarcoma is one clear example, but also to the overall sense that the gay cultural identity that began to grow out of the demonstrations and marches was not entirely Catalan.
       
      The development of queer identity both intersects with the city and changes it, just as it is itself changed by the city. It is important, then, to discuss Anarcoma, not only in the context of Spanish and Catalan cultures during the Franco and post-Franco periods, but also in relation to those concepts of gay and queer space developed by theorists such as Jon Binnie, David Bell, and others. Binnie has discussed the spatial element of sexual citizenship in the city,15 noting that “we put a lot of emphasis on the city as the prime site for the materialization of sexual identity, community and politics” (167). He distinguishes the work of Henning Bech, who argues that because of their “anonymity, publicity, and visibility . . . cities enable the performance of dissident sexualities” (Binnie 167). In other words, the city allows gays to be anonymous, but also to be visible. This combination makes identification of one another easier, for romantic encounters, for example, while also providing the anonymity and freedom to begin to understand one’s own identity. “(D)issident sexualities,” then, are clearly an “urban phenomenon, with cities as the centers of innovation and transgression” (Kaur Puar, Rushbrook and Schein 384).
       
      Along with the ways that migration has impacted Catalan identity, particularly as it intersects with gay identity, it is also necessary to consider how the concept of migration affects more general theories of sexual citizenship and space. The flows from one place to another are not only interactions between spaces, but also forces that alter the spaces themselves. The forces that would drive a person to leave one place and migrate to another change the destination as well as the place left behind. As Bell and Binnie put it, “these flows interact with pre-existing urban forms and urban lives-these are not erased, but reworked” (1808). Migration contributes to the continual sense of becoming that is inherent in the development of an identity; it is a process that is not unidirectional or static, but continuous, as Larry Knopp and Michael Brown explain: “this continual process very often entails obvious material manifestations of diffusion, such as residential relocation, migration, communication via mass media, and the spread of resources such as money and cultural capital” (413).
       
      These movements between places and the effects that they have on the development of queer sexual citizenship are not limited only to the spaces left behind and the spaces toward which the migrant moves in search of him or herself. The “in-between” is significant as well. Again Knopp and Brown provide relevant insights:
       

      Furthermore, such spatially fractured subjectivities are constituted within as well as between scales and localities (for example, in movement between home, work, bars, clubs, coffee houses, tearooms or cottages, etc.). And, contrary to the experiences of many non-queer people, it appears that such searches lead us to subjectivities that are self-consciously multiply rooted…or rooted in movement itself, rather than in efforts to fix our subjectivities in only one key place.
       

      (420)

       

      The city, then, is a space that receives migrant sexual citizens and is changed by them while it aids them in their identity formation as individuals and as a community, and one where the movement between places is significant.16

       
      Anarcoma represents precisely these connections between city spaces and the expression of queer identity in post-Franco Barcelona. Pablo Dopico describes Anarcoma as,
       

      [u]n personaje emblemático que no dejó a ningún lector indiferente mientras paseaba con sus zapatos de tacón alto por las páginas de El Víbora en los primeros años de la década de los ochenta, reflejando y retratando el lado más canalla de las gentes y las calles de Barcelona. Reflejos de una subcultura urbana que mostraban un costumbrismo alternativo de la vida callejera.
       

      (393)

       

      ([a]n emblematic character who left no reader indifferent while she walked with her high heeled shoes through the pages of El Víbora in the early years of the decade of the eighties, reflecting and depicting the more miserable side of the people and the streets of Barcelona. Reflections of an urban subculture that showed an alternative local culture of street life.)

       

      Here Dopico links the character and body of Anarcoma not only to the streets of Barcelona, but also to the movement between places, and along those streets. The “alternative local culture of street life” mentioned here represents the city as rooted in past traditions, but also as changed by the nascent gay community and by the presence of Anarcoma as she moves through its streets.

      The spaces that Anarcoma inhabits are not only general, anonymous spaces of sexual encounter between gays (clubs, bathhouses, cruising areas), but are also identifiable Barcelona spaces where Spanish gays could congregate openly and begin to develop a sense of connection and community identity. Dopico says, in discussing Anarcoma’s world, that:
       

      Todos ellos conviven en una historia en la que la homosexualidad, lejos de presentarse como un gueto marginal, se convierte en la protagonista de la trama, en lo lógico y natural, con todas sus grandezas y miserias, reflejando sus gustos y costumbres cotidianas. Tras años de oprobio y condena, los homosexuales se sacudían la vergüenza de salir a la calle y buscaban un nuevo camino de libertad y normalidad rodeados de glamour y elegancia.
       

      (395)

       

      (They all coexist in a story where homosexuality, far from presenting itself as a marginal ghetto, is converted into the protagonist of the plot in the logical and natural way, with all of its grandeur and miseries, reflecting its everyday tastes and customs. After years of shame and condemnation, the homosexuals brushed away their embarrassment to go out into the streets and looked for a new path of liberty and normality surrounded by glamour and elegance.)

       

      On those streets that Dopico links to the “new path of liberty and normality,” Anarcoma and her friends move from one iconic space to another, which they thereby mark as gay spaces or locations tied to the new sense of gay identity, although the comic also provides visual reminders of the resistances to these developments.

       
      We see an example in one sequence in which Anarcoma and her friend Mimi are enjoying a social visit in a Barcelona bar/restaurant. The panel presents a fairly typical Barcelona scene (see Fig. 3 below). There are, however, certain elements that visually code the space as gay, or at least as a space welcoming to the newly visible gay community. To the left of Anarcoma and Mimi, one man has his arm around another muscular man, and to the right of them, a man flirts with the short order cook behind the bar. These ancillary characters in the panel are gays inhabiting a space coded as neutral or as a straight space, rather than gays who inhabit a space clearly marked as gay.17 Still, another part of the panel portrays their presence as part of a broader matrix of supportive spaces that would have contributed to the growth of gay identity. On the wall behind the group, a poster clearly advertises the “Día del Orgullo Gay” (“Gay Pride Day”).
       

       
      Anarcoma (29)  © 1988 Nazario & Ediciones La Cúpula, SL. Used by permission.

       

      Click for larger view

      Fig. 3.

      Anarcoma (29)

      © 1988 Nazario & Ediciones La Cúpula, SL. Used by permission.
       

       
      In this world, created by presenting a series of distinct spaces on the page, Nazario chooses to set the scenes in historic bars that were frequented by the author and his contemporaries. This focus on the streets and the common gathering places of Barcelona’s gay community places primacy not only on the act of gathering itself, but also on the places in which they could and would gather. Panels depicting these spaces are often wide and show a number of people conversing with each other at once. From this frenetic display of activity, the reader gains a sense not only of social interactions in a bar setting, which are often associated with Spanish nightlife in general, but also of interactions that are queered by the people in the bar (gays, transsexuals, punks). The specific types of conversations they are having in the panel (discussing sex acts, conquests, etc.) also help to queer the space. The realistic representations of specific, named spaces of the Barcelona nightlife accompany the more generic spaces that Anarcoma visits, and which could be anywhere in the city (public bathrooms, drag cabarets, dark waterfront docks), thus creating an image both of the specific gay spaces of the city and of those anonymous ones which served a specific purpose for individuals in the developing community (cruising, nightlife, etc.).
       
      In a text that sets its action in the changing world of the Catalan capital in the 1970s and early 1980s, the specific choice of referents to code the city as specifically Barcelona represents an inversion of what is ordinarily thought of as “monumental.” There are no landmark buildings or skylines, no “tourist” representations of the city. Instead, Nazario focuses on the streets. In fact, the only image of Barcelona that can be considered “iconic” is the Miró mosaic imbedded in the center of the Rambla, and it is a literal “landmark,” at street level to be looked down at instead of gazed up at, further underscoring the “life on the street” nature of Nazario’s adopted home town.
       
      The ties between Barcelona in the text and the real city of the post-Franco period are not limited to its public social spaces. At times, Nazario also chooses to include historical people from his world who interact on the page with the fictional Anarcoma and her associates. Nazario’s friend Onliyú appears as the inventor of the mysterious machine that everyone in the story is searching for. Nazario’s boyfriend Alejandro attempts to seduce Anarcoma’s friend Jamfry, and Nazario himself appears in another panel, arm in arm with his friend Ocaña (see Fig. 4 below).18 These people link the text to the city and to the gay community that was in its developmental stages, due in large part to their involvement with the burgeoning gay community through their artistic and creative work. This inclusion further ties the freedoms of expression and congregation that Anarcoma and her fictional associates enjoy with the developing community of Barcelona and Spain.
       

       
      Anarcoma (42)  © 1988 Nazario & Ediciones La Cúpula, SL. Used by permission.

       

      Click for larger view

      Fig. 4.

      Anarcoma (42)

      © 1988 Nazario & Ediciones La Cúpula, SL. Used by permission.
       

       
      While it is important to examine the specific spaces which Anarcoma and her fellow Barcelonans, both fictional and real, inhabit, “people on the move across spaces may also be key contributors to the sexual characterization of places” (Kaur Puar, Rushbrook and Schein 385-386). This movement between and across spaces is important in this context because of the emphasis Nazario puts on the streets and on street life in the text. Here the streets are a significant space of their own. Just as the text features life inside these bars and social hotspots, it also places significance on the life outside and in between them by showing activity going on through the window of panels set in the interior of a place, or by beginning a sequence from the street and looking through the front display window into the restaurant or bar. These are not mere establishing shots, as the specific activity going on outside the spaces (other transsexuals talking, gay couples walking hand in hand, etc.) contribute to the sense that this entire network of space is somehow new and different.
       
      On the streets, Anarcoma and her fellow citizens move from place to place, but not free from interactions, glances, and conversations. In navigating the city, Anarcoma seeks out clues to the mystery as well as pleasure and sexual company. In this movement, she can be seen as what Dianne Chisholm calls a “cruising flâneur,” a refiguring of Benjamin’s city dweller, who in this modern, queer context, gravitates to erotic hotspots in her movement through urban spaces (46-47). She moves between these spaces, at times seemingly for the mere sake of moving, and while doing so, she frequently participates in cruising for a fleeting sexual encounter. This more seedy element of the street experience, done in the open and visible to all, is yet another hallmark of the new sexual freedom in Barcelona and in Spain.
       
      This openness and freedom are not complete, however. The newfound freedoms of Spain after Franco were not suddenly widespread and easily accepted overnight, and in Anarcoma, there is a sense of uneasiness and uncertainty that pervades the text. This could be attributed to the film noir feel of the detective stories that inform it, but there are moments that textually tie Anarcoma to its historical moment and to the widespread uncertainty as to the future of the country. One such instance occurs in a panel chronicling Anarcoma and Mimi’s movement from one bar to the next. The friends are discussing part of the mystery she is trying to solve, and Mimi says, “Después de las cosas que han pasado…A mí me da mucho miedo” ‘After everything that has happened…It really scares me’ (Anarcoma 29). This statement would only be one of a number of plot-driving statements except for the way the panel is presented. As Anarcoma and Mimi walk toward the Bar Ramblas, foregrounded in ominous green shadows are what appear to be members of the Spanish secret police, complete with the requisite, threatening dark glasses and scowls. Their presence in this panel allows for a secondary reading of Mimi’s statement, now connected with the fear and uncertainty that faced the community at this historical moment.19 It is, in fact, this sense of fear that marked this period. Moreiras Menor points out that the period of the desencanto during which Anarcoma appears is characterized by “un sentimiento generalizado de miedo surgido por el estado de incertidumbre social, económica y política” ‘a generalized feeling of fear which arises from the state of social, economic, and political uncertainty’ (61). In this, and in many other ways, the comic is an historical text documenting the testing of the boundaries amidst a fear of a return to the rigidity of dictatorship, as in Fig. 5:20
       

       
      Anarcoma (29)  © 1988 Nazario & Ediciones La Cúpula, SL. Used by permission.

       

      Click for larger view

      Fig. 5.

      Anarcoma (29)

      © 1988 Nazario & Ediciones La Cúpula, SL. Used by permission.
       

       
      The meeting spots and streets of Barcelona in the pages of the comic provide the rhetorical space for the development of a sense of sexual citizenship on the part of gay and lesbian Spaniards in general, and are also directly linked to the figure of Anarcoma as she inhabits these spaces. Teresa Vilarós agrees that, despite the “rareza” or “strangeness” of Anarcoma, it is representative of the reality and the aesthetics of the period. She says
       

      Y aunque no se puede extender al total de la población–ni siquiera a su mayoría–sí puede afirmarse sin embargo que fue este cuerpo ’emplumado’ y fluido,21 compuesto sobre todo de heroína, sangre y semen, el que dio voz, estilo y marca a un momento específico de la historia española reciente

       

      (And although one cannot extend it to the total population–nor even to a majority of it–one can nevertheless assert that it was this ‘queer’ and fluid body, composed above all of heroine, blood, and semen, the one that gave voice, style, and a brand to a specific moment of recent Spanish history).
       

      (183)

       

      The spaces which Anarcoma inhabits are themselves significant in the ways they help question established norms. Anarcoma’s is a subculture of explicit, often violent sex, and within these spaces, a constant examination and reconstruction of gender norms occurs, not relying on the heteronormative model of gender expression, but instead creating a new one which foregrounds freedom of expression and sexuality as the most important forces in identity formation.22

       
      Anarcoma’s subjectivity is centered on her bodily presence, and the forces which cause the refiguring and recreating of Barcelona in the comic are also at work on the body of Anarcoma herself. Knopp and Brown tie agency to spatiality, saying: “A more queer way of conceptualizing these issues, we believe, involves thinking of ‘agency’ and ‘subjectivity’ . . . as inextricably intertwined and inherently spatial” (412). This results in a new idea of the role of the body and of the visual presentation of gender as a foundational force for the establishment of gay identity. In Anarcoma, Nazario utilizes the visual medium of comics to question, refigure and ultimately queer the expected cultural gender norms through the character of Anarcoma herself. Anarcoma is a liminal figure who occupies simultaneously two different, gendered roles. An examination of the way Nazario presents the transsexual detective in the comic elucidates much about the way gender is presented in comics and how questions of gender and gender norms figure prominently in the nascent gay movement of Spain in the late 1970s and early 1980s. A further analysis of the secondary characters with whom Anarcoma interacts also highlights this queering of the norms through the abstraction of coded images of gender.
       
      Peter Brooks writes that “modern narratives appear to produce a semioticization of the body which is matched by a somatization of story: a claim that the body must be a source and a locus of meanings, and that stories cannot be told without making the body a prime vehicle of narrative significations” (xii). Anarcoma’s body is represented as loaded with meaning, a mixture between masculine and feminine without favoring one or the other. Nazario draws her in feminine clothing at all times, often in hypersexual tight skirts and fishnet stockings, but she is also coded masculine in the aggression with which she sets out to solve crime. While the traditional mainstream image of the transsexual is one of outward femininity that hides bodily maleness, Anarcoma does not attempt to hide her maleness, nor does she exclusively express exterior femininity. As the introduction says, she is “orgullosa de su respetable polla,” ‘proud of her sizeable cock,’ and in her sexual encounters is frequently the active partner (Anarcoma 10). In this way, Anarcoma not only presents a queer image, refusing to conform to one model of gender (masculinity or femininity), but she also queers what would have been the ubiquitous image of the transsexual in post Franco Spanish society. Nazario himself has described her, saying: “no es una Bibi Andersen que está ahí tratando de disimular, que todo el mundo sabe que fue hombre y que nadie sabe realmente si está operada o no está operada, funciona como mujer pero hay este misterio. En cambio en Anarcoma no había este misterio en absoluto nunca” ‘she is not a Bibi Andersen who is there trying to hide, who everyone knows was a man and that no one really knows if she is pre-operative or post-operative, functioning as a woman but with that mystery. Instead, in Anarcoma there was never this mystery’ (qtd. in Pérez del Solar 534).23 She is neither completely male nor female, nor even traditionally transsexual. Anarcoma is truly queer, questioning identity and sexuality at a new level.24 Anarcoma, then, exists as a kind of postmodern subject for whom exterior appearance and behavior are much more important than a deeper sense of self or identity.25
       
      The presence of Anarcoma and her role in establishing a new sense of queer cultural expression participates in a long tradition of narratives that deal with non-normative sexuality as it relates to Spanish identity. Gema Pérez-Sánchez has pointed out, for example, that in a number of texts that on one level attempt to recover queer expression, “the characterization of the male protagonists as victims is informed by the fear of being symbolically feminized, castrated, and possibly sodomized by fascism” (75). Coming out of the immediate post-Franco period, I would argue, Anarcoma wields a number of these fears as weapons, not in an exorcism of the “fear of feminization” that Pérez-Sánchez notes is present in related texts, but rather as useful tools in the recovery of agency over them: Anarcoma makes the choice to remain in a middle place between masculinity an femininity, she is an active and passive participant in sodomy, again choosing not to favor one over the other, exhibiting agency over the choice rather than fear, and, in a particularly graphic scene, she literally castrates one of her captors in an attempt to escape their clutches. With these active choices, Anarcoma exhibits control over her environment, and establishes a new model for the freedom of personal expression under democracy.
       
      Anarcoma is a transsexual with an outwardly feminine appearance, but as Alberto Mira discusses, “Anarcoma sería un ejemplo de transgresión precisamente porque, a pesar de tener cierta apariencia femenina se comporta de manera viril” ‘Anarcoma would be an example of transgression precisely because, in spite of having a certain feminine appearance, she behaves in a manly way’ (438). It is this masculine behavior that most often marks Anarcoma’s masculinity. What cannot be ignored in the numerous panels showing our heroine engaging in a sex act, however, is the presence of her “sizeable cock.” It is, after all, her penis which distinguishes her from other, biological females in the comic. Her liminality as a character is due in large part to her insistence on remaining “no operada” ‘un-operated.’ Unlike many real-world transsexuals who are at varying points on a journey toward full transition, Nazario has Anarcoma choose to keep her penis, due in large part to the power it allows her to wield in a phallocentric society.26
       
      As Butler and others have well established, gender is a type of performance, and visuality is an important part of the process of the performance of gender. Butler writes, “Such acts, gestures, enactments, generally construed, are performative in the sense that the essence or identity that they otherwise purport to express are fabrications manufactured and sustained through corporeal signs and other discursive means” (173). The fact that Anarcoma is shown displaying her penis at various times makes her penis part of Anarcoma’s gender performance. Hers is a fluctuating performance, however, changing depending on her needs and desires at that moment. While her breasts and women’s clothing represent one manifestation of gender, her display of her penis represents another, and at times both appear simultaneously, emphasizing the performativity of gender.27 Her clothing too, although predominantly feminine in style, is occasionally coded visually as masculine. One particular item of clothing, the trench coat that appears to be the heroine’s favorite piece of outerwear, does this most successfully. In that it covers the outward displays of Anarcoma’s femininity and is a common clothing item for many men, this trench coat marks her as masculine, but it also helps produce the aura of the film noir detective to which Anarcoma owes much inspiration. That detective is exclusively male, so when our detective wears a trench coat, not only does it cover up her femaleness (she also tends to wear her hair up in a beret to further this outward performance of masculinity), but it also imbues her with the masculinity that is associated with the film noir detective.
       
      Another way in which Anarcoma displays her gender performance of masculinity can be seen in a panel in which her sex robot, XM2, is first put under her control. He springs to attention, saying “¡A sus órdenes, mi jefe!” ‘At your command, sir!,’ thereby putting Anarcoma in the position of the male military officer waiting for the compliance of his soldiers. This masculinity is subverted by the visual representation of Anarcoma, with exposed breasts and high heeled boots, her hidden (for the time being) penis covered with undergarments. She can also be read here as a dominatrix who, although traditionally feminine, wields masculine power and control over her sexual partner; indeed the inversion of traditional gender and power roles forms a major part of the allure of this type of activity, as in Fig. 6:
       

       
      Anarcoma (44)  © 1988 Nazario & Ediciones La Cúpula, SL. Used by permission.

       

      Click for larger view

      Fig. 6.

      Anarcoma (44)

      © 1988 Nazario & Ediciones La Cúpula, SL. Used by permission.
       

       

      It may well be that Anarcoma’s masculinity is the most dramatic of the two presentations, due in large part to her outward, feminine appearance, but that feminine appearance balances out the equation, holding Anarcoma firmly in the liminal space between masculinity and femininity.

       
      Anarcoma is often visually coded as feminine. Just as her maleness is displayed openly, her femaleness is similarly made visible in the frequent times she appears topless in the comic. Anarcoma’s breasts do not take the form of stuffed bras or other fabricated illusions, but are bodily markers of her femaleness, and so in seeing them (and we do see them often) the reader is constantly reminded of this aspect of Anarcoma’s gender identity. This bodily marker of her femaleness serves not only to keep the visual representation of her gender identity fluid, but also to feature her breasts as a bodily site of social transgression. Mary Douglas discusses bodily boundaries and their ties to social boundaries:

      The relation of head to feet, of brain and sexual organs, of mouth and anus are commonly treated so that they express the relevant patterns of hierarchy. Consequently I now advance the hypothesis that bodily control is an expression of social control–abandonment of bodily control in ritual responds to the requirements of a social experience which is being expressed. Furthermore, there is little prospect of successfully imposing bodily control without the corresponding social forms.
       

      (70-71)

       

      So the bodily control that Anarcoma exerts through the hormone injections she uses to gain her breasts is not only a crossing of her own personal boundaries but also a symbolic subversion of societal controls over her body.28

      Even when wearing that favorite, masculine trench coat of hers, Anarcoma is often topless underneath, ready to shed the outward marker of masculinity and display her femaleness proudly. Most frequently, though, it is her style of dress that is the primary component of her performance of femininity, since she is often drawn in skimpy skirts, knee-high, high-heeled boots and fishnet stockings. Out with her (also transsexual) friend, the two window-shop for high heels and look at dress displays in a store window (the act of window shopping in itself can be considered feminine). They are, in a sense, looking at the articles of their artifice, seeking out the tools that will help them succeed in their gender performance. At the end of their day of shopping, they stop in a salon, a locus for bodily control: Anarcoma’s friend gets her legs waxed. All of these events taking place in the space of three panels convey the two characters’ quest for femininity. As Butler would no doubt remind us, though, if transsexuals search for femininity, it does not mean that gender construction and performance are exclusive to them. All women (like all men) perform their gender in part through outward displays of clothing and bodily control, as in Fig. 7 below:
       

       
      Anarcoma (55)  © 1988 Nazario & Ediciones La Cúpula, SL. Used by permission.

       

      Click for larger view

      Fig. 7.

      Anarcoma (55)

      © 1988 Nazario & Ediciones La Cúpula, SL. Used by permission.
       

       
      In another sequence, Anarcoma tries to get information out of a female associate of her nemesis, La Deisy. She takes advantage of the drunkenness of the woman to ply her for details regarding the location of a missing machine, and ultimately resorts to seducing the woman to further her quest. The scene is distinguished by the way it is presented visually. Despite the fact that the reader is well aware of Anarcoma’s sexual prowess and her “sizeable cock,” the sex between the two is visually coded as lesbian sex. They are first shown sitting fully clothed on the couch, conversing and flirting, and then in the following panel, La Deisy is shown lying down bare breasted while Anarcoma performs oral sex on her, while herself fully clothed. After the nakedness and the sex coded as either heterosexual or as sex between men that abounds in the comic, it is significant that Anarcoma is coded here as exclusively feminine, as lesbian. Perhaps it is an effort to resist traditional gender/sexual roles and avoid the expected sexual coupling of a male and a female, which might be the case if the detective were coded as more masculine here. Anarcoma does, after all, have no problem playing a more active, male coded sexual role when having sex with men. By resisting the more traditional expectations, and instead creating a panel that is coded as lesbian, Nazario maintains the tension that exists bodily in the character of Anarcoma and is reflected in her behavior.
       
      Anarcoma ties the transgressive body to the changing culture and spaces of Spain. Her body is a “corporeal . . . mapping of the subject into a cultural system”; as a metaphor, Anarcoma’s fluid body comments on the norms that had constricted Spanish culture under Franco and on the forces that sought to move Spain away from its rigid past (Bukatman 49). In a nation that wanted to leave its troubled past behind, Nazario creates Anarcoma. She is an uncommon, unexpected heroine who refuses to leave the “past” of her body behind, and instead forges her own way, a new way created from within spaces that facilitate this act of creation and re-creation. The negotiations she makes throughout the text emblematize the transition which was occurring around her and her readers. The city she moves through, Barcelona, provides her with the freedom to create her own path and to carve out her own identity. Her life and adventures highlight the negotiations (of space, of regional and national identities, etc.) that the country as a whole was grappling with. However, just as Spain’s future was uncertain when Anarcoma first appeared, so the text leaves many of the questions it raises intentionally unanswered. The result of the continual negotiations, back and forth migrations, and incomplete formations in Anarcoma is a text that centers on a detective who, by the end of the story, rather than solve a mystery outright, instead leaves the reader questioning, among other things, such ideas as the visual markers of gender, gender roles, and the constructedness of gender itself.
       

      Michael Harrison is Assistant Professor of Spanish at Monmouth College. He is currently working on a book project exploring the development of queer culture in Spain through an analysis of Spanish comics and graphic novels.

       

      Notes

       
      1. El Víbora was born out of the underground comics movement of the early 1970s in Spain, whose readers made up a wide swath of progressive minded Spaniards. Although not an exclusively gay magazine, El Víbora served an important role during the transition as the creative voice of a generation, gay or straight. Dopico notes this, saying “Marcada por su carácter alternativo, transgresor y provocador, su militancia y voluntarismo . . . la revista se convirtió en un soporte sólido y rentable para toda una generación de dibujantes españoles, que, con sus obras, llegaron a todas las capas culturales de la sociedad . . . En general, su temática insistía en el triángulo contracultural formado por el sexo, las drogas, y la violencia” ‘Marked by its alternative, transgressive and provocative character, its militancy and its volunteerism . . . the magazine became a solid and profitable support for an entire generation of Spanish artists, which, with whose works, reached all cultural levels of society . . . In general, its themes revolved around the countercultural triangle formed by sex, drugs and violence’ (320). El Víbora was definitely a successful comics magazine, and only a year after its first issue, had become the highest selling magazine sold in Spanish kiosks. Between 1982 and 1983, sales of the magazine were between 40,000 and 50,000 issues per month, and the estimated readership of the magazine was around 400,000 readers (which is likely much higher due to the frequent sharing of issues after being read), including university students, military battalions, prisoners, and local collectives (Dopico 333).

       

       
      2. For a detailed and vivid account of the underground culture of this period, including a wealth of collected images, documents and ephemera, see Nazario’s La Barcelona de los años 70 vista por Nazario y sus amigos.

       

       
      3. All translations of citations are mine. I have chosen “queer” as the translation of mariconeo, based on Nazario’s point, in the same interview, that the word queer in English means the same as maricón in Spanish (80).

       

       
      4. I use the feminine article and other feminine nouns when referring to Anarcoma throughout because Anarcoma chooses a feminine exterior presentation when out in public in the text, and that it is the standard pronoun used by other critics of the text.

       

       
      5. Comics, as a medium, is used with a singular verb. This has become standard practice with most current comics scholars. Scott McCloud’s definition of comics says it is “plural in form, used with a singular verb” (9).

       

       
      6. Doctor Niebla was a character from a comics series that first appeared in 1948, based on a series of crime novels by Rafael González, with images by Francisco Hidalgo. Hidalgo’s visual style is described as, “una asimilación del estilo estadunidense de la época clásica, y revestida de una atmósfera irreal, con oníricas viñetas en las que los personajes parecen congelados entre luces y sugestivas planificaciones, aunque sin abandonar el terreno realista de la serie negra” ‘an assimilation of the American style of the classic period, and covered with an unreal atmosphere, with dreamlike panels in which the characters seem to be frozen between lights and suggestive planning, although without abandoning the realistic territory of the noir series’ (Cuadrado 390). Doctor Niebla is considered by many to be one of the masterpieces of Spanish comics. A number of parallels can be made between Anarcoma and Doctor Niebla beyond the visual similarity of the covers below. Doctor Niebla is a mysterious figure whose identity is unknown and unfixed. Like Anarcoma, he is not a member of the established police force, but does work on the side of justice. The comic was also one of only a few that made specific references to current popular culture (Dashiell Hammett, the Andrews Sisters). “Las connotaciones . . . que se encuentran a lo largo de los guiones, confieren…a esta serie una calidad muy superior a lo que era habitual en la época” ‘The connotations . . . that are found throughout the scripts, confer . . . on this series a much superior quality than that which was habitual during the period’ (Vazquez de Parga 164).

       

       
      7. Gema Pérez-Sánchez has, however, questioned the subversive nature of Anarcoma. In examining a number of comics from this period in her study of gay representation, she ties the subversive power of specific comics magazines during the 1980s to their financing, and argues that capitalistic forces that privileged certain texts economically over others actually diminished the ability of those same texts to question systemic heteronorms precisely because many of the qualities of the comics made them more popular with (largely heterosexual, male) readers. She draws a comparison between the comics found in the government-funded magazine Madriz, including those by Ana Juan and Ana Miralles, and the private, more widely read El Víbora (which included Anarcoma), indicating in part that capitalistic forces at play in the popularity of publications like El Víbora required that “subversive rough edges be filed down,” resulting in a less significant criticism of normative forces (177). Pérez-Sánchez argues that El Víbora lacked a true subversive quality and that it often “appealed to a mainstream, conservative, middle-aged, heterosexual male readership” (178). Therefore, she indicates, Anarcoma is far from radical in its portrayal women or femininity, indicating that there is no “sense of feminist vindication” to be found in the pages of the comic (181). She sees Nazario’s presentation of hypervirility as continuing the traditional practices of previous periods, rather than breaking with them. While I do not disagree with her argument in a broader sense (the lack of positive female characters and the extreme violence are impossible to deny, and Nazario’s subversive representations of masculinity are much more concrete and complex than his treatment of femininity), the specific ways which the body of Anarcoma is presented, privileging the image over subject identity, and the ways which the detective moves through and interacts with her environment to construct new gay spaces are, in my estimation, significant to an understanding of the development of gay identity in Spain in the 1970s.

       

       
      8. Moreiras Menor explains, at length, the cultural shift that privileged spectacle and consumerism in cultural production as part of this move to a more postmodern aesthetic, while avoiding treatment of the political and social reality of the transition. She focuses on the 1980s as the period during which this trend was most pronounced, and analyzes texts from the 1980s to support her argument. I would contend that, as a text which appears just prior to the “boom” of the culture of spectacle linked to consumerism and superficiality, Anarcoma exhibits a few of the hallmarks of this trend (it is a mystery story, contains some over the top imagery, etc.), but does not fall squarely within this trend.

       

       
      9. Even within secret enclaves of progressive Spaniards such as the underground Spanish Communist Party, homosexuality was not acceptable. This required gays and lesbians to be both closeted in their political beliefs and closeted in their sexuality in their underground political groups. Eloy de la Iglesia’s 1978 film El diputado is a good example of the fact that homosexuality was not automatically accepted even by the most progressive political groups.

       

       
      10. This link between the image of the transsexual and the politico-social reality of Post-Franco Spain appears frequently in studies of this period. These ties appear both in a more direct correlation (see Perriam 157, Guasch 100-01), and as tied to a camp aesthetic (see Garlinger and Song 8, Valis 67-68, and Lev 240).

       

       
      11. Garlinger, for example, has said that there is a danger in using metaphors “to reify national identity,” because they are too specific-the complexity of a nation cannot be expressed in one body, and a gendered one at that. The “binary approach to transvestism is insufficient” and the point of drag is its ambiguous nature (367). This ambiguity has been discussed at length in the figure of Anarcoma, and perhaps it is the fact that Anarcoma does not conform to expected gender norms, and represents the fluidity of the two, that she makes a better metaphor than many of the more traditionally gendered ones that are prevalent during the transición.

       

       
      12. The foundation and development of the gay movement in Spain, which began in earnest in Barcelona, is well documented by Armand de Fluvià, one of the key figures in the movement, in his El movement gai a la clandestinitat del franquisme (1970-1975). In his testimonial, de Fluvià tracks the historical, political and cultural representations of homosexuality leading up to the 1970s, and highlights the importance of Barcelona to the movement by detailing the foundation of gay political organizations in the city such as MELH (Movimiento Español de Liberación Homosexual / Spanish Gay Liberation Movement). His detailed account clearly places Barcelona as ground zero for the nascent gay political movement, even before the end of the Franco dictatorship. These early gay political movements lay the groundwork for the demonstrations that were made possible during the transition to democracy. Óscar Guasch gives a sense of the climate that produced these demonstrations from a non-fictionalstandpoint (79-82); for a fictionalized account, see Fernàndez’s El anarquista desnudo.

       

       
      13. John Hooper discusses seny and arrauxment, saying, “There is no exact translation of seny. Perhaps the nearest equivalent is the northern English term ‘nous’ – good old common sense. Respect for seny makes the Catalans realistic, earnest, tolerant and at times a bit censorious.” He continues, quoting Victor Alba: “The opposite of seny is arrauxment: an ecstasy of violence” (406-07).

       

       
      14. Two examples directly related to this study illustrate this type of migration. Nazario himself migrated from Sevilla, as documented in San Nazario y Las Pirañas Incorruptas: Obra completa de Nazario de 1970 a 1980,(93-95), and Nazario’s good friend Ocaña describes a similar migration from Andalucía in Ventura Pons’s 1978 documentary film, Ocaña, Un retrato intermitente.

       

       
      15. I use “sexual citizenship” here to refer to the ways in which gays and lesbians participate in both the physical and discursive spaces of their communities, as has been explained by Binnie and Bell, among others. Their study The Sexual Citizen (2000) examines the many facets of sexual citizenship as it relates to the gay community.

       

       
      16. By “migrant sexual citizens” I mean the physical migrations of gay and lesbians away from the more intolerant villages and small towns to the cities mapped onto the concept of sexual citizenship. The physical migrations of these people resulted in a change of physical space and fostered the development of discursive queer spaces.

       

       
      17. By discussing spaces coded as gay, the non-gay spaces would be coded as such by contrast. A neutral space, for example, might be a bar frequented by a wide range of people who are, in general, open-minded (groups of artists, musicians, etc.), while a straight space would, in general, be one where expressions of homosexuality might be looked upon unfavorably. The sheer presence of Anarcoma in the bar, however, makes it unlikely that it would be coded as straight.

       

       
      18. The appearance of these fellow artists from the Barcelona scene of the day demonstrates the collaborative work that went on between artists such as Nazario, Onliyú, Ocaña, and others. Their work done for El Víbora often relied on their inspiring each other to push yet another creative envelope, and their cultural production, as seen here, is intertwined. In another example, Nazario is shown participating with Ocaña in one of his famous happenings in the Rambla of Barcelona in Ventura Pons’s film. The relation between these artists and the Barcelona scene is well documented in both Onliyú’s memoire, Memorias del underground barcelonés, which documents the early days of the collaboration of artists such as Nazario, Onliyú, Makoki, Mariscal, and Ceesepe, and Nazario’s La Barcelona de los años 70 vista por Nazario y sus amigos, which makes connections between the artist’s collaboration and the changes happening in Barcelona during the time, and takes the form of an album of sorts which collects, chronologically, the artistic events occurring during the 1970s and early 1980s in Barcelona.

       

       
      19. The religious order that is also present in the text as a foil to Anarcoma’s efforts, called “Los Caballeros de la Santa Orden de San Reprimonio” (“The Knights of the Holy Order of Saint Reprimonio”) is a slightly more abstract representation of this type of rigid societal control. The knights represent the church which, in concert with the military dictatorship, was the major force in the marginalizing of non-normative sexuality. The name of the order highlights the repression which abounded in Spain at the time.

       

       
      20. Eduardo Mendicutti’s Una mala noche la tiene cualquiera also makes similar connections between a transsexual protagonist and the very real fears of a return to dictatorship during the coups of 23 February, 1981.

       

       
      21. The Spanish adjective “emplumado” does not have a literal translation in this context. The phrase “tener pluma” to which this adjective refers means an inversion of traditionally accepted gender identity, such as femininity in men or masculinity in women. “Queer” comes close to approximating the meaning in that the presentation of unexpected masculinity or femininity is an outward sign of being different, or queer.

       

       
      22. This breaking of established norms in favor of newer, queer models is reflected in Anne Magnussen’s essay, “Spanish Comics and Family,” which examines the ways that Anarcoma reverses expectations of representations of family, marginalizing the heterosexual family unit and placing the transsexual community at the center. She describes the community as, “attractive or desirable to the people outside it. At the same time, it is represented as a social system in its own right defined according to norms, values, and power relations involving the same type of problems concerning work, love, sex, and friendship as conventional family life” (75). Once again, Magnussen helps underscore that Anarcoma queers the oppressive systems which had subjugated Spain under dictatorship, simultaneously questioning all norms (family, church) while vindicating previously marginalized groups.

       

       
      23. Bibi Andersen was a transsexual performer made famous by starring in a number of early films by Pedro Almodóvar.

       

       
      24. Pedro Pérez del Solar notes that Anarcoma’s name could be seen as similar to anarquía, or anarchy, connecting this concept to her own mode of gender expression (535).

       

       
      25. Moreiras Menor quotes Guy Debord to say that a society of spectacle is constructed under the sphere of “la afirmación de la apariencia y la afirmación de toda la vida social humana como mera apariencia” (“the affirmation of appearance and the affirmation of all human social life as mere appearance”) (72).

       

       
      26. The presence of transsexuals in other Spanish texts (both filmic and otherwise) supports this generalization of the transsexual on the road to full transition, beginning with Vicente Aranda’s 1977 film Cambio de sexo staring transsexual actress Bibi Andersen. A more modern example that shares some similarity with Anarcoma is the 2005 Ramón Salazar film 20 centímetros, in which a pre-operative transsexual prostitute is sought out by clients and romantic partners for her large endowment. However, unlike Anarcoma, she too is on the path to full transition.

       

       
      27. Here, when referring to the visual, bodily representation in the comic of sex organs (Anarcoma’s penis, breasts) I use the term maleness/femaleness. At certain points in the comic, the femaleness and maleness presented reinforce the performance of masculinity or femininity and at others it may contradict it. This interplay is crucial to my analysis of Anarcoma’s masculine and feminine performance and the constructedness of both gender and “sex.” The presentation of Anarcoma’s troubling of the “sex” binary contributes directly to the ways the reader is to understand the masculine/feminine performances she also enacts. As Butler explains, “The presuppositions that we make about sexed bodies, about them being one or the other, about the meanings that are said to inhere in them or to follow from being sexed in such a way are suddenly and significantly upset by those examples that fail to comply with the categories that naturalize and stabilize that field of bodies for us within the terms of cultural conventions. Hence, the strange, the incoherent, that which falls ‘outside,’ gives us a way of understanding the taken-for-granted world of sexual categorization as a constructed one, indeed, as one that might well be constructed differently” (140). Anarcoma falls “outside” these binaries, and so allows for this analysis.

       

       
      28. Additionally, the hormones that Anarcoma uses are themselves a product of science, and can be seen as an instrument of patriarchal bodily control over the female in traditional societal constructs. These hormones are typically prescribed to women to balance and control their biological femininity. Anarcoma, and countless other transsexuals, appropriate this instrument of bodily control for their own use, in effect removing the established agent of bodily control and appropriating agency in this process for themselves. Therefore, this act becomes not only one of bodily transgression, but one of transgression of broader societal norms of patriarchal control.
       

      Works Cited

         

       

      • Aliaga, Juan Vicente, and José Miguel G. Cortes. Identidad y diferencia: sobre la cultura gay en España. Barcelona: Editorial Gay y Lesbiana, 1997. Print.
      • Bell, David, and Jon Binnie. “Authenticating Queer Space: Citizenship, Urbanism and Governance.” Urban Studies 41.9 (August 2004): 1807-20. Print.
      • Binnie, Jon. “Quartering Sexualities: Gay Villages and Sexual Citizenship.” City of Quarters:Urban Villages in the Contemporary City. Eds. Bell, David and Mark Jayne. Hants, England: Ashgate, 2004. 163-72. Print.
      • Brooks, Peter. Body Work: Objects of Desire in Modern Narrative. Cambridge: Harvard UP, 1993. Print.
      • Bukatman, Scott. “X-Bodies: The Torment of the Mutant Superhero (1994).” Matters of Gravity: Special Effects and Supermen in the 20th Century. Durham: Duke UP, 2003. 48-78. Print.
      • Butler, Judith. Gender Trouble. New York: Routledge, 1999. Print.
      • Chisholm, Dianne. Queer Constellations: Subcultural Space in the Wake of the City. Minneapolis: U of Minnesota P, 2005. Print.
      • Coma, Javier. Historia de los comics. Vol. 2: La Expansión Internacional. Barcelona: Toutain, 1982. Print.
      • Cuadrado, Jesús. De la historieta y su uso, 1873-2000. Madrid: Sinsentido, 2000. Print.
      • De Fluvià, Armand. El moviment gai a la clandestinitat del franquisme (1970-1975). Barcelona: Laertes, 2003. Print.
      • Dopico, Pablo. El cómic underground español, 1970-1980. Madrid: Cátedra, 2005. Print.
      • Douglas, Mary. Natural Symbols, Explorations in Cosmology. New York: Pantheon, 1982. Print.
      • Fernàndez, Lluís. El anarquista desnudo. Barcelona: Anagrama, 1979. Print.
      • Garlinger, Patrick Paul. “Dragging Spain into the ‘Post-Franco’ Era: Transvestism and National Identity in Una mala noche la tiene cualquiera.” Revista Canadiense de Estudios Hispánicos 24.2 (2000): 363-82. Print.
      • Garlinger, Patrick Paul, and H. Rosi Song. “Camp: What’s Spain Got To Do With It?” Journal of Spanish Cultural Studies 5.1 (2004): 3-12. Print.
      • Guasch, Oscar. La sociedad rosa. Barcelona: Anagrama, 1991. Print.
      • Hooper, John. The New Spaniards. London: Penguin Books, 1995. Print.
      • Kaur Puar, Jasbir, Dereka Rushbrook, and Louisa Schein. “Sexuality and Space: Queering Geographies of Globalization.” Environment and Planning D: Society and Space 21 (2003): 383-87. Print.
      • Knopp, Larry, and Michael Brown. “Queer Diffusions.” Environment and Planning D: Society and Space 21 (2003): 409-24. Print.
      • Lev, Leora. “Refractions of Queer Iberia: Post-Francoist Peninsular Camp.” Corónica: A Journal of Medieval Spanish Language and Literature 30.1 (2001): 239-43. Print.
      • Magnussen, Anne. “Spanish Comics and Family.” International Journal of Comic Art 5.2 (2003): 66-84. Print.
      • McCloud, Scott. Understanding Comics: The Invisible Art. New York: HarperCollins, 1993. Print.
      • Mendicutti, Eduardo. Una mala noche la tiene cualquiera. Barcelona: Tusquets, 1988. Print.
      • Mira, Alberto. De Sodoma a Chueca: Una historia cultural de la homosexualidad en España en el siglo XX. Barcelona: Egales, 2004. Print.
      • Moreiras Menor, Cristina. Cultura herida: Literatura y cine en la España democrática. Madrid: Ediciones Libertarias, 2002. Print.
      • Nazario. Anarcoma. Barcelona: Ediciones La Cúpula, 1983. Print.
      • —. La Barcelona de los años 70 vista por Nazario y sus amigos. Barcelona: Ellago Ediciones, 2004. Print.
      • —. “Disección del suicidio cotidiano de un santo gay que quería ser mártir.” Del fanzine al manga yaoi: lesbianes, gais i transsexuals al còmic. Eds. Acebrón, Julián and Ana Merino. Lleida: Ajuntament de Lleida, 2005. 55-57. Print.
      • —. San Nazario y Las Pirañas Incorruptas: Obra completa de Nazario de 1970 a 1980. Barcelona: Ediciones La Cúpula, 2001. Print.
      • Pérez del Solar, Pedro. “Images of the Desencanto: Spanish Comics, 1979-1986.” Dissertation. Princeton U, 2000. Print.
      • Pérez-Sánchez, Gema. Queer Transitions in Contemporary Spanish Culture: From Franco to la Movida. Albany, NY: SUNY Press, 2007. Print.
      • Perriam, Chris. “Not Writing Straight, but Not Writing Queer: Popular Castilian ‘Gay’ Fiction.” Constructing Identity in Contemporary Spain: Theoretical Debates and Cultural Practices. Ed. Labanyi, Jo. New York: Oxford UP, 2002. 154-69. Print.
      • Valis, Noël M. “The Cursilería of Camp in Ana Rossetti’s Plumas de España.” Journal of Spanish Cultural Studies 5.1 (2004): 67-81. Print.
      • Vazquez de Parga, Salvador. Los cómics del franquismo. Barcelona: Planeta, 1980. Print.
      • Vernon, Kathleen M., and Barbara Morris, eds. Post-Franco, Postmodern: The Films of Pedro Almodóvar. Westport, Conn.: Greenwood P, 1995. Print.
      • Vilarós, Teresa M. El mono del desencanto: Una crítica cultural de la transición española (1973-1993). Madrid: Siglo XXI, 1998. Print.

       

    • Self-Portrait in a Context Mirror: Pain and Quotation in the Conceptual Writing of Craig Dworkin

      Paul Stephens (bio)
      Emory University
      ps249@columbia.edu

      Abstract
       
      This essay explores the role of quotation in the writing of the poet-critic Craig Dworkin. Dworkin’s “Dure,” an ekphrastic prose poem concerning a Dürer self-portrait, is a complex meditation on selfhood, the representation of pain, and the nature of linguistic appropriation. “Dure” demonstrates that an appropriative, heavily quotational poetics can enact a process of therapeutic self-critique. To the postauthorial (and posthistorical) malaise of Barthes’s “the text is a tissue of quotations,” Dworkin responds with a self-portrait in a tissue of quotations, enacting a writing cure, or a writing-through cure. Extensively quotational works are often associated with parody and satire—but such works, this essay suggests, can also be sincere in intent, and can mourn, as well as heal, by thematizing intersubjectivity. Although Dworkin elsewhere advocates a poetics “of intellect rather than emotion,” this essay claims that “Dure” enacts something along the lines of a return to expressive autobiography, somewhat paradoxically by way of a poetics of citationality.

       

       

       

      Quotation marks ticked through the body of the text like sutures arched in stitches that will scar.
       
      But if a scar is always a citation, are citations, themselves, always scars?
       

      –Craig Dworkin, “Dure,” Strand (79)

       

      A picture is a tissue of quotations drawn from the innumerable centers of culture.
       

      –Sherrie Levine, “Statement” (1039)

       

      “I have given a name to my pain and call it ‘dog,’” announces Nietzsche in a brilliantly magisterial pretense of having at last gained the upper hand . . . . In the isolation of pain, even the most uncompromising advocate of individualism might suddenly prefer a realm populated by companions.
       

      –Elaine Scarry, The Body in Pain (11)

       
      “All minds quote,” as the supremely quotable Ralph Waldo Emerson would have it–and yet not all minds quote alike at all times (“Quotation” 178). Pastiche, quotation, montage, and sampling have been taken as paradigmatic gestures of the contemporary period: of the postmodern, of the information age, or of the belated era of “the end of art.”1 This essay explores quotation and citationality in the writing of poet-critic Craig Dworkin. Dworkin’s “Dure,” I argue, demonstrates that an appropriative, heavily quotational poetics can enact a process of therapeutic self-critique.2 An ekphrastic prose poem about a Dürer self-portrait, “Dure” is a complex meditation on selfhood, the representation of pain, and the nature of linguistic appropriation. “Dure” operates by continually drawing attention to the discursive parameters by which we articulate pain. Roughly a third of “Dure” consists of direct quotation. In response to the postauthorial (and posthistorical) malaise of Barthes’s the “text is a tissue of quotations” (104), Dworkin offers a self-portrait in a tissue of quotations, enacting a writing cure, or a writing-through cure. Extensively quotational works are often associated with parody and satire–but such works, this essay suggests, can also mourn, as well as heal, by thematizing intersubjectivity, or in Scarry’s terms, by creating “a realm populated by companions” (11). Although Dworkin elsewhere advocates a poetics “of intellect rather than emotion” (“Introduction”), I suggest that “Dure” enacts something along the lines of a return to expressive autobiography, somewhat paradoxically by way of a poetics of citationality.
       
      The term citationality, in the sense that I am using it here, is taken from Judith Butler’s Bodies that Matter (Butler derives it from Derrida’s critique of Searle). In updating the theory of performativity outlined in Gender Trouble, Butler argues that
       

      The forming, crafting, bearing, circulation, signification of [the] sexed body will not be a set of actions performed in compliance with the law; on the contrary, they will be a set of actions mobilized by the law, the citational accumulation and dissimulation of the law. . . .
       
      Performativity is thus not a singular “act,” for it is always a reiteration of a norm or set of norms, and to the extent that it acquires an act-like status in the present, it conceals or dissimulates the conventions of which it is a repetition. Moreover, this act is not primarily theatrical.
       

      (12)

       

      For Butler, to think of performativity as citational is “directly counter to any notion of a voluntarist subject who exists quite apart from the regulatory norms which she/he opposes” (15). Adapting Butler’s notion of citationality, I suggest that in “Dure” Dworkin blends citation and direct expression in order to negotiate “the lyrical interference of the individual as ego” (in Charles Olson’s influential formulation) (247). That subjectivity is citational is not necessarily a state of affairs to be lamented–rather, any informed self-analysis must take into account a subject who is both a product and a producer of a citational performativity. A scar, in other words, is not only the site of a wound, it is also a site (or a citation) of healing.

       

      For over a decade, in books, articles, and edited collections, Dworkin has undertaken an extensive critical and poetic project which investigates the limits of representation in language. Dworkin’s dissertation, “Reading the Illegible,” includes an unusual table of contents that was later removed from the Northwestern University Press book version. The page is centrally indicative of Dworkin’s larger ongoing critical project, and of his call for a “radical formalism”:
       

      Table of Contents
       
      Introduction iii-xix
       
      Chapter One 1-35
       
      In which a great deal of drinking precedes a long sleepless night and our hero’s rather rude awakening among vandals, pirates, and a number of penguins.
       
      Chapter Two 36-55
       
      Wherein our hero becomes lost in the woods and narrowly survives a whole host of parasites only to discover that betrayal is the very precondition of love.
       
      Chapter Three 56-93
       
      In the course of which a great many secrets are revealed concerning things human and inhuman, and during which our hero, finding himself up against the wall, sees red.
       
      Chapter Four 94-148
       
      Wherein our hero’s wanderings are cut short when gambling debts are unexpectedly called in, and he returns home only to find all of the letters torn open and read (confirming the cogency of his paranoia).
       
      Chapter Five 149-166
       
      In which articles of history and autumn greet the dawn and we conclude by looking back on the future looking toward its past.
       
      Appendices:
       
      Notes 167-208
       
      Bibliography 209-221 (ii)

       

      At first glance, one might dismiss this table of contents as an academic joke that plays on the oxymoronic title of the work in question. Strictly speaking, it should be impossible to read the illegible, unless we redefine our criteria for legibility–which is what the dissertation asks us to do with regard to modernist and avant-garde texts that defy traditional literary critical methods. The table of contents, although legible, is inscrutable in its presentation of an evasive pseudo-biography. Consider some complicating factors in our reading of this (auto?) biography: Why should it be about “our hero”? To what extent is an academic dissertation a form that specifically precludes biography, and yet selectively encourages certain biographical paratexts like acknowledgements and dedications? A dissertation is framed by the protocols of an institution, in this case the University of California, Berkeley, and as such, a dissertation is a formal document confirming the attainment of a certain degree of learning. But there can be an uneasy relation between valid research and the merely personal interests of a given dissertant. Dworkin’s table of contents can be said to offer a reader more information than a more conventional contents page. Yet the biographical dimension of Dworkin’s contents page is deceptive: The protagonist of the table of contents is not in fact an “I,” but is instead referred to as “our hero.” This immediately begs the question: Who are we?–those who read dissertations?3 Perhaps the implication is that literary history is an elaborate form of hero worship.

       
      I propose we read the contents page as a test case for the limits of literary and scholarly representation, as an instance of “conceptual writing,” a movement in which Dworkin is a leading avatar. Within the prescribed form of the academic dissertation, Dworkin’s contents page aspires as an initial gesture to make method (literary historical scholarship) conform more closely to subject matter (avant-garde writing). Like much of the art produced under the rubric of Conceptualism since the late 1960s, Dworkin’s writing exposes the institutional conditions that make art and literature possible, or in Dworkin’s terms, legible. Conceptual writing attempts to counter the excesses of a romantic “lyric ego” by reformulating our notions of the autobiographical and the personal. In his introduction to The UbuWeb: Anthology of Conceptual Writing, Dworkin asks, “what would a non-expressive poetry look like? A poetry of intellect rather than emotion? One in which the substitutions at the heart of metaphor and image were replaced by the direct presentation of language itself.” The “direct presentation of language itself” might be an impossible goal of conceptual writing–but self-reflexively pointing to the positionality of the writer might be a step toward the “direct presentation” of criticism itself. Perhaps the table of contents is asking: What would a more expressive criticism look like?
       
      In his book, Reading the Illegible, Dworkin does not mention his dissertation’s table of contents, but he does discuss the restrictive parameters of the dissertation as a form, and suggests that an academic monograph has a different set of constraints, which are likewise antithetical to the spirit of his critical project. Dworkin claims that “this present work, written beyond the strictures of a graduate division, is nevertheless–and necessarily–at heart a betrayal of the very values for which it argues” (xvii-iii). If this claim sounds hyperbolic, consider what Dworkin claims the book’s overall argument to be:
       

      In short, the basic thesis of this book is INSERT DESCRIPTION - inline graphic.
       

      (xviii)

       

      To paraphrase liberally, this “basic thesis” presents a complex conundrum for literary criticism: How does one produce secondary criticism that resists assigning reductive meanings to polyvalent primary texts whose meanings cannot easily be paraphrased or instrumentalized–texts whose meanings might literally be not just overdetermined, but overwritten? Dworkin’s answer is to make criticism play a part in preserving the complexity of the texts it analyzes, and to some extent, retroactively fashions and endorses. “I have written this book with a firm belief that even critical writing can be a productive experiment,” he maintains (Reading xix). In the introduction to Reading the Illegible, Dworkin describes his project as a “confession,” but he does so (as he does in “Dure”) by means of a quotation from Robert Smithson: “And so what follows is also a confession of sorts. ‘[Art] Critics are generally poets who have betrayed their art, and instead have tried to turn art into a matter of reasoned discourse, and, occasionally, when their ‘truth’ breaks down, they resort to a [poetic] quote’” (xviii). The irony would be that Dworkin–as a poet writing criticism resorting to quotation in order to bolster a “reasoned discourse”–is undertaking precisely the kind of betrayal about which Smithson complains in the quote to which Dworkin resorts. An added irony is that Smithson places “truth” in quotations, making “truth” a quotation within a quotation. If this is “a confession of sorts,” it takes a strange form: not a first-person utterance, but rather something like an interruption of the self undertaken by an absent authority. Smithson, in this context, could be an offstage “hero” haunting the book. A repressed expressivity would seem to be surfacing in order to make the case for a criticism more up to the task of responding to poetries which question the underlying conditions of literary expression altogether.

       
      If a “non-expressive” poetry were possible, Dworkin’s recent book Parse might be about as close as one could get to the mark. Parse, its author tells us in a postscriptorial “Note,” is a “translation of Edwin A. Abbot’s [1874] How to Parse: An Attempt to Apply the Principles of Scholarship to English Grammar” (289).4 Rather than translating from one language to another, Dworkin translates every word into its part of speech and every mark of punctuation into its verbal form. Thus the opening:
       

      ADVERB PREPOSITION OF THE
       
      INFINITIVE ACTIVE INDEFINITE PRESENT
       
      TENSE TRANSITIVE VERB INFINITIVE
       
      MOOD OBJECT AND SUBJECT IMPLIED
       
      USED AS A NOUN PERIOD Plural Noun
       
      copulative conjunction Plural Noun preposition
       

      (Parse 12)

       

      This kind of writing poses a number of problems related to philosophy of language: How does one choose how to translate a word into its categorical description? Why isn’t “OF,” for instance, translated as “PREPOSITION”? Why shouldn’t a period be represented by its mark rather than by its word? Can one “write through” (in the John Cage sense) a book which itself attempts to schematize language? Is Parse simply a grammar book turned inside out, or is it an original poem? Dworkin offers a bodily metaphor for his undertaking, describing Parse as an attempt “to get inside the skeleton of language” (“Interview”). One message of this kind of writing, according to an interview with the author, is that “the most seemingly sterile procedural, coldly conceptual work shows people that you never get away from a writing subject’s embeddedness in history, which is to say you never get away from politics” (Dworkin, “Interview”). Another message is that the “writing subject” also never gets away from embodiment. To think of language as a body politic, or rather a body linguistic or a body poetic, is to recognize that the “writing subject” is marked at every turn by quotation. Parse would presume to be a complete translation, and yet the text is full of clinamen, as for instance in this passage:

       

      adverb semicolon marks of quotation but in “I say his body, thrown on one side and frightfully mangled,” the meaning might be, either “when it was being thrown,” or “after it had thrown,” or “after it had been thrown,” and you cannot tell which is meant without carefully looking at the whole of the passage.
       
      In other words, a Passive Participle, e.g. “shot,” may stand for “being shot,” or, “having been shot.”
       

      (149)

       

      One must indeed look carefully “at the whole of the passage.” The quotation marks allow Dworkin to depart from his method and introduce a “frightfully mangled” body? Why weren’t “I,” “say,” “his,” and “body” replaced by their appropriate parts of speech? Dworkin’s “translation” takes an expressive turn. With very little tinkering, he interjects a kind of verbal violence into Parse. Perhaps the book’s epigraph from Stendhal gives us a clue as to the source of this violence:

       

      Le comte Altamira me racontait que, la veille de sa mort, Danton disait avec sa grosse voix: “C’est singulier, le verbe guillotiner ne peut pas se conjuguer dans tous ses temps, on peut bien dire: je serai guillotiné, tu seras guillotiné, mais on ne dit pas: J’ai été guillotiné.”
       

      (9)5

       

      The guillotine represents absolute death, but absolute death cannot be described by Danton, or by anyone else–especially after the fact. Grammar is a logical system for the organization of language, in which certain formations cannot be tolerated. To adapt Wittgenstein’s famous phrase, the limits of my language are the limits of my pain.

       
      Parse is replete with slippages which suggest that the book is not a mechanistic exercise that would altogether deny referential meaning or creative agency. Once a set of procedures has been put in place, the book would seemingly translate itself, but this is not the case. The book plays upon a notion of self-translation: “[T]his newly parsed chapter has panoptically analyzed itself” (199). But this is (of course) an impossibility: this moment of self-analysis can only be produced by a deviation from the protocols of the translation, and a panopticon requires both a viewer and a viewed. Toward the end of Parse, Dworkin seems to push harder against something like a fourth wall of representation, suggesting that perhaps the text has begun to control him:
       

      Preparatory Subject Already Intimating The Exhausted Author Be Exempted From The Task Of Further Arduous Labor model auxiliary of further exculpatory transitive verb of a hedging distance now so far slipped from the true subject that the alibied author cannot help but be excused for be being too enervated to carry out yet another full analysis of straw of adverbial vertebral catastrophic dromedarian failure preposition of the infinitive infinitive verb of half-heartedly wrist-flicked broad-brushed partial exposition em dash.
       

      (216)

       

      The paragraph is framed by what seem like procedural translations of punctuation or parts of speech–“Preparatory Subject” and “em dash”–and yet the passage can only be read as a confessional deviation from the project of translation. After several hundred pages of parts of speech, the inattentive reader (or skimmer) would likely pass over this description of the author’s exhaustion. Pain might be too strong a word for the authorial exhaustion described here; nonetheless, we have an “alibied author” who seems to have been betrayed by the enervating project he has undertaken. The project itself has perhaps been betrayed by the “alibied author” who has had to emerge from his “hedging distance.” Dworkin’s metaphors for language are again bodily: “an adverbial vertebral catastrophic dromedarian failure” seems to indicate that the camel’s back of language has been broken. The attempt to translate has resulted in a subjective catachresis in the carrying across of meaning.

       
      Parse has recently been described by Vanessa Place and Robert Fitterman as “an example of neo-constructivist sobjectivity” (39). By their neologism “sobjectivity,” Place and Fitterman mean to suggest that “Objectivity is old-fashioned, subjectivity idem” and that “The Sobject exists in a perpetual substantive eclipse: more s/object by turns and degrees” (38). Place and Fitterman’s discussion bears the influence of Lyn Hejinian in particular, who writes in My Life: “Both subjectivity and objectivity are outdated filling systems” (141). Dworkin preserves the filing system of How to Parse, but he empties it of its original content, removing Abbott’s original filling. Place, Fitterman, and Hejinian all describe an embodied subject that both fills spaces and files memories, merging form and content, and yet this “sobject” remains discontented. For Place and Fitterman, “The Sobject is the properly melancholic contemporary entity” (38). The term “sobject” cleverly both highlights and elides subject/object relations, and as such is well suited to describing Parse–although “sobject” is perhaps too flippant a term to describe the more directly self-referential “Dure.”
       
      Another of Dworkin’s poems, “Legion,” draws upon the Minnesota Multiphasic Personality Inventory of 1942, and in so doing, I suggest, presents a critique of institutionalized measures of pain. The text of the poem is derived from the true/false questions of the test. “Legion” begins:
       

      Once in a while I think of things too bad to talk about. Bad words, often terrible words, come into my mind and I cannot get rid of them. I am bothered by acid stomach several times a week. I am likely not to speak to people until they speak to me. Often I cross the street in order not to meet someone else. I am often sorry because I am so cross and grouchy.
       

      (Strand 46)

       

      The poem goes on in this manner for fourteen pages. In its proceduralism, the poem presents a paradox. It is entirely a found text, and yet it is almost entirely a found text of personal statements, none of which can be specifically attributed to the first-person feelings of Dworkin-as-author. The title of “Legion” also suggests a critique of a singular “I.” Dworkin’s “Legion (II)” responds to the argument of “Legion.” In a brief note, Dworkin tells the story of the poem’s origin:

       

      “Legion (II)” is a response to my poem, which formerly appeared on this site [UbuWeb]. That original poem was composed by rearranging and recontextualizing the true/false questions of the Minnesota Multiphasic Personality Inventory as if they were declarative confessional statements from a lyric subject–part of a poetic monologue rather than a forensic instrument. Although the 1942 Inventory has been widely discredited and is no longer published, distributed or supported, the corporation that licenses the exam feels that “Legion” violates copyright. On the contrary, “Legion” is almost certainly a “fair use” of its source text … however, it has been removed from this site as a courtesy.
       

      (“Legion (II)”)

       

      In place of the original “Legion” on UbuWeb, Dworkin published “Legion (II),” which consists of the answers to the “original” questions. The corresponding opening to the follow-up begins: “True. True, yes: buoy, aureole, eutrapalia. No. Probably not. No” (“Legion (II)” 3). While the original Legion advertises itself as being “composed by rearranging and recontextualizing,” “Legion (II)” is not composed of quotations, but (seemingly) of the author’s literal responses to the questions posed by the Personal Inventory. Which poem can we say is more original, “Legion (I)” or “(II)”? Or more personal? Or more sincere? Arguably the project of “Legion” places in doubt what we mean by “declarative confessional statements” (“Legion (II)”).

       

      If Parse and “Legion” obliquely, but perhaps centrally, address the unrepresentability of pain, “Dure” goes further to represent the relation of the pain of others to the author’s own pain. “Dure,” like John Ashbery’s “Self-Portrait in a Convex Mirror,” is a self-portrait within a self-portrait. Whereas Ashbery chooses to reflect upon a well-known Parmigianino portrait, Dworkin chooses a Dürer portrait that is not only obscure, but lost. Like Klee’s Angelus Novus (owned by Walter Benjamin and made famous in “Theses on the Philosophy of History”), the Dürer portrait was lost in the Second World War, and can now only be viewed as a grainy black and white photograph (see Fig. 1 below).6 The picture itself is, in a sense, a subject of traumatic experience. It cannot say for itself, “J’ai été perdu.” More importantly for Dworkin’s purposes, the back story of the picture has been lost. The intended audience (a physician?) of the portrait will never be known, nor will it ever be known what the figure in the portrait is pointing at (the spleen?).
       

       
      Albrecht Dürer, "Self-Portrait" ca. 1519.

       

      Click for larger view

      Fig. 1.

      Albrecht Dürer, “Self-Portrait” ca. 1519.

       

       
      “Dure” consists of 28 interconnected paragraph sections from which it is difficult to quote selectively. Each section is peppered with quotations which are cited in the “Sources” apparatus that follows the body of the text. As I am centrally interested in the poem’s structure and in its documentary apparatus, it is best to quote in full both the first section and the notes that correspond to it:
       

      “–sb1 1. A crag, [now] obs.” A fragment (of course); a cinder (of slag). Or “shy, afraid.” This ender day. Rendered as: do to, admit them, to dare. Curative, tackle, tined. This remains, and bears, in India ink, under watercolor wash, over stains on unlaid paper: Do der gelb fleck ist und mit dem finger drawff dewt do ist mir we. Why write this? “Where the yellow spot is and where I am pointing with my finger, that is where it hurts.” Dead letter, tour, a dearth. Unsigned, accessioned with a circle stamped shield and key to the Bremen Kunstverein, the drawing has not been seen since the end of the second world war. As if it were the emblem of another legend: ubi manus, ibi dolor.
       

      (Strand 75)

       

      This passage presents a considerable array of critical puzzles. But before addressing those problems, here are the corresponding “Sources”:

       

      “Crag” and “shy, afraid.” The Oxford English Dictionary, Second Edition, prepared by J.A. Simpson and E.S.C. Weiner (Oxford: Clarendon Press, 1989), Volume XIV, 584. On fear as the subject of self portraiture, see Jacques Derrida, Mémoires d’aveugle: l’autoportrait et autres ruines (Paris: Éditions de la Rèunion des musèes nationaux, 1990), Translated by Pascale-Anne Brault and Micahel [sic] Naas as Memoirs of the Blind: The Self-Portrait and Other Ruins (Chicago: U. of Chicago Press, 1993): 70.
       
      “Do der gelb fleck [where the yellow spot]….” Albrecht Dürer, drawing, 11.8 x 10.8 cm, 1519 [?]. Catalogued as Winkler 482. Formerly Kunsthalle Bremen.
       
      Ubi manus ibi dolor. Inscription on bronze table-fountain statue of Venus, anonymous sculptor, 1520s. Formerly Nürnberg, now Museo Nazional, Florence. Compare with the proverbs ubi amor, ibi dolor, and ubi dolor, ibi digitus.
       

      (Strand 103)

       

      While these notes provide crucial information about the poem’s sources, they are far from conventional scholarly notes, and they may pose as many questions as they solve. To go back to the beginning: What does an obsolete meaning of the word “crag” have to do with this Dürer self-portrait? “Crag” is only one letter shy of the author’s first name: is he thus alerting us to his own shyness as a way of opening on to the scene of writing? Is the author himself a “fragment”? But why “[a] fragment (of course)”? This phrase is supposedly derived from the OED; consulting the OED, however, raises more questions. “Crag” did once have the variant spelling “Craig.” But among the many definitions of the noun form–including the expected “[a] steep of precipitous rock” as well as the perhaps not so expected “neck” or “lean scraggy person”–there is no “A fragment,” much less “A fragment (of course).” If that weren’t enough, the formulation “[now] obs.” would seem to be something of a redundancy or pleonasm, which I cannot find in the OED. Nor can I find a link between “a cinder (of slag)” and the word “crag.” And how can “shy, afraid” be conflated into a single definition? “This ender day,” which follows these fanciful dictionary definitions, at least can be traced to a source, John Gower’s Confessio Amantis from 1390. But “This ender day” is not in quotations.

       
      Dworkin in fact reveals the source of most of his quotations: page 584 of volume XIV of the OED, on which we find the word “scar.” Dworkin conceals his meaning (or the source of his meaning) in plain sight. Like the Dürer portrait, the poem points to a scar whose origin has been obscured. In the poem’s first few lines, the reader is confronted with a range of overdetermined textual possibilities. Definition and etymology only seem to complicate matters. Is the subject of the poem its author’s scar or the scar of the Dürer self-portrait? It is (of course) both and neither. Consider the title of the poem (for which a note would be most helpful!): the OED records “dure” as an archaic noun meaning “hard” and as an archaic verb meaning “1. intr. To last, continue in existence. arch. 2. To persist, ‘hold out’ in action; to continue in a certain state, condition, or place. Obs. 3. To continue or extend onward in space. Obs. 4. trans. To sustain, undergo, bear (pain, opposition, etc); to endure. Obs.” Perhaps we are getting closer to the subject, or at least the titular subject, of the poem: this is a poem about the hardness of locating, enduring, and communicating pain.
       
      The poem, moreover, “undertakes to represent itself” (17) in Foucault’s terms–the poem is the scar, at the same time that the poem acknowledges that it can never represent Dürer’s or the poet’s “actual” scar. Like Velazquez’s Las Meninas, “Dure” is an exploration of a subject that recedes from view. The poem can thus be read as a disavowal of itself. Foucault maintains that Las Meninas presents “an essential void” of the subject who has disappeared along with the canons of classical representation (18). Dworkin, I think, has a slightly different end in mind: something like a return of the subject through history and lived experience. This return of the subject can be read as a response to the postwar avant-garde’s most severe prohibitions on “the lyrical ego”–but this return of the subject can be interpreted in other ways as well: as a response to the high modernist use (and abuse) of quotation; as a new hybrid poetic mode; or (as I am primarily reading the poem here) as an investigation of conditions for the articulation of pain. Dworkin gets to the crux of the problem when he interjects “Why write this?” between the German and English renderings of the text of the self-portrait (Strand 75). The italicized this is a kind of tear in the referential system through which the author points his finger.
       
      Immediately following the dubious citations from the OED, Dworkin’s first reference is to Derrida’s Memoirs of the Blind, from which he has not in fact quoted. Memoirs nonetheless contains striking parallels to “Dure,” and one can describe “Dure” as haunted by specters of Derrida (although the poem was published prior to Derrida’s death). Memoirs begins with a mock self-interview, the opening line of which is: “Do you believe this?” There is no italicization to this, but the parallel to “Dure” is clear. The mock interviewer or analyst of Memoirs probes further, and it is revealed that what he [Derrida] most “fear[s] is the monocular vision of things” (1). Derrida equates self-portraiture with blindness, and dialogue with sight–suggesting that we cannot see ourselves other than for a fleeting instant, and that in this we see our own ruin, as well as the ruin of all that we know. Only through loving the other can we overcome “the monocular vision of things”:
       

      Ruin is the self-portrait, this face looked at in the face as the memory of itself, what remains or returns as a specter from the moment one first looks at oneself and a figuration is eclipsed. The figure, the face, then sees its visibility being eaten away; it loses its integrity without disintegrating. . . .
       
      Whence the love of ruins. And the fact that the scopic pulsion, voyeurism itself, is always on the lookout for the originary ruin. A narcissistic melancholy, a memory–in mourning–of love itself. How to love anything other than the possibility of ruin?
       

       

      The fearful moment is one of gazing upon ourselves narcissistically. But it is also, in Freudian terms, a moment in which we might shift from the limitlessness of melancholy toward a more manageable state of mourning. Derrida describes the self-portrait as the very image of

       

      mourning and melancholy, the specter of the instant [stigme] and of the stylus, whose very point would like to touch the blind point of the gaze that looks itself in the eyes and is not far from sinking into those eyes, right up to the point of losing its sight through an excess of lucidity. An Augenblick without duration, “during” which, however, the draftsman feigns to stare at the center of the blind spot. Even if nothing happens, if no event takes place, the signatory blinds himself to the rest of the world.
       

      (69)

       

      It is here that Derrida and Dworkin seem most closely to cross paths. One might even go so far as to suggest that this moment “without duration, ‘during’” which the artist purports to represent himself, is the subject of Dworkin’s reflection on pain. (That Derrida places “during” in scare quotes would seem to heighten the appropriative resonance.) “The blind spot” which Derrida evokes is eerily similar to the “yellow spot” pointed at by the figure in the self-portrait. The object of “Dure” then would be to create an index of pain–to make us literally feel (through the index finger) and see (through language) the absent pain of the blind subject who presumably cannot sign his own name -which in Derridean terms would suggest that the blind self-portraitist cannot be fixed as a proper name within a system of signification. The self-portraitist’s pain cannot, so to speak, dure in the sense of remaining lastingly present to himself or to a viewer. The self-portraitist cannot en-dure this unrepresentability of pain; like Milton’s semi-autobiographical Samson, he is self-blinded.

       
      Throughout “Dure,” Dworkin intersperses strictly factual paraphrase with densely gnomic poetic utterances, as in the second section:
       

      The assumption is that Dürer drew it for a consultation with a foreign physician: the page examined, and passed, through the post. Aphetic, fr. Port. “A mark or trace indicating a point of attachment, of some structure that has been rem—.” Oval, ascher, chalk, a nerre. Embers, as cendres, rose, and caught her eyes. “All under the influence of the verb. Meaning a letting go, and via the home.
       

      (Strand 76)

       

      Beginning straightforwardly, this section seems to disintegrate. Once again, the source notes refer us to the OED, and again the definition quoted proves elusive. Dworkin seems to define “Aphetic,” but the OED defines it as “Pertaining to, or resulting from, aphesis,” which is “The gradual and unintentional loss of a short unaccented vowel at the beginning of a word; as in squire for esquire.” Etymologically, “aphetic” does not derive from Portuguese but from the Greek apheta, “the giver of life in a nativity.” When we consult page 584 of the OED we find as another definition of scar: “A mark or trace indicating the point of attachment of some structure that has been removed.” For this reader at least, “rem–“immediately calls to mind “remembered.” Removed, indeed. Rather than word preceding definition, in “Dure” definition seems to precede word. If Dworkin’s raiding of the dictionary is a characteristically Oulipian procedure, it should be noted that Dworkin’s constraints are less programmatic, and that he seems ready to relinquish constraints in order to convey indirect meaning–or perhaps to mirror meaning. As an example of this mirroring of meaning: According to the OED, there was in fact an aphetic version of “scar,” “escara,” which was used in Spanish and Portuguese. Aphesis is also uncannily close to its opposite, “apocope,” in meaning–apocope being the “cutting off or omission of the last letter or syllable of a word.” The word “escara” is aphectically amputated to become “scar”; likewise the proper name “Dürer” is apocopically amputated to become “Dure.” Dworkin’s rendering elides much of this information in a performative erasure. The descriptive act becomes figured not only as reductive, but as amputating and violent.

       
      The exact cause of the wound or “lapse” which causes the scar of “Dure” is never revealed, although critics have suggested the sources both of Dürer’s and Dworkin’s scars. Marjorie Perloff suggests that the closest we get to “the poet’s own ‘scar,’ finally com[ing] out into the open” (268) is in Section 22 (which, like so much of the poem, is difficult to quote selectively):
       

      “Writing is a strange shadow whose sole purpose is to mark the destruction of the body that once stood between its light and its earth.” Skiagraphy, touch-type, and method. A run of his finger feels nothing now that the surface has smoothed, but can still make out the thin ellipse floating on his forearm like a shadow under shallow skin, and can trace its curve, left from the time she pushed him into the stove, and know that this is his proof: whatever else, she felt that strongly, she really did care this much that once. He who forgets that love lasts will not recognize its fist. Carp, suspended, mottle and kern. The entire text is an attempt to ask: “how can something be the shadow of a fact which does not exist?” The problem is not finding a solution, but simply posing the proper question. “Don’t you know then, what I mean, when I say the stove is in pain?”
       

       

      The first quotation is from Paul Mann’s Masocriticism, the last two from Wittgenstein. The joke is that the poet-critic is poking at his own wound, in what can only be taken as a masocritical gesture. The poet’s finger feels nothing, but his memory recalls being pushed into a stove, presumably by a lover. Is this a “declarative confessional statement”? Throughout the poem, Dworkin intersperses extracts from philosophers and literary critics with extracts from medical texts, offering few explicit transitions. The effect of this is to conflate multiple specialized discourses. Skiagraphy, for instance, can refer either to shadow-painting or to radiography. In operating on the body of language, the critic is like a surgeon. In operating on his own writing, the critic is like a surgeon operating on himself. As in the other sections of the sequence, Dworkin includes triadic (sometimes quadratic) sentences without active verbs. “Skiagraphy” precedes “touch-typing”–the activity in which the writer must presumably engage to write this. The multiple frames of reference–medical, art historical, philosophical–seem always to point back to the author. But this is perhaps a trick of perspective: the only “I” in this passage is in quotations. Perloff notes that “Dworkin’s language game oddly becomes most personal when it interweaves the Dürer materials with the ‘impersonal’ propositions of Wittgenstein on pain” (267). When Dworkin ends the passage with a passage from Wittgenstein, he ingeniously inverts cause and effect in the scarring process. “Don’t you know then, what I mean, when I say the stove is in pain?” (Philosophical 350) asks Wittgenstein, granting agency and feeling to an inanimate (and in this context presumably painful) object. Conventional subject-object relations are reversed in this formulation to the degree that, although we assume it is Dworkin speaking and enduring the painful memory, we don’t in fact know who is speaking for whom when Wittgenstein says “the stove is in pain.” The suggestion is that we are best able to identify with something or someone when the gaze is reversed, enabling us not only to see the stove’s pain, but also Wittgenstein’s pain–and by extension Dworkin’s (and our own) pain. Although Dworkin figures the quotation (or the citation) as a painful mark on the body, he sees a healing, suturing aspect to the quotation as well: “With healing he’ll worry the tissues in a morose delectation, the fingertip testing its sensation, and that lack, with an unreciprocated pressure: the nerves failing to complete their narcissistic circuit, so back and fore to get at figuring this fascination of a flesh that is no longer ours” (78). The patient-self cultivates his pain, which can only be felt through indirect means. The pain caused by the pointing finger is a pleasure of narcissism, as well as a pleasure of detachment. “Dure” can be said to attempt to overcome the classic double bind of melancholy, wherein the melancholic begins to enjoy his own suffering.

       
      In trying to find a way to point selectively to pain in a world of sensory overload–or in a pain-full world, so to speak–“Dure” ends up doubling back on itself, and acknowledging the “bittersweetness” of separation from a lover.7 Characteristically, Dworkin points in many directions, as when he introduces a Kandinsky title and integrates it into the associative rhythms of his own prose:
       

      Point and Line to Plane. The scar, in essence, is simply the deformation of any particular breaking the surface of its abstraction. I am; we are; to love. A mar on the undifferentiated expanse of language, writing is the scar left from its abrasion with the world (with use, with us, without). From paint to point to pain. A ridge of bristled locks impinged upon the singed and cotton stock. But if a scar is always a citation, are citations, themselves, always scars?
       

      (86)

       

      If the point is the specific place of the wound, then perhaps the plane is the more generalized axis of the representative afterlife of the pain symbolized by the scar. Learned citation might be the form of therapy appropriate to the scholar, as for instance in the compulsive citationality of Robert Burton’s Anatomy of Melancholy. Burton’s famous claim–“I write of melancholy, by being busy to avoid melancholy” (20)–resonates well with conceptual writing’s concern with meta-writing and with performativity. The Anatomy is also instructive in that, like “Dure,” it borrows unapologetically from multiple discourses–medical, philosophical, psychological, and literary. Yet despite the pervasive citationalism of “Dure,” no proper names–other than Dürer–are ever mentioned in the body of the poem. This, I suggest, pre-emptively undoes one of the scarring aspects of quotation–namely that every quotation that is attached to a proper name is paleonymic, and carries with it something like a transaction record in terms of the circulation of cultural capital.8 Dworkin seems to note the importance of this omission of proper names in the poem’s conclusion, when he quotes Charles Sanders Peirce in the context of a discussion of Augustine’s Confessions:

       

      “A proper name without signification, a pointing finger, is a degenerate index.” The taste of this pear lingered, on the edge of ferment. This sees me, or merely fits. O fado, of ado, adieu. “The last, construed as sing.” And this, in its seizure: apprehensive, rested, blue. “I marked this place with my finger or by some other sign and closed the book.” This is who we are (this), and (this) this is what we do to one another: by chance, by the hour, by ourselves.
       

      (Strand 102)

       

      Perhaps a quotation out of context is also a degenerate index if it becomes impossible to tell who was originally pointing at what. By referring to Augustine, Dworkin suggests that there is an element of chance in our linguistic appropriations. As soon as Augustine converts, he picks up Paul’s Epistles in order to perform a variation on the practice of Sortes Vergilianae–except that whereas a pagan Roman would have put down his finger randomly in the Aeneid, Augustine randomly places his finger on a passage from Paul fervently condemning the sins of the flesh. Even with a foreknowledge of his eventual salvation, the (involuntary) memory of the famous (voluntary) peach-theft will never leave him. Augustine’s finger has apparently touched upon an invisible textual scar.

      In closing “Dure” with this instance of aleatory intertextuality, Dworkin brings to bear still more receding perspectives and voices, and alludes to Augustine’s position as (arguably) the writer of the first autobiography. In this context, the reference cannot help but also bring to mind John Ashbery’s poem “Sortes Vergilianae.” “Dure” seems to be haunted not only by Derrida’s Memoirs of the Blind, but also by Ashbery’s “Self-Portrait in a Convex Mirror.” Like “Dure,” “Self-Portrait” is quotational in ways that undermine a traditional notion of a lyric ego or of a formal verse line:
       

      Sydney Freedberg in his
      Parmigianino says of it: “Realism in this portrait
      No longer produces an objective truth, but a bizarria . . . .
      However its distortion does not create
      A feeling of disharmony . . . . The forms retain
      A strong measure of ideal beauty,” because
      Fed by our dreams, so inconsequential until one day
      We notice the hole they left.
       

      (73)

       

      Ashbery’s verse, in comparison with Dworkin’s prose, is laconic and dreamy in its fluid interweaving of scholarly background material. Ashbery marks an absence, a hole in the pattern of meaning. A sense of an Ashberyan “you,” or an Ashberyan “we,” is missing from “Dure”–or perhaps the “we” of Ashbery’s “we notice the hole they left” has been replaced by a kind of lost thisness. “This is who we are (this), and (this) this is what we do to one another: by chance, by the hour, by ourselves.” The this is doubled, or rather tripled or quadrupled, in this one sentence. But there is no plural form of this. Dworkin is interested in the problem of how “we” can even describe objects, much less relate to other subject positions. “This is who we are (this)” is nearly tautological, except that the second “this” is in parentheses (in much the same manner that “Why write this” is italicized).

       
      Dworkin suggests that every this is marked–or scarred. We can only get at shadow thises marked by quotations or by italics. In the end, Dworkin comes to see the second-order articulation problem of thisness as not only a hurtful condition, but also as a condition which must be recognized in order to effect a healing process. Section 20 is among the sequence’s most direct:
       

      Proof of an irreconcilable event, the drawing may itself be a scar. Or is it merely emblematic of the fact that pain cannot be shown, but that the showing of pain can be shown? I can’t, in any meaningful sense, express my pain, but I can show you myself in the act of making that expression-however empty it may ultimately be. To point without the I makes a bridge. Empathetic deixis cedes to a rigid linguistic proxemics. ‘If, in saying I, I point to my own body, I model the use of the word “I” on that of the demonstrative. But in I have pain, “I” is not a demonstrative pronoun.’ The drawing was, perhaps, a philosophical grammar.
       

      (96)

       

      If the drawing is a scar, then “Dure” itself is a scar within a scar–and yet Dworkin casts doubt on this doubling and tripling of remove from actual experience. There may be no stable, unitary “I” to speak of: “to point without the I” would seem to be the best way to communicate pain. And yet this too is an unsatisfactory formulation. The lexicon of words for pain, like the lexicon of words for beauty, is limited. As important as articulating pain is an articulation of the conditions for articulating pain. The redoubling of language, or the quotation of the quotation, leaves behind a scar that is both the trace of an injury and the trace of a healing process. Perhaps an “empathetic deixis” is possible, although not easy. One could do far worse than the sentiments found in the get-well card’s programmatic expression of sympathetic identification. “A philosophical grammar” here, far from being cold and clinical, constitutes a kind of bridge between Is–for which, like this, there is no plural form. When Dworkin asks chiastically–“But if a scar is always a citation, are citations, themselves, always scars?”–his true/false answer has to be “false.” The citation is scarred, and carries with it a history of domination, exclusion, and violence–but the citation is not always scarring. Persons who cite complicate their own “I” every time they acknowledge an other. The citation also reconciles an “I” with a community. If these sound like platitudes, I would counter that “Dure” forces us to recognize that such platitudes are part of the difficulty of finding adequate forms of “empathetic deixis.”

       
      Quotation is often framed pejoratively as a diminution of subjectivity, or as a violent repudiation of originality. “Dure” complicates this view. Thomas Keenan explains quotation in terms that borrow from Marx’s phantasmagoric descriptions of capitalism:
       

      The quotation itself functions as a monster or a ghost, an uncanny visitor accumulated from another text. And it depends on a structural condition of words–they can be reproduced, mindlessly and mechanically reproduced-which acts as if they were nothing but commodities: to be accumulated, moved and removed to and from contexts, delayed and relayed between texts only to be grafted or inserted into some other text, transferred like (als) property or the mechanical limb (a forearm, let’s say; after all, forewarned is forearmed) on a monster.
       

      (104-105)

       

      In such a formulation, quotations are like commodities that embody false cultural values. Quotations are near-meaningless manufactured statements that in the aggregate constitute a Frankensteinian body of severed meaning. In this account of the quotation, the ghost haunting textual production might in fact be creativity. All quotes potentially become scare quotes. The Leviathan of language seems to tolerate no new quotations–or at least no new quotations that are not in the interests of monster-capital’s continuing growth. Keenan is not alone in formulating the quotation as monstrous and violent. In her discussion of “Dure,” Perloff quotes Antoine Compagnon’s study La Seconde main, in which Compagnon argues: “When I cite, I excise, I mutilate, I extract. . . . The chosen fragment converts itself into a text, no longer a bit of text, a part of a sentence or of discourse, but a chosen bit, an amputated limb, not yet as a transplant, but already an organ, cut off and placed in reserve” (qtd. in Perloff 264). Like Keenan, Compagnon sees quotation primarily as a lack rather than as a supplement. Quotation can also be understood–as it has so often been for literary writers before the twentieth century–as a central component of any authoritative text (as in Burton). A pretentious practice perhaps, but not necessarily a severing or a theft–dead authors, after all, can hardly preserve their own body parts.

       
      A particularly strong influence (though she is quoted only once) on “Dure” is Lyn Hejinian. In an essay on Hejinian, Dworkin describes “the largely citational mode” of My Life as a quiltwork, suggesting that the poem “emphasizes its citationality by incorporating apparently quoted material without quotation marks and, conversely (so quoted, coded), framing some phrases in marks of quotation without apparent significance and without citing a speaker or source” (“Penelope” 62). Rather than a violent severing of tradition, the quotations of My Life are constitutive fragments of a new feminist subjectivity, grounded in quiltmaking as an autobiographical process. Whereas My Life, for the most part, unweaves its own paleonymy by erasing its quotations’ sources, “Dure” reweaves its quotations into its source apparatus. Perhaps to cite as well as to quote is to come closer to revealing a source code. “So quoted, coded” (137) Dworkin quotes Hejinian parenthetically without quotation marks. Like many works considered under the rubric of Language writing in the 1970s and 80s, My Life is replete with détourned clichés, fragments of speech, and appropriated phrases–few of which are cited. Another example in this mode is Bob Perelman’s 1978 “An Autobiography,” a poem constructed entirely of uncited quotations. Later scholarly works by LANGUAGE writers often follow standard academic protocols for citation–but LANGUAGE poetry in its earlier phases typically does not cite sources, at least not in the exhaustive manner of “Dure.” Dworkin has written extensively about Susan Howe, whose hybrid combination of literary scholarship and personal reflection in works such as My Emily Dickinson and The Birth-mark is also relevant to his work.
       
      What if the “I” is always a misquotation borrowed from a collectively-authored work-in-progress? If academic literary criticism effaces the “I” in its reliance on citation, Dworkin re-introduces the “I” by means of communications that contain their own critique. To re-appropriate Wittgenstein again, perhaps the limits of my language are the limits of my I. The “I” in itself (or the I-in-itself) is necessarily appropriated from a cultural grammar. If there is no privileged position outside of the system of cultural production from which to stage a disinterested critique, then literature, in order to construct a viable politics of resistance, must come to terms with itself as a system that preserves privileged forms of cultural authority. The quotation is analogous to the cell form of literary production. Like the commodity, it is the smallest recognizable unit in a system of proprietary exchange. A quotation “appears at first sight an extremely obvious, trivial thing. But its analysis brings out that it is a very strange thing, abounding in metaphysical subtleties and theological niceties” (Marx 163). I is not only an other–it is many others who participate in a system of recognizable protocols for expression.
       
      My first epigraph embodies the notion that quotations take on a life of their own in Dworkin’s writing: “Quotation marks ticked through the body of the text like sutures arched in stitches that will scar” (“Dure” 79). Note the twists and turns of this sentence: as well as scarring, the quotation marks “tick”; they “suture”; they “stitch.” The scar may never heal, but it also may hurt less over time the better its causes and effects are understood. Perhaps the most famous instance in twentieth-century literature of quotations taking on a life of their own is in Walter Benjamin’s One-Way Street, a work that helps define Benjamin’s own heavily quotational style: “Quotations in my work are like wayside robbers who leap out, armed, and relieve the idle stroller of his conviction” (481). The “idle stroller” to whom Benjamin refers sounds much a like a flâneur. In Benjamin’s elaborate conceit, the reader is a lazy passerby confronted by too much textual information–too many advertisements and too many books. Rather than being scarred by the quotation, the strolling reader is relieved of a presumably false conviction. Similarly, Giorgio Agamben suggests that the quotation is not merely passive but able to take on an agency of its own: “the word enclosed within quotation marks is only waiting its moment of revenge. . . . He who puts a word in quotation marks can no longer rid himself of it: suspended in mid-air in its signifying élan, the word becomes unsubstitutable” (103-4). As Benjamin and Agamben show, it is possible for tradition to work against tradition, and for the quotation not only to be the bearer of violence, but also for the quotation to resist–and to articulate–suffering, even if that suffering is represented secondhand.
       
      “But what sort of doctor would diagnose a sketch?” Dworkin asks in medias res, hypothesizing that the Dürer portrait may have been sent by mail to a distant doctor (Strand 84). “What sort of a doctor,” indeed, Dr. Dworkin? Perhaps a doctor who is not a medical doctor, but rather a scholar and a poet–a doctor who, when in doubt, “resorts to a quote.”
       

      Paul Stephens is a postdoctoral fellow at the Fox Center for Humanistic Inquiry at Emory University. From 2005 to 2009 he taught in the literature department at Bard College. His recent articles have appeared in Social Text, Rethinking Marxism, and Don’t Ever Get Famous: New York Writing Beyond the New York School. He is currently completing a book-length project titled The Poetics of Information Overload: From Gertrude Stein to Conceptual Writing.
       

      Notes

       
      1. Quotation, originality and plagiarism have spawned an enormous body of criticism. For the purposes of this essay, I note in particular Elizabeth Gregory’s Quotation and Modern American Poetry, in which she makes the case that the practice of exact poetic quotation only came into vogue in American poetry with the advent of high modernism. Ming-Qian Ma’s “A ‘No Man’s Land’: Postmodern Citationality in Zukosky’s ‘Poem beginning “The”‘” argues that Zukofsky’s poetry indicates a shift from a modernist poetics of quotation to a more radically intertextual (and dehierarchized) postmodern poetics of citationality. See also Leonard Diepeveen, Changing Voices: The Modern Quoting Poem. Much that has been produced under the rubric of conceptual writing (the work of Kenneth Goldsmith, Caroline Bergvall, and Robert Fitterman, for instance) features extensive use of found texts. This tradition can be traced to Duchamp’s readymades and to Warhol’s a: A Novel, but such a tradition has innumerable filmic, musical, and visual analogues. David Evans’s recent collection Appropriation provides a useful overview, as does Paul D. Miller’s collection Sound Unbound: Sampling Digital Music and Culture. Notes on Conceptualisms by Robert Fitterman and Vanessa Place theorizes conceptual writing’s use of quotation, as does Kenneth Goldsmith’s introduction to the “Flarf & Conceptual Writing” section of Poetry Magazine, July/August 2009.

       

       
      2. I would like to acknowledge Michael Golston for first drawing my attention to the critical complexities of “Dure.” Cyrus Moussavi (at Columbia) and Jacob Braff (at Bard) further demonstrated to me that “Dure” is worthy of extensive critical consideration. Benjamin Kahan and Jenelle Troxell kindly offered comments on drafts. Credit is also due to the students who studied the poem with me in the class “Twentieth-CenturyAmerican Literature and the Visual Arts,” Bard College, Spring 2009.

       

       
      3. The dissertation—incidentally or not—was advised by Charles Altieri, who expresses skepticism about “confessional criticism” in his essay “What is at Stake in Confessional Criticism.”

       

       
      4. The works of Edwin Abbott have proven surprisingly generative for experimental writers. Sharon Kirsch has recently argued that Gertrude Stein’s 1930 How to Write should be considered a parody of Abbott’s 1876 How to Write Clearly, a popular text that Stein likely encountered as an undergraduate at Radcliffe. Remarkably, Kirsch’s article was published in the same year as Parse, and I can find no evidence that Dworkin was aware of the connection between Stein and Abbott. For contemporary works indebted to Abbott, see also Derek Beaulieu’s 2007 adaptation of Abbott, Flatland: A Romance in Many Dimensions, featuring an afterword by Marjorie Perloff, as well as Steve Tomasula and Stephen Farrell’s VAS: An Opera in Flatland.

       

       
      5. “Count Altamira told me that, on the eve of his death, Danton said in his loud voice: ‘It’s odd, the verb to guillotine cannot be conjugated in all its tenses; one can very well say: I will be guillotined, you will be guillotined, but one does not say: I have been guillotined’” (translation my own).

       

       
      6. For an interesting speculative discussion of Dürer’s Melancholia and Klee’s Angelus Novus (and by extension Benjamin’s “Theses”), see Giorgio Agamben’s “The Melancholy Angel,” in The Man Without Content, 104-115.

       

       
      7. Here I am thinking of Ann Carson’s discussion of Sappho’s use of the term glukupikron in Eros the Bittersweet, 3-9.

       

       
      8. Jacques Derrida defines paleonymy as “the question of the preservation of names … Why should an old name, for a determinate time, be retained? Why should the effects of a new meaning, concept, or object be damped by memory?” (Dissemination 3).
       

      Works Cited

         

       

      • Agamben, Giorgio. The Idea of Prose. Trans. Michael Sullivan and Sam Whitsitt. Albany: SUNY P, 1995. Print.
      • ———. The Man Without Content. Trans. Georgia Albert. Stanford: Stanford UP, 1999. Print.
      • Altieri, Charles. “What is at Stake in Confessional Criticism.” Confessions of the Critics. Ed. H. Aram Veeser. New York: Routledge, 1996. 55-67. Print.
      • Ashbery, John. Self-Portrait in a Convex Mirror. New York: Penguin, 1975. Print.
      • Barthes, Roland. “The Death of the Author.” Academic Discourse: Readings for Argument and Analysis. Ed. Gail Stygall. Mason: Thomson Learning Custom Publishing, 2002. 101-106. Print.
      • Beaulieu, Derek. Flatland: A Romance in Many Dimensions. Afterword by Marjorie Perloff. York: Information as Material, 2007. Print.
      • Benjamin, Walter. “One-Way Street.” Selected Writings, Vol. 1 1913-1926. Ed. Marcus Bullock and Michael W. Jennings. Cambridge: Harvard UP, 1996. Print.
      • Burton, Robert. The Anatomy of Melancholy. Ed. Holbrook Jackson. 3 vols. New York: Dutton, 1932. Print.
      • Butler, Judith. Bodies that Matter: On the Discursive Limits of “Sex.” New York: Routledge, 1993. Print.
      • Carson, Anne. Eros the Bittersweet. Princeton: Princeton UP, 1986. Print.
      • Derrida, Jacques. Dissemination. Trans. Barbara Johnson. Chicago: U of Chicago P, 1991. Print.
      • ———. Memoirs of the Blind: The Self-Portrait and Other Ruins. Trans. Pascale-Anne Brault and Michael Naas. Chicago: U of Chicago P, 1993. Print.
      • Diepeveen, Leonard. Changing Voices: The Modern Quoting Poem. Ann Arbor: U of Michigan P, 1993. Print.
      • Dworkin, Craig. “Interview.” Ceptuetics Radio Program. Hosted by Kareem Estefan. WNYU, October 15, 2008. <http://media.sas.upenn.edu/pennsound/groups/Ceptuetics/26-32/Ceptuetics_32_Craig-Dworkin_WNYU_10-15-08.mp3>. MP3.
      • ———. “Introduction: Delay in Verse.” Language to Cover a Page: The Early Writings of Vito Acconci. Ed. Dworkin. Cambridge: MIT Press, 2006. x-xviii. Print.
      • ———. “Introduction.” The UBUweb: Anthology of Conceptual Writing. Web. 17 Nov. 2009.
      • ———. “Legion (II).” Ubuweb.com. Ubuweb, n.d. Web. 17 Nov. 2009.
      • ———. Parse. Berkeley: Atelos Press, 2008. Print.
      • ———. “Penelope Reworking the Twill: Patchwork, Writing, and Lyn Hejinian’s My Life.” Contemporary Literature. 36.1 (1995): 58-81. JSTOR. Web. 17 Nov. 2009.
      • ———. “Reading the Illegible.” Diss. University of California, Berkeley, 1999. Print.
      • ———. Reading the Illegible. Evanston: Northwestern UP, 2003. Print.
      • ———. Ed. The Consequence of Innovation: 21st Century Poetics. New York: Roof Books, 2008. 7-25. Print.
      • ———. Strand. New York: Roof Books, 2005. Print.
      • Emerson, Ralph Waldo. “Quotation and Originality.” Works of Emerson, Volume 8, Letters and Social Aims. Boston: Houghton Mifflin, 1904. Print.
      • Evans, David, ed. Appropriation. Cambridge: MIT Press, 2008. Print.
      • Fitterman, Robert and Vanessa Place. Notes on Conceptualisms. New York: Ugly Duckling Presse, 2009. Print.
      • Foucault, Michel. The Order of Things: An Archaeology of the Human Sciences. New York: Random House, 1970. Print.
      • Goldsmith, Kenneth, ed. “Flarf & Conceptual Writing: A Special Section.” Poetry Magazine July/August 2009 (194.4): 315-342. Print.
      • Gregory, Elizabeth. Quotation and Modern American Poetry. College Station: Texas A&M UP, 1996. Print.
      • Hejinian, Lyn. My Life. Los Angeles: Green Integer, 2002. Print.
      • Keenan, Thomas. Fables of Responsibility: Aberrations and Predicaments in Ethics and Politics. Stanford: Stanford UP, 1997. Print.
      • Kirsch, Sharon. “‘Suppose a grammar uses invention’: Gertrude Stein’s Theory of Rhetorical Grammar.” Rhetoric Society Quarterly 38. 3 (2008): 283-310. Informaworld. Web. 15 Nov. 2009.
      • Levine, Sherrie. “Statement.” Art in Theory 1900-1990. Ed. Charles Harrison and Paul Wood. London: Blackwell, 1992. 1066-1067. Print.
      • Ma, Ming-Qian. “A ‘No Man’s Land’: Postmodern Citationality in Zukosky’s ‘Poem beginning ‘The.’” Upper Limit Music: The Writings of Louis Zukofsky. Ed. Mark Scroggins. Tuscaloosa: U of Alabama P, 1997. 129-153. Print.
      • Marx, Karl. Capital, Volume I. Trans. Ben Fowkes. London: Penguin, 1976. Print.
      • Miller, Paul D. Sound Unbound: Sampling Digital Music and Culture. Cambridge: MIT Press, 2008. Print.
      • Olson, Charles. “Projective Verse.” Collected Prose, eds. Donald Allen and Benjamin Friedlander. Berkeley: UC Press, 1997. 239-249. Print.
      • Perelman, Bob. “An Autobiography.” Ten to One: Selected Poems. Middletown: Wesleyan UP, 1999. 4-6. Print.
      • Perloff, Marjorie. “The Pleasures of Déjà Dit: Citation, Intertext, and Ekphrasis in Recent Experimental Poetry.” The Consequence of Innovation: 21st Century Poetics. Ed. Craig Dworkin. New York: Roof Books, 2008. 255-279. Print.
      • Scarry, Elaine. The Body in Pain: The Making and Unmaking of the World. Oxford: Oxford UP, 1987. Print.
      • Tomasula, Steve, and Stephen Farrell. VAS: An Opera in Flatland. Chicago: U of Chicago P, 2004. Print.
      • Wittgenstein, Ludwig. Philosophical Investigations. Ed. Rush Rees and Trans. Anthony Kenny. Oxford: Blackwell, 1974. Print.

       

    • Anagram, Gestalt, Game in Maya Deren: Reconfiguring the Image in Post-war Cinema

      Orit Halpern (bio)
      New School for Social Research
      HalpernO@newschool.edu

      Abstract
       
      This article examines the relationship between the film work of American Avant-garde filmmaker Maya Deren and Cold-war science, particularly the sciences of Gestalt psychology, cybernetics, game theory, and anthropology. The central concern is to link Deren’s investment in time and in transforming the cinematic image with contemporaneous developments in science, technology, and politics. Using her engagement with the cybernetician and anthropologist Gregory Bateson as a frame, the essay demonstrates that Deren’s attitude to temporality and representation is both similar to and radically different from that emerging in psychology, anthropology, communication science and game theory after the war. This cinema excavates the probabilistic and reflexive nature of time, as understood in both art and science during this period, to create new associations between subjects, screens, and life. However, Deren’s work produces associations and potentials that the game theories and technologies with which she is concerned do not. Her work utilizes the discourse of temporality and representation taken from these sciences, while refusing to repeat without difference, and so blocking a return to older discourses of objectivity, authority, and knowledge.
       

       

       
      Choreography for Camera (1945)Anagram of Film Form (1946)Ritual in Transfigured Time (1946)

       

      Click for larger view

      Fig. 1.

      Choreography for Camera (1945)

      Anagram of Film Form (1946)

      Ritual in Transfigured Time (1946)

       

       
      “Man is distinguished [from machines] for consciousness, time perspective, and original energy. So is anything that lasts.” When the New York avant-garde film maker Maya Deren writes these words in her diary in 1947 in response to a lecture at the New School by Gregory Bateson, in which Bateson discusses the application of game theory to the study of culture and psychology, she expresses an idea, often repeated since, that time is of central concern to the cinematic art (“Notebook” 45). At first, her quote seems an unlikely response to the mathematical logic of games. Game theory, nested as it is within the rubric of war-time operations research and computing, appears distant from any 18th century romantic ideals of the human Deren may harbor. The filmmaker does, however, intuitively identify a major historical point: that any such technical revision of time and representation would indelibly mark the subject and transform perception.
       
      Deren poses two questions in her notebook that reveal her logic. Game theory is a technique to model, simulate, and predict the behavior of systems when there is incomplete information (for example, when one encounters an unknown enemy force). It is, and continues to be, a technology for control of the unknown. Her first concern, therefore, is about how to engage with an indeterminate Other through logic. In her notebook, Deren questions the universal applicability of such game theoretical models. Implicitly, she interrogates the universalist assumptions of these models about the behavior of both individuals and societies. I argue that intuitively she identifies a homogenizing force within the technical logic of the game.
       
      Second, Deren expresses a concern about the relationship between prediction and control. She asks whether “linear analysis” is an appropriate model for thinking cultural systems and predicting or controlling their future actions (“Notebook” 25). Linear systems, in Bateson’s mathematical logic, are predictable, non-chaotic systems. That is, linearity is a mathematical term used to define systems that do not advance teleologically in time. Linear models assume that the past and the future are the same, and that reactions can be reversed. Control in Bateson’s discourse, and in game theory, however, is not supposed to be linear but probabilistic. Games are theoretically supposed to generate a number of possible futures. Control is understood by the anthropologist, therefore, as the ability to take action and to plan under probabilistic, not deterministic conditions. Deren sub-consciously notices a tension here; arguing that while spoken in terms of change and feedback, Bateson’s models may have imbedded within them an older historical concept of control as deterministic, understood as the perfect prediction of future action from past data. Arguably, then, Deren and Bateson share a concern about the relationship between the image, or the model, and the world to come (“Notebook” 43-46).
       
      As a filmmaker whose writings and cinematic practices are pervaded by discourses of a predictive and probabilistic temporality, Deren identifies in her work a particular concern with time, one that integrates chance, control, and memory. For example, in her classic 1946 methodological treatise, “An Anagram of Ideas on Art, Form, and Film,” she argues that art must become an experiment, like science, and embrace its true potential–a break from realism in order to produce an even greater reality:
       

      should the artist, like the scientist, exercize [sic] his imaginative intelligence–the command and control of memory–to consciously try, test, modify, destroy, estimate probabilities, and try again . . . always in terms of the instrument by which the fusion will be realized.
       

      (“Anagram” 13. Emphasis added.)

       

      Her language is revelatory. Framed in terms of “estimate probabilities” and the “command and control” of memory, her words already suggest that time has something to do with odds and manipulation. This kind of language is the uncanny doppelganger of the game theories that Bateson discusses, which are also framed in terms of probability, statistics, control, and chance. Time here is not something to be shown, but rather an operation, a process, the “control of memory” whose outcome is the production and destruction of probabilities. In retrospect, therefore, Bateson and Deren share in a discourse that is predictive rather than invested in presence or the present.

       
      Deren is, in fact, at the lecture because she wants to bridge art and science, and to rethink the work of representation and the image. She seeks to appropriate Bateson’s thought and ethnographic work for her cinematic practice. Deren’s training in gestalt and behavioral psychology spurred her initial interest in Bateson’s psychological and ethnographic investigations of trance, dance, and ritual in highland Bali in the late 1930s.
       

       
      Communication as Gesture: The body recorded as a medium, in Bateson's work, for the production of culture. Gregory Bateson and Margaret Mead, Trance and Dance in Bali (1952). Footage shot 1937-39.1

       

      Click for larger view

      Fig. 2.

      Communication as Gesture: The body recorded as a medium, in Bateson’s work, for the production of culture. Gregory Bateson and Margaret Mead, Trance and Dance in Bali (1952). Footage shot 1937-39.1

       

       
      Throughout the late 1930s, Gregory Bateson and Margaret Mead worked in highland Bali studying culture and schizophrenia. In the interest of developing new methods for ethnography and capturing the intricacies of daily life in the villages where they worked, they created a vast archive of photographic stills and cinematic footage (see Fig. 2 above). To this day, their archive is considered foundational in visual anthropology. (Curiously enough, it also inspired the concept of the plateau for Gilles Deleuze and Félix Guattari.) Deren was given full access to this footage for use in developing her own cinematic practices, and the exposure to this massive visual archive brings her to encounter another form of abstraction–models of communication and game theories.2
       
      This is already, therefore, a convoluted and rhizomatic history of Deren’s interest in subjectivity and perception, but it has much to say about our contemporary conceptions of the image and the screen in media and film history and theory. That Deren focuses on the locus between game theories, psychology, cinema, and the ethnographic encounter is hardly a side note. I want to use this highly specific discourse of “time” in Deren’s work to ask a series of questions that open onto both a history of representation and an ethics of the image: what notions of time are being specified? How might we understand the debates between an artist and an ethnographer? And between mathematical theories of computing and an ideal of art framed in temporal terms? Most importantly, what is at stake in the relationship between time and the image at this moment in Western intellectual history? Bateson and Deren do not merely intersect chronologically, but rather share a conceptual rubric within which the question of temporality as an ethical and representational problem is posed. Deren’s engagement with Bateson, therefore, brings together a personal encounter and a moment in the history of western representation as theoretical machines that help situate, explore, and expand our understanding of time and the image.
       
      This interaction between art and science shows how the same conditions of possibility, and similar genealogies of discipline and training, can produce radically different forms of practice. Deren’s concept of temporality and representation is both similar to and radically different from those emerging in psychology, anthropology, communication science and game theory after the war. This cinema, I argue, excavates the probabilistic and reflexive nature of time, as understood in both art and science during this period, to create new associations between subjects, screens, and life. However, Deren’s work produces associations and potentials that the game theories and technologies with which she is concerned do not. Her work uses the discourse of temporality and representation taken from the sciences but refuses to repeat without difference, thus blocking a return to older discourses of objectivity, authority, and knowledge.
       

      Chance, Control, and Memory

       
      In 1946, a few months before she attends Bateson’s lectures, Maya Deren introduces a new structure for the image:
       

       
      Contents of "An Anagram of Ideas on Art, Form, and Film" in Maya Deren and the American Avant-Garde; Ed. Bill Nichols; Berkeley: U of California P, 2001.

       

      Click for larger view

      Fig. 3.

      Contents of “An Anagram of Ideas on Art, Form, and Film” in Maya Deren and the American Avant-Garde; Ed. Bill Nichols; Berkeley: U of California P, 2001.

       

       
      It is an opening diagram in one of the most famous treatises on the theory and practice of cinema–“An Anagram of Ideas on Art, Form, and Film.” The “Anagram,” for Deren, is both a theory of cinema and an instructional blueprint for cinematic production. Deren is a very structural filmmaker who diagrams and carefully choreographs every scene and shot beforehand. The “Anagram” is a visualization of this process.
       
      This figure is both a game of letters and a structure for visual recombination. She recommends this form “to anyone who has faced the problem of compressing into a linear organization an idea which was stimulating precisely because it extended into two or three different, but not contradictory directions at once” (“Anagram” 6). Already in her opening notes, Deren expresses a complex relationship to teleological narrative and historical time. Negotiating between structure and novelty, this is a system of self-referring elements, each producing a totality irreducible to its parts. No part of it may be changed without “affecting the whole;” every element is able to produce different possibilities through recombination. Because the anagram can be read to produce a myriad of effects in any direction, as one might read “horizontally, vertically, diagonally, or even in reverse,” Deren proposes a world no longer described by linear cause-effect relations but, rather, by feedback loops.
       
      For Deren, time, understood as progress, or causality, may be broken, since elements may be recombined in any order, but it is still directional. These recombinatory readings operate in different directions, but their results remain an emergent “whole.” Deren also argues that “nothing is new… except, perhaps, the anagram itself” (“Anagram” 6). This is a curious statement, and it denotes a subtle ontological shift. Nothing is new in that the forms and images come from the past; what is new, for Deren, is the process by which an already known and recorded world is reformulated. The anagram is this process, and its novelty lies in producing a whole that exceeds its parts and emerges as art. The anagram, therefore, is an auto-poietic form bridging past and future, producing possibilities for cinematic practice out of the remains of the past (“Anagram” 7). This form makes manifest her notion of the “control of memory” (“Anagram” 13). In the world she envisions, innovation comes through recombination. The work of the movie-maker is thus to produce forms that will generate future possibilities irreducible to their singular parts.
       
      Deren is clear about her disinterest in indexical or documentary practices of image making. This is not a discourse of temporality invested in inscription and representation; by extension, it is also not a discourse invested in the present or presence. Deren speaks to an emergent obsession in both science and art–not in documenting the real or discovering nature, but in producing imagination and transcending historical experience by way of the “instrument.” Science, she argues, is already an endeavor of the artificial: “If the achievements of [contemporary] science are the result of a violation of natural integrity, in order to emancipate its elements and re-relate them, how can an artist be content to do no more than to perceive, analyze and, at most, recreate these ostensibly inviolable whole of nature?” (“Anagram” 23). Art should not, therefore, attempt to return to nature. Instead, art has to embark on a new truth:
       

      To renounce the natural frame of reference–the natural logic and integrity of an existent reality–is not, as is popularly assumed, an escape from the labor of truth. . . . To create a form of life is, in the final analysis, much more demanding than to render one which is ready-made.
       

      (“Anagram” 23)

       

      To break with the documentary tradition, she writes, is not to “escape the labor of truth,” but rather to affirm it, to create a greater truth: “a form of life.” Her words both gesture to a history of the automation of representation and perception, that of the “ready-made,” as well as to a nascent aspiration to break terminally with nature to produce reality. Deren, therefore, mutates or replaces concern with “the natural frame of reference” as a prescriptive idea of perception for another set of concerns about prediction and performance.

       
      Deren calls upon the genealogy of science to make this argument. She writes of a process by which human perception was remade:
       

      Through mathematical computations, he [man] was able to extend his knowledge even beyond the reach of his instruments. From a careful analysis of causation and incidence, he developed the powers of prediction. And finally, not content to merely analyze an existent reality, he undertook to activate the principles which he had discovered, to manipulate reality, and to bring together into new relationships the elements which he was able to isolate. He was able to create forms according to his own intelligence.
       

      (“Anagram” 8)

       

      Deren cites as historical reference and inspiration the emergence of probability, the erosion of determinism, and the manipulation of reality by new techniques and optical instruments. She diagrams a new relationship between probabilistic thought and subjective vision, a form of visuality that accedes to the self-production and technical nature brought about through “computations” and techniques.

       
      Aside from Bateson’s influence, the source of Deren’s familiarity with computers or game theory is uncertain. What is clear is that in training and discourse she shares much with the anthropologist. In her own life, as is by now well documented, Deren draws influence from the physical and psychological sciences, as well as from figures such as Henri Bergson. She was the daughter of a practicing psychiatrist in Syracuse, New York, who was part of the new Russian school for objective psychology in St. Petersburg before coming to the United States in 1922 to escape the civil war. At this school, Dziga Vertov studied and experimented with his cinematic practices in 1917 (Holl 157). Deren was close to her father, and in her undergraduate and graduate education she pursued the study of psychology, particularly gestalt psychology with Kurt Koffka at Smith College in the late 1930s.3 The relationship between science and art continues to play out through her work. Deren’s work is permeated with her interest in psychology, and also with discussions of physics, the Bomb, and games. Her archive contains folders titled “communication.” Her interest in ethnography puts her in direct conversation with structuralist anthropologists concerned with communication and linguistic theories. In fact, her training in psychology, and gestalt in particular, is intimately correlated to the sciences of communication, computing, and cognition. At a moment when minds, machines, and media are all being transformed, many different practices share in the reformulation of representation (“Climate”).4
       
      Deren shares much with the technologies and sciences of her time. While critical of the bomb and conscious of the dangers of technology, she is also faintly hopeful that art’s relationship with science can invigorate both. For her, tools coming from the sciences offer the possibility of control over memory and the potential to reinvent cinema and reinvigorate art after the war. The “Anagram” essay maps Deren’s points of reference and her hope for the image, an image no longer invested in older forms of knowledge, but rather in the creation of “forms,” an image that recombines past histories of probability and technology to produce, she hopes, new effects.
       
      I do not wish to imply here that Deren is directly related to the development of digital or electronic media. Rather, I wish to show that post-war cinema, post-war anthropology and communication sciences demonstrate similar attitudes towards representation. This engagement between art and the social, communication, and psychological sciences after the war allows me to ask where these endeavors intersect and where they differentiate themselves. I want, therefore, to focus our attention on the aspect of Deren’s theories that highlights a historical transformation in both ontology and epistemology. But I also want to mark her curious insistence, almost a demand, that art be separate from science. In this intimate effort to both engage and separate from the physical and psychological sciences, we can begin to understand relationships between time, difference, technology, and representation in the post-war image.
       

      Inscription, Representation, and Cinema

       
      To link the anagram to histories of epistemology and temporality, I want to situate Deren’s anagrammatic “image” within the history of representation and knowledge. The opening tropes in the “Anagram” essay develop key themes critical to understanding the relationship between memory, temporality, and control that structures Deren’s conception of cinematic time. First, Deren folds a 19th and early 20th century concern with chance and control into a new cinematic practice. Her discourse of time is, arguably, probabilistic and associated with a history of anti-determinist thinking in the sciences and in philosophy.
       
      Second, Deren demonstrates a historical change in the ontology of the image. Throughout her writing, Deren explicitly attacks both disorganization (she is a highly structured filmmaker, pre-diagramming and storyboarding all her movies) and immediacy. She explicitly and repeatedly condemns what she labels “presentism” (“Anagram”). How can we understand this denial of the present in the name of structure and prediction? And how does it relate to modern concepts of probability and the representability of time?
       
      Many historians have noted that the 19th century saw the emergence of two phenomena-the rise of mechanical objectivity and what Ian Hacking calls “the taming of chance.” In physics through thermodynamics, in evolutionary biology, in the social sciences, and in psychology and physiology, there emerged a recognition of the limits of representation, a consciousness that the world was variable and contingent. This worldview opposes the paradigm of Newtonian physics. In Newton’s universe, there can be perfect information; equations predict the future action of the system and reactions can always be reversed. In Newtonian physics, time’s arrow flows both forward and backward and nature is amenable to representation through mathematics and images. In a world that is non-deterministic, however, time cannot be reversed and the future can never be perfectly predicted. The recognition of an inability to legibly represent the present and thus know and control the future (a recognition of chance), combined with the teleological arrow of thermodynamic time directed towards chaos, disorder, and degradation, created anxieties about the representability of time itself.
       
      This representational crisis in the late 19th century was embedded in and abetted by early cinema. Cinema, like science, desperately sought to fulfill an impossible task: both to be able to record “everything,” to access the absolute zenith of the knowable and the seeable–the index, the present, the event–and to render this deluge of data coherent, representable, and legible to the human observer. Cinema and science both produced consciousness of the limits of human perception and representation, rendering visible the difficulty of making choices under conditions of imperfect information, while inducing a desire to surmount this limit to knowledge through new forms of documentation and analysis (Doane 4).
       
      Objectivity thus seemed unattainable when the era increasingly recognized the impossibility of controlling the visual data field and predicting the future, while simultaneously desiring to do both. Science contends with this inability to gain complete knowledge of the world–chance–with a desire to document, organize, and archive everything. Chance and the index are thus bound together through the epistemologies of archiving and new visualization technologies that characterize positivistic 19th and early 20th century sciences. Arguably, this era’s concern with representing time correlates with a desire to document the present (ontology and the index) and the concomitant demand for a mechanical objectivity to control a field of vision lent autonomy through the machine of cinema and anti-deterministic epistemologies (Doane 4; Daston and Galison).
       
      For Deren, however, the problem of knowledge and epistemological control is replaced with the question of creating life-forms. She signifies a slow erosion of the dream of accessing the present in the name of a new and obsessive concern with imagination or the virtual framed in the future perfect tense, a desire not for the document and the index but for the production of effects in anticipation of the future. Deren’s lack of interest in the index and the present is therefore a marked shift. While adhering to a probabilistic and teleological (although not necessarily progressive) time, Deren is only interested in two loci–the past and the future.
       
      The third salient structure for Deren’s architecture of time involves memory and the archive. The displacement of concern for the index is accompanied with emergent interest in memory and the archive as infinite repositories of possibility for recombination. Deren is obsessively concerned with the future and with forms or structures that are auto-poietic. Surprisingly, however, this predictive or anticipatory attitude develops by displacing the problem of recording. Deren assumes that the past is available for recombination and no longer worries about its capture; as we shall see, indexicality is not so much destroyed as simply deferred and repressed. There is a curious structure of time in this cinema (but also in communication sciences) where feedback loops generate future actions.
       
      These three elements–probability, prediction, and manipulation–work together to fundamentally reframe the dream of what cinema might become and speak to broader transformations in the idea of temporality and its ethical and moral stakes. It is Deren herself who points out the incumbent risks now attached to time: “For the serious artist the esthetic problem of form is, essentially, and simultaneously, a moral problem” (“Anagram” 37). She hints that what is at stake in this effort to rethink temporality, memory, and the image is the future both of media and of thought.
       

      The New Image

       
      These attitudes towards recording, recombination, and structure are embodied within the anagrammatic logic and structure of Deren’s films. Her first movie, Meshes of the Afternoon (1943), made with her husband, the Czech émigré Alexander Hammid, animates this recombinatorial aesthetics, illuminating, in her words, “the malevolent vitality of inanimate objects” (Meshes).5 Her definition of the film–joining vitality with the inanimate–already suggests a revision of ontology and perception. The movie is, indeed, a psychotic dream world, perhaps reflecting and advancing the on-going war condition. More importantly, it is a world where the interiority and exteriority of the subject are confused. The film is, in Deren’s estimation, “a dream that takes such force it becomes reality” (Legend 78). It is a film where the abstract processes of perception take material form through editing and repetition.
       
      Since Meshes of the Afternoon is the most narrative of her films, many critics argue that the movie wavers between this emergent aesthetic and older classical forms of cinema. However, the dominant device in the film is a rhythmic mirroring, or feedback, between the possibly exterior and interior states, that anticipates the anagrammatic method. Every scene is filled with parallels: a falling flower transforms into a knife, the telephone off the hook is doubled by a knife falling onto a table, and a potentially loving caress between a man and knife redoubles upon itself as a potential murder scene (“Pre-production Notes”). These scenes repeat themselves in the course of the film, each time slightly mutating to produce different comprehensions. Deren also regularly doubles or multiplies the same image in the scene, for example in a moment when she encounters herself in multiple:
       

       
      Mirroring in Meshes of the Afternoon. 1943.  © Mystic Fire Video, 2002. DVD.

       

      Click for larger view

      Fig. 4.

      Mirroring in Meshes of the Afternoon. 1943.

      © Mystic Fire Video, 2002. DVD.
       

       

      The logic of the film is thus one of repetition and multiplication. Like the anagram, “nothing is new” in that everything has been recorded. The movie keeps repeating its own operations and images, and also regularly recombining montage and symbolic elements from cinema’s history-particularly from Surrealism and Constructivism, both movements producing movies that Deren claims to have seen.

       
      However, while Deren may repeat convention and tactic, she does not recuperate these images in the name of unearthing the unconscious or revealing the reality behind ideology. Deren violently opposes any comparison between her work and the psychoanalytic films of surrealists (Legend 280).6 She steadfastly maintains that between the screen and the spectator a new reality is emerging, as well as a new psychology. Novelty here is relocated from the scene of capture to the production of this “whole” that encompasses the act of seeing and involves the spectator and the apparatus in producing an experience.
       
      In subsequent production notes Deren writes: “Everything which happens in the dream has its basis in a suggestion in the first sequence–the knife, the key, the repetition of stairs, the figure disappearing around the curve of the road. Part of the achievement of this film consists in the manner in which cinematic techniques are employed to give a malevolent vitality to inanimate objects” (Legend 78). This lively malevolence emerges from the recombination of set patterns that produces more than the sum of the stills. Careful mapping of repeated images is critical to this form. The archive generates the movie and also produces a new form of liveliness that is beyond the sum of its parts, an accident that emerges from this structured practice.
       

       
      Stills from Meshes of the Afternoon. 1943.  © Mystic Fire Video, 2002.

       

      Click for larger view

      Fig. 5.

      Stills from Meshes of the Afternoon. 1943.

      © Mystic Fire Video, 2002.
       

       
      Deren’s film generates a form of attention through rhythmic patterns, not through the conventional integration of sound and image in causal relations. As Wendy Haslem writes, “The rhythm of the sound, movement and editing conspire to produce the effect of a trance film. Meshes of the Afternoon’s dream-like mise-en-scène, illogical narrative trajectory, fluid movement and ambient soundtrack invite a type of contemplative, perhaps even transcendental, involvement for the spectator.”7 The diegesis emerges through the repetition and cadencing of elements, the regular interruption of action, and the discontinuity between movements and spaces. The repetition of form and the direct relationship between images produce movement.
       
      Deren is explicitly recombinatorial in her logic. She correlates this cinematic practice directly with memory, archiving, and storage. Recalling a history of photography as indexical, she assumes the availability of the image to memory for recombination. She writes:
       

      But the celluloid memory of the camera can function, as our memory, not merely to reconstruct or to measure an original chronology. It can place together, in immediate temporal sequence, events actually distant, and achieve, through such relationship a peculiarly filmic reality.
       

      (“Anagram” 42)

       

      Cinema here takes the place of memory, but this is a particular memory. In this formulation, the work of cinema is to provide a structure that may produce new forms of time, not merely reflect a time that comes from outside of it. The camera works like our memory, “not merely to reconstruct or to measure an original chronology,” but rather through a “relationship” between images that comes from different situations to produce a new time, “a peculiar filmic reality.” Memory is thus a process of recombination that is not attached to the recollection of the past so much as the production of future imaginaries. The filmic medium, then, is the structure that creates the conditions for this recombination to occur. Deren’s practice integrates both temporal conceptions of chance (the accident of encounter between different images) and statistical control (the production of equations, diagrams, graphs, and other mechanisms) through the structured “game” that is the anagram.

       

      The Image that Acts

       
      Deren’s work is obsessed with process, manipulation, and recombination and is not interested in ontology, indexicality, or capture. Time, here, is thus not so much related to the past or the present as to the future. The anagram is a structure that can produce new forms in the future out of the traces of the past. This cinematic practice embodies a shift in tense from the descriptive to the predictive, from documentation to action. Deren is explicit about this transformation from the documentary impulse to another one:
       

      When an image induces a generalization and gives rise to an emotion or idea, it bears towards that emotion or idea the same relationship which an exemplary demonstration bears to some chemical principle; and that is entirely different from the relationship between that principle and the written chemical formula by which it is symbolized. In the first case the principle functions actively; in the second case its action is symbolically described, in lieu of the action itself.
       

      (“Anagram” 27)

       

      Symbols no longer act as documentary of or referential to an external index, but instead perform operations. It is not what can be seen but what can be done that concerns her.

       
      Deren’s “generalizations” are patterns, defining relationships, and not spatially situated objects. Her concept of form is clearly probabilistic in that it generates a potential future action, but it is also communicative in the sense that in communication theory, information is judged by the potential for action. In Deren’s theory, symbols are the condition of possibility for an action. Whereas the chemical formula (a representation) cannot produce the reaction, her notion of symbol or generalization can. Her deferral or repression of presence, ontology, and description facilitates a focus on relations instead of objects. The materialization of the symbol is thus closely correlated with an ideal of a predictive and probabilistic time, and the deferral of a concern with capture and ontology.
       
      Deren attempts to enact this idea of symbol literally in her work, for example in her subsequent film A Study in Choreography for the Camera (1945). She describes this film as an effort to remove dance from the theater stage and create a new relationship between the camera and the human body. This film is as dynamic as the body, “mobile and volatile as himself. It was, actually a duet–between Talley Beatty, who danced, and space, which was made to dance by means of the camera and cutting” (“Ritual” 225). To this end she drives herself and her performers to new physical and mechanical relations. Talley Beatty recalls the difficulty of filming Choreography (“Interview,” Legend 280):
       

       
      Stills from A Study in Choreography for the Camera. 1945.  © Mystic Fire Video, 2002

       

      Click for larger view

      Fig. 6.

      Stills from A Study in Choreography for the Camera. 1945.

      © Mystic Fire Video, 2002
       

       

      Deren forces Beatty to lean in and out of windows, ledges, and precipices and to hold for long moments poses that are both physically taxing and potentially dangerous (“Interview” 286).

       
      In her critics’ estimation, Deren’s work diverges from previous avant-garde traditions, most particularly Surrealism, because her image participates in, rather than records or represents (as abstraction), the movements of the body.8 As Deren explains, “Most dance films are records of dances which were originally designed for theatrical stage space and for the fixed stage-front point of view of the audience…In this film I have attempted to place a dancer in limitless, cinematographic space…he shares, with the camera, a collaborative responsibility for the movements themselves. This is, in other words, a dance which can exist only in film” (Legend 262). Both dance and cinema change, incorporating and reflexively responding to each other. John Martin, the New York Times dance critic, announces that Deren’s work reveals that the machine could now extend the body, labeling this “chorecinema.” Another dance critic, Richard Lippold, argues her work “liberates” dance from a “transitory experience,” offering it “the eternity of other arts, and the liberation of cinema, through the dancer, from its confines in documenting merely the real” (391).
       
      The film spans approximately three minutes, deploying a number of devices to facilitate the production of temporality and movement: a machinic vision, if you will. Cadencing is integral to the structure of the movie. Dance movements and rhythms set the tempo for attention in the film, which moves through a number of discontinuous and idiosyncratic spaces in both geography and history. For example, the dancer starts in a forest and extends his leg. The extension is slow and continuous. This action is on-going while synchronously there is a jump cut between spaces, landing the dancer in a West Village apartment. Movement is shown continuously over spatial disjuncture. In another scene that takes place in the Metropolitan Museum of Art, the dancer traverses the antiquities hall. The speed of shooting is variable, ranging from 64 frames per second to 8 frames per second, as is the angle of the camera. The dancer’s turns maintain a set cadence, but they unfold for the viewer through disjointed perspectives–extreme close-ups and shallow depths of field interspersed with extended depth of field, wider angles, and distance–and at varying speeds. What the spectator is conscious of is the time in which the action unfolds since the spaces modulate. Deren also plays segments of the film in reverse to transform action and create jumps “contradicting gravity,” breaking with causal logics of action and reaction (“Choreography” 265).
       
      Mechanical, perhaps statistical, in nature, the film induces a series of potential affects through tight structures and controlled scenarios. Nature and art–the urban museum, the domestic apartment, and the forest cliffs–are brought into contact as remnants of, and possibilities for, different forms of life, different possibilities for being that emerge from unlikely interactions structured by the film. Temporality is (at least in ambition) produced through the disjuncture between movement and space, directly from the cuts, edits and the variances in filming speed. Deren seeks not to represent time or presence, but rather to produce sensation through her editorial and structural practice. Deren sums up her ambitions for the film poetically: “I mean that movement, or energy, is more important, or more powerful, than space or matter-that, in fact, it creates matter” (qtd. in Butler 11).
       
      In its dedication to enacting a deconstruction of the separation between materiality and abstraction, to an irreversible but heterogeneous temporality, and to memory as a process of “relation” building, this cinema appears to correlate with Gilles Deleuze’s later formulation of the time image as a post-war phenomenon. This correlation highlights a historical transformation in representational tactics. In a move that anticipates contemporary media theory, Deren inverts modern concerns with the present and the index, as exemplified in Henri Bergson’s attitudes and critiques of physics, modern science, and cinema. While Bergson continued to insist on the cinematograph’s attack on reality, Deren (and incidentally Bateson, but not Mead) represses this interest in the investment in a “filmic reality,” substituting the instrument for the position of memory. Unlike Bergson, for whom time is always outside of representation and inscription, and for whom the present is both inaccessible to legible inscription and the site of an absolute reality, for Deren time emerges from within the apparatus. In the post-war reformulation of cinema there is no debate between phenomenal, scientific, or mechanical experiences of time.9 The debate, instead, shifts to how this experience will be organized and manipulated.
       

      Genealogies

       
      Deren’s cinema thus allows us to identify three features of the post-war image: 1) The emergence of a notion of multiple temporality comprised of both probability and recombination. 2) The subsequent displacement of interest in the present, taxonomy, and static ontology in the interest of process, method, and relations. 3) The transformation in relations between materiality and abstraction facilitating a new treatment of perception, representation, and symbols. These three features are part of a broader cultural logic of representation endemic to the period. Deren’s relationship to temporality, traversing as it does discourses of physics, anthropology, memory, probability, and control, reflects and refract broader epistemological changes in the arts and sciences of her day and her particular biography. Deren, as I have noted, studied with Koffka at Smith College in the late 1930s while completing an MA. in English literature.
       
      I draw attention to this link because gestalt psychology has a particular place in the postwar milieu. In fields as widespread as computing, art theory and history, psychology, and the social sciences, the language of gestalt and the ideas coming from this form of psychology become a dominant lingua franca for rethinking perception and human cognition. Deren’s thinking emerges directly from this influence, which reflects itself in her language of recombining “wholes,” in her idea that the anagram can be a process for creating perception, and her situating the structure of temporality in the image. By tracing Deren’s relationship to gestalt, I seek to situate the filmmaker within a broader history of epistemology and representation.
       
      Gestalt psychology is a paradigmatic example of an epistemological bridge between two orders of objectivity and truth before and after the war. Gestalt anticipates, before the war, a transformation in scientific ideals and the dispersion of psychological technologies into fields like design and art through the Bauhaus. But gestalt enjoys global popularity as a practice and discourse only after the war. 10 In gestalt, the principle is to model the interactions and relationships between objects. Max Wertheimer, founder of the gestalt school, demonstrates this epistemology in his discussion of “time forms” in music. He writes: “what is given me by the melody does not arise . . . as a secondary process from the sum of the pieces as such. Instead, what takes place in each single part already depends upon what the whole is” (qtd. in Green).11 The form, like the anagram, anticipates or precedes its discrete elements. If we are to think of this visually, then the static and indexical image of the photograph that comprises the cinema is only secondary to the form or structure that conditions the possible relations between stills and spectators. Gestalt psychology is interested in these generative forms, not in describing discrete entities.
       
      Gestalt psychology makes visible an epistemic shift, bridging the compartmentalizing and rationalizing experimental traditions emerging from psycho-physics with new concerns with consciousness, memory, and cognitive functioning. Beginning at the turn of the century, gestalt psychologists studied perception, or the organization of sensations, rather than direct stimulus response situations (Ash 1). Experimentally, gestalt psychologists focused on examining those places where subjects identify patterns or shapes that are not reducible to the elements of the stimulus. Their focus became the mediated relationship between subjects and the world, and not the direct relationship between external input and action. For example, the kind of visual phenomena gestalt psychologists were interested in is exemplified by the famous gestalt triangle Kanizsa used in 1955:
       

       
      The gestalt triangle.

       

      Click for larger view

      Fig. 7.

      The gestalt triangle.

       

       

      Kurt Koffka, Deren’s mentor at Smith, was intrigued by the fact that experimental subjects “see” objects like the triangle even though there is no triangle “actually” there. Cinema, of course, is the classic exemplar of gestalt phenomena. In 1912 Wertheimer, with Koffka’s assistance, researched the way people see movement from stills. This phenomenon demonstrated to them the possibility of a gestalt that inherently structures the nature of vision. As in a film that shows no movement, here there is no direct stimulus impinging upon the eye. That the triangle appears to be there demonstrates for Koffka and other gestalt psychologists that perception and stimulus do not correspond one-to-one. The production of the image of a triangle, for gesalt psychologists, gestures to the existence of a process of cognition coordinating relations between stimuli. Cognition and perception become part of the same process, and the boundary between reception and processing is degraded. Perception is a process, not reducible to singular reflex arcs, but determined by complex and changing relations between the organism and the environment. This gestalt investment in “wholes” and in experience that exceeds stimuli is refracted in Deren’s figure of the Anagram, where the
      cinema and the spectator together produce new perceptual possibilities.

       
      Gestalt psychology, in being concerned with interaction and not merely with causal action, therefore relies on a probabilistic temporality–on the production of an ordered psyche out of a chaotic environment. Köhler argues, for example, that in complex systems there is “no reason why things should develop in the direction of order rather than chaos.” However, he adds, “chaos can be prevented, and order enforced, if proper controls are imposed upon acting factors.” He gives the example of factory machines that, while they conform to principles of physics, impose a form and order that “man, not nature, has provided.” His interest as psychologist is in unearthing orderly patterns of human perception that allow cognition and produce order. He does not view this is an objective process, an inalienable law as in the natural sciences, but rather as a subjective process that constrains chance and chaos by systematically reproducing the same effects in all human beings. So while Köhler concedes that science cannot know what “red” might denote to every individual, science can know the process of relations and of producing order in the mind. “Thus,” he writes, “we must try to find a kind of function which is orderly and yet not entirely constrained by either inherited or acquired arrangements” (62-3, 69).
       
      Wertheimer coins a term for this process in 1914–Prägnanz–expressing the idea that all experienced structures always spontaneously assume the simplest arrangement possible under given conditions. This theory clearly invokes the second law of thermodynamics. As a science, gestalt emerges out of a concern for order–in nature and in society. Gestalt psychologists sought to define and explore the process by which perceptions are systematically organized and reach homeostatic equilibrium. Gestalt psychology sought not to unearth an absolute singular form or structure, but rather to isolate processes and relations that operate on similar principles while allowing for change, transformation, and the multiplicity and diversity–the subjectivity–of human experience.12 I argue this makes gestalt part of a broader shift in epistemology visible in many sciences throughout the 20th century–away from ontology and documentation and toward performativity, process, and prediction. The shift entails a redefinition of the scientific objective and, perhaps, of objectivity. Köhler argues in 1947 that there can be no separation between thought and the body, and all observations are fundamentally mediated by human perception: “About the organism, just as about other physical things, we know merely by a process of inference or construction. To the influence of other physical objects my organism responds with processes which establish the sensory world around me.” Rather than discover a non-sensory or extra-sensory world, gestalt psychology is interested in how we produce experience and in fact the “sensory world.” For gestaltists there is only an internal and self-referential world (Köhler 9).
       
      In entering the “subjective” space of sensory and perceptual mediation, gestalt psychologists also rethink the older categories of materiality and abstraction, mind and body, and representation and action. Gestalt psychology asks about generalizable processes: how is it that all humans appear to view cinema as moving? What process synthesizes this experience? The question therefore is not about the disjuncture between what is seen and presumably what is “really” there, but about how reality, now understood as experience, comes into being at all. This search for a reflexive or subjective method for ordering sense also threatens to degrade older categorical separations between materiality and abstraction, mind and body, cognition, perception, and sensation, or action/behavior and thought (Köhler 9). Breakdowns potently visible in Deren’s gestalt inspired choreographies for the camera, for example.
       
      Bateson also demonstrates this refocusing of scientific concern on “relations.” He writes that “[w]hen . . . it is realized that the recognition of Gestalten depends upon the formal relations among external events, then it is evident that thinking in terms of ‘things’ is secondary . . . all knowledge of external events is derived from the relationships between them” (Bateson and Ruesch 173). After the war, Bateson’s experimental and ethnographic work shifts to focus on the relationships between people and cultures, over and against defining any particular subjectivity or culture (Steps). It is, in fact, Bateson’s interest in anagrammatic structures that drives his investigations into both gestalt and game theory; and it is to his game theory and comparative ethnography that Deren responds in her letters to Bateson. For Bateson, games and gestalten share an epistemology. Both systems possess formal or methodological structures that generate a great variety of potential experiences. In his professional fields, such as communication science, cognitive science, and cybernetics, gestalt concepts are often used interchangeably with other logical and game-theoretical ideas. However, Bateson has reservations about games as well-particularly about the logic of prediction in games and the inability of rules to evolve–that he does not have about psychology. His reservations implicitly underpin Deren’s response to his lectures.
       
      While a serious background of game theory is impossible here, it should be noted that games, like gestalt psychology, become increasingly important in post-war American culture. Perhaps the most notable incarnation of this importance is John von Neumann and Oskar Morgenstern’s 1944 classic, Theory of Games and Economic Behavior. Influencing everything from computing to cold war politics, the game became both a critical metaphor and a mode of operating in many fields. Deren refers to this new cultural condition directly through reference to foreign policy, atomic weapons, and technically induced genocide of her time. While it is unclear if she distinguishes between different scientific or technical endeavors since psychology, physics, play, and probability are all recombined at will in her work, she is very astute in making visible these fields’ parallel epistemic patterns. Replacing an understanding of the market as a space where actors respond to external prices (dead variables), game theory by, among others, Morgenstern and von Neumann, understands actors as responding to each other. Markets, as well as political situations, emerge from the relationships between the agents involved through feedback interactions. There is no exteriority to the game except perhaps its “rules,” the templates by which the future gets extrapolated. The situation emerging out of these protocols can generate great complexity.13 Like the concept of gestalt that is often used to describe them, games in game theory are generative forms produced out of a set of processes or rules that create future possibility. Because games generate their own self-referential worlds, these are not representations. Games, like the post-war images of cinema, are said to be performative abstractions that materialize particular effects.
       
      But at the juncture between probabilistic time and predictive time, Bateson diagnoses a problem–games cannot evolve or change once begun. This repetition without change is the topic of the conversation between himself and Deren. He understands that the problem with “static” games is that they produce conditions for action, but not for different possible actions, only repetitive cycles culminating in potentially genocidal violence (nuclear war in this case)–he labels this a “paranoidal direction.” I would label it the logical and rational basis of irrationality and psychosis. These games, models, and approximations both assume the collapse of the perceptual field, a state of total psychosis and internal self-reference, and still desire the ability to gain control, to reassert objectivity–an impossible combination. Bateson also labels this situation “schizoid,” and goes on to redefine the pathology of schizophrenia as an impossible scenario where two incompatible logics compete. This tension at the heart of theories of games is, in fact, at the center of Bateson’s critique (Letter 2).
       
      Temporality also structures Deren’s response to the series of lectures Bateson gives linking game theory, nascent cybernetic concepts, and new models for ethnography and psychology.14 She documents a “heated” discussion with Gregory about “that old business of his linear analysis of nonlinear systems” (“Notebook” 25). She argues that his “dominance-submission, succor-dependence structure is wrong. That is, he builds up a whole structure of feedbacks, etc., because he starts off with such a linear, simplified process . . . It is better to complicate the premise by one dimension–time–and have a simple analytical structure flow from it than to keep the premise simple at any price only to have a very complex superstructure” (“Notebook” 25-26). Her concern with feedbacks and processes demonstrates her exposure to the language of computation, electrical engineering, and the cognitive sciences that are Bateson’s points of reference. And while her understanding of Bateson’s project may be limited, her personal notes identify a problem with the rigidity and linearity of his basic rules or premises and their incapacity to generate more complex systems and unknown futures. Deren maintains that the whole should be more than its parts. Systems are never reducible to their identifiable parts. Systems are never fully legible (“Notebook” 25-26).
       

      The Organization of Time

       
      If I have insisted on situating Deren within this broader history of epistemology and representation it is, of course, to facilitate a reflexive encounter with the present. Situating our own practices takes particular valence within this context where probability, temporal variability, and emergence become the very technical substrate not only for art and philosophy, but also for communication and game theory, cybernetics, gestalt and cognitive sciences. History, here, becomes theory, quite literally. In systems where the past is always being used to predict the future, as in games, the possibility of emergence is always in question. Games can make automatic repetition into technology.
       
      Repetition and automation preoccupy Deren in her writing to and about Bateson. What Deren discovers in his lecture, and in her review of Mead and Bateson’s film footage, is a productive tension between form and content. While Bateson critiques game theory in his lectures and persistently attacks the authorial voice of anthropology, his form–a language of distanciation, linear and repetitive interaction, generic and de-contextualized models–is nostalgic and archival. It is a language of objectivity arriving from an earlier moment in anthropology, a language associated with the archival and objective epistemologies of another age. A language of statistics and mechanism. This language, Deren argues, undermines his ethical effort to rethink game theory. Deren notes that Bateson is trapped in a feedback loop; one that he, himself, fails to recognize. She argues that he is dedicated to maintaining a reductive premise, “a linear, simplified process,” even when describing a complex system (“Notebook” 25). His need to isolate a generic and global process of cultural conflict forces reductivism in thought. Implicitly, she senses that Bateson, despite his own interest in complexity, falls prey to the same problems of game theory in his dedication to unearthing, and authoritatively describing, generic processes governing human cultures. She feels he is creating models no more dynamic or changeable than those of games (“Notebook” 25-26).
       
      Deren seizes upon an internal temporal disjuncture that structures both game theories and gestalt psychologies–between the production of probabilities and the desire to contain chance and reassert older ideals of authority. For example, this temporal disjuncture historically plays out in gestalt psychology through an inbuilt tension between universal and cultural explanations of cognition and perception. While gestaltists (and game theorists) reconfigure objectivity as emanating from within experience rather than outside of it, as a science they still sought to disciplinarize and to impose a singular logic and rigorous method for psychological investigation. Gestalt, as the historian Mitchell Ash notes, “was not only, or not simply, a revolt against positivism” (3). Gestalt is haunted by the ghost of previous histories of evidence, rationality, positivism, and objectivity. We all, apparently, see cinematic movement and triangles even if we know that cinema is made of stills. The emerging moral and ethical question is: What do we make of this generalization applicable to “all” humans? Perception organized into homeostatic equilibrium as a rule. While gestalt demonstrates that perception and cognition can be trained, influenced, and reproduced, there is also the possibility that this is a perception defined as naturalized, a-historical, culturally non-specific and, perhaps, as later debates demonstrate, biologically ordained. Gestalt psychologists create new boundaries between nature and culture, objectivity and subjectivity, and perception, sensation, and cognition, but struggle with the normative terms set by modern psychological and biological projects for truth. Even if they debate the place of nature and nurture, learning or innateness, in developing gestalt forms, the terms of the debate are fundamentally normative and disciplinary. Gestalt psychology hybridizes two forms of discourse.15
       
      This disjuncture, in the post-war period, between chance and determinism debates the significance of authority or “control,” a term that binds Deren to Bateson, both pragmatically in that she wants to get a Guggenheim and be authorized by scientists and anthropologists, and conceptually because it is a site in which to negotiate a new separation between art and science. Deren herself regularly deploys this term in labeling her cinema a “controlled accident” (“Cinematography”). Control is indeed an internally inconsistent term at this moment (and perhaps even in our moment) of history. In game theory, and in the post-war discourse of gestalt, control is a double figure–both the condition of possibility for emergence, and the ideal of an authoritative account of future action. Game theory, especially, hopes that the models, templates, and approximations that produce the system can simultaneously analyze it. In game theory perception, cognition, and analysis are all the same. The game is both representative and predictive. Control is the function that temporally organizes the process of game play. But control can also mean perfect prediction, the production of a future that replicates past data. The problem, as Bateson says–and as Deren is quick to affirm in her comment that “time perspective” defines “man,” allowing him to “build machines” and act “idiosyncratically”–is that in game theory the rules are static. Rules cannot change within the game, and the players cannot learn.16 Time, for Deren, is destroyed when the model and the world become one. Game theories use past data to predict the future, but the new political and ethical concern is that the technology obscures the fact that while we are always predicting different futures, we do so according to the same form or operation. Deren is worried that Bateson, in his reformulation of psychology and culture through game and communication theory, enacts the very problem he is describing.
       
      Whether I do or do not agree with Deren’s appraisal of this particular lecture (Bateson is hardly an ethnographer dedicated to authority or objectivity), she highlights an important point. Ethical concerns in gaming and art, I argue through Deren, now do not merely concern the manipulation of time, but also the specific organization of time. In Deren’s discourse, art is classified not by telling topical or technical concerns apart–artists use new technologies and mediums, they speak to science–but by organizing them according to their different temporal organizations. More importantly, for Deren only particular forms of practice, now labeled art, allow us to recognize and experience time’s movements and passage consciously. The emerging question Deren’s work poses is: how will time be organized, now that its teleological operations are unmoored and history is available for recombination? Her work also asks: what does it mean for time to enter the realm of experience and consciousness? For while she adheres to the possibility of a subject capable of change, she wavers between the desire for a psychotic perception and the need to differentiate between entities within the field of perception.
       
      Deren is very explicit about consciousness. She violently resists the shock and unconscious automatism of Surrealism, for example. She always denies the possibility that her work expresses the unconscious. She considers her films the result of a “controlled accident,” of an intentional experiment that produces chance, and not of a time and fate outside of subjective control. Time, for Deren, unlike for Bergson, emerges from within a system. It is subject to control. Time is produced by the artist through the cinematic practice. Time is not bought into representation; it emerges from purposefully produced aesthetic structures. It appears that Deren harbors her own personal archive of a never-realized dream of sovereignty and agency that she explicitly seeks to see, finally realized, through the cinematic medium (“Cinema” 29-31). In Deren’s discourse memory becomes central to the project of making time experienced. It is, however, a memory infected, like Bateson’s “linear analysis” by problems of storage and archiving. The fate of this archive, the archive of older forms of storage and knowledge, the archive of images and their taxonomies, the archive as itself an historically specific form of storage inherent in the cinema and to 19th century anthropology and psychology, is now unclear. Deren wants to break from a history of objectivity and ontology, those orders affiliated with the 19th century archive, but at the same time she desires to preserve memory and the trace of indexicality, maybe history and context. She wants time to feedback into the image, but she does not want us to identify this time as known and controllable, but rather as alien and outside of legibility.17
       
      Memory takes a complex place in this discourse as the site that both produces time and refuses identification. Deren defines memory very particularly as reconfiguring the index in time. She offers two axes for memory–horizontal and vertical. Deren writes:
       

      By “horizontal” I mean that the memory of man is not committed to the natural chronology of his experience . . . On the contrary, he has access to all his experience simultaneously . . . he can compare similar portions of events widely disparate in time and place . . . and he is able to perceive that a natural, chronological whole is not immutable, but that it is a dynamic relationship of functioning parts.
       

      (“Cinema” 11)

       

      What art must utilize and preserve, she argues, is not the direct index, but rather this “horizontal” memory, which can produce new relations between times rather than organize time in one direction. This is not a linear memory, even as it can facilitate change. This is also not a memory based on an archive of static, spatial representations. Rather, this memory bank is relational. Deren wishes to evoke the relationships between subjects, and between subjectivity, perception, and cinema.

       
      Two temporal vectors operate in this discourse. On the one hand, Deren assumes the availability of an infinite and recombinant storage space for manipulation, and on the other, she seeks not to return to any single element within this storage system, but always to focus on totalities (gestalten) that exceed individual elements. She dreams of a memory-storage system operating in internally referential feedback loops, one that produces new relations between historical events and “functioning parts.” In this, Deren reflects much of what I have already argued in this article about an historical shift in favor of the record and of process. Two times operate simultaneously in her work–repetitive feedback and an irreversible teleology.
       
      Deren’s most complex film, Ritual in Transfigured Time, interrogates this relationship between cinema and time. The filmmaker, however, counter to her interlocutors in psychology and anthropology, strenuously insists on reattaching these two temporal vectors of feedback and probability to history and subjectivity. Deren insists on reminding us both of the memorializing and indexical functions of the photograph embedded within the cinema, and of the historically changing, situated, and contested structure of visuality. The film adamantly maintains a memory of the index, but only in order to rethink the nature of subjectivity and visuality in the future. The film, not incidentally, is completed in 1946, when Deren begins to engage with Bateson and Mead. While most film criticism has highlighted the movie’s focus on ritual and ethnography,18 I argue that this film highlights Deren’s alternative idea of games and images. It is also, in many ways, a synthesis of an on-going process. Deren is not a filmmaker whose project can be comprehended in any one film, or text, or lecture, but rather is about the on-going relations between all these sites. In many senses, her films, themselves, are merely traces of another process, one that can never be fully defined, or seen. In this final moment in this essay, I want to use this film to feed-back into all that I have already discussed in her work.
       

       
      Stills from Ritual. 1946.  © Mystic Fire Video, 2002.

       

      Click for larger view

      Fig. 8.

      Stills from Ritual. 1946.

      © Mystic Fire Video, 2002.
       

       
      Deren’s early script of Ritual in Transfigured Time describes a transformation in time, a metamorphosis (Legend 453). “Slow motion is the microscope of time,” Deren writes. And under this microscope, at its end, the “Fourth dimension is you.” The ritual will end and the protagonist (played by a young Afro-Caribbean dancer, Rita Christiani) will finally become Other, changing places with a character played by Deren. She will move away from death to life, changing from a “widow” to a “bride.” History will reverse itself to embrace, in Deren’s terms, “life.” This is a film about “change of identity…and sudden change in stature of relationship” (“Pre-production Notes” 466). Her opening description of the film anticipates that time will be involved in the production of a new form of inter-subjectivity or “relationship” between the fixity of identity and the “metamorphosis” of becoming a subject.
       
      In keeping with her anagrammatic practice, Deren’s production notes dissect the movie into seven segments, laying out every shot and movement. This is a movie pre-planned in every detail, but one she still hopes will induce the “controlled accident.” Each scene feeds back into previous one through the repetition of gesture and figure. The movie opens with a series of shots in a room, where our two protaganists–Deren and the dancer Rita Christiani–first encounter each other. They are watched by a third figure–Anäis Nin–a figure who reappears as a third eye throughout the film. By watching, she duplicates the viewer in the film, but we are never allowed access to her perspective. She is thus a site of the limit of visibility in the structure of the film. Nin occupies the place of a witness, perhaps to historical change and to the limits of describing or knowing this process. Already from the first scene, therefore, Deren emphasizes the problem of seeing and recording the past.
       
      In this room, Deren is playing with yarn, creating a cat’s cradle, as reference to children’s games and to myth and ritual action. These are practices that are untimely, arriving from elsewhere, but also practices that mediate the interaction between subjects. As the scene progresses, the tempo becomes ever slower and Deren’s movement’s more dramatized, until the yarn flies off, and with a cinema cut we are thrust into another room full of people. No sooner are we offered a series of figures with which to potentially identify, than this alignment between our vision and the camera is disrupted through the cut and the manipulation of the time of events in the film. A series of shots tracks Christiani’s outstretched hand as she approaches the figure who is weaving. The two women never touch, so that our phenomenal expectations of an encounter are never answered. In this failure of events, however, to culminate in rational action, we are also left to wonder at the potential future of these figures. We are, thus, not allowed to establish who these women are, nor what their specific relationship to each other might be. Deren refuses us as spectators access to the present, so we cannot render these subjects into static objects. Nor are we offered solace in cinematic convention, since the abruptness of the edit between one room and another is jarring and unexpected.
       
      The cut into the “second” scene comes through the tracking of this figure–Christiani–and maintains a relationship to interior space, but the room is now different. In this scene, the protagonist (Christiani) enters the room as a bride (perhaps of Christ) in black (see Fig. 9 below). The camera cuts to a partial view of a room seemingly full of men in suits and women in dark dresses and dark lipstick. It appears to be a party. We are never offered an establishing shot, and we are never sure if our viewpoint coincides with that of the protagonist. We are thus refused any commanding sense of where or when this event is happening. There is a cut back to the “bride.” She removes a veil from her head and enters the room. With this gesture she is transformed into another member of the partying group. Bereft of veil and cross, she is another woman in a dark dress.
       

       
      The "bride" in Ritual. 1946.  © Mystic Fire Video, 2002.

       

      Click for larger view

      Fig. 9.

      The “bride” in Ritual. 1946.

      © Mystic Fire Video, 2002.
       

       
      But the camera tracks her differently, offering her the intimacy of the close up, focusing on her facial expression. As viewers, we register on the protagonist’s face the search for the other woman she initially encountered in a game. Christiani is among the only individuals (the other in this scene is Nin) whom we actually recognize. She is the only figure to look at the camera directly. She is also, of course, racially marked, as the black woman in the party. Her skin color is not what identifies her. The movie is black and white, there is no sound, her skin is not truly visible. Rather, we identify her though differences in her hairstyle, gesture, and lack of make-up. She is the only individual in a mass of mechanically moving and similarly dressed and made up people.
       
      Deren’s noteworthy move here is to make difference appears equivalent to gesture. Both the normative social actions and the movements that separate and differentiate subjects are no longer representative, but performative. Not only does gesture comprise the terrain of visuality, but it is also rendered equivalent to the technology of cinematic manufacture. It is the choreography of gesture that edits this movie, producing perception. Difference, the very gestural interactions between the figures, is the technology that makes this cinema–just as in gestalt it is the relations between objects–the very process of perception, that produces cognition. The logic of the performative sign also governs Deren’s anagrammatic figure and A Study in Choreography for Camera (1945). Representation thus only enters in delay, as the spectator retroactively recognizes, and assigns meaning to, the performative and historical nature of vision. Only through this feedback loop where gestural conventions are returned to us after temporal delay do we become conscious of how and who we see. From the beginning of this movie, therefore, we are made mindful of the historical nature of vision. We recognize both the ability to perceive difference and the conventions that make us look. The party is a dramatization of social norms fed-back to us through the cinema.
       
      The next series of shots, however, reveals that the movie will not allow us to fully identify and classify either historical norms or difference. The camera zooms out, and we start to see movement. The party is a dance, a pas de deux between people meeting and greeting each other. We are offered mid-length shots capturing the upper-bodies and hands of these “dancers” greeting each other. The moments of greeting are continually repeated. These repetitions, however, are interspersed with two forms of cutting. On the one hand there are sudden moments of stillness–photographs. People caught in indefinite poses, in almost, but never completed, greetings. On the other hand, we are regularly offered shots of Christiani and Nin encountering each other. The camera focuses on their faces, affording us the ability to witness their moment of almost-recognition. I say “almost” because the facial expression assumes some familiarity on our part, but without a defined emotion or identification. Neither looks at the camera; they are caught to the side. The look they give each other is more a glance than a gaze.
       
      As the two women encounter each other, their gestures are so slow as to allow us to see their eyes momentarily meet, and to note the gesture of their bodies. Each time they meet, their interaction subtly changes, becoming slightly elongated. Theirs is the only relationship that appears to progress. The protagonist’s movement across the room is a linear counterpoint to the empty and repeated performances of sociality that do not engage in recognition even as they are identifiable.
       
      Here both time and cinematic convention are made visible. The photographic still elongates time and serves as a referent to photography, a reminder that the cinema carries within it the memory of the ontology and indexicality of photography. The images are also among the most historically situated in the film, depicting the social dress and manners of a party in the mid-1940s in a New York apartment. But not exactly. These images are not really indexes; they are referents to indexicality itself. The photograph refuses to serve as an index because its function is merely to make us conscious of perception itself. By stopping movements from commencing and cutting into the sensory-motor chain, the photograph forces us to recognize the very conventions of visuality, just as the repetition of social codes forces historical recognition of normativity. Two temporal vectors develop–the circular repetition of individuals greeting each other and the linear and diegetic search for the Other–which mirror the historical memory of the index against the tightly choreographed movement of the film.
       
      At the final moment of this scene there is another cut. Through a pose, the space of the party is transformed into another: we enter a third space or “scene,” although neither term is appropriate. At the final moment of the party Christiani enters a close-up with a man (Frank Westerbrook). They appear about to engage in a kiss, or perhaps an assault (see Fig. 10 below). The situation is rendered ambiguously in that the woman’s face is turned away. The camera holds still. It is almost a photographic still, although not quite–the freeze frame does not last long enough, and the animation of the dancers is not entirely stopped. Through the wavering of this moment of potentiality in interaction between desire and violence, there is an immediate cut to almost the same pose, now in a garden filled with Greco-Roman statues, a space where monument and memory collapse. Deren thus makes explicit the relationship between ideal forms and historical change.
       

       
      Stills from the third "scene" of Ritual. 1946.  © Mystic Fire Video, 2002.

       

      Click for larger view

      Fig. 10.

      Stills from the third “scene” of Ritual. 1946.

      © Mystic Fire Video, 2002.
       

       
      We are never permitted, however, to dwell on the monumental and ideal facet of this environment. The forms of sexual perfection and idealized body encoded within the Greco-Roman aesthetic do not enact themselves in the sexual act. For immediately upon entry into this space, the potentially sexual act of encounter in a kiss (or assault) generates a different form of action (see the figures above). The scene immediately cuts to three women from the party, dancing in a circle. A cut doubly referencing the lingering trace of social convention that enters this dream-like space from the previous scene, and an ode to ritual enactment and game. This is the pattern that repeats in all the scenes. Both myth and history are continually reintroduced through repetitive forms of games.
       
      From a brief series of shots showing the women, we are thrust back to the couple. Their kiss does not end. Rather, the dancer lurches into the air. We track her arms in a circle, the camera shot is beneath her, then the camera shifts idiosyncratically to another viewpoint, perhaps that of the male dancer. But not quite, because we see the back of his shoulder and his extended arm, framing her movements, perhaps threatening her body as she twists on the ground. The camera is angled and the movements deployed in slower motion so that the actual reverberations of the fall and the quivering of her muscles are visible, offering a very embodied sense to the image. There is a cut back to three women in the background dancing in a circle, as though around a maypole, or playing “ring around the rosy.” The segment vacillates between these two sites of action–the couple and the triad of women. The maypole circle repeats until the dancers fly off as the couple continues in their athletic, or perhaps, violent movements. We are offered scenes in this dance that are almost mimetic of Leni Riefensthal’s Triumph of the Will (1935), as the male dancer’s naked body is filmed against Grecian columns:
       

       
      Frank Westerbrook in Ritual. 1946.  © Mystic Fire Video, 2002.

       

      Click for larger view

      Fig. 11.

      Frank Westerbrook in Ritual. 1946.

      © Mystic Fire Video, 2002.
       

       
      Ideals of body and history play against the incoherence of a film where there is no clear identification of who these individuals are, or what their ambitions might be.
       
      All the figures finally fling apart and recombine. The male dancer joins the circle game, as the protagonist continues her search. Repeatedly one action after another gets strung into another set of motions. The male and female dancers appear caught in a repetitive game of chasing one another. The women in the circle repeat another history. The repetition of a circular dance is associated with death, ritual, the plague, a longue durée in history against the speedy and constantly changing flight and fight of this couple dancing and chasing each other. Deren interjects photographic stills in the garden scene at precisely those moments of choreographic velocity when bodies fling apart, and we assume certain linear laws of Newtonian physics to take hold. Our expectations are thwarted. For example, at one moment a woman is flung out of the circle. Her body has no structured pose and shows no intent. At another moment (see Fig. 12 below) the male dancer suddenly leaps out of a statuesque pose to pursue the protagonist. This leap, however, occurs at almost the wrong moment for such still capture. Unlike the statuesque pose preceding it, this is not a defined or clear action. It is neither monumental nor memorial. It is undefined. It is a moment of preservation that does not show historical intentionality or identificatory power as an action.
       

       
      Garden Chase Sequence, Ritual in Transfigured Time. 1946.  © Mystic Fire Video, 2002.

       

      Click for larger view

      Fig. 12.

      Garden Chase Sequence, Ritual in Transfigured Time. 1946.

      © Mystic Fire Video, 2002.
       

       
      These photographic images are images of potentiality and illegibility. They offer a memorial counterpoint to the moving images unfolding in the present. These moments of stasis interrupt action, depicting actions that fail to finalize and are therefore indecipherable in intent or purpose. These images convey supplemental and excessive gestures. These are images that carry within them not the index as an authority over the past, but an index of the very practice of media and the process by which history is narrativized. They make the nature of the medium visible, thus disrupting cinema’s own omniscience as a time-based and animated medium, and reminding the very machine of its own history and internal resistances.
       
      Deren makes us aware that mythic cinematic and social forms are unattainable ideals. The greetings photographed in the film are too theatrical and dramatized, too sudden or disrupted to be truly identifiable as normal behavior or as part of a causal story line. The choreographed movement, intercut with stills, is marginally familiar. We become conscious that it is familiar, but also see it as uncanny. Deren forces us to look in a new manner at the mundane and everyday practices of sociality. We are forced to see acts of expression and excess. We are forced to recognize the forms that constrain and produce our actions. Finally, we are made conscious of the mediums–of technical media, of society–that structure our very movements. These images are reminders of the technical forms through which cinema provides purpose and linearity where none exist. In this moment of cinematic re-memory, all the times are rearranged, and the viewer and the camera both “fail” to achieve a command over the time or space of the film. These are images, therefore, that operate like Deren’s memory–not to stop time and organize it but to make visible relationships between subjects. These images make the production of time, itself, available to perception.
       
      There are two temporal movements, therefore, in the film: the repetitive actions of these social, encoded, and gendered games replayed in the visceral actions of the dancers, and the linear diegetic narrative of search and transformation. These two vectors are embedded in two cinematic actions–the recombination of film’s own history and the production of new relations between images. These two directions cut into each other, both repeating themselves but never culminating. These vectors emerge from a cinema structured on gestalt forms. If visuality is on display, it is already embedded in the film notes and in Deren’s anagrammatic schemas. Deren wants to make perception, itself, a techne. Yet out of this structure she seeks to create accidents. A whole beyond the sum of its parts. For this reason, perhaps, the movie insists on repetition–of choreographed movements, of cinematic convention, of mediums. Deren continues this mode as the movie moves through new geographies, culminating in a moment of inter-subjective transformation where Deren and Christiani become each other.
       
      This ending culminates in multiple possibilities as an action of inter-subjective substitution whose effects and signification have multiple interpretations. As Ute Holl argues, “Emotions are artificially, almost mathematically, produced by technical devices” in a film that is “constructing and transforming subjects,” but never depicting them, a film that Holl suggests produces subjectivity from without through this mathematical logic (157). This is a film that produces psychology as an external medium, thus denigrating the sutured subject, while continuing to affirm the possibility of differentiation and subject production. This film operates like the anagrammatic and gestalt logic that underpins its making.
       
      But, Deren refuses gestalt’s effort to recuperate the authority of science. Rather, she produces an image that pushes the past towards the future, but does not ontologically describe or define the subject in the present. In this film the action never stops, and there is no finality or culmination to the movie. We might believe that the loop by which the women switch places would be replicated, just as the movie endlessly replays the same cinematic devices, recovering an endless archive of forms, from parties to dances, to move us through spaces familiar, yet transformed, through their associations.
       

      Failure to Feedback

       
      Structure and emergence must recombine. Deren in a series of untitled notes to the movie writes that, “Cubism of event–we do not recognize what is occurring–over and over we fail” (“Pre-production Notes” 468). How do we understand this idea of a “failure” to depict or identify the subject in relation to time? I argue that Deren deploys a series of cinematic conventions in order to create a fissure between the index of the past and the future.
       
      This failure to identify emerges from the relationship between the technical substrate of the medium and its own archive of conventions, mirrored by the subjective time of performance and sociality. At the level of convention, the film is about the archive of cinema itself: making visible, through re-performance, conventions of editing, photography, cinematography, camera work, and recording speeds. The repetitions are also choreographic, embedded in the structure of “games” such as greeting rituals at parties and children’s dances. The games and the repetitive cinematic conventions literally mime a repetition without difference. It is the technological repetition of media, and the subjective repetition of sociality rendered equivalent. This repetition is dissected, however, by the very forward flow of another choreography that is about chance and change.
       
      The multiple times emerging from the film make the spectator recognize both media and history. On one hand this focus on cadence, editing, and non-linear operations reveals the specific nature of the filmic medium. Film’s own timeliness and sense of time. On the other hand the viewer begins to become conscious of history–specific rituals, specific times and places, specific forms of cinema, but also specific and codified ideals of social norms, gendered interaction, and bodies. If there is a technology made visible in this film it is that of the process of social codification and formalization. The very process of ritual is rendered technical and representable here. It is not, however, one particular ritual that is depicted in this movie, but the entire process of rituals, particularly those of Cold War American sociality.
       
      But these recognitions of the processes by which we come into being are not identifications. We are offered traces of a history of normativity. The image is of a memory of the process of subjectivization. We are never offered the direct index–the image of the subject as an object. Nor is this historical specificity ever defined. Rather it is merely produced as a possibility. The viewers must project their individual understanding of time and place upon the film. It is the viewer who must bring the scenes, in delay, into representation through a process of projection. The result might be an “accident”; Deren hopes it will generate a new form of future that does not repeat the past. This inability to return is pronounced if we think about this film within Deren’s oeuvre. The filmmaker continually moves between mediums, replaying these cinematic conventions in her cinema theory, recycling her own aesthetic conventions in all her films. No one piece of her work, therefore, stands alone as an object. No one element of her work is ever finished.
       
      Neither the awareness of the medium nor of history is therefore permitted to complete. We cannot return; the feedback loop fails to finish or finalize. Unlike the theories of Bateson, or the return of the objective voice, Deren “fails” to go back to any set ideal or to fully allow us to identify those other histories–either of the cinema, or of the society–that she documents. This failure allows temporal multiplicity to enter, but defers any ability to gain authority over the past, or the individuals within it. The multiplicity of times forces an opening that does not allow a return to static and nostalgic ideals of subjectivity.
       
      This filmmaking, I argue, ethically activates all that I have discussed in this essay about the post-war displacement of ontology for process, the availability of the index for manipulation, and the communicative obsession with prediction and emergence. Deren must deal with feedback and with change simultaneously. By making these two times available synchronously, Deren, I argue, opens up the possibility of other modes of being. Consciousness, perhaps subjectivity, in her cinema lies within this gap between prediction and return.
       
      Deren holds a mirror to the theories of communication and control, and recognizes that it is precisely a multiplicity of communicative situations, always a question of history, situation, and time, that allows subjective agency. She writes in her notebooks that she might have misunderstood Bateson’s talk. But what she does understand is that Bateson is enacting a scientific discourse, performing a discussion that wrenches the specificity of Bali out of its context, and makes it amenable to comparison with Von Neumann’s games, and with the behaviors of other tribes–policy makers, communication scientists, curators at museums. Intuitively, she understands that this emergent model of image and communication is productive and that it is a site both of danger and of possibility. For this process, now unmoored, is amenable to any manipulation.
       
      When Mead and Bateson were in Bali they sought to find the expression of the interior mind of the native in the gesture of the body. Unable to speak any language of the region, skeptical of their translators, they turned away from translation and representation in written language. Instead, they created a recording machine. They wanted to capture everything. They filmed miles of stills. In the course of this study, the search for difference metamorphosed into an archive of performative inscriptions and gestures from which a new practice of cinema, and anthropology, then emerged. Both anthropologists used this research to develop cybernetic theories of mind and human development after the war (Bateson and Mead, “Introduction,” Balinese). The result was the elimination of situation, context, and history, a pure process extracted from any phenomenal time. Difference turned into a technology of communication and performance. On one hand this is an opening…an abandonment of the normative strictures of a previous eras’ Oedipal situations and essential biologies. A release from discipline. There are no objects here for study. There are no clear boundaries to demarcate human difference. But there are new technocratic orders. For the emergent computational and psychological orders often destroyed multiplicity and time in the name of multiplicity and time, simultaneously calling for the possibility of difference in communicative situations and creating processes so perfectly interchangeable and convergent that such multiplicity ceases to exist. The artist, in turn, seeks to return these processes to lived time, to memory, to the specificity of different forms of being and living. She still aspires to produce meaning, not merely messages. She hopes that the memory trace of consciousness, and humanism, might yet inform this condition.
       
      Perhaps this engagement between art and science allows us to transform our own thinking. We experience a shock of recognition, since so much emanating from these new cinemas and technologies that emerge after the war animates our contemporary theorization and discourse of the image. The question about time and the image is not, however, whether the time image is the digital image, or whether the desire for cinema is now a form of nostalgia. Rather, it opens to a series of questions about how we want time to be organized in our systems. In a world of infinite archives, feedback loops, performative epistemologies, and predictive times, we might ask, instead, what work it does to return to a memory of a medium or a subject? Which memory traces do we wish to activate? And to what effects?
       
      We may also ask what is at stake in the relationship between art, science, and technology. Do we want these three to collapse, or do we desire differentiation in practices and goals? Ultimately, the concerns about game theories and histories of objectivity and subjectivity are also competing imaginaries about the relationship between technology, repetition, and imagination. It is not whether Deren’s vision is better than that of gestalt psychology or anthropology, but rather what is lost if we fail to maintain any separation between these three forms of knowing and being in the world… if anything. In the interaction between film, science, and the technology of games after the war something is made visible–the production of radically different forms of visuality and perception, and perhaps even life, from the same material substrate. Despite sharing the same episteme with her interlocutors, Deren crafts films that produce very different effects in the world than psychological theories or game theories. I argue she produces a form of desire that has not yet been formalized as technology.
       
      I am returned to Bateson. He is, after all, prominently remembered for formulating a new definition of difference in terms of information, thereby revising modern anthropological formulations of both otherness and time. He argues that information is “any difference that makes a difference to a conscious, human mind.” In his summation, data can come from anywhere (either within or outside the mind) and information does not need to be meaningful it must merely be effective. Communication is, therefore, about effects and behavior. Consciousness is also revised, perhaps separated forever from a relationship to “spirit;” in Bateson’s formulation, to be conscious is merely to be able to take different paths of action, it is not to be separated from the external world. Most importantly, for Bateson difference is non-ontological, but rather processional and the result of interactions. Difference is always relative and relational. If difference is defined by information, and information is a measure of potential states or actions a system can take, then difference is also always already defined as emergent, a state and not a static object (Steps 459).
       
      Deren responds indirectly by asking whether this might not be an automation of emergence or difference itself. She marks a moment in which the site that allows us to think differentiation moves away from ontological categorization to the very structure of communication channels. Change is made static no longer through a mechanical process of rationalizing time, but through a discourse that insists on emergence. It is to this possibility that our contemporary thought must answer. In her cinema, the filmmaker suggests, perhaps not all differences can be rendered equivalent through this model of information. Perhaps, Deren suggests, one can produce images that can contain forms of non-equivalent encounter, differences that are neither static nor immediately amenable to transmission and circulation into any other medium. What is an image of difference that can still produce meaning or signification–dare I still say representation? A difference that is no longer only a difference, but can organize affect and gesture into signification. This difference comes through a very particular organization of temporal multiplicity. It is immanent. Perhaps this is what Deren would call art.
       
      There is much at stake, therefore, in this renegotiation of bodies and images, time and otherness, all on the screen. For this dream of an image that can still confront the Other with love, that can open to a world that is not yet known… has not yet been realized.
       

       
      Becoming Other. Rita Christiani and Maya Deren in transformation in Ritual in Transfigured Time. 1946.  © Mystic Fire Video, 2002.

       

      Click for larger view

      Fig. 13.

      Becoming Other. Rita Christiani and Maya Deren in transformation in Ritual in Transfigured Time. 1946.

      © Mystic Fire Video, 2002.
       

       

      Orit Halpern is an Assistant Professor of History and Media Studies at the New School for Social Research and Eugene Lang College. She works on histories of temporality, archiving, and representation in digital systems. Her manuscript The Eye of Time: Histories of Representation, Perception, and Archiving in Cybernetic Thought is currently under review. Her research has appeared or will be appearing in C-theory, Configurations, and the Journal of Visual Culture. She has also produced multi-media installations and web-based works at the intersection of art and science that have appeared in venues such as ZKM and Rhizome. Currently, she is working to develop new lab-based research spaces integrating art, design, and the social sciences at the New School and Parsons School of Design. She is the co-founder of The Visual Culture Lab, a group bringing historians and theorists of media, art, design, and politics together to rethink the relationship between politics and aesthetics, and she is also a member of the Center for Transformative Media at Parsons. All her work and material can be accessed at: www.orithalpern.net.
       

      Notes

       
      I want to thank the archivists at the Howard Gottlieb Archive at Boston University for assistance with the Deren papers. Their time and generosity bought her work and thinking to life. I would also like to thank the support of the Franklin Humanities Institute at Duke University and the Interface Seminar Post-doctoral Fellowship 2006-07, for the support and funding for this research. I also want to thank the following individuals for their invaluable input and commentary–Joe Dumit, Robert Mitchell, Patricia Clough, Timothy Lenoir, Deborah Levitt, Vicky Hattam, David Brody, and the Visual Culture Working Group at NSSR and Parsons.
       

      1. “Teaching by muscular rote in which the pupil is made to perform the correct movements is most strikingly developed in the dancing lesson… This sequence of photographs illustrates two essential points in Balinese character formation. From his dancing lesson, the pupil learns passivity, and he acquires a separate awareness in the different parts of the body (cf. Pl.20, fig.4)” (Bateson and Mead 87).

       
      2. Bateson discusses how his affinity with cybernetics emerges from his ethnography in the preface to Naven.

       

       
      3. Maya Deren, Handwritten Notes from Lectures-Gestalt Psychology with Kurt Koffka, September 1938, Maya Deren Papers, box 7, Folder 5. Boston University, Howard Gottlieb Archive, Special Collections, Boston. Print.

       

       
      4. “Climate of Communication.” 1946-47. Deren Collection, box 4, Folder 1. Boston University Howard Gottlieb Archive Special Collections. Boston. Print. See also Catrina Neiman’s Art and Anthropology at the Crossroads.

       

       
      5. Note to Meshes of the Afternoon (1943) transcribed from the DVD, New York: Mystic Fire Video, 2002.

       

       
      6. Throughout the “Anagram” essay Deren compares Surrealism and shock to the effects of the Bomb. She began a film project with Marcel Duchamp in 1943, The Witches Cradle, that was never completed.

       

       
      7. For more work on Deren’s relationship to American cinema see Thomas Schatz’s Boom and Bust: American Cinema in the 1940s.

       

       
      8. “Previous films, most significantly Rene Clair’s Dadaist Entr’acte (1924), investigating the kinaesthetic impact of the medium and showing an ‘impossible’ shot of a ballet dancer taken from beneath her feet (she is dancing on a glass table), or Cocteau’s Blood of a Poet, where death appears as a Black male dancer appearing as a ghost by way of reversal on the negative, paralleled Deren’s use of both dancers and the black male body. However, nothing quite approaching as hers had developed before that time” (Interview with Talley Beatty).

       

       
      9. See Deleuze, The Movement-Image; Bergson, Matter and Memory; and Deren, “Anagram.”

       

       
      10. For background on gestalt’s place in psychology, history of science, and post-war America, see Goodwin, Mandler, and Harrington. For work on gestalt and perception see Orit Halpern, Dreams for Our Perceptual Present.

       

       
      11. As Green notes, “In other words, one hears the melody first and only then may perceptually divide it up into notes. Similarly in vision, one sees the form of the circle first — it is given ‘im-mediately’ (i.e. its apprehension is not mediated by a process of part-summation). Only after this primary apprehension might one notice that it is made up of lines or dots or stars.”

       

       
      12. While gestalt psychology inherits both concepts of probabilistic and relational temporalities, and the subsequent problems of objectivity and recording from modernity, as a science it also turns older problems of objectivity into subjective possibilities for research. Refracting arguments made by scholars such as art historian Jonathan Crary about the subjectivization of vision in modernity, gestalt psychology responds directly to contentions in the physical and behavioral sciences that the subjective nature of perception cannot be dealt with scientifically by arguing that, in fact, everything is subjective, and this is the new foundation for a logical methodology. No longer concerned with an absolute real, however, gestalt psychologists shift experimental interest to probing the subjective nature of human experience.

       

       
      13. This summation of game theory is indebted to the work of Philip Mirowski, Machine Dreams: Economics Becomes a Cyborg Science.

       

       
      14. Deren attended Bateson’s talks at the New School, and also Mead and Bateson’s discussion of their Balinese work in Franz Boas’ salon in New York in the course of 1946-47. In her archive there is a folder labeled “On Communication,” with a series of notes on her thoughts in these directions. She felt that hearing Bateson, she had found someone with whom her previous thought found affinity. She viewed her work after exposure to his ideas as organically extending the work she had done before. We should not view the introduction of communication as somehow a critical break point, but rather as a moment formalizing her concepts, and offering further terms.

       

       
      15. Gestalt’s relationship to Nazism and eugenics is contested. Arguments in Gestalt psychology were used on both sides, and were appropriated for both arguments supporting nurture and nature in understanding human psychological development. See Harrington.

       

       
      16. This is Bateson’s critique of game theory, based on his ethnographic work. See “Bali: The Value System of the Steady State.”

       

       
      17. For work on the relationship between temporality, difference, and governmentality, see Deleuze, Cinema 2, as well as Lim, Koselleck, and Stoler.

       

       
      18. Mead and Bateson are also reconfiguring anthropology at the time in relation to cybernetics. Their practices are not those of colonial, but rather of new, post-colonial orders. It is useful to consider Johannes Fabian’s argument that Mead is the first to signal the end of the ethnographic past, and an ethnography of the future. Mead herself argues that “Few anthropologists write for the people they study,” a problem she seeks to rectify. She goes on to elaborate that she is no longer interested in those topics obsessing most anthropologists in the 1920s to 40s, when she came of age as an ethnographer studying “the past, the ‘ethnographic present,’ or the actual present” (The World Ahead 6).
       

      Works Cited

         

       

      • Ash, Mitchell. Gestalt Psychology in German Culture, 1890-1967: Holism and the Quest for Objectivity. Cambridge: Cambridge UP, 1998. Print.
      • Bateson, Gregory. Naven: A Survey of the Problems Suggested by a Composite Picture of the Culture of a New Guinea Tribe Drawn From Three Points of View. 2nd ed. Stanford: Stanford UP, 1958. Print.
      • —. Steps to an Ecology of Mind: Collected Essays in Anthropology, Psychiatry, Evolution, and Epistemology. Chicago: U of Chicago P, 2000. Print.
      • —. “Bali: The Value System of the Steady State.” Steps to an Ecology of the Mind. 107-127. Print.
      • —. Letter to Norbert Wiener, September 22, 1952. Norbert Wiener Papers, MC 22, box 10, Folder 155. Massachusetts Institute of Technology, Institute Archives and Special Collections, Cambridge, Massachusetts. Print.
      • —. and Margaret Mead. Balinese Character: A Photographic Analysis. New York: New York Academy of Sciences, 1942. Print.
      • —. and Jurgen Ruesch. Communication: The Social Matrix of Psychiatry. New Brunswick: Transaction Publishers, 2008. Print.
      • Bergson, Henri. Matter and Memory. Trans. Nancy Margaret Paul and W. Scott Palmer. New York: Zone Books, 1991. Print.
      • Butler, Alison. “‘Motor-Driven Metaphysics:’ Movement, Time and Action in the Films of Maya Deren.” Screen 48.1 (2007): 1-23. Web. 1 Aug. 2010.
      • Crary, Jonathan. Suspensions of Perception: Attention, Spectacle, and Modern Culture. Cambridge: MIT Press, 2001. Print.
      • Daston, Lorraine and Peter Galison. Objectivity.. New York: Zone Books, 2007. Print.
      • Deleuze, Gilles. Cinema 1: The Movement-Image. Trans. Hugh Tomlinson and Barbara Habberjam. Minneapolis: U of Minnesota P, 2001. Print.
      • —. Cinema 2: The Time-Image. Trans. Hugh Tomlinson and Robert Galeta. Minneapolis: U of Minneapolis P, 2003. Print.
      • Deren, Maya. “From the Notebook of Maya Deren, 1947.” October Volume 14 (1980): 21-46. Web. 1 Aug. 2010.
      • —. “An Anagram of Ideas on Art, Form, and Film.” 1946. Rpt. in Maya Deren and the American Avant-Garde. Ed. Bill Nichols. Berkeley: U of California P, 2001. 267-322. Print.
      • —. Handwritten Notes from Lectures-Gestalt Psychology with Kurt Koffka, September 1938, Maya Deren Papers, box 7, Folder 5. Boston University, Howard Gottlieb Archive, Special Collections, Boston. Print.
      • —. “Climate of Communication.” 1946-47. Deren Collection, box 4, Folder 1. Boston University Howard Gottlieb Archive, Special Collections. Boston. Print.
      • —. “Choreography for the Camera.” Dance Magazine October (1945). In The Legend of Maya Deren. 265-67. Print.
      • —. The Legend of Maya Deren: A Documentary Biography and Collected Works. Volume I, Part II, Chambers (1942-47).. Ed. Vèvè Clark, Millicent Hodson, and Catrina Neiman. New York: Anthology Film Archives, 1988. Print.
      • —. “Ritual in Transfigured Time.” Essential Deren: Collected Writings on Film. Ed. Bruce McPherson. New York: Documentext, 2005. 225-228. Print.
      • —. “Interview with Talley Beatty, February 22, 1977” in The Legend of Maya Deren. 280-281. Print.
      • —. “Cinema as an Art Form.” Essential Deren: Collected Writings on Film. Ed. Bruce McPherson. New York: Documentext, 2005. 19-34. Print.
      • —. “Pre-production Notes, N.D., undated, typed.” The Legend of Maya Deren. 453. Print.
      • Doane, Mary Ann. The Emergence of Cinematic Time: Modernity, Contingency, the Archive. Cambridge: Harvard UP, 2002. Print.
      • Fabian, Johannes. Time and the Other: How Anthropology Makes Its Object. New York: Columbia UP, 2002. Print.
      • Goodwin, James C. Annotated Readings in the History of Modern Psychology. New York: Wiley, 2010. Print.
      • Green, Chris. “Introduction to: ‘Perception: An Introduction to the Gestalt-Theorie‘ by Kurt Koffka (1922).” Classics in the History of Psychology. Web. 15th Jan. 2008.
      • Hacking, Ian. The Taming of Chance. Cambridge: Cambridge UP, 1990. Print.
      • Harrington, Anne. Reenchanted Science: Holism in German Culture from Wilhelm II to Hitler. Princeton: Princeton UP, 1996. Print.
      • Haslem, Wendy. “Maya Deren: The High Priestess of Experimental Cinema” Senses of Cinema. November 2002. Web. 22 Mar. 2006.
      • Holl, Ute. “Moving the Dancer’s Soul.” Maya Deren and the American Avant-Garde. Ed. Bill Nichols. Berkeley: U of California P, 2001. 151-206. Print.
      • Koffka, Kurt. Principles of Gestalt Psychology. London: Harcourt, 1936. Print.
      • Köhler, Wolfgang. Gestalt Psychology: An Introduction to New Concepts in Modern Psychology, New York: Liveright Publishing Corporation, 1947. Print.
      • Koselleck, Reinhart. Futures Past: On the Semantics of Historical Time. Trans. Keith Tribe. New York: Columbia UP, 2004. Print.
      • Lim, Bliss Cua. Translating Time: Cinema, The Fantastic, and Temporal Critique. Durham: Duke UP, 2009. Print.
      • Lippold, Richard. “Dance and Film: A Review in the Form of A Reflection.” Dance Observer. 13.5 (1946). Rpt. in The Legend of Maya Deren: Volume I, Part II.. Print.
      • Mandler, George. A History of Modern Experimental Psychology: From James and Wundt to Cognitive Science. Cambridge: MIT Press, 2007. Print.
      • Morgenstern, Oskar and John von Neumann. Theory of Games and Economic Behavior. Princeton: Princeton UP, 1944. Print.
      • Mead, Margaret. The World Ahead: An Anthropologist Anticipates the Future. Ed. Robert B. Textor. New York: Berghahn Books, 2005. Print.
      • Meshes of the Afternoon. Dir. Maya Deren, Alexander Hammid. 1943. Maya Deren:Experimental Films. Mystic Fire Video, 2002. DVD.
      • Mirowski, Philip. Machine Dreams: Economics Becomes a Cyborg Science. Cambridge: U of Cambridge P, 2002. Print.
      • Neiman, Catrina, Art and Anthropology at the Crossroads. Spec. Issue of October Vol. 14 (1980): 3-15. Web. 1 Aug. 2010.
      • Ritual in Transfigured Time. Dir. Maya Deren. Perf. Rita Christiani, Maya Deren, Frank Westerbrook. 1946. Maya Deren: Experimental Films. Mystic Fire Video, 2002. DVD.
      • Schatz, Thomas. Boom and Bust: American Cinema in the 1940s. Vol. 6 History of the American Cinema Series. Ed. Charles Harpole. Berkeley: U of California P, 1999. Print.
      • A Study in Choreography for the Camera. Dir. Maya Deren. Maya Deren: Experimental Films. Mystic Fire Video, 2002. DVD.
      • Stoler, Ann Laura. Along The Archival Grain: Epistemic Anxieties And Colonial Commonsense. Princeton: Princeton UP, 2009. Print.